Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Tue, 30 Apr 2024 20:45:51 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ 32 32 The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fire-starters/ Fri, 09 Feb 2024 16:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=600717
A four-panel lineup of the best fire starters
Amanda Reed

Fire starters can help light your fireplace, campfires, and camp stoves, even in bad weather.

The post The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A four-panel lineup of the best fire starters
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall An orange and black fire starter on a plain background. Gerber Gear Fire Starter
SEE IT

With added features that can keep you prepared while you’re in the wilderness.

Best for fire pits A package of GreenSpark all-natural fire starter on a plain background. GreenSpark Firestarters
SEE IT

If you’re not outdoors, use this fire starter as tinder.

Best budget A green and blue ust Sparkie fire starter on a plain background ust Sparkie Fire Starter
SEE IT

A cheap innovation that’s also nifty.

You can try holding a lighter to a log and waiting, but a fire starter will make your life much simpler. To build a blaze, you need to start small, then add your larger pieces of wood until you have a large fire. The problem is getting that first spark isn’t easy if you’re working in windy or wet conditions. Matches and lighters are no match for these particular elements. Fire starters, however, make fire building infinitely less frustrating. The best fire starters are portable, easy to use, and handy in all sorts of environmental conditions.

How we chose the best fire starters

A fire starter can refer to the strikers and rods used to start a fire or the small, flammable objects you can light to encourage your kindling and such to catch flames. We decided to focus on the strikers and rods, with one exception. Our focus is based on “what came first: chicken or the egg” logic: Without a striker and rod fire starter, you cannot use the “small, flammable object” fire starter, especially out in the woods. Additionally, anything can be a “small, flammable object” fire starter technically, from pork rinds and Doritos to a cotton ball. To find the best firestarters, we looked at reviews, recommendations, and conducted heavy research to separate the ones that sparked our interest from those that were a little dim. I’m also a proud former Girl Scout and pride myself on my fire-starting and building abilities.

The best fire starters: Reviews & Recommendations

A fire starter is a handy camping gadget that can do double duty when you’re at home. And, if you have a backyard fire pit, you don’t have to worry about finding a lighter that you can use safely. One of our picks should get your fire going.

Best overall: Gerber Gear Fire Starter

Gerber Gear

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ferro rod, steel striker, nylon cord, plastic
  • Waterproof?: Yes, IPX4
  • Lifespan: N/A
  • Size: 8 x 6 x 1 inches
  • Price: $25

Pros

  • Bonus features
  • Portable
  • Easy-to-use

Cons

  • Lanyard could be better

Maximize your backpack storage with this fire starter—the cargo shorts of camping gear. The ferro rod is compact, and an included handle gives you a great grip. Plus, the material itself is easy to work with. The included steel striker has directions right on it, so you’ll never forget how to use it. Bonus features like built-in storage for tinder and a 100-decibel emergency whistle make this choice stand out from the pack. If you’re thinking, “What about using the lanyard as tinder in case?” you’ll be out of luck. It’s not recommended for that, although some fire starters do have that feature. All in all, it’s a well-designed fire starter we feel comfortable stowing in our glovebox or side pocket. You can also buy it directly from Gerber.

Best ferro rod: Wolf and Grizzly Fire Set

Wolf and Grizzly

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ferrocerium, steel, nylon, jute
  • Waterproof?: N/A
  • Lifespan: Around 20,000
  • Size: 3.94 x 0.43 x 0.45 inches
  • Price: $23

Pros

  • Paracord can be used as tinder
  • Packable
  • Steel striker can be sharpened for continued use

Cons

  • Some reviews say it’s best for experienced outdoorspeople

If you’re looking for a long-lasting fire starter, consider this simple Wolf and Grizzly fire set your dream come true. Its curved steel striker can nestle against the ferro rod to create a compact profile, meaning you don’t have to worry about bulk. If you’re out of tinder, you can use a knife or the striker to access the jute inside the parachord lanyard. Its 20,000-strike lifespan means you’ll pass it on before reaching its expiration date. And, you can resharpen its steel striker like you do with a multitool, meaning it’s less likely to need replacing. Some reviews say it’s best for outdoorsy folk, but others disagree, blaming it on user error. Regardless, you’ll be glad to have this ferro rod with you while camping.

Best for fire pits: GreenSpark Firestarters

GreenSpark

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Wood wool, palm wax
  • Waterproof?: Yes
  • Lifespan: 8-10 minutes in fire
  • Size: 1-inch
  • Price: $22

Pros

  • Compact
  • Can use in multiple settings
  • Eco-friendly materials

Cons

  • Must be dry to light

Here is that exception we were talking about earlier. Based on what you’re lighting, it might feel more comfortable just to use a match or lighter to ignite a fireplace. All those sparks flying create a safety hazard; you don’t want to set off your smoke alarm when you don’t have to. Instead, you’ll need a fire starter that acts as tinder to help your larger pieces of wood catch fire. This eco-friendly fire starter is made from salvaged pine trees and technically never expire. They’re waterproof, but you must ensure they’re dry before lighting. If they do come into contact with water, they take around 10 minutes to be usable. You can also use them in wood stoves, grills, fire pits, and more.

Best for camping: Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL

Exotac

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: anodized aluminum body, ferrocerium rod, tungsten carbide striker
  • Waterproof?: Works when wet
  • Lifespan: 3,000 strikes
  • Size: ‎3.65 x 0.43 x 0.43 inches
  • Price: $32

Pros

  • Flammable lanyard
  • Small enough to put on keychain
  • Very compact

Cons

  • Might be too small for large hands

Packing light is no problem with the Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL. This extra small fire starter creates a shower of sparks that supercedes its size. Its included striker screws on, meaning you won’t have to take apart your meticulously packed backpack looking for a single part. It’s also .5 ounces, meaning you can use that extra weight to bring a thicker sleeping pad. The ferro rod is replaceable, and you can use the included lanyard as tinder in emergencies. You can even use it when wet. Whether in your pack or emergency kit, the Exotac nanoSTRIKER XL will perform in all kinds of conditions. If you have large hands, it may be a little cumbersome to use.

Expert pick: überleben Zünden Fire Starter

überleben

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Natural wood, ferrocenium
  • Waterproof?: Works when wet
  • Lifespan: 12,000-15,000 depending on length
  • Size: ‎4.8 x 0.66 x 0.95 inches or ‎7.24 x 2.32 x 1.06 inches
  • Price: $16

Pros

  • Comes in different lengths
  • Reliable and durable
  • Works when wet

Cons

  • Reviews note rod separating from the handle

“Last year, a Canadian friend recommended the überleben range of ferro rods and firestarters to me, and they have been worth every penny,” says Richard Prideaux, lead instructor for Original Outdoors, a UK-based outdoor skills training provider. “I carry an überleben Zünden with me on courses and trips where lighting a fire with natural materials is either likely or maybe necessary. They produce a good shower of sparks and have a good length/diameter ratio, and it hasn’t let me down yet.”

This ferro rod also comes in different thicknesses, which helps if you’re green behind the ears when it comes to using a ferro rod and striker.

“A beginner should look for reliability and ease of use in a fire starter,” he says. “If you are going to go somewhere that lighting a fire will become a safety issue then you should be focusing on equipment that will give you that fire reliably and repeatedly in a short space of time. A wider ferro rod will often give a better shower of sparks and be easier to use, but there will be a weight penalty, and some users may find it awkward to hold. A dedicated striker attachment is good to have as it means you can use the ferro rod without requiring additional equipment.”

Best budget: ust Sparkie Fire Starter

ust

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Flint, plastic
  • Waterproof?: Works in wet conditions
  • Lifespan: More than 100 strikes
  • Size: 6 x 5 x 2 inches
  • Price: $11

Pros

  • Works in adverse weather conditions
  • Can use one-handed
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Not the most long-lasting fire starter

Lighting a fire doesn’t get much easier or cheaper than this, folks. You can operate the ust Sparkie with one hand. Simply press a button to expose the flint bar and press down toward your tinder. Bam! That’s it! All for around $10! However, it only lasts for around 100 sparks. If you have some extra change to spend and love the Sparkie concept—or you’re a more experienced camper—consider upgrading to the BlastMatch, its beefier older sibling, which lasts for 4,000 strikes. This is a flint-based fire starter, so you also won’t get as much longevity compared to a ferro rod.

What to consider when buying the best fire starters

Fire starters are not a one-size-fits-all object. They have a common goal of helping tinder catch aflame, but you might be better off with one over another based on features. Some are better for casual, indoor use, while others are more ruff and rugged. Here’s how to separate the duds and phonies from the fabulous fire starters:

Types of fire starters

There are three main types of fire starters: Flint and steel, Ferrocerium rods (ferro rods), and magnesium bars.

The flint and steel combo is the tryest and true-est of all the fire starter options. The “flint” can be any hard, sedimentary rock like quartz and chert. The steel striker is heat-treated. You can even use any metal that has a high amount of carbon in it, like old rake teeth and garage door springs. When the striker comes in contact with the flint, tiny particles released from the metal oxidize and ignite when exposed to oxygen. Sparks from flint and steel can be dull, but this fire starter is the easiest to find. You’ll get the best results if you use it with char cloth.

Ferrocerium rods, or ferro rods, produce incredibly hot sparks and make quick work of lighting dry tinder. If you don’t have a striker on hand, you can use the back of a knife. Ferro rods are less uniform compared to flint and steel. They’re made with different metals—particularly cerium, lanthanum, and iron—and the percent of each affects its performance. A softer ferro rod doesn’t have a long shelf life, but it’s easier to use and produces more sparks. When using a ferro rod, any dry, highly flammable material, like birch bark, cotton, and tiny sticks, makes for excellent tinder.

Magnesium bars come with a ferro rod attached to the top. You shave off parts of the magnesium bar onto the nearby tinder pile, which will ignite when it comes into contact with a spark from the ferro rod. It takes a large amount of magnesium to create a flame that lasts long enough to light nearby tinder, so we recommend just sticking with a ferro rod. Outdoor skills trainer Richard Prideaux says he uses a ferro rod over flint and steel in “99.5 percent of situations.”

“A ferro rod is easier to use, lighter, smaller, and produces a more consistent shower of sparks at a higher temperature,” he says.

Activity

If you’re car camping, van lifing, or just hanging out in a camper or RV, you can get away with a heavier fire starter, since pack weight isn’t a concern. However, backpackers will want to choose something light, like the Exacto nanoStriker. Extra ounces add up to pounds, which is more weight to bear on the hike. This is important, especially if your hike is over days, not hours.

If you’re looking for something to help light your fireplace or grill, the world is your smoked oyster. Like the car camping/RV/camper camp, you can simply bring out what you want to use. You can also use a utility lighter—something those camping, unfortunately, don’t have the luxury to bring along.

Ease of use

As Prideaux mentioned in our expert pick, user-friendliness is important. Some fire starters, like the ust Sparkie, only need a downward push to create sparks. Flint and steel and ferro rods require a bit more finesse, although the former is more difficult to use than the latter. If you’re a beginner, consider a wide ferro rod, the Sparkie, or even an electric lighter. If you’re well-versed in the language of the outdoors, you can forage for your own flint … or you can just buy one that’s more technical (e.g., a compact fire starter built for backpacking).

FAQs

Q: How does a fire starter work?

It depends on the fire starter you’re using. Those like the ust Sparkie just need some force to produce sparks. The ones you will come across use a steel striker and ferrocerium, magnesium, or flint. Good old-fashioned friction helps create a shower of sparks that will hopefully land on your tinder (not that one) to start a fire.

Q: Do fire starters expire?

Fire starters are long-lasting. Instead of “expiring,” you’re generally faced with a finite number of strikes before the rod loses its effectiveness. That number is usually in the thousands. Unless you’re literally living outdoors, a fire starter is often a one-time purchase.

Q: How do I use a fire starter?

Using a fire starter can take some practice, but it’s easy to get the hang of it. Depending on the rod material, you first have to scrape off the protective layer that comes with a brand-new rod. If you’re using a magnesium rod, you’ll want to scrap off some magnesium, then add some tinder on top. Then, take a steel striker or a knife and position it close to your tinder pile. Add some pressure, quickly scrape the steel across the rod, and watch the sparks fly.

Final thoughts on the best fire starters

A fire starter isn’t a one-trick pony. You can use it on camping trips, in your own backyard, and even in your own home if your butane lighter is nowhere to be found. Plus, they can be a perfect addition to your emergency kit. They’re built to last and are generally inexpensive. Don’t wait until the moment you need one to click “add to cart.”

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fire starters for camping and fire pits, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smokeless-fire-pits/ Thu, 10 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561939
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A smokeless fire pit can provide a safe, simple way to get a blaze going for your next backyard get together or camping trip.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
SEE IT

It’s simple to light, easy to store, and eradicates smoke.

Best large Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going at night surrounded by torches and chairs Tiki Fire Pit
SEE IT

Gather up to 10 people around this ample fire pit for superior s’mores.

Best for patios Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside BioLite Fire Pit+
SEE IT

The mesh sides offer a unique view of the flames inside and nice radiant heat.

Smokeless fire pits solve an age-old problem: No matter where you sit around the camp fire, smoke always seems to blow in your face. The solution? Get rid of the smoke completely. These metal containers are built to control the flame and make it easy to start and finish. Not only do they make firing up easier, but they can also add a touch of class or a bit of flash to your patio, camp area, or backyard. A solid fire pit can turn a boring patio or backyard into a great place to spend an evening. Consider this your burn book, a list of the best smokeless fire pits.

How we chose the best smokeless fire pits

We started with a list of more than 30 models from hands-on testing and critical consensus before narrowing our options to the best we could find. The four main factors we considered were ease and effectiveness of use, aesthetics, value for price, and unique features. Our list represents our top choices, a couple for those who aren’t looking to spend as much money, and some situation-specific choices. During our tests, we burned a variety of different woods and burned under various weather conditions.

After all, everyone’s needs when it comes to a fire pit are different, and it’s important to consider how and where you plan to use your fire pit before you buy it. The “best” is not always the “best for you.” Our list should help you avoid getting more fire pit than you really need, as every one of our picks is recommended.

The best smokeless fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Smokeless fire pits contain and elevate fires. Their design allows air to flow in such a way that it minimizes (and in some cases fully eliminates) smoke. There are different looks and focuses among our choices, so line up your desires as best you can with our recommendations.

Best overall: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.25 lbs
  • Height: 18.5 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $249

Pros

  • Excellent single-piece construction
  • Well-controlled fires with efficient burn
  • Light for the size and quality
  • Attractive, simple silhouette
  • Excellent smoke reduction

Cons

  • The aesthetic doesn’t necessarily fit with some more casual backyards
  • Outside gets very hot


It’s no secret that we think the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 is excellent. In fact, we think it’s the best choice on the market for a smokeless fire pit. The first point for the Solo Stove Bonfire is performance. It heats up quickly and burns efficiently with a stunningly small amount of smoke. The aesthetic is particular: It’s not quite industrial, but it does have a shiny, smooth finish that doesn’t scream “tiki bar” or “family gathering” like some other models, and it’s not uniquely edgy in its stylings. It may not help bring certain patio looks together, but it also doesn’t stand out or bring attention to itself. The look is very “elevated comfort food outdoor cafe.”

Among the mid-sized models we recommend, the Bonfire 2.0 is one of the more portable (though look further down for the real portable star). Twenty-eight pounds is quite light for this category, and while the Bonfire 2.0 doesn’t collapse or disassemble to make it easier to transport, you can use a cloth carrying card to make things a bit easier for a beach trip or some light camping. Wood pellets are best in the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0—that’s true of most circular-basin fire pits—but small firewood also works extremely well. The interior volume of the pit isn’t particularly large, but the burn is so efficient and controlled that the fires tend to outperform the amount of fuel.

The Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 comes at a semi-premium price, but its durable construction guarantees its long-term value. Unless your fire pit needs are particularly portable or particularly large, this is the one to get, the best overall smokeless fire pit.

Best for patios: BioLite Fire Pit+

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 19.8 lbs
  • Height: 15.8 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece self-assembly with foldable legs
  • Price: $249

Pros

  • Bluetooth-enabled, battery-powered fan keeps fires going
  • Cool, see-through design
  • Foldable legs make storage easier
  • Battery is USB rechargeable
  • App allows control of the flame size
  • Sized for commercial firewood logs

Cons

  • Foldable legs aren’t particularly durable
  • The aesthetic is specific enough to not be everyone’s cup of tea
  • Rectangular design requires a more specific space arrangement than circular models

The BioLite Fire Pit+ is one of the most unique-looking fire pits on the market, with some interesting tech features. It’s an excellent overall fire pit and a contender for best overall, but it landed in best-for-patio because of its big, open flame, cool look, and innovations. The smoke elimination is not quite as good as a few other models, but it makes up for that.

Let’s look at those innovations first. One of its chief innovations is mesh side panels that allow more heat to radiate out and make the fire easy to observe. This does require a bit more work maintaining the Fire Pit+, but it is worth it for the cool view and unique shadows that are interesting and calming when sitting around the fire pit. Another great feature that really contributes to the comfort at a backyard gathering, and is absent on any other model, is the Bluetooth-enabled, app-controlled, battery-powered fan which controls airflow and can make the flames in the Fire Pit+ larger or small at will. This is simply something that isn’t seen elsewhere and really sets the Fire Pit+ apart. The battery pack, which is removable and charged via USB, gives the Fire Pit+ a retro-futuristic look, but it can be easily hidden on the least-seen side in a patio set-up if needed.

The biggest mark against the Fire Pit+ is the double-edged sword that is its legs. The foldable legs make moving and storing the Fire Pit+ much easier than some other models, but they’re also a bit less strong and stable than the circular or thicker-legged bases that competitors have. This means you can’t overfill the Fire Pit+ with firewood (it can fit standard commercial logs). That’s good advice in general with a fire pit, but particularly vital advice for the Fire Pit+.

The Fire Pit+ offers a unique look, unique control, and an overall very good performance, making it the best patio smokeless fire pit among our recommended ones, and a great complement to patio heaters.

Best large: Tiki Fire Pit

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45 lbs
  • Height: 18.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $295

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Nice, classic design
  • Lots of space for fuel inside
  • Perfect size for a larger patio

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Works better with wood pellets which can be more expensive than firewood
  • Not intended to be portable; you can’t easily take it to the beach or camping

Most fire pits on this list are great for four-to-six people. The Tiki Fire Pit is much larger and is a better choice if your patio seating is couches and lounges for 8-10 rather than chairs. Additionally, the Tiki Fire Pit has a classic Tiki design, which may be just what you’re looking for in your backyard paradise.

The benefits of the Tiki Fire Pit’s size are the amount of fuel it can use and the length of burn your fire is going to get. Stronger, longer fires mean less time spent tending the flames during your evening get-togethers. Smoke elimination is very good thanks to the airflow design, and the small, strong legs lift the pit enough for performance while not detracting from the pleasing, rounded throwback style. 

The drawback is this fire pit is really not meant for moving around. Forty-five pounds is a lot, and it is large, meaning you will most likely need two people and plenty of space in a truck or van if you want to take this party starter to the beach. Honestly, the Tiki Fire Pit is much better served finding a permanent home on your patio. However, with that heft comes a lot of durability, so the included weather-resistant cover is probably enough to protect your fire pit outside of an extreme situation. 

If your lifestyle means bigger is better, the Tike Fire Pit is probably the better choice among our recommendations, making it the best large smokeless fire pit as far as we’re concerned.

Best stainless steel: Breeo X Series 24

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 62 lbs
  • Height: 14.75 in
  • Material: Corten steel (also available in stainless steel)
  • Structure: Single-piece construction
  • Price: $599

Pros

  • Extremely strong and durable
  • Sleek look that blends in well with a lot of decor
  • Excellent fire control and smoke elimination

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Extremely heavy

If construction and materials really matter to you, and you want a fire pit that might become an heirloom to pass down to your children, break out the wallet for the Breeo X Series 24. This beautiful, sturdy, heavy, and durable fire pit is not one to travel; the 62 pounds of metal means it doesn’t want to go to the beach or a campground. However, at home you’re not going to get a longer-lasting, better-put-together fire pit.

The “24” in Breeo X Series 24 refers to the diameter of the fire pit’s interior—a considerable amount of space, larger even than the interior of the Tiki Fire Pit. There are 19-inch and even larger models as well. The legs of the Breeo X Series 24 are built-in and incredibly stable. The interior wall sucks up air and creates a wonderful, even secondary flame that shoots out the small holes just below the top of the rim. Visually, the Breeo X Series makes one of the nicest flames on the market.

The price tag is almost as heavy as the pit itself. The Breeo X Series is a premium product at a premium price—two or three times more than a lot of our other recommended models. If you have the means to splurge and believe in buying a product that will last a lifetime, the value is there, even if the initial cost is high.

Big, bold, and built to last, the Breeo X Series 24 is a beast and a beauty in one. For that reason, it’s the best corten steel smokeless fire pit we can recommend.

Best portable: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 15 in
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: single-piece construction
  • Price: $199

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Good flame control and smoke elimination
  • Includes a carrying case
  • Sleek and strong design

Cons

  • Portable but not collapsible; still need a vehicle to transport longer distances
  • Grilling requires additional accessories for best results

If you want a multi-purpose fire pit, portability is really important. We know it ourselves, so we have a guide if this category is the one you are exclusively considering. For those looking at a wider range of options, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is the little sibling of our best overall smokeless fire pit and the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market. Smaller, lighter, and more portable—but no less efficient—the Ranger is a much easier carry than the Bonfire without sacrificing any of the quality.

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire going inside
Billy Cadden

The Ranger really sings when you add in grilling accessories. The Solo Stove product line’s design gives you a simple, flat top that placing any flat wire grill means producing nice results (though you’ll want to very carefully clean the inside of your fire pit later, as food can create some sticky burnt messes). Some official grilling accessories are available, as well as skewers for s’mores or hot dogs if you look at Solo Stove’s offerings. (However, we recommend a dedicated grill if you’re into cookouts more than casual entertaining.)

For a portable model, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 isn’t particularly light. It’s not meant for trekking but more drive-to-the-national-park-or-beach style portable use. The included carrying case is probably enough for inside storage, but outside storage will need a thicker, more protective case (which is also available to purchase).

If you’re planning to head out with your fire pit a lot, we can heartily recommend the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 as the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market.

Best budget: Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit

Innostage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Height: 18 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction
  • Price: $152

Pros

  • Two-piece design lets it travel smaller
  • Easy to set up
  • Good airflow for smoke elimination
  • Matte black coloration makes it blend in easily

Cons

  • The silhouette is a bit industrial
  • Clean-up is tougher than with some other brands

You’ll need firewood once you’ve purchased your pit, so buying something that leaves you with some cash left over isn’t a bad plan. For those a bit more thrifty, Inno Stage offers a line of fire pits that don’t quite match the higher-cost models for performance or style but more than do the job for a very reasonable cost.

Inno Stage’s design involves two pieces. When assembled, the larger piece sits on the smaller piece, which acts as the ash pan. For travel or storage, the smaller piece is turned upside down and slots into the larger piece’s basin, taking up less space and becoming easier to carry. This is the most convenient feature of the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but it also results in less efficient burn.

In terms of looks, the Inno Stage is not the most beautiful fire pit. It has a bit of a utilitarian and industrial look, which doesn’t make it a star of the backyard. There’s a trio of options for the finish: chrome, matte black, and faux terracotta. The last is our suggestion; it softens the look a bit. There are also multiple sizes (four in all) depending on your needs.

If you need a highly functional, well-priced fire pit or just want to dip your toe into the world of fire pits without committing too many funds, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit is your best entry point. It’s inexpensive enough to upgrade later without feeling regretful and functional enough to use it for a long time, squeezing every ounce of use out of what we consider the best-value smokeless fire pit.

Best under $100: Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge

Blue Sky

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.49 in
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction
  • Price: $79

Pros

  • One piece tucks into the other for portability
  • Assembly is quick
  • Low price

Cons

  • Not quite as efficient burn as other models
  • Non-stainless steel means it’s a bit less durable and a bit harder to clean

Sometimes, price is the most important factor. If you want to get into the smokeless fire pit game for less than $100, choose the Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge. This two-piece smokeless fire pit has a similar tuck-in-and-carry construction as our best value option, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but an even lower base price. 

The design of the Ridge doesn’t allow air to flow as efficiently as higher-end models, meaning the smoke elimination is less impressive. However, it’s still an incredible improvement over typical fire pits. The matte black finish to the Ridge means it’s unobtrusive, but it’s also not a particularly attractive fire pit. Weight and size make the Ridge easy to move, and you’ll probably want to store it inside and bring it out to use it rather than leave it as patio furniture.

What to consider when choosing a smokeless fire pit

Smokeless fire pits offer a focal point for your patio set-up, allowing you to enjoy cooler days and nights in a comfortable and stylish way. To that end, picking the perfect smokeless fire pit means considering smoke elimination effectiveness, style, size, and durability.

Smoke elimination

When it comes to smoke elimination, all of these models will do an excellent job of minimizing the amount of smoke produced but the fire. This is due to airflow design, which allows for more complete combustion. Smokeless fire pits will have secondary fires popping out of the interior wall of the fire pit’s basin, using up more oxygen and producing very little smoke. The best models do this most efficiently, but even our recommended value and budget models do a great job.

Most of the design elements of smokeless fire pits are utilitarian due to wanting to offer the best possible airflow efficiency. The nicer models are sleep and round, while the budget models tend to have more edges or corners. A few of our models took their look more into consideration: the Tiki Fire Pit and the BioLite Fire Pit+ chief among them. Make sure you like the look of your fire pit if you’re planning to use it when entertaining guests. No matter how great the fire is, if the pit feels out of place and clashes with the motif you’re trying to achieve, you’ll be disappointed with your purchase.

Size

Most of the smokeless fire pits we recommend are medium-sized, built to be used with a smaller circle of people, maybe no more than 6. Portable models are best with 2 or 4. Larger models exist that can accommodate 8-10 people around them, but you’re looking at completely non-portable models at that point. In terms of warmth radius, most of these fire pits will be nice and toasty within 8 feet, but some of the smaller models will need a tighter formation.

Materials and durability

Lastly, durability is important as you want to be using your smokeless fire pit long term. Stainless steel is the material of choice. It holds up well to use and elements and is the easiest to clean. Some steel composite low-end models exist but should probably be avoided.

Fuel

While this list is entirely dedicated to wood-burning fire pits, you can also get propane-powered models that are much easier to get started. Check out our list of the best propane fire pits for options.

FAQs

Q: Is a smokeless fire pit really smokeless?

Not exactly. Smokeless fire pits will still produce some smoke. However, the amount of smoke is drastically reduced because the design allows airflow on nearly all sides, causing much more complete combustion. Even the smoke that does make its way out of the fire still won’t find its way into your face.

Q: Do smokeless fire pits give off good heat?

Absolutely. A smokeless fire pit can easily give off 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), which is extremely warm within 8 feet and comfortable from 8 feet to 10 feet.

Q: How much does a smokeless fire pit cost?

The ones we recommend can be had for as cheap as $75 on sale, and you could spend up to $1000 on the luxury models when you add in accessories.

Q: What type of fire pit is best?

It really depends on the space you’re most likely to have your fire. If you will almost only use your fire pit on your patio, choose a fire pit that fits the aesthetic of your backyard area. If you want to take your fire pit to the beach, choose a lighter standard-sized fire pit with a carrying case or a very light “portable” model. These will make smaller fires, but your back will thank you. No matter what, it’s best to go smokeless.

Q: Can you put water in a smokeless fire pit?

Do not do this. The holes in a smokeless fire pit can get clogged with wet fire debris, and dirty water will spill out onto whatever surface your fire pit is over. Instead, douse the flames with sand, wait long enough for everything to cool off, dump it, then clean it carefully by hand if necessary.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

Don’t do this either. First, it’s very unlikely that a fire pit fire will last all night, anyway. It’s simply not big enough, even though it’s protected from wind and moisture within the pit. Second, never leave a fire unattended, even in a relatively safe environment like a fire pit. It only takes one stray ember to cause a tragedy.

Q: Can you burn wood in a smokeless fire pit?

Yes! Most smokeless fire pits are expressly designed for wood. Many work better with wood pellets, but small scavenged firewood or commercial firewood cut into smaller pieces also works well.

Q: What makes a smokeless fire pit smokeless?

The airflow design allows more complete combustion of your fuel (usually wood or wood pellets), and more complete combustion produces less smoke, sometimes so little as to appear “smokeless.”

Final thoughts on the best smokeless fire pits

If you’re looking for a fire pit, smokeless is the way to go. There’s enough variety in the marketplace, with quality throughout, that choosing a model based on your particular needs is more involved than simply choosing the “best” model. From portable to large-scale patio-only models, our recommendations should make sure that your nights are toasty, your shadows flicker, and you enjoy fire whenever you wish.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2024 tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/aiper-pool-vacuums-amazon-deal/ Tue, 30 Apr 2024 16:01:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=612929
Aiper Seagull Pro Pool Vacuum next to a pool
Billy Cadden

Let a robot do the taxing work of cleaning your pool for your with this AIPER deal at Amazon.

The post Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Aiper Seagull Pro Pool Vacuum next to a pool
Billy Cadden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Memorial Day is officially less than a month away, meaning it’s finally time to turn your current pool from “green, leafy, dead animal stew” to “clear, chloric, and classy.” I know you don’t want to interact with the sludge shellacking the entirety of your pool. Thanks to this Aiper pool vacuum deal at Amazon, you don’t have to.

Aiper Seagull Pro Cordless Robotic Pool Vacuum $598.75 (Was $899.99)

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

This rechargeable and cordless pool vacuum has four motors and a gyroscope. The internal gyroscope provides smart navigation that allows the Seagull Pro to map the floor and walls of a pool. The powerful motors offer 130GPM (gallons per minute) of suction while bottom brushes sweep out leaves, dirt, and other debris. It cleans up to 3,200 square feet in the three hours of battery power it gets from each charge. All that together equals a robot that makes cleaning your pool a hands-off experience.

If you’re looking for a cheaper robotic pool cleaner, our budget pick, the Aiper Seagull SE, is 20 percent off. Also, you can get an additional $40 coupon with one easy click. Combined, you save almost $100 on an already price-friendly pool vacuum.

Here are more cool pool deals, just in time for summer:

The post Start your Memorial Day prep with up to 33% off Aiper pool vacuums at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor misting fans for staying cool in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-misting-fans/ Wed, 05 May 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=362369
The best outdoor misting fans will help keep you cool.

Escape your air-conditioned cave and enjoy the outdoors, even in peak heat, with these cooling devices.

The post The best outdoor misting fans for staying cool in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor misting fans will help keep you cool.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best oscillating Black outdoor misting fan with button control NewAir AF-600 Outdoor Misting Fan
SEE IT

This burly fan turns to throw cool air and mist in a wide pattern. It’s great for larger groups or covering more area.

Best overall Geek Aire makes the best outdoor misting fan overall. Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan
SEE IT

This powerful outdoor misting fan can work both on your back porch and easily travel to a campsite or jobsite.

Best battery-operated Yellow and black battery powered outdoor misting fan RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit
SEE IT

No plug or electricity? No problem. This battery-operated portable mister has an adjustable fan, misting control, and a quiet pump for a cool that can go with you anywhere.

You can’t air condition the outdoors, but an outdoor misting fan provides the next best thing. These devices push cool air carrying clean mist across large spaces in order to keep everyone chill. Whether you prefer a wall-mounted option or a portable pick, here are the best ourdoor misting fans on the market.

How we chose the best outdoor misting fans 

A standard fan can create a nice breeze, but it can’t match the cooling power that comes from a misting fan. For this list, we’ve relied on a combination of personal experience, consumer feedback, editorial reviews, expert opinions, and spec comparisons. The list started with more than two dozen options, some of which are still great, but didn’t quite make the list. We prioritized durability, versatility, and overall effectiveness when it came to make our decisions.

The best outdoor misting fans: Reviews & Recommendations

When it comes to cooling off, not everyone can afford an above-ground pool (and they’re not very portable, anyway). Luckily, there’s an outdoor misting fan for every occasion. Depending on your budget and needs, options like a budget-friendly misting fan conversion kit or a cordless misting fan are perfect for a camping trip. For more consistent use, misting fans that use a garden hose and electrical cord are the play. And for high-end outdoor entertainment areas that look like a Caribbean all-inclusive, you can have professionally installed outdoor oscillating fans, just like restaurants use. 

Best overall: Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan

Geek Aire

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.5 inches D x 19.3 inches W x 29.5 inches H 
  • Weight: 23.4 pounds
  • Power: One lithium-ion battery
  • Water supply: Tank
  • Price: $299

Pros

  • Self-contained unit with tank
  • Powerful
  • Portable

Cons

  • Some users say the battery doesn’t work well

Looking for an all-around cooling solution that you can use on the back porch and take camping? Consider the Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan. This water mister provides an impressive 1500CFM (cubic feet of airflow per minute). Plus, you can rotate the fan up to 74 degrees for maximum cooling. It’s also equipped with two nozzles and a self-contained water tank that can spray mist up to 11.5 feet away. 

Powered by a detachable lithium-ion battery, this fan can provide continuous airflow for 3 to 23 hours, depending on whether you bring backup batteries. The included battery can also charge your other devices. This outside fan also comes with four casters that make it easy to move around your patio or job site but also locks to stay in place. Made of durable metal, this option is also a waterproof outdoor fan and can also be easily disassembled.

Best battery-operated: RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit

RYOBI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 15.75 inches H x 13 inches W x 10.4 inches D
  • Weight: 5 pounds
  • Power: Battery
  • Water supply: Hose or bucket (not included)
  • Price: $129

Pros

  • Provides two separate speeds and misting levels
  • Quiet
  • Backed by a 3-year warranty

Cons

  • Battery and charger sold separately

The RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan can be attached to a standard five-gallon bucket (not included) and powered with a rechargeable 18V battery (included). This portable misting fan offers an adjustable fan head with two separate high/low switches to adjust both the fan speed and the water flow. Use it on a full water bucket, or with a garden hose sitting on a level, hard surface for more flexibility (garden hose adapter included), and enjoy up to three hours of refreshment. The 1.3-amp 18V lithium-ion battery is included along with its six-hour charger.

Best oscillating: NewAir AF-600 Outdoor Misting Fan 

NewAir

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 16.54 inches D x 20.28 inches W x 55.91 inches H
  • Weight: 21.6 pounds
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Garden hose
  • Price: $149

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Three speeds
  • Easily portable 
  • Comes with safety features

Cons

  • Some users say some of the components arrived damaged
  • Power cord is short

With three fan speeds (the highest being 2,800 CFM, or cubic feet per minute), the NewAir AF-600 Outdoor Misting Fan cools 600 feet of outdoor space—that’s a patio that’s around 24 feet by 25 feet. This outdoor cooling fan can be used with or without the misting feature, adding more flexibility; this is especially helpful in outdoor dining areas where mist can cool down the food too. The all-metal design adds season-long durability, and the brown finish blends with outdoor furnishings. The wide-angle oscillation movement and an adjustable fan head allow for more cooling coverage. This large outdoor fan is 56 inches high and includes a garden hose connection. Finally, this outdoor mister features an inline GFCI electrical supply for added safety. 

Best handheld: HandFan Portable Handheld Misting Fan

HandFan

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 1.57 inches D x 4.13 inches W x 8.07 inches H
  • Weight: 6.7 ounces
  • Power: Battery 
  • Water supply: Internal tank
  • Price: $23

Pros

  • Provides three speeds
  • Doubles as a facial steamer
  • Lightweight and ideal for travel

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide lots of cooling power
  • Only covers a small space

When it’s hot outside, but you’ve got things to do and don’t have time to relax on the porch, HandFan’s Portable HandHeld Misting Fan can be handy. At 6.7 ounces, the plastic fan is lightweight but still provides three fan speeds. It’s foldable, so you can easily set it up on your desk or in a fitness class to provide some respite from the heat. The HandFan also comes with a clip so that you can attach it to a stroller or golf cart on a hot day.

This device is also designed with a 17-milliliter (.57-ounce) tank that you can fill with water, turning the device into a mister, personal humidifier, or facial steamer. The HandFan also comes with a USB cable that allows you to recharge it with a USB plug, PC, power bank, or car charger. And its compact size makes it easy to tuck into a carry-on bag when you’re traveling somewhere tropical.

Best wall-mounted: HydroMist 18-inch Shrouded Oscillating Fan

HydroMist

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17 inches D x 20 inches W x 25 inches H
  • Weight: 27.8 pounds
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Hose and pump
  • Price: $449

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Five misting nozzles to adjust flow
  • Made from durable metal

Cons

  • Pump and water supply line must be purchased separately
  • May need professional to assemble

The HydroMist 18-inch Shrouded Oscillating Fan is a smaller version of its 24-inch misting fan preferred by restaurants. With several metal finishes, it complements your backyard oasis. This outdoor hanging fan features three settings to move air: 3500, 4200, and 5100 CFM. You’ll feel it, but your hair shouldn’t move. In addition to airflow settings, this unit includes five misting nozzles creating the finest mist on the market. The mounted fan requires a 3/8-inch high-pressure water supply line and a 1000 psi (pounds per square inch) water pump, both purchased separately. It can be installed by an experienced DIYer, though you might prefer to hire this job out.

Best budget: HOMENOTE Fan Misting Kit for a Cool Patio Breeze

HOMENOTE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.2 inches D x 1.77 inches W x 7 inches H
  • Weight: 8.8 ounces
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Outdoor faucet or garden hose and tube
  • Price: $17

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Works with a variety of fans
  • Good for cooling pets

Cons

  • Temporary solution
  • Misting power determined by water flow

The Homenote Fan Misting Kit attaches to an existing stand fan with zip ties (included) and an outdoor water faucet (not included) to make a misting fan for under $20. The outdoor misting system features a preassembled unit with five removable misting nozzles in a ring that attaches to your existing fan with zip ties. The ring is connected to a black 16-foot-long tube that connects directly to an outdoor water faucet or another garden hose, and the flow of the water is controlled by the faucet’s pressure (with no way to adjust the flow at the fan). This is an excellent option for those needing an outdoor patio fan for occasional use, like during a temporary heat wave, or to cool off pets briefly during the summer.

Things to consider about the best outdoor misting fans

The basic concept of the science of cooling starts with an electric fan and a water supply (most likely a water hose). Outdoor misting fans take tiny water droplets and emit them through nozzles directly into the fan’s airflow. Using the thermal concepts of convection, conduction, and evaporation (remember those from your high school science class), a fan with water mist creates a cooler outdoor environment. 

When water droplets move through the air, each removes heat; this is called convection. The opposite is felt when hot air blows in your convection oven, producing even baking. Of course, people don’t like to bake, evenly or not, while sitting on the patio. Thankfully, the water from your hose is cooler than the temperature of your skin (about 98 degrees ). So when it hits your skin, it feels cooler; this is conduction. Finally, the fine water mist evaporates off your skin, giving you a cooling effect; this is evaporation, which is why it’s such a great way to stay cool without AC.

Portability

Not that long ago, misting fans were only for commercial installations, like restaurants with outdoor dining areas. Now backyard BBQ kings can find a full range of outdoor misting fans on the market to extend the comfortable cookout season. For those needing a portable misting fan, consider one that needs only an outdoor water supply and an electrical outlet. Ideally, portable fans are used on your deck, patio, or in your yard for temporary cooling relief from the heat. If you’re looking for maximum portability, then a neck fan might be the call.

Charging

Sometimes you end up somewhere quite hot away from home, like at a tailgating party. That’s when a battery-operated portable misting fan might fit your needs. It utilizes a rechargeable battery pack, cutting the cords. The fan unit is designed to sit on top of a five-gallon bucket, which you can fill with water before you leave home if it has a tight enough top. In addition, many support a garden hose as an alternate water source. 

Oscillation

Outdoor oscillating fans bring that circulating pleasure you’ve come to know indoors and transport it to the wider areas of your yard that need relief. A fan head moves from side to side in a sweeping motion, offering more cooling coverage. These types of units can be attached to a stand or mounted to the wall.

Your space

If your home features a well-defined outdoor area, like an outdoor kitchen or covered patio, a wall-mounted misting fan might be your go-to product. Ideally, use this type of fan in an area with a roof to protect the fan unit, which is mounted to the wall and will require both a water and electrical supply line to operate. Also needed will be a water pump to increase the water pressure, producing the finest water mist. There’s more involved, but this is a big step-up from the portable units. 

Price

For those who don’t plan on spending much time outdoors, consider a DIY conversion kit to transform any outdoor-friendly fan into a misting one. These kits are easy to test drive if you’re not ready to dive deep into the misting lifestyle. And this might be the best option for pet owners during the summer, as dogs need a cool place to hide out from the heat, but you might not want to spend hundreds. Just add a cooling mist to an area with shade and a concrete patio, and you can keep your best buddy happier outdoors if you’re away. 

FAQs

Q: Do misters work in high humidity?

Outdoor misting fans work best in dry and arid environments, like the desert. In areas with less than 40 percent humidity, ambient air temperatures can feel up to 30 degrees Fahrenheit cooler. In an area with average relative humidity (40 and 80 percent), air temperatures can feel about 20 degrees Fahrenheit cooler. In high humidity (more than 80 percent), the cooling effect is about 10 degrees Fahrenheit.

Q: Do misters keep mosquitoes away?

Mist can keep flying insects away since they don’t like the added moisture along wind currents. Who likes flying in a rainstorm (bugs included)? Though the water mist doesn’t kill bugs since there’s no insecticide. 

Q: Do misters use a lot of water?

No, most patio misters use one to two gallons of water an hour, depending on the water setting and if your unit uses a water pump.

Q: Can I use an outdoor misting fan inside?

Yes, many outdoor misting fans are also designed for indoor use and can cool the air better than a fan. If it’s a corded electric model, have an outlet nearby. That said, indoor use may not be appropriate for models that get their water supply from a garden hose or outdoor faucet.

Final thoughts on choosing the best outdoor misting fans

If you want to extend your outdoor enjoyment this summer, consider the best outdoor misting fan for your needs and your budget. With options ranging from using an existing outdoor cooling fan and a $20 conversion kit to professional units requiring a water pump, you can cool your outdoor environment this summer for you and your guests by tens of degrees. Don’t forget, your pets and plants will also benefit from a cooler outdoor environment. Who knows, your orchid plant might bloom again. If you’re still hot, go check out these tips for cooling down until your package arrives.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor misting fans for staying cool in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/craftsman-mini-chainsaw-garden-lawn-power-tool-amazon-deal/ Wed, 24 Apr 2024 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611997
Red mini Craftsman chainsaws in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Miniature versions of large things are in right now. This tiny chainsaw from Craftsman is just as practical as it is petite.

The post Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Red mini Craftsman chainsaws in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

I am currently obsessed with all things mini right now. Look at this video of someone mopping their very tiny kitchen with a tiny heavy-duty mop. And here’s a miniature plant room complete with real wood floors, something I will never have in my own lifetime. Don’t even get me started on Mini Brands reveal videos and my personal favorite, Poppin Cookin’ “meals.” Not everything teensy tiny happens to be usable, however. That’s not the case with this Craftsman mini chainsaw, which is perfect for trimming smaller trees and shrubs. Why bring out the unwieldy big guy when you can get the job done with something lighter and less cumbersome?

CRAFTSMAN V20 Mini Chainsaw, 10 inch, Battery and Charger Included $119.99 (Was $169)

Craftsman

SEE IT

This cordless chainsaw has a V20* MAX 2.0AH lithium-ion battery, so you don’t have to worry about it crapping out when in the middle of a cut. Although we joke about it being a mini chainsaw, dainty it is not: its 10-inch bar and chain can cut material that’s eight inches thick. An auto-oiling feature allows for continuous lubrication, and bolt lock chain tensioning gives you consistent bar clamping. You can also use the integrated hook to hang it directly on a VERSATRACK wall organization system (sold separately). Sure, it won’t take down a Redwood, but it can slice through a cursed Bradford Pear like butter.

More Craftsman garden and lawn power tool deals:

The post Tackle tiny trees with 30% off this mini Craftsman chainsaw at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best pool floats for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-pool-float/ Wed, 14 Jul 2021 15:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=373107
best pool float pink flamingo
Toni Cuenca, Unsplash

The best pool floats help you to chill as the summer heats up.

The post The best pool floats for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best pool float pink flamingo
Toni Cuenca, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for pool parties Pink flamingo pool float Intex Party Island Flamingo
SEE IT

This fun model comes with a built-in cooler and four cup holders.

Best unicorn Girl sitting on a inflatable pool float Jasonwell Giant Unicorn Pool Float
SEE IT

Designed to hold up to 400 pounds, this allows for quick inflation.

Best for dogs Blue, plastic paddle paws pool float SwimWays Paddle Paws Dog Raft
SEE IT

This model is designed for small to medium dogs and is reinforced with claw-friendly fabric.

As we head into another sizzling summer, many of us are gearing up for our favorite hot-weather activities. One of the best ways to have fun and keep cool is to go for a dip in a refreshing pool. However, no poolside hang is complete without a leisurely float to lounge around on. These days, you can find fun inflatable pool toys in just about any shape or size, and some even come with special features. Considering the many options available, here’s a wet, hot guide to help you find your new favorite swimming pool float. Whether you’re searching for the best pool floats for yourself, your friends, your kids, or even your dog, these are the coolest pool inflatables for every sunbather. 

How we chose the best pool floats

We looked at product reviews and consumer impressions to determine what floats a pool-goers boat when it comes to the best pool floats. After reviewing the specs—including dimensions, weight limits, cupholders, and other luxuries—we narrowed down our list to the inflatables that most float our … boat? Nay, our bodies.

The best pool floats: Reviews & Recommendations

While it may seem like a simple purchase, there are a few things to think about before clicking “add to cart.” First, determine how many people might be using the float at once, then make some executive decisions about size, style, and functionality. After all, there are pool chair floats, unicorn pool floats, and giant pool floats, just to name a few types. Quality, price, and safety—especially for babies, kids, and pets—are a few other very important considerations.

Best overall: Aqua Campania Ultimate 2-in-1 Recliner 

Aqua LEISURE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This versatile chair can accommodate different lounging vibes.

Specs

  • Cupholders: Yes
  • Weight limit: 250 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 3.25 x 16.5 x 13.85 inches

Pros

  • Detachable caddy
  • Adjustable backrest
  • Inflates easily

Cons

  • Needs pump to fill

This reclining lounger from Aqua Campania is everything you need for a perfect pool day. The backrest can be positioned at a 60-degree angle for a little support, or lay the back completely flat to achieve a successful full-body tan. The Campania pool chair float comes with a detachable caddy for snacks, extra drinks, or personal items so you won’t be left wanting on the water. It can support up to 250 pounds and is easily inflated with a two-valve locking system. 

Best foam float: Frontgate Resort Pool Float

Frontage

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This foam float was designed to last more than one pool season.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 350 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 74 x 26 x 2 inches

Pros

  • Thick
  • Resists peeling and cracking
  • Incredibly buoyant

Cons

  • Expensive

This pool float is truly top of the line when it comes to peace and relaxation on the perfect pool day. The 2-inch, closed-cell foam is thin enough to keep you afloat but light enough for easy transport. Unlike traditional floats, this product uses PVC coating on top of the foam to reduce erosion caused by chlorine and sun exposure while keeping things plush. This foam pool float is available in eight solid colors, or be bold and select from two fun prints. While this product might be a bit more expensive than other inflatable pool floats, it will last longer and provide additional comfort. 

Best for pool parties: Intex Party Island Flamingo 

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The more really is the merrier when it comes to this party-friendly pool float.

Specs

  • Cupholders: Yes
  • Weight limit: 880 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 166 x 147 x 73 inches

Pros

  • Lots of room for drinks and beverages
  • Repair kit
  • Boarding platform

Cons

  • Need a large pool to use

This isn’t just a pool float—it’s a pool island, capable of supporting 880 pounds and measuring 166 inches by 147 inches by 73 inches. This Intex pink flamingo float comes with four cup holders, a built-in cooler, a detachable boarding platform, and a mesh bottom to let in cooling water. It’s even equipped with an anchor bag, rope, and repair kit just in case you need some extra support and stability. If the giant pool floats are too big for your pool, consider taking them to a nearby lake.

Best unicorn: Jasonwell Giant Unicorn Pool Float

Jasonwell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mystical pool float puts the “fun” in “functional.”

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 400 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 114.17 x 55.12 x 47.24

Pros

  • Fits two people
  • Easy to inflate

Cons

  • Leaks air easily

Make a splash with this giant unicorn pool float, designed to support up to 400 pounds (typically up to two people) at a time. It measures 144 inches by 55 inches by 47 inches when fully inflated, which you can achieve using a hairdryer, hand pump, or electric pump. Make sure you bring out the waterproof camera because you’ll definitely be bombarded with picture requests. 

Best baby pool float: Laycol Baby Pool Float Ring

LAYCOL

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pool float helps your baby learn to swim while protecting them from the sun.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 48 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 10.5 x 10.5 x 2 inches

Pros

  • 5-point safety protection
  • Easy to remove

Cons

  • Reviews note flip potential

Suitable for children under 36 months old, this baby pool float will support your little one’s first ventures into the water this summer. It has a double-layered air chamber, wide sides, a raised front, abdomen/back support, and a five-point safety belt to keep your baby right side up. Buckle in your guppy on their back or front so they can experiment with different ways to “swim.” You’ll be able to pull them around through the water easily while they kick and splash around. This float ring comes in three sizes and colors—each includes a removable canopy to protect little ones’ sensitive, soft skin from the sun. 

Best dog pool float: SwimWays Paddle Paws Dog Raft

SwimWays

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This dog-friendly pool float lets the family pooch cool off in the pool.

Specs

  • Cupholders: No
  • Weight limit: 200 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 15 x 15 x 16.25 inches

Pros

  • Paw- and claw-friendly
  • Reusable carrying bag included

Cons

  • Reviewers note flimsy air valve

Keep your fur baby happy with this inflatable dog raft from SwimWays. It’s available in two sizes, supporting dogs under and over 65 pounds. Made from claw-friendly mesh, this dog pool float features inserts that allow just enough water to seep in and cool down your pet. An innerspring design around the edge provides extra stability, and reinforced fabric protects the float from popping. Best of all, Fido’s float folds down flat, easily fitting in your pool bag without any hassle. 

What to consider when buying the best pool floats

Imagine yourself on the perfect summer day, dipping your toes into a freshly inflated pool with a frosty beverage in hand, a patio umbrella nearby to shade you when you take a break from the sun, a waterproof Bluetooth speaker to soundtrack your fun, and your favorite people by your side. Now, ponder the best pool float to complete this picture. If you’re having trouble visualizing, ask yourself the following questions to help turn this daydream into reality. 

Number of people on the float

First and foremost, you’ll need to decide how many people you’re hoping to pack on. Are you looking for a relaxing tube for one? A double-wide recliner built for two? Or a massive party float to hold a group of friends? Before you buy, double-check the product’s size specs to ensure you’re getting the dimensions you need, that way, you can safely select your favorite design and avoid any surprises when unboxing.

Statement pool toys

The best thing about pool floats is the veritable feast of eye-catching options. Hello, perfect pool day selfie! While there are several classy, solid-color options, summer is all about fun, and your float should inspire smiles. From llamas to pizza slices, giant pineapples to classic convertibles, there is truly something for everyone—including the fan-favorite unicorn pool float. 

Cupholders

If you’re looking to spend an entire day bobbing along the water, you’re going to need sustenance, which in turn means you’ll need a place to put your snacks. Instead of heading towards dry land to get some grub, grab a reclining pool float chair that comes with a food and beverage holder. That way, you won’t have to waste a second of aquatic fun to replenish and rehydrate. 

Safety

If you are headed to the pool with your baby in tow, and you know they aren’t ready for arm floaties, think about grabbing an inflatable ring, so you and your little one can enjoy the water together. Safety is of the utmost importance, so look for a no-flip float made from non-toxic material that’s equipped with safety belts to keep your tiny tot securely above water. In addition, make sure your little water bug has enough mobility to stay comfortable, but not so much room to move that they can accidentally fall out of the float. Products with raised edges and multiple straps are a great way to let your water baby splash around safely.

Foam vs. inflatable

Most inflatable pool floats are made from PVC plastic, which is great for buoyancy, dry-time, and easy inflation. However, some find that the material in inflatable pool floats can get too hot if left in the sun or that it irritates their skin over time—this is especially true for classic inner tubes and full-body recliners. Luckily, there are a few solutions. Some companies offer custom covers made from nylon or waterproof fabrics. Also, check out some of the amazing foam floats available. While foam floats tend to be pricier, they don’t require any inflation, are gentle on the skin, and provide soft, squishy support for maximum comfort. Plus, there’s no risk of popping and sinking. Even with an accidental puncture, foam pool floats are not likely to sink.

Pets

What’s cuter than a puppy lounging on a pool float? Not much! If your dog enjoys the water but isn’t keen to spend the day swimming, think about giving your four-legged friend their very own float as a special summer treat. Essentially a buoyant dog bed, dog pool floats are a fun way for you and your furry best friend to relax on the water. As long as you select a product made from durable material that can support your dog’s weight, nothing should get in the way of a perfect summer day alongside your canine BFF. 

FAQs

Q: What are pool floats made from? 

Most pool floats are made from polyvinyl chloride, or PVC. Manufacturers can also list this as vinyl, plastic, or naphthalene. Think of any inflatable water toy—baby pool, beach ball, waterslide—and chances are it’s made from PVC. Some products may have an additional layer of polyester mesh to strengthen the material, but this is more commonly used for inflatable pools. The only other material that is often used is foam. 

Q: Why are foam pool floats so expensive?

Foam pool floats are typically more expensive than PVC floats because of their durability, comfort, weight, and ease of use. Creating a foam float requires manufacturers to develop tiny cells within a plastic layer by putting the plastic inside a gas chamber filled with nitrogen and applying high pressure. As a result, it is highly unlikely that a foam float will sink, even when damaged, plus they provide a soft layer of cushion for peak relaxation. 

Q: What are the best foam pool floats?

If you are looking specifically for a foam pool float, in addition to the Frontgate Resort Float, we recommend the TCR Recreation Sunsation and SwimWays Aquaria Luxury Solana Lounge Float. There are many options for foam pool floats out there, and you can use the same list of factors above to help narrow down your selection. 

Final thoughts on the best pool floats

Finding the best pool float for your perfect summer day shouldn’t be too difficult once you know what you want. First, make sure it can safely support any person or pet who will climb aboard, then think about any additions or aesthetic features. If you’re shopping for kids or preparing for a pool party, look for a silly or fun style. If you are looking for yourself and prioritize comfort above all else, think about purchasing a long-lasting foam float or a reclining pool chair float. Above all, make sure to select the best pool float for bringing a smile to your face whenever you’re ready to take a dip.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best pool floats for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get ready for summer with a $60 discount on Ninja’s Woodfire Pro XL outdoor grill & smoker https://www.popsci.com/gear/ninja-woodfire-pro-xl-outdoor-grill-smoker-deal-amazon/ Tue, 23 Apr 2024 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611999
Multiple tiled Ninja Woodfire Pro XL Outdoor Grill & Smokers on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

The portable outdoor grill is down to its lowest price ever, just in time for cookout season.

The post Get ready for summer with a $60 discount on Ninja’s Woodfire Pro XL outdoor grill & smoker appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Multiple tiled Ninja Woodfire Pro XL Outdoor Grill & Smokers on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Summer is just around the corner, which means now is the time to get all the gear you’ll need for late-night outdoor hangs. Ninja is doing its part by offering the steepest discount yet on its Ninja Woodfire Pro XL. While smaller than a traditional grill, the Woodfire Pro XL excels in other ways—namely portability and price—that help it stay competitive.

Ninja Woodfire Pro XL Outdoor Grill & Smoker $339.99 (Was $399.99)

Ninja

SEE IT

This is an electric grill, which means you won’t have to lug around a propane tank or charcoal briquettes when you want to use it. Multiple heating elements below the grill’s grates keep temps consistent, while a knob on the left hand side allows you to switch between grill, smoke, air crisp, and bake settings. If you’re new to grilling, you can make use of the Woodfire Pro XL’s meat probes, which allow you to set a desired internal temperature before you insert them into your meat. The grill will beep when the meat has reached its target temperature and is ready to be removed. All of this functionality comes in a grill that’s small and light enough to be stored in a closet or garage shelf during the off season.

Other great deals for outdoor enthusiasts

The post Get ready for summer with a $60 discount on Ninja’s Woodfire Pro XL outdoor grill & smoker appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best soft coolers for chilling out in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-soft-coolers/ Mon, 22 Apr 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=611890
The best soft coolers for 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Here’s the hard sell: Soft coolers are versatile, lightweight options for keeping food and beverages cold on the go.

The post The best soft coolers for chilling out in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best soft coolers for 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall RTIC Soft Pack Cooler on a plain white background. RTIC Soft Pack Cooler
SEE IT

The RTIC cooler offers an ideal balance of price and quality.

Best backpack YETI Hopper M Series Backpack on a beach Yeti Hopper M20
SEE IT

The padded backpack straps make this cooler a breeze to carry.

Best budget Arctic Zone Insulated Tote Cooler Bag on a plain white background. Arctic Zone Insulated Tote Cooler Bag
SEE IT

The budget choice offers a 30 can capacity for $40.

Gone are the days of only finding small, flimsy, poorly insulated soft coolers. Now, a much wider variety of soft-shelled coolers rival their rigid counterparts in ice retention while offering a much more portable, versatile alternative. They range from compact lunch size to all-day capacity, with various carrying capacities to save your shoulders. So whether you are headed to the beach, keeping groceries cool for the drive home, or out in the woods where you’ll need a camping cooler, the best soft coolers keep your items cool and safe. 

How we chose the best soft coolers

When selecting the best soft coolers, we aimed to choose various sizes and carrying styles suitable for all sorts of activities and needs. Ice retention and durability were two of the most important factors, as a cooler isn’t much good if it doesn’t keep things cold. We also evaluated closure types, opening sizes, and any additional pockets or features that the coolers may offer. Finally, we chose coolers at various price points while still ensuring quality products across the board. 

The best soft coolers: Reviews & Recommendations

A soft cooler is the way to go if you’re looking for a lightweight cooler to keep things cold, whether taking tasty treats to a friend’s party, going short-term camping, or even taking your foldable kayak out. These options are ideal for various activities and situations, so you can find one below that fits your needs. 

Best overall: RTIC Soft Pack Cooler

RTIC

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 12 liters/20 cans (also available in 12, 30, or 40-can capacity)
  • Closure type: Zipper
  • Promised ice retention: 2 days 
  • Empty weight: 3 pounds
  • Dimensions: 13.5 x 13.75 x 15.5 inches

Pros

  • Good balance of price and quality
  • Floats
  • Available in multiple colors and sizes
  • Lots of handles

Cons

  • Outside pocket is small and tight
  • Narrow interior

The RTIC Soft Pack Cooler earns our top spot because it is reasonably priced while offering plenty of quality. It uses thick walls of closed-cell foam to keep things cool and is effective for a few days if you properly prime it. It features a removable padded shoulder strap, built-in carrying handles, and handles on the sides, offering plenty of ways to move the cooler around. 

This soft-sided cooler is quite durable. The exterior fabric is tear—and puncture-resistant, and the interior is puncture-resistant and waterproof to prevent leaks. The waterproof zipper also prevents leaks while keeping it sealed up tight to keep the cold air inside. The entire cooler floats, making it an ideal choice for any activities on the water. A small pocket on the front is the perfect place to store essentials, though it is a bit tight, so you won’t be able to store bulky things in there.

We really like the RTIC cooler’s wide mouth, making it easier to access your food and drinks. Unfortunately, the tall and narrow design takes some away from that easy access, but it’s still better than other options. It comes in four sizes and a range of colors, so you can choose one that best fits your needs and style. 

Best tote: Hydro Flask Day Escape Cooler Tote

Abby Ferguson / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 26 liters (also available as 18-liter)
  • Closure type: Zipper
  • Promised ice retention: 36 hours
  • Empty weight: 3 pounds
  • Dimensions: 10.4 x 23.9 x 14.97 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight when empty
  • Fully leakproof
  • Laser-cut gear attachment loops
  • BPA-Free
  • Comfortable strap

Cons

  • Exterior pocket is mesh with no zipper

You likely know Hydro Flask for its insulated water bottles, but it also makes some excellent coolers. The Day Escape Cooler Tote is a lightweight yet large soft cooler, offering a 26-liter capacity. It’s also available in an 18-liter size if you want something smaller. When empty, it weighs just three pounds. It’s rigid enough that it holds its shape when you are loading or unloading, but it can compress slightly when empty to save space. 

The zipper on the Day Escape Cooler is a TRU Zip zipper, which is toothless, silent, and IP67-rated to prevent leaks. Getting it started the first few times is tricky, but it slides smoothly after that. The interior features a food-grade liner and is BPA-free. It’s waterproof and free of any folds or tight corners that might trap debris or liquid, making it easy to clean. There is an exterior pocket, but unfortunately, it’s made of mesh, so it won’t keep debris out, and there’s no zipper to keep things secure. 

The exterior of this cooler bag is made of a 600D polyester shell, which cuts down on weight and is very durable. There are handles on the sides, an adjustable and padded shoulder strap, and carrying handles. I haven’t had to carry it terribly far, but it’s comfortable for a short trek to the beach, at least. Hydro Flask promises 36 hours of ice retention, which isn’t as long as other soft coolers but impressive for its being lightweight. I left stuff in it overnight, and it was still plenty cold the next day, even with a small amount of ice.

Best backpack: Yeti Hopper M20

Abby Ferguson / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 20 liters (also available in 12-liter capacity)
  • Closure type: Magnetic
  • Promised ice retention: Not provided 
  • Empty weight: 5.6 pounds
  • Dimensions: 9.9 x 15.3 x 18.1 inches

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Unique magnetic closure
  • Very comfortable and easy to carry
  • Lots of attachment points

Cons

  • Top is challenging to buckle closed
  • Expensive

Even with padded shoulder straps, soft coolers can be a pain to carry. If you need to take a cooler on a hike, you’ll be grateful to have a backpack version. The Yeti Hopper M20 is the best backpack cooler available thanks to its range of features and level of quality. The straps are nicely padded, making it comfortable to carry even when loaded. There’s even a chest strap to keep is secure on your body even during serious hikes. Lots of attachment points allow you to add accessories or clip on keys or bottle openers and handles on the sides and top for extra carrying options.

One unique feature of the M20 is the leak-resistant magnetic closure instead of a zipper. It makes it easier to open and close without keeping on top of lubrication, and you don’t have to worry about the zipper breaking. It snaps closed audibly, so you can trust it’s sealed up. Then, you fold it and use the two buckles to lock it down. Getting the buckles closed is a little challenging, but pushing the air out of the cooler helps a lot. Plus, the whole thing is extremely durable and can withstand punctures, abrasions, and UV rays. 

As expected from a Yeti, it stays cold for a long time. We forgot to unload it after taking it to the beach and definitely did not properly prime the cooler beforehand (threw in room-temperature items and only two ice packs), yet there was still some ice a few days later. It will definitely stay cold for a long time with proper prep and the correct amount of ice. As you might guess, the Hopper M20 is expensive at around $300. But the durable design, comfortable backpack-carrying style, effective insulation, and magnetic closure make it stand out and worthy of our best splurge.

Best large capacity: Engel HD30 

Engel

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 30 liters
  • Closure type: Zipper
  • Promised ice retention: 3 days
  • Empty weight: 4.5 Pounds
  • Dimensions: 22 x 12 x 18 inches

Pros

  • Comfortable shoulder strap
  • Large capacity
  • Durable
  • Vacuum valve aids in keeping things cold

Cons

  • Exterior pocket isn’t waterproof

The Engel HD30 is the way to go when you need lots of room. This soft cooler offers 30 liters of storage space yet weighs only 4.5 pounds when empty. Of course, as a larger cooler, it isn’t the easiest to carry, especially when packed full. But the shoulder strap is well padded, and the additional grab and side handles also give you carrying options. 

The Engel HD30 offers extremely effective insulation, keeping your food safe for up to three days. That’s partly thanks to the waterproof and air-resistant zipper that keeps the cold air in and warm air out. There’s also a unique vacuum valve, which allows you to use your household vacuum hose to suck out excess air between the insulation and outer waterproof layers.

The HD30 is incredibly durable and made of 840 denier fibers, which provides abrasion-resistant performance. There are six nylon daisy chains across the bag for attaching keys and other accessories, along with D rings near the top that can be used as tie-down points to keep it secure in the back of a pickup truck. A zippered pocket on the front is the perfect place to store a phone or some extra snacks, though it isn’t waterproof. 

Most durable: Yeti Hopper Flip 12

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 12 liters (also available in 8 or 18-liter versions)
  • Closure type: Zipper
  • Promised ice retention: 3 days
  • Empty weight: 3 pounds
  • Dimensions: 14.3 x 10.7 x 12.0 inches

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Wide opening
  • Effective insulation
  • Floats

Cons

  • Expensive

Yeti is well known for its excellent coolers (like our best overall cooler with wheels), and the Hopper Flip is no exception. Available in 8, 12, or 18-liter capacities in a variety of colors, the Hopper Flip offers a wide opening for easy access and visibility. The wide opening and seamless interior make cleaning easier since there are no nooks or crannies to hide food or liquid. 

Both the interior and exterior are treated to be mildew resistant, extending the life of the cooler even if you forget to clean it out for a few days. The exterior withstands punctures, abrasions, and UV rays so that it will look nicer for longer, even with rugged adventures. It is waterproof and leakproof, with excellent insulation to keep your items cold for up to three days. 

The Hopper Flip features a well-padded shoulder strap for more comfortable carrying, as well as handles on the lid and sides. Daisy chains on the front and back make it easy to attach accessories or tie it down in your vehicle. As is true of all things Yeti, it is a premium product and on the expensive side. But you are getting a lot of quality and durability for that price, so we think it’s worth it for those who want a long-lasting, versatile, soft cooler (and that’s why the 18-liter size is the best overall pick in our best cooler bags). 

Best budget: Arctic Zone Insulated Tote Cooler Bag

Arctic Zone

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 30 liters
  • Closure type: Zipper
  • Promised ice retention: 3 days
  • Empty weight: 1.78 pounds
  • Dimensions: 22.00 x 10.00 x 14.50 inches

Pros

  • Microban lining prevents odors
  • Very lightweight
  • More packable than other options
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Zipper isn’t leakproof

You don’t need to spend a small fortune to have a good soft cooler. The Arctic Zone Insulated Tote comes in under $40 but offers a 30-liter capacity with an exterior zip pocket. Despite the large capacity, it only weighs 1.78 pounds, making it the lightest soft cooler on our list. It isn’t rigid like some other options, so is somewhat collapsible, which may benefit some. 

The interior of this Arctic Zone tote measures 16.75 by 7.75 by 13.25 inches, which allows for some larger items. The interior lining is leakproof and features Microban antimicrobial protection to prevent odors should you forget to clean it out right away (or store stinky things in it). The base is extra thick so that the cold air doesn’t seep out, and it promises up to three days of ice retention. 

On the exterior you’ll find a padded shoulder strap with side carrying handles as well. A zippered pocket on the exterior stores keys and other essentials. Unfortunately, the zipper isn’t leakproof, and some report that it isn’t very durable, so it may not last as long as other coolers on our list. But the Arctic Zone Insulated Tote will get the job done if you just need a simple soft cooler that doesn’t take up much room for kids’ sporting events or car camping trips

What to consider when shopping for the best soft coolers

When shopping for a soft cooler, it’s important first to consider what you will be using the cooler for. A quick day trip has quite different requirements than a week-long vacation. Likewise, keeping some drinks cool is a lot different than keeping raw meat cold enough to be safe to eat. Knowing the primary purpose of the cooler will help you narrow in on the most important of the following factors: 

Capacity 

Choosing the right cooler capacity will ensure you have plenty of room for your food, drinks, and ice. Cooler capacity is frequently listed in reference to the number of cans it can fit. Some companies also list capacity in terms of quarts or liters. You’ll also want to keep in mind that the shape of the items you need to store in the cooler, as well as the shape of the cooler itself, will impact the practical capacity. 

What size is best depends on what you will be using the cooler for. You can get away with small coolers for short outings or lunch purposes, while multi-day trips will require quite a lot of room. 

Shape and structure

Nowadays, most soft coolers offer a rigid structure, keeping their shape even when empty. There are also collapsable coolers that allow you to pack them down. There aren’t a ton of options for these, but they are convenient for road trips or other times when space is limited. 

In terms of shape, some will offer a fully rectangular shape, which can make it easier to pack and access things at the bottom of the cooler. Others may have a narrower top compared to the base, making it difficult to access things at the bottom and limiting the size and shape of containers that can be stored at the top.  

Carrying style

Most soft coolers use a shoulder strap or hand straps for carrying. Ideally, the straps should have some padding, as even smaller coolers can get quite heavy when filled up. The shoulder strap works well for short distances, but can be challenging for walking a ways. If you know you’ll carry the cooler for longer distances, a backpack soft cooler may make more sense, as it distributes the weight more evenly and keeps the cooler out of the way while walking. 

Weight

While the soft cooler will inevitably be heavy when you fill it up, the empty weight is also important to consider. If it’s on the heavy side before you put things in it, that’s not a great sign. Weight becomes more important if you need to hike or walk with the cooler, so, in general, lightweight is better. 

Cutting down on weight does have a downside, though, usually resulting in less insulation or rigidity. There’s a balance to be had, to be sure. 

Compartments, extra pockets, and attachment points

Some (though not many) coolers will offer compartments inside to keep your items organized, which is helpful if you have lots of things to store. Certain offerings will also feature exterior pockets, making it easier to store items that don’t need to be in the cooler, such as utensils or even keys and phones. Finally, some utilize attachment points to attach items with straps or to connect accessories that you can purchase separately. 

Ice retention

Of course, none of the above features matter if the cooler doesn’t keep your items cold. Most manufacturers will promise some ice retention, but remember that those numbers are for very specific conditions. In the real world, how you prep the cooler, how often you open it, if there’s direct sunlight, and the ambient temperature will all impact how long the ice lasts. 

How much ice retention you need depends on what you use the cooler for. If you only use the cooler to transport your lunch to work or groceries home from the store, days’ worth of ice retention is overkill, and you’ll be spending money on something you don’t need. However, if you plan on taking the cooler on long camping trips or beach days in the hot sun, superb insulation for long ice retention will be a must. 

FAQs

Q: Are soft coolers worth it?

Broadly speaking, yes, soft coolers are worth it. However, it depends on what one you choose. Plenty of cheap, poorly made soft coolers are liable to leak or not keep your items. But on the flip side, many robust and effective soft coolers rival hard-sided coolers while offering better portability and versatility.

Q: How long do soft coolers stay cold?

How long a soft cooler stays cold depends on many factors. To start, each individual cooler and brand offers different levels of ice retention. How you prep your cooler, the ambient temperature and amount of sunlight, and how often you open the cooler all make a difference in how long things will stay cold. 

Q: How do I make my cooler hold ice longer?

To make your cooler hold ice longer, there are some steps you can take ahead of time and while using it. First, prechill your cooler by filling it half full with ice overnight or, ideally, a full day before you need it. Keep it out of the sun and in a relatively cool place while prechilling. Prechilling your food or drinks will also help. Putting warm items in the cooler will melt the ice faster. 

When it comes time to pack your cooler, try to use twice the amount of ice as the amount of food and drinks. Big blocks of ice will last longer than small cubes, but you can use small cubes to fill in spaces and minimize airflow. Alternating layers of ice and food or drinks will also help. Finally, be quick about opening and closing the cooler to keep the cold air in and warm air out and, when possible, keep it out of direct sunlight. 

Q: What size soft cooler do I need?

What size cooler you need depends entirely on what you are using the cooler for. If you are just packing a lunch for a short outing or for work, a mini cooler with a six cans-or-less (15 quarts or less) capacity will be plenty. For a casual day outing, anywhere from a 12 to 38 can capacity will be ideal. For a weekend trip, a cooler with a 16- to 50-quart capacity is best. For long weekend trips or large parties, 

Final thoughts on the best soft coolers

Gone are the days when your options for keeping things cool were flimsy insulated coolers, brittle styrofoam coolers, or heavy ice chests. There is certainly no shortage of high-quality soft coolers available these days, with options for just about every purpose under the sun. What is best depends on what you intend to store in it, where you need to take it, and how you prefer to carry it. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best soft coolers for chilling out in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-budget-bluetooth-speakers/ Fri, 04 Feb 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=423525
Best budget Bluetooth speakers on a white background.

Get affordable audio for all with the best budget Bluetooth speakers.

The post The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best budget Bluetooth speakers on a white background.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Anker Soundcore 3 on a white background Anker Soundcore 3
SEE IT

A well-rounded speaker with a solid build that won’t break the bank.

Best for a party Tribit Outdoor Portable Speaker on a white background Tribit XSound Mega
SEE IT

A speaker equipped with flashy features for a fraction of the price.

Best for travel JBL Clip 4 JBL Clip 4
SEE IT

A super portable speaker  designed to move with you thanks to its carabiner-like design.

There is no shortage of Bluetooth speakers under $100, even $50, which can make choosing the right one for your listening needs particularly difficult. While you’d think a less expensive option might not boast outstanding audio quality or unbeatable battery life, there are many models that are going to deliver exactly what you need when it comes to wire-free listening. Hone in on your top priorities and search accordingly. Do you need something waterproof? A speaker that will clip onto a backpack? Or maybe something extra bass to bump at a party? When it comes to the best budget Bluetooth speakers, it’s okay to focus on one or two central features so you get the most bang for your buck. Here are picks for speakers that can fit your needs and your budget.

How we chose the best budget Bluetooth speakers

Many of the speakers recommended here have been personally tested by myself or our team, which is why we confidently recommend this selection. We retested some of our personal favorites and compared them to new units from other reputable brands with a focus on sound quality. While smaller portable speakers can’t deliver audio that’s as precise as premium stereo or multi-channel models, we made sure to pick products that preserve the integrity of our favorite albums. To further pare down the list, we only looked at speakers that currently retail for under $115, primarily focusing on those around $50, while paying particular attention to durability, portability, and battery life. Then, we considered special features like onboard controls, EQ customization, and connectivity to bring you the best of the best when it comes to affordable Bluetooth speakers. 

The best budget Bluetooth speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

If you visit my apartment, you will immediately see a veritable wall of Bluetooth speakers, large and small. I have what some may call a deep enthusiasm for portable sound that doesn’t require equally deep pockets or corners. And I’ve found that the best cheap Bluetooth speakers don’t have to sound dinky. In fact, many options provide solid sound for less. While shopping, consider your top priorities for your budget-friendly speaker. Do you emphasize battery life, portability, water resistance, or sound quality? Once you can answer this question, you can pick out an excellent speaker from our picks without spending a fortune.

Best overall: Anker Soundcore 3

Anker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Soundcore 3 is a well-rounded, budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker with an impressive 24 hours of battery life and the option to boost the bass without distortion. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 24 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 66 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX7
  • Size: 6.9 x 2.4 x 2.2 inches  

Pros

  • Excellent Battery Life 
  • Sound Quality 
  • Bass Up technology 
  • Customizable EQ 

Cons

  • Simplistic design
  • Voice assistant capability is lacking

The Soundcore 3 is a robust, portable Bluetooth speaker that won’t cost an arm and a leg, making it the best budget Bluetooth speaker overall. Available in four colors, this powerful unit utilizes 16 watts of power to push dual 1.5-inch drivers with titanium diaphragms. Meanwhile, dual passive radiators combine with improved BassUp technology to analyze music in real-time and work to punch up the low-end during your favorite bass-driven songs. Alongside BassUp, there are three additional preset EQs you can choose from, or customize your own using the Soundcore app. The treble on the Soundcore 3 stretches all the way up to 40kHz. Bluetooth 5.0 offers a consistently stable connection and PartyCast compatibility means you can link up to 100 Soundcore speakers for a truly impressive array of sound. To get a full battery faster, this speaker charges via USB-C, and the 24-hour battery life beats more expensive models. While $55 isn’t the steepest cost if you needed a replacement, an IPX7 rating means you won’t have to worry about water damage if you get caught in the rain or drop it in the pool. And if you’re definitely planning to fill a patio with friends, there’s also the Anker Soundcore Glow Mini, an outdoor-friendly speaker that offers 360-degree sound, a pulsing LED halo, and IPX7—all for less than $50.

Best for bass: Sony SRS-XB100

Sony

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SRS-XB100 is a compact, portable waterproof speaker that automatically boosts the bass for party-worthy sound wherever you are. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 16 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 32 feet
  • IP Rating: IP67
  • Size: 3.43 x 3.43 x 4.41 inches 

Pros

  • Removable strap
  • UV coating 
  • Five cool colorways
  • Extra Bass 

Cons

  • Extra bass isn’t adjustable 

If you’re looking for a compact speaker that weighs less than 1 pound and costs less than $50 but doesn’t sacrifice bass-booming sound, then the SRS-XB100 is the best bass Bluetooth speaker for you. With a 20Hz – 20kHz frequency response and a dedicated passive radiator to reinforce low-end, your music won’t be found lacking when it comes to heart-thumping beats. An IP67 rating means it’s protected from water and debris, so you can toss it into your beach bag without worrying about sand getting into the speaker grill. Available in five modern colors, each unit comes with a matching multiway strap, so you can easily carry the speaker if you run out of room in your backpack, or hang it up for easy access at a pool party. With an extra XB100 speaker, you can enable stereo mode, and a USB-C port means you can charge quickly to keep the party going all night long. And the integrated microphone means you can have a conference call from the campfire.

Best waterproof: Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 14 hours
  • Bluetooth range: 131 feet
  • IP rating: IP67
  • Size: 3.68 x 3.68 x 4.02 inches

Pros

  • Easily portable 
  • Can be submerged for up to 30 minutes 
  • Impressive volume 

Cons

  • No microphone 
  • No USB-C charging

The WONDERBOOM 3 from Ultimate Ears is a great option for any listener who needs the perfect shower speaker or pool-party pal. The unique design is an immediate eye-catcher, and the sound quality is genuinely impressive for its size. Power by two active drivers and two passive radiators, coverage is pretty great with solid reproduction across the lows, mids, and highs. Granted, it doesn’t have the heart-pounding bass a larger speaker would, but will certainly do for poolside, lakefront, or river raft listening.  Plus, it can be paired with a second WONDERBOOM for even better stereo sound. An Outdoor Boost button at the bottom of the speaker adjusts the sound to suit your environment better.

If you’ve ever seen a picture before of the WONDERBOOM 3, chances are it’s bobbing around in a pool or being sprayed with water from a rogue splash. This is, yes, because of target ads, but also because this tiny but mighty speaker is genuinely well-suited for “aquatic” listening. The IP67 rating means it’s essentially waterproof. Specifically, you can submerge this model in up to 1 meter of water for up to 30 minutes. It’s okay to accidentally drop this speaker in the pool, bathtub, or ocean. This rating also means it’s also protected from dust and debris. 

Build-wise, you get a stable rubber loop at the top of the speaker that can easily clip to a backpack or make for easier carrying. You’ll also get large, easy-to-use onboard controls, so you won’t have to get your pruney wet fingers all over your smartphone just to change the volume or skip a song. The WONDERBOOM 3 comes in four fun colors, including “Hot Pink” and “Performance Blue.” (And, if you dig the aesthetic and budget becomes less of a concern, the new, admittedly much more expensive EPICBOOM brings a lot more bass and even more battery to the party, while remaining floatable.)

Best for travel: JBL Clip 4

JBL

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Bluetooth range: 32 feet
  • IP rating: IP67

Pros

  • Excellent design
  • USB-C charging
  • Good volume

Cons

  • No fast charge 
  • No wired connectivity

The JBL Clip 4 is a small speaker designed to keep you connected wherever your travels take you. Weighing just over half a pound, with an integrated carabiner clip, you can attach this speaker to your backpack, suitcase, bike handle, lunch box, belt loop, etc. There are rubberized grips on the speaker’s backside to increase stability, and the textured wrap covering most of the speaker is easy to hold onto. All in all, this is the easiest speaker to grab and go if you’re hiking or cycling; plus, it has an IP67 rating, so you can even attach it to your shower rod, beach tent, or foldable kayak (yes, it’s a thing).

Sound quality is pretty solid for such a small unit thanks to an impressive dynamic driver; plus, it can get loud for a 5-watt output (JBL knows how to build a potent party speaker and sensational shower speaker). Yes, it’s a little lacking in low-end, but that’s par for the course. Overall, this little guy sounds great. Sound can be controlled by five onboard buttons and charges via USB-C. 

If you don’t want to play the $80 market price for the Clip 4, check out early models, like the Clip 3, which are still available for just under $50.

Best budget: Oontz Angle 3

OontZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With an impressive connectivity range, solid battery life, and thousands of positive user reviews, the Oontz Angle 3 is one of the best budget Bluetooth speakers for those looking to spend less than $35.

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 14 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Approx. 100 feet 
  • IP Rating: IPX5
  • Size: 5.3 x 2.8 x 2.6 inches

Pros

  • Extended Connectivity Range
  • Price
  • Stereo Drivers

Cons

  • Not fully environment-proof 
  • Limited onboard controls 
  • Sound quality is just okay

While the Angle 3 isn’t touting many bells and whistles, it will have what you need to take tunes with you on the go. It’s got 10 watts that power acoustic stereo drivers, as well as a passive radiator—all wrapped up in 10 different colorways. Equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, this wedge-like speaker delivers a strong connection across 100 feet and is compatible with most current devices. With its IPX5 rating, you won’t want to toss this model into the pool, but you don’t need to worry about a few splashes or drops of rain. While the volume is certainly there, don’t expect a lot when it comes to wide stereo, booming bass, or true clarity across mids and highs. It’ll do the trick for lite listening on the go, but it won’t necessarily stand up to other, more expensive models. That being said, if you just need something that’s far preferable to silence, the Angle 3 should do the trick.

Best party speaker: Tribit XSound Mega

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Boosted bass, additional EQ presents, and a veritable light show deliver a high-end listening experience at a reasonable price. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 20 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 98 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX7
  • Size: 10.66 x 3.42 x 3.14 inches 

Pros: 

  • 3 listening modes 
  • Dual charging/powerbank ports  
  • Music-activated lighting 
  • Carrying strap 

Cons: 

  • Some distortion at high volumes 
  • Pricier

If you’re having a gathering with more people you’re going to want more sound, and that may mean spending a little more, so here’s the best Bluetooth party speaker if your budget can stretch slightly above $100. The Tribit XSound Mega, released in early January, follows the waterproof, outdoor-friendly, ultraportable XSound Go models with a similar form factor but significant upgrades when it comes to sound quality and visual appeal. 

Right out of the box, the Mega feels sleeker than some of its contemporaries with a texturized rubber surface that’s easy to grip, a black speaker grill, a discrete brand label, and smooth, integrated onboard controls. These seven intuitive buttons control power, Bluetooth pairing, play/pause, volume down, volume up, light adjustment, and EQ adjustment. Directly underneath the EQ Mode button are three indicators that will tell you which mode has been triggered: options include XBass, Music, and Audiobooks. At the back of the speaker is a rubber panel housing USB-A and USB-C ports for charging/using the 8000mAh battery as a powerbank to top off other devices, plus an AUX input. The included carrying strap is black and grey with silver hardware and two small carabiners easily clip onto the discrete embedded handles, which certainly helps shoulder the speaker’s 2.2 pounds. The visual pièce de résistance is the frame of LEDs that surrounds the front face of the speaker—a rainbow gradient of light that slowly cycles through colors while you pair your device. 

Bluetooth 5.0 pairing is simple and easy, following the standard protocol of most speakers. The Mega is also equipped with NFC (Near-Field Communication), this is the same technology that allows you to tap your phone at a point-of-purchase to use ApplePay or Android Pay. NFC eliminates the need to push buttons and scroll through settings by allowing you to simply tap your speaker and phone together to establish a secure connection. Unfortunately, Apple hasn’t equipped any of their phones with controllable NFC modes, so you can only take advantage of this function if you have an Android or another device running Windows 10 or higher. The final pairing option you can consider is Broadcast Mode, which will allow you to link more than 100 XSound Megas together for a boost in volume or stereo playback. 

When it comes to sound quality, this Tribit speaker has the thump if not exactly the clarity and soundstage of comparable models, like the JBL Charge 5. An impressive 30 watts power a driver with a pure titanium diaphragm, which combines with two passive radiators to reproduce low frequencies to 45Hz and high frequencies up to 14kHz. Audiobook mode successfully isolates the dulcet tones of Jim Dale, who you might recognize as the reader of the Harry Potter series, though the audio can get a little muddy if you are listening to a music- or sound design-heavy podcast. However, Isobel Campbell and Mark Lanegan’s sultry vocals and staccato keys on “Come Undone” are smooth and clear when Music mode is triggered. The low-end on Subtrakt’s “Wildfire” is big and bold when XBass is engaged, delivering a party-appropriate level of “thump” to get things going without overpowering the vocals. The volume can reach over 100 dB but some distortion does occur when pushed to its max, though that is to be expected from a speaker of this size. 

One of our favorite features is the light display, which flashes in time with the beat of whatever you are playing. You can select from different options: a continuous oval of rainbow lacing glowing around the speaker grill’s perimeter; colors pulsing rhythmically in a symmetrical left/right or top/bottom pair, almost mimicking the metering you’d see on a recording studio console or DAW; or a circuit traveling the display track changing color, speeding up and slowing down in time with the beat. You can also forgo the light display altogether, but a 20-hour battery life keeps all that flair from fading fast.

While this model is a bit more expensive than other budget-friendly models, you will certainly get what you pay for when it comes to audio quality and special features.

Best for (viewing) parties: EarFun UBOOM L

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Its wide, rich sound, surprising for a speaker this size, delivers a powerful listening experience at a reasonable price. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 16 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 50 feet
  • IP Rating: IP67
  • Size: 8.27 x 3.07 x 2.83 inches 

Pros 

  • Video mode 
  • Aux connection available 
  • Stereo Pairing

Cons 

  • Short charging cable 
  • Only available in black

The UBOOM L from EarFun is a budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker that delivers surprisingly impressive sound. While the texturized black grill, rubber trim, and raised buttons resemble its predecessors and contemporaries (like the Treblab HD77 or JBL Flip 5), its price:performance helps this compact speaker stand out in the sub-$100 crowd. Two 14-watt, 55mm drivers and dual passive radiators support potent but balanced playback across the full frequency range. Bluetooth 5.0 supports a stable connection for up to 100 feet of distance. Multiple devices can connect to the UBOOM L, so you can easily pass along the party playlist responsibilities; to really kick things up a notch, you can easily create a stereo pair using two UBOOM Ls, widening coverage and essentially doubling volume (great for gatherings). Three listening modes are available: Indoor, Outdoor, and Video—the most unique of the bunch. Using digital signal processing (DSP) technology, Indoor mode focuses on sonic clarity and depth, while Outdoor mode boosts volume and low-end bump. Video mode supports low-latency playback with lag reduced to 150ms, making it an excellent solution to greatly improve sound when watching movies and TV shows from a laptop or other device with smaller internal speakers. A built-in microphone makes hands-free calls an option, and an IP67 rating means the appropriately portable speaker is protected from dirt and water damage when you take it to the pool or on a trek.

Best smart speaker: Amazon Echo (4th Gen.)

Why it made the cut: For under $100, the 4th-gen. Amazon Echo is the perfect at-home speaker with a built-in microphone, impressive sound quality, and multiple connectivity options. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: Not rechargeable 
  • Bluetooth Range: 30 feet
  • IP Rating: None
  • Size: 5.7 x 5.7 x 5.2 inches

Pros

  • Sound quality 
  • Auxiliary port 
  • Built-in mic 

Cons

  • Not portable 
  • Not waterproof 

While the Amazon Echo is not a speaker you can take with you on the go, it is the best option for indoor listening if you’re assembling a smart-home system around Alexa. Like its Echo predecessors, the 4th-generation model is easy to use and compatible with many smart devices, doubling as a smart home hub for those who have smart lights, switches, doorbells, locks, and more. Even without the extra fixtures, Amazon’s voice assistant Alexa can help you set up timers, reminders, check the weather, call your family and friends, or call up your favorite playlists. The built-in microphone and speaker capabilities make for streamlined, hands-free communication. Installing more than one Echo in your home means you can program and sync multiroom music.

Available in three sleek colorways, the Echo will not only look good but sound good, with dual front-firing 0.8-inch tweeters and surprising bass thanks to a 3.0-inch neodymium woofer. These three drivers combine to deliver a satisfying thump and improved clarity, plus they support Dolby Audio (but not Dolby Atmos). Wi-Fi enabled, you can cast music from your phone if you’re on the same network or let it take direct advantage of connected services like Amazon Music HD, Audible, or Spotify Connect if you want to reserve your Bluetooth for another device.  

The Echo orb is equipped with onboard controls that will allow you to control volume, mute the microphone, or skip tracks. An LED ring at the base of the speakers will illuminate when Alexa has been activated and glow red when the microphone is muted. At the back of the speaker, you’ll find a power input port and an aux port for analog connections. The Echo is not a portable speaker, so it will need to stay plugged in at all times, though the Bluetooth 5.0 connection means you can play from just about any smart device in your home (and most rooms, depending on the layout of your walls).

Here are other options we think sound like a good investment:

Things to consider before buying the best budget Bluetooth speakers

In order to find the best budget Bluetooth speaker for you, think about what features will be a defining factor in your final decision. Are you prioritizing battery life? Volume? Portability? When it comes to inexpensive speakers, you might not have all the fancy features of a high-end model at your fingertips, but as long as you know what you want to focus on, you’ll be satisfied. 

What should a budget Bluetooth speaker sound like? 

Sound quality is typically a top priority, no matter what kind of speaker you’re looking at. While we cannot expect a 6-inch speaker to carry the same sonic weight as a set of premium monitors, you can still make smart choices if you value sound above the rest. 

First and foremost, if you want better sound you’ll have to sacrifice a little bit of portability. That’s because larger units are generally more equipped to maintain consistent, distortion-free audio even as you turn the volume up (a common critique of compact speakers is that though they can get pretty loud, the audio quality significantly degrades with each decibel). Bigger speakers also have more room for well-designed subwoofers, which provide an accurate low end that won’t totally overpower the mids and highs, making for a more satisfying mix.  

If you really want booming bass but can’t upgrade when it comes to size, many smaller units now come equipped with “bass boosting” technology that uses digital signal processing to put an emphasis on low-end frequencies that bumps without any rattle. While this can be a major pro for parties or at-home workout playlists, beware of speakers that use these boosts to overcompensate for a lack of clarity throughout other frequencies. 

To learn more about where your new speaker will succeed or fall short when it comes to audio quality, look at the frequency response. Measured in hertz and kilohertz, this range lets you know the range of frequencies (lows, mids, and highs) the speaker will support. More often than not, you’ll see a response range from 20Hz – 20kHz, which are the limits of human hearing for both highs and lows. This is certainly an ideal range; however, just because the model boasts a wide range doesn’t mean it won’t suffer from dips and peaks around specific frequencies. For a really in-depth understanding of the speaker’s success at accurately reproducing audio, you can take a look at a frequency response graph for the product, often created with audio testing by a third party.  

For more information about volume, check out the speaker’s specs to find a maximum decibel level, notated as dB. If you are primarily playing music inside, you won’t need to go over 100 dB and we don’t even recommend listening at that level, as it’s akin to listening to a jackhammer at close range. On the other hand, if you’re hosting an outdoor party with many people in attendance, you could think about increasing the volume to 115 dB, which is concert-level; music at this volume will cover a large area, but you wouldn’t want anyone standing too close. Generally speaking, we are satisfied with Bluetooth speakers that maintain good sound quality at 85 dB for larger gatherings. As I write, I am happily listening to music at 74 dB and really don’t require any more volume. 

What’s the deal with codecs and connectivity?

While options can be limited when it comes to budget speakers, we recommend looking for gear that supports the most recent version of Bluetooth you can find (at the moment that’s anything in the 5.0 range). A Bluetooth 5.1 or 5.2 and especially 5.3 or 5.4 speaker will have a more stable connection, which makes it easier to support brand-specific features like allowing more than one person to connect and control the speaker at a time. Bluetooth 4.0 will still function just fine with most devices, but you may miss out on some range, stability, and special features like multiuser pairing. 

A Bluetooth codec describes the way in which your digital audio data is encoded and decoded from a source device to your speaker or headphones. To get the most from these high-speed transfers both your receiver and transmitter need to be equipped with the same codecs. The most common codec to see is SBC, which is supported by every Bluetooth speaker. While not the highest quality codec, it’s a virtually universal, reliable way to transfer data. If you’re an iOS user looking for higher quality, consider a speaker with AAC, or Advanced Audio Coding. If you have an Android smartdevice, select a speaker with aptX/aptX HD/aptX Adaptive (or LDAC) support for faster transfer rates that preserve more data. 

One final thing to keep in mind when considering connectivity is Bluetooth range. This describes how far you can wander away from your device before the sound starts to get fuzzy and eventually you get disconnected. If you plan to never leave your speaker’s side, you’ll probably be fine with a connectivity range under 30 feet. However, if you’re listening to music outdoors, need to go inside, and you don’t want to leave your phone unattended, then look for a speaker with a range above 35 feet. 

What kind of special features should you look for?

Typically, the best budget Bluetooth speakers lack high-flying special features, though this isn’t always the case. If a Bluetooth speaker provides custom EQ options via an app or onboard control, that is a major win. Custom equalization will give you way more control over your sound and is particularly helpful if you are listening to various types of media—as you certainly won’t need to boost the bass when you’re listening to Terry Gross on “Fresh Air.” Some inexpensive models are starting to roll out visual features first employed by higher-end models, like bold colorways or LED panels that pulse to the beat. 

Another prime feature to look for is the elusive onboard microphone that will let you conduct phone calls or speak to voice assistants like Siri or Alexa without having to pick up your device. 

What is the bare minimum when it comes to battery life? 

Luckily, one of the things budget Bluetooth speakers rarely sacrifice is battery life. Even at a lower price, it’s unlikely you’ll come across a model that has less than a 10-hour charge and many can do even better. For infrequent listening at moderate volume, 10 hours of playback could last you up to a week; however, the louder you play your music, the faster battery life will be depleted. If a speaker boasts 13 hours of consistent playback, you may get something closer to 7-10 hours if you’re blasting EDM all night long. Party throwers and party-goers should look for a model that boasts a battery that can last over 12 hours. 

How do you know if your budget Bluetooth speaker is actually waterproof? 

The only way to guarantee your speaker is waterproof (or dustproof) is to look at its IP rating. If you’ve ever purchased a portable speaker before or checked out one of our other reviews, you’ll know that IP rating is one of the most important specs to check out before buying. This is especially true if you know you want to prioritize outdoor use. If you want a speaker to safely take you to the beach or into the shower—make sure you investigate how well it’s already protected from the elements.

IP stands for “Ingress Protection,” which tells you just how fortified an electronic device is against dirt, dust, and water. These ratings are typically composed of two numbers, or one number and an X. We often cite the Wonderboom 2, a tried-and-true favorite, when it comes to durability. The Wonderboom 2 has an IP67 rating. The first digit describes particle protection, the second liquid. The “6” indicates it can keep out most dust and dirt particles, while the “7” means it can be submerged in up to 1 meter of water for 30 minutes before any damage occurs, making it a great option for poolside tunes. The higher the number, the more protected your speakers will be from debris and water. This is why you can often find the Wonderboom poolside, or hanging off a showerhead. 

You may find an IP that replaces particle protection with an “X,” written as IPX7, for example. An “X” in place of any number means no data is available for that substance, or rather that the unit is not protected from that substance. 

FAQs

Q: Can cheap speakers sound good?

Yes, cheap speakers can sound good. Of course, the more you can invest, the more options you’ll have when it comes to special features, more powerful drivers, better frequency response, etc., but you don’t necessarily have to spend thousands to get good sound quality. Generally speaking, smaller speakers can’t carry the sonic load a larger speaker can (hence why portable Bluetooth speakers often lack low-end), but this doesn’t mean you can’t find something inexpensive that will suit your listening tastes. Of course, if you’re an audiophile a cheap Bluetooth speaker isn’t going to live up to your standards. 

Q: What’s the best Bluetooth speaker brand?

The best Bluetooth speaker brand is widely debated and will certainly depend on your unique needs and preferences. Bang & Olufsen are known for turning out high-end products with excellent sound quality. Sonos continues to top the charts when it comes to in-home connectivity. For more rugged, portable models our favorite brands have to be Ultimate Ears and JBL, both of which have products that claimed top spots in this article. 

Q: Which speaker is best, JBL or Sony?

When it comes to finding the best budget Bluetooth speakers, JBL is going to give you more variety. They have a diverse range of budget-friendly options in various sizes, with distinctive features, including the JBL Clip 4 and JBL Go 3. These JBL models are compact, travel-friendly units designed to move with you. Currently, Sony only has one Bluetooth speaker under $90, the Sony SRS-XB100—a model we love, but you might be better off searching elsewhere for inexpensive speakers. Return to Sony if your budget gets a bit higher, or if you start the search for other techy treats, like a new television or game console. 

Q: Which is better, JBL or Bose Bluetooth speaker?

Similar to the JBL versus Sony debate above, JBL continues to come out on top when it comes to affordable options. Bose does not currently have a model, the SoundLink Micro, that regularly retails for under $119. However, if you plan on looking for a high-end speaker, soundbar, or home system in the future, Bose is certainly a brand worth investigating. 

Q: How can I improve my Bluetooth battery life?

There are a few things you can do to improve the battery life of your Bluetooth speaker. While you can’t magically make it extend its absolute maximum playtime, you can try to prevent an early battery death. The first thing to do is to lower the volume. If you are listening at max volume all day, your speaker is going to die significantly faster. Second, when you’re not using the speaker, ensure it’s off. Some units power down automatically after a certain period of time when nothing is playing; others need to be manually shut off. 

Final thoughts on selecting the best budget Bluetooth speakers

You don’t need to go above and beyond your means to find the best budget Bluetooth speakers that will satisfy your sonic needs. There are plenty of options out there that you can take with you to the park, beach, or nearest house party without breaking the bank. Generally speaking, an inexpensive speaker won’t have all the bells and whistles a fancier model might, but you can still tune into your favorite audiobooks, podcasts, and playlists—which, at the end of the day, is all a Bluetooth speaker is designed to do.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best budget Bluetooth speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get Greenworks battery-powered lawnmowers and tools for their cheapest prices ever at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-lawnmower-garden-tool-sale-amazon/ Mon, 15 Apr 2024 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610966
Greenworks lawnmowers arranged on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Don't wait until yard work season is in full swing to get a new lawnmower, blower, string trimmer, or other Greenworks tools.

The post Get Greenworks battery-powered lawnmowers and tools for their cheapest prices ever at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Greenworks lawnmowers arranged on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

April showers have been fairly relentless lately, at least here at PopSci HQ. That means we’ll soon be neck-deep in yard work. Luckily, Amazon has Greenworks battery-powered tools for some of the lowest prices we’ve seen right now before the season starts. The sales include common yard tools like lawnmowers, string trimmers, and leaf blowers, but it also extends to more traditional tools like saws and heat guns. There are a ton of options and they’re all part of the integrated Greenworks system, so you don’t have to worry about compatibility.

Greenworks 2 x 24V 21″ Brushless Cordless (Self-Propelled) Lawn Mower + Blower (320 CFM) + 12″ String Trimmer, (2) 5.0Ah Batteries and Charger Included $486 (was $609)

Greenworks

SEE IT

This package is a great way to revamp your entire yard tool arsenal in one handy package. It includes a self-propelled lawnmower, a blower, a string trimmer, two batteries, and a charger. It’s great to have a second backup battery and you don’t really need much else to handle your basic yard maintenance. Plus the batteries work across the Greenworks ecosystem, so you can add tools a la carte as you go.

Greenworks lawnmower deals

Greenworks pressure washer deals

Greenworks chainsaw and cutting tool deals

More Greenworks tool deals

The post Get Greenworks battery-powered lawnmowers and tools for their cheapest prices ever at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated gloves in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-gloves/ Fri, 12 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461459
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let frozen fingers spoil your fun.

The post The best heated gloves in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A black pair of Gordini Forge Heated Gloves laying in the snow. Gordini Forge Heated Glove
SEE IT

Gordini’s heated leather gloves bring the heat, along with touchscreen-friendly fingertips and a removable battery.

Best for cycling A pair of Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycling Gloves on a plain background Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove
SEE IT

The Sealskinz heated cycle glove offers maximum protection from the elements.

Best for work A pair of yellow Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves on a plain blue background. Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves
SEE IT

Volt Resistance’s Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves have extra padding and cold-weather protection.

If you, like me, still enjoy spending time outdoors in below-freezing temperatures, you’ve probably considered purchasing heated gloves. I resisted for years, relying instead on chemical hand warmers and plastic bags. But, since winters seem to be getting colder and I start feeling the chill in my bones quicker than ever, I finally decided to see what all the hubbub was about. In the dead of winter, you want to keep your fingers toasty for a long time, whether you’re working up a sweat or just trekking out to the store. The best heated gloves are comfortable without impeding manual dexterity in your fingers, so you can ski, cycle, or do whatever you want in the freezing cold.

How we chose the best heated gloves

Living in New York City, I do not own a car, and while I have nothing against the city’s subway system, I prefer my bicycle as my mode of transportation. I ride/commute all year long, even through the winter. The only thing that keeps me off the bike is an active blizzard. I’ve also been lucky enough to spend months at a time cycling or trekking in remote mountain environments, like the Pamirs in Tajikistan and the Karakorum in northern Pakistan. I’ve been testing and writing about outdoor gear for over a decade for a variety of outlets, including HuffPost, BBC Travel, and Adventure Cycling. I am on a perpetual quest for cold-weather gear that works well and makes me forget that I’m even wearing it.

I tested these battery-operated heated gloves by using them like any other pair: taking them out on a bike ride or two. Cycling actively tests a glove’s grip, warmth, and wind resistance. You get to know a pair of gloves very well when you have a sustained stream of frigid wind blowing on your hands. I specifically noted how easy it was for me to operate my bike, the glove’s flexibility, and, when appropriate, their water resistance.

The best heated gloves: Reviews & Recommendations

As an outdoor and adventure lover whose hands and feet get cold easily, I feel as if I’ve spent an inordinate amount of time (and money) trying out a wide range of gear and techniques. While I admit to occasionally resorting to the wool socks and plastic bags on my feet method of combating freezing temperatures (I should try heated socks), my glove choices trend toward the more high-tech, as maintaining mobility and grippiness is almost as important as keeping warm. Here are some of the best heated gloves we’ve found for a variety of outdoor activities, and they’re a big step up from basic hand warmers in your mittens.

Best overall: Gordini Forge Heated Gloves

Emily Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These Gordini gloves are made for warmth and have all the features we could want for a cold day out.

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far-infrared fiber
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low) – 150°F (high)
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, synthetic leather on palms
  • Sizes: M/L, L/XL

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Expensive

Gordini’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. The company has been in the outdoor biz since 1956, meaning they have the track record to back up their performance.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most. You can also connect it to the clim8 app (for iOS and Android) to track battery life and customize your gloves’ temperature.

They’re a bit on the thick side but still flexible enough for shifting gears on a bicycle or holding ski poles. Gordini also sells the Forge in women’s so everyone can have warm hands while traversing the snow.

Best for cycling: Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove

Sealskinz

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, the Sealskinz waterproof heated cycle gloves keep your hands dry like no other.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber
  • Temperature range: N/A
  • Power source: 4-volt polymer rechargeable batteries
  • Battery life: 2200mAh
  • Material: Soft goatskin leather and polyester, Primaloft synthetic insulation
  • Special features: Waterproof, reflective details
  • Sizes: XS-XXL

Pros

  • Lifetime product and waterproof guarantee
  • Designed specifically for cycling
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Sizing runs small so make sure to purchase a size larger than normal

I first learned about Sealskinz products on an uncharacteristically cold, windy, and rainy group bicycle ride across the French countryside. Of the fifteen of us on the ride, all but one of us ended up with painful frozen fingers. The one guy whose hands were fine had a pair of Sealskinz waterproof gloves. I bought my own pair soon thereafter.

Many cold-weather cycling gloves do remain waterproof under sustained wet conditions, but Sealskinz’s cycling gloves keep your hands dry no matter how long you stay out. I have biked through rain, snow, and sleet storms (driving, relentless sleet for up to an hour), and very little moisture permeated the three-layer bonded construction. It features an insulation layer and a reflective layer that directs the body heat you’re generating back into the glove, keeping you extra warm. The integrated heating element produces heat for up to six hours.

A properly heated cycling glove is, in general, a rare find. Most heated gloves, while plenty warm, are often too bulky for gear-shifting and make braking cumbersome. They may also make it hard to grip your handlebars long-term properly. Sealskinz’s cycling gloves have a cycling-friendly design with a leather palm, enabling a better grip, and plenty of reflective details. (You can never have too many when commuting on dark, winter mornings.) In so many ways, it is the perfect winter cycling glove.

Best for motorcycling: Kemimoto Heated Gloves

Kemimoto

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kemimoto’s heated gloves are very warm and durable, making them an excellent choice for motorcycle rides in the blustery cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Thin wires woven into fabric
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500mAh 
  • Material: Faux leather
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Long-lasting heat—up to 9 hours on lowest setting
  • 3 heating levels
  • Good price

Cons

  • Thick

Kemimoto’s heated gloves really emphasize the “heated” facet of the heated glove. They feature 2,500MaH batteries that can last up to nine hours on the lowest setting. Kemimoto gloves offer three heating levels.

Looking at the glove itself, it features a water- and windproof outer layer. The wrist buckle and velcro closure at the cuff allow for a secure fit that will block out a cold wind no matter how fast you’re going. These feature an anti-grip palm and have protective knuckle guards and reflective coating.

Best for work: Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves

Volt Resistance

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Volt Resistance’s 7v Work gloves are much more durable and made for working outside in extreme cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: “Zero layer” heat system: Thin wires bonded to the lining fabric
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500 mAh
  • Heat settings: 4
  • Material: Leather, tricot lining
  • Special features: Extra leather on palm for durability
  • Sizes: S-XXL

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Padded palms for added comfort
  • Heats entire hand

Cons

  • A bit bulky around the fingers

I grew up in northern Ohio near Lake Erie. My dad did a lot of work outside, including many wood-cutting expeditions to my Grandparents’ woods to procure fuel for our wood-burning stove. He had this amazing pair of yellow leather, fleece-lined work gloves that he’d wear on these trips. I liked to wear them around the house because I was fascinated with how they’d molded themselves into the exact shape of his hands and with how small my own hands felt inside them.

Constructed from durable yellow-stained leather with padded, reinforced palms, these heated work gloves from Volt Resistance remind me of the ones my dad wore. Heating wires extend through the entire glove, including the fingers, thumbs, and palms to provide full coverage across your hand. There’s a clear window on the back of the glove near the wrist that clearly shows how much power remains in the batteries. 

I bought a pair for my dad last Christmas. His review: “Wow, what will they think of next? You know, back in the day, we just put plastic bags on our hands under our gloves. These are definitely way better than that.”

Best for fingertips: Savior Thick Electric Heated Mittens

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re a mitten person, this heated version from Savior is the warmest pair we’ve found. 

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, neoprene, cotton
  • Special Features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros

  • Great for winter sports
  • Soft and flexible
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Battery is bulky at the base

This updated version of Savior’s heated mittens has double the heated wires and elements in the thumb area as the previous model. My thumbs are always the first of my digits to be affected by the cold, but these kept me warm during an ice canyon tour and skating on Mildred Lake in Jasper, Alberta, in February.

I wouldn’t use these for cycling or any other activity where flexibility and dexterity are super important. Still, they’re cozier than most gloves and a perfect fit for low-key outdoor events.

Best for skiing: Akaso Heated Gloves

AKASO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The anti-slip surface of these splashproof and breathable Akaso gloves makes them perfect for gripping ski poles.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber heating panels
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 3200mAh 
  • Heating levels: 3
  • Material: Faux leather, cotton
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Splash proof
  • Breathable
  • Reflective strip
  • Warm up quickly

Cons

  • Limited long-term waterproofing

Featuring a layer of 3M Thinsulate material that retains heat 1.5 times better than down, anti-slip gripping material on the palms, and a cuff drawstring to secure them around your wrist, these Akaso heated gloves offer the right kind of protection for skiers and snowboarders.

Carbon fiber heating panels cover the back of the hand, fingers, and thumb (not the palm). The heating elements are covered by water-repellent nylon and the 3M Thinsulate, which keeps your hands warm with or without the electric heat on. They’re warm and comfortable in good weather but don’t fare as well in the rain or snow. With a steady stream of precipitation, you will eventually feel moisture penetrate the outer layer and start to pool inside the glove. That said, they’re perfect for clear, sunny, ski days.

Best thin: Sun Will Heated Glove Liners

Sun Will

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heated glove liners from Sun Will are so light you’ll almost forget you have them on.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, lycra, fleece
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros:

  • Thin and light
  • Soft
  • Can wear under another pair of gloves
  • Great for arthritis and blood circulation

Cons:

  • Not as durable as thicker, bulkier gloves

Made from lycra and fleece, these gloves are intended to fit close to your hand and be worn under a waterproof glove shell when needed. If you already have a favorite pair of waterproof gloves you wear while hiking or skiing, add these as an underlayer on particularly blustery days. You can, of course, also wear them on their own. 

Thin heated gloves are also especially useful if you suffer from chronically cold hands, even when indoors. They’re excellent for stimulating blood circulation, whether you need to warm up from the cold or need help with symptoms caused by arthritis or Raynaud’s Syndrome.

Best budget: Hot Hands Heated Fleece Glove/Mittens

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want to keep your hands warm without spending much money, a pair of cheap gloves and hand warmers will do the trick.

Specs

  • Heating elements: iron powder, salt, water, activated carbon. Oxygen reacts with the iron and salt to form iron oxide, which releases heat
  • Power source: Chemical air-activated hand warmers
  • Battery life: N/A
  • Heating levels: N/A
  • Material: Fleece, leather palm
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: M/L-L/XL

Pros

  • No batteries or charging required
  • Inexpensive
  • TSA approved
  • Made in USA

Cons

  • Not very breathable
  • Not waterproof

Chemical hand warmers are the original, low-tech way to keep your hands (and feet) warm while out in adverse conditions. Working on outdoor TV productions in cold weather, we buy them in bulk and dole them out to cast and crew like candy. Any actor you see filming outside on a blustery day very likely has a hand warmer shoved into each of their pockets.

These fleece hybrid glove/mittens from Hot Hands, one of the biggest names in hand warmers, have a handy pocket to insert a warmer and hold them in place. Each individually sealed warmer is air-activated when removed from its package and stays warm for 10 hours. That’s as long as you’ll get from any battery-powered heated glove. On the other hand, you’ll have to buy more hand warmers after using the single pair that comes with the gloves. A box of 40 additional warmers costs about $22.00, though, so you’re still spending less than you would on our top pick.

The gloves themselves are the kind with fingers and a foldable mitten you can pull over your fingers when needed. They’re made from toasty warm fleece with a TruGrip leather palm. Are they as warm as our other picks? No. Do they offer the same wind and water resistance? Not really. But they’re very affordable, and those hand warmers will keep you warm in a pinch.

What to consider when buying heated gloves

While the majority of heated gloves available offer similar features, each one feels slightly different than the others and performs differently when worn out in the elements. Everyone also has their own personal criteria when evaluating apparel. I personally look for a pair of gloves that I don’t have to think about too much while I’m out in the cold. With that in mind, here are some things you should look for when buying your next pair of heated gloves.

How do heated gloves work?

Heated clothing has ultra-thin metal wires or fibers built into it that warm up when electricity passes through them. These wires or far-infrared fibers, most commonly made from carbon or a metal composite, are woven or fused directly into or onto an internal fabric layer. The voltage of batteries used in heating clothing like the best heated slippers and best heated insoles and best heated vests is low enough that there is no chance of electrical shock.

Fit and size

To ensure your glove provides maximum warmth without restricting manual dexterity, you should measure your hand and make sure you get the right size. Gloves are not one-size-fits-all. Moreover, the measurements for each size vary from manufacturer to manufacturer, so that you may require a medium from one brand and a large one from another.

In a properly fitted glove, your fingertips should reach just shy of the end of the glove—about a ¼ to 3/8 of an inch—so you have a full range of movement. The wrist portion of the glove should run far enough up your arm to tuck into or extend over a jacket sleeve, preventing cold air from getting under it.

Most manufacturers will have a size chart on their websites, showing you how to measure your hand and find the right size with each brand.

Waterproofing

To waterproof or not to waterproof? That is the question. Waterproofing measures generally make clothing less breathable so that body sweat will get trapped inside. In other words, your waterproof gloves may soak up sweat and start to smell more quickly than a less water-resistant pair. On the other hand, you don’t want to get completely soaked and end up with gloves full of water. 

Many heated gloves have a waterproof fabric on the outside part of the glove and something breathable on the palm area, giving you the best of both options (kind of like how packable rain jackets sometimes have strategically more breathable panels). Breathable fabric on the underside of your hand reduces the chances of sweat building up in your palms, which could affect your ability to grip a ski pole or climbing rope. Having waterproof fabric on the outside of your gloves—the part that is most often exposed directly to snow and rain—means excess water won’t be able to penetrate the glove. As a general rule, if you’re likely to find yourself outside when it’s actively snowing or raining, go with a waterproof option.  

Battery life

Most heated gloves are powered by 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries, which usually last between 2 and 8 hours, depending on the temperature setting and other factors. Rather than presenting battery life estimates, which can vary quite a bit, we recommend looking at the raw battery capacity, measured in milliamp hours (mAh), which should give you a general idea of how long it should last compared to other gloves.

Some, but not all, heated gloves feature removable, replaceable battery packs. If you plan on being outside for extended periods of time, we recommend choosing gloves with replaceable batteries so you can swap them out as needed.

Touchscreen capability 

Gloves and smartphones don’t always get along. Between the padding and materials, capacitive touchscreens don’t pick up taps and swipes as easily when your fingers are covered. Having to take a glove off while in inclement weather in order to use your phone is annoying at best, and excruciating in extreme cold.

Some gloves have an outer layer over your fingertips with a special material made from copper fiber conductive yarn, making it easier to use a touchscreen without removing your gloves. Essentially, the copper in the fabric allows the gloves to interact with the electrical current produced by touchscreens. Most commonly, the material is used only on the tips of one or two fingers in a small enough area that overall warmth isn’t really affected. 

At this point, these features are fairly common, but you should check for them when picking a cheaper glove or something from a less technical brand.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated gloves cost?

Most of our favorite heated gloves cost around $100. There are alternatives, like our budget pick, which cost considerably less. That said, there isn’t too much variation between major and minor brands, so you should expect to spend $100 or more for high-quality heated gloves.

Q: Where do I recycle my heated gloves?

Recycle heated gloves anywhere that takes clothing and textiles as long as you remove the batteries beforehand. To recycle rechargeable lithium-ion batteries properly, you will need to find a local recycling center that’s certified in handling electronic waste. Check with your local recycling and waste disposal service to find out where.

Q: Are heated gloves or mittens better?

It’s largely a matter of personal preference. Gloves are the obvious choice if you’re doing something where you need your fingers to move individually. If you’re doing nothing, literally standing still, mittens may be better because your fingers keep each other warm. That said, the materials and design in modern technical gloves and mittens both keep your hands very warm.

Q: Are heated gloves worth it?

Heated gloves are definitely worth it if your fingers are always cold and you enjoy outdoor activities in the winter months. Frozen, stiff fingers will spoil the fun every time—and could be potentially dangerous. Heated gloves don’t really cost more than conventional winter gloves without a heating element, and are more convenient to carry around than a heated blanket

Final thoughts on the best heated gloves

Heated gloves are great when you need to work or want to play out in extremely cold weather. By giving these naturally warm gloves a nice, battery-powered boost, you can keep your hands toasty for hours on end. There are plenty of extra warm gloves out there, though, so you have tons of options.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated gloves in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-generators/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585466
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

Portable generators come in many shapes and sizes, but we'll help you pick the best one for your specific power needs.

The post The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator on a plain background Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator
SEE IT

This 46-pound generator provides plenty of power and runs quietly.

Best high-capacity Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator on a plain background Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator
SEE IT

A five-gallon fuel tank gives it a nine-hour run time at half capacity.

Best solar Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator on a plain background Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator
SEE IT

A pair of solar panels make this an ideal solution for true off-grid experiences.

A portable generator is useful in a wide variety of situations. For camping, it can help keep your RV or van conversion fully juiced and your devices topped off. At home, it’s easy to move into place when the utility power goes out. It provides the electricity necessary to use power tools at off-grid worksites. And it’s generally essential whenever and wherever you need power but don’t have access to a plug. Portable generators come in various forms, ranging from very small portable power stations to exceptionally large (yet still mobile) gas generators. Whatever the case, the best portable generators are relatively easy to move, durable, and dependable, and we’ve tested a bunch of them to determine which are your top picks for various purposes.

How we chose the best portable generators

I am what is commonly referred to as a “gear junkie” in that I am borderline obsessive about testing a wide range of tech tools, particularly those relevant to the outdoors and varying home DIY projects. Portable power generators not only rank among those tech tools in and of themselves but have also been essential to charging all the other electricity-hungry items like phones, the best MacBooks, the best travel drones, power tools, the best electric bikes, and my trusty van conversion, not to mention an RV or home when the lights go out. I’ve also written guides about the best solar generators and inverter generators for PopSci.

That being the case, I’ve had the opportunity to test out generators of every variety, and I’ve combined that experience with insight from other PopSci writers who have tried everything from small, straightforward power stations the size of a shoebox to big, feature-rich behemoths designed to power a small army. Accordingly, I know which generators provide plenty of juice and which fizzle out under a full power load. Armed with this knowledge, I have spent over a decade reviewing generators and other equipment for outlets like Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. Occasionally, I’ve arrived at split decisions for certain categories, so to break the tie, I’ve looked to input from my fellow experts as well as reviews from real-world buyers. 

The best portable generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The picks below span a range of sizes, intended uses, and budgets. Some are small and lightweight and designed for appropriately smaller power demands, while others are big on both size and output. All, however, are portable in some capacity, whether because they’re compact and easy to carry or equipped with mobility aids like wheels and handles. 

Best overall: Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Super portable, durable, and intuitive to use, this is an outstandingly versatile, go-anywhere generator. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 46.5 pounds
  • Price: $1,299

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Rugged durability
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Only moderate power output

It shouldn’t come as much of a surprise that Honda has topped our list. The company has been making outstanding generators for a long time, and the EU2200i is the perfect representation of how the brand manages to do a little bit of everything just right. 

Compact, lightweight, and easy to carry thanks to its sturdy handle, this is about as portable as generators can get. While its 2,200W output isn’t exactly going to replace an electrical line, it’s still a solid amount to keep an RV air conditioner going, power the hungriest of power tools, or keep your fridge and a few other essentials going during a blackout. The 20- and 30-amp outlets allow you to use a typical AC plug or larger RV plug, and it’s equipped with an array of safety features to make sure nothing goes awry. 

It’s also incredibly durable. I’ve hauled mine along through many camping trips, and I’m not exactly gentle with my outdoor gear. And thanks to its quiet operation, you can enjoy electrification in peace. 

Best high-capacity: Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its exceptionally high wattage and reliable operation, it will handle whatever job you throw at it.

Specs

  • Wattage: 25,000 peak/18,000 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 439 pounds
  • Price: $3,999

Pros

  • Super high power output
  • Reliable operation
  • Sturdy handle and wheels

Cons

  • Extremely heavy

When only the utmost power will suffice, look no further than the Generac 18000EFI. With its massive 18,000W running output, this monster will easily power a whole house, large-scale job worksite, or multiple RVs. Admittedly, its 439-pound heft takes a lot of liberty with the “portable” distinction, but its sturdy handle and wheels and well-balanced weight make it fairly easy to maneuver around. 

With its massive 5-gallon fuel tank, it will run for up to 9 hours on a 50 percent load, and an hour meter tracks usage and displays how much operating time it has left. Seven outlets spanning 20-50 amps provide plenty of high power port options, and it’s equipped with circuit breakers and other essential safety features. Powerful and reliable, this generator will deliver on pretty much any and all power needs. 

Best solar: Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Great portability, solid capacity, and lightning-fast charging make this the best mid-sized solar generator on the market. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,000 peak/2,000 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall
  • Weight: 9.92 lbs
  • Price: $1,249

Pros

  • Supremely portable
  • Extremely fast charging
  • Plenty of ports

Cons

  • Not intended for rugged use

Solar power generators have become a big hit as of late with the van life crowd in particular, and we’re a fan of Jackery. The Jackery 1000 Plus is the best mid-sized option out there thanks to its perfect fusion of input/output capability, paramount portability, and generally well-considered design elements. With 1,264 watt-hour capacity and 2,000W output, it’s the perfect choice for packing along on a camping trip or placing at the heart of your van conversion. Capable of charging in under two hours via a wall outlet or solar panel array, it has one of the fastest charge speeds around.

A number of smart design choices elevates its portability. Lightweight, perfectly squared, with a fold-flat handle, it’s easy to move, store, or build into a van conversion. It’s also expandable thanks to Jackery’s new add-on batteries, which essentially means you can bring along as much or as little power as you need. Jackery has also added the ability to monitor and adjust settings via an app, which makes it easier to use in general. 

Best for RVs: Champion Power Equipment 200988 4500 Watt Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Champion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High portability, high power output, quiet operation, and dual fuel functionality make this a must for avid RVers. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,500 peak/3,150 running
  • Power source: Gas or propane
  • Weight: 97 pounds
  • Price: $1,359

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Higher-end wattage
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Somewhat heavy

The Champion 200988 hits the sweet spot for RV generators by pretty much every metric. It runs on both gas and propane, making it easy to find fuel when out in the wild. Its 4,500W output is more than enough to power almost any RV—even with the air conditioner turned on. It’s relatively quiet, so it won’t ruin the outdoorsy mood. And it offers straightforward, intuitive operation. 

What’s more, it’s exceedingly rare to find a generator that delivers so much wattage in such a portable package. Compact, squared off for easy packing, and equipped with sturdy handles and wheels, it’s easy to bring along in the RV. While its weight is just under 100 pounds, not exactly featherlight, it’s also not unmanageably heavy. And while I prefer the dual-fuel version, there are also single-fuel gas and propane options that feature a remote start, allowing you to switch it on or off without leaving the comfort of your camper.  

Best for home backup: Westinghouse 9500 Portable Generator

Westinghouse

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Powerful, remote starting, and relatively mobile, this is the perfect generator to wheel into place when the power goes out.

Specs

  • Wattage: 9,500 peak/7,500 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 196 pounds
  • Price: $899

Pros

  • High wattage
  • Remote starting
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Pretty heavy

When the lights go out at home, the Westinghouse 9500 is a solid backup in every way you could want it to be. It’s certainly not light, but its handles and wheels make it easy to maneuver into place—my 70-year-old mother carts hers around with no problems. Its above-average wattage is plenty strong for most household demands, and its 6.6-gallon tank allows for an admirable 11-hour runtime. A remote starter allows you to switch it on without braving the storm. And Westinghouse generators are built solid, typically lasting through many years of use without issue.

It’s also equipped with plenty of smart safety features. Circuit breakers, low-oil auto shutdown, and rubber covers over the plugs reduce the potential for various risks. A (sold separately) smart switch allows it to switch on automatically when utility power goes out. And it’s relatively quiet, producing roughly the same decibels as a vacuum cleaner. For all practical purposes, it’s exactly what you want from a home backup generator. 

Best budget: Craftsman C0010020 2,200 Watt Portable Generator

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Good specs and great portability in a low-cost package make this an outstanding budget pick.

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,700 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 46.3 pounds
  • Price: $510

Pros

  • Very portable
  • Parallel capable
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Not for high-power use

The great thing about the Craftsman C0010020 is that it does a little bit of everything right, and it does it without breaking the bank. While its modest wattage probably isn’t going to keep an entire house or RV going, it’s plenty to keep a few essentials like the fridge, lights, and key devices powered—or even a lower-draw air conditioner. It’s parallel capable, meaning you can chain it to a second generator to double the output when you need more juice. It’s also lightweight, quiet, and dependably built. 

There are other generators out there in the $500 neighborhood, but if they deliver on all the promises above, I haven’t seen them.

Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP 13000HX Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High power output, intuitive operation, and relative mobility translate into dual-fuel excellence.

Specs

  • Wattage: 13,000 peak/10,500 running on gas – 12,350 peak/9,975 running on propane
  • Power source: Gas and propane
  • Weight: 240 pounds
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Very high power output
  • Helpful data display

Cons

  • Very heavy

The main benefit of a dual-fuel generator is in the name: the availability of two fuel options, which can be essential in an emergency situation. The DuroMax XP 13000HX delivers that versatility along with outstanding power output, intuitive operation, and reliable, long-lasting durability. I’m also a big fan of the data display, which provides useful information like voltage, hours of operation, and even a countdown to the recommended maintenance. A CO2 safety switch also detects carbon monoxide and then shuts the generator down if the levels become dangerous. 

This is definitely one of the heavier generators on the list, but it’s equipped with strong handles and smooth-rolling wheels that make it easy to move around. It also boasts a super-heavy duty 50 amp outlet, so in other words, this thing is a true beast. 

Most portable: Bluetti AC180 Portable Power Station

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: As portable as they come with great stats all around, this is the definition of go-anywhere power. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,700 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall plug
  • Weight: 37.4 pounds
  • Price: $599

Pros

  • Extremely portable
  • Solid power stats
  • Plenty of outlets

Cons

  • Dual solar inputs would be nice

If you’re looking for an ultra-portable box of on-the-go power, the Bluetti AC180 is it. The lightest and most compact on our list, it still has solid power chops thanks to its 1,152Wh capacity and ability to temporarily crank up its power output as high as 2,700W via the brand’s app. That capacity can be expanded via Bluetti’s new add-on batteries, and it can be fully charged within an hour. 

While adding a second solar input wouldn’t hurt, if you’re looking for a reliable box of power that you can bring along pretty much anywhere with ease, you’ve found it.

What to consider when shopping for the best portable generators

A portable generator tends to be a pretty big investment not only financially but in that it’s a piece of equipment that you plan to rely on—potentially in emergency situations—for many years to come. This being the case, there are several key considerations to remember when choosing the right one for your needs: 

Power output

First and foremost, you need a generator that will meet your electricity needs. When shopping for generators, you’ll typically see output expressed via two numbers, both of which are measured in watts (W). “Running” or “rated” output is the typical amount of watts produced at any given time, while “Peak” output is the amount it can produce in momentary surges, while switching on a power tool or air conditioner, for example. Read the wattage requirements for the various things you expect to power, total them up, and then look for a generator that delivers the appropriate output. Generally speaking, if you’re just looking to keep a few devices charged, 2,000W is the most you’ll need. For power tools, RVs, or a refrigerator, you should aim toward 4,000W. If you expect to be powering a full home, however, you will want at least 7,500W.

Fuel type and capacity

Generators almost always run on either gas, solar power, or, in the case of dual-fuel models, a combination of gas and propane. Which is right for you depends on considerations like access and the environment. Gas is typically the most convenient option as it can be acquired pretty much anywhere, though it pollutes more and tends to deliver louder operation. Adding the propane option provides greater versatility, which can be helpful if you’re out in the wild or in the event of an emergency, and it also produces less harmful emissions. (We love it in our grills, so why not our generators?) Solar is an environmentally friendly, nearly silent fuel, but it relies on the availability of sunshine and can’t deliver the same level of wattage as fossil fuels.

Next you need to consider capacity. The larger the fuel tank or battery capacity, the longer a generator will provide power, but it also increases the weight. If you plan on using your generator at home, a larger model that can be wheeled around is a fine choice. If you’ll be packing your generator along on camping trips, however, you’ll probably need to compromise some capacity in favor of lighter portability. 

Starting type

With gas or propane-fueled generators, you’ll almost always have the option to use a recoil cord and an electric starter, as it’s fairly standard for generators to come with both these days. The cord requires a lot of physical effort but will allow you to start the generator under any condition, while the electric start fires things up at the push of a button, though it won’t work if the internal battery is drained. Some models offer remote starters that you can fire up from the comfort of your home or RV. This isn’t really a consideration with solar generators as they tend to be plug-and-play.

Operating noise

Generators can be extremely loud, so volume should be a consideration if you don’t want to bother the neighbors at home or disrupt the peace and quiet while camping. While there are exceptions, typically speaking, the larger and more powerful a generator is, the louder it gets. The best portable generators tend to boast heavy shielding to reduce noise, though this only helps up to a point. 

If noise isn’t much of a concern, then go big and go loud. But if you want to minimize the racket, choose a smaller model, a dual-fuel that uses propane (which is somewhat quieter than gas), or the near-silence of solar.

Plugs

If a particular model doesn’t have the plugs you need, then it’s not much use to you. Most mid-large-sized generators come with AC outlets of 20-amp and 30-amp ratings, which will allow you to plug in most devices and RVs. Smaller units, especially solar, frequently don’t include a 30 amp port, so they might not work for your RV needs. If you’re looking for true max power output, you’ll need one of the few and far between generators with a 50-amp plug. 

FAQs

Q: Can I use my portable generator indoors?

Absolutely not! This can kill anyone indoors with the generator very quickly. Carbon monoxide can build up even in partially enclosed areas like barns or garages, so be sure to run them outdoors and away from windows. Solar generators, however, do not pose this risk as they produce no harmful gasses. 

Q: Are portable generators a fire hazard?

As with anything involving gas or propane, fire and explosion are a risk. To prevent the danger of fire, ensure you never over-fill the tank, clean up any fuel that spills, and never fill a generator while it’s hot from running. Here again, solar generators avoid this danger. 

Q: Can a portable generator operate in the rain or snow?

A generator should not be run while wet, as it can lead to damage or electrocution. Be sure to position it out of the weather or protect it with a cover of some sort.

Q: What happens if I overload my generator?

Overloading can cause the generator to overheat and become damaged, leading to serious damage to the electronic equipment being powered. If your generator isn’t rated to power everything you want it to, prioritize your needs to stay within its limits or get a bigger generator.

Q: How long can a generator run continuously?

That depends on the specific model and its fuel capacity, though it can range anywhere from 5 to 15 hours. Read all manufacturer recommendations carefully to ensure you stay within its operating time and avoid the risk of damage. 

Final thoughts on the best portable generators

A good portable generator can not only be useful when camping or off-grid, but it can be vital and even life-saving in an emergency. While theoretically, you want as big a generator as possible, you also want one that’s actually portable, so get a model suited to your needs rather than the largest you can find. Bigger isn’t always better, especially when it comes to mobility. Try to strike the balance between the two appropriate to your circumstances. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable generators in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best party speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-party-speakers/ Tue, 28 Mar 2023 21:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=522656
The best party speakers sliced header
Tony Ware

Bring the funk, noise, and everything in between with party speakers that aren't a cheap trick (but are made to play some).

The post The best party speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best party speakers sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Boombox 3 JBL speaker comparison portable party speaker in black JBL Boombox 3
SEE IT

JBL’s Boombox 3 hits the sweet spot between portability, battery life, additional features, and cost.

Best With Lights JBL PartyBox 110 Bluetooth party speaker with lights product image JBL PartyBox 110
SEE IT

JBL’s PartyBox 110 is a big, bass-thumping speaker with lights that impress as much as its sound.

Best Budget: Tribit XSound Mega budget Bluetooth party speaker product image Tribit XSound Mega
SEE IT

The Tribit XSound Mega shares many of the features as some other picks but at a way lower cost.

Party speakers may be the most misunderstood mainstream category in the audio world. Contrary to popular belief, party speakers aren’t limited to bass-heavy Bluetooth models. Of course, there’s nothing wrong with bassy Bluetooth speakers. Don’t worry, we’re going to recommend you some how-low-can-you-go options. However, a party speaker, to us at least, can be an all-in-one PA system, a practice amp that doubles as a speaker, a speaker that lights up the room just with dance music or that adds in equally kinetic LEDs. The best party speakers can be a concert for one or for everyone, and they can be found in selections for every type of celebration.

How we chose the best party speakers

This speaker category is extremely broad, so we took a fairly granular approach when choosing our recommendations. A mix of hands-on testing and research lead us to a list of speakers that range from pint-sized to powerful, covering common and niche needs. Special attention was paid to bass performance, connectivity options, durability, expandability, and portability. The right party speaker for you will depend on whether you’re throwing backyard cookouts or basement ragers, are looking for something that sits on a desk or a deck, need something to provide a solo gaming soundtrack or that might require guests to wear earplugs. We don’t judge. Well, we do judge some things, like audio quality and connectivity. But parties aren’t the time for critical listening, so what we recommend by the pool or for a DJ is very different than what we’d look for in our best powered speakers or best bookshelf speakers for music lovers. We’ve also been mindful of how much these speakers cost, with recommendations ranging from under $60 to $530.

The best party speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

We’ve cut through the noise to present speakers to suit everybody’s needs. You saw our overall methodology above and can find more information on our key considerations later in this story. Now, let’s get the party started.

Best overall: JBL Boombox 3

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 8.6 inches
  • Power source: Battery power (up to 24 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
  • IP rating: IP67

Pros

  • Massive bass driver
  • Can be connected with up to 99 other JBL speakers
  • Excellent battery life

Cons

  • Big and heavy for a portable speaker

JBL’s Boombox 3 pushes the limits of what you can expect from a portable Bluetooth speaker. The subwoofer in its three-way speaker configuration is larger than the ones you’ll find on some desktop speakers or compact monitors, so you should expect loud, thunderous sound. You won’t just hear the drop on EDM tracks, you’ll literally feel it radiate down to 40Hz if the speaker’s 160 watts are cranked all the way up. In fact, the only way you’ll get a louder, bigger bass around the same size is by picking up something like JBL’s PartyBox 110, which we’ll introduce in more detail below.

The Boombox 3’s large size comes with one big pro—beyond great sound, of course—and a necessary con. In the plus column, this speaker can last up to 24 hours on a single charge, easily enough time to get you through a proper rager. JBL says the amount of battery life you’ll get ultimately depends on your listening volume, which is true, but the Boombox 3 should still last all night (literally) even when it’s being maxed out. That said, a big battery and large drivers contribute to this speaker’s 22-inch width and nearly 15-pound weight. This speaker is portable, but it’ll need someone willing to lug it around—luckily, it’s equipped with a sturdy molded handle.

JBL has gotten around this by designing the Boombox 3 with support for its PartyBoost feature, which allows you to link it with up to 99 other JBL speakers. Several JBL speakers support this feature, so you could use the Boombox 3 as your main party speaker, then spread a couple of smaller models around the periphery of your party space to blanket more ground (for example, you could put several lava-lamp-like JBL Pulse 5 speakers around to visualize the vibe). We can’t think of a room—or entire floor, frankly—that this speaker wouldn’t blanket in loud sound on its own, however.

If your parties take place outdoors, the JBL Boombox 3 is a great choice thanks to its IP67 rating (for a detailed explanation of IP, check out our considerations at the bottom of this feature). This Boombox 3 can get splashed, rained on, spilled on, or even dunked underneath the water for several minutes without skipping a beat. And it can stand up to dust or sand. Durability is definitely not an issue. The speaker shown above has taken a licking and kept on kicking … or maybe that’s taken a kicking and kept on ticking, as it got hit by a soccer ball while providing the soundtrack to a high-intensity practice on the field pictured. If its size and weight (and $449 price) don’t intimidate you, the JBL Boombox 3’s bass performance, battery life, and durability are a pretty unbeatable combination.

Best portable: Sony SRS-XG300

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 2.7 inches (2x)
  • Power source: Battery (up to 25 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
  • IP rating: IP67

Pros

  • Mega Bass button for even more low end
  • Exceptional audio quality
  • Best battery life for a portable party speaker

Cons

  • Very few devices can take full advantage of this speaker’s audio potential

Sony has been making party speakers for half a decade, but the SRS-XG300 is the first time it seems to take this category very seriously. It’s completely overhauled the look of its party speakers, with a mesh covering that screams sophistication, with LED rings that surround its pair of 2.7-inch bass drivers with a subtle glow rather than a garish one. And the unobtrusive handle conveniently slides in and out of the top, an aesthetically pleasing marriage of form and function. Put simply, the SRS-XG300 speaker looks sophisticated during the day but a little more fun at night. The LEDs can be turned off using Sony’s app or a button on the backside of this party speaker so you can ignore them entirely.

That may be a good idea if you plan on stretching the SRS-XG300’s battery to its 25-hour maximum. Sony is so confident in this portable Bluetooth speaker’s battery capacity that it built a USB-A port into it, so it doubles as a power bank. In our tests, this speaker could put out a tremendous amount of bass, but it never distorted, even at high volumes. If you want a little more oomph, the speaker’s Mega Bass button boosts low-end frequencies, but never to the point that the midrange and treble get completely drowned out. If your playlist is full of bass-heavy music, turning on this setting to see how you like it won’t hurt.

The SRS-XG300 supports a Sony feature called Party Connect, which allows you to pair up to 100 speakers to play music simultaneously. This was one of our favorite features of JBL’s Boombox 3, and it remains impressive here. We can’t see any reason you’d need more than one of these speakers to fuel your beach, backyard, or basement party, but it’s nice to have the option.

You can connect any smartphone, tablet, or computer to the SRS-XG300 wirelessly over Bluetooth, but to get the most out of it, you’ll need a device that supports the LDAC codec, which allows you to stream music at a very high—nearly CD quality—bitrate. This isn’t necessarily important at a party unless you host audiophiles exclusively. Still, it’s worth pointing out since Sony’s speaker is one of the few Bluetooth models that support this feature. But it’s also worth pointing out that only select digital audio players and smartphones support this protocol (nothing Apple, which is why we lean toward this being the best portable Bluetooth speaker for Android users). You can use any Bluetooth-enabled device to connect via more traditional lossy codecs, and you also have the option to connect a device using a 3.5mm cable, thanks to its AUX input.

If the most important part of your party is taking top-notch tunes conveniently from one place to another without hitting pause, Sony’s SRS-XG300 is the clear choice.

Best with lights: JBL PartyBox 110

Markkus Rovito

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 5.25-inches (2x)
  • Power source: Battery (up to 12 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX in, 1/4-inch inputs (2x)
  • IP rating: IPX4

Pros

  • Massive
  • Doubles as a dual-input PA system
  • Can be used portably in a pinch

Cons

  • Overkill in most cases

There’s no getting around the fact that the JBL PartyBox 110 is a big party speaker, but if you have enough space and need to entertain a large crew with live music or a pre-made mix, it’s the ideal choice. You can read more about this large speaker in our full review, but it’s ultimately a treat for both the eyes and ears. The PartyBox 110 occupies an interesting place in JBL’s party speaker lineup, sitting between our approved entry-level PartyBox, the Encore Essential, and the much larger PartyBox 1000 (a behemoth of a speaker we’ve auditioned and enjoyed). It’s also much more than a typical Bluetooth speaker, party-friendly or otherwise.

The big LEDs surrounding the PartyBox 110’s pair of bass drivers turn the front of this speaker into a big figure eight. These lights can be programmed to a handful of patterns—including synced to the beat—or turned off entirely to preserve battery life. Yes, despite the amount of air it’s pushing and the show it bestows, the PartyBox 110 can run for up to 12 hours without being plugged into an outlet. It’s also one of the only speakers in its size class to have an IP4X rating, which means it can be splashed with water without incident.

It may not support JBL’s PartyBoost, but two of these speakers can be paired together wirelessly. This makes sense when you realize the PartyBox 110 has a pair of 1/4-inch audio inputs designed for a microphone and instrument. Connecting these speakers together will double the number of inputs, giving you greater flexibility when setting up come competitive karaoke.

If you only plan on using this speaker with prerecorded music, you’ll be treated to loud, room-shaking sound at the highest volume levels. PA-style party speakers are known for their bass performance, but JBL built a Bass Boost button onto the top of the PartyBox 110 to really drive the point home for lovers of lower frequencies. Let’s face it, the PartyBox 110 isn’t necessary for the average cocktail party or even cookout, but having the extra power in your back pocket won’t hurt if it becomes necessary.

Best for outdoor patio party: Rocksteady Stadium Travel Combo 

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 5.1-inches
  • Power source: Battery (Up to 16 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, 2.5mm
  • IP rating: N/A

Pros

  • Modular assignable-channel speaker system
  • Discrete dedicated subwoofer
  • Unlimited speakers can be connected
  • Portability

Cons

  • You have to keep track of/charge multiple speakers

By now, most people are familiar with a 2.1 speaker system in a home theater environment, which indicates Left and Right speakers paired with a dedicated subwoofer to push the lows higher. Now the Rocksteady Stadium Travel Combo lets you take it into the great outdoors. All three touch-controlled speakers connect to one another via a Bluetooth 5.0 mesh network, which means you can place them anywhere you’d like so long as they’re within 100 feet of one another. This will allow you to cover a larger area without turning the volume knob to 11. Pick up four 6-inch-tall multidriver rectangles and turn your patio into a quadraphonic quarter. There’s a mid-bass driver and passive radiator paired with the tweeter in each. Still, for the deepest bass experience, you’ll want to keep the discrete front-firing subwoofer (or subwoofers) near a wall so the sound gets reinforced by reverberations.

Many party speakers we recommend can be chained to play simultaneously in mono, but Rocksteady designed its hardware exclusively to be immersive—letting you assign each as Left/Right/Dual channel. Because of that, you can pair an unlimited number of speakers in various multidirectional configurations, though hitting this theoretical limit—or lack thereof—probably won’t be necessary. We like the modularity of the Stadium Mode system, but it isn’t waterproof, which can be a problem if your outdoor area has a pool. If that’s the case, a cadre of UE’s WONDERBOOM 3 mini-speakers may be a better pick; these $99 floatable orbs produce surprisingly loud 360-degree sound, can be linked via PartyBoost and, being dustproof, are also one of the best speakers to take with you to the beach.

The only real downside to getting a multispeaker system is that you’ll need to monitor multiple pieces of audio hardware at all times. Every speaker needs to be charged separately, which can require some juggling if your place doesn’t have too many outlets. Luckily, battery life is rated at 16 hours, and the speakers are USB-C Quick Charge equipped. If that isn’t an issue, we can recommend taking Rocksteady’s Stadium Travel Combo to any outdoor party you’re hosting or attending.

Best for house party performances: JBL EON ONE Compact Personal PA

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 8-inch woofer
  • Power source: Battery (Up to 12 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX in, 1/4-inch input, mic/line input (2x)
  • IP rating: N/A

Pros

  • Simple setup
  • Easy-to-use controls
  • Portable
  • On-unit 4-channel mixer with EQ and effects
  • Built-in microphone preamps
  • Phantom power

Cons

  • Can be too quiet for loud practices
  • Reverb effect is subtle for those looking for washed-out sound

The JBL EON ONE Compact Personal PA offers musicians and DJs an easy-to-setup audio solution for smaller performance situations. Weighing just under 18 pounds, packing a 12-hour swappable rechargeable battery, the speaker is light enough to carry to and from smaller gigs and fits easily in the trunk or backseat of most cars. 

The onboard 4-channel mixer offers two XLR/TRS combo jacks, one 1/4-inch guitar input, and a 1/8-inch aux input for dialing in the mix. If you’re using a condenser microphone, the unit also comes equipped with phantom power. The EON ONE Compact Personal PA’s four-channel configuration provides the flexibility to create a balanced mix of guitars, vocals, and backing tracks from the controls on the speaker itself or via the JBL app. Connect your phone via Bluetooth to access Lexicon and dbx-inspired 4-band EQ, reverb, chorus, and delay (with quick-recall presets), plus control the volume or stream music wirelessly. 

The unit can sit vertically or horizontally and provides a built-in pole mount socket for elevated placements. This flexibility allows the system to thrive in various settings, as a monitor or for broadcast, even when space is tight. Two USB 3.0 ports let you high-speed charge tablets, phones, and bus-powered DJ devices—perfect if you mix digital formats. According to JBL, a 1/4-inch (6.3mm) passthrough lets you connect up to four speakers and extend your mix to larger crowds. [We only got one speaker, so we couldn’t try this out.] 

The EON ONE Compact can reach 112 dB and the 8-inch bass driver hits 37.5 Hz, though it isn’t ideal for louder rock shows. However, it is a great option for solo and acoustic gigs and smaller gatherings where you want a bigger sound without a big hassle.

Best for guitarists: Positive Grid Spark MINI

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 2-inches (2x)
  • Power source: Battery (Up to 8 hours)
  • Expandable: No
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX input, 1/4-inch input
  • IP rating: N/A

Pros

  • Ultra-portable guitar amp
  • Ability to switch between 10,000 tones
  • Smart Jam Live mode

Cons

  • Only worthwhile for musicians

The Positive Grid Spark MINI was designed for musicians who don’t just want to attend a party; they want to amp up the entertainment at a party. However, its support for Bluetooth and the presence of an AUX input allow you to kick out other people’s jams too. As a 3.3-pound practice amp, the Spark MINI is surprisingly capable. Battery-powered and DSP-based, it has a single 1/4-inch input to plug in almost any electric instrument with a standard cable and get a far more robust tone than you might expect looking at the compact cube. You can add accompaniment (drums and bass) by pairing the speaker to your phone to play a backing track (or use your phone to learn with the Positive Grid app’s auto chords feature). Knobs on top of the Spark MINI let you independently adjust the volume of your music and that amazing new electric guitar you just picked up till you get the right mix (though the MINI plays nicely with acoustic guitar and bass, as well). You can even select your tone from an online library of over 10,000 sculpted through Positive Grid’s BIAS tone engine and shared through its app. It’s like carrying a Marshall stack or AMPEG cabinet … in a backpack.

Suppose you’re a solo musician going to a small get-together. In that case, the Positive Grid Spark MINI is way more practical to lug around than the other PA-capable party speaker we recommend. And with its 8-hour battery life, it will satisfy all but the most out-there jam-band fans. With just two 2-inch drivers and a passive radiator, it won’t earn the party speaker seal of approval as just a Bluetooth speaker, but it’s nice to have a near-field option if you’re in a small space with a handful of friends. Just avoid water (or a spilled beer) with this one. However, none of these downsides are dealbreakers because the Spark MINI is capable of its main task. One of this party speaker’s underrated features is its Line Out, which allows you to connect the amp to a larger PA. If you like a specific guitar tone from Positive Grid’s library and show up to a party with a larger system, you can use your preferred effects with a lot of additional volume.

When you’re not entertaining guests, you can connect this amp directly to your computer using its USB-C port and use it as an interface to record your instrument with your own custom guitar tone using the PreSonus Studio One digital audio workstation software that comes with it. Everybody likes going to a party with live music, but bringing all the equipment necessary for it at the last minute is not always practical. With the Positive Grid Spark MINI, it’s possible to fit everything you need for a “gig” in the back seat of a small car, making it a lot more reasonable.

Willing to trade a little space for more physical tone controls and more room-filling sound? The “full-sized” 40W Positive Grid Spark is still plenty portable, whether you’re ascending a stairway to heaven, speeding down a highway to hell, or taking friends and family on any other number of musical detours.

Best for gamers: GravaStar Mars Pro

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 2.76 inches (2x)
  • Power source: Battery (Up to 15 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
  • IP rating: IPX7

Pros

  • Intricate design
  • Stereo pairing support
  • Two subwoofers

Cons

  • Limited connectivity options

GravaStar’s Mars Pro proves there ain’t no party like a LAN party. OK, most of our competitive gaming is done remotely, but we like listening to big beats and bouncy bands with our big broadband. This 7.5-inch-tall wireless party speaker is relatively small but has multiple drivers, a big bass radiator, and 25W to deliver lots of low-end. Its distinctive, futuristic look will fit into a party hosted in a game room or bring an out-of-this-world vibe anywhere with a rechargeable battery that lasts 15-20 hours. That’s doubly true if you put a pair next to one another and connect them to listen in true stereo. Still, you must applaud the industrial engineering in this speaker’s zinc alloy body. There are multiple designs and colorways, a touch-responsive volume strip, and it even has LED accents all over it that would make it eye-catching on a livestream as you blast competitors and tunes.

As far as features go, you can’t plug an instrument into it or connect it to dozens of speakers simultaneously (just the one other for true L/R channels). Still, none of those options are absolutely necessary. If anything, pairing them down allowed GravaStar to focus more on audio quality and aesthetics, including making the Mars Pro IPX7—or effectively waterproof. Our only disappointment is that the only way to connect devices to this speaker is over Bluetooth 5.0. To be fair, that’s the universal wireless connectivity standard for all of the best portable speakers. However, it would have been nice to see an AUX in jack as a backup, especially with something that sits nicely next to a computer.

If that doesn’t bother you, the GravaStar Mars Pro is an excellent party speaker for smaller rooms. If anything, your guests may spend a few seconds searching around for the sound source when you start to play music from what they might have thought was an extremely detailed model. That party trick alone may make the Mars Pro worth the price of admission.

Best Wi-Fi speaker: Sonos Move 2 

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 3.5-inches
  • Power source: Battery (Up to 24 hours)
  • Expandable: Yes
  • Connectivity options: Wi-Fi, AirPlay 2, Bluetooth
  • IP rating: IP65

Pros

  • Sonos’ ecosystem is strong
  • Excellent range
  • Amazon Alexa and Sonos Assistant compatible

Cons

  • Price

The Sonos Move 2 comes hot on the heels of the Era 100 and Era 300, Sonos’ next-generation connected speakers, and inherits many of the same great traits. One of the Move 2’s biggest selling points is its Wi-Fi connectivity, which has two distinct advantages over Bluetooth: Longer range and the ability to stream higher-resolution music files. If you have the option to be on the same Wi-Fi network as the Move 2, that’s the connectivity option we recommend.

The Move 2 isn’t Sonos’ only portable speaker, but the diminutive Roam is too small to be used as a party speaker—especially given its price. The Move 2 is a lot larger, but the extra volume allowed Sonos to use better audio hardware. Sonos’ advancements in amp and driver technology shine through, as does the company’s tasteful use of EQ. Music never sounded too bassy or treble forward, it was, cliche as it sounds, just right. The Move 2 also supports TruePlay, a feature that allows it to automatically adjust its sound using its built-in microphone to determine the size and shape of the room it’s in.

This is the only party speaker we recommend in this roundup that supports Amazon Alexa, as well as the Sonos Assistant, allowing you to use it hands-free. Sonos allows you to link streaming services through its app, so you can call up playlists or make them up on the fly without touching your phone. This feature requires an active Wi-Fi connection, so consider that if you plan on bringing the Move 2 to a beach. On a related note, this speaker has an IP56 rating, so it can get splashed with water without incident, but don’t submerge it under water.

The Sonos Move s is an excellent portable wireless speaker for all occasions, but its bigger size and louder sound do make it especially useful for a party. The Move 2’s batter is also 13 hours longer than the first-generation, so it’ll keep the party going all night long. Taking a Sonos speaker by the pool or beach is extremely appealing. Our only concern with recommending the Sonos Move 2 is its $450 price, which is steep.

If you’re happy with the way Sonos speakers sound, the Move 2 is absolutely worthwhile, and it’s the best option if you’re looking for a party speaker with a Wi-Fi connection. Only planning to have people gather inside and want to fill an entire room with multidirectional music from one standalone speaker? The new Era 300 has an original acoustic design optimized for Dolby Atmos and the captivating gradients of spatial audio.

Best budget: Tribit XSound Mega

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bass driver size: 1.5-inches (2x)
  • Power source: Battery: (Up to 20 hours)
  • Expandable: No
  • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
  • IP rating: IPX7

Pros

  • Ultra-portable, with an included shoulder strap
  • Battery lasts a long time relative to its size
  • Price

Cons

  • Smaller speakers make less sound

If you’ve spent your party budget on a venue, food, and drinks, there’s still bound to be enough in the bank for Tribit’s XSound Mega. The beach-bag-friendly speaker has two 1.5-inch bass drivers, which will pump out a reasonable amount of sound, given their size. If you’re hosting a small gathering at home or outdoors, it’ll be sufficient but don’t expect miracles at a big backyard bash.

We named this the top party pick in our guide to the best budget Bluetooth speakers because of its battery life, multiple listening modes, built-in LEDs, and carrying strap. The fact that Tribit equipped it with a USB-A port, which allows you to use it as a power bank, was a welcome feature. We found the speaker’s XBass mode added an appreciable amount of low-frequency response but found the XSound Mega distorted a little at high volumes. It never ruined the song, but the distortion was present. Alternatively, the speaker’s LEDs were surprisingly sophisticated, pulsing rhythmically as the music played.

The Tribit XSound Mega is a little barebones compared to some of our other recommendations, but it also costs under $100. You’re getting a lot of value for your money with this party speaker, which has several of the same core features as our other recommendations in a smaller, less expensive package.

What to consider when shopping for the party speakers

Bass driver

Party music is typically all about that bass—though midrange and treble shouldn’t be dismissed!—so it makes sense to focus on a party speaker’s woofer, the driver that determines how low (in the frequency range) you can go. The bigger the woofer, the more sound it can produce. The biggest impediment to bass performance is often size of the speaker itself, since a driver can only be as big as the case it’s in—though custom waveguides and well-implemented DSP can produce some surprising results. To ensure you get more bounce to the ounce, however, we’ve only chosen party speakers with larger bass drivers for this reason.

Power source

Some party speakers need to be connected to an outlet at all times because they consume too much power to run on a battery for a long period of time—if at all. The tradeoff between a smaller, less powerful party speaker and a large, high-powered one is real, but in many cases, the answer is clear. If you host large basement parties where there’s no chance of disturbing the neighbors, a plugged-in party speaker makes sense. For smaller get-togethers—especially those in the outdoors—a portable party speaker makes more sense.

Expandability

Some speaker makers allow you to daisy chain multiple speakers together, so you can play the same music in different places or listen in true stereo. In some cases, this feature is literally called PartyBoost mode. If the parties you throw take place indoors and outdoors, or you have to cover a lot of ground and don’t want a single huge speaker, expandability is key.

Connectivity

All of the party speakers we’re recommending support Bluetooth, the universal wireless standard that allows you to connect your phone, tablet, or computer to countless tech accessories. But even a universal standard has variants, so you’ll want to make sure the Bluetooth version of your source and speaker are in line (Bluetooth 5.3 devices are the most current, but there are plenty of 4.x devices floating around that still function perfectly well). Some have the option of connecting to your device over Wi-Fi, which offers a better range, a more stable signal, and higher-fidelity streaming. If you want to go old school, a 3.5mm AUX input will let you connect your source to the party speaker directly, which offers the highest level of fidelity—assuming you’re playing lossless music—but means your device is literally tethered to the speaker.

IP rating

A speaker’s IP (Ingress Protection) rating determines its durability against dust and water. Our recommendations range from having no IP rating to an IPX7 rating, which means they can be fully submerged underwater for up to 30 minutes without the risk of damage. This feature won’t matter if you keep your speaker indoors—so long as nobody spills a drink on it—but is extremely important if you host outdoor gatherings.

FAQs

Q: Are 500 watts of power enough for a party speaker?

Yes. A 500-watt speaker is powerful enough to play music at a volume suitable for indoor and outdoor parties. In many cases, a 30-watt speaker will be sufficient if you’re hosting a party on a single floor of a house.

Q: Which is better for parties, passive speakers or active speakers?

Active—also known as powered—speakers are better for parties because they have an amplifier built into them. This design feature makes them more portable, which is helpful when hosting a party. Passive speakers are an okay choice if you’ve hooked up outdoor speakers connected to an amplifier in your home.

Q: Do all party speakers come with a microphone?

No. Some party speakers have a built-in microphone, but it’s not a requirement.

Q: Are party speakers worth it?

If you host many high-energy events or value features other than purely listening to music, a party speaker is worth it. If you’re just looking for a solo-session listening station, however, you can consider everything from traditional stereo speakers to the Sonos Era 300 smart speaker for spatial audio.

Q: How much does a party speaker cost?

This depends on the speaker’s size, audio components, and additional features. Our lowest-cost recommendation costs $60, but you can pay upwards of $600.

Final thoughts on choosing the best party speakers

Whether you throw a couple of casual get-togethers yearly or host the weekly event friends look forward to throughout the week, having a party speaker is key to everyone having a good time. No party is complete without music; you can be the hero by providing it. We’re especially pleased that companies have begun taking this speaker style seriously rather than chalking it up as a gimmick and slapping unnecessary features onto previously available models that just blurt farty bass. Any of our speaker recommendations will get the job done; now it’s your task to create the perfect playlist.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best party speakers in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gallon water bottles in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gallon-water-bottles/ Fri, 15 Jul 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=455945
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

Here’s one way to make sure you drink enough water every day.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug is the best gallon water bottle overall. Yeti Gallon Jug
SEE IT

Yeti’s stainless steel gallon water jug is rugged and cleverly designed.

Best insulated Hydro Flask Oasis is the best insulated gallon water bottle. Hydro Flask Oasis
SEE IT

Hydro Flask’s 1-gallon Oasis can quench a big thirst after a long day.

Best motivational Fidus Motivational Water Bottle is the best motivational gallon water bottle. Fidus Motivational Water Bottle
SEE IT

The Fidus motivational water bottle has markings to help you hit your hydration goals.

The gallon water bottle is the ultimate hydration vessel. Carrying 128 ounces of liquid, these giant vessels are the perfect companion for balmy beach days, backcountry hikes, and sweaty gym sessions. They’ve also recently grown popular as a way to push yourself to drink more water every day. If your average 40-ounce water bottle just isn’t cutting it, an absolutely immense gallon bottle will ensure you never feel parched again. Chances are, you’ll have plenty left over to share with your friends and family after you absolutely crush those hydration goals. Here are the best gallon water bottles for aspirational drinkers, fitness obsessives, and anyone who wants to catch the big water bottle wave.

How we chose the best gallon water bottles

I consider myself an outdoorsy guy, so I spend a lot of time at the beach, in the mountains, and far away from clean running water. I was particularly excited to look into gallon water bottles since I’ve been thinking about picking one up myself. To make our selections, I performed hands-on testing and did hours of research, surveying critical viewpoints from water-obsessed coworkers alongside user impressions before settling on our picks.

At Popular Science, I cover a little bit of everything. I’ve researched all kinds of products, from the best energy-efficient air conditioners to the best smoke detectors. Before PopSci, I wrote about and reviewed gadgets for over 10 years for sites like iMore, XDA Developers, and CNN Underscored

The best gallon water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

The type of gallon water bottle you buy depends on how you plan to use it. If you want to keep liquids hot or cold, a stainless steel bottle that’s vacuum insulated is your best option. Otherwise, plastic bottles tend to be more affordable and weigh less. Since there aren’t that many trustworthy brands making gallon water bottles, we feel confident that one of these picks is the best option for you.

Best overall: Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug

YETI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yeti Gallon Jug features tough stainless steel construction and double-wall vacuum insulation to keep drinks icy cold all day long.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Clever magnetic lid to store spout cap
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Sturdy handle

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

The Yeti Gallon Jug will keep your water cold if you’re out in the field and away from refills. It’s made of durable stainless steel and features vacuum insulation so that it will keep liquids hot or cold for several hours. It also keeps your bottle from sweating, so surfaces are safe from condensation.

The Gallon Jug’s lid features a sturdy metal handle with soft grip padding, making it easier to carry on long hauls. The lid also contains a neat magnetic design, so users can store the cap when the spout is open. You can also screw the entire lid off for easy cleaning and refills. It’s a clever design that reinforces Yeti’s attention to the small details.

Like all Yeti’s other stainless steel bottles, the Gallon Jug is BPA-free and dishwasher safe. It weighs 4.5 pounds before putting water in it, or over 12 pounds full. That’s heavy on a hike. Still, it is far and away the nicest water bottle of this size.

Best insulated: Hydro Flask Oasis

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Hydro Flask Oasis is big and heavy, but it’ll keep your liquids cold for up to 24 hours or hot for up to 12 hours.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 14.8 inches
  • Weight: 4.96 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Easy grip base
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Keeps liquids cold for up to 24 hours

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

Like our top pick, the Hydro Flask Oasis is a large, heavy stainless steel bottle with double-wall vacuum insulation that ensures liquids stay cold. Hydro Flask claims water stays chilled in the Oasis for up to 24 hours, making it the perfect companion for the summer months. It’s also rated for hot liquids and keeps coffee, tea, or soup hot for up to 12 hours. It’s an excellent option for skiers who want a piping hot cup of joe after a long day on the slopes.

In addition to its superior insulation, we like the Oasis’ beveled base, which makes it easier to grab and pour. It’s a nice touch that you won’t find elsewhere. On the other hand, the Oasis’ lid doesn’t provide a place to store the spout cap, and the plastic handle isn’t as durable or easy to hold.

Like the Yeti Rambler, the Hydro Flask Oasis weighs nearly 5 pounds and pushes 13 pounds when filled with water. The weight isn’t a significant hurdle if you’re keeping hydrated at home, but the Oasis’ weight could be an issue on a camping trip or climbing up a mountain when every ounce counts.

Best for the gym: Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler features a simple flip-top spout, insulation, and a classic design you remember from childhood.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 12.8 inches
  • Weight: N/A
  • Dishwasher safe: No
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Sturdy design
  • Insulation
  • Flip-top spout

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

If you played sports as a kid, you may remember the Coleman gallon jug. Your coach may have brought it along to keep your whole team hydrated, but now it’s just for you.

The fact of the matter is that Coleman still makes a great bottle, and it’s specifically the perfect option for the gym. It has a leakproof lid, flip-top spout, and insulation to keep liquids cold. It’s also incredibly durable and features a handle that makes the Coleman Chiller easy to carry. It’s a simple, classic design that will keep you hydrated through every workout step.

Best motivational: Fidus Motivational Water Bottle

Fidus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For people buying a big water bottle to drink more water, the Fidus Motivational water bottle gives you regular hydration goals.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 0.83 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Paracord handle
  • Button cap
  • Available in several colors

Cons

  • No insulation

Drinking a gallon of water in a single day is hard work. As we mentioned, you don’t actually need to do it to stay healthily hydrated. But if you want to, this water bottle from Fidus is a trendy Tritan plastic water bottle with markers and motivational quotes to keep you on track to hit that daily goal. 

The 1-gallon water bottle from Fidus features eight motivational quotes to keep users focused and energized about hitting their water intake goals. It also features a cap that covers the spout and straw, so it’ll stay shielded from dust and particles throughout the day, and comes with a detachable paracord handle for easier carrying. Who doesn’t like a bit of encouragement?

Best budget: Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle

Simple Modern

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle offers a basic bottle at an affordable price.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 1.15 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Silicone straw
  • Button cap

Cons

  • No insulation

The Simple Modern 1-gallon bottle is, just like the brand name implies, a simple gallon water bottle. The dishwasher-safe Tritan plastic bottle comes in a variety of colors, including some calming color gradients like the green-to-purple “Tropical Seas,” and warm coral-to-cyan “Havana.” The best part of the Simple Modern bottle is its lid, which features a silicone mouthpiece with a lockable cover to keep it from getting dirty between sips. Press, Flip, Hydrate. Simple!

What to consider when buying the best gallon water bottles

So let’s get one thing out of the way: You don’t actually need to drink 8 cups of water every day. Giant water bottles have recently seen a surge in popularity, as people see them as a means of motivating themselves to drink more water. While you should never deny yourself water if you’re thirsty, it turns out that you don’t need to push yourself to drink that much.

That doesn’t mean there aren’t good reasons to carry around an absolutely gigantic jug of water. If you frequently go camping or spend long stretches of time away from a clean water source, it pays to bring a lot of water along. 

There aren’t as many manufacturers making gallon water bottles as the standard 32-ounce and 40-ounce options, so there isn’t as much room to get picky about style and design. That said, it still pays to know the essentials of water bottle construction so you can tell the best gallon water bottles from the knockoffs. Once you know where to look—and what to look for—in a gallon water bottle, you’ll find options that offer excellent durability, insulation, and clever designs for comfortable transportation and enhanced hydration.

Material

Most water bottles, no matter the size, are made of durable plastic or stainless steel. You may also find gallon jars made from shatter-resistant glass, but it’s fairly uncommon among bottles made for daily drinking.

Stainless steel water bottles are popular because they’re light but durable. They’re usually made from 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its elemental composition—18% chromium and 8% nickel. It is considered food safe and is resistant to corrosion and oxidation. Many stainless steel bottles are also vacuum insulated (like the best insulated water bottles) or designed to create a sealed buffer between the liquid in the container and the environment outside the bottle, which reduces conduction and keeps liquids hot or cold for several hours. 

Reusable plastic water bottles offer a great balance of durability and affordability. High-quality plastic bottles are arguably more resistant to superficial wear and tear, though they generally lack stainless steel’s insulation. There is far more variability among the material to make plastic water bottles than there is among stainless steel water bottles. 

When buying plastic, make sure to get a plastic water bottle that’s made from BPA-free Tritan plastic, which is light, ultra-durable, and safe. Some studies suggest that containers made from plastics with bisphenol A, or BPA, can seep into what’s stored in the container and cause adverse health effects, so avoid plastic bottles unless the manufacturer specifies that they use a BPA-free material.

Durability

The gallon water bottle you buy will likely be by your side day and night, so it needs to withstand the pitfalls of everyday use. Stainless steel can get dented and scratched, but it’s pretty resilient over the long run and should last for several years. Stainless steel can also handle sudden temperature changes, making them more versatile than other materials on this list.

Tritan plastic water bottles are generally more scratch-resistant and won’t ding, but are by no means indestructible. Both materials are strong enough to withstand everyday wear and tear, even hiking or running. However, if you’re likely to drop your bottle off a cliff (or off a car’s roof), maybe go with stainless steel.

Weight

Here’s where things get a little tricky. There’s no way around the fact that our stainless steel picks are heavy. When filled up with water, they feel like small kettlebells. We don’t feel like their weight disqualifies them from consideration because, well … a gallon of water is always going to feel heavy. (Remember: A gallon of water weighs approximately 8 pounds.) That said, if you really want to minimize your bottle’s weight, a plastic bottle will generally weigh less than a stainless steel one.

FAQs

Q: How much does a gallon water bottle cost?

Depending on the bottle material, a gallon water bottle can cost between $20-$130.

Q: How often should I clean a gallon water bottle?

Some experts argue that you should clean your water bottle once a day. That may not be feasible for everyone, especially if you’re using your gallon water bottle off the grid. We’d argue that cleaning it a few times per week is a more achievable goal.  What you don’t want to do is go several weeks without washing your reusable bottle. Even if it looks clean, water bottles can build up bacteria over time, so you should clean them often.

Q: Can I put other liquids besides water in a gallon water bottle?

You can put other liquids in your gallon water bottle besides water, but some things are safer than others. For example, you can put hot coffee in the Yeti Rambler, but the company says to avoid using the jug’s lid with carbonated beverages because of potential pressure build-up. For the plastic bottles on our list, you should stick to room temperature or cold water.

Q: How long is water good in a gallon jug?

According to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), you should replace stored water every six months. If you plan to keep water for an extended period, make sure it’s in an FDA-approved food-grade storage container. If you can’t find a food-grade water storage container, be sure the container has a top that can close tightly, is made of durable, unbreakable materials, and has a narrow neck for easy pouring.

Q: Is it safe to drink a gallon of water per day?

Drinking a gallon of water daily isn’t harmful but you probably don’t need to drink so much for optimal health. Optimal water intake varies from person to person based on a variety of personal and environmental factors, including height, weight, their activity level, and the current temperature. Rather than aiming for “eight cups a day,” simply try and drink water whenever you feel thirsty. 

Final thoughts on the best gallon water bottles

Gallon water bottles are for people who either won’t have access to a water source for a while or need to hit a specific intake goal. Otherwise, their size and weight make them too cumbersome for most people. If you want something easier to manage, you’re better off checking out our picks for the best water bottles. And if you’ve got young ones, there’s our guide to the best kids’ water bottles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hydroelectric-generators/ Sat, 29 Jul 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559517
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

These surprisingly powerful devices can turn the power of running water into current.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best portable waterlily turbine WaterLily Turbine
SEE IT

This model is small enough to carry with you into the wild.

Best overall Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine
SEE IT

This reliable model can power a small home all on its own.

Best budget Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator Water 12V DC 10W Micro Hydro Water Charging Tool Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator
SEE IT

Install it on your pipes and get up to 10W of power.

Hydroelectric generators produce electricity by harnessing the force of running water. This may seem like a novelty or impractical for home use, but you’d be surprised. While hydropower—or the use of the kinetic energy of running water to generate power—has been in use since ancient times, it is most associated these days with massive industrial damming projects, like the Oahe Dam and the Hoover Dam in the United States. But, hydropower can exist on an extremely small scale.

The benefits are obvious: you can generate power from an available resource—running water (with some models, even the water in your home’s pipes). In addition to possibly lowering your energy bills, allowing you to run additional electrical equipment, and potentially providing other benefits, utilizing hydro can take the pressure off the electricity grid, provide electricity if living off-the-grid, and offer backup power in the event of a blackout. Regarding sustainability, generating your own hydropower can reduce your use of fossil fuels and, consequently, your carbon footprint. According to the Department of Energy, about 7 percent of the nation’s electricity (and 37 percent of its renewable electricity) comes from hydropower—but with your own generator, you may be able to help those numbers grow, even slightly. Better yet, unlike large-scale hydroelectric projects, which can be extremely damaging to river ecology, small-scale hydro has relatively minimal effects on the immediate environment. Here are our picks for the best hydroelectric generators.

How we chose the best hydroelectric generators

We looked through about a dozen models to find the top hydroelectric generators. Admittedly, there aren’t a ton of options in the middle. There are a few larger-scale, ultimately stationary models that require a good amount of flow but can usually power a home, as well as tiny models that are best for producing small amounts of power. But we did find a couple of relevant models that—while maybe not meeting all your power needs—can provide extra energy and are particularly useful in a camping or off-grid setting. 

When purchasing a hydroelectric generator, sustainability is primarily in the concept: if you have running water near you, you can access a freely available resource to produce, potentially, a lot of electricity. Again, unlike with massive industrial hydro projects, effects near you should be minimal, and you can take pressure off the grid or other less sustainable energy sources. If you want to get deeply technical about it, you can calculate hydropower that you produce, and compare it to grid power, estimating both the relative cost and carbon impact of the energy you use.

The best hydroelectric generators: Recommendations & Reviews

If you’re on this page, then you likely know exactly what you’re looking for because these are somewhat complex machines that require lots of infrastructure to go with them. We’ve selected the best to fit specific uses, but products always overlap.

Best overall: Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine

Scott Hydro

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an extremely well-built machine that—even with low head—can reliably power a small home with steady water flow.

Specs

  • Rated at 1500W output (but can reach 2000W)
  • Largely self-cleaning
  • Made in USA

Pros

  • Provides ample power
  • Very sturdy

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Additional components required

If you live near a decent, steady source of running water, this high-quality machine can, once installed, probably provide consistent power for your home year-round. Your electricity bills will be negligible, you will not have to worry about the weather (as you do for solar or wind power), and you can sustainably produce consistent electricity with limited environmental impact.

ABS Alaskan, the maker of this machine, has been making high-quality alternative energy devices for over 30 years, geared toward the conditions in Alaska—a state with over 12,000 rivers—but applicable all over. The Scott Hydro Turbine, with a 1500-watt output, can almost certainly provide the energy you need for your home. While it requires a steady flow of water, it only needs a 20-foot drop in “head” (a term explained in our “Things to consider …” section near the bottom)—relatively small given the power provided. Once installed, it’s very easy to maintain—it is effectively self-cleaning, using the water flow, with only three rotating components.

On the con side, these units are pricey, and installation does take some work, requiring a relatively simple water diversion and a small shelter to protect the unit. You’ll also need an electric connection kit, not to mention batteries (if intending to store power). But once it’s up and running, it can provide lasting, sustainable power for years.

Best value: Energy Systems and Design Watter Buddy

Energy Systems and Design

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a modest price and small size, the Watter Buddy can provide a non-insubstantial 200W of power.

Specs

  • Type: Generates DC power via rectifier
  • Weight: 8 lbs

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Multiple nozzle sizes provided to match flow

Cons

  • Likely cannot provide all your power needs

The Watter Buddy is an innovative machine from Energy Systems and Design, a Canadian company providing off-grid hydro solutions for four decades. While the company produces a couple of larger (and more expensive models), the Watter Buddy meets you in the middle. For a modest price, it can provide a considerable amount—though probably not all—of your power needs. But don’t discount 200W. Whether you need supplementary off-grid power, are looking for electricity for a small workshop, or have other relevant needs, with steady water flow, this machine can do a lot—potentially lessening your reliance on a traditional electric generator. And you don’t have to be off-grid—this can even be effectively used with traditional household pipes.

This product is convenient in a few other ways. Multiple nozzle sizes allow you to match the flow you use to generate power easily. A built-in rectifier converts from AC to DC power, allowing electricity produced to be easily sent to batteries or compatible devices. Finally, its very small size allows you to move it around conveniently as needed.

Best portable: WaterLily Turbine

WaterLily

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WaterLily Turbine is easy to set up and use anywhere you can access running water, providing charge capabilities for both 12V and USB devices.

Specs

  • Produces up to 2A (on 12V output); or up to 3A (via USB output)
  • 10 ft. charge cord
  • 1 km/h minimum water flow required

Pros

  • Can charge cellphones, battery banks, lights, and more
  • Under 3 lbs.

Cons

  • Likely can’t provide for all power needs

For something easily transportable but extremely reliable, check out the WaterLily Turbine. This innovative little device can be set up virtually anywhere you have running water, producing (at highest power) up to 15 W. With good flow, a small device (cellphone, camera, etc.) should charge at roughly the same rate as it would if plugged into a traditional wall outlet. The WaterLily also offers unique accessories, including its WindLily attachment, which allows you to convert the device to harvest wind energy, and its SolarLily panels, which allows for a solar harvesting component like the best solar generators.

In terms of sustainability, again, a small hydroelectric generator has the virtue of harnessing natural flow with minimal ecological impacts. According to the company, using a WaterLily can provide the equivalent power of 50 AA batteries in a day. The company also looks to promote its values by collaborating with organizations that help deploy WaterLily turbines in the developing world.

Best budget: Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator

Yosoo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a very affordable price, this small Yosoo generator reliably generates up to 10 W of power and can be used on your household pipes.

Specs

  • 12V, 10W output
  • 3.2 oz
  • Made in China

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Reliable, steady

Cons

  • Provides very limited power

The Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator is a small, handy device that neatly hooks up to the pipes in your home. For an extremely affordable price, you can use water that, in most cases, should flow through your pipes anyway to generate a little extra electricity. It’s not useful for big devices, but it can provide additional capacity for lightning, charging for phones or other devices, or similar uses that require comparable power.

While this generator may not make a huge difference if you’re tied into the grid, it can be very handy if you live off-grid, where every little bit of power matters. Keep some lights on, charge up your phone or radio, or fulfill other needs based on existing water flow. 

Best lightweight: Beduan Micro Water Turbine Generator

Beduan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is another small, inexpensive, and simple option that can provide some extra power in your home.

Specs

  • 3.17 oz
  • 12 V, 10 W
  • 0.5” G thread

Pros

  • Very light
  • Affordable
  • Easy to install

Cons

  • Provides limited power
  • Can be noisy

This small device from Beduan provides another handy way to generate a little extra power from water running through a pipe, like a shower or through a hose. Its recommended water flow for full power is about 26 L/min, and with 10 W, you can provide a little extra power to charge a small device or power a light. While that certainly won’t be enough to run your washing machine or fridge, it can still be helpful—again, especially in off-grid situations, where power may be limited.

In practice, this little device from Beduan can make a handy addendum to your stock of energy-efficient tech. It makes up for its limitations by being both extremely affordable, as well as lightweight and easy to install.

Best off-grid: PowerSpout TRG

PowerSprout

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a high-caliber model that comes in high-head, medium-head, and low-head options, with the capacity to provide substantial off-grid power.

Specs

  • Head range is 6.6 to 100 feet
  • Maximum flow 254 gpm
  • 16.9×16.1×13.8”

Pros

  • Customizable to different types of flows
  • Relatively affordable given power provided

Cons

  • Can be challenging to set up

PowerSpout is a New Zealand-based company that offers an assortment of hydroelectric generators. We’ve linked to their medium-head option here, but they also make a high-head and low-head model. This variety is great, allowing you to carefully select the right model for your given conditions. Bear in mind, though, that setup can be tricky, and it is best to buy from a dealer.

The PowerSpout TRG is a high-quality machine that—for a pretty modest price—can generate 1.6 kW daily with adequate flow. The company even notes that “stacking” units is an option for generating additional power. The turbine will come with pretty much everything you need for setup, and by ordering from a dealer, you can go over your system specs to be sure you are prepared to easily get it up and running. While these are ideal for off-grid setups, they can be ordered such that the system voltage can easily be tied into the grid. In short, a great model for all situations.

Best small: Suneco 500W Hydro Turbine

Suneco

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If your water flow has decent head, this fairly small turbine can produce a decent amount of power that can cut down your electricity budget or provide extra off-grid power.

Specs

  • Rated for 12-18 m. head
  • Output: 500 W
  • Weight: 27 kgs.

Pros

  • Consistent, fairly substantial power
  • Good safety protection

Cons

  • Requires considerable head to generate power

Suneco Hydro has been developing micro hydro turbines since 1991—and they have several options. The 500W hydro turbine is a modest size that slots in right in the middle; it’s not too large or expensive but is substantial enough to make a difference in terms of power provided.

This particular model, weighing in at 27 kgs., is small enough that you can most likely set it up yourself. While it requires a somewhat considerable 12 m. of head to generate power, if you have the setting for it, it can make a great option for an on or off-grid property. However, it should be noted that Suneco Hydro is based in China, which can mean longer shipping times, and may potentially involve more challenges when working with customer service.

What to consider when shopping for a hydroelectric generator

Many factors go into choosing the ideal hydroelectric generator. How bulky is the generator? Is it portable? How much water does it require to run? How much power does it generate? Where can it be run? Can you set it up yourself? Depending on your needs—whether you want it for the home, a workshop, or for use when out in the backcountry—you will probably hone in on particular products.

Size

Hydropower comes in many sizes. According to the Bureau of Reclamation, for instance, the Hoover Dam generates 4 billion kilowatt-hours annually. On the far opposite end of the spectrum is pico hydro, which can generate up to 5 kW of electricity. The next most substantial type of hydro is micro hydropower, which generates up to 100 kW of electricity. (Hydropower continues up in size after that—encompassing mini hydro, which produces 100 kW to 1 MW of electricity, small hydro, and so on—but virtually any system for use on an individual scale will fall into the micro or pico category.) 

Keep your needs in mind. If you’re looking for something to use while camping, you’ll want to focus on the smallest and lightest end of the spectrum; if you want to power your house from the creek that runs through your property, you may need a sizable generator. 

Water source

While hydropower is conventionally associated with large rivers, any flow of water can potentially produce hydropower. The output could possibly offer more power than you think. Two terms are useful to know to understand how to calculate hydropower’s potential output. “Head” denotes the height gradient over which water moves from input to output; “flow” is the amount of water going through the system. These two numbers can be used to calculate the rough power output of a system.

How does the water source come in? Naturally, heavier running water over steeper terrain generates more power. If you have a substantial stream on your property, it’s very possible that you can generate a considerable amount of electricity from it. But hydropower can work even on a tiny scale. For instance, some systems are built to run off the water in your pipes. When looking for a personal hydro system, give consideration to the source of the water—and also consider seasonal factors, like whether a stream tends to dry up in the summer.

Generator type

According to the Department of Energy, “reaction” and “impulse” turbines are the two main classes of hydro turbines. Hydropower is not terribly complicated, but for the purposes of home use, you mainly need to determine what fits your particular setting.

The main difference between the two is that reaction turbines generate energy based on water pressure, while impulse turbines generate energy based on water velocity. Impulse turbines are best with high head and low flow (while reaction turbines are the inverse). Impulse turbines are more common in microhydro settings, although propeller turbines are a type of reaction turbine that can be used for microhydro.

FAQs

Q: How much do hydroelectric generators cost?

In a generator, the cost of a generator will be correlated with its power output. The most miniature, portable generators—which may produce only a few watts, can be reasonably priced. Larger generators surveyed, provided they have access to a steady water supply, may be able to power your home—and more. But these ones can cost several thousand dollars and may require supplementary equipment, like inverters, wiring, and batteries. Of course, you can always save and look for refurbished options on sites like eBay, Amazon Renewed, and others. 

Q: What size hydroelectric generator do I need?

It all depends on your needs! If you want one that provides enough power to charge your phone, one of the smallest options above might be sufficient. If you want to generate most of your home’s electricity via a hydro generator, you may need one producing 1000W or more.

Q: Can you power a house with a hydroelectric generator?

It depends on your power needs, the amount of water flow you can access, and the size of your generator. According to ABS Alaskan, the average American home without electric heat uses about 1000W consistently (less than the 1500 W put out by their Scott Hydro Turbine—meaning that device could power an average house). You can add up the wattage used by regularly running devices in your home—refrigerator, lights, washing machine, etc.—and compare them to the output of your generator.

Q: Will I need to purchase any additional equipment?

Sometimes. If you want to store power, you must purchase batteries, typically lead-acid or lithium. Both options are fairly expensive, but once purchased, they can usually last many years. Depending on the model, you may also need an inverter or other equipment to bring power from the generator to batteries or appliances. Be sure to check the specs on whichever generator you end up purchasing.

Q: What can I do with my hydro or old generator when it no longer works?

With good care, your hydro generator should last many years. Because these units tend to be specialized and each model is unique, check with the dealer or manufacturer about cleaning and maintenance instructions to ensure the machine lasts as long as possible (some, like the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine, are largely self-cleaning once set up.)

If your new hydro generator will replace your gas generator, you may be looking for ways to recycle your old machine. LoadUp is one company that can help recycle your old gas generate, salvaging as many valuable materials as possible. Some scrap companies, like Rockaway Recycling, may pay cash for old generators. Reaching out to scrap yards near you may suggest other ways to salvage usable materials from your generator.

Final thoughts on the best hydroelectric generators

If you’re looking for a serious way to generate consistent hydropower from a decent amount of flowing water on your property, check out the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine. If you’re looking for a smaller and more portable option, the WaterLily Turbine is a great choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get the greenest grass in the neighborhood with Greenworks outdoor power equipment deals at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-spring-2024-amazon-deal/ Tue, 09 Apr 2024 20:02:32 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=610107
A pattern of Greenworks lawn mowers and leaf blowers on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

If you're shopping for new landscaping gear, don't miss this major Greenworks deal happening at Amazon.

The post Get the greenest grass in the neighborhood with Greenworks outdoor power equipment deals at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A pattern of Greenworks lawn mowers and leaf blowers on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The weather is (finally) warming up, and, if you’re on the East Coast, drying out after an entire weeks-worth of rain. That’s perfect if you’ve tried to get perfectly pruned lawns only to be thwarted by precipitation. If your plans for neighborhood glory require better equipment, consider hitting Amazon for these fresh deals from Greenworks.

Greenworks 80V 21” Brushless Cordless Electric Lawn Mower + Axial Leaf Blower $552.49 (Was $833.99)

Greenworks

SEE IT

This combo kit comes with a four-year warranty and long runtimes on both the push mower and leaf blower. The cordless mower can be used to mulch, bag excess grass in the rear, or spit the clippings out on the side. The blower is powerful and can even assist in cleaning up leftover grass and leaves. You won’t want to miss this deal if you’re trying to upgrade your personal landscaping equipment.

More Greenworks tool deals:

The post Get the greenest grass in the neighborhood with Greenworks outdoor power equipment deals at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric commuter bikes for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-commuter-bikes/ Wed, 28 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=604635
Civilized Cycles Model 1 commuter cargo bike
Civilized Cycles

Whether you Class 1 to class or Class 2 the grocery store, an electric commuter bike cuts down on the time and sweat.

The post The best electric commuter bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Civilized Cycles Model 1 commuter cargo bike
Civilized Cycles

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through eBike on a plain white background. Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through
SEE IT

High volume tires, a 250-watt mid-drive motor, and a pin-based anti-theft system helped the Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through grab the top spot.

Best design Civilized Cycles' Model 1 on a plain white background. Civilized Cycles Model 1
SEE IT

The Model 1’s passenger seat, U-shaped frame, and 750-watt motor make it a feast for the eyes and ready for the road.

Best budget RadCity 5 Plus Electric Commuter Bike on a plain white background. RadCity 5 Plus Electric Commuter Bike
SEE IT

The RadCity 5’s sub-$2,000 price tag put it in another league when it comes to overall value without many sacrifices.

I started using an electric commuter bike out of necessity. I live in the suburbs of D.C., where our Metro lines occasionally close for weeks or months for train track and station upgrades. And driving into the city can cost $20 or more each way, thanks to toll roads and hot lanes. That’s before paying to park. My potential commuting costs made buying an e-bike seem downright economical, but what I wasn’t expecting was how riding turned my commute into something fun that helped me de-stress after crappy work days. The power assistance from e-bikes helps close the gap between your fitness and the distance between your home and workplace. They can transform routine parts of your day into workout sessions, and they’re eco-friendlier than driving a gas car solo. The key is to find the best electric commuter bikes within your budget that you want to ride and can handle the distance and terrain of your commute. 

How we selected the best electric commuter bikes

As a long-time bike commuter, I have lugged laptops and changes of clothes through suburban streets, paved trails, wooden bridges, and city bike lanes in scorching humidity, unexpected rain, and bitter cold. I even broke my arm once, but that’s a cautionary tale about trying to outperform a personal record to the office. In addition to my riding and testing, I’ve tapped the PopSci team’s collective experiences, plus expert and customer reviews, to pull together this list. 

The best electric commuter bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Any electric bike is a potential commuter, but some features help make the daily to and fro more comfortable. Fenders keep road filth and water from going up your back (a real thing), and chain guards keep pants and legs from getting greasy (or worse, stuck). Racks offer a less sweaty alternative to hauling your work necessaries in a backpack. Check out our tips for how to carry stuff on your bike, whether it’s a packed lunch, laptop, or just clothes to change into post-ride. Fitness or occasional cyclists may never have bothered with lights, but they are essential for commuters. You’ll need them to see in the dark of winter, and they help cars see you on busy roads. We prioritized bikes with integrated lights, fenders, and racks so the bike is prepped for all-weather riding without splurging on additional after-market accessories.  

Best overall: Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through

Specialized

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250w mid-drive motor
  • Battery: 710Wh capacity
  • Riding range: Up to 90 miles
  • Class: 3
  • Top speed: 28 mph
  • Bike weight: 58 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 300 pounds

Pros

  • Integrated front headlight and rear lights
  • Internal cable management
  • Front suspension fork
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Built-in rear rack holds up to 59 pounds 
  • Hydraulic disc brakes
  • 11-speed drivetrain
  • App offers additional controls
  • Anti-theft local built-in to motor that unlocks with PIN or connected phone
  • Four frame sizes: S, M, L, XL
  • Multiple colors offered

Cons

  • Magnetic battery charger can be difficult to connect
  • Integrated battery is removable, but can be hard to get in and out
  • Specialized’s apps come and go

Specialized is an American company that has been making bicycles since 1974 and has launched several e-bike models under the Vado name. For a while, the company marketed the e-bike line with the phrase, “It’s you, but better,” which captures how riding the Specialized Turbo Vado 4.0 Step-Through feels. The latest iteration of the Turbo Vado features an upright riding position on high-volume 650b tires, which helps smooth out road unpleasantries when coupled with the front suspension fork.

The Turbo Vado 4.0 looks more like a thick bicycle than an e-bike. There’s no black box bolted onto the frame. The battery is discreetly tucked into the downtube, and the powerful 250w mid-drive motor is housed between the pedals, which helps keep the weight in the center of the bike for agile handling. This Class 3 bike relies on a Brose motor tuned to proprietary Specialized standards that get the rider up to top speed in a snap without requiring much effort. The bike has three levels of pedal assist—eco, sport, and turbo—and an 11-speed drivetrain. There’s no throttle, but you don’t need one. 

The Turbo Vado isn’t cheap at the usual retail price of $4,000. However, the extra dollars go to higher-quality grips, saddle, a very sturdy kickstand with a foot, and technology. The motor includes an anti-theft device that only allows power when unlocked by a PIN or an authorized phone. The Bluetooth connectivity allows the bike to be updated over the air and connected with my Garmin watch to track my rides, though I’m not sure which device initiated the connection. Though a rider can rely exclusively on the very bright handlebar display to control the Turbo Vado, Specialized apps unlock additional features like the ability to input your route and automatically budget battery power so it lasts the whole ride.  As far as range, the website says up to 90 miles, but the farthest I’ve gotten on one charge is 50-ish miles using mostly eco mode. Still, that’s on the longer side of ranges. 

This brings me to some downsides. Specialized spends time developing its apps, but that leads to multiples in app stores, and sometimes they switch which one you need to use with your bike. For example, the company sunsetted the Mission Control app for one called just Specialized. Another grumble is charging. You can charge the bike with the battery in or out, but either way, it can be awkward to get the magnetic charger to align with the little pins. The battery can be removed, but it requires unlocking with a key, releasing a lever, and unhooking it from a bar you can never see. That’s not even as awkward as reinstalling it. 

The full-size Turbo Vado weighs about 58 pounds, depending on which of the four frames fits you. If you’re looking for something lighter weight, Specialized also offers a Turbo Vado SL 4.0 Step-through that only weighs 36 pounds. The tradeoff is skinnier wheels, no front suspension, and a smaller battery capacity. 

Best design: Civilized Cycles Model 1

Civilized Cycles

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750w high torque mid-drive
  • Battery: 48V 10.5 Ah
  • Riding range: Up to 30 miles
  • Class: 2 or 3
  • Top speed: 28 mph
  • Bike weight: 90 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 400 pounds

Pros

  • Integrated lights with self-dimming sensors
  • Turn signals
  • Front fender plus covered back wheel
  • Air-based suspension plus front suspension fork
  • Hydraulic disc brakes
  • Built-in passenger seat for one adult or two children
  • Built-in locking pannier storage up to 80-liter capacity
  • Pedal assist and throttle modes
  • Gel rider saddle
  • Built-in lock points on footrests 
  • Power system has a PIN code
  • Available in red, black, or silver 

Cons

  • Not the best for riders under 5’6”
  • Very heavy

The deliberate design of the Civilized Cycle Model 1 challenged how I thought about e-bikes. While technically a bicycle, the Model 1 is best suited for someone who wants a Vespa or a scooter without the hassle and cost of getting a license and insurance. With a $5,000 price tag, the Model 1 is less a bike and more a vehicle that replaces a car for short errands. Much like a car, it has a seat for a passenger and two expandable panniers ready to carry about 80 liters of cargo. These built-ins allow for impromptu outings. Adding a passenger to a typical e-bike is a no-go, and unexpected cargo can be challenging. 

The magic of the Model 1 is the air suspension, which is by far some of the best cushioning I’ve experienced on any e-bike. With my husband in the passenger seat, I tested the Model 1 on a ride through Brooklyn. It took me a bit to adjust to how the Model 1 handled the weight of my passenger over the rear wheel. Still, the throttle assist on the 750w motor and hydraulic brakes made starting from stops and accelerating through turns effortless, even when I slammed on the brakes for a school bus that dumped a bunch of kids into the bike lane. We floated over potholes and the random bumps and cracks in the road without walking funny after.

Model 1 includes other high-end details for frequent riders, like USB charge ports, lock points in the footrests, a covered chain, and a PIN code for the power system. However, the Model 1 has some downsides, especially for smaller riders. Technically, my average height of 5’4” fell short of the suggested rider size of 5’6” to 6’4”, and I was on my tippy toes to adjust the suspension. The U-shape frame let me put my foot down quickly to stabilize the bike at stops, but there was some pedal dancing to get back in the saddle. It also weighs roughly 90 pounds and measures almost 80 inches from nose to tail, so it’s best for someone with a ground-floor garage or storage. (If you have more stairs than you have space and have a short commute in a dense urban area, consider a folding bike like the LECTRIC XL Lite.) The Model 1 also only has a 30-mile range, which is low for its price point, but it’s perfectly appointed for a quick grocery run or short trip for two. 

Best all-terrain: Ride1Up Rift

Ride1Up

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750w rear hub
  • Battery: 48V 20 Ah
  • Riding range: 45 to 60 miles
  • Class: 2 or 3
  • Top speed: 20 mph using a throttle or 28 mph with pedal assist
  • Bike weight: 84.5 pounds 
  • Carrying capacity: 350 pounds

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Integrated front and rear lights
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Built-in rear rack holds up to 150 pounds
  • Four piston hydraulic brakes with cutoff sensor
  • Front suspension fork
  • Gel saddle

Cons

  • Wide turning radius
  • Noisy chain
  • Very heavy

The Ride1Up Rift may be the right choice for anyone who needs all-terrain capability or wants a commuter to pull double-duty on dirt paths on the weekends. It has many features that make riding to work more convenient, like metal front and rear fenders and integrated lights. The welded-on rear rack can carry up to 150 pounds, which means the bike could also carry a passenger (and the company sells a kit for that).

The Rift is a monster of a bike with four-inch wide fat tires that come in either a step-through or step-over frame to accommodate riders from 5’1” to 6’5”. If you’ve never dabbled in fat tire bikes, the volume absorbs road chatter while increasing traction on dodgy surfaces like mud, sand, or snow. They enhance the stability of the ride but add weight. So does the massive battery integrated into the downtube. However, the 750w rear hub motor produces enough torque to move this 85-pound beast around, easily making it up steep hills in the PopSci test. Levels one and two still required some rider effort, but pedaling was just for looks at levels four and five. The wide turning radius takes some getting used to.

The Rift arrives as a Class 2 e-bike but can be unlocked to achieve Class 3’s higher top speed.  A well-organized display on the handlebar clarifies which of the five pedal assist levels you’re in, trip time, and power consumption. The range is 45 to 60 miles, though full power assistance or carting around a passenger will whittle that down. Still, at under $2,000, the Rift packs a lot of power and versatility in a bike that can handle on and off-roading. 

Best for women: LeMond Dutch

LeMond

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250w rear hub
  • Battery: 36V 250w capacity
  • Riding range: 40 to 70 miles
  • Class: 2
  • Top speed: 20 mph
  • Bike weight: 27 pounds
  • Capacity weight: 250 pounds

Pros

  • Integrated head and rear lights
  • Internal cable management
  • Front and rear fenders
  • 11-speed drivetrain
  • All carbon fiber frame
  • Mahle My SmartBike app
  • Three frame sizes: S, M, L
  • Three colors: Ice blue, noir, rosa

Cons

  • No rack included
  • No handlebar adjustments due to the monocoque design
  • Minimal on-bike control could be challenging for color-blind riders

Once upon a time, what made a woman’s bike was whether the top tube sloped down instead of going straight across. While traditional bicycle manufacturers have lines dedicated to women’s geometry, most e-bikes address this with step-through frames or by putting women’s touchpoints like differently shaped grips or saddles on e-bikes that are otherwise identical to the default model. I compiled this list with mostly step-through models not to focus on women’s needs but because commuting often involves so much stopping that you want a frame that lets you put a foot down easily for balance. So, without a dearth of women-centric e-bikes, I offer a model that focuses on one of the main challenges to my sister riders: e-bike weight.

The LeMond Dutch is a gorgeous, minimalist e-bike that tips the scales at a meager 27 pounds. How? The Dutch’s frame, fork, stem, seatpost, and handlebar are all made of carbon fiber, a premium material that accounts for a considerable part of the $5,500 price tag. Less weight matters: An entirely different range of people can move this bike around, whether to get it up stairs, onto a car rack, or to change a flat. The three frame options accommodate rides from 5’2” to 6’5”.

This is a stealth Class 1 e-bike, concealing its motor within the sleek frame and a complete lack of display screen. Instead, users get information from a single button with a light-up ring that changes colors to indicate assist level and battery life or the Mahle My SmartBike app. Such a different interface takes getting used to, and may be oddly difficult for some color-blind riders to determine which mode they’re in.

This e-bike’s chic design borrows its upright riding posture and swept-back handlebars from traditional Dutch commuter bikes and considerable input from American cycling legend Greg LeMond. The result is a comfortable ride that handles like an analog bicycle with just enough power from the three levels of assist to go 40 to 70 miles. One important note: The battery is not removable.

Best splurge: Riese & Müller Homage4

Riese & Müller

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: Bosch Performance Line CX smart system
  • Battery: Bosch PowerTube 625 Wh, upgradable to dual battery configuration
  • Riding range: Up to 100 miles with dual batteries
  • Class: 3
  • Top speed: 28 mph
  • Bike weight: 65 pounds
  • Capacity weight: 330 pounds

Pros

  • Adjustable air suspension
  • Hydraulic disc brakes with option for Boasch’s ABS 2.0 system
  • Upgradable cockpit options
  • 11-speed drivetrain
  • Flow app
  • Three frame sizes: 49 cm, 54 cm, 58 cm
  • Two colors: deep sea blue metallic and pearl white

Cons

  • High entry price
  • Proprietary parts can be hard to replace

Riese & Müller Homage4 offers a full-suspension Class 3 e-bike that looks like it rolled in from the future. This German-designed bike starts at $8,239 and features high-end, high-quality components with a dizzying amount of configurable upgrades, including a comfort package, alternate cockpit options, a carbon belt drive, and a dual battery configuration that extends the riding range to 100 miles. 

Bosch components help supercharge the Homage4, from the powerful Bosch Performance Line CX smart system motor that provides up to 85 Nm of torque for pedal assistance to optional ABS 2.0 brakes for maximum stopping power without skidding out. Bosch’s Flow app offers additional features like ride information, an e-bike alarm and tracking (with a subscription), and the ability to update the e-bike through Bluetooth. 

While I’ve mainly talked about what’s under the proverbial hood, the Homage4 looks like it’s been molded from one piece metal—even the rear rack. Like all e-bikes, getting used to the shifting systems and peculiarities takes a moment, but Riese & Müller regularly put out bikes with steady, smooth transitions and cloud-like suspensions. PopSci recently tested out some new models on a ride through the Red Rock Canyon National Conservation Area on the outskirts of Las Vegas, which handled like a dream through turns and climbed 1,500 feet of elevation with no problems on auto-assist—a seamless, satisfying setting that varies mode based on rider effort.

Best budget: RadCity 5 Plus Electric Commuter Bike

RadCity

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750w hub
  • Battery: 48V 14Ah
  • Riding range: 28 to 50 miles
  • Class: 2
  • Top speed: 20 mph
  • Bike weight: 65 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 275 pounds

Pros

  • Integrated LED headlight and rear light
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Rear rack holds up to 59 pounds
  • Additional mounting points for accessories
  • Front suspension fork
  • Five levels of pedal assist plus throttle
  • Available in gray, white, orange

Cons

  • Lots of wires around handlebars
  • Displays can be hard to read in bright sunlight
  • Heavy

Rad Power Bikes specializes in delivering value-oriented e-bikes that are fun to ride and durable. The company recently released a special edition of the RadCity 5 Plus Electric Commuter Bike in “tiger orange” that makes some refinements to previous models. 

The 5 Plus supplies an upright, comfortable ride with slightly swept-back handles to offer easy steering of the powerful 750w motor. The five pedal assist levels and throttle for an extra boost are paired with hydraulic brakes for easy stopping in any weather. Even if you don’t want to go for the bright orange, the RadCity team accents the 27.5-inch high-volume tires with reflective striping to enhance visibility, and the LED head and tail lights are standard. The built-in rear rack can carry more weight—59 pounds—than previous versions and additional mounting points if you want to purchase other accessories like baskets instead of panniers. The Class 2 ride maxes out at 20 mph with a good range of 28 to 50 miles, depending on how much you rely on assistance. Riders as short as 4’8” can comfortably ride the step-through frame, while those over 6” can fit the high step. 

If the RadCity 5 Plus were a car, it would be a sensible sedan at the exceptionally reasonable price of $1,700. That said, there’s not a lot sexy about the 5 Plus. It’ll get you there and do a good job. Some riders and reviewers complain about the well-organized but abundant wires on the handlebars and control screens that are hard to read in bright sun, but ultimately, these are minor issues. At about 65 pounds, the aluminum frame is also on the heavy side. 

Also worth considering: Orbea Diem 20

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250w mid-drive motor
  • Battery: 630Wh capacity (internal)
  • Riding range: Up to 90 miles
  • Class: 3
  • Top speed: 28 mph
  • Bike weight: 52 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 300 pounds

Pros

  • Wraparound LED lights
  • Four size options
  • 85 Nm of torque
  • Long range
  • Bottle cage battery storage
  • USB-C port for phone charging
  • Airtag holder
  • Weight-absorbing carbon fiber fork
  • Steady increase when engaging pedal assistance

Cons

  • Battery upgrade at the point of sale can get pricey

Spanish bike manufacturer Orbea set high expectations for its Diem line of commuter e-bikes by branding it with the tagline “The New A to B”—a declaration that this could be a body-moving benchmark for urban journeys. But our time with the Diem and its reception as the 2024 Cycling World Show’s “Product of the Year” (as well as its iF DESIGN AWARD 2024) prove it’s not just hype. Its long-range, powerful motor, optional low-maintenance belt drive with automatic shifting (there’s also a cheaper traditional chain drive model), plus thoughtful safety features like integrated position/alert lights make it an excellent choice for commuters looking to ditch their car or public transportation for short-distance trips to and from the office several times per week.

We rode through urban and suburban sections of Düsseldorf, Germany, on a Diem 20 (the mid-tier model, with Shimano’s Nexus Inter-5 internal gears, a Gates belt drive, and a max speed of 28MPH). From grassy parks by the riverside to well-trafficked streets at rush hour, we couldn’t find anything significant to complain about, no matter the terrain’s menu del dia. The bicycle was comfortable to ride, with a carbon fork and patented “Diamond Glide” frame geometry that absorb vibrations while aiding handling. In addition, it had a seat whose height could be adjusted on the fly by squeezing the lever. We made these adjustments over a dozen times during our ride, and they ensured consistent comfort regardless of the landscape’s incline.

The Diem 20 has a Shimano EP600 motor with three levels of pedal assist (ECO/TRAIL/BOOST), and the level you’re at is indicated by the LED color next to the speed increase and decrease buttons. Within minutes, it became second nature to cycle between these modes, keeping track of them in our head and looking down only for confirmation. We also rode the Diem 20 without pedal assistant enabled to confirm it was a smooth ride when propelled by legs alone. It was, so commuters who want the flexibility of pedal assist only when necessary to climb steep inclines will still be treated to a luxurious ride. And the Shimano disc brakes made sure the bike stopped as smoothly as it accelerated.

Orbea opted not to build a screen into any e-bike in the Diem line. Instead, you can pair the bike to your smartphone using an app, mount your device using a proprietary case developed by Orbea to clip into an area on the Diem’s handlebars, and monitor its battery life, your distance traveled, and other stats through that system. The bicycle has a USB-C port, so you can connect your phone to keep its battery topped up during longer rides. Another high-tech choice was including a secret slot for an AirTag, so you can keep track of your bicycle’s whereabouts when you chain it to a pole on the street.

One of the Diem line’s core tenants is the ability to customize the bicycle at the point of sale. Orbea offers the Diem 10, 20, and 30 in four sizes, three colors, and two battery capacities each. Note that bumping up from the stock battery to a longer-lasting one can increase its price by up to $1,000. You can extend the ride time of any Diem bike by stashing an extra battery in its bottle holder, which is neat if you’re going on a 200+ mile trip and want to use pedal assistance nearly the whole time.

Orbea’s Diem e-bike is ideal for city dwellers frustrated at wasting hours a week in cramped trains or stuck in traffic just to move two or three miles. It offers newcomers and electric vehicle experts alike the freedom to come and go as they please on an aesthetically pleasing e-bike that will make a regular ride feel anything but routine. — Brandt Ranj

Worth a look if you need a small bike for tykes: SUPER73-K1D

SUPER73

SEE IT

Who doesn’t remember pulling up to the first day of grade school on their sweet new e-trainer? Me, for one, but how times have changed. But with this electric balance bike, you can do just that with rad ’80s BMX style. Built for ages 4-8, this three-mode twist-throttle e-bike for kids lets young riders get up to speed with the two-wheel world in more ways than one, boosting confidence and mph (up to 15) as time passes. It’s a great choice once little ones have graduated from the passenger seat of their parents’ commuter bike but still think running a few errands is fun. And the moto-style saddle is made to grow into and adventure out on, as the empowering ride can go off-road just like the Irvine, Calif.-based company’s electric motorbikes for adults

What to consider when searching for the best electric commuter bikes

E-bikes can cost anywhere from $1,000 to more than $10,000; however, plenty of well-outfitted models fall between $2,000 and $3,000. Expect to see more premium features in the $4,000 and $6,000 price range. And before you make a purchase, check to see if your state offers tax credits or rebates for electric bikes, like Colorado, Maine, Vermont, Minnesota, and Washington. 

Comparing models—even by the same brand—requires looking at the specs of many different components. Why? Bikes aren’t made from top to bottom by a single manufacturer: One company may make the frame, while another makes the brakes, another handles the shifter, and still another builds the motor. 

For e-bikes, more expensive models usually have larger battery capacity, more powerful engines, and frames and components made of higher-quality, often lighter-weight materials. We’ve tried reducing the complexity of this list by relying on well-established electric bike manufacturers and traditional bicycle companies. 

Pedal assist vs. throttle

Electric bikes make excellent commuting vehicles because the additional power they provide riders helps make it easier to go up hills, cover long distances, and go at higher speeds. That extra boost comes from a pedal assist system (PAS) or a throttle. A PAS e-bike is like riding a regular, old-school, analog bicycle, except you feel like you have superpowers. Controls on the handlebars dial in on the levels of assistance while sensors detect how fast or hard you’re pedaling. An e-bike with a throttle system rides more like a scooter or a moped—pedaling is optional. With a twist or press of the button, you’re lurching forward from a stop or getting help to go up a hill.

Classes

Most states regulate electric bicycles like regular bicycles, which means no registration, licensing, or insurance requirements like a motor vehicle requires. (Check out the non-profit advocacy group People for Bikes’ guides for state laws.) However, which class an e-bike falls under also determines other operating rules, like minimum age for riders and helmet requirements. Here’s a breakdown:

  • Class 1: a PAS motor that stops assistance at 20 mph.
  • Class 2: a throttle motor that stops assistance at 20 mph.
  • Class 3: a PAS motor that stops assistance at 28 mph. 

Specific paths, trails, or parks may prohibit e-bikes or specific classes (usually the faster Class 3). Check the rules of any part of your commute (or if you’re taking an electric mountain bike out for an adventure). 

Just to make it more confusing, some bike manufacturers blur the lines between these classes or ship a bike at Class 1 that can be “unlocked” to a Class 3. But remember: 20 mph on a bike is really fast, especially if you need to stop frequently for street intersections or traffic lights. 

Riding range and battery life

The first step in picking an electric bike for commuting is knowing the distance of your route (and back) and a rough idea of the terrain. Every e-bike publishes an estimated range for how long batteries will last, but “estimate” is the keyword. Your weight, your cargo, the number and steepness of hills, and the assist level affect how long a battery lasts. In other words, an e-bike riding along a flat patch on the lowest assist level can go much farther than when it’s going uphill on the highest assist level. Find a bike range that includes the back and forth of your ride to work with miles to spare, or you might run out of juice. 

A caution: Cranking throttles to the max is super fun but burns through battery power fast—especially if you’re not pedaling. This leads to straightforward advice: A higher-capacity battery is better, even when heavier. 

Size and weight

One of the main downfalls of electric bikes is their size and weight. An average e-bike will be between 50 and 60 pounds and feature an extended wheelbase to ensure a stable ride. That heft can be challenging for smaller riders or anyone who needs to maneuver it up and down stairs, onto a car rack, or into an elevator. Carbon fiber and other premium materials can shave a lightweight e-bike down to about 30 pounds, but they drive the price up. Consider where you’ll store the bike and whether you have the muscle power to get it there. Think about a folding electric bike for something smaller and easier to stow. 

FAQs

Q: Is it better to buy an e-bike or a regular bike?

An e-bike can offer many advantages over a regular bike for commuting. Both options are more environmentally friendly and cost-effective than driving gas-powered cars. They also allow riders to squeeze a joint-friendly cardio workout and fresh air into a workday. E-bikes’ extra power, however, takes riders farther and faster than their legs alone, helping less fit riders make the roundtrip comfortably and in less time. While it’s not the norm, an increasing number of households in places with bike lanes, paths, and other cycling infrastructure opt for an e-bike as a cost-saving alternative to a second car.

That said, e-bikes start at higher price points than traditional bicycles, plus they require charging and weigh more. They still require maintenance; eventually, batteries will degrade and need replacing. However, if you’re feeling handy, there are kits to convert a bike to an e-bike.

Q: How can I increase the range of my electric bike?

Some little things you can do are maintain proper tire pressure, use lower pedal assist modes, and avoid relying exclusively on the motor for throttle bikes. Occasionally, I have pushed the edge of my range and ended up with just 10 percent of battery life but a few miles to go. In those times, I grit my teeth and turn off assistance, saving whatever juice remains for hills. 

Alternatively, you could carry a second battery as backup, though they will add significant weight to the ride. Some bike models also offer higher-capacity batteries as an additional purchase.

Q: Can electric bikes go up hills?

Oh boy, can they! Some cyclists go out of their way to test their mettle against a steep hill, while others go out of their way to avoid them. Anyone in the latter camp will enjoy how the different assistance levels of an e-bike can make a super long, slow incline feel flat or a sharp slope a manageable climb. How easy it will be depends on your fitness, the bike’s gear options, and how powerful the motor is. An e-bike is still a bike, so there may be occasions that you’ll need to adjust to a lower gear or stand on the pedals to get over the peak, but it will likely reduce how often you dismount and push your bike. We do caution against single-speed e-bikes unless you ride exclusively in truly flat areas like coastal trails. 

Final thoughts on the best electric commuter bikes

Much like cars, there’s an e-bike model for nearly every type of rider, ranging from people who haven’t touched a pedal since childhood to longtime, hardcore cyclists. If tooling around occasionally is your thing, a budget electric bike may work, but for commuting, we recommend investing in one of our picks above, which can withstand the wear and tear of regular riding in all sorts of weather.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric commuter bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart grills for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-grills/ Fri, 29 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589705
The best smart grills in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Overdone? Underdone? Be done with both with smart grills that make sure your cooking experience is just right.

The post The best smart grills for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smart grills in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Weber Genesis EX-325S Weber Genesis EX-325S
SEE IT

The gas-powered, gold standard for smart grills.

Best pellet Traeger Grills Pro Series 575 Traeger Grills Pro Series 575
SEE IT

A (meat) smoker’s dream appliance.

Best budget Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro Smart Grill Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro
SEE IT

Portability and functionality from a smart grill that’ll set you back under $500.

Many of us have made the leap to having at least a few key smart home accessories inside our home, but how about one that lives outside: a smart grill. It’s hard to beat a smart home gadget that can help deliver perfectly cooked food without second-guessing yourself or constantly reaching for a thermometer. Or requiring standing in the cold! As you’d expect, the main feature of these grills is Wi-Fi or Bluetooth connectivity to your phone via an app, which allows you to monitor the temperature of your grill wirelessly to prevent overcooking from wherever you are in or around the house. Some of the grills come with meat probes, so you can also check in on the exact state of your cook, which is enormously helpful to amateur and pro grillers alike. The best smart grills will work well even if you don’t use their wireless features but are enhanced by them.

How we chose the best smart grills

When compiling this collection of smart grills, we considered their size, fuel type, functionality, and cost. We also consulted our guides to the best gas, charcoal, and kamado grills, drawing upon the research conducted during their construction.

The best smart grills: Reviews & Recommendations

Embedding Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth into grills doesn’t revolutionize cooking with radiant heat, but it does take some heat off the cook. Whether you want to upgrade your old grill to a smart model or set up a cooker for the very first time, expertly make long cooks like brisket or just avoid sitting around waiting for the grill to warm up, you’ll find what you need here.

Best overall: Weber Genesis EX-325S

Weber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 35.5 x 30.75 x 31 Inches
  • Weight: 188 pounds
  • Fuel: Gas
  • Price: $1,079.00

Pros

  • Large cooking area
  • Side wings
  • Easily accessible temperature gauge

Cons

  • Price

Weber’s Genesis EX-325S offers everything you’d need in a smart grill, especially if you’re cooking for a bigger crowd. The larger gas grill has three burners, so you can create hot and cool zones to avoid overcooking your food, plus one “sear station,” which can get super hot to hasten caramelization. An expandable top grate gives you ample space to toast buns or keep foods warm while you cook the rest. The EX-325S’ two integrated side tables are wide enough to accommodate what you’re cooking, plus whatever other grilling tools and accessories you may need for your cook. A screen on the side of the grill shows its current temperature, while meat probes located underneath can be inserted into thicker cuts so you can monitor them as they cook.

These features make the EX-325S a fine grill whether you care about smart features or not, but it also supports Weber Connect, the company’s digital platform available on iOS or Android devices. Connectivity is available through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth, and once you’ve paired your smartphone to the grill, you can monitor its temperature and check on the meat probes you’re using. You can’t control the grill’s temperature through your phone, but can monitor it. This is the most important functionality when cooking, so it’s great to see Weber build it directly into its grills.

Weber’s Genesis EX-325S is one of the best gas grills you can get, and its smart functionality pushes it over the top. You will have to pay for its power, but it’s worth the cost if you cook often.

Best charcoal: Kamado Joe Konnekted Joe

Kamado Joe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 29 x 47 x 48 inches
  • Weight: 175 pounds
  • Fuel: Charocal
  • Price: $1,699

Pros

  • Automatic fire starter
  • Full ceramic build
  • Surprising control for a charcoal grill

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Price

The Kamado Joe Konnected Joe has taken to Mortal Kombat naming conventions when it komes to its included features. It doesn’t have a control board; it has a Kontrol Board. It doesn’t have a top vent to maintain air settings during opening and closing the dome; it has a Kontrol Tower top vent. It also has an automatic fire starter. No misspellings there. Between its Wi-Fi app connectivity, multiple cooking modes, digital fan, and Kontrolled temperature settings, you can reach precise cooking enlightenment.

It has space for 13 burgers, four whole chickens, or two pork shoulders. Or several pounds of red bell peppers. It’s your call. It clocks in at 175 pounds, but it stands on wheels, so you can move it if you need to. The digital controls are great if you are just getting into smoking, as that can be a sweaty and stressful manual process. Maintaining a temperature of 250 degrees over 18 hours for a brisket is much easier when you have an app. While traditionalists might disagree with that assessment, we just wanna eat. Relax, because it also has a classic mode that allows you to manage the temperature manually. So yeah, the Kamado Joe Konnected Joe has something for everyone, no matter your level of grill expertise, and makes a delicious addition to a smart home (just make sure you’ve got a Wi-Fi router with enough range to reach the patio).

Best pellet: Traeger Grills Pro Series 575

Traeger

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27 x 41 x 53 Inches
  • Weight: 124 pounds
  • Fuel: Wood pellets
  • Price: $799.99

Pros

  • Ample cooking space
  • 500-degree maximum temperature
  • Pellet hopper management feature

Cons

  • You still need to add wood pellets

If you don’t mind the maintenance required for using a smoker, Traeger Grills’ Pro 575 is the smart version you’ve been waiting for. Sure, there are innovative devices that bring the smoker experience indoors, but this is a proper grill with upgraded features. The smoker is large enough to accommodate 24 burgers, five rib racks, or four chickens, plus some space for sides if you use its top rack. What’s more, the pellet grill can get up to 500 degrees, which is suitable for baking, too. A built-in meat probe allows you to monitor the temperature of larger cuts of meat. The smoker was updated with a new design that Traeger says is better at heating the grill more quickly and improving the quality of its smoke. The smoker’s temperature can be monitored and adjusted using a panel on its right-hand side.

To enable the Pro 575’s smart features, you’ll need to download its app to your iOS and/or Android device. The app will allow you to monitor and adjust the smoker’s temperature, check the status of your meat probes, and set a cooking timer. You’ll receive a notification on your device when the meat probe gets up to your specified temperature, or the timer goes off. You can also switch this pellet grill’s cooking mode from super smoke to keep warm, or shut it down entirely. The most important smart feature is arguably the ability to see how full this grill’s pellet hopper is. If you’ve got an all-day cook (think brisket), you’ll want to be sure the hopper always has enough fuel, and this feature can save you from having to check manually. You’ll still need to add your own fuel—and be sure you have pellets on hand—but this feature makes using it more convenient. The Pro 575 is the best value introduction to Traeger’s line of pellet grills and may one day lead you to the flagship Timberline—the best splurge and a grill we found to be straight WiFire.

Best for large family: Weber Genesis SPX-435

Weber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 31 x 68.5 x 63 inches
  • Weight: 227 pounds
  • Fuel: Gas
  • Price: $2,099

Pros

  • Massive cooking area
  • Four cooking zones
  • Side burner

Cons

  • Price

Weber’s Genesis SPX-435 is the super-sized version of our top smart grill pick, which means it has all of the same smart functionality—temperature monitoring and meat probe monitoring—as its smaller sibling. Where the Genesis SPX-435 stands out is its size, which is immense. This is a four-burner grill with 994 square inches of cooking space, which means you should be able to cook roughly eight racks of ribs, 32 burgers, or six chickens on it simultaneously.

Need more space? Say no more. The SPX-435 has an additional side burner, which you can use to cook food in a pan. Having four burners allows you to create even more hot and cool cooking zones, and using the sear zone can get you the char and grill marks you desire. All of this power comes at a cost—this is the most expensive smart grill we’re recommending—but it’s a necessity if you’re cooking for a huge crowd during summer parties and tailgates. Don’t worry; we have plenty of less expensive gas grill recommendations, too. If you’re looking to upgrade to a smart grill with substantial space for cooking, Weber’s SPX-435 is our top pick.

Best budget: Ninja OG951 Woodfire Pro

Ninja

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 22.28 x 20.03 x 15.82 inches
  • Weight: 38.9 pounds
  • Fuel: Electric
  • Price: $449.99

Pros

  • Portability
  • Multifunctionality
  • Price

Cons

  • May not be large enough

Ninja’s OG951 Woodfire Pro is our least expensive smart grill recommendation, but it’s also the only one you can reasonably carry around with you. The electrically powered smart grill can be plugged in anywhere there’s an outlet but can impart smoky flavor into your food by burning wood pellets from a hopper built into a side pocket. A fan built into the top of the grill circulates the smoke to ensure even exposure. You don’t have to use the wood pellets if you don’t want to—the grill’s heating elements are electric—but it’s nice to have the option. Speaking of options, the OG951 has seven cooking modes, which range from grill and smoke to bake and dehydrate. If you want to cook outdoors while camping, the OG951 covers all your bases.

Ninja allows you to connect to its smart grill over Wi-Fi or Bluetooth through its Pro Connect app on iOS and Android. The app allows you to monitor its temperature, change its cooking mode, enable or disable wood pellet burning, set a timer, control the grill temperature, and set up a meat probe. If you’re cooking a specific cut of meat, you can program the meat probes using presets that’ll control the grill’s temperature and other settings for you to ensure a proper cook with minimal maintenance. If you’d like a smart grill but don’t have enough room for a full-sized one (or you’ve fully embraced van-life), Ninja’s OG951 is the ideal choice.

What to consider when shopping for the best smart grill

We’ve been hibernating with smart ovens for years, and now it’s time to feel the sun again. It’s hard to beat a smart home gadget that can help deliver perfectly cooked food without second-guessing yourself or constantly reaching for a thermometer.

Size

Smart grills aren’t small or light, but that’s the price for a tool that allows you to cook for an entire family all in one shot. Most of our recommendations weigh over 100 pounds (one clocks in north of 200) and sit on wheels that allow you to move them around. We have a portable option if you’d like smart functionality from a grill you can take anywhere.

Fuel source

Smart grills can run on gas, pellets, charcoal, and even electricity. Each of these fuels has its own pros and cons, but one isn’t inherently better than the other. Smart grills that run on pellets and charcoal will impart a naturally smokey flavor to whatever you’re cooking but require you to feed them with additional fuel continually. This can get taxing on especially long cooks. Gas smart grills won’t require as much maintenance but will require you to monitor how much propane is left.

You’ll have to refill the tank once or twice a summer, depending on how often you use it. An electric smart grill won’t be as powerful as the other types, but it only requires an outlet to work. This gives you much greater flexibility when cooking. Neither a gas nor electric grill will give your cooks a smokey flavor on their own; you’ll have to find alternative ways to get that effect.

Smart features

The “smart” features that set these grills apart from their analog brethren come down to sending information from the grill to your smartphone. This includes how hot the grill is and, if you use the included meat probes, the current temperature of your cooks. It’s crucial to know this information as, without it, you can easily over or undercook your food when not paying attention. While these smart features are icing on the cake (or bark on the brisket, as it were), they don’t get in the way of a grill’s core functionality. In some cases, you’ll also be able to adjust the temperature of your grill using your phone, which can be helpful if you’re in another room in your home.

FAQs

Q: Is a smart grill a good investment?

A smart grill’s additional features can make cooking easier if you grill often. For example, getting an alert on your smartphone when the grill reaches a particular temperature or using meat probes that send a notification when your meat is ready to be removed is genuinely useful. However, if you don’t grill often, the presence of these features may not justify the high price of a smart grill.

Q: Which grill is better, gas or electric?

While both fuel sources are different, one isn’t inherently better than the other. An electric grill requires access to an outlet, while gas grills necessitate tank refills on a regular basis. Both can reach similar maximum temperatures, so you’ll be able to cook the same types of food on each.

Q: What grills can connect to a smart device?

The smart grills we’re recommending can be connected to a smartphone, as can any model advertised with Wi-Fi and/or Bluetooth compatibility.

Q: How much does a smart grill cost?

This depends on its size, power, and fuel source. Our recommendations range between $449.99 and $2,099.

Final thoughts on the best smart grills

Using a smart grill won’t automatically turn you into a pitmaster, but can soften the learning curve of more complicated dishes like brisket or prime rib. Messing up an expensive cut of meat is deeply dissatisfying on multiple levels, so having a grill that can help you keep track of a cook in real-time can be a legitimate help. A smart grill is a worthy upgrade for long-time grillers who want to fine-tune their recipes with surgical precision, as well as those who want to start their grilling journey with a little extra help.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart grills for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-solar-generators/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=421868
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

Tap the power of the sun to meet your power needs wherever you may roam.

The post The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus
SEE IT

This is a solid all-around mix of features and affordability.

Best for camping Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Portable Generator Review Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
SEE IT

This powerful pack is easy to transport to a site.

Best for homes EcoFlow Delta Pro portable generator review EcoFlow Delta Pro
SEE IT

This is the pick if you need lots of scalable capacity.

You don’t want to wait until you need a solar generator to buy one. Whether you’re trying to live the van life, prepare for emergencies, or just bring some creature comforts with you when you go camping. Whatever the case, few things are as useful in today’s tech-driven world as a source of reliable, renewable power. The best solar generators can reliably and sustainably meet various energy needs, and we have tested and compared the best models to find which one fits your needs.

How we chose the best solar generators

As an avid outdoorsman, I’ve had the opportunity to test an extremely wide range of outdoor gear, including mobile and off-grid electrification equipment like solar-powered generators, as well as inverter and dual-fuel generators. These became particularly essential when the pandemic forced my travels to become domestic rather than international, which prompted me to outfit a van for long-term road-tripping

To bring my work along for the ride, I needed a constant power source to charge my laptop, a portable fridge, lighting, and a myriad of devices and tools … even the best electric bikes. As a result, I’ve tried all the leading portable power stations (and plenty that aren’t leading, too), so I know precisely what separates the best from the blah. I’ve written all about it (and other outdoor tech) for publications, including the Daily Beast, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. There were cases when my own opinion resulted in a tie, and I, therefore, looked to reviews from actual customers to determine which solar generators delivered the most satisfaction to the most users.

The best solar generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The solar generators on this list span a wide range of budgets, from a few hundred dollars to a few thousand. They span several use cases, from camping to a backup for your home. Only you know all the factors that make one of these the best solar generator for you, but we think that one of these will get the job done.

Best overall: Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It offers just about everything from our previous best overall pick with the added benefits of LiFePO4 battery power.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,042.8Wh (expandable up to 24,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 6,000w
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.7 x 14.1 inches
  • Weight: 61 pounds
  • Price: $2,199

Pros

  • Charges quickly
  • Very high output that can run power-hungry devices
  • Built-in wheels and handle
  • Clear display
  • Four AC outlets
  • Expandable with extra batteries
  • Long life batteries

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Slightly less capacity than our previous pick

As new solar generators hit the market, many come toting new lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4) batteries instead of the familiar lithium-ion batteries that came before. LiFePO4 offers a few advantages, including a much longer lifespan as you charge and discharge them. They’re also safer and often faster to charge. They do typically add some weight, however. Just about all of those modifiers apply here in the form of the Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus.

The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus can power current-hungry devices at up to 6000w, so even if you want to power a welder, you can. The battery will only last you about a half hour doing this (we tried it), but it does work, and that’s more than many other models can say. I also got to test the Explorer 2000 Plus during a real power outage. It kept our router running for several hours to maintain connectivity.

This model has 2kWh of storage built-in, but you can expand that capacity with extra external daisy-chained batteries. It gives a total max storage of up to 24kWh—enough for a serious off-grid job. The optional solar panels charge the battery quickly and efficiently. Jackery claims roughly two hours of charging time via the optional solar panels, and I found it took more like 2.5 hours, but that includes battling some passing clouds. With two straight hours of direct sun, it could likely get the job done.

A look at the Jackery 2000 Plus solar generator with its handle extended
The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus handle and integrated wheels make it considerably easier to move around. Stan Horaczek

At 61 pounds, this is considerably heavier than the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, which weighs nearly 20 pounds less. But, the integrated wheels, handle, and chunky grips to either side of the box make it very easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily set it in the back of my wife’s Honda Civic.

The switch to LiFePo4 also means that this unit will last a long time before the battery degrades beyond its usable range. The company claims it will take 4,000 cycles before the battery life degrades to 70 percent. We obviously haven’t had time to test that yet, but that is the nature of LiFePo4, so it will almost certainly last longer than a lithium-ion model at least.

Still great: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This Jackery solar generator delivers the best blend of capacity, input/output capability, portability, and durability.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,200W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Price: $2,498

Pros

  • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
  • Durable and easy to use
  • Plenty of ports
  • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

Cons

  • Heavy for its size

The biggest portable power station from Jackery, a leading solar generator manufacturer, the Explorer 2000 Pro offers a tremendous 2,160 watt-hours of power, making it capable of charging a full camping setup for a few days. When plugged into six 200W solar panels, an upgrade over the four-panel setup available on the Jackery Explorer 1500, you can fully charge this portable power station in just 2-2.5 hours. That’s less than half the time of the smaller model.

On top of all that, it’s extremely user-friendly. Numerous output ports ensure that you can plug in a wide range of devices and electrical equipment. Its functions are highly intuitive, and the digital display is easy to understand. Like other Jackery generators, it’s incredibly durable, too. The one potential downside is its weight: At 43 pounds, it’s a bit heavy for its size. Even so, for all the power you can store, and the rapid-charging time, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro will keep the lights on wherever you need power.

For more on the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, check out our full review.

Best high-capacity: Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,024Wh
  • Output capacity: 3,000W
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
  • Weight: 63.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,799

Pros

  • Ample power storage for long trips or outages
  • Sturdy handles and wheels make it easy to move
  • Smooth design makes it easy to load and unload
  • High peak output for power-intensive tasks
  • Lots of ports for connectivity

Cons

  • 200W solar panels can be klunky
  • Relatively pricey

This is the big sibling to our best overall pick. Inside the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro, you’ll find 3,024Wh of power storage, which is enough to power even large devices for extended periods of time. It can charge a high-end smartphone more than 100 times on a single charge. It can also power full-on appliances in an RV or emergency situation.

Despite its large capacity, we learned firsthand that the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro is relatively easy to move around. Sturdy handles molded into its case make it easy to pick up, while an extending handle and wheels make it easy to roll around at the campsite or any other location.

It can charge in less than three hours from a standard outlet or, under optimal conditions with the 200W solar panels, it can fill up as quickly as eight hours. That full solar array can get large and unwieldy, but a smaller setup can still provide ample charging if you don’t need to max out the capacity daily.

This portable power station offers the best of everything we loved about the Explorer 2000 Pro, there’s just more of it. When you’re living the van life, powering an RV, or trying to ride out a power outage, more is definitely better if you can justify the extra cost.

Best for frequent use: Anker 767 Portable Power Station Solar Generator

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High capacity and fast charging make this long-lasting battery a solid everyday driver.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh
  • Output capacity: 2,400W
  • Dimensions: 20.67 x 9.84 x 15.55 inches
  • Weight: 67.3 pounds
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Charges up to 80% in less than two hours
  • Solid output and storage capacity
  • Optional battery pack doubles capacity
  • LiFePO4 batteries survive more charge cycles than traditional models
  • Plenty of ports
  • Built-in handle and wheels for transport

Cons

  • Heavy for its capacity
  • No USB-C in for charging

Anker has equipped its massive portable power station with LiFePO4 batteries, which stand up much better to repeat charging and discharging over the long term than common lithium-ion cells. Anker claims it can charge and discharge up to 3,000 times before it reaches 80% battery health compared to 500 in a similar lithium-ion setup. While I haven’t had the chance to run it through 3,000 cycles, LiFePO4 batteries have a well-earned reputation for longevity. 

Regarding overall performance, the Anker 767 does everything you’d want a unit with these specs to do. The bad weather has given me [Executive Gear Editor Stan Horaczek] ample chances, unfortunately, to test it in real-world situations. 

The built-in battery offers a 2048Wh capacity and pumps out up to 2,400W. It does so through four standard AC outlets, an RV outlet, two 120W car outlets, two 12W USB-A ports, and three 100W USB-C ports. 

I used it during a blackout to keep our Wi-Fi running while charging my family’s devices. Filling a phone from zero barely makes a dent in the power station’s capacity, and it ran the router for several hours with plenty of juice left. 

In another instance, it powered our small meat freezer for four hours before the power came back on with some juice still left in the tank. It does what it promises. 

There are a few nice extra touches as well. Built-in wheels and an extendable handle allow it to roll like carry-on luggage. Unfortunately, those are necessary inclusions because it weighs a hefty 67.3 pounds. It’s manageable but definitely heavy compared to its competition. 

The Anker 767 is compatible with the company’s 200W solar panels, which fold up for easy transportation. I mostly charged the unit through my home’s AC power, a surprisingly quick process. The 767 Portable Power Station can go from flat to more than 80% charge in less than a half hour with sufficient power. It takes about two hours to get it fully juiced. 

Anker also offers a mobile app that connects to the power station via Bluetooth if you want to control it without actually going over and touching it.

Best for camping: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its outstanding portability, high storage capacity, and Yeti’s famous durability, the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is great for packing along for camping or van-living. 

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 983Wh
  • Input capacity: 600W
  • Output capacity: 1,200W (2,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
  • Weight: 31.68 lbs
  • Price: $1,198.95

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Incredible durability
  • Rapid recharge rate
  • Plenty of plugs

Cons

  • Expensive for its size/capacity

Yeti is long-renowned for making some of the best outdoor gear money can buy, so when the company launched its Goal Zero line of solar generators, it was no surprise that they turned out to be awesome. While the whole line is great, the 1000 Core model’s balance between capacity and portability makes it perfect for taking on the road and going camping.

While the 1000 Core has a third less capacity than our top pick, it charges up faster, making it a great option for rapid solar replenishment. That said, its capacity is no slouch, offering 82 phone charges, 20 for a laptop, or upwards of 15 hours for a portable fridge (depending on wattage). Suffice to say, it’s more than capable of powering your basic camping gear.

Beyond its charging capabilities, the Goal Zero 1000 Core excels at camping thanks to its hearty build quality. Built super tough—like pretty much everything Yeti makes—its exterior shell provides solid protection.

The biggest issue it presents is the cost. Like pretty much everything Yeti produces, its price tag isn’t small. While there are other 1000-level solar generators for less, this one offers a great balance of power storage and portability.

For more on the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core, check out our full review.

Best for off-grid living: Bluetti AC200 Max

Bluetti

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its high solo capacity and ability to daisy-chain with additional batteries, the Bluetti AC200 Max is perfect for bringing power off the grid.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh standalone, expandable up to 8,192Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,400W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,800W surge)
  • Dimensions: 16.5 x 11 x 15.2 inches
  • Weight: 61.9 lbs
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Massive capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • 30A RV plug and two wireless charging pads
  • Surprisingly affordable for what it offers

Cons

  • Pretty heavy
  • Fan can get loud, especially in hot weather

You’ll be hard-pressed to find a solar generator better suited for living off the grid for an extended period than the Bluetti AC200 Max. It boasts a substantial 2,048Wh capacity, allowing you to power your whole life off it longer than most portable generators. Even better, you can daisy-chain multiple Bluetti batteries, expanding its capacity to a massive 8.192Wh. That’s flat-out enormous and translates into the ability to power a full-sized fridge for over a day or several hours of air conditioning. For the more modest needs of people who are used to living off a generator, it will last for a very long time.

At the same time, the AC200 Max has an outstanding input capacity of 1,400W. That means you can plug in a pretty hefty array of solar panels to replenish its stores quickly. This allows you to keep your off-grid setup going with little to no interruption. It also features some specialty charging options, including a 30A plug, which lets you plug it directly into an RV, and multiple wireless charging pads for smaller devices.

Fastest charging: EcoFlow Delta 2 Max

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Whether it’s solar or AC power, you can get 80% of a charge in an hour or less.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2048Wh (expandable to 6,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 3,400W
  • Dimensions: 19.8 x 9.5 x 12.01
  • Weight: 50.71 lbs
  • Price: $2,000

Pros

  • Very fast charging over solar or mains
  • Relatively compact
  • Not as heavy as we might have expected
  • Long-lasting batteries
  • Scalable by connecting two extra batteries
  • Advanced temperature management for safety

Cons

  • Solar panels are pricy
  • Still heavier than non-LiFePo4 models

Plug this 2048Wh battery pack into up to 1,000 watts of solar panels, and you can get an 80 percent charge in just 43 minutes. That’s blisteringly fast compared to other models. Plug the unit into the wall and you’ll go from zero to 80 percent in just 1.1 hours, which is still fairly speedy when it comes to soaking up electricity. That extra time can make a huge difference if you only have limited opportunities to top off your solar generator. We managed to get above 80 percent in just under an hour without perfect sun conditions here in Upstate New York.

In addition to its quick charging skills, the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max offers an impressive array of connectivity, including six AC outlets, which is more than many larger models offer. That’s good if you want to run many devices or chargers simultaneously. If you need more capacity, you can add two extra external batteries to give it a total storage of 6Wh.

At 51 pounds, this isn’t the lightest solar generator in its category, but like the other EcoFlow generators, it has chunky handles on top that make it easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily get it in and out of the back of our Honda CR-V without issue. Though, it doesn’t have wheels, so you will have to actually carry it around or put it on a cart.

Ultimately, this feels like a very high-end device. The fast charging is wonderful. The display is clear and relatively bright (though it could be brighter). And it offers a wide array of connectivity.

Best for homes: EcoFlow Delta Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The EcoFlow Delta Pro delivers the standalone and expandable power capacity necessary to power your entire home.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,600Wh standalone, expandable up to 25,000Wh
  • Input capacity: 6,500W
  • Output capacity: 3,600W (7,200W surge)
  • Dimensions: 25 x 11.2 x 16.4 inches
  • Weight: 99 lbs
  • Price: $3,699

Pros

  • Enormous capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • 30A RV plug
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • Wi-Fi and Smartphone connectivity

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for the best solar generator for home backup in the event of a power outage, the EcoFlow Delta Pro stands apart from the pack, thanks to an unrivaled power and output capacity. The Delta Pro alone packs a 3,600Wh wallop, and you can expand that to 25,000Wh by chaining it to extra EcoFlow batteries and generators. That’s a ton of power and it has the substantial output capacity necessary to power an entire house worth of electronics when you need it to.

The Delta Pro also offers a companion app for iOS and Android that allows you to monitor energy usage, customize its operation, and monitor and manage a number of other elements.

While it’s not overly large for what it does, the Delta Pro is a heavy piece of equipment. It has wheels, so it is technically portable, but this is meant to be put down in a home or other semi-permanent site. Given its size and power, it’s also a much more expensive device, especially if you’re springing for the add-ons. As the best solar power generator to provide backup power for your entire home, however, it’s worth every penny. 

Best budget: Jackery Explorer 300

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: With its reasonable capacity, compact size, and solid build quality at a low price, the Jackery Explorer 300 is a great budget pick.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 293Wh
  • Input capacity: 90W
  • Output capacity: 300W (500W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.1 x 5.2 x 7.8 in
  • Weight: 7.1 lbs
  • Price: $250

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Durable
  • Portable
  • Reasonable capacity

Cons

  • No flashlight
  • Slower input capacity

Though it isn’t quite as impressive as our top picks for best overall and best high-capacity, Jackery’s smaller Explorer 300 solar generator is super compact and lightweight with a decent power capacity for its price. Less a mobile power station than an upscale power bank, the 7-pound Jackery Explorer 300 provides plenty of portable recharges for your devices when you’re camping, on a job site, driving, or just need some power and don’t have convenient access to an outlet. Its modest 293Wh capacity isn’t huge, but it’s enough to provide 31 phone charges, 15 for a camera, 6 for the average drone, 2.5 for a laptop, or a few hours of operation for a minifridge or TV. A built-in flashlight would have upped its camping game somewhat, but at $300 (and often considerably less if you catch it discounted), this highly portable little power station does a lot for a little.

We tested this portable power station for several months, and it came in handy numerous times, especially during the winter when power outages abound. At one point, we had it powering two phones, a MacBook, and a small light.

The built-in handle makes it very easy to lug around. It feels like carrying a lunch box. The screen is easy to read, and the whole package seems fairly durable. Our review unit hasn’t taken any dramatic tumbles yet, but it has gotten banged around in car trunks, duffle bags, and other less-than-luxurious accommodations with no issues. If you catch one of these on sale, get it and stick it in a cabinet. You’ll be extremely glad to have it around when the need arises.

What to consider before buying the best solar generators

Over the past few years, solar generators have exploded onto the market. There are now dozens of different brands that largely look more or less the same at a glance. The fact is there are only a few standouts amidst a sea of knockoffs. Here’s what to look for to ensure you’re getting a great one:

How much power can it store?

A portable solar generator comes in an extremely wide range of sizes, but a generator’s size doesn’t automatically make it capable of storing a lot of power. In fact, most are disappointingly limited and unable to store much more juice than a portable charger.

To properly check a generator’s storage, you must look at its capacity, measured in watt-hours (Wh). One watt-hour is the equivalent of 1 watt flowing over the course of an hour. The best solar generators offer capacities of several hundred and sometimes several thousand watt-hours. That doesn’t mean, however, that it will provide power for several hundred or several thousand hours. Any generator will ultimately last a different amount of time, depending on what’s plugged into it.

It’s easy to predict how long a generator will last when you use it to power one thing. For example, if you were to power a 100-watt bulb using a power station with a capacity of 500 watt-hours, it would stay lit for five continuous hours. Add a portable fridge that requires 50 watts per hour, your phone which uses 18, a mini-fan that uses three … you get the picture. The more capacity, the better.

Charging capability

No solar generator will hold a charge forever, so you want one capable of charging as quickly and easily as possible. This is where we put the “renewable” into “renewable energy.”

All of the power stations included in this roundup can be charged by connecting them to solar panels (hence the designation “solar generators”). Still, you also want to look for the ability to charge via other sources like wall outlets and your vehicle’s 12-volt plug. This ensures that you can charge up whether you’re off-grid in the sun, plugged in while preparing at home, or using your dash socket on the go.

You must also monitor a model’s charging input capacity, measured in watts (W). For example, a solar-powered generator with a max input of 100W can take in a continuous flow of up to 100 watts, which is about the minimum that you’ll reasonably want to look for. Most of the generators below have input capacities of at least a few hundred watts when charging via solar, so a few 50- to 200-watt solar panels will max them out.

Output capability

Solar generators need to keep the power coming in and going out. The best solar generators can simultaneously charge all your intended devices via whatever plugs are necessary.

Any portable power station worth your money will have a high output capacity so you can charge many devices, even if they require a lot of juice. A generator’s maximum output should be much higher than its max input. While a particular model might only be capable of taking in a few hundred watts at any given moment, it will usually put out exponentially more. At a minimum, you’ll want a generator that can put out 300 watts at a time, though you’ll want at least 500 for larger tasks.

The best solar generators should also offer a variety of output plugs, including AC outlets, USB-A, USB-C, and even 12-volt DC outlets like the one in your vehicle dash. This ensures you can charge several devices simultaneously regardless of their plug. The number of ports you’ll need will vary depending on how many devices you need to power, but it should have at least a couple of AC outlets and a few USB-A ports.

Portability

While portable battery sources have been around for a while now, over the past several decades, they’ve been pretty heavy, unwieldy things. One of the most exciting aspects of the latest generation of solar generators is that they’ve become much more physically compact. 

Suppose you plan on taking a generator camping or working it into a van conversion where every square inch matters; well, size and weight become major considerations. All of the products we’ve recommended are about the size of one or two shoeboxes—three at the most. The lightest is about the weight of a 24-pack of soda, while the heaviest is 100 pounds. Most fall somewhere between 30-60 pounds.

If you’re using your generator as a more or less stationary source of backup power at home, portability isn’t a huge issue. Still, we generally recommend keeping weight and size in mind; You never know when you’ll need it for something other than a backup. (Plus, who wants to lug around something heavy and awkward if they don’t have to?) 

Another consideration regarding portability involves the necessity for accessories, which can impact how easy it is to move and use your generator. Some generators, for example, require a lot of removable battery packs, which can be a hassle when you’re on the go or packing a vehicle. All of the inclusions on our list require some accessories—you can’t get solar power without connecting cables and solar panels—but they work well with minimal add-ons.

Durability

As with any product you expect to last, durability and all-around quality craftsmanship are essential. This is especially true if you plan on lugging your generator around on camping and road trips. Many subpar power stations are made from cheap components and flimsy plastic that doesn’t feel like it will hold up under the rigors of the road.

Durability isn’t something you can determine by reading a spec sheet off the internet. You’ve actually got to take the generator out, use it a bunch, and see how it holds up. I’ve verified the durability of these recommendations via a combination of my own actual field tests and reviews culled from countless real product owners.

Related: Best electric generators

FAQs

Q: What size solar generator should I get?

It’s easy to underestimate how much capacity you need. A 1,000 watt-hours might sound like a lot, but if you’re going to power a converted van with a portable fridge, lights, and occasional phone and laptop top-off, that 1,000 watt-hours will go faster than you expect. I used a setup like this and know from personal experience that you should always overestimate how much power you’ll need.

A generator with a capacity under 1,000Wh can keep electronics charged. A larger one with 1000-1500Wh should be the minimum for road trips where you’ll need it to last multiple days between full charges. For a house or worksite where you expect to use some serious energy—like a full-sized refrigerator or power tools—you’re going to want to start looking at the biggest possible power stations that can be daisy-chained to external batteries.

If you want to get precise, there is an equation:

1. Estimate how many hours you’ll need to power various devices. For example, if you want to power two light bulbs for 2 hours: you need 4 hours of operation.

2. Add up the total wattage necessary: the two bulbs are 60 watts each, so you need 120 watts.

3. Multiply these together to find the total watt-hours needed: 4 x 120 = 480. So, in this case, you’d need at least a 500Wh solar generator. 

That might sound like a lot for two lightbulbs, but remember that, in most situations, you won’t really be powering 60-watt light bulbs for hours on end. You’ll be charging phones and laptops for an hour here or there, cooling a fridge that kicks on and off every once in a while, using power tools in short bursts, and whatnot.

Q: How many years will a solar generator last?

Most modern generators are rated to last upwards of 25 years. The best-designed power stations are pretty sturdy, with few to no moving parts, so they should likely keep kicking for a long time, provided that you care for them properly. I’ve been pretty rough with a few of mine, and they show no signs of stopping.

Q: Can I run my house on solar power only?

Yes and no. While it’s absolutely possible to power your house with solar power, you’re unlikely to do so with a portable solar generator unless you use several at once while limiting your power usage. The largest of our recommendations—the EcoFlow Delta Pro—will come fairly close when bolstered with extra batteries. If the power goes out, you’ll be able to keep your fridge cold and use basic electronics for a couple of days without recharging. With quality solar panels, good sunlight, and smart energy usage, your power should theoretically go uninterrupted.

Final thoughts on the best solar generators

We’re living in a “golden age” for portable solar generators. When I was a kid, and my family was playing around with solar gear while camping in the ‘90s, the technology couldn’t charge many devices, so it wasn’t all that practical. 

By contrast, the solar generators we’ve recommended here are incredibly useful. I’ve relied on them to power my work and day-to-day needs while road-tripping nationwide. They’re also great when the power goes out. When a windstorm cut the power at my house for a couple of days, I was still working, watching my stories, and keeping the lights on. 

We haven’t even scratched the surface in terms of the potential offered by portable, reliable, renewable, relatively affordable power. What we can do now is already incredible. The potential for what may come next, though, is truly mind-blowing.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar generators for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-projectors/ Thu, 28 Apr 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439531
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Screen blockbusters at your neighborhood block party with these great projectors.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall XGIMI Horizon Ultra on a plain white background. XGIMI Horizon Ultra
SEE IT

A bright 4K projector with a sound system that’ll cut through noise in the great outdoors.

Best HD Epson Home Cinema 3800 is the best HD outdoor projector. Epson Home Cinema 3800
SEE IT

A 3LCD HD projector that competes with 4K.

Best portable Dangbei Atom Projector on a bed frame. Dangbei Atom
SEE IT

Ultra-portable and bright for taking the show(s) on the road.

As the weather warms up, outside activities heat up, and outdoor projectors transform the natural world into open-air movie theaters. They feature powerful lamps for use even when the sun hasn’t fully set or the streetlights are on, and they’re light enough to make moving them from your media room to your deck easy on your back. Many projectors suited for outdoor use include features like rechargeable batteries, smart TV operating systems, and robust speakers to help streamline set-up. Most importantly, just like any projector you’d buy for indoor use, they don’t skimp on important image specs, such as color, contrast, and resolution. When you don’t want your cul-de-sac drive-in to become a giant car wreck of a viewing experience, turn to the best outdoor projectors. 

How we chose the best outdoor projector

When considering the best outdoor projectors for our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home-theater projectors. Also, we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorite projector brands and the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites, sifting through reviews to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing on image quality. Color, contrast, and resolution were all taken into account. Balanced against these specs were features making the projector most suited to outdoor use, including brightness, portability, and versatility. Price was an important factor, especially regarding “bang for your buck,” though it wasn’t of primary concern when judging the higher-end categories of projectors. 

The best outdoor projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for outdoor projectors can be tricky, filled with jargon, numbers, and an endless parade of acronyms. If you want the most out of your home-theater experience, there’s much to learn, especially when hosting a backyard movie night. So read on for guidance in choosing the best outdoor projectors to watch the stars under the stars.

Best overall: XGIMI Horizon Ultra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Brightness: 2,300 ANSI Lumens
  • Ports: 2 x HDMI, 2 x USB-A, 1 x Ethernet, 1 x Optical, 1 x AUX
  • Weight: 11.24 pounds

Pros

  • Stunning video quality
  • Surprisingly good audio system
  • Snappy user interface

Cons

  • No native Netflix
  • Can’t run on battery power.

XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra is hands-down the best 4K projector we’ve tested yet, and at 2,300 lumens, it has enough brightness to handle projections in the great outdoors. One of the biggest strengths this projector offers as an outdoor projector is the fact that it’s all in one. It runs an operating system (Android TV) that allows you to stream TV shows and movies from most services (Netflix is conspicuously absent) without plugging in a media streamer. The Horizon Ultra’s processor is also powerful enough to run this operating system without lagging, which is helpful if you’re switching between apps regularly.

This projector has a pair of built-in Harman Kardon speakers loud enough to cut through most ambient outdoor noise and provide a surprisingly good audio experience when watching videos and playing games. It’s also compact and light enough to fit comfortably in a backpack for easy transport. It doesn’t run on battery power, so you’ll need access to a consistent power source, but this won’t be a problem for backyard movie nights. While it’s inessential, we were really pleased with the Horizon Ultra’s overall build quality, from its mesh outer covering to the fact that its remote is made from metal instead of plastic.

From a performance perspective, this projector is hard to beat. The Horizon Ultra continually produced a bright, colorful image even in a room with some light leakage. It won’t be able to compete with bright sunlight, but that’s the case with all projectors. This is the first long-throw model with support for Dolby Vision, HDR10, and HLG, so it’ll product a clear image regardless of what’s being shown on screen. Automatic keystone correction will keep the screen aligned, whether you’re projecting a 40- or 200-inch screen. XGIMI’s upcoming Horizon Max, announced at CES 2024, offers an IMAX 1.90:1 aspect ratio, more lumens, an updated Intelligent Screen Adaption system, and more immersive sound if you need a larger screen (albeit at a higher price).

Our tests included playing video games like Phantasy Star Second Story R, wherein characters dart across the screen while visual effects pop up constantly. This was no problem for the Horizon Pro’s 18ms latency and 60Hz refresh rate, which handled the task with aplomb. This 4K projector’s color reproduction was fantastic, and shows or games with support for HDR (high dynamic range) look even better. The Horizon Ultra’s speakers, which we mentioned earlier, could decode Dolby and DTS and deliver clear dialogue and deep bass. We never needed to connect external speakers to the projector, which was quite the feat. Our only complaint with this projector remains its lack of native Netflix support, which is a bummer given the ubiquity of the service. If you don’t mind plugging in a media streamer or sideloading apps, this won’t be an issue, so it’s hardly a reason to ding the Horizon Ultra too harshly.

Best HD: Epson Home Cinema 3800

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This ultra-bright HD projector delivers a cinema-like picture with brilliant colors and deep blacks even when it’s not completely dark. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 3,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 100,000:1
  • Weight: 15.2 pounds

Pros

  • Accurate color
  • Can display 4K content using pixel shifting
  • Easy-to-adjust settings
  • Wide variety of inputs

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Somewhat heavy

The Epson 3800 projector is an excellent outdoor choice for anyone who doesn’t need native 4K resolution but still wants a large, movie-theater-quality picture. And with a contrast ratio of 100,000:1 and 10-bit HDR color processing, this 3LCD projector will give you deep blacks and bold colors (100% of the RGB color signal) on a screen up to 300 inches from corner to corner. 

What’s more, the 3800 can still deliver a 4K image—sort of. While its native resolution is 1920 x 1080, it uses a technology called pixel shifting to interpolate the missing pixels and fill out a full UHD frame. Is it perfect? No, and at the maximum screen size some loss of sharpness has been reported. But at, say, 150-200 inches, issues become much less noticeable. 

At 14.1 pounds, the projector isn’t as heavy as units meant to live permanently in a media room, but it’s also not a complete lightweight. The same could be said for this smart projector’s $1,700 price tag, which is a bit high for an HD unit. On the other hand, the superb picture quality and ability to play 4K movies without having to down-res them to HD are worth the extra bucks for this high-quality projector. The Epson also features dual HDMI 2.0 ports, dual USB ports, dual 10-watt speakers, and Bluetooth connectivity for easy integration into an external audio environment.

Best portable: Dangbei Atom

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Brightness: 1200 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 2.82 pounds

Pros

  • Fantastic color reproduction for its size
  • Built-in speakers
  • Bright for a compact projector

Cons

  • Single HDMI port

We ranked Dangbei’s Atom as the best mini projector, and if you’ve got minimal space for your outdoor home theater setup, it’s the one to get. The Atom comes in at just 1.87 inches thick and under three pounds, which is a technical triumph of engineering given its size. It has a 1200 ANSI Lumen bulb, which is exceptionally bright compared to similarly sized models, supports HDR10, has a pair of built-in stereo 5W speakers that do a surprisingly good job, and a processor capable of running Android TV 10 smoothly. This is one of the few Android TV projectors that supports Netflix, which means you won’t have to plug in a media streamer to get access to the popular video streaming service, further improving its portability.

We tested the Atom by playing video games on the Nintendo Switch. In general, colors looked good and games sounded pretty rich. There wasn’t a discernible amount of latency when playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild and/or Tears of the Kingdom, which admittedly runs at 30 frames per second. Having said that, a 1080P image projected on a 100-inch screen does look worse than one at 4K. If your outdoor projector needs are more modest, or you’re willing to give up some visual fidelity in the name or portability, this is a fine tradeoff. However, if you stream a lot of 4K content, it may be wise to look elsewhere. Our only technical complaint is that its single HDMI port means you’ll be swapping out components whenever you want to use a different device. Again, this is less of an issue thanks to the Atom’s support of Netflix out of the box.

Given the Atom’s size—it was practically effortless to carry the projector and power cable in one hand from room to room—you can easily take it outdoors or set up and break down your big-screen home-theater setup in a couple of minutes. The Atom is the ideal mini projector for outdoor movie and gaming enthusiasts.

Best for daylight: Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector

Anker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 4K UHD laser projector provides images you can watch in daylight with built-in Android TV, two 10-watt speakers, and a handle that lets you easily transport it.

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,840 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 1,500,000:1 dynamic 
  • Weight: 10.7 pounds

Pros

  • Impressive brightness
  • 3840 x 2160 display resolution 
  • 4K laser system
  • Built-in Android TV

Cons

  • Expensive

For those looking to create a cinematic experience in all kinds of light, the Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector can help you do it. The 4K UHD laser projector comes equipped with 1,840 ANSI Lumens and 3840 x 2160 display resolution for a bright and vivid picture even on a sunny day. Outdoor projector setup is easy for this model, which is available in 1080p and 4K versions. The Nebula Cosmos is also designed with intelligent technology that allows it to adapt to the environment for a display of up to 150 inches. This daylight projector also has two 10-watt speakers and two 5-watt tweeters, creating an immersive sound experience. 

The built-in Android 10 TV provides access to more than 400,000 movies and 7,000 apps and streaming services. And it’s designed with an ergonomic handle that lets you easily move it from the living room to the backyard. That said, the lack of battery and corded electric power will be a factor in the settings in which you can use this projector.

Best for rooftops: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small and light projector is easy to lug up a few flights of stairs, but it comes in heavy with its picture quality and built-in Android TV. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 200,000:1
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 3-chip LCD avoids rainbow artifacts
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • No 3D support
  • Could be brighter

Movies on the rooftop in the summer—what could be more fun? The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is small and light enough to perch on even the highest roof and delivers a gorgeous 1080p picture once you’re there. The integrated Android TV means you don’t have to go back downstairs to grab a Blu-ray player, and the built-in 5-watt Yamaha stereo speakers save you a trip for extra audio. The 1,000-lumen MicroLaser light source is bright enough for a 140-inch outdoor projector screen if it’s really dark out. Still, it’s more reasonable to expect 80 inches on most neighborhood rooftops awash in light pollution. Thanks to the projector’s 200,000:1 contrast ratio, colors are nicely saturated, and shadow details pop. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range. Besides the built-in streaming functions, the EpiqVision Mini also has two HDMI inputs for external players. 

Best for streaming: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight mini projector is Full HD (1080p), has Android TV 11 built-in, and can work with Netflix.

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ISO lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: Not available
  • Weight: 4.6 pounds

Pros

  • Full HD (1080p)
  • Android TV 11 built-in
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide as much brightness as other models

The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector makes it easy to stream your favorites. This mini projector comes internet-ready with Android TV 11 built-in, providing quick access to over 5,000 apps, including Paramount+ and HBO Max (and you can use a streaming device or contact customer service to watch Netflix.) At 4.6 pounds, this wireless projector is designed for portability and just requires two AAA batteries (we recommend rechargeables) to operate. 

The MoGo Pro 2 supports HDR 10 and features intelligent screen adaption technology that automatically adjust to the viewing space. It’s also 3D-ready. And its two 8-watt speakers work with Dolby Audio for quality sound. That said, it’s not as bright as some other models.

Best budget: GooDee Video Projector

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Despite some flaws, this projector impressed with its 1080p native resolution and a wide variety of inputs—all for about a 10th of the cost of our top picks.

Specs

  • Brightness: 300 ANSI lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 3,000:1
  • Weight: 5 pounds

Pros

  • True HD resolution
  • Dual 3-watt speakers
  • Incredibly inexpensive

Cons

  • No control for display size
  • Hard to adjust the unit height
  • No wireless connectivity

The most recent upgrade to the GooDee projector raises the native resolution from 1280 x 768 to full 1080p, a welcome upgrade that improves picture sharpness. A 300-lumen LED doesn’t provide the most light, but the projector can still create a 200-inch picture with respectable color and contrast—thanks in part to a 3,000:1 contrast ratio. It won’t win any awards for the picture quality, but considering that all this is delivered for less than $200, it’s an impressive device.

Expect some compromises at this price when purchasing a budget-friendly projector, however. For one thing, the projector doesn’t perform well with ambient light; wait until the sun is truly down before starting your movie. It also suffers from a dearth of adjustment controls. For instance, you’ll need to move the projector closer or farther from the screen to make the picture bigger or smaller. But the wealth of connectivity and dual 3-watt speakers add to the convenience and value.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor projectors

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $130, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which our top picks for best outdoor projectors deliver. 

Luminosity

Brightness, measured in ANSI lumens, is one of the most important specs for an outdoor projector. This describes how much light the projector creates. The more light, the bigger and brighter the picture. It also determines how dark a space needs to be for the best projector performance. Since outdoor projectors can’t take advantage of blackout curtains to fight ambient light from a full moon or from inside your neighbor’s home, putting out as much light as possible has distinct benefits. High-end projectors have brightness ratings of 2400 lumens or more, while less-expensive machines deliver somewhat less. While manufacturer claims don’t always match independent testing, the numbers are useful for making general comparisons—a 3,000-lumen projector will be about three times brighter than a 1,000-lumen one. Remember, you can’t ever go wrong with more light, but brightness isn’t the only specification that matters when selecting a projector. 

Let there be light

Images are created by focusing a light source onto a chip, and that image is then sent through a lens to your screen. Light sources come in three varieties: Lasers, LEDs, and Ultra High Pressure (UHP) lamps. UHPs are most common in mid-range and higher-end projectors and are essentially high-end light bulbs. Yes, they’re bright, but they also generate a lot of heat and, over time, can burn out. Replacements aren’t cheap, though you won’t have to swap out UHPs anywhere near as often as you might have replaced the old incandescent bulbs in your hallway. LEDs and lasers are far more efficient than UHPs, but there’s a significant increase in cost vs. performance, and they’re usually built into high-end models. 

Chips

As mentioned above, projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types: Digital Light Processing (DLP), Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS). DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. Sometimes units will use one DLP chip, while sometimes they use three: one each for the Red, Green, or Blue colors that make up an image. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid- to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall, but cost more.

Single-DLP projectors sometimes suffer from what’s known as “the rainbow effect,” where bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. Many people don’t even notice these artifacts, which is why thousands of single-DLP projectors have been sold and continue to sell. Some people simply aren’t bothered by them. If you have an opportunity to test a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect should you encounter it. 

Contrast ratio

Another aspect of picture quality is contrast ratio, or the difference between the black and white output. This is usually expressed as a number representing black followed by a number representing white, with each separated by a colon. So, for instance, something like 15,000:1. 

The greater the difference between black and white, the more color variation the projector displays. An image from a projector with an 18,000:1 contrast ratio will, in most cases, look better than one with a 3,500:1 contrast ratio, with bolder, more true-to-life colors, subtler gradients, and richer blacks. Remember, though, contrast isn’t the only factor in determining picture quality, so always look at the number in the context of all the unit’s specs.  

Resolution

Resolution describes the number of pixels that make up a digital image. A high-definition image is 1920 pixels wide by 1080 pixels high—we often simply call this 1080p. A 4K image (also called Ultra High Definition, or UHD) is twice as large, at 3840 pixels wide (close enough to 4000 to earn the name 4K). The higher the resolution, the sharper the image at large sizes.

A projector that can display a 4K image is wonderful and, since these units also play HD media, you’re covered for whether you’re streaming the latest Marvel movie in ultra-high-def or you’ve dug out an older Blu-ray. At the same time, many HD projectors use a technology called pixel-shifting to double the 1920 resolution. It’s not perfect, but many people won’t notice the difference, and these projectors cost less money. Also, the resolution isn’t the only factor determining picture quality; many movies look fantastic in HD, especially if you’re not blowing up the picture to monumental proportions. 

FAQs

Q: How much does the best outdoor projector cost?

The best outdoor projectors cost roughly $900 to $1,900, depending on features and specs. Generally, with projectors, you get what you pay for. But that doesn’t mean you can’t find excellent units at many different budget levels.  

Q: How many lumens do you need for an outdoor projector?

Outdoor projectors can project an image with a brightness as low as 500 lumens. However, you won’t get as large a picture size at that brightness, and any ambient light will cause the image quality to suffer. For the best outdoor use, look for units with a brightness of more than 2,000 lumens. 

Q: Is it worth getting a 4K projector?

It’s worth getting a 4K projector if you watch a lot of 4K media and want as big a picture size as possible without losing detail. Otherwise, some HD projectors will use pixel-switching technology to create a nice 4K image, while others will accept a 4K signal but down-convert it to HD. 

Q: Can I watch Netflix on a projector?

You can watch Netflix on a projector, along with any other streaming service. Projectors have a variety of inputs, including HDMI and, sometimes wireless, making it easy to connect to a set-top box like a Roku. Some also have USB inputs for Fire TV sticks or similar. Finally, newer projectors, like smart TVs, sometimes have certain pre-installed apps ready to play back media from your favorite streamer right out of the box.

Q: Do outdoor projectors work in daylight?

Outdoor projectors do work in daylight—sometimes. The trick is to find one with a high enough brightness rating for the light you’re dealing with, such as the Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector. However, projectors often suffer at their brightest settings from color and contrast issues that might be bothersome when watching a movie. On the other hand, if you’re gathering with friends for a World Series party, and cinematography isn’t a priority, these shortcomings are much less of a concern. Generally speaking, projectors always perform best in darker environments. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor projectors

Choosing the best outdoor projector isn’t too different than choosing the best projector for your home. To capture that cinema experience, you want one that delivers a large picture with bold colors and rich blacks. On top of that, it needs to be bright enough to overpower ambient light and mobile enough to move in and out of the house easily. A tall order, but one we think XGIMI’s Horizon Ultra accomplishes with ease. Our other recommendations, all suited to handle different resolution, size, and locational requirements, excel in their respective categories without being a better all-around option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best camping gadgets in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-camping-gadgets/ Mon, 03 Jul 2023 21:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=552942
A lineup of the best camping gadgets on a white background
Amanda Reed

Answer the call of the wild with handy camping gadgets that are welcome addition to your packing list.

The post The best camping gadgets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best camping gadgets on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Gerber Gear multi-tool on a blue and white background Gerber Gear Suspension-NXT 15-in-1 Multi-Tool
SEE IT

Leave the toolbox at home with this tiny tool that’s packed with practicality.

Best fire starter An überleben Zünden Fire Starter on a blue and white background überleben Zünden Fire Starter
SEE IT

Light a fire in the rain with a trusty ferro rod.

Best budget A Coghlan's 1985 Carabiner Compass on a blue and white background. Coghlan's 1985 Carabiner Compass
SEE IT

Clip it onto your backpack or belt loop.

You have your tent and sleeping bag packed—now all you need are some camping gadgets to ensure you’ll be extra prepared. Not every piece of gear needs to be state-of-the-art, and some of the most basic essentials are often the coolest. (Who hasn’t been wowed when using flint to light a fire?) Sometimes, your favorite items on the packing list are the ones on there that simply make your life easier, from compasses to help you navigate to a solar generator to power your laptop to edit drone footage. Never be left in the dark—literally—with the best camping gadgets.

How we chose the best camping gadgets

We decided to limit our choices mostly to techy camping items—that’s what “gadgets” implies, even if it’s just using simple mechanics like striking metal to flint. We also considered various items for all kinds of trips, including proper backpacking, casual RV-ing, and even van-life, as long as they involved the outdoors. After all, what you pack for the backcountry is far different than what you might for air or train travel. Finally, we looked at reviews and recommendations and tested items ourselves to create our list.

The best camping gadgets: Reviews & Recommendations

The best camping gadgets can completely change your trip and make your time roughing it a little less rough. At least one of our choices should be a welcome addition to the packing list.

Best overall: Gerber Gear Suspension-NXT 15-in-1 Multi-Tool Pocket Knife Set

Gerber Gear

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 6.4 ounces
  • Dimensions: 4.25 x 1 x 4.25 inches

Pros

  • Portable
  • 15 tools in one
  • Slim design

Cons

  • A little stiff when opening, but it gets better over time

Leave the unwieldy toolbox at home with this stainless steel multi-tool, which is great for camping, fishing, hunting, and even everyday life. Don’t let its 4.25-inch closed length fool you—it packs 15 tools in its slim design, including a file, ruler, pliers, a wire stripper, a pocket knife, a cross driver, an awl, two different sizes of flathead driver, scissors, a bottle opener, and a can opener. It locks when not in use, and a pocket clip means it won’t budge. Broken gear and cracking open a cold one are inevitable on a camping trip—a multi-tool makes both an easy fix, and this one will surely last for many adventures.

Best flashlight: Anker Rechargeable Bolder LC90 LED Flashlight

Anker

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 6.2 ounces
  • Dimensions: 6.22 x 1.57 x 1.57 inches

Pros

  • Zoomable
  • IPX5 durability rating
  • 900 lumen light

Cons

  • Doesn’t indicate how much charge is left

What could be more important on a camping trip than a flashlight? Anker’s LC90 can create a 900 lumen light beam, and allows you to switch between five different modes to widen or concentrate the light with the click of a button. One of this flashlight’s distinguishing features is its rechargeable battery, which can last up to six hours at medium brightness. Anker includes a MicroUSB cable with the flashlight, so all you need to provide is a power source. One of the unforgiving aspects of camping is the weather, and the LC90 has an IPX5 durability rating, which means it can be used in the rain without being damaged. Similarly, the flashlight can be used in temperatures as low as 14 degrees so that you can keep it in your car during the winter in case of an emergency. We understand that many people have started using their phone’s LED instead of a flashlight, and while that’s better than nothing, a stronger, dedicated flashlight is a better light source that won’t run your smartphone’s battery down.

Best power bank: UGREEN 145W Power Bank

UGREEN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.11 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 6.3 x 3.18 x 1.05 inches

Pros

  • Supports fast charging
  • Can charge three devices at once
  • High capacity

Cons

  • Expensive

If you’re going for a short camping trip, a power bank is all you’ll need to keep your gadgets topped up for a few days. Yes, the point of camping is to unplug for a little while and experience nature, but keeping a charged phone in case of emergencies, recharging your flashlight, or powering a Bluetooth speaker are all sensible uses. We like UGREEN’s power bank because of its high capacity, ultra-fast maximum charging speed, and LCD screen, which displays how much of its battery is depleted. UGREEN says its battery can fully recharge an iPhone 14 over five times. Thanks to its pair of USB-C ports and one USB-A port, you can use the power bank to charge up to three devices. Additionally, these features make UGREEN’s 145W Power Bank useful for charging your laptop and other gadgets while traveling anywhere (especially internationally), not just camping.

Best solar generator: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 51 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.6 x 12.1 inches

Pros

  • Solar charging
  • Great capacity
  • Can power small appliances

Cons

  • Heavy

Anyone going on a week-long camping trip should think long and hard about picking up a solar generator. Jackery’s Solar Generator 2000 topped out in this category thanks to its outstanding capacity, port selection, durability, and ability to simultaneously work with six 200W solar panels. Jackery outfitted its generator with three AC outlets, two USB-C ports, two USB-A ports, and a DC jack. The Solar Generator 2000 holds enough juice to fully recharge a smartphone several times over or run small appliances while you’re out exploring nature.

An LCD panel on the front of the Solar Generator 2000 offers immediate access to its battery level, how much power is drawn from connected devices, and how much energy is absorbed via an outlet or solar panel. Speaking of, we’re recommending a bundle that includes both the Solar Generator 2000 and a single solar panel to ensure you can use this eco-friendly (and helpful in a pinch) feature. Even better, the bundle is often substantially cheaper, thanks to regular Amazon coupon that deduct hundreds. This is a worthwhile investment if you’re a serious camper who wants to spend weeks living the van and tent life. After all, who doesn’t want a portable power station to ensure their portable party speaker is ready to help make every campsite cozy.

Best Bluetooth speaker: House of Marley Get Together 2

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 6.65 pounds
  • Dimensions: 17.99 x 8.27 x 15.75 inches

Pros

  • IP65 durability rating
  • Made of eco-friendly materials
  • 20-hour battery life
  • Connection for a strap

Cons

  • Not a camp necessity

If you’re the type of camper who wants to severely limit their screen time outdoors, a portable waterproof Bluetooth speaker can offer great entertainment. Simply create a playlist on your phone, connect it to the speaker, hit play, and put your device screen-side down on a table or in a bag. We like House of Marley’s Get Together 2 because of its 20-hour battery life, IP65 durability rating (a little rain won’t ruin your camping trip or speaker), and the company’s use of eco-friendly materials.

Bringing hunks of plastic into nature can feel a little embarrassing, but the Get Together 2 is made out of bamboo, recycled silicone, aluminum, and stainless steel; even the packaging this speaker comes in is 100 percent recyclable. In addition to playing music, this speaker’s USB-C port can charge smaller devices like smartphones, which means it can be used as a power bank in emergencies.

Best appliance: COMFEE Portable Dishwasher

COMFEE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 36.6 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 17.13 x 16.5 x 17.24 inches

Pros

  • Can accommodate lots of items

Cons

  • Needs an outlet to work

COMFEE’s portable countertop dishwasher is an incredible luxury for RV campers, but it’s worth the indulgence for its time savings. The cube-shaped dishwasher weighs 36.6 and is roughly 17 inches tall, wide, and deep. It can accommodate up to 30 items, plates up to 9.5 inches around, and is compatible with any pods or detergents. You must hook it up to an outlet, but the dishwasher doesn’t need to be connected to a main water line to operate.

Instead, you can pour water into its 5-liter tank through a hole in the top. Once the tank is filled, select one of six cleaning modes and let the dishwasher handle the rest. There’s even a drying feature to avoid encouraging the growth of mold. If you don’t have a dishwasher at home, COMFEE’s portable model is an even easier recommendation because you can use it all year long.

Best mosquito repellent: Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series

Thermacell

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 12 ounces
  • Dimensions: 3.5 x 3.5 x 4.25 inches

Pros

  • Small
  • Rechargeable
  • Odorless and silent

Cons

  • Not best for hikes

Forget sprays and bracelets; if you want to keep your camping area bug-free, Thermacell’s repellent is the best solution. The soda can-sized device runs on a rechargeable battery and works just like a scent diffuser. A cartridge full of liquid insect repellent fits into a chamber inside the device, which automatically sprays at regular intervals. The repellent is odorless, and the device is virtually silent so that it won’t disturb gatherings—especially mealtimes. Thermacell says this device can run up to 5.5 hours per charge, creating a 20-foot barrier to prevent bugs from creeping in. No system is perfect, but this is one of the best insect repellants if you want relief from most bugs on your next camping trip.

Best smartwatch: Garmin Instinct 2

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.9 ounces
  • Dimensions: 1.77 x 1.77 x 0.57 inches

Pros

  • Ridiculous battery life
  • Available in two sizes
  • Robust fitness tracking and health features

Cons

  • Black and white display
  • Detailed maps and graphs don’t show up well

Garmin smartwatches have incredible battery life and are made for all sorts of outdoor activities. Although it doesn’t have some of the detail and color of some hiking watches, it’s perfect for those with tiny wrists and is easily visible in sunlight. It’s choked full of sensors, like heart rate, barometric altimeter, accelerometer, thermometer, pulse ox monitor, compass, and GPS modes. You can even get training details, statuses, and suggestions to improve your fitness. It’s even compatible with Garmin Pay, so you can pay for a beer after a long day outdoors. Want to know more? Check out our full review.

Best hammock: Wise Owl Outfitters Camping Hammock

Wise Owl Outfitters

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 24 ounces
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 9 feet for single person; 6.5 x 10 feet for two people

Pros

  • High weight limit
  • Lightweight
  • High-quality at a low price

Cons

  • Included straps could be better

You can’t be sad in a hammock. Although it’s not scientifically proven, I personally have never been sad in a hammock. This one from Wise Owl Outfitters is lightweight and comes with everything you need to set up your hammock: two carabiners, straps to tie around the tree, and the hammock itself. When you’re done, simply stuff the hammock back into its pouch and roll up the straps. Although I haven’t had a problem with the hammock itself, I opted for these ENO Atlas XL Suspension System treep straps since the ones included don’t exactly scream support and safety. Other hammocks retail for $70-plus dollars. I’ve had this Wise Owl hammock for years, and it’s still holding up with no signs of breaking. It’s also our best budget pick for the best hammocks.

Best multi-tool: Leatherman Super Tool 300

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 272.15 grams
  • Dimensions: 5.4 x 3.9 x 1.57 inches

Pros

  • Durable
  • Well-equiped
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Smaller tools more difficult to access

Leatherman’s Super Tool 300 has supported us through tightening screws on drawer handles, cutting fishing lines and small branches, and taking quick measurements. It fits neatly into your front pocket, and its weight is comforting. In total, it packs 19 tools into its compact body. Unfolding it reveals a pair of pliers, with the rest of the tools tucked neatly under both sides of the handle. Bigger tools, like the serrated knives and file, were easy to pull out. Smaller ones, like the screwdriver, required more effort thanks to smaller hooks that are harder to finagle with our own fat fingers. They worked like a charm once out. Get one to carry with you, and even snag another to keep in the car. Here are more of our favorite multi-tools.

Best trekking poles: Black Diamond Trail Explorer 3 Trekking Poles

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1 gram
  • Dimensions: Up to 54 inches long

Pros

  • Packable
  • Comfortable handles
  • Versatile
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Non-interchangeable tips

Trekking poles are great if you’re looking to walk on uneven ground with more ease and control. This pair from Black Diamond folds in three sections for compact packing and weighs only a gram. A comfortable webbing strap keeps the poles attached to your person, and a Dual FlickLock keeps your poles at the height you set them to with no slippage. Although the tips aren’t interchangeable, these poles are a great starter option for those who are just getting into hiking or perfect for an adventurer shopping on a budget.

Best satellite communicator: Garmin inReach Messenger

Garmin

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1 gram
  • Dimensions: 3.1 x 2.5 x .9 inches

Pros

  • Portable
  • Fast access to SOS
  • Lots of battery power
  • Can use with your phone for faster typing

Cons

  • Expensive

This 2022 Best of What’s New winner changed the game when it came to satellite communicators and connectivity. Other satellite communicators and phones are made for emergencies only. This one can be used for just that, but we love its ability to keep you constantly connected when you’re away from cell towers and phone reception. It lets you send two-way text messages and is compatible with other Garmin devices. It’s water-rated to IPX7, making it tougher than the next incline you’re hitting on your hike. Plus, 24/7 access to the Garmin Response Center gives you peace of mind, and it can even charge your phone when you need just enough juice to send a quick message home.

Best tent: NEMO Aurora Tent

NEMO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 5 pounds
  • Dimensions: 88 x 52 x 44 inches

Pros

  • Washable
  • Holds up in rain
  • Durable fabric

Cons

  • Better for warmer expeditions

Tents are some of the most important pieces of camping gear you can carry with you. Weighing just under 5 pounds, the NEMO Aurora offers ample space for changing clothes or packing up gear. Two vestibules provide extra coverage for boots and backpacks, and color-coded poles make pitching it simple. This tent also has thoughtful touches, like pockets made with light-diffusing fabric and a stuff sack that makes it easy to split up the tent load between two people. This tent is best for spring hikes and summer jaunts, however.

Best sleeping bag: Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy 45F/7C Synthetic Mummy Sleeping Bag

Therm-a-Rest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.44 pounds
  • Dimensions: 80 x 31 inches

Pros

  • Made of recycled nylon
  • Waterproof
  • eraLoft insulation dries quickly

Cons

  • Best for warmer temperatures

This super lightweight mummy sleeping bag is the key to staying cool and comfortable at night. The exterior boasts a water-repellant coating and the fill dries quickly, so if you’re caught in an unexpected summer shower, you aren’t doomed to hours of sogginess. It comes in three different sizes, so choose according to your height. Included loops allow you to pair the bag with a sleeping pad for ultimate outdoor comfort.

Best hiking backpack: Osprey Talon 36L Men’s Hiking Backpack with Hipbelt

Osprey

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 2.76 pounces
  • Dimensions: 25.98 x 11.42 x 9.06 inches

Pros

  • Lots of pockets
  • Durable
  • Spacious

Cons

  • Need to make sure pack fits your frame before buying

Osprey makes some of our favorite travel backpacks, and they make a pretty mean hiking backpack. It’s designed with recycled high-tenacity nylon, making it sustainable and strong. A injection-molded, die-cut foam AirScape backpanel, BioStretch harness, and continuous-wrap hipbelt keep you comfortable while traversing technical terrain. We love its versatility—you’d be pressed to find yourself leaning toward other bags with the Osprey Talon. However, make sure you know what size pack to buy based on body measurements.

Best hiking boots: Merrell Men’s Moab 3 Mid Hiking Boot

Merrell

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 31 ounces
  • Dimensions: Sizes 7-14 in regular and wide widths

Pros

  • Durable
  • Cushioned midsole
  • Vibram outsole

Cons

  • Runs small
  • Not waterproof

The Merrell Moab has been *the* hikers’ boot of choice for 25 million hikers for over a decade. It has a supportive insole, cushioned midsole, and grippy Vibram TC5+ outsole, making it handle the regular outdoors, along with more extreme activities like mountain biking and snow and water sports. The shoe is made out of partially recycled fabrics, and the company plans to include recycled, organic, or renewable material in everything it makes by 2025.

Best insulated water bottle: Hydro Flask Stainless Steel Wide Mouth Water Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 2.5 pounds filled
  • Dimensions: 12.2 x 3.5 inches

Pros

  • Lots of color options
  • Great insulation
  • Stays lightweight when filled

Cons

  • Can dent easily

This bottle edges out the Yeti Rambler for best insulated water bottle thanks to its lightweight profile and easy-to-carry sport handle. The Hydro Flask sport lid comes apart completely and is dishwasher-safe. It has a wide mouth to make it easy to clean and fill. I reach for this water bottle the most when I’m leaving the house, hitting the trail, or sitting on the couch and watching TV. It’s also a great water bottle for the gym. However, it dents easily. If that’s a problem for you, consider investing in a bottle boot.

Best water bladder: Platypus Hoser Ultralight Taste-Free Water Reservoir/Hydration Bladder, 3-Liter

Platypus

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 3.8 ounces
  • Dimensions: 7 x 16.5 inches

Pros

  • Doesn’t leave an aftertaste
  • Durable
  • Doesn’t leak

Cons

  • Folding will decrease longevity

You can never have too much water with you when you’re hiking. It has a high-flow rate for certified water chuggers, and a self-sealing HyFLO bite valve makes hydrating easy. A hang/carry loop lets you secure the bladder in your pack or elsewhere. It’s BPA-, BPS-, and phthalate-free, so you don’t have to worry about microplastics making their way into your system. It comes in smaller sizes, but we love the 3-liter option. It’s better to have too much water than too little. Use it in conjunction with our next inclusion for potable water anywhere your feet take you. Just make sure to keep your hydration pack properly cleaned.

Best water filter: LifeStraw Peak Solo

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.7 ounces
  • Dimensions: 3.95 x 1.6 x 6.7 inches

Pros

  • Helps keep you hydrated safely
  • Clips easily to pack or belt
  • Can be fitted to a standard water bottle

Cons

  • Can only filter up to 2,000 liters of drinking water

Lifestaw’s smallest filter is also its most versatile and easiest to use, thanks to 28mm threading. That means you can attach the filter to a standard water bottle and drink through it like a straw. Or, you can use it as a squeeze filter to filter water into a different container. Using the Peak Solo, you can fill a 1L bottle in 20 seconds—that means more time hiking and less time corraling everyone’s water bottle to fill. If you don’t want to throw it in your backpack or glove compartment, it comes with a loop to attach a carabiner to clip to a keychain or pack. Our favorite feature is its effectiveness: it protects against It offers protection against 99.999999 percent of bacteria (including E.coli and Salmonella), 99.999 percent of parasites (including Giardia and Cryptosporidium), and 99.999 percent of microplastics. It also meets the US EPA and NSF P231 drinking water standards for removing bacteria and parasites. Read more of what we have to say about it.

Best firestarter: überleben Zünden Fire Starter

überleben

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 3 ounces
  • Dimensions: ‎4.6 x 0.9 x 0.7 inches

Pros

  • Feels great in the hand
  • Multiple thickness options
  • Creates lots of sparks

Cons

  • Less durable than flint-and-steel

Learning how to build and start a fire is one of the first things you should do if you want to go camping. This firestarter from überleben is made from ferrocerium and hardwood. Ferrocerium produces more sparks than flint and steel, making it easier to start a fire, and the hardwood handle gives you a natural textured grip as you strike it. It comes with a paracord lanyard and a six-function multitool that you can use as a tinder scraper or straight edge striker. It comes in three different thickness options: The Trad at 5/16-inch(12,000 strikes), The Pro at 3/8-inch (15,000 strikes), and the Fatty at 1/2-inch (20,000 strikes). Although flint-and-steel is more durable, a ferro rod is better in rainy or windy conditions since it creates more sparks at a higher temperature.

Don’t just take our word for it. Experts love it, too. “Last year, a Canadian friend recommended the überleben range of ferro rods and firestarters to me, and they have been worth every penny,” says Richard Prideaux, lead instructor for Original Outdoors, a UK-based outdoor skills training provider. “I carry an überleben Zünden with me on courses and trips where lighting a fire with natural materials is either likely or maybe necessary. They produce a good shower of sparks and have a good length/diameter ratio, and it hasn’t let me down yet.” Check out more of our favorite fire starters.

Best headlamp: BioLite HeadLamp 800 Pro

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 150 grams
  • Dimensions: 2.05 x 1.97 x 8.27 inches

Pros

  • IPX4-rated
  • Bright
  • Rechargeable

Cons

  • Is a little hard to navigate if you haven’t used a BioLite headlamp before

If you want to keep your hands free, this lightweight headlamp from BioLite is one of the best investments you can make when starting your camping journey. It’s also a hearty upgrade if your current battery-powered headlamp has seen better days. The lamp delivers 800 lumens for 150 hours on low; seven hours on high; and eight hours on reserve. A Run Forever cord lets you connect a power bank for even more runtime. A moisture-wicking headband keeps you dry and cool, and integrated electronics prevent slipping and bouncing. A push on the back gives you 30 seconds of max brightness, and Constant mode gives you full illumination sans auto-dimming. There’s a bit of a learning curve if you’ve never used a BioLite headlamp, but it’s one of the best on the market once you get over it.

Best budget: Coghlan’s 1985 Carabiner Compass

Coghlan’s

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: .6 ounces
  • Dimensions: 1 x 1 x 1 inches

Pros

  • Clips to belt or backpack
  • Body made of metal
  • Luminous directional markers

Cons

  • Doesn’t work if tilted more than eight degrees

A compass is one of the most important yet simple camping gadgets. Compasses determine direction thanks to a suspended, magnetized needle’s alignment to Earth’s magnetic field, with the north end spinning toward the planet’s north pole (which is near, but not always exactly in line with, its most northern geographic point). Magnets! They’re cool! Anyway, we love this simple and cheap compass for its durable aluminum construction and luminous directional marks to navigate in low light. Throw it on your pack or attach it to your belt loop to help determine where you’re going. It’s a tool you’ll most likely always bring with you on a trip, and you can’t beat its size and price.

What to consider when buying the best camping gadgets

Camping is all about being the perfect combination of prepared but not overpacked. Here’s what you should consider when prepping for your next trip:

What kind of camping are you doing?

If you’re hiking and tent camping and plan to set up camp at different spots, you may not be able to bring heavy, wieldy items, since you can only bring what you can fit in your pack. This means you should prioritize smaller items, like compasses, flint, and a multi-tool. However, if you’re staying in one place and can stow things in a car or camper, you can bring bigger items like a solar generator or Bluetooth speaker, since you’ll be able to stow larger items in your car or tent while you go out on your fun outdoor adventures.

Experience level

Is this your first time camping? Or are you an experienced camper? You may need to invest in small essentials like water filters, fire starters, and a multitool if you’re new to camping, and keep it easy—no wild hikes for you. If this isn’t your first time at the camping rodeo, you can get a bit more adventurous and make some upgrades to your packing list, like a portable generator to power an extended trip.

FAQs

Q: Should I go camping without a multitool?

We think they’re a valuable addition to your pack—a knife, nail file, screwdriver, and a bottle opener in one place? We love to see it. It’s useful and allows you to fix, repair, or modify equipment. Don’t take our word for it: 77% of winners of the History outdoor survival show Alone bring a multitool.

Q: What is glamping?

“Glamping” is a portmanteau of “glam” and “camping.” It’s when your accommodations are more luxe than your typical camping trip.

Q: What should I never forget when camping?

Regardless of your camping experience level, you should never forget a first aid kit. You never know when you’ll accidentally cut yourself or scrape your knee while hiking.

Q: How much do camping gadgets cost?

Depending on the gadgets, camping gadgets can cost between $10-$2,000.

Final thoughts on the best camping gadgets

Roughing it doesn’t have to be rough with a few extra items in your pack, the car, or the RV. Some are better suited for tent camping, and others are great for a stay in a cabin. Regardless, there are some items you simply can’t leave behind when abandoning all creature comforts for a weekend. Answer the call of the wild—and walk in the woods with a little more pep in your step—with the best camping gadgets.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best camping gadgets in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/ecoflow-solar-generator-spring-amazon-deal/ Wed, 27 Mar 2024 16:58:56 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=608167
A Delta solar generator and solar panel bundle in a pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

Power practically anything with this EcoFlow solar generator that's on super-sale at Amazon.

The post Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Delta solar generator and solar panel bundle in a pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The weather is warming up and it’s the perfect time to take a springtime hike over the weekend. Maybe you even want to take a weekend camping trip. A solar generator helps power your cameras, laptops, and phones, and EcoFlow makes some of our favorite ones. We love the fast charging power on the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max, and you could power your entire house using the EcoFlow Delta Pro. You can snag this EcoFlow solar generator and bundle deal for a whopping 45% off—that’s $750 in savings.

ECOFLOW Solar Generator DELTA2 with 220W Solar Panel $899 (Was $1,649)

Ecoflow

SEE IT

This generator puts out 1800 watts of power and 15 outlets, meaning you can power practically anything. You don’t need an outlet to charge it—you can simply use the included solar panel, which is worth $379 alone. It has a lithium iron phosphate battery (LiFePO4, more commonly known as LFP) battery, which gives the generator a longer life span, reduced maintenance, better safety features, and improved charge efficiency, meaning you’ll have it for plenty of power outages and camping trips. Heads-up, they ship separately, so don’t freak out if they don’t arrive at the same time.

More solar generator deals at Amazon:

The post Save almost 50% on this ECOFLOW solar generator bundle at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart water bottles in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-water-bottles/ Fri, 16 Jun 2023 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=549271
A lineup of smart water bottles on a white background
Amanda Reed

These bottles can purify your water, track your water intake, and remind you to drink something other than coffee or Diet Coke.

The post The best smart water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of smart water bottles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A mint-colored insulated LARQ smart water bottle on a small wooden table in front of a brick background LARQ PureVis Bottle
SEE IT

A UV-C light zaps away bio-contaminants that could leave you feeling queasy.

Best for hydration A blue HidrateSpark water bottle on a blue and white background HidrateSpark PRO Smart Water Bottle
SEE IT

Bluetooth automatically updates how much water you’ve sipped.

Best budget A teal HidrateSpark TAP water bottle on a blue and white background HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid
SEE IT

An option that’s only $20 packed with top-shelf features.

Among the plethora of “smart” things in this world—televisions, phones, speakers, and even entire homes—water bottles don’t come to top of mind. However, we think that can change, thanks to water bottles now having more capabilities other than “simple receptacle of many liquids.” Now, you can count how many ounces you’re chugging, get reminded to take a sip, and even get your filtered water to a new level of clean. The best smart water bottles make staying hydrated easy as they’re refilled and you’re fulfilled. 

The best smart water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: LARQ PureVis Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-tech water bottle comes with a self-cleaning cap that uses the power of UV light to give your filtered water a purer taste and keep the bottle clean. 

Specs

  • Cap options: PureVis self-cleaning cap, filter cap with flip top (doesn’t self-clean)
  • Bottle sizes: 17 oz.; 25 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: Yes
  • Water tracking: No

Pros

  • Clean that you can taste
  • Sleek look
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • No water tracking
  • Largest size is still relatively small
  • MicroUSB vs. USB-C

Although water covers more than 70 percent of the Earth’s surface, only 3 percent is drinkable fresh water. Even deeper than that, only .5 percent of that drinkable fresh water is available, meaning it’s not locked in a glacier or the atmosphere. And water from public water systems isn’t guaranteed to be clean (hello, boil water advisories). Enter the LARQ PureVis bottle, which uses UV-C light to eliminate up to 99% of bio-contaminants (including E.Coli). And it self-cleans every two hours, meaning you don’t even need to think about having a musty water bottle. Double-vacuum insulation keeps things cool, even when you’re getting stress-sweats thinking about how only 3 percent of the world’s water is drinkable fresh water. 

The LARQ makes for a great travel water bottle as well, especially if you really want to make sure the bottled water you’re drinking is A-OK. Just make sure you fill it up after you pass through TSA security—you don’t want to get this fancy, pricey water bottle confiscated by a very strict agent before a flight. If you’re more active, consider the Movement PureVis bottle, which is uninsulated and lighter but has the same PureVis tech as the insulated version. 

A close-up of the microUSB charger on the LARQ smart water bottle
Amanda Reed

At $99-$118, this water bottle is expensive, meaning it’s heartbreaking for you and your wallet if you misplace it, especially since you can’t use Bluetooth to track its location. And its capacity tops out at 25 ounces—practically a sip for those who drink water like a fish. There’s no hydration tracking, meaning it’s up to you to remember how much water you’ve imbibed. A pitcher version lets you get squeaky clean water you can put into your favorite gallon water bottles (or even the other smart water bottles on this list that focus on water intake tracking). Still, if you’re looking for UV cleaning and water tracking … sadly, this ain’t it!

The water problem, considering how things are going with the climate and public infrastructure, isn’t going away anytime soon. The LARQ PureVis bottle gives you more peace of mind and lets you not sip on nasties. It’s not the only self-cleaning water bottle on our list, but it’s definitely the best. Read more of our thoughts on the LARQ.

Best for hydration: HidrateSpark PRO Smart Water Bottle

HidrateSpark

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This light-up water bottle uses the power of Bluetooth to keep track of how much water you’ve consumed. It even tells you how much water you should drink based on your height and weight. 

Specs

  • Cap options: Chug or straw lid
  • Bottle sizes: 17 oz.; 21 oz.; 32 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: No
  • Water tracking: Yes

Pros

  • Lots of size options
  • Seamless water tracking
  • Friendly UX with bottle and app

Cons

  • Straw cap hard to sip out of
  • Heavy
  • Not self-cleaning

If you need the gently pulsing alarm clock version of a water bottle (aka, those bottles with the lines and cute phrases don’t cut it for you—someone with a mushy brain and short attention span caused by social media scrolling), consider the HidrateSpark PRO just that. It works with Bluetooth and a coordinating app to measure your water intake. All you need to do is set the bottle down, and the app automatically updates how close you are to your water goal. You can set that number yourself or allow the bottle to figure that out for you by entering your weight, height, elevation, and other metrics. Setup is super easy and takes less than five minutes, less than the time it takes to wash the bottle when you first get it in. The settings are also super robust: you can set when the bottle glows—every time you take a sip, when you meet your goal, both, or even … not at all! It’s similarly priced to other non-smart water bottles on the market, meaning you’re wallet won’t hurt as much compared to other options on this list. 

Best budget: HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid

HidrateSpark

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Practically all the same capabilities of the HidrateSPARK Pro bottle minus the price tag—and some of the cheapest smart water bottles you can buy. 

Specs

  • Cap options: Chug or straw cap
  • Bottle sizes: 20 oz.; 24 oz.; 32 oz.
  • Self-cleaning?: No
  • Water tracking: Yes

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Easy setup

Cons

  • Not insulated
  • Water intake only updated with phone tap

Sure, it’s not as packed with features as its PRO sibling, but the HidrateSpark TAP is an excellent option for someone who doesn’t want to spend too much money on a smart water bottle. It doesn’t update as often as the PRO because it lacks Bluetooth tech—it uses near-field communication (NFC) instead of Bluetooth, with a simple phone tap allowing you to update the app with how much you’ve sipped. It comes in a sip-top option and lights up to remind you to drink (although you can’t customize that option; it’s preset at once an hour for 12 hours as soon as you turn the timer on). Look no further if you’re looking for a basic, budget-friendly smart water bottle. 

Here are other options we think are a cool drink of water:

FAQs

Q: How much does a smart water bottle cost?

A smart water bottle costs between $29-$120, depending on size and features. Ones with Bluetooth and UV-C light will be more expensive than those with an NFC tag for updating.  

Q: Is it OK to refill smart water bottles?

Not only is it OK to refill a smart water bottle, but it’s also encouraged! Some smart water bottles let you know how many bottles you need to drink to make your personal hydration goals. 

Q: How do I clean a smart water bottle?

Washing a smart water bottle is incredibly similar to washing a regular insulated water bottle. If your smart water bottle isn’t dishwasher safe, remove any electronic components (batteries, sensors, etc.) and wash by hand with dish soap and warm water. If it’s dishwasher safe, simply throw it in there and wait until the cycle is over. 

Q: Can I microwave a smart water bottle?

Depends. You can’t microwave stainless steel (unless you want to destroy your microwave). You can technically microwave Tritan plastic, but make sure all electronic components aren’t going in the microwave. Would we personally microwave a Tritan plastic water bottle? No, but you do you, boo!

Q: Why do people use smart water bottles?

Some of us consistently rot our brains from too much social media and reach for a Diet Coke, an oatmilk iced latte, or a seltzer before even thinking about regular, plain water. A smart water bottle reminds you to take a sip and takes the guesswork out of how much water you should drink. Your kidneys will thank you!

Final thoughts on the best smart water bottles

Smart water bottles are a great way to easily track how much water you drink daily, ensure your water has no rogue bacteria, and self-clean for mustiness-free sipping. Our favorite smart water bottle is the LARQ PureVis Bottle, which kills potential bacteria in water for results you can taste. If you’re looking for an option to track hydration, we recommend the Hidrate SparkPRO Smart Water Bottle, which syncs seamlessly with incredibly customizable settings to boot. If the cheapest option is your goal, look no further than the HidrateSpark TAP Smart Water Bottle Chug Lid—the HidrateSpark’s formidable and budget-friendly sibling. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart water bottles in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save 52% off this solar-powered bird feeder camera during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale https://www.popsci.com/gear/smart-bird-feeder-deal-amazon-big-spring-sale-2024/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 16:18:09 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607333
A smart bird feeder on a plain background arranged in a pattern.
Amanda Reed

If the Bird Buddy is out of your price range, consider this cheaper dupe that's under $100 as part of Amazon's Big Spring Sale.

The post Save 52% off this solar-powered bird feeder camera during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A smart bird feeder on a plain background arranged in a pattern.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

House finches, mourning doves, and maybe even the occasional cardinal are coming out of their winter hiding spots to sit amongst blooming Magnolia trees and maybe indulge in some spare crumbs on the street. Noticing nature isn’t just a good practice in mindfulness—it’s also a fun hobby. Birding can be done any time of year and all over the world. If you want to entice more birds into your backyard—and bully some squirrels while you’re at it—this smart bird feeder is 52 percent off on Amazon as part of its Big Spring Sale. The sale ends Sunday, so make sure to get yours before it migrates back to full price.

Gyozol Smart Bird Feeder with Camera $99.98 (Was $209.99)

Gyozol

SEE IT

This camera is easy to put together, clean, and refill, making it a great pick for aspiring ornithologists and experienced birders alike. The 1080p camera only records when a bird sets off its PIR motion sensor. Then, it saves the recording to an SD card or in the cloud. Built-in AI bird recognition identifies the winged friend that lands on the feeder, and an app lets you file through avian visitors past and present. If you’re tired of squirrels stealing your bird feed, you can tell them to buzz-off, literally. Finally, the squirrels can get what they deserve.

If you’re looking for the best bird feeder camera and you’re cool with buying something at full price, go for the Bird Buddy. It’s $239 for the base version, but we recommend upgrading to the $299 version with the solar roof. It’s pricey, but completely worth it for up-close and personal views of the birds in your neighborhood.

The post Save 52% off this solar-powered bird feeder camera during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Score a Solo Stove fire pit or pizza oven for a historic low price during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-deals-amazon-big-spring-sale-2024/ Thu, 21 Mar 2024 15:03:49 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607306
A top view of the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
It's a very pretty thing when it's going. Stan Horaczek

Get a Solo Stove Bonfire or Pi Prime pizza oven for their lowest prices of the year during Amazon's event.

The post Score a Solo Stove fire pit or pizza oven for a historic low price during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A top view of the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
It's a very pretty thing when it's going. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Solo Stove makes our pick for the best smokeless fire pit and it’s currently on sale for the lowest price we have seen. It’s all part of Amazon’s Big Spring Sale, which also has the excellent Solo Stove Pi Prime pizza oven for its cheapest price this year—and maybe ever. You can also pick up some accessories, but whatever you buy, do it fast. The Amazon Big Spring Sale goes through Sunday, but deals only last until stock runs out. Otherwise, you’ll be stuck sitting around an old garbage can full of burning newspapers this summer.

Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 with Stand, Smokeless Fire Pit $241 (was $339)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

This is the classic Solo Stove fire pit. It’s made of high-grade stainless steel and relies on a very clever design to funnel air throughout the burn chamber. That makes it extremely easy to start and ensures that it won’t pump smoke into your face the entire time you’re trying to chill by the fire. It’s easy to store, simple to clean, and very nice to look at. This is how you deserve to roast marshmallows.

Solo Stove Pi Prime Gas Pizza Oven Outdoor $279 (was $349)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

This compact pizza oven is a great way to get wood-fired texture and flavor without having to build and tend to a fire. Simply connect it to a propane tank (like the one required for a gas grill) and light it up. Like the Solo Stove fire pits, the Pi Prime is compact and easy to wash. It has a split stone that’s easily removable for deep cleaning. Plus, it gets up over 800 degrees so it’ll fully cook a perfect pizza in under two minutes.

More Solo Stove accessories on sale

The post Score a Solo Stove fire pit or pizza oven for a historic low price during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save hundreds on solar generators during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale https://www.popsci.com/gear/amazon-big-spring-sale-solar-generator-deals/ Wed, 20 Mar 2024 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=607273
Jackery solar generators on sale at Amazon arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Save on solar generators from Jackery, EcoFlow, Anker, and more during Amazon's latest sales event.

The post Save hundreds on solar generators during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery solar generators on sale at Amazon arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Maybe you want to be prepared for the next power outage. Or perhaps you’re going on an outdoor adventure and you want to bring some power with you for those indoor comforts. Either way, Amazon’s Big Spring Sale is an ideal time to invest in a solar generator. Some of the top brands that make the best solar generators are offering deep discounts right now, so jump in and grab a big battery backup before you need one.

Jackery solar generator deals

Ecoflow solar generator deals

Anker solar generator deals

The post Save hundreds on solar generators during Amazon’s Big Spring Sale appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best mini projectors for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-mini-projectors/ Thu, 12 May 2022 16:00:03 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439520
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

Screen movies, share photos, and deliver presentations with these pint-size projectors.

The post The best mini projectors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dangbei Atom Projector on a bed frame. Danbei Atom
SEE IT

A light, bright, mini streaming machine.

Best for movies Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12 Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12
SEE IT

Advanced imaging offers a cinema-like experience.

Best budget KODAK FLIK HD9 on a plain white background. Kodak FLIK HD9
SEE IT

A projector that’s road-worthy and feature-rich.

Mini projectors balance size, features, price, and image quality. Is it easy to pack big entertainment in a small package? Nope, so when purchasing a mini projector, managing your expectations is important. These units will never match the brightness, resolution, color saturation, contrast, or picture size you get from a full-size projector. On the other hand, try slipping one of those 20-pound monsters into your carry-on bag or using it in a small office or a dorm room. Ideally, the best mini projectors weigh a few pounds or less—sometimes much less—but are bright enough for presentations and to display photos, spec sheets, or whatever else you’d like. 

These small entertainment units often include built-in batteries for truly portable play, and some have Android TV functionality for easy streaming. Integrated speakers are common, and there are often HDMI and USB ports for external media like Blu-ray players, set-top streaming boxes, or USB streaming sticks. Finding the best mini projector that meets your priorities isn’t always easy, so we’ve gathered six of the best mini projectors while also providing some insight into what to look for when you’re shopping.

How we chose the best mini projectors

When selecting the best mini projectors to include in our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home projectors, and we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorites—as well as the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites and sifted through online reviews and comments to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing first and foremost on how the unit balanced image quality against its small, portable size. Color, contrast, and resolution were considered, as were size and weight. Price was an important factor, especially in terms of “bang for your buck,” and additional features—like built-in streaming apps, batteries, and speakers—were evaluated as well.

The best mini projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

A little more compact than some portable projectors, while not as limited in features as a pico projector, the best mini projectors are all-in-one entertainment.

Best overall: Dangbei Atom

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small, light projector ticks all our boxes with a native 1080p picture, a reasonably bright lamp, a built-in battery, and an onboard speaker. 

Specs 

  • Brightness: 1200 lumens
  • Size: ‎10.03 x 10.03 x 4.92 inches
  • Weight: 2.82 pounds

Pros

  • Fantastic color reproduction for its size
  • Built-in speakers
  • Bright for a compact projector

Cons

  • Single HDMI port

Leave it to Dangbei to make a mini projector good enough to compare favorably to significantly larger models. It has every essential projector feature, from HDR10 support and solid-sounding built-in speakers to a 1200 lumen bulb, and the ability to project a 180-inch screen. Additional features, like having enough processing power to run Google TV smoothly, Netflix support, the ability to trigger the Google Assistant, and an auto-keystone correction feature that keeps your screen looking tidy, are also available. On a technical level, it’s hard to find any fault with the Dangbei Atom, given its ultra-thin and compact profile and every feature the company managed to cram into this projector.

Our primary tests included playing video games on the Nintendo Switch. In general, colors looked good, games sounded pretty rich, and there wasn’t a discernible amount of latency when playing games like The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild, which admittedly runs at 30 frames per second. The Atom, which clocks in at just 1.87 inches thick and under three pounds, is a technical triumph of engineering given its size. That said, a 1080P image projected on a 100-inch screen does look worse than one at 4K. This wasn’t an issue when playing games on the Nintendo Switch, which tops out at 1080P, but was noticeable when watching videos. If you stream a lot of 4K content, it may be wise to look elsewhere. Our only other complaint is that its single HDMI port means you’ll be swapping out components whenever you want to use a different device.

But the Atom’s size—it was easy to carry the projector and power cable in one hand from room to room—means you can easily take it with you on vacation or set up and break down your big-screen home theater setup in a couple of minutes. The Atom is the ideal mini projector for spaces like dorm rooms or studio apartments.

Best for movies: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Superior contrast, a relatively bright lamp, and advanced imaging technology work to deliver what’s by far the best-looking movies you’ll see from any other projector on this list.  

Specs

  • Brightness: 1000 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 6.9 x 6.9 x 5 inches
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 200,000:1 contrast ratio
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • A bit heavy by mini standards
  • Expensive

The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is more expensive than most other mini projectors, but that’s the trade-off for a positively cinematic movie-watching experience. With a native Full HD 1080p resolution and 1,000-ANSI lumen MicroLaser light source, the unit projects a sharp 140-inch picture. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range, while high contrast and adaptive color correction deliver shadows full of detail and saturated colors that positively pop. 

Built-in Android TV provides access to a full suite of streaming apps, and the EpiqVision Mini has two HDMI inputs for external players. A 5-watt Yamaha speaker delivers robust and clear audio. 

Unfortunately, this Android projector doesn’t have an internal battery, so don’t expect to use it without having access to AC power. It’s also a chunkier piece of gear than many mini projectors on this list—this isn’t dropping into anyone’s pocket. And, again, the price—close to $1,000, compared to all our other sub-$500 choices—might make it a tough buy for anyone watching their budget. But if you prioritize your movies above all else, there’s a reason this is one of our favorite home theater projectors.

Best for gaming: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro mini projector enhances gaming by providing a crisp picture, a 3D mode, superior audio quality, and low latency.

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 7.76 x 9.57 x 9.69 inches
  • Weight: 4.6 lbs.

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Good image quality for its size
  • Great price

Cons

  • Dim bulb

If you’d like to game on a mini projector, your best choice is XGIMI’s MoGo 2 Pro. Its only drawback is the brightness of its bulb, which at 400 lumens means you’ll only want to use it in dark rooms. This limitation may be a dealbreaker for you, but if you’re fine with the limitation, you’ll be rewarded in other ways. XGIMI managed to fit a dual-speaker audio system, a processor fast enough to run Android 11 (sans Netflix), object avoidance, and auto keystone correction into a compact package. It lacks HDR, which will matter if you play video games on a PlayStation 5 or Xbox Series X, or pay for the highest tiers of some streaming services, but Nintendo Switch owners and casual streamers won’t be missing out.

A feature called uninterrupted keystone correction will keep your screen—up to 200 inches in size—looking even while you use it. If you’ve been flummoxed by finicky slightly tilted projection screens in the past, this may end up being your favorite features. XGIMI has continually proven it knows how to eke out as much performance as possible from its hardware. This is your answer if you’re a casual gamer who wants to play on the biggest possible screen.

Best pocket-sized: AAXA P6 Ultimate

AAXA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native 720p resolution, this pint-size player delivers a much better picture than you usually get from such a small projector. 

Specs

  • Lumens: 417 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 5.25 x 5.7 x 3.1 inches
  • Weight: ‎4.07 pounds

Pros

  • Extremely small size
  • 3-hour battery life
  • 200-inch maximum screen size

Cons

  • One HDMI port

AAXA’s ultimate version of its P6 projector is so small it could actually fit in the pocket of a pair of cargo pants. With a native resolution of 720p, it’s hardly the most powerful projector we’re recommending, but it does support the ability to accept 4K signals. The mini projector’s 417 ANSI bulb is impressive, but be mindful that AAXA lists the projector as having 1,000 LED lumens, which, while accurate, may give the impression that the P6 Ultimate is brighter than it really is. If screen size is your most important metric, the P6 Ultimate holds up well, with the ability to project a 200-inch image. Be mindful that a 200-inch 720p picture will look blurry when compared to higher-resolution projectors.

What makes the P6 Ultimate the best pocket-sized mini projector is its battery, which allows you to run it for up to six hours per charge. You’ll get less watch time if you crank up its brightness to the max, but it’s still impressive that a projector this small has a battery inside. Similarly, AAXA built a speaker into this projector, which is almost unimaginable given its size. The AAXA P6 Ultimate runs AndroidOS natively, so you’ll be able to stream media to it without plugging in a media streamer. That’s great because this mini projector only has a single HDMI port, which is understandable but still a drawback. If you want to get a mini projector that really lives up to that adjective, AAXA’s P6 Ultimate is the one to get.

Best for travel: NEBULA Capsule 3

NEBULA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Lightweight and featuring a built-in Android TV, this battery-powered projector travels easily. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 300 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 3.3 x 3.3 x 6.7 inches
  • Weight: 1.98 pounds

Pros

  • Up to 2.5 hours of battery life
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Native HD resolution but can accept 4K inputs

Cons

  • Price

If we could only recommend one mini projector for travel, it’d be the latest model in NEBULA’s capsule series. The Capsule 3’s slim, cylindrical shape makes it easy to carry in a backpack. And its battery means you can use it on travels where outlets are fewer and further between. Its technical features, including its native 1080P resolution, eight-watt speaker with Dolby Audio, AndroidOS support, and laser projection system help it stay competitive in this category. NEBULA doubled the Capsule 3’s contrast and improved its color accuracy when compared to the previous generation for those looking to upgrade.

Most importantly, the Capsule 3 is 55% smaller than the model it replaced, and at just under 2 pounds, it’s a lot easier to carry around on trips. Our primary technical complaint is that this projector has a brightness of 300 lumens—the other is its single HDMI port. This is understood given its smaller size and to accommodate the fact that it runs on battery power, but it’s still something to be aware of. If you’re more concerned with how to broadcast a 120-inch screen on any trip you go on, the Capsule 3 is the mini projector to get.

Best budget: Kodak FLIK HD9

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This inexpensive and ultra-small projector is a great way to share presentations, photos, or videos. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 200 ANSI lumens
  • Size: ‎5.1 x 4.3 x 5.9 inches
  • Weight: 3.3 pounds

Pros

  • 1080P resolution
  • Runs AndroidOS
  • Built in speakers

Cons

  • Not very bright

Kodak’s FLIK HD9 is better than any budget-friendly mini projector has any right to be, and it’s an inexpensive way to share content from your smartphone or stream your favorite media. It runs AndroidOS for easy video streaming, has a built-in speaker system, and has a native resolution of 1080p. Its remote even allows you to access the Google Assistant, so you can use the projector completely hands-free. These specs and features are unheard of for a projector that costs just $250—though its 200-lumen bulb is its Achilles heel. You’ll only be able to use this mini projector in absolute darkness. As far as mini projectors go, you’ll need to spend over $100 more to get one that bests it in meaningful ways.

Things to consider before buying a mini projector

It’s not easy for something that potentially fits in your palm (or at least can be easily carried with one hand) to throw a picture that’s around 100-200 inches from corner to corner, in 720p or 1080p, with accurate colors and decent shadow detail. Here are the specs to watch for as you shop:

Brightness

ANSI lumens describe how much light a projector creates, which determines how bright and large your picture will be—especially in less-than-ideal situations where you can’t achieve a completely dark room. Brightness levels of around 200 to 500 ANSI lumens are common, with picture sizes of around 80-120 inches. That said, some projectors can achieve much brighter pictures than that, even some that could be used in daylight

Chip

Projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types of them: DLP, LCD, and LCoS. DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid-range to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall but, not surprisingly, cost more and don’t show up in budget units. 

One last thing to know about chips: Single-DLP projectors, which comprise most budget-priced units, sometimes suffer from “the rainbow effect.” This is when bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. With thousands upon thousands of single-DLP projectors sold, it’s obvious that most people don’t even notice them—or aren’t bothered. But if you have an opportunity to test out a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect.

Pico and palmtops

There’s mini, and there’s mini. Pico projectors, also sometimes called pocket projectors, are about the size of a smartphone. They’re extremely portable, of course, but their pictures rarely match the brightness or quality found on bigger machines. Palmtop projectors are larger and brighter than pico projectors, with more connections, but still light enough to drop into a bag for travel or presentations. Many models also connect with smartphones, making them ideal cell phone projectors.

Power

Many mini projectors run on internal batteries for at least a couple of hours, making them even more portable. That said, it’s not enough juice to binge an entire series or watch some of the longer Marvel movies. Luckily, mini projectors also come with AC cords, so when you’re at home, in an office, or at a friend’s place, you can just plug them in.

Screens

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $100, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which are especially important when using a mini projector, which is likely already hobbled by a dimmer light source.

Audio

Because they’re built for portability, mini projectors often include speakers. Three or more watts can generally fill a small space, but volume isn’t everything. Ensure the speakers produce clear audio to separate voices from background noise or music in busy scenes. Decent bass response will contribute to the sound’s fullness, too. Many mini projectors also include an audio-out jack for using external speakers. 

FAQs

Q: Are mini projectors worth buying?

Mini projectors are worth buying if you put a premium on size and portability. They’re small, lightweight, and often include features like battery power, built-in Android TV, and speakers. However, they sacrifice picture quality and brightness to achieve those other ends. If you want something you can keep set up in your personal media room, a mini projector isn’t the best choice.

Q: Can you watch Netflix on a mini projector?

You can watch Netflix on a mini projector by connecting a set-top streaming box, like an Apple TV or Roku, via HDMI, or some other streaming stick/media folder through the USB port. Some mini projectors have internal Android TV, but the Netflix app isn’t always compatible. It’s important to confirm compatibility ahead of time.

Q: How much does a mini projector cost?

Mini projectors can range in price depending on the number of features, brightness, and quality of the image. Expect to pay around $200 at the very low end for basic units and as much as $800 for projectors with high-quality, cinematic visuals.

Q: Is a projector better than a TV?

Sometimes a projector is better than a TV, but sometimes it’s not. It depends on what sort of viewing experience you want to have, and where you plan on having it. Projectors are usually capable of much bigger pictures—imagine a full-size unit delivering 300 inches of Marvel movie mayhem! But if you don’t need that big a screen, or you simply don’t have room for it, maybe a large, flat-screen TV will suit you better. Projectors can often offer much better contrast than TVs, but that’s only if they’re in a dark room. If the ambient light is an issue, projectors might run into trouble. Projectors need enough space to “throw” their image in order for it to achieve its maximum size—is your room deep enough to allow that? On the other hand, projectors capable of displaying a 100-inch picture are much easier to take on the road with you than a 100-inch TV! In the end, deciding which is best comes down to your own lifestyle and movie-watching interests. 

Q: How much do mini projectors cost?

The cost of mini projectors can range from $250 for budget options to more than $800 for premium versions with high picture quality, superior audio, and built-in access to Android TV and more than 5,000 apps. You can find versions that work easily with your iPhone or more sophisticated models that feature a 3D mode.

Final thoughts on the best mini projectors

Mini projectors almost never live up to the specs of larger, more permanent units—but they cost less and travel easily. Anyone looking to purchase a mini projector needs to first accept that reality before deciding which unit suits them best. After that, it comes down to priorities. If you want a great picture and don’t care about much else, Epson’s EpiqVision Mini EF12 delivers a cinema-like picture. On the other hand, the AAXA P7 Mini Projector trades off some brightness and a bit of image quality for portability. It features a battery and costs much less. In striking that balance and embracing what’s great about mini projectors, the AAXA P7 edged out the Epson for our top pick.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mini projectors for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best satellite phones for global calls and connecting outdoors https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-satellite-phone/ Tue, 30 Mar 2021 13:28:14 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278707
Four of the best satellite communicators in four vertical panels.
Amanda Reed

Keep a means to communicate close in remote areas with a trustworthy satellite phone.

The post The best satellite phones for global calls and connecting outdoors appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best satellite communicators in four vertical panels.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A black, square Garmin inReach Messenger Satellite Communicator on a plain background. Garmin inReach Messenger
SEE IT

This tough communicator is perfect for outdoor camping trips or staying connected in areas without service.

Best for international travel A Inmarsat black satellite phone out of the box Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone
SEE IT

Flat rate calling charges are included with this satellite phone, saving you money on your post-trip phone bill.

Best budget A Zoleo green and grey satellite communicator on a plain background ZOLEO Satellite Communicator
SEE IT

This sub-$200 option includes Iridium satellite connection just like higher-end models.

Using a satellite phone can provide you with communication anywhere globally. Using a satellite allows you to keep in touch with friends and family, whether you’re hiking in remote areas, sailing, flying, or just want to be prepared in case of a natural disaster. While cell phones and smartphones provide connections in major cities and towns, they’re dependent on terrestrial towers. In case of a natural disaster, cellphone networks can be overloaded or subject to structural damage. With one of the best satellite phones, your connection is dependent on satellites in space, so after a disaster or even if you’re traveling to the far corners of the Earth, you’ll be able to stay connected. 

Satellite phones can be used for voice calls, text messaging, and even basic emails to keep in touch. They allow for emergency preparedness by issuing SOS distress signals, GPS locations, directions, and emergency weather alerts. Some sat phone packages come with a satellite-based WiFi hub that will allow for your smartphone to work in locations that don’t have cellphone connections. Some satellite phone packages even allow for broadband access to the internet. The best satellite phones on the market keep you safe and connected.

How we chose the best satellite phones

When venturing off the beaten path, communication can mean the difference between smooth sailing and a rough misadventure. We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations, consulted outdoor enthusiasts and experts, and conducted heavy research to find the best satellite phones—because there’s comfort in knowing you can always call home.

The best satellite phones: Reviews & Recommendations

The best satellite phones can do everything from traversing craggy ledges and vast green hillsides to phoning home while traveling internationally. The following are our picks that will keep you in touch wherever you go.

Best overall: Garmin inReach Messenger

Garmin

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This satellite communicator is portable and packed with features, like interactive SOS calling, to ensure safety anywhere in the world.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, ANT+
  • Battery life: 28 days
  • Battery power: Internal rechargeable lithium battery
  • Dimensions: 3.1 x 2.5 x .9 inches

Pros

  • Portable
  • Fast access to SOS
  • Lots of battery power
  • Can use with your cellphone for easy typing

Cons

  • Satellite subscription required for use

Makers of top-tier hiking watches, Garmin knows GPS devices and what adventurers need. This handy mini GPS Garmin satellite phone is perfect for packing with your tent on outdoor camping trips. This satellite communicator lets you send two-way text messages wherever you are on the globe and send those you love your exact GPS location. It is compatible with other Garmin devices and phones, and you can give your dead phone enough juice to send a quick message home. Plus, it’s water-rated to IPX7, meaning it’s just as tough as your next uphill climb. Sending out an SOS message is easy thanks to 24/7 access to the Garmin Response center. A satellite subscription is required for use. It was named a Best of What’s New winner in 2022 for its ease of use and ability to keep you constantly connected.

Best satellite messenger: Spot X with Bluetooth 2-Way Satellite Messenger

Spot X

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple messenger allows you to send pre-programmed messages and your GPS location to loved ones.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, USB
  • Battery life: 10 days
  • Battery power: 1 Lithium polymer battery
  • Dimensions: 2.9 x 0.94 x 6.54 inches

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • SOV capabilities
  • Spot Mapping app gives those at home peace of mind

Cons

  • Must pay for a year of activation

Stick to the basics and stay safe with this simple satellite GPS messenger. Connect with friends by sending coordinates and pre-programmed messages via satellite and stay safe in case of emergency with GPS locators and SOS signals. It also includes Save Our Vehicle (SOV) request capabilities and a track button to send and save your location. Those at home can look at your location and progress using the SPOT Mapping app. Be aware that you’ll need to pay for a year of activation to use this device. 

Best for international travel: Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone

Inmarsat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tons of battery life and dust, splash, and shock resistance mean this sat phone is reliable and tough.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: eight hours of talk time; up to 160 hours on standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 4 inches

Pros

  • Easy to set up and activate
  • Comes unlocked for compatibility with multiple service providers
  • Lots of coverage area

Cons

  • Better for traveling than hiking
  • Typing on phone is tedious

The Isatphone is backed by the Inmarsat satellite network and is a good option for international travel. Additional features include GPS and SOS capabilities. Activate its included Bluetooth connection to use it hands-free. It’s preloaded with eight hours of talk time, up to 160 hours on standby, and comes with chargers, cables, and adapters. The phone is also dust, splash, and shock resistant, meaning you don’t have to worry about breaking it while out and about on your international adventure.

Best bundle: Iridium GO! Standard Package

Iridium GO!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This bundle includes tons of adapters—no dead batteries here.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 5.5 hours of talk time; 15.5 hours of standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 3.2 x 1.25 inches

Pros

  • Lots of adapters
  • Prepaid SIM card included
  • Simple user interface

Cons

  • Expensive

This ready-to-use satellite communicator connects to the Iridium global satellite network, which includes 66 operating satellites. A prepaid SIM card with 1,000 minutes of talk time, a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, travel and car chargers, international adapters, and even a convenient carrying case are all included in the bundle. The Iridium GO! satellite communicator also connects to the Iridium GO! app to connect five separate devices sans wires. And it’s dust-proof, shock-resistant, and jet-water resistant. Carry it in your travel backpack or mount it in a car.

Best budget: ZOLEO Satellite Communicator

ZOLEO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This flexible device lets you connect to a satellite for less than $200—a steal compared to other satellite communicators.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 200 hours
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 3.58 x 2.6 x 1.06 inches

Pros

  • Flexibility in using satellite, WiFi, or cellular
  • Iridium satellite network access
  • Required monthly subscription is less than $100 for cellular, WiFi, and SOS messaging

Cons

  • Monthly subscription required

Zoleo created a small rugged device with all the essentials for keeping you safe in remote locations. Highly rated by many outdoor editors, this device allows you to use the Iridium satellite network, Wi-Fi, or cellular service, depending on what’s available. A monthly subscription is required with cost-level options, depending on your needs.

What to consider when buying the best satellite phones

While satellite phones won’t replace your smartphone for everyday use, they step in and offer communication solutions for use when cellphone service isn’t possible. Sat phones are designed for international travel—but always check the countries’ policies ahead of time: is access allowed while off-the-grid camping and hiking or for use on boats or on recreational aircraft? The best satellite phones are designed with off-the-grid use in mind and should be rugged, waterproof, and durable. 

While connections are possible in all remote locations, the ability to receive signals can be hindered by buildings, roofs, shelters, or heavy tree coverage. Many manufacturers have solved this issue and offer packages that are designed to include antennas to use on the outside of structures or buildings, vehicles, boats, or even in the cockpit of an airplane. 

Use case

If you want to stay safe and connected when setting out for off-the-grid outdoor adventures, you will need a small, lightweight satellite phone that’s set up to offer all the features you need to stay safe. The best satellite communicator for wilderness adventures will be rugged, waterproof, and allow for easy messaging and an SOS distress call in case of emergency. 

Choosing a satellite communicator made for outdoor adventures means you’ll also have access to useful extra features. Companies like Garmin offer top-of-the-line GPS support, extra maps, topographic information, and safety advice for all types of rough terrain. Better brands offer excellent customer support as well as handy online resources.

Messaging vs. calling

When you travel or go on outside adventures, having a fully loaded SAT phone may not be necessary. Opting for a more basic satellite communication solution also means saving money. You’ve already got a smartphone—what you need is another layer of communication safety outside the cellphone zone. If you want to keep it simple, consider a satellite GPS messenger. These devices allow you to send messages to family and friends, letting them know you are safe, and also have important extra safety features like GPS location and SOS signals.

Text & voice calling bundles

The best satellite phone bundle will not only include a reliable, durable, easy-to-use phone, but it should also offer voice calling, text messaging, and email messaging. The best phones include a reliable large global network with 24/7 technical support. Packages should include all you need to use and get going without any additional purchases.

Helpful features to look for include different power adapters that allow for use in locations throughout the world. The best sat phone bundles also give you flexibility. You should be able to choose between a monthly plan or a prepaid SIM card—if you only use the phone a few months out of the year, you’re not stuck with a large monthly payment. 

International travel

Sat phones are a smart solution when traveling outside your home country. (Be sure to check the policies of the country you’re visiting before bringing one: They’re illegal in some places.) The best satellite phone for international travel is easy to set up and comes with a prepaid SIM card. That gives you the peace of mind that you can use the phone quickly no matter where you are without worrying about cellphone carriers or reception. Look for phones that offer reliable voice and call connectivity, as well as emergency signals. International travel often takes you to places where you can’t be sure what to expect, and a sat phone offers safety and protection, along with the security of knowing that you won’t be unreachable.

Budget

If satellite phone cost is a factor, consider a more basic satellite communication device. Fully loaded satellite phones can set you back around $1,000, not to mention the extra cost of SIM cards or monthly service plans. Economical solutions keep communication basic but also require a monthly subscription for service. 

The best budget satellite communicator allows you to text and receive texts, and some even offer apps that allow your phone to access the satellite Wi-Fi network. Always look for added emergency features such as SOS alerts and GPS coordinates.

FAQs

Q: How much does a satellite phone cost?

Satellite phones and satellite communication devices range in price from $300 to over $1,000. In addition to hardware costs, you need a satellite provider to connect the phone for service and can purchase a monthly or prepaid plan from $100 to $5,000. Depending on your provider, voice calls range from $.0.15 to $2.00 a minute. Satellite calls between different satellite networks can be expensive. Review voice calls, text messaging, and incoming call costs with your selected provider.

Q: Are satellite phones illegal?

Satellite phones are not illegal in the United States, but in some countries, like China and Cuba, they are. It’s important to research and contact the government of any country you may be visiting to check their policies for use. Satellite phones have restricted use in some countries (e.g., Russia, India), and you must get permission to use these devices or risk arrest. Legal restrictions are in place to curtail any possible illegal or terrorist activities that depend on signals that can bypass censorship and wiretapping. 

Q: Can I turn my phone into a satellite phone?

It is possible to use your smartphone as a satellite phone by purchasing a SatSleeve (Satellite Sleeve) and installing the SatSleeve App. The first time you use your SatSleeve, you have to set it up to connect via Bluetooth. Some satellite providers (like Iridium Go!) offer packages that include a satellite phone and a satellite phone hotspot that allows you to connect your smartphone, tablet, or laptop to a satellite-backed WiFi hotspot. 

Q: Do satellite phones run out of batteries?

Yes, but satellite phone batteries can last much longer than a phone battery. Putting your phone in Standby mode can help stretch the amount of time between charges. If you’re really worried about run time, consider bringing a portable charger or extra phone battery to swap out just in case.

Q: Do satellite phones have a monthly fee?

Yes. Some brands also offer prepaid plan, but we recommend a monthly service. Some plans provide you with rollover minutes, uninterrupted service, and even a U.S. phone number. Prepaid plans can be more expensive, offer a limited amount of minutes, and no options for rollover minutes.

Final thoughts on the best satellite phones

The best satellite phones will allow you to roam around the globe and stay connected. With rugged, waterproof designs, these phones can follow you on any adventure by land, sea, or air. Connect with a prepaid SIM card, or with a monthly plan to keep safe and communicate no matter where you are. In case of emergency, sat phones will send SOS signals and GPS coordinates to make sure you return home safe. Compare phones, then get shopping.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best satellite phones for global calls and connecting outdoors appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cooler bags for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-cooler-bag/ Wed, 10 Feb 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=369546
The best cooler bags composited
Stan Horaczek

Pick up an insulated bag to keep your drinks cold as the weather heats up.

The post The best cooler bags for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best cooler bags composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The YETI Hopper Flip 18 is the best portable soft cooler. Yeti Hopper Flip 18
SEE IT

The coldcell insulation on this pick means your food and drink will stay chilled for hours, even on a hot summer day.

Best collapsable Igloo snapdown cooler bag Igloo 36-can snapdown
SEE IT

Designed with a waterproof shell and a puncture-resistant liner, this cooler will endure all your beach days to keep your food and drinks at a perfect temperature.

Best value A square bag in gray, red, black and white, with a chain on the top of the bag and a pocket in front. Coleman Soft Cooler Bag
SEE IT

A high can capacity and low price make this an excellent budget-friendly soft cooler bag.

You’ll be shocked how frequently a cooler bag comes in handy. They can keep drinks frosty on a hot day at the beach, keep lunch fresh during a long work day, or prevent your frozen groceries from thawing on the way home from the store. You’ll find every type of soft cooler out there, from heavy-duty waterproof versions to simple insulated vessels meant to take minimal abuse. We’ve researched dozens of the most popular models to develop this list of the best cooler bags for every person and type of outing.

How we chose the best cooler bags

Cooler bags are a hot commodity because they don’t require the amount of space (or expense) as a full-sized cooler. There are dozens of popular models on the market vying to keep your cans and lunch containers cool. We started with a wide survey of the product space and narrowed it down based on personal experience, user feedback, editorial reviews, and general reputation. We put several models through typical activities, including trips to the beach and toting lunches. For the best results, it’s still important to know how to pack a cooler and nail the ice-to-drinks ratio properly.

The best cooler bags: Reviews & Recommendations

From the boat and the beach to the jobsite or campsite, insulated bags keep your food and drinks at your desired temperature. Here are the best cooler bags for no matter where you plan to be this summer, whether it’s landscaping or playing backyard games.  

Best overall: Yeti Hopper Flip 18

Why it made the cut: With burly construction, superior insulation, and lots of carrying options, this is the champion of cooler bags.

Specs

  • Capacity: 30 cans
  • Handle type: Hand and shoulder
  • Waterproof: Yes
  • Price: $300

Pros

  • Waterproof construction includes the zipper
  • Exceptional insulation
  • Designed to withstand UV rays and mildew buildup

Cons

  • Very expensive

Yeti has made a name for itself, making some of the best full-sized and roller coolers, and it’s brought that same engineering to its Hopper Flip 18 soft cooler. Its 30-can capacity (without ice) is more than sufficient for a day-long beach trip or hike. Adding ice will lower the number of cans you can bring but increase the amount of time your beverages will stay cold. Yeti says the cooler bag can keep beverages cold for several hours (if not days), though the exact timeframe will depend on your environment and beverage-to-ice ratio. This longevity is possible because of Yeti’s DryHide double-TPU Shell and Coldcell Insulation, which put a dense barrier between the contents of your soft cooler and the outside world.

A leakproof zipper will prevent liquid from getting in and out of the Hopper Flip 18 unnecessarily. Yeti says the materials it uses on the inside and outside of its soft cooler were designed to reduce mildew, and the outside can prevent damage from exposure to UV rays. All of these performance characteristics are common in full-sized coolers, but it’s impressive Yeti was able to keep cramming them into a much lighter, more portable cooler design. There are still some features—like the ability to use dry ice for cooling—that are exclusive to Yeti’s full-sized coolers, but all of the essentials are here.

Best small: Carhartt Deluxe Dual Compartment Insulated Lunch Cooler Bag

Carhartt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This basic lunch bag is built super-tough and keeps food cold long enough for really late lunches.

Specs

  • Capacity: Six cans
  • Handle type: Shoulder strap and carry handle
  • Waterproof: Yes
  • Price: $29.50

Pros

  • Extremely durable outer
  • Shoulder and hand straps
  • Extra front pocket for more storage
  • Holds a 6-pack for when you’re off the clock

Cons

  • Shoulder strap is sewn on so it’s not removable
  • Capacity may be small for some large lunches if you’re also adding an ice pack

Don’t let this small cooler’s size fool you; its ultra portability doesn’t mean it’s less performant than our other recommendations. It’s made of 1,200-denier polyester, designed to resist water and protect your food. The soft cooler’s thermal insulation will keep hot foods hot or keep up to six canned beverages cold for several hours. At just 10 inches wide and nine inches tall, this soft cooler was designed to be taken on quick trips to the beach or onto a job site. A front zippered pocket can be used to hold utensils, small sauce bottles, or other paraphernalia, while a top compartment can hold more cans or be used to keep food and beverages separated. A carry handle and shoulder strap make this Carhartt lunch cooler bag easy to cart to any jobsite.

Best backpack: Brümate MagPack 24-Can Backpack Soft Cooler

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This big but portable soft cooler is easy to carry around and can keep drinks cold for days.

Specs

  • Capacity: 24 cans
  • Handle type: Shoulder straps
  • Waterproof: Yes
  • Price: $274.99

Pros

  • Kept beverages cool for over 24 hours
  • Shoulder straps were comfortable
  • Magnetic lock was easy to open but stayed firmly shut

Cons

  • Price

The most premium model in Brümate’s newly launched MagPack line of soft coolers is this 24-can backpack, and it’s worth every cent of its comparatively high price. The inner layers of the backpack are constructed using a proprietary technology called “IceShield” to insulate your beverages and a waterproof shell around the outside to keep any unwanted pests from getting inside. Both of these elements made the soft cooler feel solid both inside and out. We never felt like we’d damage it by moving it in and out of a car or casually dropping ice and cans into its inner chamber, then shaking them around to ensure even distribution. Our favorite design element was this cooler’s magnetic latch, which was powerful enough to prevent drinks and ice from spilling out when the backpack was turned upside down but easy enough to open one-handed.

Brümate says you can fill this cooler with up to 24 cans plus ice, 21 pounds of only ice, or seven bottles of wine with ice. We filled it with 18 cans and roughly 10 pounds of ice and left them to sit overnight. After 12 hours, it looked as if virtually no ice had melted, and the cans felt colder to the touch than when we put them in. We continued to check on our beverages at 12-hour intervals, and it was well into the second day before the ice almost completely melted. At that point, the soft cooler kept the water from the melted ice cool enough that we could grab chilled cans for several additional hours. (The cooler was left in an environment of roughly 68 degrees.)

Carrying the MagPack around was comfortable, as there was enough padding in the back and slack in the straps to make the proper adjustments. Its straps were removable, though, so we could carry it around single-handed or double-handed using its side straps. It’s nice to have this versatility, just in case. If you need a backpack cooler to keep your beverages chilled this summer, we highly recommend checking out Brümate’s MagPack 24-Can Backpack Soft Cooler.

Best collapsable: Igloo 36-Can Snapdown

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With lots of room for beverages and a very secure fold-down design, it’s an ideal way to pack for the coast.

Specs

  • Capacity: 36 cans
  • Handle type: Hand and shoulder straps
  • Waterproof: Yes
  • Price: $58.75

Pros

  • Very spacious
  • Front pocket provides extra storage for sunscreen or other essentials
  • Sturdy handles
  • Solid insulation
  • Fold-down opening makes for easy loading

Cons

  • Heavy when fully loaded
  • No dividers if you want to carry other items besides cans

This rectangular bag unfolds at the top to create a large opening for easy loading. It weighs just 1.7 pounds when it’s empty. That’s crucial because it holds up to 36 cans and ice, which makes it hefty when loaded to capacity. The sturdy hand straps feel very secure, and the included shoulder strap is removable, so it won’t flop around when you’re not using it. This insulated cooler bag’s large, flat front pocket is roomy enough to hold silverware, sunscreen, a Kindle, or whatever other beach essentials you might want to lug along. I brought it along to an all-day fitness competition, and it kept my lunch, some protein shakes, and a few cans of energy drinks chilled nicely, even without adding ice. The fold-down opening does a good job of keeping out sand and other debris from the environment, but the lining can wrinkle, making it tricky to clean. This is ultimately a very solid replacement for those wasteful foam coolers they sell at the supermarket. It’s a lot sturdier, too.

Best soft-sided: Iron Flask Soft Cooler Bag

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Iron Flask’s soft-sided cooler is a well-constructed day-trip-friendly choice for campers and beachgoers.

Specs

  • Capacity: 24 cans
  • Handle type: Straps and handles
  • Waterproof: Yes
  • Price: $170.95

Pros

  • Exceptional insulation
  • Solid capacity
  • Drink holders on top

Cons

  • Price

Iron Flask’s Soft Cooler Bag impressed by living up to the company’s claims that beverages would stay cold for two whole days—though that does mean sacrificing some can space in the name of ice. Our tests used the suggested 12 cans and about 10 pounds of ice in a 68-degree environment, and we could continue to grab cold drinks from it for a couple of days. What impressed us the most about this soft-sided cooler was its design. The cooler’s handles and strap felt solid, making it easy for us to carry it around. A pair of circular cutouts on top of the cooler provided convenient spots to hold drinks, while a built-in bottle opener ensured we’d always have one on us at a moment’s notice. The cooler bag’s design makes it the perfect choice for carting around on a commuter/cargo bike, too.

Iron Flask said its soft cooler was rip-resistant and leakproof, and we put the latter statement to the test by leaving ice water inside, shaking it around, and keeping the cooler upside down. Water didn’t get through, so you shouldn’t have any leaking issues while transporting beverages or keeping water in this soft cooler bag in a car or on the beach overnight. By using the right insulation, Iron Flask was able to coax the maximum amount of performance from a lighter weight soft cooler bag. While it’s a little more expensive than the competition, you’re certainly getting what you paid for.

Best budget: Coleman Soft Cooler Bag

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This roomy bag provides solid insulation and lots of space to cover various uses.

Specs

  • Capacity: 30 cans
  • Handle type: Shoulder strap
  • Waterproof: No
  • Price: $33

Pros

  • High capacity
  • Flip-open top makes for easy access
  • Folds down when empty for easy transport

Cons

  • Not waterproof or leak-proof, so best for packaged products
  • No handle for hand-carrying

This may not be the least expensive soft cooler we recommend, but its 30-can capacity is impressive given its sub-$50 price tag. Even on 90-degree Fahrenheit days, this Coleman soft cooler bag can keep 30 cans cold for 24 hours because it has heat-welded leakproof seams and robust insulation. While hardly bulletproof, the nylon exterior has an antimicrobial lining designed to keep out odor, mold, mildew, and fungus. Plus, the ripstop fabric is made to prevent tears. That’s plenty of protection for a budget buy. The soft cooler bag also features side handles and an adjustable shoulder strap for easy transport, plus a front pocket to store your keys or bottle opener. 

What to consider when shopping for the best cooler bags

Whether you need them for play or work, the best cooler bags have one main job: maintaining your food’s temperature. Bags accomplish this through insulation, leakproof seams, and other features. Just in time for you to pack that picnic, we’ve unpacked what you need to look for in a cooler bag.

Insulation

Insulation is the primary way the best cooler bags keep food cold—or hot, for that matter. Most bags feature thermal insulation, which keeps food or drinks at the desired temperature by stopping heat transfer. Think about it: If you place a hot mug of coffee on the counter, the beverage will slowly cool to room temperature. But suppose you put it in a concealed environment. In that case, it’ll transfer its heat energy to the inside of that space while simultaneously pulling heat energy from the air around it until the temperature of both the coffee and that concealed space settles somewhere in between.

A cooler bag’s insulation helps win the heat-transfer battle, and the best cooler bags use foam insulation. The gas bubbles in the foam, as well as the porous spaces between those bubbles, help slow heat transfer. But not all foam is the same. Open-cell foam is lighter and more flexible—making it an easier fit for soft-sided coolers. However, it doesn’t stop the transfer of heat as well as closed-cell foam, which does a better job of limiting the interaction between the gas bubbles. Brands such as Yeti have created foam insulation that’s light and soft enough for bags, bringing the best of thermal to soft-sided coolers. Of course, expect to pay higher prices for technology that so effectively keeps the temperature up (or down).  

Seams

Seams are critical in a soft cooler bag because they prevent leaks of all kinds. One type of leak is apparent—if the seams aren’t tight and your bag of marinating chicken spills, you’ll be cleaning your trunk, as well as your cooler. (Also, if you’re planning to dump ice into your insulated bag, weak seams could lead to a wet picnic blanket.)

While not as messy, the other kind of leak could be just as problematic. Remember, they work by creating a perfectly concealed environment to prevent heat transfer. Leaky seams compromise that environment by allowing air to flow in and out.

So what should you look for in a cooler’s seams? Rather than being stitched or glued together, the best cooler bags—the most airtight, that is—are welded together with heat and pressure. The seal on top of the bag also factors in. While zippers are most common—and perfectly suitable—Yeti has developed a magnetic seal that’s nearly as tight as a drybag. 

Durability

The outside of your cooler bag is important since that material determines waterproofing and other protections. A fabric’s deniability refers to the thickness of each thread, and anything above “1,000 denier” should provide ample resistance to water, mildew, and the sun. Many bags also feature breathable, elements-resistant linings—à la Gore-Tex.  

Size

Soft bags can have as much capacity as blocky hard coolers. But if you plan to use it as a lunch box rather than a camping refrigerator, you’d be foolish to opt for the 30-can model. Still, a bigger bag can accommodate more ice, giving you the option of keeping food chilled for longer. Plus, the advantage of the best soft cooler bags over hard coolers is that they are packable, often folding down or rolling up in a way that lets them take up just a fraction of the space when they’re empty.

Extras

When your cooler bag is loaded with a case of beer and a bag of ice, you may need an extra set of hands. Models with handles, as well as shoulder straps, offer more ways—and more places—to grab and lift. Extra pockets are useful, too. Some bags have two insulated pockets, allowing you to keep your leftovers warm on top and your beer cold down below. Front and side pockets provide the perfect places to stash your dry goods or your keys. 

FAQs

Q: Are soft coolers waterproof?

Many soft coolers are waterproof. They feature protective shells or linings that also keep mold, mildew, and the sun’s rays at bay.

Q: Can I put ice in an insulated bag?

You can absolutely put ice in an insulated bag. The interior linings of the best options are completely leakproof, with seams that are welded together. Some even include pourable spouts, letting you easily drain water as the ice melts without requiring that you take out all of your food or drinks.

Q: How long does food stay cold in an insulated bag?

Depending on the cooler bag you choose, your food can stay cold for hours or days. As a reference point, Coleman’s budget bag boasts that it can keep 30 cans cold for 24 hours. Of course, the quality of the insulation technology is important—with Yeti’s closed-cell foam, such as in the Yeti Hopper M30, leading the way—but size also matters. The bigger the bag, the more ice it can hold and, therefore, the longer your bag will have ice to keep your food cold.  

Q: How do you clean a cooler bag?

In most cases, you can clean out a cooler bag by sloshing water around it and using mild dish soap inside to prevent bacteria or odors from building up. If a spill has occurred, you may want to use a sponge to clean the inside more thoroughly. Rinsing off the outside of a cooler bag will be sufficient to keep it clean.

Q: Should I get a soft-sided or a hard-sided cooler?

Soft-sided coolers are generally lighter but keep beverages cooler for a shorter period of time. Hard-sided coolers typically use denser materials as insulation, which adds to their weight and cooling capabilities. There’s no wrong answer, and the best choice will come down to your personal preference.

Q: How much do cooler bags cost?

This depends on their size, capacity, and materials. Our recommendations cost between $33 and $275.

Final thoughts on shopping for the best cooler bags

Whether you’re looking for frosty beers or fresher produce, an insulated bag is like a portable refrigerator that packs up easily when it’s emptied. With thermal bags’ foam insulation systems and airtight seals, the best cooler bags can keep your hot food warm and your cold cuts cool. The size and style you need depend on what you want to eat and drink and where you want to consume it—maybe at a pier or a picnic table. But no matter if you’re looking to tip back a few cold ones on a boat deck or eat a hot sandwich while constructing a client’s back deck, there is an option that’s right for you.  

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best cooler bags for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar deck lights in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-deck-lights/ Tue, 20 Jun 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=549598
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Think Mother Nature needs a night light? Grab these solar lights to keep just a tad of the power of the sun running in the dark.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector
SEE IT

These lights give you more control, and more intelligent operation, than the competition.

Best lanterns TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light
SEE IT

These lanterns give you the best range of usage options while feeling quite authentic.

Best budget Lightique Moroccan String Lights Lightique Moroccan String Lights
SEE IT

Highly weatherproof lights on a string. What more do you need?

A solid set of solar deck lights can change the tone of an entire outdoor space without much cost or effort. There are many different styles to choose from, each with their own specialties. Some provide a romantic ambiance, while others function to illuminate stairs and other objects to help you and your guests avoid accidents. Here, we’ve collected a comprehensive list of the best solar deck lights for any style, functionality, or circumstance.

How we chose the best solar deck lights

Finding the best solar deck lighting goes beyond finding the best forms for them (strings, stair illuminators, etc.) but also needs to consider several more complex factors. To make our decisions, real-world functionality, and materials were highly considered.

Solar-powered deck lights are tricky to fully review for anyone due to the somewhat finicky nature of the weather. As humans, we tend to over or underestimate local cloudiness based on our temperaments. Accordingly, it makes sense to cast a wide range and survey large numbers of real customer reviews, often more telling than expert reviews of lights in near-pristine conditions. How is the actual brightness and reliability of the lights, for instance?

Despite the low energy costs of maintaining outdoor lighting, many people buy solar-powered deck lights for their environmental benefits. Unfortunately, there are some environmentally destructive solar-powering materials. Manufacturers aren’t always forthcoming with what materials they use, and deck lights are, admittedly, small. Still, we’ll do our best to present what materials are used so you can make an informed decision about your purchase.

The best solar deck lights: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a single best solar deck lights set is difficult due to the many types available and the niches they each fill. Still, the Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector easily takes our slot for top dog in the hierarchy. They fill their niche so well they can take on multiple jobs! But, if you need something else—including a bit of ambiance—we have a full list of great picks where you’re sure to find something that suits your needs, including deck lights that can be hung overhead, used specifically for stairs, and more.

Best overall: Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector

Aootek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a smart design and smart function, these are powerful lights!

Specs

  • Brightness: ~2,000 Lux
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Plastic, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, remote 
  • Price: $58

Pros

  • Surprisingly bright
  • Three lighting modes to suit your preferences
  • Mirror light reflector tech
  • Environmentally friendly silicon solar panel

Cons

  • Not the best for “ambiance”

If you’re looking for something tough, bright, and reactive, then the Aootek Solar Lights are the best place to start. In a product category that typically shies away from being too “smart” (the typical smart tech sucks energy out of a system quickly), Aootek makes some great compromises to make deck lights that will do what you want when you want them to, in a convenient way.

They do this by providing three modes of usage. First, there is an energy-conserving security light mode triggered by motion, which is best used to ward others away from your deck when it isn’t in use. Next, a permanent on mode keeps the light on consistently throughout, perfect for your nighttime party. Finally, a sort of hybrid smart brightness mode brings the best of both worlds, giving a low level of light that gets brighter when motion is detected. This final lighting mode is perfect for guiding guests from your garden, or other parts of your landscape, to your deck and keeping them safe once there. In all instances, the lights are a clear and bright white, which is perfect for vision but may not necessarily create as romantic of an environment as other choices on this list. After installing the lights, they should stay well-protected as they have a durable plastic frame and achieve IP65 protection, meaning they are resistant to both dust and rain. And, speaking of materials, the solar power collection system is silicone based. Silicone panels are typically carbon-free, making these the best motion-sensing lights and somewhat better for the environment.

Best stair lights: JACKYLED Solar Step Lights

JACKYLED

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strong and bright, the JACKYLED step lights won’t break or let you fall.

Specs

  • Brightness: 12 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Stainless steel, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, switch
  • Price: $39

Pros

  • Easier-than-most installation
  • Durable, rust-resistant frame
  • Bottom and side lights

Cons

  • Occasionally one will have a weak battery

The JACKYLED Solar Step Lights provide durability and flexibility for lighting up your steps. With a 3-way lighting system, the JACKYLED can be affixed to the vertical side of your steps to light up the step below and the easily-tripped-on front of the step. Don’t worry about kicking them, either, as the frame is a tough, rust-resistant stainless steel. Alternatively, line them up on the wall or rails adjacent to your steps to get a different angle (if your local lighting permits). No matter where you choose to place them, the setup should be a snap with screw-in and tape-on options available.

Best string lights: Brightown Solar String Lights

Brightown

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brightown lights offer a romantic ambiance on speed dial.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable settings
  • Water-resistance: IP45
  • Materials: Plastic
  • Control: Timer, remote 
  • Price: $40

Pros

  • Shatterproof bulbs even a klutz can install safely (strong dual hooks)
  • Great solar panel
  • Neat remote control
  • 20,000-hour lifespan

Cons

  • Not connectable

If you’re looking for true flexibility, the Brightown Solar String lights will give it to you. First, the setup is easy due to a patented dual-clip design, with clips and hooks adorning both the top and side of each bulb (optional ties can also be used). Even if you were to knock the bulbs about, they’re shatter-resistance. Once up, you can choose from various modes, including timers, variable brightnesses, and effects like blinking or pulsing. On a dimmer mode, they’re the perfect mood lighting and, when made brighter, can keep things light enough to see properly. On blinking mode, they light up the party like twinkle lights. Finally, everything is tied together by an above-average solar panel that can quickly charge indoors if you get an unlucky glut of cloudy days.

Best deck post lights: VOLISUN Solar Post Cap Lights

VOLISUN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has a stylish design, fits multiple post sizes, and can store enough energy to last through an overcast day here and there.

Specs

  • Brightness: Dual setting
  • Weather-resistance: IP44
  • Materials: Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
  • Control: Automatic, switch
  • Price: $49

Pros

  • Battery holds enough charge to shine for 20 hours on lower brightness setting
  • Fits both 4×4 and 6×6 post tops
  • Pop-on installation is easy

Cons

  • Doesn’t fit 5×5 post tops

VOLISUN is a pretty prolific maker of solar deck lights in every style. Their solar post cap lights stand out amongst their collection for their ease of use, style, and lasting power. Choose between a 4×4 or 6×6 setting (based on the size of your post), pop it on, and tighten a couple of screws, and your system is completely installed. But, before you move, flip the switch to ‘I’ or ‘II’ to select a power mode. The lower mood setting—‘I’ power—can last over 20 hours on a single charge, while the stronger ‘II’ setting can last over 10 hours. In other words, if you’re satisfied with the lower setting, you’ll be able to have guaranteed lights (next to) all the time, even after a day of inclement weather.

Best lanterns: TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light

TomCare

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Hang, carry, or put on your table—the TomCare lanterns are super versatile in presentation

Specs

  • Brightness: 25 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Metal, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
  • Control: Automatic, Switch
  • Price: $43

Pros

  • Easily maneuverable
  • Sturdy metal frame
  • Attractive flickering effect

Cons

  • Not as cheap as the average solar deck lights

A lot of solar lanterns fail at one of the most basic things they should do: looking and feeling like a lantern. The tops of both lanterns in the TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light kit have a relatively innocuous solar panel, but the rest look like something out of history. The grainy, faux-aged copper, aside from the flickering flame-effect lighting inside, looks particularly decorative. Even better, this lantern offers much more versatility than other lanterns meant to sit or hang only. Place your lantern on a table as a set piece or hang it just about wherever you’d like, but try to find a regular resting spot that gets some sun during the day!

Best budget: Lightique Moroccan String Lights

Lightique

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: They’re the easiest way to get a bit of solar power on your deck.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable modes
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Copper
  • Control: Touch
  • Price: $13

Pros

  • Incredible IP rating for the price
  • Simple installation
  • 8 lighting modes

Cons

  • Short string (good if that’s all you need)

If you don’t need anything too elaborate and just want a short string of lights, try Lightique’s Moroccan String Lights. On the one hand, it’s just 10 feet of string lights. On the other hand, they provide eight lighting modes (including favorites like twinkle flash and wave), a unique look, a super simple installation, and the perfect size to install above your door. Additionally, at under $10, an IP68 rating is practically unheard of. If you have a wider door, it might be nice to have a longer string of lights, but for this price, you can’t really get any better.

What to consider before buying solar deck lights

When choosing solar deck lights for your property, you’ll naturally want to gravitate toward an aesthetic you like. Simply looking at product images can help you with this. However, things can get a bit more tricky once you’ve narrowed your selection down by taste. You’ll want to ask yourself what materials are used in producing the device and its bulbs’ caging. There are also factors, such as placement and weather resistance, that are surprisingly similar to the questions you’d be asking yourself if you were buying a potted plant for your deck.

Placement

Where should you place your solar deck lights? It’s more than feng shui, but you’ll definitely need to consider the facing of your solar panels, with a Northern exposure being especially bad if you live in the Northern Hemisphere. In fact, a lot of the placing suggestions are at least somewhat similar to what would be suggested for plants that require medium to high sunlight; avoid placing solar panels under overhangs, brush, and other locations where the light cannot reach them.

The next thing to think about is how to arrange your lighting. Are your solar deck lights multidirectional, unidirectional, or a standard bulb in open space? 3-way designs are especially useful for lighting up stairs and are best placed on the vertical part of each step. In this position, they emphasize both the landing for the foot and the height needed to take on each subsequent step. Avoid positioning bright bulbs or intense unidirectional lighting too close to head height—for adults and children—as it could be uncomfortable to the eyes.

Finally, what are the odds that something will get smacked, stepped on, or hit when the furniture is moved? If your solar deck lights aren’t made of a strong material (see below) then you might be faced with being extra careful or removing them temporarily when bringing in new deck gear.

Weather resistance

Whether or not a product can withstand a slight drizzle is usually the first thing buyers look at in an outdoor product. Unfortunately, it is a bit more complex than picking something labeled as “waterproof” due to the nature of the outdoors.

Your first thing to check should be a product’s IPXX rating, which will display as a number like IP46 or IPX8. More officially known as an item’s Ingress Protection rating, the numbers refer to a standardized 3rd party measure of a product’s officially tested protection against solids and liquids. Nowadays, the system is used for everything from earbuds to solar deck lights. While not all good weather-resistant products have an IP rating, you can feel secure in those that do.

The first digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand dust. For solar deck lights, this number will usually be a 4 or a 6, with 4 meaning the product withstands particles greater than a millimeter thick and 6 meaning the product does not allow dust inside. Periodically, you’ll see an ‘X’ instead of a number, which indicates that this test was not performed.

The second digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand water and other liquids to a lesser degree. For a solar deck light, a rating of 4 or 5 will likely do in most situations, as these signify the device is protected from spraying and splashing water from multiple directions. A rating of 7 or higher indicates the solar deck light could withstand being fully submerged in water for a period of time. Just how well are solar deck lights protected from the rain? As a fun fact, please note that there are customer reports of solar deck lights surviving Floridian hurricanes.

Finally, there are a couple of miscellaneous categories to check for. If your frame is steel, is it stainless steel or marked to be rustproof? While these issues might largely be aesthetic, having rust accumulate around screw holes won’t do you any favors down the line. For hanging and free-swinging solar deck lights, consider finding a product that offers shatterproof bulbs, as they’re both wind-resistant and accident resistant. If you live in an area with extreme temperatures, be sure also to check the upper and lower bounds for temperature that your solar deck lights can withstand.

Materials used

It’s not as in-depth of a category as the other two, but the materials used to make a solar deck light can make or break your experience with it (sometimes literally if it gets kicked but has low-quality caging).

Typically, the main materials you’ll see for the caging of solar deck lights are going to be hard plastic and some form of metal. Plastic can be a stylish black that fades into the night, a more modern iPhone-esque white, or any other color. High-quality plastic is actually quite nice and shouldn’t be ignored. Alternatively, metal casing provides extra security, especially if the light is to be put in a place where it might get stepped on. As mentioned in the previous section, looking for stainless steel or rustproof metal is advised.

Of course, this is for external caging and the parts that make up the solar panel. While we’d all like to pat ourselves on the back, the truth is that deck lights don’t use up a lot of energy in the first place. So long as you’re using modern LED bulbs, your entire home’s lighting shouldn’t even be in your home’s Top 10 energy users.

As a result, it is important to appreciate solar deck lights for their convenience and lack of wires. If you want to be environmentally conscious, focus on the materials used in the solar panel and opt for silicon (especially of the monocrystalline style) when possible. Also, look for new solar panel technologies as they come. Ultimately, though, there is a balance in all things, and solar deck lights are quite tiny in the scheme of things.

FAQs

Q: How much do solar deck lights cost?

Solar deck lights are typically not that expensive. You can get a good set for under $60 in most cases. This is because they are primarily made of bulbs and a plastic casing, neither expensive. And, just like with a solar-powered outdoor light, the technology to charge via solar power (at least for smaller objects) is always getting cheaper. In other words, the best solar deck lights are available for everyone.

Q: Is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night?

Not only is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night, but it is also somewhat encouraged. The best solar deck lights come with timers and other mechanisms to keep your lights on when possible and in such a way that is energy efficient. Unlike the best tiki torches, many of the best solar deck lights are made to run even when you aren’t around and even have motion-sensing modes.

Q: Will solar lights charge in overcast conditions?

Yes, solar lights charge even on cloudy days, but they charge best on clear days. Just as the fair-skinned can get a sunburn on a cloudy day, your solar panel can pick up at least some UV rays when the sun isn’t at full strength. Many of the best solar deck lights have optional secondary charging mechanisms or multi-use-day battery storage to compensate for the odd overcast day.

Final thoughts on the best solar deck lights

Solar deck lights illuminate your deck or patio using an inherent wireless design. They are, by nature, a seamless and cost-effective method to enhance both the safety and ambiance of your outdoor spaces. As of 2023, however, finding the best solar deck lights requires some research. It might take some time but rest assured, there is a perfect product out there. Anyone can discover solar deck lights that align with their needs, their family’s preferences, and the specific aesthetic of their home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garden hoses for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-garden-hose/ Tue, 27 Apr 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284433
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

Keep your yard thriving with the help of these essential tools.

The post The best garden hoses for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Flexzilla makes one of the best garden hoses. Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose
SEE IT

The durable, kink-free design of this garden hose makes it ideal for washing the car, watering the garden, or setting up a sprinkler for the grass.

Best heavy-duty Bionic Steel makes the best garden hose that's heavy-duty. Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose
SEE IT

Users needn’t worry about rust, kinks, or even temperature extremes with this impressive stainless steel garden hose.

Best budget Melnor makes one of the best garden hoses at a budget-friendly price. Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose
SEE IT

Delicate plants won’t suffer damage thanks to this vinyl soaker hose that releases water gradually.

A garden hose may sound like an afterthought when it comes to caring for outdoor space, but choosing the right model can have a drastic impact on your yard work experience. The options run from lightweight, coiled options designed for smaller yards to heavy-duty models with layers of insulation that are ideal for commercial use. Whether you need something to water window boxes or wash the car, we’ve rounded up the features to look for and our recommendations for the best garden hoses available today.

How we chose the best garden hoses

We conducted extensive product research into more than 40 different garden hoses. We drew on our significant experience from years of yard and garden maintenance when compiling this selection of the best garden hoses. The primary criteria we considered when looking at each type of hose included length, material, and any extra features, like a no-kink design or an included spray nozzle.

Length is a key consideration since a too-short hose might not allow you to water the entire yard; therefore, were prioritized options available in multiple hose lengths over similar ones that come in one size only. We looked for hoses with special features that made watering easier and also factored in the hose’s material and couplings. We then selected products with more durable construction over cheaply made versions. After all, you don’t want your outdoor misting fan’s lifeline to fail you on a sweltering day.

The best garden hoses: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for a garden hose isn’t difficult, but buying the wrong length or opting for a heavy-duty model that’s cumbersome to use in a large backyard can easily make you regret a purchase. We’ve rounded up the best options for a variety of situations and price points below so you can make the best decision going in and don’t get soaked.

Best overall: Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose

Flexzilla

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Hybrid polymer
  • Length: 3-, 5-, 10-, 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available
  • Price: $40

Pros

  • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
  • Kink-free hybrid polymer material
  • Drinking-water safe

Cons

  • Larger sizes take up a lot of storage space
  • Can be heavy

Home gardeners who keep up with watering are likely to appreciate the kink-free design of the Flexzilla Garden Hose. It’s available in convenient sizes for garden use, including 25, 50, 75, and 100 feet. Its flexible hybrid polymer is drinking-water safe, so users can take a refreshing sip while tackling outdoor chores.

This standard garden hose is lightweight and easy to maneuver, with corrosion-resistant aluminum couplings for a secure, leak-free fit. The only shortcoming is that larger sizes take up much space when fully coiled. But as long as one has room to store it, the Flexzilla is a versatile, dependable, and durable choice.

Best expandable: TheFitLife Flexible and Expandable Garden Hose

TheFitLife

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Expandable hose
  • Material: Latex, fabric, brass
  • Length: 25, 50, 75, 100 feet
  • Price: $62

Pros

  • Available in four lengths
  • Expands and folds up easily
  • Easily transported

Cons

  • Fabric exterior can pick up dirt

One of the hottest trends in the past few years has been the invention of the expandable garden hose that doesn’t kink. Patios, driveways, or manicured lawns are all prime locations for this style of hose. These fabric-wrapped, rubberized coils shrink to an easily transported size when the water pressure is turned off and extend to full length when pressure is applied. Some of them come with hangable sacks or can be thrown into an unused pot for easy storage, making for the most convenient option if you don’t enjoy the ritual of a neatly coiled water hose. Because the outer sheathing of an expandable hose is absorbent fabric, these are best used around areas that don’t have a lot of dirt or mulch, as the fabric will pick up pieces of debris when dragged across your yard.

Best permanent coil: Water Right PCH-025-EP-6PKRS 300 Series 25-Foot Coil Hose

Water Right

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Coiled hose
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Length: 25, 50, and 75 feet available
  • Price: $42

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Fun to use
  • Less expensive

Cons

  • Can’t handle a large volume of water
  • Advertised lengths shorter because of coiling

If your gardening needs are simple and don’t require a large volume of water—and you like the aesthetics of a spring-loaded, lightweight garden hose—the Slinky-type coil hose is right for you. These coils resemble the vintage toy that could magically walk downstairs on its own and, if you stay within the 25-foot length, are a dream to manage. Just getting started? Check out our guide to the best raised beds.

Best hybrid rubber: Giraffe Garden Hose 25 feet Lightweight Hybrid 5/8 inch

Giraffe Tools

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid hose
  • Material: Polymer 
  • Length: 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 feet
  • Price: $29

Pros

  • Available  in 7 lengths
  • Extremely durable
  • Designed with inner insulation that keeps it flexible in cold weather
  • Strong water pressure of 150 psi

Cons

  • More expensive
  • Heavy

Made of strong, modern materials that can take temperature swings, sun exposure and rough abuse, these hybrid rubber garden hoses are designed for commercial use and can take a beating. Perfect for connecting to a sprinkler and moving over mulch, dirt, and around trees, the classic hose is the most commonly used for residential applications. For other classic garden hoses, try this 50’ option or this 100’ garden hose.

Best for drinking: Camco 25-Ft TastePURE Drinking Water Hose

Camco

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard hose
  • Material: PVC
  • Length: 25 feet
  • Price: $20

Pros

  • Lead-free, BPA-free, and phthalate-free
  • Resists kinking
  • Comes with UV protection

Cons

  • Only available in one size
  • Material may degrade over time

If you’ve ever taken a long slurp from the end of a hose, you’ll know that they are not meant to transfer drinking water and commonly leave a plastic, rubbery aftertaste in your mouth. There have been advances in technology in the last few years that eliminate this chemical effect. While the prices are higher and the longevity of the hose can be compromised by the PVC materials that don’t stand up to temperature fluctuations with the strength of traditional rubber, if you’re intent on drinking water from your hose—or need an RV water hose for your camper rig—you’ll want to purchase a BPA-free version like this hose.

Best heavy-duty: Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose

Bionic Steel

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Length: 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available
  • Price: $59

Pros

  • Impressive weather resistance
  • Crush-resistant aluminum couplings
  • Kink-free and rust-proof

Cons

  • Reduced flexibility

Durability in all sorts of conditions is the main benefit of the Bionic Steel Garden Hose. It’s made of interwoven stainless steel to resist the effects of such extreme weather as sub-zero temperatures and hot, sunny days. The hose also features rugged, crush-resistant aluminum couplings that can be trampled without damage.

This workhorse of a hose is available in 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths, and it’s easy to coil for storage. The stainless steel material is rust-proof and resistant to kinks, though this benefit may reduce flexibility.

Best commercial: Gilmour Pro Commercial Hose 3/4 Inch

Gilmour

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Commercial garden hose
  • Material: Rubber and vinyl
  • Length: 25, 50, 100 feet
  • Price: $65

Pros

  • Incredibly durable
  • Double reinforced
  • Powerful water pressure of 500 psi
  • Available in three lengths

Cons

  • Can become stiff
  • Must be hand-coiled

You’ll likely use a commercial-style hose for a permanent installation instead of casual daily use, but these hoses are built for toughness instead of flexibility. Often extremely stiff due to their double-walled manufacturing, these are typically not suited for roll-up hose keepers and, instead, must be coiled by hand.

Best budget: Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose

Melnor

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Soaker hose
  • Material: Vinyl
  • Length: 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths available
  • Price: $26

Pros

  • Water seeps through the entire length of the hose
  • Gentle water release won’t damage plants
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Plastic coupling is vulnerable to cracking and leaking

Safely hydrate delicate plants with the Melnor Soaker Hose. It’s capped at the end to create the necessary internal pressure for water to seep through its porous vinyl sides. Whereas powerful bursts of water from a standard hose can damage plants, this soaker option gently gives flowerbeds, vegetables, fruits, and other plants the water they need to thrive.

This lightweight garden hose is available in 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths, and when not in use, it lays completely flat, making it easy to fold and store. The only issue with this Melnor model is that its two couplings are plastic, which may be susceptible to cracking and leaking.

Things to consider when choosing the best garden hose

In addition to length and material, it’s important to understand the various types of garden hoses available. Keep all the following factors and features in mind while shopping for the best garden hose for your needs.

Type

The most common garden hoses include standard, soaker, sprinkler, flat, coiled, and expandable. Different garden hoses may be uniquely suited to specific outdoor duties.

Standard garden hoses run straight, which makes them vulnerable to kinking. They are round in shape and typically use metal or plastic couplings at each end to connect to a faucet or spray nozzle. Soaker garden hoses slowly release water into the garden, thanks to thousands of pinholes along the length of the hose. Sprinkler garden hoses may seem like soakers at first glance, but they have fewer holes, allowing them to function more like a horizontal sprinkler system. Flat garden hoses are intended to reduce kinking. They lay flat when empty but will take on a rounded shape when filled with water. The flat shape also makes them easier to roll and store. Coiled garden hoses have a design that allows them to rapidly return to a more compact, coiled shape after use. This makes it easier to prep the hose for storage. Expandable garden hoses combine the compact storage capabilities of a coiled option with the length and kink-free design of a flat model. It can expand up to three times its length when filled with water and, after use, shrink to its original size for compact storage. The expandable material won’t kink but, over time, may lose flexibility and become unable to expand fully.

Length

While the most common garden hose length is 50 feet, some hoses range from just 10 feet to 150 feet. Take some basic measurements from your outdoor faucet to the perimeter of your yard to determine the best length for the hose.

Keep in mind that the longer the hose, the less water pressure it will have due to friction and drag caused by water flowing through it. So balance the length with optimal water pressure and, if necessary, consider a hose with a larger diameter, which may help you achieve the desired length without losing substantial water pressure.

Material

Garden hoses are made from a range of different materials intended to allow for flexibility while protecting the hose from damage. Common materials include vinyl, latex, rubber, plastic, and various metals.

Vinyl is commonly used for the hose itself. It’s a lightweight, flexible material, though not as durable as other options. These products may also be labeled polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Latex is regularly used to make expandable hoses. It may have a polyester fabric exterior to improve durability and protect the hose from punctures. Rubber is a tough, durable, temperature-resistant material ideal for standard, coiled, and flat garden hoses. However, it is typically more expensive than vinyl. Plastic, commonly used for hose couplings, is more vulnerable to cracking and breaking than metal couplings. Metals like brass, aluminum, and stainless steel, are regularly used to make strong, reliable hose couplings. Stainless steel may also be used to form the exterior of heavy-duty hoses.

FAQs

Q: What is the standard garden hose size?

The standard garden hose sizes are 25, 50 or 100 feet in length—however, longer is not always better. Once you move into the 50-foot or even 100-foot garden hose length, it becomes frighteningly easy to turn the whole thing into a tangled mass of frustration, so keep this in mind if you do decide to purchase a permanent coil hose that’s longer than 25 feet.

Q: How long should a garden hose last?

The best garden hoses should last 10 years or more, but that’s dependent on how well you take care of your garden tools. For example, leaving a hose out in the sun or exposed to other weather elements can cause rapid deterioration and dramatically decrease your hose’s shelf life. If you fully drain your hose after use every time and coil it neatly—kinking can lead to tears and holes—before storing it in a safe place, you’ll get many more years out of it.

Q: What is the best kink-free garden hose?

The best kink-free garden hoses are, hands down, expandable hoses. The design makes it impossible to pinch the flow of water off while you’re using them. 

Q: Does garden hose length affect water pressure?

Yes, hose length does affect water pressure. In general, the longer the garden hose, the lower the water pressure, because as water passes through the interior of the hose, the contact causes resistance, reducing water pressure.

Q: What’s the best way to store an expandable hose?

To properly store an expandable hose, turn off the water, disconnect the hose, and allow it to shrink and dry fully. Then simply roll the hose up and place it in a garden box or a shed, to protect it from direct sunlight and, to a degree, extreme temperature changes. Some products come with a storage bag or hook to keep the hose neat when not in use.

Q: Do I need a garden hose nozzle for my hose?

A garden hose nozzle isn’t necessary when it comes to watering the lawn. Users can simply position a thumb partially over the hose opening to direct water over a broad area. However, a nozzle makes watering much easier to control, a benefit when it comes to fragile plants that could be damaged by anything more than a light misting.

Final thoughts on the best garden hoses

A good garden hose is a backyard essential. Even if you’re not much of a gardener, you’ll likely rely on it for a host of tasks, from washing patio furniture to filling the kids’ blow-up  Made with drinking water-safe materials, the Flexzilla Garden Hose is lightweight and available in multiple lengths so that you can choose the right size for your yard. If you haven’t the space to store a long hose, TheFitLife Expandable Garden Hose is an excellent and affordable option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden hoses for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-inverter-generators/ Mon, 29 Aug 2022 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=465835
Best inverter generators sliced header
Tony Ware

Get fuel-sipping performance that's portable.

The post The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best inverter generators sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Generac GP3500iO delivers solid power and unrivaled reliability. Generac GP3500iO
SEE IT

This is a solid all-around option for just about any home.

Most sustainable Jackery 2000 Pro Review Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro
SEE IT

Go solar if you want to save the environment and some money.

Best for home backup The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 will keep your lights on, quietly. Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series
SEE IT

Don’t worry about blackouts with this powerful-but-quiet model.

The issue with old-school generators is that they always operated at full bore, burning fuel and pumping out power at the highest possible capacity at all times, but inverter generators solve the problem. They offer a throttle that adjusts engine speed to meet actual electrical needs. This greatly improves fuel efficiency, reduces emissions, and decreases operating volume. Inverter generators also provide an extremely clean source of electricity that won’t harm sensitive devices with unpredictable and inconsistent power output. Whether you’ve got hurricane preparedness or just generally useful home appliances on your mind, the best inverter generators offer solid efficiency and runtime, rock-solid craftsmanship, and deliver the reliability you need when the lights go out.

How we picked the best inverter generators

As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of mobile power products for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. I’ve researched each of these selections extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers. We focus on generators that offer solid build quality, powerful performance, and reliability. A generator isn’t worth much if you can’t be sure it will work when you really need it.

The best inverter generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Our top-rated inverter generators represent a range of uses and budgets. Some are designed to provide full-fledged backup power for an entire home. Others are more portable for camping, worksites, or other smaller-scale intentions. In any case, below you’ll find something that fits your circumstances.

Best overall: Generac GP3500iO

Generac

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid performance, superior reliability, and outstanding versatility make the Generac GP3500iO a great all-around inverter generator.

Specs

  • Rated output: 3,000W
  • Peak output: 3,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
  • Weight: 74.3 lbs
  • Runtime: 11 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $839

Pros

  • Outstanding reliability
  • Solid output
  • Quiet
  • Relatively light

Cons

  • No wheels
  • Not enough output for a whole house

When it comes to building an inverter generator that delivers a lifespan worthy of the investment, Generac is as good as they come. The GP3500iO is built to last and will provide many years of reliable power.

Speaking of which, its power output is no slouch either. While its 3,000-3,500W operating range isn’t large enough to keep an entire house powered, it is more than enough to keep key appliances operating or to keep a campsite, RV, or off-grid worksite fully electrified. It’s also parallel-ready, so if you do need more power you can chain a second unit in to double the output. And at a surprisingly competitive price of just over $800, buying two isn’t all that much of a stretch.

It’s 50% quieter than most comparably sized generators, making it perfect for hauling out into nature. That being said, it’s a bit lighter than many similar models, it isn’t exactly featherweight and it doesn’t come with wheels, so some may find it somewhat challenging to wrangle in and out of the RV.

For all intents and purposes, however, we think the GP3500iO is the best inverter generator for the money thanks to its outstanding build quality, performance, and versatility.

Most sustainable: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for plenty of sustainable, portable power, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro delivers.

Specs

  • Rated output: 2,200W
  • Peak output: 4,400W
  • Gas tank capacity: N/A
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Runtime: 2,160 Watt hours
  • Price: $2,099

Pros

  • Super portable
  • Easy to use
  • Solid output
  • Super fast charging 

Cons

  • Not enough output for a whole house
  • Can only be charged in the sun

In its own offshoot class of inverter generators—that of the electric generators, meaning that it requires no gas at all—the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro offers substantial, sustainable, highly portable power. In fact, we like the 2000 Pro so much that we named it the top solar generator of the year.

With output ranging between 2,200-4,400 watts, the 2000 Pro delivers more power than virtually any other solar power generator on the market. While the runtime of its 2,160 Wh capacity depends entirely upon how much you ask of it, it’s capable of powering a full-sized fridge for over three hours, a portable electric cooler for 15 hours, a hand drill for 60 hours, and can charge small devices like a smartphone or laptop dozens and dozens of times. It also recharges fast, going from empty to 100% in under two hours when plugged into a wall outlet or in just 2.5 hours when plugged into its solar array.

The Jackery 2000 Pro is also super portable and super user-friendly, making it an ideal choice for camping or vanlifing. While it’s not powerful enough to keep an entire house juiced, it will serve as a solid source of backup power in the event that the lights go out, allowing you to keep a few key appliances and devices running.

Best for home backup: Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series

Briggs & Stratton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For emergency backup power at home, the Briggs & Stratton Q6500 delivers solid yet quiet performance.

Specs

  • Rated output: 5,000W
  • Peak output: 6,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
  • Weight: 128 lbs
  • Runtime: 14 hours at 25% load 
  • Price: $1,399

Pros

  • Solid output
  • Quiet
  • Easy to move and store
  • Power usage meter

Cons

  • Some buyers report customer service issues

When you need an inverter generator to power your entire home, power output is your foremost concern. The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series delivers more than enough output capacity and runtime to suit the average homeowner’s needs. What’s more, it’s also quieter than most other generators, making about as much noise as a dishwasher.

All of that makes it ideal for at-home emergency backup power use, but the deal is sweetened thanks to its highly mobile, highly storable design. Its telescoping handle sets flush into its square shape, making it easy to store in the garage. When it’s time to deploy, the inclusion of sturdy wheels makes it easy to roll into place.

Some users have reported issues when seeking customer service from the company, but their experience seems to be in the minority. Generally speaking, this is an outstanding generator to have on hand for when the lights go out.

Best for RVs: Honda EU2200i

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you need a tough, reliable source of power on the go, the Honda EU2200i is the best recreational inverter generator out there.

Specs

  • Rated output: 1,800W
  • Peak output: 2,200W
  • Gas tank capacity: .95 gallons
  • Weight: 47.4 lbs
  • Runtime: 8.1 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $1,199

Pros

  • Outstanding portability
  • Outstanding reliability
  • Solid power output
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Not powerful enough for a while house

Fun fact: Honda actually released the first inverter generator ever back in 1987. That being the case, it should come as no surprise that they’ve had plenty of time to perfect the art.

And perfect the Honda EU2200i is—at least for the purposes of RVing or camping. It weighs less than 50 pounds and can easily fit in most common car trunks, it’s as portable as generators come. At the same time, it offers a solid 1,800-2,200W of power, which is enough to run virtually any RV air conditioner with room left over to charge an array of devices.

What’s more, the EU2200i is one of the most solidly built generators on the market. With a typical lifespan of somewhere between 1000-2000 operating hours, a properly maintained EU2200i should last some 10-20 years.

Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP13000HX

DuroMax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its high output and solid construction, the DuroMax XP13000HX is as reliable as they come.

Specs

  • Rated output: 10,500W
  • Peak output: 13,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
  • Weight: 238 lbs
  • Runtime: 13 hours at 25 % rated load
  • Price: $1,499

Pros

  • Dual-fuel versatility
  • Massive power output
  • Rock-solid construction
  • Wheel kit included

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Very expensive

We like the DuroMax XP1300HX so much that we placed it at the top of our roundup of the best dual-fuel generators. Not only does it produce an enormous amount of power—more than enough to power an entire house—but its dual-fuel versatility allows it to run on both gas and propane. This makes it easier to find fuel sources in a pinch, and when fueled by propane means that it will be quieter and produce fewer emissions. It’s also as solidly built as any machine most humans will ever own.

That solid build does translate into weight—a hefty 238 pounds of it. The wheels do make it easy to move around wheel-barrow-style, but you definitely won’t be bringing it camping. As far as emergency home backup power goes, however, the XXP1300HX is outstanding.

Best budget: WEN 56203i Super Quiet

WEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WEN 56203i Super Quiet offers substantial quality at a low price.

Specs

  • Rated output: 1,700W
  • Peak output: 2,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 1 gallon
  • Weight: 38 lbs
  • Runtime: 10.8 25% rated load
  • Price: $429

Pros

  • Rock-bottom price
  • Quiet
  • Great runtime
  • Super portable

Cons

  • Relatively low power output

At $340, the WEN 56203i Super Quiet is about as budget-friendly as generators get. What makes it stand out is that it offers significantly better performance than every other generator in its class.

Capable of churning out a steady 1,700-2,000W, this generator isn’t going to power your house but it will serve as a decent source of emergency power in a pinch, and it serves as a great camping option. Its campability is accentuated by its quiet performance and outstanding portability. It also sips fuel efficiently, delivering a great runtime for its fuel capacity.

What to consider when buying inverter generators

There are a lot of inverter generators out there, but they tend to come with lofty price tags. It requires hardware to actually invert the current, which allows it to avoid voltage spikes that could harm devices plugged into it. Many subpar brands simply don’t offer the build quality that you would expect from such a high-value piece of equipment, while others fall short of delivering the performance you need for reliable power. To make a smart buy, here are a few important considerations to keep in mind so that you can be sure of getting the best inverter generator for the money:

Power output

If a generator doesn’t produce enough power to meet your needs, what good is it? Generators are rated by the number of watts they can produce in any given moment, which is often accompanied by a peak performance rating that represents the maximum power they can deliver in short bursts. To determine how much juice you need, add up the operating wattage for all the devices and appliances you expect to power, then find a generator that delivers accordingly. The average 5000-7500W generator, for example, will generally provide enough power for most of the key items in your home, including the fridge, TV, lighting, well pump, and a smattering of small devices.

Runtime

If you expect to be using your inverter generator for long periods at a time—if you live somewhere with frequent or prolonged power outages, for example, or if you’ll be needing off-grid power all day long—you don’t want to be refueling it again and again. Runtimes are determined by how large a generator’s fuel tank is combined with its operating efficiency. Most inverter generators have runtimes of roughly 5-6 hours, though a few highly efficient models can stretch that to nearly a full day.

Fuel type

While the majority of inverter generators run on gasoline, many also run on propane or natural gas, and a few can even be powered by the sun. Gas generators offers the most power output but it’s also the loudest and causes the most emissions. Propane and natural gas shave off a bit of the output in favor of quieter, cleaner operations. Solar generators are emission-free and just shy of silent, but they can only be recharged if the sun is out (or a wall/car socket is handy).

Size and weight

Inverter generators come in a variety of sizes and weights, resulting in varying degrees of portability. Some are large and essentially immobile, which means they’re designed to be set in place and forgotten about until the need arises. Others are more portable thanks to reduced size, weight, or the addition of handles and wheels.

Reliability

A generator doesn’t do much good if it breaks down when you need it. Reliable craftsmanship is essential, but it can be difficult to determine at a glance or by reading a spec sheet. We’ve verified the reliability of our picks via reviews from owners who have used specific models over time.

FAQs

Q: What is best, an inverter or a generator?

An inverter is a component in an inverter generator that converts AC power into DC power and then “inverts” it back into cleaner AC power. That might sound technical but the important thing is that it results in power that is “safer” for sensitive devices like laptops or smartphones, and it throttles the engine to match your actual power demands, which improves a generator’s efficiency.

Q: What is the highest-watt inverter generator?

While industrial-grade inverter generators can get quite large, the highest wattage you’ll find at the consumer level is about 15,000-17,500. That’s wildly unnecessary for the typical user. The largest generator we’ve suggested is the DuroMax XP13000HX, which can produce up to 13,000 watts—more than enough for the average home.

Q: What is the most reliable inverter generator?

All of the generators we’ve recommended above offer outstanding reliability. In terms of lifespan, most will last upwards of 10 years with proper maintenance.

Q: Is an inverter generator good for home use?

Absolutely. The “clean” power produced by an inverter generator ensures that all your electronics can operate safely. As long as you buy a model that offers the appropriate level of power for your needs, it is perfectly suited for the task.

Q: How big of an inverter generator do I need?

That depends on how you intend to use it. To power the majority of your home—including a fridge, lights, TV, and a smattering of other small appliances and devices—you’ll want at least 4,000W. If you’ll be camping and powering an RV, shoot for at least 1,800 watts as most RV air conditions require around 1,500W and you’ll want a little leftover for lights and charging your phone.

Final thoughts on the best inverter generators

If you live in an area where power cuts are frequent, an inverter generator will be a game-changer. It will ensure that you have plenty of reliable power while everyone else on the block sits in the dark. And if you’re looking to power an RV, an inverter generator will keep you living in comfort while off the grid. While the best inverter generators are no small investment, one will pay for itself in the long run in terms of comfort and peace of mind.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best inverter generators for adventures and emergencies appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best fire pit tables in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fire-pit-tables/ Tue, 12 Mar 2024 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606189
The best fire pit tables of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Warm up your backyard get-togethers with the best fire pit tables, which are aesthetically pleasing and highly functional.

The post The best fire pit tables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best fire pit tables of 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Walsunny Fire Pits 45 inch Gas Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. Walsunny Fire Pits 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

A reasonable price, sharp look, and inclusion of a windscreen make this the best choice.

Best splurge EAST OAK 57 Inch Gas Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. EAST OAK 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

Get the most power and greatest heat coverage.

Best value EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table on a plain white background. EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

A budget-friendly, more portable pick when you’re short on space.

If backyard aesthetics and extending how long you can use your outdoor space into late fall and early spring evenings are important to you, a fire pit table is an ideal solution. These gas-powered fire pits require little maintenance, are pleasing to the eye, and generate a lot of heat. What separates them from a traditional fire pit is that they have an edge around their rim—which you can use to store a drink, the makings of s’mores, etc.—and can complement your patio furniture and more aesthetically pleasing outdoor storage. The best part is that you can operate them without knowing how to start a fire and can control their intensity with the twist of a knob. The best fire pit tables will become the focal point of your patio or backyard conversation pit and provide utility for years to come.

The best fire pit tables: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Walsunny 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table

Walsunny

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22 x 45 x 24.5 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 88 pounds
  • BTU: 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units)

Pros

  • Long width
  • Includes glass windshield
  • Easy lift lid

Cons

  • Heavy

Walsunny’s 45-inch Gas Fire Pit Table is an excellent choice for anyone looking to spruce up their backyard this year. It’s long, which means more people can fit around it than a typical fire pit, and the inclusion of a glass windshield means you won’t have to worry about flames licking the food and drinks you put around its edges. That shield also ensures you’ll get a consistent flame rather than one that shrinks whenever there’s a breeze.

This gas-powered fire table has a hidden door that keeps its propane tank out of people’s sight line, and its easy lift cover makes setting it up easier. A cover fits flush on top of the fire table’s pit, and you can lift it up its handle with one hand. This design means you can also use the fire pit table as a regular table while the sun is out. Walsunny says its fire pit table is compatible with a 20-pound tank, which should last you several hours-long sessions before needing to be replaced. The only factor you should consider when getting this fire pit table is its 88-pound weight, which means you’ll want to figure out where to keep it semi-permanently before it arrives. A portable fire pit this is not. If its heft isn’t an issue, there’s no reason to pass up on this fire pit table, given its performance, smart design, and reasonable price.

Best splurge: EAST OAK 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 57 x 21.1 x 25.6 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 50.5 pounds
  • BTU: 60,000 BTU

Pros

  • Long width
  • High maximum heat
  • Most space around the rim

Cons

  • Price
  • Windguard not included

EAST OAK’s 57 57-inch Gas Fire Pit Table may be pricy, but it’s also the most powerful and longest model we recommend. This means it can provide the most heat to the most people, with an even wider lip around the rim for food and drinks. It also shares some of our favorite design elements with the best overall pick. The fire pit table’s cover sits flush with its body, which means it can be used as a table when the flames aren’t ignited. A hidden door keeps the propane tank out of sight, and the table’s control knob is color-coordinated with its base, which is aesthetically pleasing. EAST OAK says its fire pit table is compatible with 20-pound propane tanks.

If power is what you’re after, EAST OAK’s fire pit table has nearly 20% more BTU than our other recommendations. Its aluminum frame can handle the heat without an issue. Our only complaint with this fire pit table is that it doesn’t come with a windshield, which is unfortunate given its high price. If you’d like this fire pit to be slightly narrower, EAST OAK just released a new model to fit your needs.

Best value: EAST OAK 28 Propane Fire Pit Table

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28 x 28 x 25 inches (Depth x Width x Height)
  • Weight: 56
  • BTU: 50,000 BTU

Pros

  • Compact size
  • Competitive BTU with larger models
  • Price

Cons

  • Heats a smaller area

If your backyard is tiny, you can still get a fire pit table that can suit your space. This square-shaped model from EAST OAK may not be able to heat as large of an area as our wider recommendations, but it’s still powerful enough to keep three people or so very toasty. Despite its smaller size, EAST OAK crammed all the essential features, from a powerful heating system to a hidden door that keeps your propane tank out of sight. The company says you can use this fire pit table with a 20-pound propane tank, which is on par with the other models we recommend.

EAST OAK didn’t include a windshield with this fire pit table, but that’s reasonable given its sub-$200 price. We’re pleased that the company designed the table with an all-aluminum frame, which will handle exposure to heat for extended periods. If you need a durable, relatively portable fire pit table for your backyard and are on a budget, this is the one to get.

Here are other fire pit tables that can heat up gatherings:

FAQs

Q: Is glass or rock better for a fire pit?

There’s no functional difference between rock and glass fire pits; it all depends on your aesthetic preference.

Q: Do fire pit tables give off much heat?

Yes. A fire pit table will give off roughly as much heat as a similarly sized fire pit as they work the same way.

Q: What is the best material to burn in a fire pit?

Fire pit tables run on propane, so you won’t need to add more fuel. However, you must ensure the propane tank attached to the table is sufficiently filled. (We’re sure that, like us, you also have a propane grill, so keep multiple tanks on hand at any time.)

Q: Is a round or square fire pit table better?

This comes down to whichever shape suits your preferences. Round and square tables work similarly if their power level is the same.

Q: How much does a fire pit table cost?

This depends on its size and BTU output. Our recommendations cost between $169 and $539.

Final thoughts on the best fire pit tables

A fire pit table will add a significant ambiance to your outdoor space while serving several vital functions. When it’s not on, using the table while hosting will give you ample space for a multicourse meal with drinks. Once the meal ends, you can ignite the fire pit to provide illumination and heat deep into the night. The benefit of using a fire pit table over a typical fire pit is that you don’t have to worry about waiting for it to fully extinguish or cleaning out an ash pan at the end of the night (though you should always know where your fire extinguisher is, just in case). You also don’t have to worry about keeping wood dry when it rains, which can be a hassle in many parts of the country. A fire pit table offers all the benefits of a fire pit in a simpler-to-use, nicer-to-look-at package.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fire pit tables in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/blink-outdoor-security-cameras-amazon-deal/ Tue, 12 Mar 2024 17:55:30 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=606254
A Blink outdoor camera on a fence
Blink

This deal will be gone in the blink of an eye if you wait.

The post Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Blink outdoor camera on a fence
Blink

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The tax return has hit your bank account, you just got a merit increase from your job, and maybe you even have some leftover cash from your bonus. We currently live in Trying Times, and the smart adult thing to do is put some of that cash away—emphasis on some. But what will you do with some of your sums? We recommend an outdoor security system from Blink that’s currently 50% off. You’ll save money, protect your home, and catch porch pirates in the act. Wins all around, if you ask us.

Blink

SEE IT

These wire-free smart security cameras have a two-year battery life and can be controlled via the Blink app. Each camera produces 1080p live video, crisp-two-way audio, and even infrared night vision for keeping an eye on this when the sun sets. A Blink subscription plan lets you access person detection and cloud storage. The kit comes with five Outdoor 4 cameras, a Sync 2 Module, 10 AA batteries, five mounting kits, one USB cable, and one power adapter.

If you only want one Blink camera, the one-camera system is 35% off, down to $64.99 from $99.99.

More security camera deals:

The post Save 50% on a wireless outdoor security system from Blink at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best folding electric bikes for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-folding-electric-bikes/ Fri, 08 Mar 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=605880
The best folding electric bikes in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

When it comes to easily transportable e-bikes, you gotta know when to hold ’em, know when to fold ’em, know when to ride away, and when the battery’s done.

The post The best folding electric bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best folding electric bikes in 2024 on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Lectric's XP on a plain white background. Lectric XP 3.0
SEE IT

Lectric’s XP 3.0 is light, fast, and comes with extras like integrated lights, front and rear fenders, and a large rear rack.

Best trike Llectric XP Trike Lectric XP Trike
SEE IT

Lectric’s XP Trike pulls ahead of similar electric bikes by employing five levels of pedal assist and a low standover height.

Best budget Outdoor Gear photo Ride1Up Portola
SEE IT

Ride1UP impresses with a sub-$1,000 folding electric bike that has a 750-watt motor, 40-mile range, hydraulic brakes, and a 28 mph top speed.

All sorts of interesting one- and two-wheeled vehicles crisscross the streets of my city, including an increasing number of increasingly affordable, portable transport. Spandex-clad cyclists take advantage of protected lanes, electric scooters fly over sidewalks (and anywhere), and occasionally, an odd unicyclist or one-wheeler will break up the predictability. I particularly like to watch foldable e-bike riders who go from trail to train, transforming their personal transit into a cube to carry through a crowd. This now-you-see-it now-you-don’t collapsible electric bikes offer power assistance for commuting or errands without taking up valuable real estate in an apartment or townhouse. These flexible options also can often fit into an SUV or RV without purchasing a heavy-duty and often expensive rack. We’ve rounded up the most reliable options from the best folding electric bikes to match every riding style and need.

How we selected the best folding electric bikes

I’m still hunting for my spirit bike, like the one in Pee-wee’s Big Adventure. In the meantime, I’ve owned and tested many different bikes—electric and not, folding and not—on my commute. I’ve combined this experience with that of the PopSci team and conducted extensive research into expert and customer reviews to select the models on this list. 

The best folding electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

An electric folding bike must balance having enough oomph to make it to work and back and being easier to store and transport than a full-sized e-bike. Collapsible models tend to have shorter wheelbases, lower standover heights, and an upright riding position so you can see clearly in traffic or on crowded paths. Wheels are usually 16 to 20 inches in diameter, which results in feeling more of the bumps and cracks of the road. Skinny tires will be faster rolling and lighter, but high volume, wider tires can help absorb the road chatter. In general, folding electric bikes for adults tend to be rougher than other cycles.

If you ride other bikes a lot, folding bikes takes some getting used to. Petite riders may feel more in control over the more diminutive stature, while taller riders may feel like a clown on a minibike. The sharper turning radius is ultimately a win. Still, it can feel squirrely at first if you’re used to broader, more stable handlebars, and sometimes the gearing can make it feel like you’re pedaling furiously but getting nowhere. Get a few miles under your belt, however, and you’ll find a new rhythm. 

To help you find the right foldable e-bike, prioritize which features are must-haves by thinking about where you want to ride it, how far you’d like to go, what else you might want to carry, and how small the bike needs to be for storage. With that knowledge, you’re ready to find your best folding e-bike from our top picks. 

Best overall: Lectric XP 3.0

Lectric

SEE IT

Specs

  • Unfolded bike: 66 inches long by 25 inches wide by 47 inches tall
  • Folded bike: 37 inches by 18 inches wide by 28 inches tall
  • Motor: 500W hub motor with 55Nm of torque
  • Battery: 672Wh lithium-ion
  • Riding range: Up to 45 miles using pedal assist or up to 20 using throttle only
  • Class: 2
  • Top speed: 20 mph
  • Bike weight: 64 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 330 pounds

Pros

  • Front oil suspension fork
  • Rear rack that can hold up to 150 pounds
  • Five levels of pedal assist plus throttle
  • Front and rear hydraulic brakes
  • Integrated headlights and rear lights
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Removable battery
  • External charging port
  • Slime-lined tires to prevent flats
  • Multiple mounting points for additional accessories
  • 1-year warranty

Cons

  • Long-range battery available for extra
  • Well-organized, but external wires and cords
  • Nothing to secure the bike when folded

Lectric is one of the OGs of foldable electric bikes, so much so that riding this around town nearly always gets me a shout or recognition from another Lectric rider. They’ll chat with me at a stop or ride alongside me for a bit, and I can honestly say it’s never happened to me on another brand of e-bike. The Lectric XP 3.0 finetunes what it’s learned from previous models for an affordable and fun ride with five pedal assist levels and a throttle. Lectric added more juice to the 500W motor, which can peak at 1,000W and kick out 55Nm of torque. The tires are fat-tire light—20 by 3 inches—which makes for a more cushioned ride with the front suspension fork. The improved gearing means less furious pedaling than other models to get up to top speeds. Lectric lists the bike at $1,300, but you can often find it on sale—and yet, it still has hydraulic brakes, which are a rarity at this price point. 

The XP 3.0 comes stock with many nice commuter extras, like integrated lights, front and rear fenders, and a monster rear rack that can hold up to 150 pounds. Lectric offers a ton of accessories, including a passenger seat for light riders (e.g., kids). 

For most people, the Lectric will meet their folding e-bike needs, but it’s not perfect. Lectric, more than many brands, makes you well aware of cords. While the wiring up front is well-organized, nothing is internally threaded. It folds at two points—at mid-frame and the handlebars—and it frankly takes some practice to align pedals, handlebars, and wheels just right. You’ll also need a bungee (or something) to keep everything nice and tight if you want to move the bike while folded. But it does get small enough to go into a typical car trunk (not a Miata, let’s not get crazy). It is, however, a heavy 64 pounds unless you scrap the battery.

Best cargo: Tern Vektron S10

Tern

SEE IT

Specs

  • Folded bike: 33.7 inches long by 15.7 inches wide by 26.6 inches tall
  • Motor: 250W Bosch Performance Drive Unit with 65Nm torque
  • Battery: 400Wh Bosch PowerPack 
  • Riding range: Up to 63 miles 
  • Class: 1
  • Top speed: 20 mph
  • Bike weight: 48.6 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 275.6 pounds

Pros

  • Five levels of pedal assist with shift optimization
  • Magura MT4 hydraulic disc brakes
  • 10-speed Shimano Deore drive train
  • Integrated headlights and rear lights
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Atlas V Rack on the rear that holds up to 60 pounds and accepts Thule Yepp Maxi and Dash RM child seats without adapters
  • Chain guard stay
  • Grip pad under saddle to use as a handle for shoulder carrying
  • Removable battery

Cons

  • Single-side kickstand
  • Overall capacity weight is low for the format

The Tern Vektron S10 is a foldable e-bike for adults who aim to use it for most of their transportation needs, including shuttling kids around and hauling groceries. It’s also a folding bike that feels nearly as stiff as a non-folding model, thanks to the advanced welding techniques, gussets for the OCL+ frame joint, and custom forks. A telescoping seat post allows the frame to fit riders from 4’10” to 6’5”. 

Tern has a long history of making cargo bicycles that handle being loaded down well, and the Vektron S10 is no exception. The robust Atlas V Rack can hold up to 60 pounds, whether that’s groceries in some of Tern’s accessories or a child seat made by Thule or Dash. A Bosch Performance Drive Unit and 400Wh Bosch PowerPack, a pair renowned for high performance and quiet operation, power this cargo hauler. Other name-brand parts, like a 10-speed Shimano drivetrain and Magura hydraulic brakes, help account for the price tag of about $3,300. Make no mistake: The Vektron S10 expects to replace a car. Practically speaking, the overall carrying capacity for the bike is a little low at 275 pounds.

Despite being a cargo bike, the Vektron is a portable electric bike when you drop the seat post, fold the mid-point in the frame, and then the handlebars. At 50 pounds, it’s not the lightest but not the heaviest. Most Terns also have another advantage for storage: They can be tipped on the rack end to be stored vertically. 

Best splurge: Gocycle G4i

Gocycle

SEE IT

Specs

  • Folded bike: 32.7 inches by 14.6 inches wide by 29.5 inches tall with removable pedal detached
  • Motor: Gocycle proprietary 500W front hub motor
  • Battery: 375Wh lithium-ion
  • Riding range: Up to 50 miles 
  • Class: 2
  • Top speed: 20 mph
  • Bike weight: 37.7 pounds
  • Maximum rider weight: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Four pedal assist modes, can be customized
  • Daytime running lights
  • GocycleConnect App
  • Hydraulic disc brakes
  • Integrated front and rear lights
  • Front and rear fenders
  • Carbon fiber single-sided front fork
  • USB charger
  • Removable battery
  • Very fast fold

Cons

  • Many proprietary parts that may be hard to service or replace
  • MotoGP-inspired tires can be prone to flats

The Gocycle G4i looks a bit like the Tron Light Cycle if it were designed for a commuter and not battling on The Grid. This high-end model will set you back about $5,000 for a wide array of cutting-edge technologies squeezed into one of the lightest folding electric bikes on the market. Gocycle’s design is led by Richard Thorpe, a man so obsessed with creating “the perfect e-bike” that he left his job at McLaren Cars armed with experience developing lightweight components.

The G4i weighs just shy of 38 pounds thanks to a frame made of an aluminum alloy frame with a carbon fiber mid-drive and a proprietary rear suspension. The forks that hold the wheels in place are also carbon fiber and notably single-sided to save weight and make for a fast folding electric bike. It rests on the wheels when folded, which you can still use to roll it while tilting it back a little.

That’s the thing about Gocycles: They feel designed with the user in mind. The bike feels agile and accelerates quickly thanks to a proprietary 500W G4drive engine paired with predictive electronic gear shifting and three customizable pedal assist levels. The drive train (again, proprietary) is enclosed to keep work pants clean from riding or carrying it into an office or apartment after commuting. And—no surprise—the hydraulic brakes are also bespoke to Gocycle. The proprietary parts let Gocycle flex its innovative muscles but can lead to expensive or time-consuming repairs should something go wrong. 

The frame is just one size, but other parts move to adjust to a rider. One thing that’s noticeably missing is a screen on the handlebars. Instead, there’s a light-based display that takes some getting used to and a wide “daytime running light” that stretches from grip to grip. For metrics and customized driving modes, riders must use the GocycleConnect App and add a phone holder. 

Best trike: Lectric XP Trike

Lectric

SEE IT

Specs

  • Unfolded bike: 63.5 inches long by 30.5 inches wide by 43 inches tall
  • Folded bike: 38.5 inches by 30.5 inches wide by 30 inches tall
  • Motor: 500W rear hub motor on the differential axle, 65Nm or torque
  • Battery: 672Wh lithium-ion
  • Riding range: Up to 60 miles using pedal assist or up to 55 using throttle only
  • Class: 2
  • Top speed: 14 mph
  • Bike weight: 69.5 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 415 pounds

Pros

  • Three wheels expand the potential rider base
  • Differential axle for smooth turning
  • Five levels of pedal assist plus throttle
  • Front and rear hydraulic brakes
  • Two parking brakes
  • Integrated headlights, rear lights, and brake lights
  • Front and rear fenders
  • A ton of additional accessories
  • Removable battery
  • External charging port
  • 1-year warranty

Cons

  • Three wheels mean wider turning radius
  • Added accessories usually need to be removed before folding
  • Ships with beginner mode, which limits the speed

The Lectric XP Trike packs a ton of higher-end features into an electric tricycle that makes cycling more accessible. With a suggested retail of about $1,500, this Class 2 trike offers five levels of pedal assist and has a throttle to help with starts or offer breaks from pedaling. Lectric ships the trike in a beginner mode that slows acceleration and limits the top speed to 5 mph. This mode prevents people who haven’t been riding electric vehicles from jumping forward or going faster than they’re ready. Higher speeds can be unlocked, but this trike isn’t a speed demon. Top speed is 14 mph.

Let’s talk about the tricycle format. First, it has an incredibly low standover height of less than 14 inches, making it super easy to hop on and off. Lectric packed a 500W engine into the rear differential axle, which lets each rear wheel turn independently for smoother turning and enough torque to chug up big hills. All trikes can tip, though; expect to take turns slower and leave more room for stopping until you get used to the handling. The XP Trike also boasts hydraulic front and rear bikes, a surprisingly high-end feature for the price point.

And yes, this bad boy folds. However, it will take a few minutes and removing most additional accessories. Considering that this is a trike, the 69.5 pounds is light for the form. Removing the battery will shave about seven pounds off. Folded up, the trike can fit in the back of minivans or SUVs, though smaller hatchbacks may need some extra finagling. The XP Trike accommodates riders from 4’10” to 6’4” that weigh up to 330 pounds. Plus, the bike can still haul another 85 pounds of cargo. Lectric also offers a ton of add-ons, like a seat with back support, suspension seat stems, and baskets. 

Best budget: Ride1Up Portola

Ride1Up

SEE IT

Specs

  • Unfolded bike: 66.2 inches long by 19 inches wide by 44.4 inches tall 
  • Folded bike: 33 inches long by 19 inches wide by 29.5 inches tall
  • Motor: 750W geared hub motor with 65Nm torque
  • Battery: 500Wh 
  • Riding range: Up to 40 miles 
  • Class: Switchable to 1, 2 or 3
  • Top speed: 28 mph
  • Bike weight: 59 pounds
  • Carrying capacity: 300 pounds

Pros

  • Five pedal assist modes plus throttle
  • Front suspension fork
  • Dual-piston hydraulic brakes
  • Front and back fenders
  • Rear rack holds up to 130 pounds
  • Integrated front and rear bikes
  • Folding pedals
  • Chainguard stay
  • Short velcro strap to hold the bike together when folded
  • 1-year warranty

Cons

  • Long-range battery available for extra
  • Well-organized, but external wires and cords
  • Taller riders may find leg extension lacking

The Ride1Up Portola has a big ol’ motor—750W, the largest of this roundup. It also features a front suspension fork, 8-speed drivetrain, hydraulic brakes, and a muscular welded rear rack that can hold up to 130 pounds. These details are surprising to find on a folding e-bike and downright shocking to find on one that costs less than a grand.

The Portola offers a lot to like, especially at the price point. Sturdy 20-inch by 3-inch tires and a front suspension fork work together to keep the rider relatively comfortable. There’s only one frame size, which Ride1Up calls “one size fits most,” or in this case, means riders from 4’10” to 6’4”—though taller riders or long-legged ones note they’d like a little more extension when they pedal. 

The Portola initially starts with a 10.4Ah battery, but an upgrade to 13.4Ah is only $100 more. With five pedal-assist levels and a throttle, you might want the extra juice. The range is up to 40—or 45 with the larger battery. The e-bike also can be switched between Class 1, 2, or 3, depending on whether you want to limit or unleash a potential top speed of 28 mph. And here’s one very simple but very nice touch that many folding bike makers overlook: The Portola has a small velcro strap to secure the bike when it’s folded. It takes some fussing to get the wheels and handlebars just right, but folding bike owners frequently add their own bungees or straps because nothing was included. 

What to consider when searching for the best folding electric bikes

Usually, a search for an e-bike begins with sticker shock, mainly if you don’t ride other bicycles. You can find budget electric bikes under $1,000, though models quickly get into the multiple thousands. Expect to find more powerful motors with more torque, larger batteries, and frames made of higher-quality, often lighter-weight materials as the price climbs. They’re like cars: You can find a reasonably priced, reliable model or spend serious bucks on high-end components, luxury features, and eye-grabbing designs. While the options may be daunting, there is a model out there to suit your tastes and budget, whether you’re looking for the best electric commuter bike or the best fat tire electric bike

It’s also worth checking whether your state offers tax credits or rebates for e-bikes to encourage adoption.

Classes

E-bikes occupy a weird space in transportation between traditional, aka “acoustic,” bicycles and mopeds. For the most part, electric bicycle owners need to wear helmets, but they don’t need special licenses, insurance, or vehicle registration. Most states recognize three different e-bike classes to help determine the literal rules of the road. Here’s the quick version: 

  • Class 1: a pedal-assist system motor that stops assistance at 20 mph.
  • Class 2: a throttle motor that stops assistance at 20 mph.
  • Class 3: a pedal-assist system motor that stops assistance at 28 mph. 
  • Some manufacturers blend these classes or ship a Class 1 that can be turned into a Class 3 with some tinkering.

Look into your state’s rules or check this guide for where and how you can operate your class e-bike. Sometimes, trails or specific parks prohibit certain bike classes. Around my city, various counties and neighborhoods put signs along popular bike paths to encourage slow speeds and trail sharing.

Motors

A great e-bike makes riding feel effortless, even when climbing a steep hill. Motors help riders go farther and faster through a pedal-assist system (PAS) or a throttle. A PAS e-bike can supply different levels of support using controls on the handlebars and sensors that detect how fast or hard you’re pedaling. Throttle systems deliver a quick burst of power without pedaling, more akin to a scooter or moped. Some bikes have both features.

But what makes for a good motor? Look for a combination of watts and torque. Watts indicate the motor output, while torque is the acceleration or climbing force. Higher watts and higher torque usually equal higher performance, but some manufacturers have unique tuning that eek more torque out of lower output motors. Whether you need that is another matter. Flat commutes on paved surfaces don’t need high torque. Very fit riders might not need the power. Consider your fitness, the terrain of most rides, and how long those rides will be. 

Riding range and battery life

The good news about an e-bike with a dead battery is that you can pedal. Still, most people don’t want to run out of battery. Published ranges are suggestions based on optimal riding conditions. How long the battery lasts relies on dozens of factors: rider and cargo weight, whether the route has hills, and how much assistance the motor provides. More help—or a lot of throttling—drains the battery faster. Commutes are easy to plan for; the distance doesn’t change. Freeform or unplanned rides can be dicier. A good rule of thumb is to plan trips well under the top end of the published riding range and charge the battery for every ride. 

Some models have removable batteries that allow for swapping a dead one out for another or extended-capacity versions to lengthen ride time. Generally, bigger batteries are heavier but provide greater peace of mind.

FAQs

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

E-bikes—folding or not—can be a more earth-friendly way of handling errands and regular commutes than driving a gas-powered car. That said, e-bikes typically cost more than their unpowered counterparts (though those can get quite premium, as well). E-bikes also need to be recharged, so be sure you have a space with a convenient charging port or find a model with a removable battery. Eventually, batteries will degrade and need to be replaced. Like all bikes, they will need regular maintenance. While any bike shop can service many models, some have proprietary parts that may be hard to get. 

An electric folding bike has a few additional things to consider. All moving parts wear with use and repetition, including the folding frame of a collapsible electric bike and the bolts or clips that secure it. 

Q: Are folding electric bikes good for long distances?

Check the model’s published range and know that the top-line number may be purely aspirational. How long a battery lasts depends on your weight, your cargo’s weight, the assist level being used, and the terrain. If you’re riding on flat land with no pedal assistance, that battery will last a good long while. However, using the highest assist level while going exclusively uphill into a headwind … well, expect the lowest end of that published range. 

People used to traditional or full-sized bikes may find riding folding models inherently less comfortable. Foldable models often have upright riding positions and some comfort features, but the smaller wheels and general lack of suspension mean you feel every crack, root, and bump. 

Q: How heavy are folding electric bikes?

We’ve seen electric bikes weigh anywhere from just shy of 30 pounds to 90 pounds. Folding e-bikes are in the same ballpark, though you’ll find fewer of those 90-pounders. Sixty pounds is 60 pounds, but even unfolded, a folding e-bike’s smaller wheels and shorter wheelbase are easier to maneuver than most traditional bicycles or e-bikes. Folded, you don’t have to deal with balancing the weight or handlebars turning inconveniently. 

Final thoughts on the best folding electric bikes

Folding electric bikes are a funny sort of transportation. They’re purpose-built to be easy to transport or store, which may mean some compromises in riding comfort. However, this category of bikes has come a long way, incorporating fatter tires, more suspension systems, and hydraulic brakes for superior stopping power and more options than ever before. Find the model that fits—literally—into your apartment, car, or commute, and enjoy the ride. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best folding electric bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best earbuds in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-earbuds/ Sat, 10 Jul 2021 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=378407
Best earbuds sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

Sweet earbuds to pair with jogs, joy rides, joysticks, joking with coworkers, just music, and more.

The post The best earbuds in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best earbuds sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AirPods Pro 2 in my hand in Times Square Apple AirPods Pro 2
SEE IT

Apple’s AirPods Pro 2 offer the best balance of sound, battery life, comfort, and extra features.

Best noise cancellation A pesron holding a pair Bose QuietComfort Ultimate against a plain wall. Bose QuietComfort Ultra
SEE IT

The Bose QuietComfort Ultras will become the most indispensable gadget for your plane trips or commute.

Best budget EarFun Air Pro 3 earbuds with charging case in my hand in front of plants EarFun Air Pro 3
SEE IT

EarFun’s Air Pro 3 earbuds offer better sound than we’d expect from a pair that cost well under $100.

If you’re wondering just how broad the personal audio market has become, consider the vast world of earbuds—ranging from less than $25 to well over $1,000. While wired earbuds still exist, True Wireless (TWS) earbuds have become the most popular option, thanks to improvements in micro-sized receivers that can deliver huge sound. Bluetooth technology has evolved to the point it can all but guarantee seamless connections, while an array of microphones and sensors help keep music and conversations clear. That means TWS earbuds are no longer a luxury item made by a select few companies. Yet there are still times when a wire is the way to go. Whether you’re an audiophile or a devout Apple enthusiast in the market for sports or gaming earbuds, we’ve compiled what you need to know to find the best earbuds that’ll match your needs.

How we chose the best earbuds

There are nearly infinite earbuds available—models of all shapes, sizes, and price points—so we relied on hands ears-on testing to determine the best ones currently available. Our tests helped us determine the best earbuds for several specific use cases, like gaming or podcast listening, and let us single out pairs that performed best when using key features like active noise cancellation. Audio quality was paramount when making our selections, so each earbud you see below passes our sound quality tests regardless of how much money you spend.

The most discerning listeners will be able to pick up the subtle improvements on more premium pairs, but each set of earbuds will sound great if you open up a streaming app, find the music you’re looking for, and hit play. Our focus has mostly been on TWS types, which have become the dominant style in recent years, popularized in the mainstream by Apple’s AirPods. The convenience of these earbuds is undeniable, and current-generation pairs from well-known audio companies and newcomers alike offer incredible sound for their size. But we threw in some other options, too. There’s no shortage of new and exciting earbuds, but these are the best ones you can get today.

The best earbuds: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re heading out for a trail run, on an open-world quest, or need to get locked in a work groove, you can get a pair of earbuds to suit your needs. And you can find them below, where we’ve collected some of the best options for any purpose and across every price point.

Best overall: Apple AirPods Pro 2

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Stemmed TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 6 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IP54
  • Microphones: Yes (3)

Pros

  • Well-balanced sound
  • Solid battery life
  • Compatible with Spatial Audio
  • Updated case with “Find My” support plus wireless and USB-C charging

Cons

  • Best technical features only work when connected to Apple devices

Apple’s second-generation AirPods Pro—colloquially known as AirPods Pro 2—are the best earbuds you can get in 2024; there, we said it. The latest version of Apple’s true wireless earbuds feature appreciable improvements in audio quality, active noise-cancelling performance, Spatial Audio support, and they come in an updated case with genuinely useful features. In short, it’s the total package, and it should be the default choice for many, especially if you use Apple devices.

In our first impressions, and continued tests conducted over several months of frequent use, the AirPods Pro (2nd generation) consistently impressed. The earbuds don’t have a totally flat frequency response, but Apple’s acoustic architecture and sonic sculpting—a little extra boost to the bottom end and slightly raised mids—doesn’t make songs sound unnatural or artificial. Music with a lot of low-end sounds extra full without experiencing bass distortion, while live music, pop, rock, and jazz benefit from Apple’s tweaks. We never found ourselves wanting to muck around with a digital multiband EQ. Apple did the research to determine what would sound good to most people, and it mostly stuck the landing—aided by adaptive signal processing that takes into account your unique ear shape and environment. (Plus, if you have an Apple Vision Pro for spatial computing, the latest AirPods with USB‑C can take advantage of the H2 chip in both devices to deliver Lossless Audio with ultra-low latency.)

The original AirPods Pro earbuds were lauded for bringing premium active noise cancellation to earbuds, and the second generation brings several improvements in this area. The AirPods Pro 2 could block out far more ambient noise—keys being typed, birds chirpings, footsteps—and loud sporadic noises like a New York City subway car clattering on the tracks. It’s not the best active noise cancellation we’ve experienced in a pair of earbuds, but it’s not too far off. Conversely, the same microphones that facilitate that allow for an impressive Transparency Mode.

Apple says the AirPods Pro 2 earbuds get up to six hours of playtime per charge, with an extra 24 hours thanks to its battery case. That’s mostly been true in our experience, though keeping active noise cancellation enabled all the time did drain the earbuds more quickly. With one or two 15-minute breaks, you should be able to get through an entire international flight with the AirPods Pro 2’s ANC turned on. If you work in an office, coffee shop, or at home with another people, the active noise cancellation should be sufficient to create a reasonable buffer between you and the outside world.

One of the big bets with the original AirPods was support for Spatial Audio, a type of binaural surround sound you can take on the go. The technology was impressive, if unproven, but Apple has spent the past few years coaxing artists to re-release classic albums or release new ones with a Dolby Atmos mix. The library for surround sound music on Apple Music has exploded, and the AirPods 2 let you take full advantage of it—though if you want the true Dolby Atmos experience, you’ll need to pony up for an Apple TV and surround sound speaker system.

Spatial Audio tracks on the AirPods 2 do sound more immersive than their stereo counterparts, especially if you enable head tracking, which will automatically pan music based on how your head is turned to recreate the experience of listening to music on speakers. Spatial Audio mixes are still hit or miss, but at least there’s a variety of music to choose from. Apple offers a way to personalize the Spatial Audio experience by taking pictures of your face and ears, but we didn’t notice a big difference and performance.

One of Apple’s most unexpected updates to the AirPods Pro 2 was changing its case. The new case has a larger battery, lanyard loupe, and support for “Find My,” which allows you to track the location of your AirPods 2 case in case the earbuds get lost. A built-in speaker can play a chime, making it easier to find. And, like the latest iPhones, the AirPods ditch the Lightning port for USB-C charging, meaning one less cable to keep track of. These welcome improvements make a tangible difference in the earbuds’ overall usability. Sometimes, it boils down to nice things being nice.

The only potential downside to using the AirPods Pro 2 is that they’re designed to work best with Apple’s other gear, so if you don’t have an iPhone, iPad, or Mac, you’ll get a slightly worse experience. The AirPods Pro 2 will still sound the same and have identical active noise-cancelling performance, but features like instant pairing are absent. This isn’t a dealbreaker, but it’s something to consider if you live in the Windows and Android world.

Are the AirPods Pro 2 the best-sounding earbuds? No. Are they the best active noise-cancelling earbuds? No, but they’re the most well-rounded pair by offering a great technical and audio experience. The whole is greater than the sum of its parts, and we can’t imagine anyone complaining about this pair of earbuds.

Best noise-cancelling: Bose QuietComfort Ultra

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Bose’s QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds have the most effective noise cancellation of any earbuds we’ve ever tested—to an eerie extent.

Specs 

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 6 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (5)

Pros

  • Best-in-class noise cancellation
  • Five microphones per bud
  • Bose app is actually helpful

Cons

  • Lacks multi-device pairing

The QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds are built upon the impressive foundation provided by 2022’s QuietComfort Earbuds II, and only extend Bose’s lead in this category. We described the noise-cancellation performance of the QuietComfort Earbuds II as “scary” due to the genuine sense of isolation we felt during our tests. We’re happy—if not bewildered— to report that’s still the case. Somehow, Bose has managed to make the noise cancellation performance of its A-list earbuds even better. In quiet areas, like a home or hybrid office the earbuds, can completely eliminate moderate sounds like typing on a keyboard, walking around, and even opening doors if you play music at a low volume.

Testing these earbuds in a more demanding setting—the New York City subway system—was revelatory. Listening to a soft-pop group like the Mamas & the Papas should not have resulted in our missing an announcement that our train was rerouted. And yet it did. We weren’t trying to ignore the subway conductor’s warning; we just weren’t aware of it. The subway train’s squeaks and shuffles were audible when music was off, or we listened to spoken word content like podcasts, but music at a volume level of 80 percent or higher would zero it out. It’s an odd sensation to feel a train moving and not being able to hear it.

This level of ANC performance comes courtesy of a five-microphone array built into each bud. That’s one more microphone per ear than last year’s model. These mics also come in handy when taking or placing phone calls, and they blocked out a fair bit of ambient noise like wind, which would have distracted our fellow caller. Simply put, the Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds’ noise cancellation is unparalleled. It’s good enough that we’d recommend them to frequent fliers and commuters on its own. Thankfully, they also sound excellent.

We put these earbuds through their paces by listening to a wide range of music genres from different eras, from Taylor Swift’s new take on “1989” to tracks from Bob Marley’s “Sounds of Freedom” through a compilation of the 1980s proto-Britpop band The Aardvarks. Some tracks were lossless (or high resolution) streamed from Apple Music and others were lossy AAC files from our personal library. Your experience will vary based on the mastering and recording of your favorite music, but we couldn’t find fault with the way the QuietComfort Ultras sounded.

Bose’s EQ settings were subtle and tasteful, so you won’t hear unnecessarily boomy bass or crispy treble. We found the earbuds were particularly good at reproducing the sounds of acoustic instruments from guitars in pop songs to string and brass sections in classical and jazz recordings. We had enough esteem for these earbuds that we chose to use them during our first listen of “Now and Then,” the final Beatles recording featuring John, Paul, George, and Ringo.

The latter was available with a Dolby Atmos mix, allowing us to test these earbuds’ “immersive audio” setting. Enabling this setting allows you to hear music as if it were being played through a pair of speakers, with audio shifting as you move your head. The effect is neat and shows how much processing power the QuietComfort Ultras have under the hood, but we mostly listened to music in stereo. If you have a problem with the way these earbuds sound out of the box, you can tweak them to your liking by adjusting their EQ within the Bose Music app available on iOS and Android.

Our experience with these earbuds was almost universally positive, but we’re puzzled by their lack of multipoint pairing. You can only keep the earbuds connected to one device at a time, which is limiting and cumbersome if you want to go from listening to your music on your phone during a commute to your computer at your desk. It’s a hiccup that’s especially surprising because these earbuds support Bluetooth 5.3 and Spatial Audio, two cutting-edge, resource-intensive features.

There’s never been a better time to pick up a pair of noise-cancelling earbuds, so anyone shopping in 2024 should start with this pair.

Best for multiple devices: Technics EAH-AZ80

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 7 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (8)

Pros

  • Smooth multi-point pairing
  • Four microphones per ear
  • Compact size
  • LDAC support

Cons

  • Cost

Technics may be most synonymous with club turntables thanks to its legendary SL-1200 (now 1210MKII), a deck used worldwide by DJs. Still, music listeners (rather than performers) should immediately acquaint themselves with the company’s new EAH-AZ80 earbuds. Their marquee feature is triple multipoint pairing—the ability to keep the earbuds connected to three devices simultaneously—but that’s just the tip of the iceberg. We’ve had the opportunity to test the earbuds for a couple of weeks, and they’ve become the top pair we’ve tried in 2023.

Let’s start with their multipoint pairing, which works astonishingly well. After pairing the earbuds to a couple of devices, they would automatically connect to both as long as they were within range. If I paused music on the first device, I could hit play on the second, and the audio would immediately start to play. The same was true when I threw a third device into the mix—to be clear, I approach any Bluetooth earbuds multipoint pairing with skepticism, and no earbuds claim to work with three devices. This is very difficult to pull off technically, and the only earbuds that have done it as well are Apple’s AirPods 2. But Apple’s top-tier earbuds only support seamless multipoint pairing when connected to the company’s other devices. The EAH-AZ80s can be multipoint paired with any gear regardless of its operating system.

On the active noise cancellation front, these earbuds stand above the AirPods Pro 2 but not quite at the level of QuietComfort Earbuds II. They blocked out almost—but not quite—as much sound as the latter. Commuters and travelers can turn to Technics earbuds for excellent ANC performance, aided by a generous seven sizes of eartips, and it’s up to most of the rest of the audio industry to play catch up. As for how others can hear you through ambient noise, eight high-sensitivity MEMS mics plus advanced noise reduction capture and transmit your voice clearly. Surprisingly, Technics went from off our consumer earbud radar to near the top, but that’s how good the EAH-AZ80s have performed in our tests.

While we were pleased with the earbuds’ technical features, we were blown away by how good the 10mm free-edge drivers (housed in a custom acoustic chamber) sound. Rich bass, smooth as silk midrange, and clear highs were present each time we hit play. It didn’t matter if we were listening to Miles Davis’ “Kind Of Blue” for the umpteenth time or catching up with the latest Dawes album released earlier this year; the EAH-AZ80s would continue to reveal new sounds during repeated listenings. These are reference-grade Bluetooth earbuds, especially if you’re using one of the few devices that support the LDAC codec (either a small selection of Android smartphones or a dedicated digital audio player), which offers near-lossless audio quality streamed wirelessly. Pro tip: Choosing “Treble+” or “Dynamic” in the Technics Audio Connect app’s Sound Enhancement panel really ramps up the captivating clarity by reducing some midbass mud. With the right setup and audio files, these earbuds will wow.

All of this performance comes at a cost, and while the EAH-AZ80s aren’t the most expensive earbuds out there, they’re a sizable investment. However, if you regularly bounce between different devices, stream high-resolution audio, prefer smaller earbuds, or can appreciate any combination of the three, we can’t see how these earbuds would let you down.

Best future-proofing: Sennheiser MOMENTUM True Wireless 4

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 30 hours (7.5 hours per full charge, case holds about three recharges)
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IP54
  • Microphones: Yes (3 per bud)

Pros

  • Bluetooth 5.4 w/ aptX Adaptive & Lossless, Auracast, and LE Audio
  • Improved antennae array/wireless reception
  • Improved water/dust resistance
  • Same rich, midrange-centric sonic signature
  • Three new colorways
  • Same housing, so if it suited you before, it still will (which, to us, is a good thing)

Cons

  • Same housing, so if it didn’t suit you before, it still won’t (not that we have an issue)
  • No LDAC support
  • No Spatial Audio
  • ANC isn’t at the level of Bose or Sony (but is perfectly serviceable)

If you’re in the market for expressive earbuds that won’t be easily outdated, the Sennheiser MOMENTUM True Wireless 4 (or is that the TWS 3.5, as we’ll soon discuss) is the revision you want now for later. Unveiled at CES 2024 in January alongside a sensor-packed Sport model and other hearing-related gadgets, the MOMENTUM 4 takes the form factor and sonic finesse that defined the last generation of Sennheiser’s flagship and enhances the underlying circuitry.

From the outside, there’s little to distinguish the MOMENTUM 4 from 2022’s edition, save for the option of three new colorways: white silver, black graphite, or black copper (pictured above). The ovoid housing remains the same, and it still nestles comfortably in the ear canal thanks to a wide selection of washable silicone ear tips and differently-sized little wings (more like ridges) that tuck into the concha to stabilize. There’s still a Sennheiser logo etched on the faceplates, which double as controls using responsive touch-sensitive panels. If you liked the fit and finish before, nothing will change your opinion now—except maybe the fact that the IP rating is now IP54, meaning better water/dust resistance. 

Internally, meanwhile, it’s an overhaul. Antennae have been redesigned for improved reception and signal-to-noise ratio, aided in their reliability by including Qualcomm’s S5 Sound Gen 2 chipset/processor and its support for Bluetooth 5.4 and Snapdragon Sound. What this means is that, with a compatible device like the ASUS Zenfone 10 used for our listening tests, the MOMENTUM 4 supports aptX Lossless and 16-bit/44kHz (CD-quality) wireless audio—one day potentially extending to 24/48 via firmware update. That advanced resolution, admittedly, is a feature only applicable to a small subset of Android phones right now. Still, there’s also support for SBC, AAC, and standard aptX/aptX Adaptive codecs baked in so all smart devices can cultivate a connection. 

What, you want more jargon? No problem! Also coming via future firmware is support for LE Audio/LC3 and Auracast. The former is basically an improved version of the default SBC Bluetooth codec, using less energy and bandwidth yet retaining better fidelity even at lower bitrates. And Auracast allows a compatible source transmitter—let’s say a TV or public address system—to broadcast multiple audio streams to unlimited devices. (It can also link multiple devices to relay the same source, as JBL showed off at CES 2024 with its upcoming Xtreme 4 and PartyBox speakers.)

Of course, a great signal doesn’t matter if what is receiving it doesn’t sound good. Luckily, the 7mm dynamic TrueReponse driver in the MOMENTUM 4 is a proven performer, featuring transducer technology trickled down from the stunning $1K IE 900 in-ear monitor. Fed a quality source (we used Lossless/Hi-Res Lossless Apple Music streams primarily), the MOMENTUM 4 shows off that lineage with warm but controlled bass, vibrant treble, plus trademark midrange clarity and rhythmic timing. Dynamics can swing from delicate to deliberate—subtle to impactful but equally potent and composed. Helping maintain that equilibrium is adaptive ANC to keep distractions out and app-based EQ personalization to dial your favored sound profile in. There is, however, no Spatial Audio or head-tracking support, so stick with Apple and Bose for that type of immersive virtualization. The MOMENTUM 4 prioritizes signal strength fidelity and two-channel eloquence over DSP alchemy, retrieving every timbre and tremble from its 5 Hz – 21 kHz response. And you can appreciate all the emotional sweep and instrument separation uninterrupted for up to 7.5 hours on a charge (30 hours total with a fully charged case).

Of course, all of this doesn’t come cheap. The MOMENTUM 4 rings up at $299 (an increase of $50 but in line with competitors, including the Bose QuietComfort Ultra and Sony WF-1000XM5). Still, that’s money well spent if you’re the type who would like to go a few rounds of upgrading your smartphone without having to worry about replacing your earbuds.

Best for comfort: Jabra Elite 10

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 6 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IP57
  • Microphones: Yes (6)

Pros

  • Near-perfect fit
  • Solid multipoint pairing
  • Easy on the ears
  • Built with Dolby Atmos head tracking support

Cons

  • Occasionally auto muting during calls

Comfort often takes a back seat as companies race to make longer-lasting, better-sounding, more technically advanced earbuds. Thankfully, Jabra’s Elite 10 earbuds prove you can have comfortable in-ear headphones without any major sacrifices. We’ve had the opportunity to test the Elite 10s for a few weeks, and they’ve quickly become an all-time favorite because, unlike several competitors, the oval EarGels (derived from 62,000 ear scans, according to the company) provided stability, but the shells never created hot spots or excess ear-canal pressure. And this unobtrusive fit gave us the time to appreciate fully all their other features.

The Jabra earbuds immediately paired to our first device over Bluetooth right out of their case and never lost their connection. This was true even if we left our phone or computer in one room and walked several feet away to the next one. The Elite 10s support multipoint pairing out of the gate, a feature only added later to Jabra’s previous-generation earbuds, and we found switching between connected devices very seamless. The Elite 10s will scan the area for previously connected devices and let you know whether one or two are connected. In our experience, pausing audio on one device and playing something completely different on another worked seamlessly. These earbuds have six microphones, which yields two big benefits. The first is call quality; we wore these earbuds on multiple video chats, and none of the participants complained about hearing a soft or muffled voice (though the Elite 10s did automatically mute us a couple of times, which required us to push a button on either bud to unmute).

The main purpose of the Elite 10s six-microphone system is advanced active noise cancellation. These earbuds block out an incredible amount of noise, easily on par with the performance from Apple’s AirPods Pro 2, though not quite as good as the Bose QuietComfort Earbuds II. Subway noise, air conditioners, footsteps, and keyboard typing all faded into the background as we listened to music at roughly 50%. The type of noise in your environment and preferred music genre will impact your experience. Still, we came away from our time with the Jabra Elite 10s convinced the company is making a serious attempt at creating world-class earbuds.

All of these technical and design features are impressive and important, but the Elite 10’s audio quality blew us away, given their sub-$300 price. We couldn’t find fault in their punchiness while listening to music from any genre at any volume level, whether active noise cancellation was enabled or not. All the hallmarks of great audio were there: Deep bass, clear-but-not-shimmery highs, and a lot of midrange response. Live acoustic tracks, crunchy garage rock, hard bop jazz, you name it and the Elite 10s will handle it. The mixture of Jabra’s tuning and the earbuds’ relatively large 10mm drivers delivered the goods.

Jabra has touted the Elite 10’s Dolby Atmos support, and while the quality of its head tracking is impressive, this feature never really clicked with me. We appreciate Jabra taking a forward-looking approach—albums are being released or reissued with Dolby Atmos mixes weekly through several major streaming services—but stereo (or mono!) remain our go-to formats for on-the-go music listening. If you’re the type of music listener who enjoys listening to Dolby Atmos audio on a home theater system, though, the Elite 10s deserve serious consideration thanks to their solid translation of the format.

If you listen to music for hours each day or need earbuds that won’t annoy year ears while you take conference call after conference call, we have to give Jabra’s Elite 10 the top spot.

Best for custom sound: Denon PerL Pro

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (8)

Pros

  • Custom audio profiles really work
  • Top-notch sound quality
  • Support for the aptX Lossless codec

Cons

  • Price

Audiophiles who patiently waited to see what Denon did with Nura’s technology after the Australian company’s acquisition in summer 2023 will be rewarded with the new PerL Pro earbuds. The buds’ key feature is the ability to walk you through a two-minute audio scan (now called Masimo Adaptive Acoustic Technology, or AAT), which tests your ears’ sensitivity to different frequencies. This process is completely hands-off and done through Denon’s Headphones app, which is available on iOS and Android. Once a profile has been created, you can toggle it on and off through either an app or by linking it to a shortcut activated by tapping one of the disc-shaped ‘buds. (This is the Personalized Listening that makes up the PerL in the name.)

If you’ve struggled with hearing loss or sensitivity to sounds in certain frequencies, these earbuds may well be a revelation. In our experience, creating a profile went smoothly, and we appreciated the ability to create up to three of them if you feel that Denon didn’t get things quite right the first time. Be mindful that you’ll need to wear the correctly sized ear tips during the scan for the best results. And the result? Music did, in fact, sound better when our custom sound profile was enabled, and the difference was especially stark when toggling it on and off during the same song.

In our case, the PerL Pro earbuds determined that our ears could use a lot more low-end, which it amply supplied without going overboard. Other sound differences were more subtle but perceptible after listening to music with it turned on for an extended music listening session and then turning it off. We can’t fault the PerL Pro earbuds for their execution of this technology, but we didn’t always opt for it. We knew that their sound, while tailored to our ears, was digitally manipulated. This likely won’t bother you, but it’s something to remember if you tend to be an audio purist who resists the temptation of playing around with an EQ.

The good news is that the PerL Pro earbuds sound fantastic in their natural state. Denon took the time to build their buds with best-in-class components and support for the latest technical standards, including Bluetooth 5.3 and the SBC, AAC, and aptX/aptX Adaptive/aptX Lossless codecs. You’ll need a supported Snapdragon Sound device to use all the aptX codecs, and the Lossless tier (which purports to transmit CD-quality sound) is in very few easily procured devices outside ASUS flagship smartphones. Still, it’s good to know they’re there. Our extensive testing, which included watching videos on YouTube, streaming lossless and lossy music on Apple Music, and various podcasts, all yielded positive results throughout the earbuds’ eight-hour battery life—so much so that we used up the 32 extra hours in the charging case enjoying albums and authors.

Audio artifacts like sibilance and low-end distortion were nowhere to be found, even at high volumes. The PerL Pros’ sound profile isn’t exactly neutral, but their 10mm Ultralow-distortion triple-layer titanium diaphragm dynamic drivers offer a vivid presentation. The whole point of these earbuds is to listen to a custom-made profile designed to fit the needs of your ears, so it’s unsurprising they’re ready for any listening tests. A trusted name in AV receivers that can handle any dynamic swings thrown at them, Denon’s focus on sonic quality is commendable, and its earbuds’ signature sound (with Dirac Virtuo processing thrown in for spatial audio) is addictive. However, we did find the PerL Pro’s ANC performance a little lacking for their price. It’s not that these earbuds are bad at blocking noise—quite the contrary—but we’d expect more adaptive, effective performance at their $350 price. Subway car noises were still slightly audible while riding on the train while listening to music at 50% volume, for instance.

Still, if you want earbuds guaranteed to sound rich and ready for any genre, Denon’s PerL Pros are easy to recommend. We look forward to making new profiles as Denon’s software continues to improve and feel good knowing custom earbud tuning is just a couple of taps away.

Best battery life: beyerdynamic Free BYRD

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 11 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (2)

Pros

  • Incredible battery life
  • Bundled with eight sets of ear tips
  • Phenomenal fit

Cons

  • They stick out from your ears

Beyerdynamic has been a part of the audio world for decades, impressing us with its mixing headphones, among others, but its latest long-lasting earbuds took us by surprise. While we were pleased by the Free BYRD’s sound and fit, its 11-hour battery life (eight if you leave active noise cancellation off) is in the top tier of true wireless earbuds. If you toggle ANC on and off regularly, you should have no problem getting nine hours of music playback before popping them back into their case. If you do somehow run out of juice during a single listening session, the Free BYRD’s case offers an hour of music playback off a 10-minute charge.

Most true wireless earbuds last roughly five to six hours with ANC turned on—the extra two hours offered by the Free BYRDs make a huge difference on a transatlantic flight, where tuning out the whirring sound of an engine can make the difference between sleep and misery. The Free BYRDs’ battery life is impressive, but it’s not the only reason they’ve made the cut. We were also very taken by the earbuds’ noise cancellation, which only comes up short when compared to the QuietComfort Earbuds II.

While the Free BYRDs didn’t produce the same eerie isolation chamber-like effect as Bose’s earbuds, they did block out a significant amount of noise. When listening to music at 80%, only the loudest sounds—think a sudden, expected clang, or jackhammer on the street—could pierce the bubble. One of the reasons for this impressive performance was that Beyerdynamic includes eight pairs of eartips in the box, so you can find the ones that fit your ears perfectly.

A tight seal around your ear is essential to getting good active noise-cancelling performance, and the Free BYRDs pass that test with flying colors. A tight seal can put unwanted pressure on the inside of your ear, but that was never the case with these earbuds. Another upside: The earbud seal was so tight we could headbang to our heart’s content without the risk of them falling out.

Concerning audio, the Free BYRDs’ 10mm dynamic drivers produced sound on par with our top-rated earbud pick, the AirPods Pro 2. They support SBC, AAC, and aptX Adaptive codecs in their Bluetooth 5.2 container. In our tests, which included listening to music from different genres and spoken word audio like podcasts and audiobooks, the Free BYRDs never skipped a beat. Everything we listened to sounded surprisingly natural, which is particularly great when listening to people speaking.

Punchy bass, midrange clarity, and never-crispy treble are always a winning combination, as they are here. The sound was so good we never thought about mucking with the digital EQ in beyerdynamic’s MIY app. You can run through a hearing test in the app to tune these earbuds based on how sensitive your ears are to different frequencies, but this is entirely optional. We can’t imagine anyone being upset with the way the Free BYRDs sound out of the box.

You should be aware of the guitar pick-like shape of these earbuds, which makes them protrude from your ears. It’s not that you look silly wearing the Free BYRDS, but they will look different than most modern earbuds. That’s a small price to pay for their great sound, solid active noise cancellation, and exceptional battery life.

Best for sustainability: House of Marley Redemption ANC 2

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Stemmed TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 6 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX5
  • Microphones: Yes (2)

Pros

  • Made from sustainable materials
  • Fast charging support
  • Surprisingly good fit

Cons

  • Lackluster app

With the Redemption ANC 2 earbuds, House of Marley has made bedfellows out of technology and sustainability without any major concessions. These earbuds—case and all—are made (in part) from a mix of solid bamboo, natural wood fiber composite, and recycled plastics.

In our tests, choosing these materials didn’t impact the Redemption ANC 2s sound, fit, or noise cancellation performance, which is especially impressive considering their relatively low price. They even beat some of our favorite earbuds in the durability department due to their IPX5 rating, which will protect them from damage by sweat or splashes of water—getting caught running in a rainstorm won’t spell trouble. This feature is especially welcome because the Redemption ANC 2 earbuds’ fit is so good that we can easily recommend them for working out. Running and jumping couldn’t dislodge them from our ears.

Active noise cancellation is the namesake feature of these earbuds, and we were pretty pleased with their performance in this area. They aren’t at the level of our more premium earbud recommendations, but that’s to be expected given their sub-$160 price. The earbuds effectively blocked keyboard typing and footsteps, but loud noises like car horns could still be heard prominently. They may not be the best choice for airplane flights, but the Redemption ANC 2s are perfectly suited for office use.

Our experience with the earbuds’ sound was similarly satisfying. We could detect a difference in clarity when comparing the Redemption ANC 2s directly to the AirPods Pro 2 or QuietComfort Earbuds II, but that didn’t dampen our enjoyment of listening to music. If you get these earbuds, you’re not going to be disappointed by the way they sound unless you veer toward audiophile hardware, in which case the Redemption ANC 2s aren’t targeted at you. There was some muddiness in the low end and some sibilance at the high end, but overall the earbuds produced a pleasing sound. You can mitigate some of these audio abnormalities by tuning the EQ in House of Marley’s app, but we were disappointed by how barebones this software was.

Despite this setback, we feel comfortable recommending the House of Marley ANC 2s to anyone who takes the sustainability of their technology seriously. You’ll end up with a good-sounding, great-fitting set of relatively inexpensive true wireless earbuds with a fair lower environmental impact than most gadgets.

Best for gamers: ASUS ROG Cetra

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Stemmed TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 5.5 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes (Hybrid)
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (2)

Pros

  • Virtual 7.1 surround sound
  • Case has an LED
  • Price

Cons

  • Not the fullest ANC
  • So-so audio quality for music

The ASUS ROG Cetra is a pair of budget-priced true wireless earbuds with features designed for gamers—provided you use the company’s Armory Crate software. One advantage of the ROG Cetras is that the earbuds fit into a hardware ecosystem. ASUS has desktops, laptops, mobile gaming handhelds, controllers, and these earbuds are designed to fit in. Their case has a pleasing rounded-off shape, and opening it reveals an LED—a trademark of PC gaming rigs.

The earbuds themselves feel comfortable to wear and get solid battery life for a pair that costs under $100. We didn’t find ourselves reaching for a charger more than twice a week during our tests, which is on par with earbuds that cost three times the price. The biggest difference between the ROG Cetras and their premium counterparts is noise cancellation. These earbuds support hybrid noise cancellation, which uses external and internal feedforward/feedback mics but isn’t fully effective at blocking noise. Light background sounds would fade away, but moderately loud ones remained audible.

A big draw for gamers who use ASUS Armoury Crate software is the ability to activate the low-latency gaming mode and use these earbuds to create a virtual 7.1 surround sound environment. The effect wasn’t as impressive as Spatial Audio on the AirPods Pro 2, but we could hear some additional separation when the settings were correct. The experience varied from game to game, and ASUS can’t control the sound mixing of each title, so your experience may vary.

We’re recommending these earbuds to gamers because they were designed with this use case in mind. Chiptune music from older and indie games, or explosions and dialogue from newer ones, sounded pretty good, but the ROG Cetra’s 10mm drivers weren’t tuned for music, which didn’t sound very clear. Nuances we could hear with higher-end earbuds were gone on the Cetras, and it was more difficult to discern sounds across different frequency ranges. If you need a pair of inexpensive earbuds to pair with your portable gaming machines, these are a solid pick, but music lovers should look at our other recommendations.

Best for working out: Apple Beats Fit Pro

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear TWS
  • Battery life: 6 hours single-charge; 24 hours with case
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes

Pros

  • High-performance active noise canceling in a compact earbud design
  • Secure design stays in ear when running or working out
  • Compatible with dynamic head tracking on iOS devices
  • Includes pocket-sized travel case and three eartip options

Cons

  • No wireless charging
  • iOS device required for full functionality
  • Not protected against water immersion
  • No multipoint pairing

We’ve thoroughly reviewed the Apple Beats Fit Pro, and they’re the best for working out thanks to their sound quality, movement-friendly design, and fantastic iOS compatibility. They contain the same proprietary H1 chip found in Apple’s AirPods, enabling near-instantaneous pairing, steady, reliable connections to iOS devices, and battery life optimization. Like AirPods, the Beats Fit Pro earbuds are also fully compatible with iOS head-tracking and Spatial Audio features for simulated surround sound and immersive media listening. Their inclusion of active noise cancellation (ANC) and transparency modes make them equally useful on the road and at the gym. We also love the range of colors these buds come in, particularly their unique skin tone range.

The Beats Fit Pro earbuds are designed to sit securely in your ears using small rubber wings that rest comfortably against your outer ear along with three sets of variously sized ear tips. A quick optional setup step uses the earbuds’ onboard microphones to test your fit for sound leaks. Once your optimal fit is achieved, the Beats Fit Pro can endure almost every exercise imaginable—from running to rowing—without budging. The earbuds’ conveniently pocked-sized charging case brings their total battery life to around 24 hours. While it would be nice to see wireless charging in a product with this price tag, we appreciate that the case is chargeable via USB-C rather than Apple’s proprietary Lightning connector.

If you work out regularly and are an iPhone user, you’d be seriously hard-pressed to find a better in-ear option because of the snug fit, balanced sound, and seamless iOS connectivity. If you’re sold on the Beats features but are looking for an option with earhooks, the Powerbeats Pro earbuds are also a solid choice.

Best for running or cycling: Bose Ultra Open Earbuds

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: On-ear TWS
  • Battery life: 7.5 hours (4.5 hours with Immersive Audio enabled)
  • Active noise cancellation: No
  • IP rating: IPX4
  • Microphones: Yes (4)

Pros

  • Situational awareness of the world around you
  • Guaranteed to fit
  • Surprisingly good bass

Cons

  • Absolutely no isolation or ANC

It may come as a surprise that Bose, so well-known for industry-leading noise cancellation that shuts the world out, is also responsible for earbuds on this list that are purpose-built to do the exact opposite. Its new Ultra Open Earbuds have a wholly unique design; instead of inserting buds into your ear canal, you wrap it cuff-like around the helix (the edge) of your ear, then settle the speaker end into the concha right above the ear canal. This lets the earbud play into your ear while leaving it exposed to outside noise, which is practical when running or biking. You’ll be able to hear obstacles like cars or other runners/cyclists coming behind you. Active noise-canceling earbuds, like Bose’s own QuietComfort Ultra) would significantly reduce (if not entirely eliminate) these environmental cues, and it’s great to have less distractions in a loud, crowded gym but dangerous when you’re outdoors, especially in urban environments.

Getting the hang of how to properly wear the Ultra Open Earbuds takes a couple of tries. The buds are very flexible as you clip them on. This curled design ensures they can fit behind virtually any sized ear comfortably. There’s no worrying about which eartips will create a proper seal or whether they’ll fall out of your ear, which allows you to grab and go and focus on whatever you’re listening to or doing with your body. Once settled, the control buttons sit securely behind the ear, allowing you push patterns to pause/play, skip/repeat a track, answer calls, toggle the Immersion mode, and adjust volume. And the polished exterior doesn’t interfere with the style or fit of your jewelry, glasses, hats, etc.

Musically, Bose’s Ultra Open Earbuds are a great addition to the company’s lineup. They support Bluetooth 5.3 (including AAC for iPhones). We found them to have a similar sound profile to the company’s latest premium active noise-cancelling headphones. Acoustic music—piano jazz by Bill Evans in particular—sounded crystal clear, which allowed us to appreciate the intricate nuances of a three- or four-piece band. Don’t worry, effects-driven pop from Olivia Rodrigo was equally enjoyable. Surprisingly, the Ultra Open Earbuds delivered a lot of bass, which we didn’t think would be possible from earbuds that created no seal around our ears. Perhaps even more surprisingly, there was very little sound bleed; the directional drivers do an excellent job of beaming sound into the canal so that you could feel comfortable wearing these in an office without worrying about disturbing coworkers.

One feature the Ultra Open Earbuds shares with its noise-cancelling sibling is support for Immersive Audio—a form of DSP applied to any source, unlike Apple Music’s Spatial Audio, which requires Dolby Atmos-encoded material for multidimensional listening. When enabled, the soundstage is expanded, virtualizing object-based audio between and beyond the strict Left/Right channels that are your ears (and standard earbuds). And if you pick the “Motion” setting, the earbuds will shift the music’s position when you move your head/body around, giving you the sense of listening to music on a pair of speakers a few feet in front of you as you walk around a room.

The key to a great pair of earbuds for exercise, however, is fit as much as feel, and the Ultra Open Earbuds excel in this area. They grip snugly around our ears during walks and jogs, without indicating they’d slip or fall off. Even shaking our head vigorously as a stress test proved futile. That said, it never felt like the earbuds were pinching our ears or irritating them in any other way. We wore them for several hours at a time during our testing period without discomfort—something we can’t always say about traditional earbuds, which can create hotspots inside our ear canals. We were surprised at how pleasant it was not to have to worry about fit or the possibility of these earbuds popping out of our ears, which made it easier to listen to music. It did take a couple of days to get used to the fact that loud noises happening around us were clearly audible.

This includes people speaking, listening to television or music in another room, or walking around. Some softer sounds, like typing on a computer keyboard, were soft enough that the music we listened to drowned it out. But if you want to wear earbuds to isolate yourself from the world, this isn’t the right pair for you. Similarly, we wouldn’t make Bose’s Open Earbuds a top pick for travel; sure, you won’t miss any train announcements, but the New York City subway sounds easily overpowered music coming from the buds. However, if you want to actively exercise outdoors while listening to a playlist, we can’t think of a better pair of earbuds for the task.

Best planar-magnetic earphones: 7Hertz Timeless AE

Chris Coke

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: In-ear wired
  • Type: Closed-back earphones
  • Frequency Response: 5Hz – 40kHz
  • Impedance: 14.8 ohm
  • Sensitivity: 104dB
  • Weight: 5.5 grams (each earpiece)

Pros

  • Very well-tuned, balanced sound
  • Full of detail
  • Good bass performance

Cons

  • Unusual shape 
  • Limited soundstage

Unlike dynamic and balanced armature drivers, which comprise most earbuds, planar magnetics feature larger, thinner membranes—contributing to lighting-quick low-distortion transients but often require more voltage to drive. Luckily, the technology has evolved so that planar earphones are no longer expensive unicorns. Still, there has rarely been such a well-tuned in-ear monitor at such an affordable price. The magic of the 7Hertz Timeless AE lies in the tuning of its 14.2mm drivers (powered by double-sided N52 magnet arrays), updated to provide deeper, more impactful bass and smoother treble for hours of easy listening. It’s a warmer sound that delivers an enjoyable amount of detail, combining to make these earphones a well-balanced buy at $249. If you’re into wired earphones and want ones that don’t skimp on the bass, the 7Hz Timeless AE is an impeccable balance of price and performance. The Timeless isn’t perfect, however. It breaks the mold with the divisive, quarter-like shape of its earpieces. You’ll either be ambivalent about the shape or outright hate the shells—there doesn’t seem to be much in between.

And suppose you’ve got $1K and want something that pulls every last nuance from every note. In that case, the Campfire Audio Supermoon is a universal in-ear monitor featuring 14mm, 2-micron-thick planar drivers in 3D-printed solid-body enclosures custom-molded that really nestle into your ear so your songs can burrow into your brain. The bass is textured but controlled, the midrange is dynamic, and the treble is honest (which can be a good or bad thing, depending on the recording). Planar IEMs are really coming into their own.

Best budget: EarFun Air Pro 3

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Style: Stemmed TWS
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours
  • Active noise cancellation: Yes (Hybrid)
  • IP rating: IPX5
  • Microphones: Yes (6)

Pros

  • Bluetooth 5.3—with support for SBC, AAC, aptX adaptive, plus LE Audio & LC3
  • Multipoint connectivity
  • 45-hour playtime: 9 hours + 36 hours with wireless-compatible charging case
  • Delivers insane performance:price ratio

Cons

  • ANC, while good, isn’t going to match premium earbuds
  • Mics can pick up wind
  • Volume can seem low with some devices
  • Not going to rival the sonic separation of earbuds that cost 3x as much (but they cost 3x as much)

There’s cheap, and then there’s a bargain, and the two shouldn’t be confused. The EarFun Air Pro 3 is the latter: budget TWS earbuds that pack ridiculous features and value for $79 (less with regular discounts). Stemmed earbuds in the style of their namesake (the AirPods, natch), the Air Pro 3 earbuds feature active noise cancellation, Bluetooth 5.3, six mics, 9 hours of battery life, touch controls, multipoint connections, and more in a classic, comfortable ergonomic form factor. If you like the idea of AirPods but not the price, especially if you want that type of earbuds for an Android device, the Air Pro 3 is a top pick.

Bluetooth 5.3—with support for SBC, AAC, aptX adaptive, plus LE Audio & LC3—delivers a low-power, stable signal to feed the 11mm wool composite dynamic drivers higher-bitrate content. Bass is the standout frequency band, punchy without being paunchy, but its confident strut is nicely balanced by fleshy midrange and bright highs. And QuietSmart 2.0 hybrid active noise cancellation up to 43dB ensures you can enjoy that richly appointed range; it’s not Bose-level ANC but proves more than efficient. Plus, there’s a graphic EQ-enabled app to tweak settings and coax clarity. While imaging isn’t the best, and they’re not the most compact, the EarFun Air Pro 3 earbuds are great if you want to take some fun thump on your commute and they are the budget ANC earbuds to beat, particularly for fans of modern bass-heavy genres.

What to consider when shopping for the best earbuds

From a secure fit to fabulous sound, the best earbuds can provide what you need. Here are the main things to consider when shopping: 

How can I ensure a good fit?

TWS earbuds have become so popular, in part, because companies have been able to develop earbuds that won’t fall out. The best wireless earbuds include ear tips (typically sized S, M, and L, but sometimes including middle sizes like SM or ML) that fit snugly and comfortably in the canal of your ear. Some models offer flexible wings or fins that fit the concha and make the earbuds feel locked in place, while others come with hooks or malleable wires that curl over your ear to secure things. Deciding on the best design is a personal choice but, thankfully, many models come with multiple ear tip options—most often a mix of silicone (better for quick insertion/removal) and foam (better for isolation)—to give you a good chance of finding a fit that’s right for your ears. 

What if I might get caught in the rain?

The best earbuds offer some water resistance, and you can even find waterproof earbuds. The way to determine how your electronics can cope with environmental intrusions is by checking the Ingress Protection, or IP, rating—two numerals that indicate resistance to liquids and dust. Earbuds can go all the way up to an IP68 rating—meaning they can be fully submerged in over 1 meter of water for up to 30 minutes without damage, and won’t be heard by a tumble into the sand at a beach. If you live in a wet climate or work up a prodigious sweat on the treadmill, look for models with higher water-resistance ratings. But if you just need earbuds that can withstand a little drizzle or a few drops of sweat, an IPX4 rating could suffice. Many charging cases for the best wireless earbuds offer their own amount of water and dust protection. However, some of the best budget wireless earbuds sacrifice that added security to reduce costs.  

What if I’m a music-first type? 

TWS earbuds can work for audiophiles. The best earbuds have high-resolution receivers, digital audio converters, custom-tuned drivers, and amplifiers that combine to deliver sound replicating the original recording as closely as possible. Look for the newest 5.2, 5.3, or 5.4 versions of the Bluetooth protocol with support for codecs (the digital format that compresses and transmits the sound) that match your device to your earbuds. Everyone supports SBC, but Apple prefers AAC, Sony promotes LDAC, and Android devices are likelier to support aptX/aptX HD/aptX adaptive/aptX Lossless. And these various formats operate at varying bitrates, from basic to high-resolution, with the top of the scale minimizing the lossy properties of compression.

Additionally, information like frequency response can tell you how well the earbuds reproduce low tones to high notes—20Hz to 20kHz is the baseline from which to expand—while the maximum decibel output tells you its capability. At the end of the day, the surest test is to see how the buds sound in your ears, but some of the best earbuds offer detailed EQ customization that almost ensures they’ll play music tailored to your tastes. And if you’re looking for the purest signal, it’s always going to come wired.  

What if I need some peace and quiet?

Almost all earbuds provide some amount of passive noise isolation, which means that they are designed with snug-fitting tips that can mute the outside world. Many of the best earbuds, however, offer active noise cancellation (ANC), which means microphones measure surroundings and speakers emit sound waves to neutralize the ambient noise in your environment—the effect makes listeners feel like they are in a cocoon of silence (though some users report a pressurized sensation). Some high-end earbuds step it up to adaptive noise-canceling, which adapts the noise-canceling algorithm based on the sound levels/types or location, and this is often accompanied by a transparency mode, which lets in (and sometimes amplifies) ambient sound when you want to listen to music but also need to hear external announcements, the traffic coming up behind you, etc.    

Yeah, what if I still have devices with a headphone jack?

If you’re an audiophile needing the most full-spectrum sound or a gamer needing the lowest lag, or maybe you’re just traveling and want to plug into the in-flight entertainment, shop for the best wired earbuds. While Bluetooth 5.0 should provide a fairly seamless connection, the only way to entirely eliminate lag or frequency response loss is to plug in—although the best Bluetooth earbuds limit these shortcomings to the point where most users can’t even notice it.

What if I’m taking a lot of calls?

If you want to talk to your helpful virtual assistant or want to handle work calls with your staff, you’ll need earbuds equipped with microphones (and if the earbuds have features including ANC, it’s safe to assume there are mics to spare). Beamforming microphones will focus on your voice rather than the sounds around you, while cheaper microphones may mean your listener will get lost in the chatter if you’re in a busy place. Earbud microphones are typically protected by fabric designed to limit wind noise, but if you have the buds in an amplifying mode rather than a noise-canceling mode, you may find the wind distracting.     

What if I need my earbuds to last all day?

Earbuds offer playtimes anywhere from a couple of hours to the length of a workday. Charging cases add additional hours—or even days—of battery life before needing to be plugged back in (typically with a USB-C connection). While average earbud life is anywhere between four and eight hours, recharging them typically takes 1.5 hours to 3.5 hours. And many of the best earbuds offer quick-charging options that let you gain an hour or so of playtime in a tiny fraction of that time.   

FAQs

Q: Are cheap wireless earbuds good?

Cheap wireless earbuds can be good, especially if you’re just looking for a pair to pump some tunes on jogs or make your commute more bearable. For less than $50, don’t expect superior audio quality. Still, cheap earbuds can offer surprisingly dynamic and detailed sound, and you should be able to find a pair (even True Wireless earbuds) that will fit comfortably, resist sweat, and even handle phone calls.

Q: What should I look for when buying wireless earbuds?

There’s a lot to look for when buying wireless earbuds; your price point and purpose can go a long way toward determining what features you should prioritize. For example, gaming earbuds must limit latency, while the best wireless earbuds for working out must stay in place and repel moisture. Audiophiles may want to spend more for earbuds with high-end processors and/or analog connections that can deliver exceptionally rich and customizable sound. At the same time, shoppers on a budget may be perfectly happy with a set of cheap wireless earbuds that still manage to provide adequate audio quality.

Q: Why are wireless earbuds so expensive?

By now, the technology has developed enough so that wireless earbuds don’t have to be so expensive. Still, building water-resistant earbuds that stay snugly in place and have tiny 6mm drivers and Bluetooth chips that can convert digital data into rich stereo sound costs money, so many of the best earbuds cost more than $100. But at a certain point, wireless earbuds are so expensive because the market allows companies like Apple to charge a premium. Therefore, you’d be wise to compare features and see what it is that you’re really paying for.

Q: How much do wireless earbuds cost?

The best wireless earbuds can cost anywhere from under $75 to over $300, depending on their features. Premium audio hardware (like specialty drivers and advanced Bluetooth receivers), active noise cancellation, multipoint connectivity, and waterproofing are the main drivers of price.

Final thoughts on the best earbuds

In many ways, the best earbuds are those you don’t even think about. They fit in your ear without coming loose and deliver a sound quality as good as live music. Still, shopping for the best earbuds leaves you with much to consider. Set your price point and go from there. Then, determining whether you need features like ANC, transparency, low latency, and customizable sound depends on how you plan to use them and the sharpness of your ear. With the array of earbud options available, you can definitely find the best earbuds for you. Here’s to making a sound choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best earbuds in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Roadtrips to roadmaps: Inside Rockford Fosgate’s speaker development process https://www.popsci.com/gear/rockford-fosgate-speakers-headquarters-tour/ Wed, 14 Feb 2024 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=602666
Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

Rockford Fosgate makes vehicle audio solutions driven by passion, play, and power. Lots of power. We visited HQ to get an up-close look at their product DNA.

The post Roadtrips to roadmaps: Inside Rockford Fosgate’s speaker development process appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

“And don’t forget to breathe.”

These are the last words I hear before the doors shut, and I forget to breathe. I’m choking on air pressure, disoriented by displacement, and all I do remember is that someone said there’s a panic button a few inches to my right—a big red button I desperately want to punch through the wall.

But I force myself to inhale, will myself to exhale, keep my clenched fist tight to my chest, and 45 seconds of suffocating cycles later, the doors reopen. Shaking my head, my thoughts begin to settle, and I start to remember where I am, why I’m here, what I’m hearing. 

I’m in Tempe, Arizona, in the garage at the headquarters of audio solutions designer and distributor Rockford Fosgate. I’ve just staggered out of the mobile SoundLab “Pressure Chamber”—a purpose-built enclosure in the back of a van that produces a low-end onslaught to demonstrate the brute force of four 19-inch T3 super-woofers, eight 6.5-inch Punch Pro midrange woofers, four Punch Pro bullet tweeters, and 11,000 watts of power. This exercise in excursion punctuates a day where I’ve toured every decade and company department to see how speakers and amplifiers are engineered for elevated performance and adrenaline spikes. 

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

A lot goes into output

If you’ve been into car audio, you’ve probably been in a car with some Rockford audio. The company was launched in 1980 by Jim Fosgate, who invented the Punch EQ in 1973 to make music more impactful before introducing the first car amplifiers to form the brand’s foundation. In the mid-1980s came Punch woofers, followed by computers, decoders, source units, signal processors. From four amps to over 40 years goes the story—hundreds and hundreds of components for mobile, marine, and motorsports. All recognizing that you can’t just take a car speaker, paint it white, and install it in a boat if you want it to last and make a lasting impression.

When I was young, I had friends into 12V (standard voltage for car audio systems and an enthusiast nickname), so I was familiar with the brand even if I never got to turn the family Dodge Caravan into an amateur SoundLab. While they were putting up posters of cars they coveted, Rockford was adding to its very real, very extensive patents wall. But that was just a consumer’s experience; I’m here to explore how concepts move forward in-house and on the road. And the first thing I learn is that you can’t separate the end-users and the end product, even when it’s beginning. 

So many people I’m introduced to throughout the day live up to the company’s tagline, “Built By Fanatics, For Fanatics.” If they haven’t worked for the company for 10, 15, 20 years, they at least worked for a Rockford dealer before they did. Almost everyone has a story about a custom job they did or a prototype they field-tested in their car, Side-by-Side, motorcycle, pontoon. Some of their personal low riders and bikes are in the company’s lookbook; their faces affectionately mean-mugging in promotional videos. But even if you can’t see them, the whole Rockford family’s proverbial fingerprints are all over everything. 

The tour begins, as many things do, at the beginning. In this case, that’s with Wayne Connolly, director of new product development, in the NPD corner—home to the company’s five-year roadmap and a repository for original equipment manufacturer (OEM) and aftermarket product ideas. Connolly walks me through how, with the front of the building as a steering committee, a living list tracks commitments to growth in each category—whether that’s custom Harley-Davidson kits, plug-and-play Stage-5 Jeep systems, or the Power, Punch, and Prime factory upgrade lines, to name a few. This list is fed by suggestions for product research and revisions from people who live the lifestyle. Whether talking to dealers at trade shows and fans at the Sturgis Motorcycle Rally or just spending weekends taking out the UTV or spending time on the lake, project managers are in the feedback loop. 

As the market has shifted, there’s more and more of an emphasis on plug-and-play, easing consumer pain points, providing installation kits that give the confidence to tackle them on their own. And it’s up to the team to recognize when a vehicle’s suspension switching introduces a harmonic and how digital processing can compensate, how to make small systems sound larger while keeping them lighter. It’s about identifying how to control the experience, how to reduce variables without diminishing options.

Once the business case is made, project management takes over. Supervisor JD Massad explains how the teams align to start the phase gate development process and ensure that, no matter how regimented things are, there’s a smile on everyone’s face at the start and the finish. The original vision needs to be addressed, but there are always lessons to be learned for other categories once dollars are attached; people are accountable; basic prototyping begins. On this side of the building, it’s a background in hand-built samples, a love of MDF, Bondo, sandpaper. On another, scanners and CAD, fabricators, and 3D printers. Together, it’s a great fit (and refit and refit and refit … depending on the product iterations).

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

Next door is RTTI, or Rockford Technical Training Institute. It started as a “Top Gun” program, bringing in nationwide installers to teach them how to work tighter, cleaner to give Rockford dealers an advantage. RTTI also handles building demo vehicles (like the SoundLab) to showcase the brand at events. And, on top of all that, RTTI works with the mechanical engineering team to develop enclosures and wiring harnesses and all the other parts to a Goldilocks box that answers the problem statements. Or, as Rick Jones, vehicle applications manager, puts it, laughing, “We chase shiny objects back here.” 

For example, a few years ago, a group of RTTI guys set out to address how to get more low energy on a motorcycle; where to fit a subwoofer on a Harley. A saddlebag was the logical solution, but one of the biggest challenges was not forcing a rider to give up storage space permanently. So, making the enclosure removable became the primary objective, requiring custom parts to manage wires. 

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

What makes RTTI, and Rockford in general, perfectly suited for this challenge is the wealth of machines (including SawStop, CNC, and router tables, FDM and resin 3D printers and laser cutters) plus the interplay between departments. When it comes to sound for speed, speed to market is key to success. So once they decided on the slim-fit woofer and a sealed versus ported enclosure, the team could quickly pull a mold of the bag, do some fiberglass models, foam them out. Pretty close? Grab the Creaform 3D scanner, capture the rough mock-up and more exact vehicle dimensions, then kick the concept to mechanical engineering to clean it up in CAD to get the exact geometry and ensure the driver’s full excursion clears obstacles—all to make sure it fits the mechanical envelope. Do some thermal modeling. 

Soon, the time comes for a rough 3D print to outfit with an actual driver and make sure everything is hitting the acoustic target. Then it’s on to fit, fastenings, finish … a textured pre-production part. A physical object that lets you know if the render translates into something inspiring to handle. Straightforward, eh? It almost sounds simple (it isn’t) … maybe if the goalposts didn’t change constantly (luckily, project management’s got their back as things move forward).

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

You’ve gotta be flexible to get the right stiffness

From the install bay, we wander to the engineering bullpens—tight pods of cubicles set up for quick collaboration, a FaroArm scanner set in the center as another tool to get prototypes into SolidWorks CAD and make sure drawings match parts. Detection, inspection, perfection. Here, they help realize the vision of how parts should integrate with vehicles, assuring every bracket allows an easy install and every material choice and position allows for airflow and thermal efficiency, all while working with an industrial design team to marry Rockford’s visual flavor with the mechanical intent.

On the other side of the aisle is loudspeaker engineering, tasked with ensuring everything put in those painstakingly designed enclosures sounds good and holds up no matter the sustained volume or extenuating circumstances. Unlike two-channel home audio manufacturers, who have the luxury of designing for controlled environments, Rockford has to look beyond magnetics, electrical, thermal, acoustic motion to motor structures, spiders, suspensions—all parts that can perform in and stand up to open-air elements.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

Frank Barone, director of acoustic engineering, and Ada Puyot, acoustic design engineer, walk me through modeling software for motor geometry. Simulations allow the team to see the typical things, like efficiency, how low it’s going to play, motor force, how much it can move without getting distorted, etc. Any changes—for example, to the length of the voice coil, the fine wire that reacts to the motor’s magnetic field and moves the speakers—are reflected in real-time, showing how decisions will affect the sound signature. The press of a button can change the shape and surround of a speaker, pull up any legacy assemblies to see what can be adapted. 

And after broad simulations comes far more granular finite element magnetic modeling, which allows for fine-tuning, seeing how any tweaks to material will impact response well before actual money is on the line. Seeing how to avoid saturation can improve design while addressing costs. Being able to change spider geometry or corrugation heights helps design for the roof of a UTV versus a standard car mount. Programs inform what individual parts are worth ordering to test to see where prediction meets actual measurements on the way to a finished product. A wall of code-named concept speakers shows how many precursors go before production. Purpose-built, indeed.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

All the modeling in the world doesn’t matter if the math doesn’t check out, of course, and that’s where the testing and validation department comes in. Once it’s decided that it’s worth calling in hard parts for prototyping, it’s handed over to Tom Dubeck, loudspeaker technician, and the Klippel diagnostics system. Measured in a test baffle with a combination of a laser displacement sensor to calculate efficiency and a microphone for acoustic data, material parameters like how much force it takes to move a cone five or 10 millimeters can be analyzed, helping determine what stiffness and damping are needed. Collecting these parameters informs the modeling of how the speakers perform in different boxes and situations.

Getting farfield measurements and capturing curves is invaluable. But people who don’t measure output response don’t listen to sweep tones quickly running through low to high frequencies. So, on the other side of the room are two shrouded arrays of speakers in development. Versions with slight changes—to motor structure, tweeter material, crossovers, what have you—are set in parallel behind acoustically transparent fabric, flanked by in-production Rockford drivers as well as competitor transducers. Folks from around the building come in to do some partitive listening and take notes. 

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

One place they don’t go to listen, however, is our next destination. It’s called the Boom Room, a trailer separate from the main building where Dubeck puts devices under test through a gauntlet, leaving them to play at full volume for days—first to see if they can maintain at a certain voltage and then pushed to the point of failure. A Klippel system in the Boom Room control room monitors a test of up to eight speakers at a time, generating a signal sent to 1600W amplifiers that is sent back to the Klippel and out to the drivers. Subwoofers, ported and sealed, can be seated in permanent enclosures, while full-range speakers hang from the ceiling. It smells of torn surrounds, burnt voice coils, and victory. There’s also an apparatus to simulate high ambient temperature if components need to be evaluated in a thermal chamber. Eventually, the speakers return to the control room, where autopsies are performed and points of failure confirmed.

Eventually, prototypes graduate to production runs, which is when the Klippel system comes into play one last time. Assembly lines are equipped with special QC enclosures, and every speaker that rolls off undergoes a short tolerance test of nonlinear parameters to ensure there’s consistently no distortion and impedance falls where it should. 

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

So, a new speaker is born. But it still needs help finding its voice. And that takes place in the tuning room—a room big enough for a car, UTV, or a couple of Harleys, which is what’s in there when I meet Joe Merritt, acoustic systems engineer, to hear about how the amplifier’s DSP is used to put the finishing touches on the sonic signature. 

In the case of the H-D CVO platform, which is fitted with a model-specific speaker and amp package, Rockford has a custom six-microphone rig built into a seat, so it’s perfectly positioned. The microphones are at various heights to simulate the range of average rider heights and reflect what they’re hearing. The room also allows the engine to run and the bike to be tricked into thinking it’s moving at speed, so the dynamic EQ reacts accordingly. Plus, there’s a PA for playing wind/road noise. The microphones feed their readings to a computer sound card, and a real-time analyzer puts an average curve up against the target—a rising response with naturalistic mids surrounded by energized bass and treble to compensate for outdoor applications. The DSP chip is then tweaked to achieve the desired outcome—one of the benefits of one company producing all the kit components.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

Staying power

It’s now time for the last tour stop, which is also the company’s starting point: amplifiers. Rockford started out producing big power, big watts per dollar, Class A/B all the way. But vehicles have gotten smaller and—especially in the case of motorcycles and marine—the company adapted, moving into the more compact, higher efficiency Class D. Similarly, in 1993, the company introduced something called Symmetry, which was a modular, card-based rack computer for the car—DSP before it was convenient. Since then, there have been infotainment systems and other integration pieces. Rockford has always evolved while maintaining an approach that controls the signal path from start to finish for maximum reliability.

Erik Gundersen, director of advanced engineering, walks me through the solder and sine waves. As in all divisions, there’s a real whiteboard-to-blacktop approach, with simulations allowing the team to tweak circuits on a screen well before anything gets to PCB layout and physical samples. And there are a host of internal and external challenges, from designing an amplifier that can maintain more uniform power across varying impedance loads to dealing with radio frequency challenges and electromagnetic compatibility in the age of Bluetooth, WiFi, USB, DSP. Especially with the finite form factor in something like a Harley, where it’s harder to ensure tightly oriented circuitry won’t produce interference and excess energy will have somewhere to dissipate. Marine products have to perform in completely different harsh conditions. Plus, everything needs to play nicely with RF Connect, the proprietary smartphone app that pairs via Bluetooth and allows users to set up, control, tune, and update products. At the same time, electric vehicles open up new possibilities, if current from their batteries is opened up.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

One of the ways Rockford guarantees its amplifiers perform (often over-perform) as promised is through another homegrown creation: RATS, or Rockford Automated Test System. Jason Gerlitz, senior production validation manager, explains that all overseas production facilities have this custom hardware-software combo and—as units undergo tests for Signal-to-Noise Ratio, burn-in, and more—results are sent to the cloud so that headquarters can analyze it and identify any issues. And only devices that pass every test get a “birth certificate,” as well as a serial number, allowing them to ship.  

And once they’ve shipped? Well, Rockford even films its own installation videos—providing a visual reference, the estimated time it takes, and the expected difficulty. They have a podcast studio, as well, to produce collateral for dealerships and OEM partners that maintains the brand’s voice. The same marketing team responsible for all this output to promote current products is always gathering input from shows and social media to feed back into the steering committee and product development. Know what they didn’t capture, thankfully? My time in and after the SoundLab. That doesn’t mean I’m done with Rockford’s demo vehicles, however.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

To wind down the day, we drive northeast of Tempe out to Saguaro Lake. First, we take a Polaris Ranger onto the Butcher Lake off-highway vehicles trail. The SxS is equipped with a Rockford “Element Ready” all-in-one concept, including an audio roof with eight 8-inch speakers, two 10-inch subwoofers, a 1500-watt amplifier, and a 2.7-inch source unit, as well as a rear audio cap with four more 8-inch speakers and 800 watts and 10-inch subwoofers under the back seat. I’m told that despite all that, the system can be easily installed in under an hour, ready for the trails, dunes, mud, bonfires. The rocky loop we take does a great job of rattling my bones, but even if we were stationary, the $10,000 in closed-loop audio concepts would have left me thunderstruck.

Finally, we head down to the lake itself and board a supercharged pontoon equipped with the company’s Marine Audio components, naturally. It’s a different environment but the same built-to-endure experience. Requests are taken, and while I might not love Steely Dan or Dave Matthews Band, I can appreciate the open-air clarity delivered by these shiny objects. As I reflect on Rockford Fosgate’s commitment to engineering from the ground up, even when the ground is this big blue watery road, I don’t forget to relax and breathe.

Speakers photo
Rockford Fosgate

The post Roadtrips to roadmaps: Inside Rockford Fosgate’s speaker development process appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best fat tire electric bikes for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fat-tire-electric-bikes/ Tue, 13 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=602291
Quietkat Apex Pro fat tire electric bike in a pine forest
Quietkat

These electric fat bikes—characterized by their wide tires, durable frames, and versatile geometry—are all-terrain beasts.

The post The best fat tire electric bikes for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Quietkat Apex Pro fat tire electric bike in a pine forest
Quietkat

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Rad Power RadRover 6 Plus on a plain white background. Rad Power RadRover 6 Plus
SEE IT

Rad Power’s RadRover 6 Plus can run up to 45 miles, and its plush seat ensures you’ll have a comfortable long-distance ride.

Best splurge Quietkat Apex Pro on a plain white background. Quietkat Apex Pro
SEE IT

A gigantic battery, overpowered motor, and motorcycle-like capabilities justify the Apex Pro’s $5,000 price tag.

Best budget Himiway Cruiser on a plain white background. Himiway Cruiser
SEE IT

For under $1,000 you’re getting a perfectly capable fat ire ebike with good front suspension, versatile geometry, and a sturdy rear rack.

There are few bike styles that are as all-around capable as fat tire e-bikes. On the one hand, you have the burly, all-terrain surefootedness of a fat bike; on the other, you have the above-and-beyond performance provided by an electric motor. In other words, the best fat tire electric bikes offer the best of both worlds, whether on the road or in the backcountry, which is why we’re offering our picks for the best of the best. 

How we chose the best fat tire e-bikes

As a lifelong cyclist—both road and trail—I offer some 30 years of experience riding bikes of all types. In recent years, I’ve relentlessly tested the best electric bikes and e-bike conversion kits and reviewed them for publications like Popular Science, Bicycling, Popular Mechanics, the Manual, and more. For this list, I explored recent releases from an extremely wide range of brands, testing bikes for different riding needs, experience levels, and budgets. My firsthand tests have been bolstered by input from the Popular Science editors and other expert reviewers. 

The best fat tire electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Fat tire electric bikes are characterized by their wide tires, durable frames, and versatile geometry. Not only does that rank them among the ablest of rides for offroad trails and surfaces, but unlike electric mountain bikes, a fat tire bike’s more traditional design makes them solid e-bikes for transit in city centers as well. Here are our top recommendations for these top all-rounders.

Best overall: Rad Power RadRover 6 Plus

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750W
  • Torque: 50Nm
  • Battery capacity: 589-672Wh (depending on region)

Pros

  • Supremely comfortable
  • Extremely versatile
  • Rad Power’s vast ecosystem of accessories

Cons

  • Not designed for rougher terrain or trails

The RadRover from Rad Power has gone through several iterations now, and the 6 Plus brings it to a near-perfect package if you’re looking for an extremely versatile fat tire e-bike. In terms of performance, its 750W, 50Nm motor is solidly powerful, delivering plenty of oomph for climbing urban hills or moderate offroad hills. And its battery capacity is above average, providing a potential range upwards of 45 miles (though realistically more like 30). 

Beyond the electronics, it’s also a well-considered bike by pretty much every measure. The frame geometry is highly versatile, suited for riders of a variety of body types to use in a variety of conditions. Its hydraulic disc brakes are plenty reliable. The moderate front suspension cruises over bumps, and the included headlamp and sturdy fenders are nice touches. Add its generously padded seat, and you’ve got an incredibly comfortable cruiser.

What’s more, it can be endlessly customized via Rad Power’s vast ecosystem of accessories, such as baskets, cargo carriers, bags, bottles, consoles, locks, mirrors, lights, phone mounts, tire armor, passenger seats, trailers, and even pet carriers—and a whole lot more. If you’re looking for a bike geared more toward trail riding, this probably isn’t your best option, but for all practical purposes, this is a great fat tire e-bike. 

Best value: Heybike Mars 2.0

Heybike

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 1200W
  • Torque: 80Nm
  • Battery capacity: 600Wh

Pros

  • Wildly powerful motor
  • Great torque
  • Foldable

Cons

  • Folding can be cumbersome
  • Difficult to ride if the battery runs out

The Mars 2.0 from Heybike gets our value pick because it packs a lot of bike into an affordable, foldable package. That 1200W motor is outright wild, especially coupled with its 80Nmn torque. Suffice it to say that you’ll never have trouble getting up to speed with this bike. Its 600Wh battery is decent in terms of capacity, but don’t let yourself run out of juice while far from your destination, as its high center of gravity and relatively high weight make it difficult to pedal and control when unpowered. 

In terms of design, the fact that it offers so much power in a foldable bike makes it extremely good for around-town commutes. It’ll zip you wherever you need to go; after that, you can fold it up and bring it inside. It can be a bit cumbersome to fold, but that’s pretty common among folding e-bikes. All in all, this is a great fat tire e-bike for versatile, go-anywhere riding. 

Best for women: Juiced Ripracer

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750W
  • Torque: 80Nm
  • Battery capacity: 777Wh

Pros

  • Smaller size is perfect for smaller body types
  • Solid electronic specs
  • Great throttle

Cons

  • No shocks
  • No speeds

Women often point out that too many or even most bikes are designed with men in mind. To that end, the Juiced Ripracer is the ideal solution. It’s a great bike for anybody except the tallest riders, but women and people with smaller bodies, in particular, will appreciate its trimmed-down stature and lower center of gravity. 

Beyond that, it puts up impressive numbers. Its 750W, 80Nm motor is fast and hill-defying, and its 777Wh battery is plenty big, especially considering its lighter, range-extending weight. And Juiced makes one of the best throttles in the business. It’s responsive and quick, and the twisting motorcycle-style design has a natural feel to it. It doesn’t have shocks, but the pillowy tires more or less negate the need, and it doesn’t have geared speeds, but the powerful motor makes them unnecessary. The Ripracer is a great e-bike all-around, and while it’s perfectly fine for urban use, it may be literally perfect for moderate offroad trails. 

Best design: Juiced Scrambler X2

Juiced

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 1000W
  • Torque: 90Nm
  • Battery capacity: 881Wh

Pros

  • Monster specs
  • Cool design
  • Comfortable seating

Cons

  • Standard mirrors and turn signals would be nice

For our “best design” distinction, we’re once again looking to Juiced because the Scrambler X2 is simply a very well-thought-out bike. The central concept is that it’s essentially a modestly powered electric dirtbike, but the word “modestly” is doing a lot of work there because these specs are great as far as e-bikes go. A 1000W, 90Nm motor with an 881Wh battery? What a beast. 

But there are a lot of bikes with good stats on this list. The Scrambler X2 stands out because of its sleek, retro design concept. Super comfortable seating and stance make it great for longer rides. The front shocks handle bumps well, and the wide, bright headlamp is great for visibility. And it really feels like a motorbike replacement. With that in mind, the addition of standard mirrors and turn signals would be a plus, but that’s pretty nitpicky. If you’re looking for a very cool, very capable electric fat tire bike, this is definitely worth consideration. 

Best rated: Ride1Up Rift

Ride1UP

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750W
  • Torque: 95Nm
  • Battery capacity: 960Wh

Pros

  • Great performance
  • Good offroad geometry
  • Massive battery capacity

Cons

  • Passenger kit is dubious

There are a lot of bikes that could technically rank as “best rated” if you’re looking at stars or number scales, but I’m going with the Ride1Up Rift because few bikes out there so consistently leave riders satisfied. It simply does pretty much everything right. 

Its motor and battery are great—especially in terms of torque and range. 95Nm or torque will climb anything, and 960Wh of battery will keep going for 50 miles, easy. Its geometry is also nicely versatile. While you can ride it in pretty much any situation, it’s got a little more forward lean to it, accentuating offroad riding, further bolstered by its great front shocks. Pretty much the only real criticism I can find is that the not-included passenger kit only supports 150 pounds, which means kids and smaller passengers only. But that’s a very minor detail. In pretty much every way you could actually want it to be, this is a solid e-bike.

Best splurge: Quietkat Apex Pro

Quietkat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 1000W
  • Torque: 160Nm
  • Battery capacity: 820Wh

Pros

  • Crazy strong torque
  • “Unlimited” mode
  • Insane durability

Cons

  • Suspension is somewhat stiff

To be perfectly honest, most people don’t need this bike, and that’s what makes the Quietkat Apex Pro an ideal splurge. I don’t think there is a tougher bike out there, period. It’s designed specifically for extreme backcountry use, like hunting or fishing, or any other time you expect to haul gear deep into the wilderness. 

With its overpowered motor (160Nm or torque?!), huge battery, and virtually indestructible durability, it is ideal for ultra-adventure riding. I haven’t even mentioned the “Unlimited” throttle mode, which basically turns it into a straight-up motorbike capable of going speeds beyond the legal limit for e-bikes, so the company advises that you use this mode only once you get off the grid. There’s really not much else to say. The suspension is maybe a little stiff, but who cares? “Unlimited” mode speaks for itself. 

Best budget: Himiway Cruiser

Himiway

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750W
  • Torque: 80Nm
  • Battery capacity: 840Wh

Pros

  • Massive hill-climbing torque
  • Powerful motor
  • Big battery

Cons

  • Pedal assist lag
  • Mechanical brakes

For a sub-thousand-dollar ebike, the Himiway Cruiser puts up some admirable stats. Its 750W motor is strong and quick, particularly when you factor in that 80Nm torque, making this an absolute hill-killer. Its massive battery is great, too, capable of quite easily surpassing 40 miles on a single charge. The display can be a bit glitchy in terms of speed accuracy, and you may notice a lag to the pedal assist, but barring these details, the electronic specs are solid. 

In terms of design, it’s a well-rounded bike with good front suspension, versatile geometry, and an all-around comfortable ride. The included rear rack is sturdy, and it accommodates a pretty decent range of accessories. It’s a fairly heavy bike, so I’m not a huge fan of its mechanical brakes—something this loaded would definitely benefit from hydraulic disc brakes. That being said, this is an affordable bike that delivers specs you’d typically expect to pay much more for. 

What to consider when picking a fat tire electric bike

The e-bike space is increasingly dominated by fat tire models because so many riders appreciate the improved smoothness, traction, and versatility. That being said, there are a few things you need to keep in mind to ensure that you get one of the best rather than one of the many. 

Bike motor: power and torque

In most cases, your first thoughts should be of the motor. While on flat pavement, the motor might not make a huge difference, but if you plan on riding offroad or uphill, you will want solid wattage and torque. For a fat tire e-bike, never dip below a 500W motor, and ideally, look at 750W or up. This will ensure that your motor performs on hills and won’t burn out if you push it too hard. 

The torque determines a motor’s ability to transfer rotational power to the back wheel. More torque equals more hill-climbing ability, and it helps get the bike moving from a complete stop. Torque is measured in newton-meters, and you’ll never want less than 50Nm. 

Battery range

If you were shopping for a daily commuter, I would advise getting a battery that balances capacity and weight because high-capacity batteries tend to make an e-bike much heavier. But with fat bikes, which you’ll typically use more recreationally, I say go big or go home. You want a huge battery to stay out and play all day. Battery capacity is measured in watt-hours, and you’ll never want less than 500Wh. What that translates into in terms of range depends on factors like terrain, incline, speed, rider weight, and pedal assist setting, but you can count on that to last between 20-40 miles.

Comfortable ride

If you’re not comfortable on a bike, you won’t enjoy riding it. Comfort is largely a matter of individual preference, but there are a few generalities you can consider. Do you prefer a bike that has a more upright or forward-leaning stance? Do you like a seat that is plush or firm? A frame that’s smaller or larger? These can help you zero in on a few suitable models. From there, it never hurts to go for a test ride.

Off-road capability

Fat tire bikes tend to be more all-purpose applicable than mountain-specific bikes, but they still lean toward off-road riding thanks to their wide, heavily studded tires, which lend themselves to soft and irregular surfaces. Even so, some fat bikes deliver more or less all-terrain capability. Models with more suspension and fewer cargo accessories are often more off-road oriented, but not always. Sometimes, the best way to know whether a bike is intended for heavier off-road use is simply by reading the manufacturer’s description. 

Suspension

Speaking of suspension, this can be an important consideration. Some people don’t need suspension at all, especially with the bouncy cushioning of fat tires. Others may prefer a good front suspension to take the edge off bumps and uncertain surfaces. 

FAQs

Q: Are fat tires good for electric bikes?

In the past, fat tires were used primarily for off-roading on soft surfaces, but they’ve become increasingly popular for all riding purposes thanks to their gentle, surefooted ride. In fact, these days, they’re beginning to rival narrower road tires in terms of popularity.

Q: How long do e-bike fat tires last?

That’s an extremely broad question, as a fat tire’s lifespan is determined by factors like make, usage, load weight, and so on. Generally speaking, you can expect a set of fat tires to last somewhere between 1,000 and 3,000 miles. 

Q: What are the disadvantages of fat tires on e-bikes?

Fat tires are big and bulky, which can make them heavier and more challenging to lift onto a rack or carry upstairs. 

Q: Are fat tire electric bikes harder to pedal?

While fat tires can feel a bit sluggish when pedaling on paved surfaces, the motor of an e-bike tends to negate the issue.

Q: Are fat tire e-bikes good for street riding?

They can be great for street riding. The downsides are minimal, but the upsides are improved traction, stability, and smoothness. 

Q: Are fat tires good for winter?

Fat tires are the go-to for riding on snow or otherwise slick surfaces. In snow, experienced riders will often deflate their fat tires to as low as 5psi in order to spread the traction. 

Q: Can fat tire e-bikes manage backcountry use?

Absolutely. In fact, for unknown terrain where you might hit mud, sand, swamp, or otherwise soft ground, they can be invaluable for getting through whatever nature throws at you.

Final thoughts on the best fat tire electric bike

I was skeptical of the rising popularity of fat tires on e-bikes at first, but much to my surprise, they’ve become my ride of choice. The fusion of fat tire traction and softness with electric power and performance results in an outstanding level of versatility. While they tend to be heavier and more cumbersome than their conventional tire or non-electric counterparts, the benefits definitely outweigh what few drawbacks there are. It’s no surprise that fat tire e-bikes are becoming so popular in cycling.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best fat tire electric bikes for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated clothing for cold weather, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-clothing/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582173
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Heated clothing can keep you warm during chilly morning dog walks, Friday night football games, and every occasion in between.

The post The best heated clothing for cold weather, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best jacket A Gobi Grit black heated work jacket on a plain background Gobi Grit Men's Heated Work Jacket
SEE IT

Working outside doesn’t mean you have to be chilly while you do it.

Best vest ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men ORORO Men's Lightweight Heated Vest
SEE IT

This vest heats up fast to get you warm quick.

Best slippers A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slippers
SEE IT

Perfect for walking the dog or fetching the morning paper.

If the temperatures are dropping and layers aren’t cutting it, consider upping your cozy game with heated clothing. Heated clothing provides covert, fireside-esque warmth while remaining sleek and lightweight. Clothing that uses thermal lining relies on your own body heat to create warmth. Heated clothing uses a network of small, heat-conducting flexible wires powered by a detachable, rechargeable battery. Both the wires and the rechargeable batteries are slim and hardly noticeable. Wearing a piece of heated clothing should feel just like wearing a regular jacket, vest, or pair of gloves. A button—usually on the glove’s cuff or front of the jacket—lets you control the temperature. The best heated clothing keeps you warm and comfy even when outside feels like the Arctic Circle.

How we chose the best heated clothing

It’s highly unlikely you can go the entire winter without going outside. Eventually, you’ll have to walk away from one of the best space heaters. However, just because you must stand out in the cold doesn’t mean you should freeze. We looked at our past heated gear coverage, rounded up our favorites, and tested new options. We also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to separate the tepid from the hot.

The best heated clothing: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’ve considered wearing something, it most likely comes in heated form. One of our choices will channel your inner Heat Miser when you’re about to turn into Mr. Snow.

Best jacket: Gobi Grit Men’s Heated Work Jacket

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton with nylon lining
  • Max temp: 140 degrees
  • Heat settings: 3
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • 5 heating zones provide full coverage
  • Big, durable jacket with inner lining
  • Decent battery life

Cons

  • Fewer heat settings than other options

If you’re working outside in cold weather—not simply enduring it—you need something heavier than a shell, a fleece, or a hoodie. The Gobi Grit heated workwear jacket offers a heavier layer of electric warmth, ensuring you are ready to spend a full day in the cold. When things get rough, you can turn on the heat, which should last between 4.5 and 9 hours, depending on the setting. The company also makes heated hoodies for when you are enduring the cold. And, if you’re looking for something in a specific style, check out our other favorite heated jackets.

Best vest: ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (100°F), Medium (120°F), High (130°F)
  • Battery life: 10 hours

Pros

  • Quick heating
  • Machine washable
  • Zippered pockets

Cons

  • Might be too tight to fit under bulkier jackets
  • Only a 10-degree difference between medium and high settings

This heated vest for men is tailored neatly to the body and is machine washable. In seconds, the heating elements warm up the vest, which can be adjusted according to your comfort. It even includes a USB charging port within the vest battery that you can use for your cell phone. If you’re looking for a heated vest for a specific activity, like riding your motorcycle, check out our complete list of heated vests.

Best gloves: Gordini Forge Heated Gloves

Emily Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low)-150°F (high)
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Sizes: Medium/Large; Large/XL
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Expensive

Gorgini’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures, from shoveling to skiing.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most. You can also connect it to the clim8 app (for iOS and Android) to track battery life and customize your gloves’ temperature.

They’re a bit thick but still flexible enough to shift gears on a bicycle or hold ski poles. All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for. Gordini also sells the Forge in women’s so everyone can have warm hands while traversing the snow. They’re expensive, but we think the smart capabilities and craftsmanship is worth the cost.

Best socks: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is hardly noticeable in its calf pocket or while wearing tight pants. Our favorite feature is the remote, which lets you change the heat settings without bending over. Consider our other favorite heated socks if you want to stock up on multiple pairs.

Best slippers: Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slipper

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low
  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three heat levels (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. The previous iteration had a faux fur lining—although we loved the extra snuggliness, the new version ditches the bulky, a-little-too-hot fur for soft fleece that doesn’t make your feet feel like a sauna. You can also get insole warmers (even battery-powered ones) to turn any house shoe into a heated slipper.

Best wearable electric blanket: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. Need something a bit less wearable and a bit more shareable? Check out our other heated blanket picks.

Best hand warmers: HotHands Hand Warmer

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

Want to save money on a handy choice from above? Any gloves are heated gloves with these disposable hand warmers from HotHands—a budget-friendly staple for keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes. Keep them in your glovebox or purse so you’ll never be caught with cold hands. If you’re looking for something reusable, we have an entire list for you.

Things to consider when buying the best heated clothing

With an entire closet’s-worth of options to choose from, what should you know when clicking “add to cart”? Here’s the short of it so you can spend more time exploring in your new hot digs:

Charging times

Heated clothing requires the use of a lithium-ion battery to power the heating elements. And, like other portable batteries and power banks, they take a bit of time to reach 100 percent. Prepare accordingly if you’re going to spend all day hitting the slopes or all night cheering in the stands. Most batteries in heated clothing also double as a portable charger in a pinch. We love killing two birds with one stone.

Machine washability

“Heated elements” plus “water” must equal “disaster” when it comes to heated clothing, right? Wrong! Most heated clothing can be washed—emphasis on the “most.” Read the care label before throwing the item in the wash, and make sure to remove the rechargeable batteries. You most definitely don’t want to run those through the washer.

Temperature

A piece of heated clothing that’s too hot leads to a sweaty person, which is not good when exposed to cold temperatures. You want to limit sweating since rapidly evaporating perspiration chills you … not exactly what you want when you’re wearing heated clothing to stay warm.

FAQs

Q: Can you wear a heated jacket in the rain?

It depends. If your jacket is machine washable or has a water-propelling shell, consider your jacket safe. Always check with the manufacturer’s care instructions before jumping in a puddle on a cold rainy day.

Q: Can you bring heated clothing on a plane?

Yes. TSA doesn’t prohibit heated clothing on planes. You only need to take electronic items larger than a cellphone or tablet from your carry-on. It’s highly unlikely the battery for your heated clothing is larger than a portable charger.

Q: Is battery-heated clothing safe?

Yes. We haven’t heard of any heated jackets or vests blowing up or catching fire. However, if you feel any sparks or electrocution, take the article off immediately, turn it off, and contact the manufacturer’s customer service line for guidance.

Final thoughts on the best heated clothing

If you’d rather not look like Randy in that one scene from A Christmas Story, consider some heated clothing for more warmth with fewer layers. The heated elements and batteries in heated clothing are thin and discreet—no one would know you’re wearing a heated jacket or vest unless you told them. And, with incredible choices like these, you’ll want to tell the entire world how cozy you are.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated clothing for cold weather, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor motion sensor lights for your home or business in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-motion-sensor-lights/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586281
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Security is worth every penny you pay for it. So is convenience.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights for your home or business in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall white LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light on a white background LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light
SEE IT

Easy to install with good waterproofing at a really strong price point, you can get all you need from the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.

Best value HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED on a white background HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED
SEE IT

A solar-powered model at a super reasonable price, these lights don’t offer must customization in terms of where they points but do offer great detection within 26 feet.

Best smart Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor and box on a white background Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor
SEE IT

This smart device-compatible motion sensor can interface with Alexa, Google, or Apple HomeKit, giving you tons of customizability and control to existing light fixtures.

Motion sensor lights make your home safer and more convenient without a lot of complicated installation. These smart illumination sources can tell when something enters their field of view and automatically shine light where it needs to go. They’re handy for when you get home late and need some light to help guide you in with the groceries. And they act as a deterrent for thieves and trespassers who might get startled by the sudden loss of their cover. The best motion sensor lights offer excellent illumination with minimal maintenance. Here’s our list of approved models.

How we chose the best outdoor motion sensor lights

We’ve looked at a wide variety of reviews from real-world users, as well as in-the-field experts. We consulted colleagues and friends who have used these brands around their own homes. We then took the general consensus and distilled it down into categories to give you a better sense of what might be a good choice for your personal use. The difference in quality between any of our choices is quite small. So, if there are particular features you’re looking for, it may be the best choice not to go for our “best overall” model. Instead, look for something more specific to your needs, like a smart sensor or one with a camera. All of them equally can be considered the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

The best outdoor motion sensor lights: Reviews & Recommendations

There are a wide variety of motion sensor lights on the market, making it hard to sort through. Which brands are reliable? What ones produce a strong and consistent glow? Which have cool smart features or cameras that increase security even further? We’ve researched from the lawn to the landings so we can let you know and lead you to the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Best overall: LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light

LEONLITE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.07 inches long x 7.48 inches wide by 5.9 inches high
  • Range: 70 feet
  • Detection angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 20

Pros

  • Strong range
  • Reasonable price
  • IP65 waterproofing
  • 50,000-hour lifespan
  • Easy installation

Cons

  • Lights can block sensor if not properly adjusted
  • Look doesn’t really blend with most homes
  • Gasket seals are lowest-quality part

Offering a lot of features and easy installation at a low price, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is appropriate for a lot of situations, even if its styling leaves something to be desired. One of the nicest features is the ability to adjust the motion sensor’s range out to about 70 feet. However, if your area of worry is closer, you can slide a dial to shorten that range. That way, your neighbor’s dog cavorting in the backyard won’t set it off. There are additional modes, including just turning the light on all the time, and having it automatically come on at night and turn off during the day.

Being an LED light, the low-wattage bulbs produce just as much light without using as much energy as traditional bulbs. If you’re purchasing your motion sensor light with the intention of lowering your power consumption, the LEONLITE LED is a good choice. Even if you live in an area with a lot of rain or other inclement weather, the light’s IP65 waterproofing and solid aluminum construction can hold up to a lot of punishment from the elements. The fixture has a lifespan of 50,000 hours, meaning you’ll be using it for years to come.

The main drawback of the LEONLITE LED is its rather industrial styling. It’s not a particularly fashionable light. It comes in black and white, but as of writing, the black model is more expensive than the white one. The included gaskets, which seal the bulbs in their casings, are a bit weak, so don’t screw too tight when installing. You can find replacement parts made of sturdier metal at any hardware store if needed. Speaking of installing, the LEONLITE LED installs very easily. Just make sure you adjust the lamps so that they don’t cover any of the spots you want to be monitored with the motion sensor.

For its reasonable price and many features, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is our best overall outdoor motion sensor light.

Best smart: Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor

Philips Hue

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 2.5 inches long by 3 inches wide by 3 inches high
  • Range: 39 feet
  • Detection angle: 160 degree horizontal / 80 degree vertical
  • Watts: n/a

Pros

  • Can integrate existing fixtures if you use specialized bulbs
  • Small and unobtrusive
  • Smart features allow you to control lights from your phone or smart device
  • Can change the color of the Philips Hue bulbs
  • Lots of other smart light devices that can work alongside it

Cons

  • Expensive to fully kit out
  • Specialized bulb are expensive to replace
  • Smaller range than dedicated motion detection lights

If you’re into connecting your home’s electronic devices to a smart hub like Amazon’s Alexa, Google’s Google Assistant, or Apple’s HomeKit, Philips—a longtime trusted name in home electronics (and smart light bulbs)—has an excellent line of bulbs, fixtures and, most importantly, a motion sensor.

This Philips Hue motion sensor doesn’t include any built-in lighting. But you can purchase compatible lighting devices or special Philips Hue bulbs to connect your existing fixtures to your motion sensor and your smart-home network. However, this all requires the additional purchase of a Hue Bridge. So make sure you buy everything you need if you’re going to go smart, or you might end up with a useless device.

Once you connect and set up your network of smart bulbs and motion detector(s), you’re going to have more options than you ever expected. You can change the color of your bulbs, creating ambient light or different lighting for different functions. That includes softer light when you arrive home at night and stronger light when you’re asleep to deter animals and criminals. You can use a phone app to adjust your settings, or turn your lights on or off at any time.

The motion detector device is easy to install and doesn’t have to be anywhere near the light fixture that it’s connected to. It offers tons of flexibility in terms of the area of coverage. It’s also small enough and innocuous enough that it doesn’t drastically change the look of your home area. It may even be hard to spot unless you’re quite close to it. This can be good or bad. Your home won’t have an eyesore on it, but criminals may not sit it and decide that it’s not worth trying to case your place (though the lights turning on as they get close hopefully will do the trick).

Choosing the Philips Hue means you’re going to have more options than ever before, but it also requires wading into an expensive and extensive world of smart devices. If you’re already a smart home devotee, it makes sense to have your motion sensor work with it, but if you’re not, think long and hard before committing. However, once you decide to go smart, the Philips Hue Outdoor Sensor is the best smart outdoor motion sensor (once you add a) light.

Best LED: LEPOWER LED Security Light

LEPOWER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.05 inches long x 5.38 inches wide x 8.24 inches high
  • Range: 72 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees 
  • Watts: 38

Pros

  • Each of the three lights is independently adjustable
  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Light time adjustable from 10 seconds to 10 minutes
  • Relatively easy to install
  • Very bright

Cons

  • No overnight feature
  • No solar power
  • Larger power consumption than our best overall

If you’re looking for brightness, our best LED outdoor motion sensor light is the LEPOWER LED Security Light. This large, three-part motion sensor light has a range of up to 72 feet, though it works better within 24 at a height of 7.5 to 10 feet.  Like our best overall model, it’s IP65 Waterproof and aluminum, but the lights are built-in with a different style of bulb that is not replaceable. It uses almost twice the power of our best overall, but you get that power in the light. This thing is BRIGHT, maybe too bright if you’re close to your neighbors. That strength makes this perfect for larger-lot homes and garages.

You’re not going to get an overnight feature, meaning you can’t use it dusk-to-dawn, but you can set the duration of the motion sensor light from 10 seconds all the way to 10 minutes, or simply turn it on. Each of the three lights is independently adjustable, as is the motion sensor unit. You can either bend all three of the light areas to focus on one spot, or widen them out to cover the most area possible. This unit is relatively easy to install, no more so than expected with an outdoor light fixture.

While it doesn’t have all the features of some of our higher-rated units, the LEPOWER LED Security Light lives up to the POWER in its name, making it the best LES outdoor motion sensor light.

Best solar-powered: Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light

Sunforce

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.9 inches long x 6.7 inches wide x 9 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 1.8 

Pros

  • No wiring or power needed
  • Solar powered
  • Small and compact
  • Three adjustable light panels
  • Includes rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Low light output and short maximum duration
  • Short range
  • Needs direct sunlight to fully charge

If you want an outdoor motion sensor light that doesn’t require you to wire it into your home’s electrical system, you want a solar-powered light. The best we found is the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light. It’s a relatively small three-panel flood light with an attached solar-powered panel that can be mounted separately, up to 15 feet away, in order to gather the maximum amount of light during the day.

These are all excellent and convenient features, but this light does come with some drawbacks. It’s simply not as powerful as other models due to it running not on electricity but on batteries that are recharged with the solar panel. (The batteries are included, which is nice.) The range is much lower than other models, less than half, and the maximum time the light will stay on is lower too. Therefore, this model is better for tighter lots or convenience rather than crime deterrence. However, the price is reasonable, so you can also simply set up more than one of the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light.

While there are some drawbacks, there are also a lot of benefits to the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light, making it the best solar-powered outdoor motion sensor light on the market.

Best with camera: Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.82 inches long x 7.77 inches wide x 8.5 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 270 lights, 140 degrees camera
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Tons of features
  • Camera can follow motion
  • Wide motion sensor range for lights
  • Connectivity to Alexa
  • HD images

Cons

  • No compatibility with Google Assistant or Apple HomeKit
  • Relatively short range
  • expensive

If you want to step your security up, you’ll want to pair a camera with your lights, so when they’re triggered, you can know what happened to cause it. If you use Alexa in your smart home, the best option is Amazon-owned company Ring’s Floodlight Cam Wired Pro, a good light paired with an incredible security camera. 

As a light, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro isn’t quite as powerful as a dedicated outdoor motion sensor light. The lights only have a range of about 30 feet, though the camera can see and follow motion beyond that in daylight. However, the motion sensor itself has a great radius, more than 180 degrees, which is better than many other models.

The camera is excellent. It outputs 1080p HD video, which is really clear. The camera can identify if motion is human, animal, or mechanical and be set to only record in the event of the kind of motion you’re interested in. Integrating with Alexa, you can have the camera trigger other smart devices, like locks or alarms. Night videos are clearer in black and white than in color. All the footage is available on the Ring app.

However, you must subscribe to the Ring’s service to use all these features. Multiple plans determine how much footage you can store for later viewing, starting at $3 a month. There’s also a built-in alarm, which means if your camera catches a prowler or robber about to attempt to enter your home, you can hopefully scare them away.

While it costs a pretty penny both initially and over time, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro offers an incredible amount of features that can really add to your peace of mind, or simply help you monitor what’s happening around you. That makes it the best outdoor motion sensor light with a camera. You can learn even more in our full review.

Ring also just announced a new video doorbell that uses the same advanced motion detection system that we’re looking forward to reviewing soon.

Best value: HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED

HMCITY

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.23 inches long x 6.06 inches wide x 4.02 inches high
  • Range: 26 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: 4.5

Pros

  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Solar Powered
  • Two-pack
  • Excellent price

Cons

  • Short range
  • Limited detection angle

Our best value proposition for outdoor motion sensor lights is a double deal: you get two for one price. The HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED are two wide-angled light panels that are self-contained and solar-powered. You can install them anywhere because you do not need wires (we’re big fans of on a deck, maybe one with some nice furniture). The housing contains the solar cells, though, so make sure wherever you place them gets adequate sunlight during the day. There’s even a dusk-to-dawn mode that turns the lights on all night.

The HMCITY Solar Lights are better as ambient and night-use home lights than they are as security lights, but they can do the job. You can either set the lights to be off until they sense motion or to have low light until they sense motion and then get brighter. The lights themselves have a wide angle that they cast: 270 degrees. Even though the light itself isn’t powerful, it fills an area well.

Some of the drawbacks of the HMCITY Solar Lights are standard to solar-powered lights. They simply don’t produce as much light as wired lights can, and they tend to have sensors that can’t detect quite as far out. The HMCITY Solar Lights have a maximum range of 26 feet for detection, so it’s better on a smaller lot. They do have standard IP65 waterproofing, though the casing itself can collect a bit of moisture on the top, so it may be better to install it under an eave if possible.

The price is excellent, with two lights retailing for around $30 without a sale or coupon. For that price, the HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED gives you a convenient and useful package to add ambient light to your backyard, convenient light to approach to your door, or deter criminals and wildlife from getting near your property. That’s what makes it the best-value outdoor motion sensor light.

Best budget: Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight

Beams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.5 inches long x 3.5 inches wide x 4.42 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Excellent price
  • No wired connection needed
  • Small and easy to install

Cons

  • Batteries need replacing every year
  • Low light output
  • Narrow angle of motion sensing

If you don’t need a lot of light and don’t want to worry about wires, Beams offers a battery-powered motion-sensing spotlight that does a good job for a small price. At only $20, the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight can be installed anywhere, no need to worry about patching into your house’s electrical system. Instead, the Beams Spotlight runs on 3 D-cell batteries (not included). You’ll get about a year of use out of each set.

The light’s motion sensor is a bit limited, which is typical of battery-powered motion sensor lights, offering only 120 degrees. The range is surprisingly strong, besting our best value model by 4 feet. The spotlight is quite small, meaning it’s excellent for side doors, pet areas, or as a supplemental light when the main light is turned off.

The weatherproofing is about the same as other models, hitting IPX6, though it doesn’t have a rating for contact or dustproofing. The aesthetic is actually a bit nicer than more powerful models, with it blending in better than the large multi-panel floodlights.

While there are not a lot of options with the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight, and some of its benefits (small size, install anywhere) come with drawbacks (weaker light, need for batteries), the $20 price and overall good performance makes it the best budget outdoor motion sensor light.

What to consider when choosing outdoor motion sensor lights

The first thing you should consider is the range and angle that you’ll need for your property—and your property only! It’ll be highly annoying for your neighbors if they can easily trip your motion sensor lights from their yard or, even worse, from their home! So, if you live on tighter lots, a shorter range might actually be better, while if you live on a large piece of property, you’ll want something that extends a long way out.

You’ll also need to consider the angle of detection for the motion detector. If you’re putting your lights flush against a wall of your home and want detection on all sides, you’re going to want 180 degrees, while if you’re affixing it in a corner, you may not need to worry so much about having such a wide angle.

You’ll want to consider the power source. Some of these lights are solar powered and store up their batteries during the day so that they may be used at night, but that also requires they be placed on the side of your house that gets a lot of sunshine to be most effective.

Lastly, consider any additional accessories or features you want alongside your lights. Do you want a camera? Do you want smart home features that let you control the lights from your phone or with your voice from a connected device? Not every light is going to feature those.

FAQs

Q: What is the best motion sensor light for outside?

Every light from our list is in some way the “best,” but our overall favorite light was the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.

Q: What is the disadvantage of outdoor motion sensor lights?

The biggest disadvantage is these lights are made to throw a lot of light quickly, which can be annoying to neighbors if they get tripped late at night (either by a late-arriving member of your household, a pet or other animal, or anyone else). You can inadvertently create conflict when installing one of these, so consult with your neighbor on the side where you plan to place it, and if possible, adjust the way the light is pointed so as to put the least possible light pollution into your neighbor’s property. Also, keep in mind that motion sensor lights are not going to be warm and inviting like a porch light. They click on and off in a pretty aggressive way, even when you are the person who triggers them. They can actually be quite stressful to encounter, even when you’re expecting them.

Q: What is the lifespan of a motion sensor light?

A good motion sensor with built-in lights should last 10-15 years. If you use a separate smart sensor to make your existing fixtures motion sensor lights, you’ll simply have to replace the bulbs when they burn out.

Q: How many lumens should a motion sensor light be?

Individual motion sensor lights should be between 300 and 700 lumens for soft, porch-like light. Floodlights should be 1000 or more.

Q: Are motion sensor lights a good idea?

In terms of being used as a practical light, motion sensor lights have the ability to save you money and conserve energy compared to an always-on porch light. They are also known deterrents for criminals and wildlife, and when paired with a camera, can get you a sense of what happened in the event of an accident or incident at night. In this regard, they’re a smart purchase.

Q: How does a motion sensor light work?

Motion sensors use passive infrared sensors, which monitor any infrared energy changes, turning on an associated electrical switch when they are engaged. The electrical switch is attached to the light, which then illuminates. Infrared sensors can be tripped by any individual, animal, or object that has a heat signature at a certain level but can be interfered with if you have a heat vent or other heat source near the sensor. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor motion sensor lights

You should probably get an outdoor motion sensor light if you’re considering them. You’ll feel more secure, they’ll give convenient, energy-saving light, and you might even have a lower power bill. Which of our recommended units you buy will depend entirely on your needs, but all can confidently be called the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights for your home or business in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best e-bike conversion kits in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-e-bike-conversion-kits/ Thu, 08 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=601631
The best e-bike conversion kit on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These electric bike kits will supercharge your regular ride.

The post The best e-bike conversion kits in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best e-bike conversion kit on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall BAFANG BBSHD BBSO3 on a plain white background. BAFANG BBSHD BBSO3
SEE IT

This kit allows you to get 750W of energy output with a nearly 1,000-watt-hour battery, delivering the right mix of power and longevity.

Best value AW Electric Bike Conversion Kit on a plain white background. AW Electric Bike Conversion Kit
SEE IT

A rear-hub motor allows this kit to feel more natural and stand out from our other recommendations.

Best budget Pexmor Electric Bike Conversion Kit Pexmor Electric Bike Conversion Kit
SEE IT

This $170 kit will allow you to cruise at up to 36 miles per hour thanks to its 1,200-watt motor.

Let’s face it—electric bikes are expensive, but electric bike conversion kits allow you to affordably add e-bike oomph to any acoustic (aka normal) bike. Sometimes, you want the classic cycling experience and the e-bike experience, but you don’t necessarily want to own two bikes. But while it’s rather straightforward to convert your bike to an e-bike, doing so with subpar electric bike kits can actually be more frustrating than electrifying, never quite working as well as you want them to. To avoid such a possibility, we’re looking at the best e-bike conversion kits for 2024.

How we chose the best e-bike conversion kits

As a lifelong cyclist—both road and trail—I draw on 30 years of experience when evaluating options. In recent years, I’ve relentlessly tested the best electric bikes, best full-suspension e-bikes, and top bike gear in general. I’ve reviewed numerous rides for publications like Popular Science, Bicycling, Popular Mechanics, the Manual, and more. For this list, I dove into e-bike conversion kits to suit a variety of needs and budgets. My firsthand tests have been bolstered by input from Popular Science contributors and other expert reviewers. 

The best e-bike conversion kits: Reviews & Recommendations

Electric bike conversion kits should be relatively easy to install and provide reliable performance. However, a low-quality kit will disappoint you, and you’ll likely end up shopping for budget electric bikes instead. But with one of the conversion kits from this list, power-assisted pedaling is easy to obtain.

Best overall: BAFANG BBSHD BBSO3

BAFANG

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 750W
  • Battery: 48V 20A
  • Throttle: Yes

Pros

  • Plenty of wattage
  • Big battery

Cons

  • Expensive

With e-bike conversion kits, you oftentimes end up feeling like you’ve ended up with a toy motor. Not with this beast from BAFANG. This kit feels like a sturdy piece of equipment and delivers performance accordingly. 750W output—from a mid-drive motor, no less—is outstanding for a conversion and will charge up just about any hill with ease. Its just shy of 1,000-watt-hour battery is enormous and will provide more than enough power for a full day of riding. The thumb-activated throttle provides smooth acceleration, and the display screen is easy to read. There’s even a headlight thrown in for good measure. 

While it’s certainly pricey, it’s still significantly less than an e-bike with the same performance stats. When it comes to conversion kits, this is as solid as they get.

Best value: AW Electric Bike Conversion Kit

Specs

  • Motor: 1,000W
  • Battery: Not included
  • Throttle: Yes

Pros

  • Rear hub performance
  • Thumb and twist throttle

Cons

  • No LED display

There are two reasons this conversion kit offers superior value. First, it’s a rear hub motor, which is hard to find at this price. That rear hub motor translates into improved performance, better balance, and a more “natural” feel than a front hub. Second, it’s extremely easy to install, especially for a rear hub motor. The fact that it offers both thumb and twist throttles is a nice touch. 

The lack of an LCD is its one downside, but you don’t really need a display for this kind of motor. For all intents and purposes, this is a great motor for most riders. 

Best design: Rubee X 

Rubee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W
  • Battery: 93Wh
  • Throttle: No

Pros

  • Extremely easy use
  • Modular batteries

Cons

  • So-so performance

This conversion kit from Rubee gets our “best design” pick because of its innovative and extremely easy installation. Essentially, you snap it onto the back of the bike and go—barely any tools necessary. It’s also got a modular battery system, which means you can add or subtract power based on your desired range, speed, and bike weight. 

While its 250W motor isn’t the most powerful out there, this is less intended to provide a full e-bike experience than one geared toward providing a bit of pedal assistance. For a daily commuter who could use some extra oomph, however, it’s a fantastic option.

Best rated: EBIKELING Ebike Conversion Kit

EBIKELING

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 1,200W
  • Battery: Not included
  • Throttle: Yes

Pros

  • Very powerful
  • Easy installation

Cons

  • Can be noisy

“Best rated” can be hard to determine on an internet full of conflicting sources, but I’m going with this kit from EBIKELING because aside from a handful of extreme outliers, the vast majority of buyers report full satisfaction. Just about everybody is satisfied with its performance and reports that it’s very easy to install. It’s got an easy-to-read LCD, and the throttle is perfectly adequate. It’s hard to imagine someone not being satisfied with it.

A few buyers report the motor can become noisy, and others say the lower-power models are low on acceleration, but that’s why I recommend getting the 1,200W version. The 1,500W version provides more speed than most riders want or need, but with 1,200W, you’ll get a solid amount of pedal assist. 

Best splurge: Skarper 

Sakrper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W 
  • Battery: 240Wh
  • Throttle: No

Pros

  • Snap-on easy to use
  • Interchangeable from bike to bike

Cons

  • No throttle

If you’re looking to throw some money at a new, cool bike toy (and here I mean toy in the good sense—as in you’re going to enjoy it), check out Skarper. It’s still on preorder, but advanced testing has shown it to be a very slick tool. The Skarper snaps onto any bike quickly and more or less effortlessly, making it an easy addition to your ride. I think it’s particularly well-suited for commuters who worry about parking an e-bike outdoors. With this, you can essentially take the “E” part of your e-bike along with you. 

The eye-popping price makes it a splurge by pretty much any measure, but if you like the latest and greatest in bike tech, you’ll definitely want to check this out.

Best budget: Pexmor Electric Bike Conversion Kit

Pexmor

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 1,200W
  • Battery: Not included
  • Throttle: Yes

Pros

  • Mindboggling wattage
  • Easy installation

Cons

  • Some may not like the front-wheel hub motion

The fact that this conversion kit from Pexmor is under $200 yet functions reliably would in itself garner it consideration as kits at this price point tend to disappoint. This one works great, and its 1,200W motor is almost too powerful, capable of zipping you up to 36 miles per hour. The throttle is also highly responsive, which isn’t always the case with budget brands. 

It does go in the bike’s front wheel, and some may not like the “pulling” sensation that placement causes. But as far as affordable e-bike conversion kits go, there is no competition. 

What to consider when picking an e-bike conversion kit

When choosing your e-bike conversion kits, remember a few key points: 

Types of e-bike conversion kits

E-bike kits are relatively new, so there aren’t clear-cut categories for different product types yet. For the most part, however, they group something like this.

Wheel hub kits either come attached to their own wheel, or you have to attach them to an existing wheel. They can be in either the front or back. A front wheel kit’s main advantage is ease of installation and reduced cost. Rear hub kits, however, provide better performance and balance.

Mid-hub motor kits are installed into your crankshaft. These deliver the best performance by far, but they can be difficult to install and usually cost more.

Snap-on kits come in a range of formats, but they usually clip onto either your rear hub or seat post. They are typically a bit underpowered, but they are very convenient and easy to use. They can also swap between different bikes.

Wattage

Wattage on conversion kits tends to be in a higher range than on typical e-bikes, as some of the power is lost in the process. If the usual e-bike range is between 250-750W, kits lean toward 500-1,200W. While more wattage usually translates into more speed and pedal assist, many riders may not need the utmost wattage possible. Less power means less weight, so try to strike the right balance for your needs. 

Throttle and accessories

Some conversion kits come with a throttle, allowing you to affix either a thumb trigger or twisting piece to your handlebar to activate the motor without pedaling. This is great for getting up to speed from a stop or simply cruising along, but throttles eat up a lot of battery. Kits may come with other electronic accessories like an LCD screen, highlight, tail light, and more. 

Ease of installation

E-bike conversion kits can vary greatly when it comes to installation difficulty or lack thereof. Snap-on kits are theoretically the easiest, though less mechanically inclined people may find them tricky. Front-hub kits tend to be rather straightforward as well. Things get more complicated with rear-hub kits due to the involvement of gears, though they’re still pretty manageable. Last but not least, mid-drive motors often take a bit more know-how with a toolbox, though they rarely require expert-level skills.

FAQs

Q: Are e-bike conversion kits good?

That kind of depends on your expectations and what you mean by “good.” Typically speaking, they’re not quite up to replacing the performance of an e-bike, but they can provide substantial pedal assistance. If you’re a daily commuter who just wants to take the edge off their ride, a conversion kit will accomplish that. They’ll do that to get a bit of extra oomph during recreational rides. However, if you’re looking for serious e-bike performance, you may want to consider investing in a full bike. 

Q: How much does it cost to convert a regular bike to electric?

A kit can cost anywhere from $150 to $500 to $800 and even much higher. The cost typically depends on factors like the engine wattage, accessories, and overall craftsmanship. Remember that some of the lower-priced kits may not include a battery, which is a necessary additional expense. 

Q: Is it worth it to convert a bike to an e-bike?

That depends on your intended use. If you’re just looking for a bit of pedal assist to ease your daily commute or you expect to use an e-bike infrequently, you might not need to lay out the expense for an entire bike. But if you’re looking for full electric performance and will be relying on it regularly, a full e-bike might be what you want.

Q: Can I convert a normal bike to electric?

Yes, these kits will, for all practical purposes, turn your traditional (what some now call “acoustic”) bike into an e-bike.

Q: What is the best size for an e-bike?

An e-bike should be sized the same way you would size a normal bike. Riding a bike that’s not so large that you can’t control it or so small that you’re uncomfortable is important. There are all sorts of different formulas and suggestions for how to size a bike, but my advice is to go to a bike store and sit on many bikes. Find the size that feels right for you.

Final thoughts on the best e-bike conversion kits

An e-bike conversion kit can be a great way to bolster the performance of your normal bike. They’re not usually intended for or capable of completely replacing an e-bike. Still, for daily commuters, they can make life noticeably easier, and for recreational riders, they can be a lot of fun.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best e-bike conversion kits in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best full-suspension e-bikes for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-full-suspension-e-bikes/ Thu, 01 Feb 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=600937
Santa Cruz Heckler on a plain background in red
Santa Cruz

These electric bikes will tackle any terrain.

The post The best full-suspension e-bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Santa Cruz Heckler on a plain background in red
Santa Cruz

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8 Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8
SEE IT

A huge battery, light frame, and versatile design are what set Canyon’s Spectral: ON CF 8 above the rest.

Best splurge Santa Cruz Heckler MX on a plain white background. Santa Cruz Heckler MX
SEE IT

Santa Cruz’s Heckler MX is a luxurious full suspension e-bike with better range, a premium motor, and a fully balanced frame.

Best budget Cannondale Montero's Neo 4 on a plain white background. Cannondale Montero Neo 4
SEE IT

Cannondale’s Montero Neo 4 has all the features most first-time e-bike riders need for under $4000.

Mountain biking has changed a lot over the past couple of decades thanks to a combination of increasingly refined design and the addition of electric motors. A full-suspension electric mountain bike is more like a spaceship than the Huffys we used to play around on as kids. An electric bike with suspension is no small investment, however, and whether you’re an avid rider or just an occasional enthusiast, you need to choose a bike that you’ll continue to enjoy through countless miles on the trail. Below, you’ll find a guide to choosing the right model for your needs, as well as our picks for the best full-suspension e-bikes of 2024. 

How we chose the best full-suspension e-bikes

As a lifelong cyclist—both road and trail—I offer some 30 years of experience riding under all conditions. In recent years, I’ve relentlessly tested acoustic and electric bikes of all makes and varieties, and I’ve reviewed them for publications like Popular Science, Bicycling, Popular Mechanics, the Manual, and more. For this list, I explored recent releases from an extremely wide range of brands, testing bikes for different riding needs, experience levels, and budgets. My firsthand tests have been bolstered by input from the Popular Science editors and other expert reviewers. 

The best full-suspension e-bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Trail bikes are becoming incredibly lightweight, capable, and durable, and eMTBs have taken power and performance to a whole new level. These are our top recommendations.

Best overall: Canyon Spectral:ON CF 8

Canyon Spectral

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal / 500W peak
  • Torque: 85Nm
  • Battery capacity: 900Wh

Pros

  • Versatile geometry
  • Big battery
  • Lots of bike for a good price

Cons

  • Awkward power plug
  • Included tires are just so-so

The Canyon Spectral:On CF 8 excels at a little bit of everything, then goes the extra mile—literally—by having an enormous 900Wh battery capacity. Let’s put it this way: when tested over the course of a long day on the trails with friends, when their bikes gave up, mine could have easily kept going for much longer. I only quit because they had to. And while its motor’s 250W nominal output is merely fine, its 500W peak for bursts of extra power and 85Nm torque is pretty impressive. 

In terms of design, its carbon frame is light and compliant, and its geometry falls in between relaxed and aggressive. That means you get a comfortable riding position as you’re simply pedaling down the trail, but it won’t feel unstable when it’s time to bomb a steep hill. This results in a responsive, stable riding experience that most riders will enjoy across a range of conditions. While it’s perhaps best for navigating trails, its balanced, confident stance is great for downhill, too. Considering its solid e-specs and versatile design, it’s a great bike for the price. 

My only real complaint is that its model-specific plug is a bit awkward. And while the tires are fine, you may want to switch them out for something grippier when riding on more aggressive terrain. But beyond these nitpicks, this is an all-around solid bike that will meet just about any and all MTB needs. 

Best value: Trek Fuel EXe 8 XT

TREK

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal, 300W peak
  • Torque: 50Nm
  • Battery capacity: 360Wh

Pros

  • Great suspension
  • Adjustable geometry
  • All-trail versatility

Cons

  • Underpowered motor and battery

For a bike that will perform with excellence under virtually any trail conditions, the Trek Fuel EXe 8 XT delivers. Thanks to this chameleon-like ability to suit any MTB situation, it packs tremendous value. Highly adjustable, it offers two geometry options, suspension adaptability, and mullet compatibility for drop-style handlebars like those you’d find on road or gravel bikes. In other words, this is the kind of bike you want if you frequently jump between downhill, cross country, and even enduro and want one bike that will do it all. 

While the motor and battery capacity both could be a bit higher, the tradeoff is that its lighter electronics keep the weight down. That lighter weight plus its top-of-the-line, buttery smooth FOX suspension result in a maneuverable, responsive riding experience that you’ll enjoy no matter what the trail throws at you.

Best for women: Liv Intrigue X Advanced E+ Elite

LIV Cycling

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W
  • Torque: 85Nm
  • Battery capacity: 400Wh

Pros

  • Women-oriented geometry
  • Great electronics
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Lower battery capacity

As many women in the MTB realm have pointed out, most bikes are designed with men in mind. The women-centric brand Liv has corrected this with its lineup of lightweight bikes featuring geometry better suited for feminine bodies. The Intrigue X Advanced E+ Elites are the company’s lightest eMTBs yet—around 20 pounds, depending on the package and hardware. It also has well-centered, stable geometry that provides an improved reach for most women. Its 85Nm motor provides plenty of get-up-and-go, and the controls are well laid out and intuitive. 

The battery capacity isn’t ideal, but I bet its reduced weight offsets the need for more power. If you want a bit more, the company offers a 200Wh expander. The Intrigue X Advanced E+ is currently available in three performance packages offering different suspension and wheel setups, and they’re all great picks depending on your needs. 

Best design: Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay C90

Bikes.com

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal, 700W peak
  • Torque: 108Nm
  • Battery capacity: 720Wh

Pros

  • Great geometry
  • Wild peak power and torque
  • Beautiful bikes

Cons

  • A few reviewers report motor issues

For bike design geeks, the Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay C90 is truly a thing to behold. If judged by mere aesthetics alone, it would win by most measures, but in terms of more practical considerations, its geometry is about as perfectly considered as can be, resulting in supreme balance and confidence in surmounting even the most expert of trail circumstances. 

What’s more, its electronics are absolutely out of this world. Its 250W motor leaps up to 700W if the situation demands, and its ample 108Nm torque is an absolute hill killer. The 720Wh battery ensures all-day range, and the components throughout are as premium as can be. A handful of early testers encountered issues with the engine losing power due to a misplaced wire during the manufacturing process, but I rode my tester long and hard and never had any problems. 

Best rated: Nukeproof Megawatt 297

Nukeproof

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal, 500W peak
  • Torque: 85Nm
  • Battery capacity: 630Wh

Pros

  • Good electronics
  • Smooth suspension
  • Versatile geometry

Cons

  • Prone to pedal strikes

While it’s realistically impossible to find one bike that outrates them all, one that I can report having consistently stellar reviews is the Nukeproof Megawatt 297. I think that’s because while it’s not really blowing away the competition in any one realm, it doesn’t really fall short in any realm either. It’s just a really great bike all-around, from its solid electronic specs, to its well-balanced, versatile geometry, to its eye-pleasing design. 

Its bottom bracket is a little low, which increases its tendency for pedal strikes if you’re regularly traversing super rocky terrain, and if the weather gets cold, the stock tires seem to lose a bit of grip. But for all practical purposes, this is just a really nice bike.

Best splurge: Santa Cruz Heckler MX

Santa Cruz

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal, 500W peak
  • Torque: 85Nm
  • Battery capacity: 720Wh

Pros

  • Solid electronic specs
  • Confident ride
  • It feels like a luxury bike

Cons

  • Charging port cover is breakable

It’s not hard to spend a lot of money on an electric full-suspension bike, but it is hard to find models that are actually worth paying top dollar. The Santa Cruz Heckler MX delivers competitive electronic specs—especially with its above-average battery capacity—and it has outstanding geometry that results in a balanced, confident ride, but what makes it a solid splurge pick involves how it feels. It’s hard to put my finger on it, but it just feels like a luxurious ride. 

Maybe that’s because it’s relatively lightweight, considering its higher-end motor and battery? Maybe it’s because the suspension is so smooth, and the geometry is so well-centered? Whatever does it, the Heckler gives off luxury vibes, even if it rides like a beast. 

Best budget: Cannondale Montero Neo 4

Cannondale

SEE IT

Specs

  • Motor: 250W nominal, 500W peak
  • Torque: 85Nm
  • Battery capacity: 630Wh

Pros

  • Good battery capacity
  • Drop seat
  • Good stock tires and brakes

Cons

  • Somewhat heavy

The Cannondale Montero Neo 4 is a solid eMTB in just about every way you could want it to be. Its 250W motor is perfectly adequate for most riders, while its 630Wh battery is surprisingly large for the price. Its TRP Slate 4-piston disc brakes are excellent for stopping from high speeds, and the stock tires are good for typical varied use. There’s even a quality drop seat, which raises and lowers at the touch of a button to match your riding position over different terrain. You want it higher when you’re pedaling and lower when you’re descending. That’s an uncommon feature at this price.

I’d say its biggest drawback is the aluminum frame, which isn’t a dealbreaker, but it is a bit heavier than carbon and has slightly reduced responsiveness. The geometry is a bit unusual, with the seat to handlebar reach being a bit closer than what most riders might typically prefer, but it makes up for it thanks to the fact that the motor and battery are low in the frame, giving it a stable center of gravity to offset the stiffer frame in the turns. All told, this is a great bang-for-your-buck bike.

What to consider when picking a full-suspension electric bike

While it’s tempting to buy the shiniest, springiest bike you can find, that won’t always suit your needs. There’s absolutely such a thing as too much suspension. Before you plunk down your credit card for a new ride, here are some essential variables to consider:

Bike motor

Arguably, your first consideration should involve the motor. On paved or flat surfaces, a motor’s strength might not matter quite as much, but when you’re relying on it to power up a steep incline and large technical features, you need it to deliver plenty of wattage and torque. 

For mountain trails, you’ll never want a sub-250-watt motor. 250W is an adequate output for most riders, though if you frequent especially steep climbs you may want to step up to 500 or even 750 watts. 

An e-bike motor’s torque represents its ability to send rotational power to the back wheel, more of which not only bolsters its hill climbing capability but makes it easier to get up to speed from a full stop. E-bike torque is measured in neuton-meters, with the average ranging between 50-60Nm. New eMTBs can go much higher, typically between 70-85Nm, or even more. 

You also want to look for a mid-drive motor rather than a hub motor. While the latter is easier to maintain, more affordable, and perfectly adequate for most road riding, a mid-drive motor distributes power and weight more evenly, resulting in more power and control on inclines and rough terrain. All of the bikes I’ve recommended are mid-drive.

Battery

Batteries can be tricky when it comes to trail riding; on one hand, you want as much capacity as possible, but on the other, with bigger batteries, the weight can shoot up fast. Currently most bikes offer somewhere between 500-900 watt hours, and how fast it goes through that depends on how hard you’re riding the bike. If you expect to be riding all day using the bike’s more powerful assist modes, you’ll probably want 700Wh or above. But if you’ll only be at it for a few hours and don’t need the extra juice, you might appreciate the decreased weight of a smaller battery. 

Design

Whether you call it “design” or “geometry,” the architecture of the bike will have a major impact on your riding experience. This includes factors like the seat, top, and down tube lengths, the reach between seat and handlebars, the wheelbase, standover height, and so on. Which is right for you depends largely on your body type and how a particular bike fits you. Bikes with shallower (or “raked out) head tube angles provide more stability during descents, but struggle on climbs. More upright geometry makes climbing and general pedaling more comfortable but makes bombing hills feel sketchier. Consider the kinds of trails you’re going to ride most.

Frame & weight

The material of the bike frame plays a major role in your riding experience in terms of the bike’s weight, stiffness vs. compliance, and durability. Aluminum frames are typically more affordable and relatively lightweight, but they’re also fairly stiff, increasing the harsh feeling on rugged terrain and reducing traction and handling in turns. Carbon fiber bikes, on the other hand, are very lightweight and deliver more compliance rather than stiffness. They do cost more and tend to be more difficult to maintain.

Sensors

Most e-bikes have either cadence or torque sensors which determine how the motor’s power is engaged. With cadence sensors, the motor engages anytime the pedals are moved at all, and it stops when they stop. Torque sensors respond to the amount of force applied to the pedals, increasing or decreasing the motor’s output accordingly. Cadence sensors are usually more affordable and effortless and provide a “charging forward” feel that some riders enjoy. Torque sensors cost more and require that you use more pedal force, but they offer a smoother, more “natural” feel, and many riders say they’re more responsive with better handling.

Intended use

Something you always must question when choosing a bike is, what kind of rider are you? Are you more into flow trails or technical trails? Beginner, expert, or somewhere in between? Do you ride frequently or occasionally? A bike that is perfect for one may be flat-out wrong for the other. Typically, the manufacturers will make it fairly clear what a bike is intended for. 

Suspension travel and type

All bike suspension isn’t created equal, and you’ll have to decide how much and what kind of sproing you want. Most of these higher-end bikes rely on air suspension, while some older and more affordable models still use oil and springs. Most mountain bike suspension forks (which hold the front wheel) offer roughly 150mm of travel. That’s a solid all-around offering that’s good in a variety of terrain. Mor downhill-oriented models can go up to 200mm. Most rear shocks offer travel in the 140mm range. Again, some DH setups offer ore to absorb the big blows that come from drops or rock impacts.

FAQs

Q: Is suspension important on an ebike?

That depends on how you expect to ride it. On an e-bike, you’ll only be riding over relatively smooth pavement or well-groomed trails? Not so much. But if you plan on riding over any sort of rough terrain, suspension not only makes the ride easier on the rider but prevents the bike from breaking due to shock while improving its traction and handling.

Q: How long will a full-suspension bike last?

Again, it depends on you—how much and how hard you ride it and your level of care. If you maintain a full-suspension e-bike properly, you can expect at least 3-5 years before you have to make any major repairs. 

Q: Are full-suspension bikes safer?

On rough terrain, probably. The reduced shock may reduce your chance of injury, while the improved traction and maneuverability likely reduce your chance of crashing.

Q: Is a full-suspension bike better for your back?

While there doesn’t seem to be much in the way of hard medical science to prove it, anecdotal evidence suggests so. It makes sense that the reduced shock would reduce back strain.

Q: Can I connect two e-bike batteries together?

Some e-bike and battery brands offer extenders that can significantly expand their range. Absent this, however, the only way to link two batteries typically involves some under-the-hood wiring, which not only requires a fair bit of electrical knowledge but can void your warranty or short out the entire bike if done improperly. So, if you want more capacity, my advice is to buy a bike with either a large battery to begin with or one that offers range extenders. 

 Final thoughts on the best full-suspension e-bikes

While full-suspension e-bikes certainly aren’t cheap, eMTBs provide a fantastic ride on just about every terrain. The extra oomph provided by a built-in electric motor helps make climbing more enjoyable and ultimately translates into less time spent off the bike. The suspension won’t make you a better rider all by itself, but it will provide just the right amount of squish to let you feel the trail while you’re riding, but not so much the next day when you’re recovering.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best full-suspension e-bikes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Don’t fumble your chance to get $50 off Solo Stove fire pits before the Super Bowl https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-fire-pit-super-bowl-deal/ Wed, 31 Jan 2024 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=600871
A top view of the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
It's a very pretty thing when it's going. Stan Horaczek

Step up your Super Bowl party with an outdoor fire pit that brings the heat, minus the smoke.

The post Don’t fumble your chance to get $50 off Solo Stove fire pits before the Super Bowl appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A top view of the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
It's a very pretty thing when it's going. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Entertaining outdoors in the winter feels fancy and can be comfortable with some stylish additions. Our favorite smokeless fire pit, the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0, is $50 off and will keep your company warm while you show off your carefully curated and crafted outdoor space during Super Bowl LVIII.

Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 $249.99 (Was $299.99)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

If you’re in a Goldilocks-esque situation looking for a permanent fire pit with portability potential, look no further than the Bonfire 2.0. It’s Solo Stove’s most popular fire pit just for that reason. We love the Bonfire 2.0 for its ability to easily make a roaring fire—with science that keeps it roaring—without producing smoke. Hot dogs are a great addition to a Super Bowl party, but imagine giving your guests an experience by roasting some weenies over an open fire.

Solo Stove’s other fire pits are also on sale. The smaller, more portable Ranger 2.0 is now $199.99 (originally $229.99). The Yukon 2.0, a Certified Big Boy, is now $449.99 (originally 499.99).

Also, consider an outdoor television if you’re entertaining outside and have the space for it. Our best for partial sun pick, the Furrion Aurora 55-Inch Partial-Sun 4K Outdoor Smart TV, is $1,699.99, down from $2,299.99. You can watch the game while toasting your marshmallow until it’s perfectly burned.

The post Don’t fumble your chance to get $50 off Solo Stove fire pits before the Super Bowl appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coolers with wheels for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coolers-with-wheels/ Fri, 03 Nov 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585616
Four of the best coolers with wheels sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Keep your food and beverages from getting warm and your back from getting sore with these impressive wheeled coolers.

The post The best coolers with wheels for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best coolers with wheels sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A navy Yeti Tundra Haul wheeled cooler is placed against a white background. YETI Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler
SEE IT

The YETI Tundra Haul offers more features than we can list, including the ability to keep hot items hot.

Best compact A glacier blue RovR RollR 45 Wheeled Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. RovR RollR 45 Wheeled Cooler
SEE IT

Good things come in small packages with this sporty-looking space-saving wheeled cooler.

Best budget A blue Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler
SEE IT

You can’t beat this price for a wheeled cooler that can hold the equivalent of 42 cans.

Whether you’re entertaining at home, traveling, camping, or tailgating, a cooler with wheels is a game-changer. Having temperature-controlled beverages (and food) on hand can be the difference between joy and sadness. But lugging around a heavy cooler, that’s just pure misery. You want to work up a thirst from whatever fun activity you’re undertaking, not from roping in some poor friend or family member to carry the heavy cooler with you. The best coolers with wheels allow you to be self-sufficient without compromising quality.

How we chose the best coolers with wheels

As a freelance journalist for over 10 years, I’ve reviewed home and tech products for publications including Forbes, CNN Underscored, NBC News Select, Popular Mechanics, Architectural Digest, Tom’s Guide, The Daily Beast, USA Today’s Reviewed, TechRadar, Better Homes & Gardens, Bob Vila, and, of course, PopSci. My recommendations for the best-wheeled coolers are based on a mix of hands-on testing and research. I weighed the quality of build, size, features, and price.

The best coolers with wheels: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether your old cooler wore out, you need a larger or more advanced model with wheels, or you’re looking for your very first wheeled cooler, we’ve got you covered. One of these wheeled coolers will make it easier to entertain at home, tailgate, go camping, or bring beverages to the team.

Best overall: YETI Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler   

Yeti

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28.25 x 18.62 x 19.5 inches
  • Weight: 23 pounds
  • Capacity: 82 cans or 64 pounds of ice

Pros

  • Puncture-resistant wheels
  • Includes dry goods basket
  • Keeps hot items hot
  • Bearproof design
  • Compatible with dry ice
  • Various colors to choose from

Cons

  • Expensive

YETI is well-known for its drinkware, coolers, and more. In fact, the YETI Hopper Flip 18 tops our list of the best cooler bags, and the YETI Gallon Jug is our best overall choice for best gallon water bottles. The company has been building coolers since 2006, but the Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler was its first cooler with wheels—and it was worth the wait.

The YETI Tundra Wheeled Cooler features two inches of insulation combined with pressure-injected polyurethane, an interlock lid system, and a freezer-quality gasket. These components lock in cold temperatures and keep heat out. Unless you’re packing hot items, in which case the cooler works in reverse to keep the heat in. The wheeled cooler can also be used with dry ice (frozen carbon dioxide that provides more cooling power than regular ice).

The wheels are virtually indestructible, so the cooler can easily withstand rocks, gravel, and even splintered marine docks. The wheels can also handle sand, but it may be difficult to roll over such soft terrain. Also, the handle is made of welded aluminum and offers grips that are comfortable to handle.

The vortex drain system makes it easy to drain water from the cooler, and the bearproof design keeps your goods (if not you) safe from hungry carnivorous mammals. And the color choices are plentiful, including navy, canopy green, charcoal, cosmic lilac, camp green, Nordic purple, rescue red, tan, and white.

White Yeti Roadie cooler on wheels with its lid open sitting on a very green lawn in the sunshine.
Brandt Ranj

Need to haul a few dozen fewer cans but still want that legendary YETI build? We’re also big fans of the more recent Roadie line, including the Roadie 60 shown here.

Best compact: RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler 

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22.5 x 218.9 x 19.3 inches
  • Weight: 39 pounds with land bin, 34 pounds without
  • Capacity: 60 cans or 10 pounds of ice

Pros

  • Sporty, space-saving design
  • 8-day ice retention
  • All-terrain wheels
  • DeepFreeze dry bin
  • Bearproof design
  • Plenty of color choices

Cons

  • Handle is slightly flimsy when fully extended

The sporty-looking RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler looks like a miniature version of my mid-engine MR2 Spyder—which, admittedly, looks like a miniature version of a full-size vehicle. It also happens to make our list of the best coolers. The 45-quart cooler is the perfect size for my two-seater car and is also ideal when space is either limited or you don’t need a giant cooler. (Note: Rover does make 60-quart and 80-quart wheeled coolers, and in addition to glacier and chili pepper, other color choices include desert, magic hour, midnight, powder, moss, and Gobi.)

The deep freeze-dry bin is deep enough to hold wine bottles upright, or it can also be used to store clean ice for beverages. The wheeled cooler also offers compartments to store various types of items (meat, veggies, etc.) separately—but also below food-safe temperatures recommended by the FDA. The latches are tight enough that it takes a minute to open them, and the drain plug makes it easy to channel the water out. Also, the custom rubber gasket seals the cold air inside, which allows the cooler to provide up to eight days of ice retention. 

In addition, the telescopic handle lets me find the right height for comfortably wheeling the cooler around. When the handle is fully extended, it feels rather flimsy, but at lower heights, it’s fine. The 9-inch all-terrain wheels are puncture-resistant and make the cooler easy to navigate.

There are also a lot of cool RovR Roll R 45 accessories that you can purchase separately and attach to the anchor points, like a prep board, double cup holder, umbrella/rod holder, collapsible bin, and bike trailer kit.

Most durable: ORCA 65 Quart Wheeled Cooler

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 32 x 20 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 41 pounds
  • Capacity: 54 cans

Pros

  • Durable roto-molded construction
  • Large but lightweight wheels
  • Cargo net
  • Plenty of color choices

Cons

  • Bulky
  • Expensive

ORCA’s 65 Quart Wheeled Cooler is large enough for all of your needs. The generously sized cooler is certainly big. However, the large wheels are lightweight enough to make it relatively easy to transport, and the wheels are designed for any type of terrain. The pull handle is also large enough for up to two people to comfortably pull the cooler—although it can also easily be towed by one person as well.

The 41-pound cooler can hold up to 54 cans, or the equivalent amount in other types of foods and beverages. Its roto-molded construction makes it strong enough to serve as seating, and it’s also rugged enough to stand on.

The cooler can retain ice for eight days, and the molded drain channel drains quickly. In addition, it features a cargo net, which provides additional storage. The padlock fastening hole can accommodate a padlock to keep the cooler’s contents secure. Cooler color choices include blaze orange, charcoal, navy, seafoam, tan, and white.  

Best 35 quart/best for mixing drinks: BruMate BruTank 35-Quart Rolling Cooler 

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The 1.8-gallon drink tank with tap makes it easy to mix and dispense drinks into glasses, mugs, and tumblers.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 21 x 21 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 31 pounds
  • Capacity: 25 pounds of ice, 36 12-ounce cans, or nine bottles of wine/liquor (with Drink Tank installed)

Pros

  • 1.8-gallon drink tank with built-in tap
  • Built-in bottle opener
  • Puncture-resistant all-terrain wheels
  • Handles on side
  • 7-day ice retention
  • Variety of color choices

Cons

  • Tap is on bottom, so cooler may need to dispense drinks

Admittedly, at some point, rolling coolers can start to look alike. However, the BrüMate BrüTank 35 Quart Rolling Cooler has a unique feature: the BrüTank is a 1.8-gallon removable drink tank with a built-in tap. This allows you to pour (or mix) your favorite beverages into the tank. When you want a drink, you can put your cup/mug/tumbler under the tap and turn the dial to easily pour the beverage—adjust the flow rate. However, be advised that the tap is at the bottom, so you may want to put the cooler on a table or some other elevated surface. Otherwise, your beverage container will be in the grass or on the concrete pavement—which isn’t the most hygienic location.

Also, while almost any type of drink can be used in the BrüTank, hot drinks and slushy-style drinks are not recommended. The waterproof cooler also has a built-in bottle opener for popping the top off of glass bottles. These components make it an ideal choice for adult drinks.

I like this 35-quart model because it’s smaller than even the 45-quart cooler that is our Best Compact choice. (However, that cooler retains ice for one day longer, has a Deep Freeze Dry Bin, and also a bearproof design). However, the BrüMate BrüTank has the same level of sturdiness and is just as convenient to transport. The all-terrain wheels are puncture-resistant and can roll over any type of surface, including sand. Also, the telescoping handle can be adjusted to the right size, making it convenient when pulling the cooler behind me.

There are handles on the side, particularly useful when two people are carrying a cooler. However, since this cooler is so light, I can also pick it up by the handles myself to place in spaces where there’s not enough room to roll it (like the back of my garage). Color options include denim, lilac dusk, charcoal, ice white, mocha, and neon pink. The cooler is also available in a 55-quart size, and BrüMate also sells Black Ice packs, dry racks, and other accessories. 

Best features: Igloo 70 Quart Premium Trailmate Wheeled Rolling Cooler  

Igloo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 34.59 x 19.7 x 23.61 inches
  • Weight: 34.7 pounds
  • Capacity: 112 cans

Pros

  • Dry storage
  • Umbrella/fishing hook holders
  • Bottle opener
  • Butler tray
  • All-terrain wheels

Cons

  • May be too small for some people

At first glance, it looks like one of NASA’s cadre rovers or something on PopSci’s list of best dual-fuel generators, but the Igloo 70 Quart Premium Trailmate Wheeled Rolling Cooler is, indeed, a cooler. And it’s loaded with features, like a lockable storage compartment that’s water-resistant and can keep a phone, sunglasses, car keys, and other small items dry and secure. Underneath it is a storage pocket that can securely hold sunscreen and other items.

There’s also a food basket inside of the sporty-looking cooler to keep food items dry (such as a sandwich and some fruit). The removable butler tray can be mounted on the handle and has two built-in cup holders to hold cans or bottles, as well as space for other items. When not in use, the tray can be stored underneath the cooler’s lid. There are four self-draining cup holders, in addition to a bottle opener, and two accessory slots to hold umbrellas or fishing rods.

The oversized (10-inch) wheels can be used on any terrain, and the telescoping handle can adjust to the most comfortable height. This cooler also has a threaded drain plug that’s compatible with a garden hose for easy cleanup. The tie-down loops can accommodate bungee cords, allowing you to tie down blankets, towels, and chairs. It is available in rugged blue, spruce, carbonite, bone, olive/black, white/black, and gray/black.

Best budget: Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 13.32 x 13.32 x 19.97 inches
  • Weight: 7.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 42 cans

Pros

  • Holds up to 42 cans
  • Lightweight
  • Handles on the side
  • Extra storage

Cons

  • Only two color choices
  • 12-hour insulation limit

When you hear the brand Coleman, you might think grills and camp chairs, maybe lanterns or tents. But, eventually, a childhood memory of one of their coolers will flicker through your mind. The brand has been producing affordable, dependable outdoor accessories a long time, and the Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler is an economical option. And since we like to provide a range of choices, we chose this one because it’s also one of the best soft-sided coolers with wheels. It only weighs 7.2 pounds when empty and can hold up to 42 cans—or the equivalent. The exterior is eco-friendly and made from recycled polyester fibers. It looks like a piece of carry-on luggage—except it’s insulated.

The cooler uses TempLock insulation, which is designed to keep drinks cold for 12 or more hours. That is far short of the almost-week-long timeframe of many hard coolers. However, we realize that some people may find hard coolers too heavy to lift and even navigate with wheels. This Coleman soft cooler offers a telescoping handle that easily adjusts, and there are also handles on either side for easier lifting. It sits upright, and the wheels are on the back, so the cooler is gently tilted backward to use the wheels. There’s also plenty of additional storage with the zippered front compartment and the inside mesh pockets. It’s leakproof, and the hard plastic liner is removable to clean. The color choices include deep ocean and black.  

What to consider when buying the best coolers with wheels 

Use

How you plan on using the cooler is an important factor to consider. For example, if you’re just rolling it around your patio or backyard, your needs will differ from someone pulling the cooler up a steep, rocky hill. Likewise, if you just want to keep your cans and bottles cold for a few hours, your needs will be different than if you need to keep items at the desired temperature for several days.

All wheeled coolers have handles. However, when transporting the crate long distances, a telescopic handle can allow you to find the most convenient height. 

Weight

Wheels make coolers significantly easier to transport. However, keep in mind that after you load ice, cans, and bottles, the cooler will be significantly heavier, even when wheeling it around. Also, unless you’re only using it in your backyard, you may need to lift and lower the wheeled cooler to get it in and out of your vehicle, so keep this in mind as well.   

Capacity

Some wheeled coolers can hold the equivalent of 40 cans, while others can hold the equivalent of over 100 cans. So always note the capacity limit when choosing the right option for your needs.

Other features

All of the hard coolers on our list have seal-tight gaskets, excellent insulation, and tight latches, so we didn’t feel the need to highlight this every time. However, some wheeled coolers have other built-in features, such as butler trays, bottle holders, and bottle openers, as well as exterior storage. These features may be built-in, or they may be accessories that you can purchase separately.

In addition, some coolers can accommodate dry ice, which can keep food and drinks colder/frozen for a longer time frame than regular ice.

FAQs

Q: How long can a wheeled cooler keep the contents cold?

How long a wheeled cooler can keep content cold varies depending on the cooler. However, many wheeled coolers promise a seven to 10-day ice retention rate.

There are some steps that you can take to help the wheeled cooler work at maximum efficiency. For example, before you plan to use it, RovR recommends bringing the cooler inside of the house (assuming you normally store it in the garage or outdoors) and leaving the lid open. YETI suggests pre-chilling your cooler by loading it with ice a few hours prior to loading it up. How you pack your cooler also makes a difference, so you may want to study up on that if you need your ice to last as long as possible.

Q: How can I stop the wheeled cooler from developing bad smells?

Be sure to clean your cooler immediately after use. Usually, soap and warm water are sufficient. For heavy-duty cleaning, instructions may vary by manufacturer. For example, YETI recommends a 6:1 solution and warm water and bleach, used with a sponge or mildly abrasive rag.

Q: Do wheeled coolers really keep bears out?

Some wheeled coolers (like YETI and RovR), when used with manufacturer-recommended locks, are approved by the Interagency Grizzly Bear Committee as a bearproof design.

Final thoughts on the best coolers with wheels

Don’t get us wrong; we love our insulated water bottles. But sometimes you need drinks to share, not to mention meals to cook. The best cooler with wheels will make it a lot easier to transport ice and beverages from one location to the next. Some coolers even provide separate compartments for food, storage spaces for umbrellas, fishing rods, butler trays, and even a place to store your smartphone and keys. The best option for you depends on usage scenarios and budget, but we’ve narrowed this crowded field down to help you zoom in on the best wheeled cooler for your needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers with wheels for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best metal detectors for gold at any budget https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-metal-detectors-for-gold/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=450212
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

Between every modern prospector and that little pocket of bullion, there’s a great metal detector.

The post The best metal detectors for gold at any budget appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Minelab Equinox is the best overall metal detector for gold. Minelab Equinox
SEE IT

Complete versatility meets exceptional tools for finding gold.

Best for beginners Fisher Labs Gold Bug is the best beginner’s metal detector for gold. Fisher Labs Gold Bug
SEE IT

An easy-to-use detector specifically designed for gold.

Best waterproof XP Deus 2 is the best waterproof metal detector for gold. XP Deus 2
SEE IT

Deep waterproofing meets good penetration and custom profiles.

Metal is metal, right? Not quite. If you’re hoping to head out and find even a bit of treasure, then a metal detector for gold can make a huge difference. The best detectors are sensitive enough to distinguish between gold and ferrous metals, are often fully submersible, and can even find gold in difficult soils, such as mineralized black sand. Some detectors also come with special features, such as a gold-probability register that shows how likely a nugget might be gold or just a chunk of lead. Whatever your price point, sniff out a doubloon or three with the best metal detectors for gold.

How we chose the best metal detectors for gold

The people who love metal detecting love it for the hunt. If you’ve ever swept sandy shores looking for a little pot of washed-up relics or scoured scree fields in Colorado searching for a glimmering something that’s freshly rolled off the mountain, you know the thrill of the hunt. However, a successful hunt can’t happen without two things: the right know-how and the right tools. We researched numerous models from lots of different leading brands, looking for the best of the best. We took into account metal detectors we’d used, ones that peers had recommended, and ones that users spoke favorably of. Along the way, we did a deep dive into the technology behind our picks.

The best metal detectors for gold: Reviews & Recommendations

Metal detectors come in a few basic varieties, but all follow a general principle: an electric charge is used to create a magnetized wave that is directed at the ground; if this wave comes into contact with metal, the metal begins to vibrate in a specific manner, which can be detected by the device. When the sensor finds metal, it alerts the detectorist via a set of earphones or a moving dial. With the wrong detector for the job, however, you may have strayed past a life-changing chunk of gold and never been the wiser. That’s why when we were compiling this list, we wanted to make sure we could bring an authoritative selection of metal detectors to the table. Here are our picks for the best metal detectors for gold.

Best overall: Minelab Equinox

MINELAB

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With full waterproofing and multiple frequency modes, this excellent gold detector is ready for all valuables in all sorts of environments.

Specs 

  • Operating frequency: Simultaneous 5, 10, 15, 20, 40 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: Gold, Park, Beach, Field
  • Weight: 2.96 pounds
  • Price: $899

Pros

  • Multiple frequencies and detection modes
  • Solid waterproofing
  • Clear dig tones
  • Superior sensitivity

Cons

  • Somewhat pricey

Sometimes a company just hits on a slice of perfect and if you’re after a personal basset hound for the bullion, then the Minelab Equinox is a detector you can’t afford to ignore. Historically, when you bought a metal detector, you picked a frequency and worked within it, but not so here. The Equinox is one of the most versatile machines out there. With multiple simultaneous frequency responses from 5 – 40 kHz, this detector is as capable of nosing into a patch of gold as it is turning up ancient coins, spearheads, and jewelry—all without committing to a mode in advance. That picture is completed with solid target IDs that keep you from digging up nails when you’re looking for pieces of eight.

The Equinox offers a great combination of automatic settings and options for manual tuning. With its four distinct detection modes, it’s as easy to set it for beach hunting as it is for the mineralized mountain soils where gold is usually found. It also comes with eight custom search profiles and allows you to save the settings you most frequently use. Advanced settings allow you to tweak how much target audio you hear. The LCD display sums it all up concisely with simple controls that let you instantaneously adjust detect modes and frequency. Special accessory coils for specific situations are also available to expand your range.  

Best for beginners: Fisher Labs Gold Bug

Fisher Labs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple prospector’s detector is easy to use and provides great value in mountainous areas where gold is found. 

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 19 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Search coil is waterproof
  • Detect modes: All metal, discriminate
  • Weight: 2.5 pounds
  • Price: $439

Pros

  • Easy to get started
  • Solid auto ground balance
  • Lightweight
  • Viable for other targets beyond gold

Cons

  • Not great for beach hunting
  • Not as much manual control as some would like
  • Doesn’t offer the same depth as more premium detectors

Head for the hills without draining your savings with the Fisher Labs Gold Bug. Optimal for new prospectors, the Gold Bug is easy to use and tuned for gold. With simple controls, you won’t need to stay up late with the owner’s manual before you get out sweeping.

The two-tone detector uses a fixed frequency of 19 kHz and offers an all-metal mode, as well as a discriminatory mode for when the search gets serious. It uses two tones to differentiate metals: a lower tone for ferrous metals like iron and a higher tone for gold. It also features simple, automatic grounding that’s easy to use for new prospectors without constant fiddling. The pro version, on the other hand, allows you to customize grounding and may have slightly better sensitivity. 

Because of this instrument’s tight focus on gold, it works best in the rocky natural environments where gold is found and less well in some other types of environments. It’s not a great option for those who might be searching the beach and, for this reason, it might not be as appealing to budding detectorists who want more versatility. Its waterproofing is also only so-so, with a submersible head but no waterproofing above that. Still, for such a moderate price point, this is a good deal for those who’ve newly got the gold bug. 

Best waterproof: XP Deus 2

XP Metal Detectors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A multi-frequency high-end detector with up to 49 individual frequency settings, simultaneous-frequency mode, wireless headphones and pointer, and impressive waterproofing down to 60+ feet.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 4 kHz – 45 kHz, and simultaneous multi-frequency
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 66 feet
  • Detect modes: Wide discrimination, precise discrimination
  • Weight: 1.65 pounds
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Top-notch waterproofing
  • Generous frequency controls
  • Good wireless headphone and pointer functions
  • Multiple tones for different metals in pulse width modulation (PWM) and square wave

Cons

  • Complex menu system and overall steep learning curve
  • Pricy

Choose your adventure: Snorkel down to a lost shipwreck that’s potentially full of doubloons or scour the mouth of a Canadian basin while your friends sweep the forested banks. Either way, there’s one clear detector for the job. The XP Deus 2 is a formidable submersible detector for serious prospectors that can function up to 60 feet below the surface of the water. 

The XP Deus isn’t just waterproof, however. This high-end multi-frequency detector is capable of 49 individual frequency settings, as well as an impressive simultaneous mode. The 4 – 45 kHz range offers more than enough room for gold. Wide and precise discrimination modes help you further narrow the field, and the machine reports back on the findings with three different tones for ferrous, low conductor, and high conductor metals, in PWM or SQUARE wave. 

The Deus also delivers some impressive modern touches. The system uses a wireless headset and can pair wirelessly with a pointer. The monitor is IP68 certified for water and dust resistance.

The Deus II is not a beginner system (at least not without a lot of work); with so many features packed into one, the detector’s controls aren’t exactly intuitive. Still, the steep learning curve will pay off. With such a wide swath of frequencies available, and with such excellent waterproofing, this is one of the most versatile detectors around.

Best professional: Garrett ATX 

Garrett

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With superior sensitivity even for deeply buried objects, saltwater immunity, and great resistance to interference, this is a PI detector that’s perfect for rugged environments and mineralized soils.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: Unspecified
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: All metal mode, pinpoint, motion, non-motion
  • Weight: 6.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,380

Pros

  • Pulse induction detects metals deeper
  • Very rugged build
  • Multi-frequency modes for multiple depths and metals
  • Wide sensitivity scale

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Bulky and heavy

A draft horse of the metal detection world, the pulse induction Garrett ATX is a powerful instrument built for deep discoveries in rough environments. Using PI tech, the ATX is built for going deeper and finding gold in rougher locales. 

This is a stacked instrument with lots of modes and capabilities that will become second nature with time. The ATX leverages a multi-frequency mode to cut deeper into the ground and uncover more metal. It features 13 sensitivity modes, a capable ground-balance function that takes mere seconds to calibrate to the soil you’re working with, as well as ground tracking. Together, the ATX easily cuts through salty soil, seawater, and mineralized crusts. The iron check feature is another nice capability that audibly checks whether an item is iron, and the pinpoint feature helps you lock onto and find nuggets that you’d like to investigate.

The ATX is indisputably rugged but it’s also heavy—three times as heavy as some of the other leading detectors we follow. However, it’s also sturdier than most. It’s submersible up to 10 feet and won’t be affected by salt water or dust. All in all, if you want a rugged detector that leads the pack in terms of detection depth, this PI detector is it. You’d have to spend considerably more on something like the ultra-premium Minelab GPZ series with its ZVT tech to exceed it.

Best budget: Bounty Hunter 3410001

Bounty Hunter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a budget price, this easy detector can still find gold.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 6.6 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof coil
  • Detect modes: Discrimination, all-metal, tone
  • Weight: 3.7 pounds
  • Price: $119

Pros

  • Budget price
  • Easy automatic ground presets
  • Two-tone audio discrimination
  • Easy interface for different modes and discrimination dial

Cons

  • Frequency isn’t optimal for gold
  • Finicky in difficult soil and shallow

It is possible to find gold without spending thousands. The Bounty Hunter 3410001 is an affordable metal detector that’s loved by many. While this VLF detector isn’t optimal for hunting gold in deep bush settings, deeply mineralized soils, or salt water, it’s still a great choice for scanning for gold lost near the surface or small gold nuggets in gravel pits or tailings ponds. 

The Bounty Hunter might be inexpensive but it doesn’t lack features. Its control array is simple to use, whether you’re throwing a switch to cycle modes, adjusting sensitivity with a dial, or dialing in the disc/notch control to tune to gold. It features simple automatic grounding presets, three search modes, and a nice target strength meter that won’t make your brow furrow. Its frequency response is lower than optimal for gold but, with the right sensitivity setting and patience, that hasn’t stopped hundreds of users from finding lost wedding rings, gold jewelry, and undiscovered nuggets near the surface. 

With a waterproof coil, this 4-pound detector is capable of following you into multiple environments—even while its build might not be the definition of rugged. Still, at such a great price, it’s one of the most affordable metal detectors out there and a great place to start. Its frequency might not be optimal, and its grounding leaves a little to be desired, but you can still hit the jackpot with the Bounty Hunter by your side.

What to consider before buying the best metal detectors for gold

Before you start prospecting, there are a few considerations to make: 

Versatility

Most metal detectors are tuned to a specific frequency. However, some metal detectors do a better job than others at versatility. If you’re looking for a great metal detector for gold that can also moonlight as a detector for silver, relics, and rare ores, then look around for a more versatile detector that has multiple frequencies or swappable heads.

The methods used to detect metal falls into a few categories. The two most common technologies are very low frequency (VLF), and pulse induction (PI). These technologies both use electromagnetic waves to locate metal.

VLF detectors use a sensor coil and transmitter coil. The transmitter coil emits constant electromagnetic energy at a tuned frequency. When this energy encounters metal underground, it creates an eddy current in the metal that results in a phase shift of the reflected frequency. The sensor coil is then able to read this phase-shifted frequency pattern. VLF detectors make up the majority of metal detectors out there and tend to be the most versatile. However, they don’t do as well in more mineralized soils without calibration. VLF detectors meant for finding gold will usually be tuned to a higher frequency. Some VLF detectors at higher price points are able to emit varying frequencies.

PI detectors, on the other hand, emit rapid pulses of electromagnetic energy. These pulses quickly decay. When the pulses encounter a magnetic object they cause an eddy current to form in it. This magnetic eddy current then causes a measurable delay in the decay of subsequent pulse transmissions. PI detectors do a better job than VLF detectors at picking out gold in more mineralized soils and can generally be effective at ID’ing gold at greater depths. The newer technology is also generally quite expensive but can be worth it for veteran prospectors who want a device that will give them the edge in more difficult terrain. 

Coil size is an important factor in VLF detectors. While smaller coils will generally be more sensitive for gold, larger coils will allow you to scour more ground quickly. Luckily some detectors allow you to swap out coils. These enable you to hone in on a gold-rich area, then switch coils for a more accurate search.

Detection depth varies substantially. PI detectors usually do a better job at detecting gold that’s buried deeper, sometimes up to two feet. Only the higher-priced VLF detectors have the penetration required to find deep gold.

Ground balance is used to tune a detector’s frequency to the mineral you’re after (in this case, gold) and filter out everything else. A properly ground-balanced detector will filter out the frequencies of other minerals and mineralized earth you encounter, and dial you into gold, at deeper levels, and with better accuracy. Many detectors offer automatic ground balancing, while some allow you to fine-tune their balance manually. 

Frequency describes the transmission of electromagnetic waves from your detector. Since gold is a very low conductivity metal, higher frequency transmitters with shorter wavelengths do a better job at spotting it. Most detectors will have one frequency that they are able to transmit, while some have a range. We looked for detectors that transmit at good frequencies for finding gold, generally 14kHz and above.

Price

Metal detectors get expensive quickly. Before you commit to a metal detector, it’s usually a good idea to determine exactly what you want. While there are budget options out there, if you’re serious about looking for gold, an investment in a true prospector-grade detector could be worth it. Pricier detectors are usually better at piercing deep into the soil where worthwhile nuggets of gold remain and won’t get thrown off by deposits of other minerals. Still, gold is hard to find. Many true prospector-grade devices leave most hobbyists priced out. For this reason, it’s a good idea to have a budget in mind before you begin to shop.

Gold-producing environments

While gold can certainly be found with the right time and know-how, you’re unlikely to find any in Central Park. Before you commit to investing in an expensive metal detector for gold, it’s a good idea to plan your prospecting strategy. When you’re starting, it’s generally a good idea to search areas known to produce gold in the past, even if larger hauls might come from remote areas, such as Alaska, Northern Canada, or Western Australia. 

FAQs

Q: How much do the best metal detectors for gold cost?

Metal detectors for gold vary substantially in price. The cheapest metal detector for gold that we think is worth your time will cost about $100, while the highest-end prospector’s detectors can cost close to $10,000. 

Q: Will any metal detector find gold?

Yes. Most metal detectors are capable of finding gold, but some will do a much better job than others. Since gold has rather low conductivity, metal detectors that use higher frequencies will spot gold better than low-frequency detectors. For this reason, most metal detectors for gold have variable frequencies or are tuned for frequencies above 14 kHz. This isn’t an absolute requirement, however, and some lower-frequency models are still certainly capable of hitting that jackpot. 

Q: How deep do metal detectors go?

The depth that metal detectors go can vary substantially. Most cheaper metal detectors only find metal that’s a few inches beneath the dirt. Some of the most powerful detectors can find metal and gold that’s 2 feet underground. Larger nuggets are easier to find at greater depth.

Q: How do I look for gold with a metal detector? 

It can be quite hard to find gold. If you’re just starting out, it’s a good idea to look for gold in places where gold is known to have been found before. Pick your spot and search systematically. When you find a grain of gold, extend your search in that area, traveling in a grid pattern to ensure you cover the entire area. If the gold is naturally occurring then there’s usually more in the area.

Q: Can you make a metal detector for gold?

For a good DIY engineer, a simple metal detector isn’t actually all that hard to make. There are lots of helpful YouTube videos like this one that will help you design your own metal detector with common household items. It should be noted; however, that metal detectors made specifically for finding gold may be considerably harder to make, as the best metal detectors for gold run at higher frequencies than regular metal detectors.

Final thoughts on the best metal detectors for gold

Maybe you lost an engagement ring in the backyard ivy and you need a simple detector to help you get it back. Or maybe you’re a dedicated prospector looking to hit the jackpot in the Canadian Northwest Territories. Whatever your motivation, the best metal detectors for gold give you the tool you need to find gold, whether it’s in the wild, or out on the lawn. Great metal detectors for gold use high frequencies that help you pinpoint low-conductivity metals embedded deep in the dirt, easily filter noise from mineralized dirt, and are rugged enough to work in lots of environments.

For one of the deepest piercing detectors out there, consider the pulse induction Garrett ATX, which is rugged enough to rely on anywhere. If you’ve got an eye for tracking some shekels in the surf, the XP Deus 2 not only has some of the best waterproofing out there, it’ll do a great job in lots of different environments. If you’re just getting your feet wet detecting gold, the Bounty Hunter 3410001 is both affordable and easy to use; it’s a great instrument for those who want to learn the ropes or dig up jewelry from the yard. Finally, the Minelab Equinox is a metal detector that no one can afford to ignore. With superior tech, the Minelab’s completely customizable controls allow you to tune it to excel in any gold-bearing environment.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best metal detectors for gold at any budget appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best multitools for 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-multitools/ Fri, 19 Jan 2024 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=597813
The best multitools
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

This pocket-friendly accessory is a one-stop shop for many DIY or home projects.

The post The best multitools for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best multitools
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Leatherman Super Tool 300 sitting on a wood table Leatherman Super Tool 300
SEE IT

An all-around pick that’s comfortable to hold and well equipped.

Best splurge A Gerber Gear Center-Drive Multitool Bit Set on a plain wooden table. Gerber Gear Center-Drive Multitool Bit Set
SEE IT

Having the most frequently used tools in the most accessible spot makes this multi tool worth the extra cost.

Best value A silver Gerber Gear Suspension-NXT 15-in-1 Multitool on a plain background Gerber Gear Suspension-NXT 15-in-1 Multi-Tool
SEE IT

A less expensive—but not appreciably less equipped—version of our most premium pick.

A multitool is the kind of object most of us forget exists until we need it. It can be annoying to begin what should be a small project involving a screwdriver and watch it slowly devolve into a day-long task that requires frequent trips to different parts of your home. Instead of feeling like a hunter-gatherer, you can feel like Inspector Gadget as you pull out a pair of scissors, then a file, then a Phillips head screwdriver, and then a flathead screwdriver. Best of all, you can take this tiny, trusty tool wherever you go since most are compact enough to slip into a coat or pant pocket. Even if you’re not working on a big DIY project, a multitool can be a lifesaver if you’re milling about town and suddenly need to trim some wires. The best multitools will save you steps (and time!) by offering quick access to knives, screwdrivers, pliers, and more.

How we chose the best multitools

Suppose you’re lucky enough to have a tool room or smart enough to take a well-stocked toolbox with you just in case; well, more power to you. With a multitool, “something” is better than “nothing.” Our recommendations are based on a mix of hands-on testing and deep research. We considered how one might regularly use a multitool, which lesser-used tools are still useful to keep around, and overall durability. Portability was also a factor because multitools are generally kept in one’s pocket, so bigger didn’t necessarily mean better in this case. The cost was also a concern, as multitools can quickly get pretty pricey. Our objective was to be able to cover as many budget brackets as possible, from dirt cheap to splurge.

The best multitools: Reviews & Recommendations

Need a single tool to help you take on just about any simple task? You’ll find what you’re looking for in these all-purpose tools. Be mindful that as useful as a multitool is, it won’t be able to handle the same projects as power tools like a drill or orbital sander. Having a quickly accessible multifunction tool is helpful, but know when to call in the more powerful reinforcements. For those smaller jobs, especially ones out and about, one of the multipurpose tools below is a great go-to.

Best overall: Leatherman Super Tool 300

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Number of tools: 19
  • Included tools: Knives, pliers, screwdrivers, wire cutters, electrical crimper, wire stripper, bottle and can openers, file, saw, awl, and ruler
  • Price: $99.95

Pros

  • Durable
  • Well-equipped
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Smaller tools can be more difficult to access

Leatherman’s Super Tool 300 proves the company’s rock-solid, decades-long reputation for releasing durable tools is well-founded. It came through while we were tightening screws on drawer handles and door knobs, cutting fishing lines and small branches, or taking a quick measurement. When folded, the Super Tool 300 fit neatly into a front-right men’s jeans pocket, though its weight made a noticeable difference when walking around. Unfolding this multitool revealed a pair of pliers at the ready, with the other tools neatly tucked away under both sides of its handle.

Bigger tools, like the serrated knives and file, were easy to pull out because they were located at the edges of the multitool’s handles. Smaller tools, like the screwdriver, required a little more effort to unfurl as they required pulling on little hooks that were harder to finagle with larger fingers. However, once those tools were out, they performed perfectly. The Super Tool 300 is the platonic ideal of multitools because it has all the tools you’re likely to need around the house. We even feel comfortable recommending getting a second one to keep in your car’s glove compartment next to a flashlight during those just-in-case scenarios.

Best splurge: Gerber Gear Center-Drive Multitool Bit Set

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Number of tools: 16
  • Included tools: Spring-loaded needle nose pliers w/ X-Channel rail system, rotatable carbide wire cutters & strippers, full-size 3.25″ 420HC fine edge blade, magnetic 3.2″ center-axis bit driver, pry bar w/ nail puller & bottle opener, serrated blade, awl, file, magnetic flathead, and Phillips bit
  • Price: $144.99

Pros

  • Solid feel
  • Smart tool arrangement
  • Safe locking mechanism

Cons

  • Expensive

If you’re willing to spend a little more money, jumping up to Gerber’s Center-Drive Multitool Bit Set makes a lot of sense. It has most of the same tools as our best overall pick but has a better overall design. It easily slipped into the front-right men’s jeans pocket and handled our basic screw tightening and weeding tasks with aplomb. You wouldn’t want to use this multitool to saw through a two-by-four, but the sharp tines on its serrated knife are sharp enough that cutting through a thinner piece isn’t out of the question.

The best part about using this multitool was how Gerber designed it with accessibility and safety in mind. The multitool wouldn’t open until we pushed down on a button and moved it upward, slowly revealing the head of a pair of pliers. This meant it wouldn’t accidentally pop open, which is especially helpful if you have kids in the house. Once fully opened, its fine edge blade and screwdriver were immediately available.

Pliers, a knife, and a screwdriver are the three most-used tools on most multitools, and having them accessible in seconds made using this one much more useful. Additionally, Gerber includes a 12-bit set with this multitool so that you can have an assortment of Phillips heads and flatheads at the ready. It may cost you a little more, but Gerber’s Gear Center-Drive Multitool Bit Set is absolutely worth the extra expense.

Best for camping: RoverTac Camping Essentials Multitool

RoverTac

SEE IT

Specs

  • Number of tools: 14
  • Included tools: Axe, knife, pliers, saw, hammer, wrenches, screwdrivers, bottle & can opener, and file
  • Price: $22.99

Pros

  • Includes non-standard tools
  • Comes with a carrying case
  • Cost

Cons

  • Large compared to other multitools

Camping safely requires a handful of tools, so RoverTac’s Camping Essentials multitool will come in handy the next time you’re backpacking or spending several days outdoors. Its biggest strength is the inclusion of a hammer, axe blade, fish scaler, bottle opener, and other tools that you won’t find on most multitools. These tools won’t necessarily be as important at home but can be indispensable when you’re setting up a tent or cutting kindling for the night’s fire.

Most of the tools are tucked away inside the hilt of the axe, but keeping a sharp blade out all the time could get dangerous. That’s why we’re pleased that RoverTac includes a nylon sheath to reduce the odds of a camping accident. If you’ve been taking an entire toolbox with you each time you camp or hike, this multitool could help free up space in your pack for additional gear, like a pair of compression socks.

Best compact: Amazon Basics 15-in-1 Stainless Steel Multitool

Amazon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Number of tools: 15
  • Included tools: Knife, saw, fish scaler, hook remover, scissors, bottle opener, slotted screwdriver, Phillips screwdriver, ice breaker, metal file, nail cleaner, needle, corkscrew, and key-ring
  • Price: $12.91

Pros

  • Small size
  • The inclusion of scissors
  • Cost

Cons

  • Less equipped than larger multitools

Multitools are all relatively portable, but if you need one roughly the size of a mid-sized switchblade, you can’t go wrong with this one from Amazon. It doesn’t fold out like most of the multitools we’re recommending, and its tools are all a lot less heavy-duty, but they’ll still do in a pinch. The essentials include a screwdriver, multiple knives, and a pair of scissors. The latter is a helpful tool you won’t find on most multitools, which is a shame, given its utility.

The inclusion of a key ring on the end of this multitool should tell you everything you need to know about its intended purpose. This is the one you’re supposed to take with you everywhere, whether you think you’re going to need it or not. It may not be up to the same tasks as a typical multitool, but it’s far better to have it on you than stuck without one.

Best value: Gerber Gear Suspension-NXT 15-in-1 Multi-Tool

Gerber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Number of tools: 15
  • Included tools: Spring-loaded needle nose pliers, wire stripper, flathead drivers (small, medium, large), #2 cross driver, awl, nail file, scissors, tool lock, can opener, bottle opener, 2.25″ partially serrated blade, lanyard point, and pocket clip
  • Price: $28.99

Pros

  • Sleek stainless steel design
  • Wide tool assortment
  • Cost

Cons

  • Smaller tools tucked away

It’s telling that the company that made our most splurge-worthy multitool has another model perfect for more value-minded DIY enthusiasts. Yes, there are less expensive multitools, but they all have some compromises. Gerber’s Gear Suspension-NXT doesn’t have any of the typical tradeoffs in a model that costs under $30. It’s made from stainless steel, is pocket-friendly, and has every essential tool—including scissors—with a sleek design.

This multitool folds up and, when unfolded, reveals the head of a pair of pliers. All of its other tools are tucked away into the plier handles, which means you’ll have to dig around a little to access the screwdriver. This is a small—and easily forgivable—concession given the multitools’ extremely reasonable price. While you can keep this multitool in your pocket, it gets extra points in the portability department thanks to an included pocket clip, which makes it even more accessible. If you’re looking for a fully-featured general-purpose multitool under $50, this is the only one you should seriously consider.

What to consider when shopping for the best multitools

There are many factors to weigh when deciding which multitool is best for you. Below are the ones we felt were most important while compiling this guide.

Number of tools

Having multiple tools is the namesake feature of a multitool, so in this case, more really does mean more. The purpose of this device is to save you from making more than one trip to grab a tool, so having the most fully-equipped model is preferable.

Types of tools

While tool quantity is important, look through the full list of a multitool’s tools to ensure it has the ones you’ll need more frequently. Some common tools, like scissors, are available on fewer multitools than you may think. Companies have opted to include multiple knives and more obscure tools that many folks may not have on hand in a junk drawer instead.

Cost

Multitools can get shockingly expensive very quickly, so we were committed to finding models at a wide range of prices. Most of our recommendations clock in at under $50, including some designed with a specific task—like camping—in mind. If you put off getting a multitool because of sticker shock, you can easily find one for you.

FAQs

Q: Why carry a multitool?

You know how it always rains when you don’t have an umbrella? The same thing goes for multitools. A multitool is a compact way to carry pliers, files, and screwdriver heads without carrying an entire toolbox with you or running out to the shed. You can keep one in your glovebox or carry it in your pocket. The one time you leave it at home will be the time you’ll need it most.

Q: Are all multitool blades the same?

No. Some multitool blades are smooth, while others are serrated. Knives on multitools also vary in length and sharpness. If you need to replace a blade in your multitool, contact the manufacturer to see if they offer replacement blades.

Q: Why do my multitool blades wear out so fast?

Multitool blades will wear out quickly if used on extremely hard surfaces such as stone, metal, or dense wood. To make your tool last, you can sharpen the standard blade and scissors on a multitool using a sharpening stone. You can sharpen the serrated knife using a round sharpening steel.

Q: How much does a multitool cost?

This depends on its material, number of tools, and types of tools. Our recommendations cost between $12 and $145.

Final thoughts on the best multitools

A multitool may not be the first piece of gear you think to grab on your way out the door, but it’s important to pay it some mind. This time-saving tool will come in handy more often than a power tool because you can reasonably carry it around or throw it into a small pack on the off-chance you’ll need one. We strongly recommend keeping a multitool in an emergency preparedness kit because that’s the type of scenario in which it’ll thrive. It’s frustrating to get caught flat-footed and need to pause your task to grab just one more tool, especially if you’re not home at the time. Save yourself the stress and pick up a multitool.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best multitools for 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The 4 best outdoor TV covers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-tv-covers/ Fri, 19 Jan 2024 04:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=598936
The best outdoor TV covers for 2024
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Protect your outdoor television investment with these excellent covers for all budgets, environments, and aesthetics.

The post The 4 best outdoor TV covers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor TV covers for 2024
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Storm Shell Outdoor TV Hard Cover Storm Shell Outdoor TV Hard Cover
SEE IT

This durable polymer shell will protect your TV from all the elements.

Best value Garnetics Outdoor TV Cover on a plain white background. Garnetics Outdoor TV Cover
SEE IT

A fabric and PVC cover that gets the job done without destroying your credit card.

Best budget iBirdie Outdoor Waterproof and Weatherproof TV Cover on a plain white background. iBirdie Outdoor Waterproof and Weatherproof TV Cover
SEE IT

Excellent protection for the budget-minded.

There’s nothing like the great outdoors. While this usually applies to natural surroundings like mountains and forests, nothing says that your backyard can’t be great as well. More and more people are opting to entertain outside, and patios and other outdoor living spaces complete with weather-resistant televisions are becoming a big part of that. Outdoor TVs are a special breed of screen and offer all kinds of protection against the elements compared to indoor ones. However, they will still require some kind of cover when not in use. A lot happens outside, after all, from storms to sports to wayward wildlife, so you’ll feel better with the best outdoor TV covers protecting your investment properly.

How we chose the best outdoor TV covers

By their very nature, the best outdoor TV covers have to protect your television. With that in mind, we naturally gravitated towards the strongest and most durable covers on the market. Additionally, we looked at a number of products across various price points, choosing ones that offered at least durability, with many providing much, much more. Finally, we cross-referenced these selections with user reviews from consumer shopping platforms and reports from our industry peers.

The best outdoor TV covers: Reviews & Recommendations

Covers come in all forms and formats, from simple fabric bags to full-on cases with built-in climate control. What you get will depend on your budget as well as your environment. Some will look very utilitarian, while others can be matched to your patio furniture and heaters. Start your search for the best outdoor TV cover here.

Best overall: Storm Shell Outdoor TV Hard Cover

Storm Shell

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
  • TV size: From 32” to 75”
  • Type: Shell

 Pros

  • Durable shell type
  • Waterproof, impact-resistant, and UV-resistant
  • Fifteen degrees of viewing

 Cons

  • Some users report installation difficulties
  • On the pricey side

Storm Shell. The name says it all. With a moniker like that, you know exactly what it is and what it does: it protects your outdoor TV from even the nastiest of natural conditions. This, along with its other excellent features, makes it our pick for the best overall outdoor TV cover.

Made from ABS, a durable polymer, Storm Shell envelops your television in a heavy-duty enclosure. Storm Shell mounts to your wall and then holds the screen inside, with a bracket and arm that extends and angles for up to 15 degrees of viewing. When not in use, clamp on the lockable outer shell to protect against the elements. The enclosure is waterproof, impact-resistant, and UV-resistant, meaning it will hold up to whatever Mother Nature sends your way.

Storm Shell accommodates various VESA mounting patterns and comes in a variety of sizes, including the ever-popular 55-inch. It’s not cheap—there are plenty of budget options out there should your bank account not be so willing—but if your environment is less than forgivable, Storm Shell is the best option available.

Best value: Garnetics Outdoor TV Cover

Garnetics Outdoor

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Fabric and PVC
  • TV size: From 40” to 75”
  • Type: Zipper enclosure

 Pros

  • Durable PVC material
  • Quick installation
  • Remote control pocket
  • Variety of designs

Cons

  • May not fit every wall mount
  • No inner lining

When all you need is a zip-up fabric cover to protect your outdoor TV, Garnetics’ Outdoor TV Cover will do the trick. Available in various designs from the American flag to army camouflage, there’s sure to be something to match your decor. Sizes are abundant, too, ensuring that your TV will get the coverage it needs.

Garnetics’ Outdoor TV Cover isn’t just a pretty face, though. Made from Oxford 600D fabric and PVC coating, it keeps your outdoor TV safe even in inclement weather, protecting against moisture, erosion, sunlight, and dust. It’s even splashproof. Although there’s no inner lining, the interior PVC coating will keep moisture at bay. The remote pocket on the rear is very handy to have; your remote stays close to the TV even when not in use (and without having to open an outdoor storage box).

Garnetics’ cover comes on and off in less than a minute with just a few zippers to attend to. While some have reported that it didn’t fit their mounting, most have no issues, and the price is very attractive, making it our pick for the best value outdoor TV cover.

Best splurge: The TV Shield Anti-Glare Outdoor TV Enclosure with Two Fans

The TV Shield

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Metal
  • TV size: From 60” to 65”
  • Type: Shell

Pros

  • Protects against tampering
  • Comprehensive environmental protection
  • Two fans
  • Anti-glare front panel

Cons

  • Extremely pricey

All of the best outdoor TV covers we’ve looked at require you to remove them before use. Not so with The TV Shield Anti-Glare Outdoor TV Enclosure with Two Fans. This splurge-worthy cover houses your TV behind a shield of transparent, anti-glare Lexan polycarbonate. (There’s a standard transparent option also available.) This allows you to watch TV in all weather conditions, ideal for those who spend a lot of time outside or for businesses that require outdoor monitors.

This do-it-all cover protects against pretty much anything you might encounter outdoors: dust, moisture, heat, impact, and—with its key lock system—tampering and theft. As it stays closed 24/7, it has vents for circulation and (in this package) two additional fans to keep electronics cool.

The TV Shield is fairly pricey, befitting the best splurge outdoor TV cover. If you need peace of mind for professional applications or even recreational ones, though, it may be worth it to you.

Best budget: iBirdie Outdoor Waterproof and Weatherproof TV Cover

iBirdie

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • TV size: From 28” to 85”
  • Type: Velcro enclosure

 Pros

  • Polyester weatherproof material
  • UV protection and heat reflection
  • Remote control pocket

Cons

  • Possible baggy appearance

When budget is a concern but you still want something to keep your outdoor TV safe, try iBirdie’s Outdoor Waterproof and Weatherproof TV Cover. While it may not have all the fancy bells and whistles of some other covers on the list, it is extremely highly rated and will get the job done.

Made from 600 denier polyester weatherproof material, iBirdie’s cover slides over your television and fastens with velcro. It’s got UV protection and heat reflection, making it perfect for warmer areas. Dust also doesn’t stand a chance. The cover comes on and off quickly and seals up tightly, although some have reported a baggy appearance. It also has a pocket around the back to hold remote controls.

The iBirdie Outdoor Waterproof and Weatherproof TV Cover gets the job done and won’t bother your wallet too much. This makes it our choice for best budget outdoor TV cover.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor TV covers

Buying a cover for your outdoor TV isn’t terribly complicated. That being said, there are a few things to remember when starting your shopping adventure.

Type

Outdoor TV covers come in two main types: hard shell and fabric bags. Hard shells provide the most protection, with a durable case that the TV stays mounted inside of. Fabric covers are generally made from polyester or some other kind of heavy-duty material, often with a PVC coating. Both protect from the elements. The shell type is obviously stronger but also much more expensive.

Size

You can get outdoor TV covers in various sizes based on screen width as measured diagonally. You’ll also need to consider length, width, and—crucially—depth. Don’t forget to consider the mounting brackets as well when sizing.

FAQs

Q: What is the best way to protect a TV outside?

The best way to protect your outside television is with a cover, period. Rain, wind, dust, heat, UV light … the list of things that could potentially damage your TV in the great outdoors is essentially endless. If you have a TV outside, you need a cover.

Q: Can I put a regular TV outside?

While some of the shell-type enclosures we have recommended claim they will protect an indoor TV, we don’t recommend it for outdoor use. Outdoor televisions feature additional protections against the elements. Moisture and extreme temperatures may rust or corrode your indoor television. It’s better to be safe and go with a dedicated outdoor television.

Q: Where should I put my TV outside?

The best place to install your outdoor television is in the shade. Direct sunlight can make screen images difficult to see. Of course, you’ll want to ensure it’s where rain and other weather won’t affect it.

Final thoughts on shopping for the best outdoor TV covers

Installing an outdoor TV in a backyard or on a patio can create fun new recreational experiences for you and your family, from watching a game under the Friday night deck lights while you barbecue to enjoying the latest blockbuster from the pool. A good cover for your outdoor TV will not only protect it from the elements (and possibly even tampering and theft), it will extend the TV’s life and help keep your family entertained throughout the years.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The 4 best outdoor TV covers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes for deep space in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-for-deep-space/ Wed, 10 Jan 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=598022
Four of the best telescopes for deep space side by side on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

Gaze deep into the heavens with these powerful telescopes.

The post The best telescopes for deep space in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best telescopes for deep space side by side on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Celestron NexStar 8SE on a plain background Celestron NexStar 8SE
SEE IT

It offers powerful magnification and a useful Go-To mount for finding celestial objects.

Best smart A Unistellar equinox 2 telescope on a plain background. Unistellar Equinox 2
SEE IT

Ponder the heavens and take photos of space from the comfort of your couch.

Best budget A black Sky-Watcher 8" Flextube 200P telescope on a plain background Sky-Watcher 8" Flextube 200P
SEE IT

A budget-friendly option with plenty of magnification and light-gathering capabilities.

Telescopes for deep space allow you to gaze at the wonders of our universe in a way that wouldn’t be possible with other telescopes. These powerful devices use larger apertures to gather loads of light, illuminating what would be too dim to see otherwise. Many even offer motorized mounts to move to the celestial objects you want to admire automatically. Whether you are a new astronomer or a seasoned pro, the best telescopes for deep space will broaden your horizons.

How we chose the best telescopes for deep space

Telescopes for deep space have more specific requirements than general telescopes. Because of this, we selected powerful scopes with large apertures and plenty of magnification. Beyond those two factors, we also looked for options with and without motorized mounts. Finally, we assessed the quality of the optics, build quality, mount type, and any extra features. We selected based on a mix of hands-on telescope experience, expert insight, editorial reviews, and user feedback. 

The best telescopes for deep space: Reviews & Recommendations

If you want to see beyond planets and our moon, you’ll need a telescope for deep space. These powerful scopes will open up the ability to gaze at deep sky objects (DSOs), such as star clusters, nebulas, and galaxies, providing new opportunities for epic stargazing sessions.

Best overall: Celestron NexStar 8SE

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Schmidt-Cassegrain
  • Mount: Computerized alt-azimuth  
  • Aperture: 203mm (8 inches)
  • Focal length: 2032mm
  • Eyepiece: 25mm (81x) Plössl
  • Weight: 24 pounds
  • Dimensions: 42.01 x 23.66 x 12.99 inches

Pros

  • Computerized mount makes tracking easy
  • Very sharp across entire field of view
  • Large aperture
  • Portable

Cons

  • Slewing results in some lag

Our best overall pick comes from one of the most trusted telescope manufacturers. The Celestron NexStar 8SE is a relatively portable Schmidt-Cassegrain scope. It weighs 24 pounds but is quite compact, so you can bring it to dark-sky locations if needed. 

This telescope for deep space offers a minimum useful magnification of 29x and a maximum useful magnification of 480x, making it a versatile tool for viewing a wide range of celestial objects, including planets. Plus, the eight-inch aperture captures plenty of light for DSOs. Provided you don’t have much light pollution, you’ll be able to see nebulas, galaxies, and more clearly.  

This type of telescope requires collimation, but Celestron’s SkyAlign makes it quick and easy, even for beginners. Another plus for beginners and pros alike is the included alt-azimuth mount, a fully automated Go-To mount. You can select from a database of 40,000 objects, and the telescope will automatically find it and track it across the sky for you. It also comes with a 25mm eyepiece, StarPointer finderscope, visual back, and mirror star diagonal. The NexStar 8SE is pricey, but you get a lot of value for that price that is hard to beat.

Best smart: Unistellar Equinox 2

Unistellar

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Newtonian reflector
  • Mount: Computerized alt-azimuth  
  • Aperture: 114mm
  • Focal length: 450mm
  • Eyepiece: Not applicable (no eyepiece)
  • Weight: 19.8 pounds
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 11.2 x 30.4 inches

Pros

  • Very easy to use
  • Can be used from a distance
  • Filters out light pollution 
  • Portable
  • Good battery life

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Lack of an eyepiece isn’t for everyone

For those who want to gaze into the heavens from the comfort of their couch, the Unistellar Equinox 2 is the way to go. This smart telescope is unique in that it doesn’t feature an eyepiece. Instead, you pair the scope with the easy-to-use Unistellar app and view from there. This won’t be everyone’s cup of tea, but it makes deep space observation easier for groups and kids. It also came in handy for those mosquito-ridden Florida nights, as my husband and I could stargaze from inside.

The Equinox 2 features a sturdy base with a computerized alt-az mount. After an easy alignment process, you can search a database of 5,000 objects, including DSOs. Then, the telescope will automatically find and track them across the night sky. Or, you can use the in-app joystick to browse on your own. 

One of the best features of the Equinox 2 is its Deep Dark Technology, which filters out light pollution. This opens up stargazing even to those living in cities. Though I don’t live in a large city, there is a lot of light pollution, and it was remarkable what I was able to see with this setting turned on. Should you want to travel to dark sky locations, the telescope is relatively compact and portable, and you can even purchase a bundle with a backpack for easier transportation. Want an even more up-to-date (but also more expensive) model? Check out the newly announced Odyssey Pro.

Best splurge: Celestron Advanced VX 8 Edge HD

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Schmidt-Cassegrain
  • Mount: Computerized equatorial mount 
  • Aperture: 203mm (8 inches)
  • Focal length: 2032mm
  • Eyepiece: 12mm (150x) and 40mm (38x)
  • Weight: 61 pounds (full kit)
  • Dimensions: ‎9.1 x 9.1 x 9.1 inches

Pros

  • Very compact
  • Accurate Go-To mount
  • Extremely high-quality optics
  • Excellent for both astrophotography and observation

Cons

  • Mount isn’t sturdy enough for long-exposure astrophotography
  • Expensive

Our splurge pick is also one of the best telescopes for astrophotography. It features high-quality optics that fully correct for coma and field curvature, resulting in a truly flat field. Plus, the StarBright XLT coatings provide better light transmission for bright, sharp images. 

The included equatorial mount makes tracking objects easy, so you can make long observations or take long-exposure photos. It is computerized with Go-To functionality, making it easy to find and automatically track objects of interest. The mount even features ports for hand control, an autoguider, and two AUX ports for optional accessories. All those ports make it an ideal option for seasoned pros or for beginners who want something to grow into. 

Adding to the versatility of this scop is the ability to use three different f-stop configurations. You can attach a camera to the scope for f/10 or attach the eight-inch EdgeHD focal reducer to shoot at f/7. Finally, the EdgeHD is Fastar/Hyperstar compatible, making it possible to shoot at f/2. It is also quite compact, albeit fairly heavy, making it feasible to travel with. This is an expensive telescope for deep space, but you won’t be disappointed if you want something to last a long time or are looking for extremely high-quality optics.

Best compact: Vaonis Vespera

Vaonis

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Apochromatic (APO) quadruplet refractor
  • Mount: Computerized alt-azimuth  
  • Aperture: 50mm (2 inches)
  • Focal length: 200mm
  • Eyepiece: Not applicable
  • Weight: 11 pounds
  • Dimensions: 15 x 8 x 3.5 inches

Pros

  • Very compact and portable
  • Helps remove light pollution
  • Sleek, futuristic design
  • Ideal for group observations

Cons

  • Images aren’t very high-quality

The Vaonis Vespera is one of the best options If you love to travel and want a telescope for deep space to take along. Weighing only 11 pounds and measuring 15 by 8 by 3.5 inches,  the Vespera is very compact for what it provides. It also features a futuristic design, which will look nice sitting in your home. 

Like the Unistellar telescope, this option doesn’t offer an eyepiece. It can pair with up to five smartphones or tablets via the Singularity app, making it a fun way to stargaze with friends. Also like the Unistellar, it can filter out light pollution so that you can view DSOs even in cities. The telescope and app are both easy to use, so you’ll have no issues if you are a complete novice. 

The Vespera uses a Sony IMX462 image sensor to produce images. Unfortunately, this isn’t a great option if you want high-quality images of celestial objects. It only offers a resolution of 1920 by 1080 pixels, and users report that images are a little on the soft side. But it uses your phone’s GPS to calibrate yourself and automatically tracks objects, taking the work out of stargazing.

Best budget: Sky-Watcher 8″ Flextube 200P

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Newtonian reflector
  • Mount: Dobsonian
  • Aperture: 203mm (8 inches)
  • Focal length: 1200mm
  • Eyepiece: 10mm (120x) and 25mm (48x)
  • Weight: 52 pounds (full kit)
  • Dimensions: Base: 29.5 x 20 inches

Pros

  • Included mount is very sturdy
  • Very large aperture for the price
  • Comes with two eyepieces and an eyepiece tray
  • Smooth movements for manual tracking

Cons

  • Not motorized Go-To functionality

Telescopes for deep space are not cheap; there’s no getting around it. But the Sky-Watcher 8” Flextube 200P offers a much more budget-friendly option for deep sky observation. Coming in well below $1,000 when writing, this device provides a large eight-inch aperture for plenty of light gathering. 

The Flextube 200P comes with two eyepieces, offering more versatility. It also includes an eyepiece tray to keep your accessories organized. The 1200mm focal length offers plenty of reach for deep space viewing, with a maximum useful magnification of 400x. The high-quality mount allows for smooth movements as you scan the sky.

This is not a lightweight device at 52 pounds (the base and scope combined). But it is relatively compact so that it will fit well in smaller spaces. Should you need to transport the scope, it comes apart in two pieces to make it easier. The Flextube 200P also doesn’t feature a motorized mount, meaning it requires manual input for finding and tracking objects. Purists will appreciate that, but it may take some getting used to for novices. It comes with a 50mm finder, though, which makes it easier to find what you are after.

What to consider when buying the best telescopes for deep space

Telescopes for deep space have some specific requirements beyond most scopes. Add to that all the highly technical jargon that goes along with telescopes, and it can be extremely confusing what to actually pay attention to when shopping. Below are some key features you’ll need to consider when choosing your new telescope to look out at the cosmos’ wonders. 

Aperture

The aperture is the most important aspect of a telescope for deep space (yes, this is even more important than magnification). A telescope’s aperture controls how much light is let in. It is measured in millimeters or inches. If you want to check out deep-space objects, you’ll need a telescope with a large aperture to gather as much light as possible. Broadly speaking, your best bet is to choose the largest aperture you can afford. 

The exact type of object you want to check out could also guide your decision. Celestron suggests a minimum of 5 inches (120mm) for open star clusters and at least 8-11 inches (200-280 mm) for galaxies. 

Focal length & magnification

The focal length of your telescope is a measurement (measured in millimeters) of the distance between the primary lens or mirror and where the light comes in to focus at the other end. Focal length matters because it is part of what determines its magnification. 

While it might be somewhat counterintuitive, you don’t need crazy high magnification to view deep-space objects (DSOs). In fact, too much magnification may prevent you from seeing the object in the best light. Depending on what exactly you hope to check out, a focal length of 800 to 1250mm or so is best. 

Eyepiece

The other piece of the magnification puzzle is the eyepiece. Most telescopes will come with two eyepieces, providing different levels of magnification for better versatility. You can also purchase eyepieces separately if you want more options. 

Keep in mind that each telescope will have a minimum and maximum useful magnification. If you choose an eyepiece with too much magnification for your telescope, you will see objects larger, but it won’t be any sharper, so you may not get a very clear image. On the other hand, if you go with too little magnification, there will be a vignette around your view, and you won’t see the entire field of view. 

Without getting too into the weeds, there are also multiple types of eyepieces, each with its pros and cons. The most common ones that you’ll find are Barlow and Plössl eyepieces. Barlow lenses feature optical elements that increase magnification by either twice or triple as you step up. Plössl eyepieces offer a wider field of view, which makes them ideal for deep sky viewing. 

Optical design

There are many types of telescopes, but broadly speaking, there are three categories for consumers: Refractor, reflector, and catadioptric.

Refractor telescopes use lenses (typically made of glass) to allow the light to travel in a straight path from the front objective lens to the eyepiece at the back of the telescope. These are easy to use, reliable, and require little to no maintenance. However, if you want a large aperture, they are quite long. They also get expensive, especially for high-quality refractors, since the glass lenses are pricey to produce well. 

Reflector telescopes, including Newtonian and Dobsonian types, use mirrors to bounce light inside the device, allowing for a shorter design than refractor scopes. Mirrors are cheaper to make than glass lenses, so reflector telescopes are generally more affordable when compared to the same aperture as refractor scopes. They can, however, be quite bulky and heavy and need to be collimated (the process of aligning the mirrors), which adds a step before you can use your scope. 

Finally, catadioptric telescopes use both mirrors and lenses, allowing for a compact, portable design. Schmidt-Cassegrains and Maksutov-Cassegrains are two types of catadioptric telescopes that you’ll encounter. 

Mount type

The type of mount your telescope uses will impact how you can use it. At the risk of sounding like a broken record, there are three primary types you’ll encounter: Dobsonian, alt-azimuth, and equatorial.

Alt-azimuth mounts (also called alt-az) are the simplest and, therefore, most affordable. They allow for altitude (vertical) and azimuth (horizontal) adjustments. High-quality alt-az mounts also provide smooth tracking abilities; some even feature a motor for automated tracking. 

Dobsonian mounts use a platform much like a lazy susan. As a result, they need to be placed on sturdy, flat surfaces, such as a table. They provide excellent stability, as long as you have a good place to put it. They are not very portable, though, so these are best suited for homes where you can set it up and leave it. 

Finally, equatorial mounts counteract the Earth’s rotation, allowing you to focus on a single object and track it across the night sky. As a result, they are the preferred choice for serious astrophotography and long observations of single celestial objects. 

FAQs

Q: What makes a telescope good for deep-space observation?

The most important feature of a telescope for deep space observation is the aperture of the objective lens. Large apertures collect more light, necessary for faint objects far away. You’ll also need a sturdy mount to keep the telescope still throughout your viewing. If you want to view a single object for long periods, you’ll want to go with an equatorial mount or a smart telescope that can track automatically for you.

Q: Can you buy used telescopes?

You can absolutely buy used telescopes. Most telescopes require little maintenance, so purchasing a used one is typically a safe bet. It can save you a lot of money, allowing you to get into star gazing for less while reducing your impact on the environment in at least a small way.

Q: What can you see with a telescope for deep space?

Telescopes for deep space allow you to see beyond our solar system. These are typically called deep space objects, or DSOs, and include galaxies, nebulae, and star clusters. Keep in mind, however, that in order to view deep-space objects, you’ll need extremely dark skies. Light pollution of any almost level can prevent you from seeing distant objects. 

Final thoughts on the best telescopes for deep space

Telescopes for deep space have specific requirements that make them more expensive than basic scopes. But, if there’s room in your budget, they allow for epic stargazing, opening up new discoveries. And although they may be more advanced than cheap telescopes, most are still very beginner-friendly.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes for deep space in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Bring the fire to your home with 40% off a Solo Stove Mesa XL https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-mesa-xl-amazon-deal/ Tue, 09 Jan 2024 21:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=597969
A Solo Stove Mesa XL in a brick pattern on a white background
Amanda Reed

If you can't set up a fire pit, this pint-sized one from Solo Stove is a great pick. Snag it for 40% off at Amazon.

The post Bring the fire to your home with 40% off a Solo Stove Mesa XL appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Solo Stove Mesa XL in a brick pattern on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

There’s nothing like gathering around a fire when it’s cold outside. However, not everyone has the space or means to indulge in a full-blown firepit. Solo Stove’s Mesa XL is a perfect pick for bringing some heat to your porch or patio. Even better, it’s currently 40% off at Amazon.

Solo Stove Mesa XL Tabletop Fire Pit with Stand $89.99 (Was $149)

Solo Stove

SEE IT

We loved Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 smokeless fire pit and the company’s Pi Prime Pizza Oven, so we feel comfortable recommending the company’s mid-sized tabletop fire pit. The Mesa XL is slightly larger than the itty-bitty Mesa, giving you a longer burn time with the same portability. A Dual Fuel grate lets you choose between wood or pellets, and its 360-degree airflow gives you hot flames no matter what kind of fuel you choose. To light, simply place your fuel, light your firestarter, and wait. If you have a small balcony or backyard area, this pint-sized pit fits wonderfully on a small table.

Here are more deals that will make you feel warm:

Space heaters

Heated clothing

Heated blankets

The post Bring the fire to your home with 40% off a Solo Stove Mesa XL appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best binoculars for astronomy in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-binoculars-for-astronomy/ Thu, 04 Jan 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=597338
The best binoculars for astronomy
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

An excellent alternative to bulky telescopes, these binoculars are easy to store and transport while giving you access to all wonders in the night sky.

The post The best binoculars for astronomy in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best binoculars for astronomy
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Canon 12x36 IS III Canon 12×36 IS III
SEE IT

If you want sharp, bright, colorful, stabilized, distortion-free images, you want Canon binoculars.

Best high power Celestron SkyMaster 25X100 Celestron SkyMaster 25X100
SEE IT

Essentially the equivalent of a telescope in your hands, these Celestron binoculars offer a whopping 25x magnification and an objective lens measuring 100mm so you’ll see epic details in the night sky.

Best budget Celestron Upclose G2 10x50 Celestron UpClose G2 10×50 
SEE IT

While they require collimation—the alignment of the lenses—these budget binoculars use multi-coated optics, resulting in a quality image with good contrast and mostly accurate color once adjusted.

While telescopes are popular for stargazing, binoculars for astronomy offer a more portable option for gazing into the heavens. Binoculars are extremely versatile, working well for general terrestrial observations as well as more celestial surveying. You can even use them handheld or on a mount. Whether you want to observe the moon or casually stargaze, the best binoculars for astronomy are great to take into nature and bring you closer to the stars. 

How we chose the best binoculars for astronomy

Binoculars for astronomy require more specific specs than general-purpose binoculars, so we prioritized options with larger objective lens size and higher magnification. We also aimed to select options at various price points suitable for everyone from beginners to expert stargazers. While binoculars with image stabilization are excellent for astronomy use, they are quite expensive, so we’ve included models both with and without stabilization. In making our selections, we considered optical quality, size and weight, eye relief, and build quality. 

The best binoculars for astronomy: Reviews & Recommendations

Binoculars for astronomy will allow you to gaze up at the moon, spot deep space objects, check out planets, and more. While these advanced optics can be used handheld, we’d recommend a tripod or mount of some variety to offer more stable, high-quality night sky views.

Best overall: Canon 12×36 IS III

Canon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Objective lens diameter: 36mm
  • Magnification: 12x
  • Field of view: 5 degrees
  • Eye relief: 0.57 inches (14mm)
  • Weight: 1.5 pounds
  • Dimensions: 5 x 6.85 x 2.76 inches

Pros

  • Effective image stabilization
  • Relatively lightweight and compact
  • Image stabilized
  • Excellent optical quality

Cons

  • Pricey

Canon makes some of the best image-stabilized binoculars available, so it should be no surprise that our top pick comes from the imaging giant. The Canon 12×36 IS III binoculars for astronomy offer the company’s typical high-end optics and Porro II prisms, resulting in a sharp, bright, colorful image. It also features a double field flattener, which produces a distortion-free image.

The 36mm objective lens diameter is slightly lower than what is typically recommended for astronomy use. However, these still offer plenty of light gathering for stargazing. You’ll also be able to use them for things like bird watching, adding to their versatility. Plus, the smaller objective lens results in a more compact size ideal for most people, which is why it earned our top spot. These Canon binos provide 12x magnification, allowing you to see details on the moon’s surface. 

What really makes these optics stand out is the image stabilization. Canon built these with technology similar to what they use in their EF lenses, resulting in much sharper images when holding the binoculars. You’ll need two AA batteries for power, and they will typically get up to 12 hours of use. Simply put, once you use IS binoculars, you won’t want to go back to anything else. 

Best splurge: Canon 10×42 L IS WP

Canon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Objective lens diameter: 42mm
  • Magnification: 10x
  • Field of view: 6.5 degrees
  • Eye relief: 0.63 inches (16mm)
  • Weight: 2.4 pounds
  • Dimensions: 5.4 x 6.9 x 3.4 inches

Pros

  • Excellent stabilization
  • High-quality optics
  • Rugged build 
  • Plenty of eye relief

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Fairly heavy and bulky

If money is no object and you want the best of the best, the Canon 10×42 L IS WP binoculars are the way to go. These powerful binoculars for astronomy offer a large objective lens of 42mm, capturing tons of light for viewing even dim celestial objects. The 10x magnification is plenty for most astronomical observations and offers plenty of eye relief for a range of users.

Like the pair mentioned above, these feature Canon’s impressive image stabilization. It will almost look like you are using a tripod, giving you sharp, clear views. The ‘L’ in the name refers to Canon’s top-tier line of optics. These feature two ultra-low dispersion (UD) lens elements (on each side), which effectively corrects for chromatic aberration. Images will be sharp, bright, and vibrant, offering excellent views of the stars. 

Of course, there are downsides to these binos. First, they are expensive. If you are a casual user, they will be overkill. Second, they are fairly bulky and heavy. You likely won’t want to hold them for long periods, and they will add weight to your pack if you are hiking. But this is the pair to get if you are serious about stargazing with your binoculars. 

Best high power: Celestron SkyMaster 25X100

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Objective lens diameter: 100mm
  • Magnification: 25x
  • Field of view: 3 degrees
  • Eye relief: 0.59 inches (15mm)
  • Weight: 8.75 pounds
  • Dimensions: 10.1 x 5.1 x 15.28 inches

Pros

  • Massive object lens diameter gathers tons of light
  • Lots of magnification
  • Comes with a tripod adapter
  • Excellent image quality

Cons

  • Very bulky and heavy
  • Not for handholding

Celestron is one of the top telescope producers, so it makes sense that the company would also produce top-notch binoculars for astronomy. Celestron SkyMaster 25×100 is essentially the equivalent of a telescope in your hands. It offers a whopping 25x magnification and an objective lens measuring 100mm. That massive lens will let in tons of light. Paired with the high level of magnification, you’ll see epic details in the night sky, such as Jupiter’s belts, star clusters, and more. 

These binos feature BaK-4 prisms and multi-coated lenses, enhancing contrast for superb viewing quality. They are ruggedly built with a water-resistant design. The SkyMaster also utilizes a rubber-armored housing, which protects them from damage and provides a better grip. 

Unfortunately, such power comes with great responsibility. In this case, that means lots of weight. The SkyMaster weighs 8.75 pounds and, naturally, is larger than any other option on our list. They also don’t offer any image stabilization. As a result, you won’t want to hold these by hand for very long. Luckily, it has a built-in tripod adapter, making it easier to hook up to a tripod for hands-free use. All of this also comes at a rather reasonable price, so you don’t have to break the bank to see craters on the moon. 

Best compact: Nikon PROSTAFF P7 10×42

Nikon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Objective lens diameter: 42mm
  • Magnification: 10x
  • Field of view: 7 degrees
  • Eye relief: 0.62 inches (15.7mm)
  • Weight: 1.3 pounds
  • Dimensions: 5.91 x 5.12 x 2.17 inches

Pros

  • Compact and lightweight
  • Waterproof and fogproof
  • Adjustable eyecups and long eye relief
  • Versatile

Cons

  • No tripod adapter

Weight is an important consideration when backpacking or hiking, even when you hope to take advantage of the dark skies. That’s where the Nikon PROSTAFF P7 binoculars come into play. They are very compact and lightweight, coming in at just 1.3 pounds and just under six inches long. It will be much easier to bring them along on your trips. And, it will be easier to hold for longer viewing sessions as well. 

The PROSTAFF P7 are also ruggedly built and suited for adventures. They are waterproof to 3.3 feet and nitrogen-filled for fogproof performance. The 0.62-inch eye relief works well for those who wear glasses, and the turn-and-slide eyecups are adjustable to work well for a group of people. A rubber-armored body protects from drops and bumps and makes them easier to hold. Nikon used a water- and oil-repellent coating on both the objective and eyepiece lenses, which helps keep them free of water and fingerprints. 

Although these are not specifically designed for stargazing, they will definitely do the job. The 10x magnification is enough for casual night sky viewing, and the 42mm objective lens will gather plenty of light. Nikon designed these with high-quality optics and Phase-Correction coating for superb image quality and clarity. It also features a dielectric high-reflective multilayer prism coating, which maximizes light transmission. Finally, the locking diopter ring, typically only found on much more expensive optics, keeps your setting locked in.

Best budget: Celestron UpClose G2 10×50 

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Objective lens diameter: 50mm
  • Magnification: 10x
  • Field of view: 6.8 degrees
  • Eye relief: 0.47 inches (12mm)
  • Weight: 1.69 pounds
  • Dimensions: 8 x 7 x 2.5 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Water-resistant
  • Rubber coating prevents slips
  • Good optical quality

Cons

  • Requires collimation
  • Not nitrogen-filled

You don’t have to spend a fortune to get started with binoculars for astronomy. This budget-friendly pair also happens to be great for beginner stargazers. They are compact and lightweight, making them ideal binoculars for hiking. Yet they still offer 10x magnification and a 50mm objective lens. Those specs will allow you to see the moon in all its glory easily, as well as some star clusters and more.

Celestron built these with a rugged design, including a rubber coating to protect from drops and improve grip. They are water resistant, so you won’t need to panic if you get caught in a rain shower. They are not nitrogen-filled, though, so they tend to fog up. 

The main downside to this budget set of binos is that they require collimation—the alignment of the lenses. While not difficult, it does take time away from your stargazing. The good news is that Celestron used multi-coated optics, which results in a quality image with good contrast and mostly accurate color. If you are just getting started or want some kid-friendly binoculars for astronomy, these will do a great job.

What to consider when shopping for the best binoculars for astronomy

Binoculars are, for the most part, rather simple devices without much in the way of fancy technology. But, there is some specific lingo that you should be aware of when shopping for binoculars for astronomy to ensure you pick the right optics for viewing the night sky.

Magnification 

All binoculars include two numbers in the name, such as 10×50. The first number refers to magnification. For stargazing, you’ll typically want at least 10x magnification. If you want to see the moon or planets in more detail or search for smaller deep space objects, 12x will be better. However, remember that more magnification will exaggerate movement while holding the binoculars. So, if you will only handhold the binos, we suggest sticking to 10x or lower.

Objective lens

The second number tells you the size of the objective lens, measured in millimeters. In our example above, that would be 50mm. The objective lens is the lens closest to the object you’re viewing, or the one opposite of the eyepieces. This number tells you how large the binoculars are and how much light they let in. 

Larger objective lenses collect more light, which is better for stargazing. But it also means larger binoculars, which makes them harder to handhold. As a result, you’ll need a balance unless you only plan on using a tripod or mount of some type. For astronomy use, you’ll want at least 40-50mm, though 50-60mm will allow you to see fainter celestial objects. 

Image stabilization

If you’ve ever spent time looking through binoculars, you may have noticed how hard it is to keep them steady. That movement gets even more dramatic in higher-powered binoculars for astronomy, which can make detailed observations quite challenging. If you want superb image quality and don’t always want to rely on a tripod, look for a pair of image-stabilized binoculars. 

There are different types of image stabilization in binos. Some offer passive stabilization (also called mechanical stabilization) with suspended prisms, which don’t require any batteries. Other types of stabilization include digital, optical, and hybrid stabilization (a combination of digital and optical). Each type has pros and cons, though hybrid stabilization offers the best results, albeit at the highest cost. 

Roof prism vs. Porro prism

There are two varieties of binocular design: Roof prisms and Porro prisms. In Porro prism binoculars, the objective lens is offset from the eyepiece, requiring the light to travel in a zig-zag pattern. This design can result in a higher quality image, but they are bulky and heavy compared to roof prism binos. 

The prisms in Roof prism binoculars line up closely, allowing the objective lens to be in a straight line from the eyepiece. The Roof prism design results in a more compact, lightweight form factor. However, it is a more complicated design, which results in a much higher price tag compared to Porro prism binoculars. 

Exit pupil

Exit pupil refers to the round, bright image you see when looking through the eyepiece. The larger the diameter, the brighter the image, which is important for astronomy. To calculate this, divide the objective lens diameter by the magnification. So, for example, a 10×50 binocular would offer an exit pupil of 5mm. 

The key here is to find binoculars for astronomy with an exit pupil roughly the same size as the human pupil when dilated for darkness. In dark conditions, most pupils dilate to around 7mm. Opting for binoculars with an exit pupil of 2.5mm will make the image look quite dark.

Eye relief

Eye relief is the distance from the eyepiece lens to the exit pupil, where the image is formed. Put simply, it is how far you can hold the binoculars away from your eyes and still see the full image without vignetting. If you wear glasses, you’ll need binoculars with longer eye relief. Be sure to go with an eye relief greater than 14mm if you use glasses.  

Weight

Weight might not be the first thing that comes to mind when choosing binoculars for astronomy. However, it can be incredibly important. If you plan on handholding your binoculars, look for a more compact, lightweight option. Otherwise your arms will tire quickly, but more importantly, they will be hard to hold steady. And if you can’t hold them steady, you won’t get a very good view of the night sky. 

If you opt for a heavier option or plan long observation sessions with high magnification, we recommend mounting the binoculars to a tripod. 

FAQs

Q: What size binoculars are best for astronomy?

Binoculars with 10x magnification and an objective lens of 50mm (10×50) are the most popular option for astronomy, thanks to the balance of size and magnification. However, if you want to see objects in more detail or hope to view faint deep space objects, something like 15×70 or larger is best.

Q: What night-sky objects can you see with binoculars?

Depending on the objective lens and magnification on your binoculars, you’ll be able to use them to view the moon, planets, star clusters, nebulae, and even some galaxies. 

Q: Can you use any binoculars for astronomy?

While you can certainly look up at the stars with any binoculars, not just any pair will allow for in-depth astronomy. For astronomy use, you’ll need optics that are able to gather plenty of light and offer higher magnification than general use. Budget and travel-friendly binoculars typically won’t make the cut as a result. 

Q: How much should I spend on binoculars for astronomy?

How much you should spend on binoculars for astronomy depends on how you plan on using them and what you hope to view. For beginners, a few hundred dollars is plenty. For those wanting epic night sky views, you’ll want to spend closer to $1,000 for high-quality optics, impressive image stabilization, and plenty of light-gathering abilities. 

Final thoughts on the best binoculars for astronomy

Binoculars for astronomy can serve as an excellent alternative to bulky telescopes. These optics allow you to view celestial objects on the go, making it a great choice for camping, hiking, or travel of any type. Binoculars are also easier to store, which is ideal for those living in smaller spaces. Despite their convenience, they still allow you to see plenty of wonders in the night sky.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best binoculars for astronomy in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Prepare for any storm ahead with 37% off this Jackery solar generator https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-solar-generator-winter-storm-2024-amazon-deal/ Tue, 02 Jan 2024 20:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=597063
A Jackery solar generator on a plain background arranged in a brick pattern
Amanda Reed

Keep the lights on when electric lines go down with this powered-up Jackery solar generator that's on sale at Amazon.

The post Prepare for any storm ahead with 37% off this Jackery solar generator appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Jackery solar generator on a plain background arranged in a brick pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

While not everyone enjoyed a white Christmas, no flakes by December doesn’t always mean no winter wonderland. Many years, there’s a good chance the first major snow will happen sometime in the New Year. And that time for the East Coast might be a big winter storm this weekend. It’s this unpredictability that makes a generator a purchase for all seasons. Luckily, Jackery—who makes some of our favorite solar generators—is offering its fantastic Explorer 2000 PRO portable power station for a whopping 37% off.

Jackery Explorer 2000 PRO Portable Power Station $1,199 (Was $1,899)

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

According to our review, this generator is a great backup power source for people who live in blackout-prone areas or on an off-grid worksite. It’s also light for road trippers and van-lifers. It’s extremely user-friendly, and output ports ensure you can plug in a wide range of devices and electrical equipment. Its functions are highly intuitive, and the digital display is easy to understand. Like other Jackery generators, the Explorer 2000 PRO is incredibly durable, too.

Here are more inclement weather must-haves that are on sale:

Generators

Power tools

Snow blowers

Snow shovels

The post Prepare for any storm ahead with 37% off this Jackery solar generator appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The 6 best mosquito traps for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-mosquito-traps/ Fri, 29 Dec 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=596369
A lineup of four of the best mosquito traps
Amanda Reed

These traps will eliminate mosquitos in a flash.

The post The 6 best mosquito traps for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of four of the best mosquito traps
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A DynaTrap mosquito trap on a plain background DynaTrap DT1050 Mosquito & Flying Insect Trap
SEE IT

Three-way protection keep your patio protected from pesky pests.

Best portable A stafi mosquito trap on a plain background stafi Bug Zapper
SEE IT

Take it to games, on camping trips, or just keep it in your car for when you need it.

Best budget Green PIC mosquito repelling coils on a plain background PIC Mosquito Repelling Coils
SEE IT

Stop mosquitos from entering your yard in the first place with these svelte, stylish coils that burn like incense.

Mosquitos aren’t just pesky pests. They can carry malaria, West Nile Virus, Zika, and more. It can be discouraging to spend time outdoors if you know you’ll be covered in itchy, red bites by the end of the night. Plus, entertaining isn’t easy when you’re thinking about what uninvited six-legged guests could bring to your party. You don’t need to douse yourself in smelly, sticky bug spray or rely on citronella torches or candles. A mosquito trap is a great non-toxic way to capture these nasty buggers. All you have to do is place it and proceed with what you are doing. Some traps even blend seamlessly with your outdoor decor, while others stylishly and covertly cover the indoors. The best mosquito traps allow you to be comfortable in all your home spaces.

How we chose the best mosquito traps

I am a huge baby when it comes to getting bit by mosquitos. “Being itchy” is my least favorite state to be in. Over the years, I’ve learned a lot about how to stop the bites in the first place. Mosquito traps remain one of the easiest ways to accomplish that. To find the best mosquito traps, we looked at important features like portability, ease of use, coverage area, type, and if it could work indoors and outdoors. We also looked at reviews and recommendations and performed heavy research to whittle down our choices.

The best mosquito traps: Reviews & Recommendations

No one likes a party-crasher, especially if they suck your blood and carry disease. One of our choices should help you keep the guest list to a manageable number and stop mosquitos from wrecking the vibe. There’s only so much a portable party speaker can do.

Best overall: DynaTrap DT1050 Mosquito & Flying Insect Trap

DynaTrap

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: UV light, TiO2 coated, fan
  • Indoor or outdoor: Both
  • Coverage area: 1/2 acre

Pros

  • Quiet
  • No propane required
  • Doubles as a lamp

Cons

  • Reviews note bulb life isn’t as long as advertised

The DynaTrap uses not one but three-way protection against mosquitos and other flying insects. The UV light provides warmth and a glow irresistible to bugs, and its durable titanium dioxide coating creates a carbon dioxide trail. A quiet fan then sucks the mosquitos in at the end of the rainbow and contains them. We also love its stylish design—at first glance, it looks just like a regular outdoor sconce, but a closer look reveals it’s a trap. Each trap covers 1/2 acre, and you can use it indoors. Plus, it’s easy-to-use: simply twist to turn it on and off. Make sure to place it 20-40 feet away from where you’re sitting so you don’t get caught up in armageddon. It won’t attract honeybees and other insects important to the ecosystem (#savethebees).

The company advertises that the bulb lasts up to four months, but multiple reviews state that it must be replaced once a month. If that’s no problem for you, you’ll enjoy the peace the DynaTrap brings.

Best for outdoors: DynaTrap Large Mosquito & Flying Insect Trap

DynaTrap

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: UV light, TiO2 coated, fan
  • Indoor or outdoor: Both
  • Coverage area: One acre

Pros

  • Quiet
  • All-weather construction
  • Large coverage area

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Bulb difficult to change

Forgive us for putting two traps from the same brand back-to-back, but trust us that this is the best choice for an outdoor mosquito trap. It’s beefy and covers an acre of land—perfect if you live on a large property and have a lot of bugs to catch. And it comes in multiple colors to match your outdoor vibe. It has the same foundations as the mid-sized DynaTrap—three-way protection, quiet vacuum, no propane—and is durable for use in all weather conditions. The bulb shape is different and lasts longer compared to the mid-sized Dynatrap. However, reviews note that it’s difficult to change this particular bulb.

Best indoor: Katchy Indoor Insect Trap

Katchy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: UV light, vacuum, glue trap
  • Indoor or outdoor: Indoor
  • Coverage area: 200 square feet

Pros

  • Easy to replace sticky pads
  • Long cord
  • Keeps other outlets open

Cons

  • Sticky pads could be stickier

Keep your outlets open with this stylish indoor trap on your countertop. The 40-inch cord also lets you customize the placement versus “nightlight”-style traps glued to your outlet. It uses three methods to attract and trap mosquitos: A UV light lures them in, the vacuum fan captures them, and the sticky pad prevents them from escaping. They also capture fruit flies, gnats, and other small bugs. It’s incredibly easy to use: Simply turn it on and let it work its magic. You can adjust the settings between standard and low to save energy when you’re not home. The reviews note that the included sticky pads could be stickier, but they are easy to change when it’s time to switch them out.

Best wall-mounted: BLACK+DECKER Fly Traps for Indoors

Black+Decker

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: UV light, glue trap
  • Indoor or outdoor: Indoor
  • Coverage area: 1,500 square feet

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Pre-installed glue traps
  • Doubles as a nightlight

Cons

  • Not aesthetic
  • No off switch

If you’re not into zappers, chemicals, or vacuums, this sconce-like trap uses light and a sticky trap to lure and capture mosquitos. This trap covers up to 1,500 square feet and can be used in covered outdoor spaces. It comes with three sticky board replacements, so you don’t have to wait around for a new set to come in. All you have to do is set it up and watch as the bugs meet their end. The trap also doesn’t come with an off-switch, and it’s not portable. It’s also a little (for lack of a better term) ugly, but if design isn’t top of mind and you just want something that works well, you won’t have a problem with this wall-mounted trap.

Best portable: stafi Bug Zapper

stafi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Zapper
  • Indoor or outdoor: Indoor and outdoor
  • Coverage area: 20 feet

Pros

  • Day and night sensor
  • Rechargeable
  • Waterproof

Cons

  • Difficult to clean

Not everyone has the desire to hang up a mosquito trap. There are also moments in life, like youth baseball, football, and camping, where no mosquito traps are set up in the first place. BYOT (bring your own trap) with this stafi bug zapper, which can be placed on a table or hung on a nearby hook. It’s IP66 waterproofed, making it perfect to take along on a camping trip. You can place this zapper on a table, and it’s also rechargeable. It’s a little difficult to clean, however. You get 16 hours of power on one charge, and it doubles as a regular lamp, which makes the elbow grease worth it. Plus, it’s a budget-friendly pick. It’s also 10 inches tall, making it truly portable. No more missing the game to put on bug spray.

Best budget: PIC Mosquito Repelling Coils

PIC

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: N/A
  • Indoor or outdoor: Outdoor
  • Coverage area: 10 feet

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Stylish
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Fragile
  • Only repels

It was difficult to find a budget-friendly pick that was high-quality. When we found out about these repelling coils, we knew they had to be included in the list. Compared to giant citronella candles (which might not even work), these coils are svelte and stylish, and you get a pack of 40 for $20. That comes out to around $2 per coil. They remind us of incense, have 10 feet of coverage per coil, and last for 5-7 hours. You need to pay attention to wind direction and not breathe in the smoke it emits, but it’s a great first-step option or addition to a mosquito trap.

What to consider when buying the best mosquito traps

Most traps use UV rays to attract mosquitos. The light is paired with an interior sticky trap, voltage grid, or vacuum to bring them to their end. Some also use carbon dioxide (which we breathe out) and heat to mimic humans and animals. If you don’t love the ethics of killing mosquitos, consider planting lemongrass, citronella grass, lavender, or basil. These herbs and plants are all-natural insect repellents. If you don’t have any qualms about this, here is what to consider when shopping for a mosquito trap:

Type

  • Electric: These traps use electricity to zap bugs if they get too close. It’s just like that one scene in A Bug’s Life.
  • Heat: Mosquitos are attracted to our body temperature. These traps use propane as a heat source and carbon dioxide to mimic exhalation. They’re best for large populations of mosquitos. 
  • UV light: Mosquitos are attracted to light. This is used as an attractant over repellent or exterminant. UV light, in tandem with a propane and carbon dioxide trap, is incredibly effective.
  • Sticky traps: Some traps include a sticky section that ensures the mosquitos don’t change their mind and escape. They’re non-toxic and easy to throw out.
  • Water: Water is a breeding ground for mosquitos, but you can poison their well with Mosquito Bits. It’s also non-toxic to other animals, meaning you don’t have to worry about accidentally dumping chemicals into the ecosystem.

Efficacy and range

Not all traps last equally or have the same area of coverage. Sticky traps, for example, need to be replaced once a month. Others can last for months of continuous use. Some need to be charged, and some need to be plugged into an outlet to work. Check your surroundings and ensure you have outlets, hooks, or stands to make your trap of choice work.

Ease of use

Setting up some traps is as easy as plugging and going. Others require more maintenance, like replacing sticky panels or cleaning the vents and openings. Some traps require that you change an entire propane tank. Mosquitos are already a pain; choose an option that’s painless for you and your needs.

Portability

You can wall mount a mosquito trap so it guards the area for the entire summer season. You can also buy a tabletop trap to take with you on camping trips and to friend’s houses. If you’re looking for an indoor trap, you run into outlet and space problems. Double-check if your trap is meant to be stationary or moveable before clicking “add to cart.”

FAQs

Q: Are mosquito traps safe for pets and humans?

Yes. Since they don’t use chemicals or an open flame, they’re safer for pets, kids, and adults.

Q: Do mosquito traps attract more mosquitos?

No. They’re not designed to bring more mosquitos into the area. In fact, they attract the mosquitos that are already in the area. It takes six weeks to decrease the overall mosquito population.

Q: Where is the best place to set a mosquito trap?

Anywhere mosquitos tend to congregate, like patios, porches, near standing water, or light fixtures. Read the manufacturer’s instructions before setting them up in bedrooms, since some companies recommend keeping them at least 20 feet away from people.

Final thoughts on the best mosquito traps

Outdoor parties are fun—especially when no bugs are buzzing around. Mosquitos aren’t just annoying—they can also carry diseases affecting you, your animals, and your loved ones. Keep mosquito randos out with a trap that works. Whether with light, glue, or a vacuum, you can rest assured that the best mosquito traps will vanquish these pesky pests to their demise.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The 6 best mosquito traps for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric pressure washers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-pressure-washers/ Thu, 28 Dec 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592752
The best electric pressure washers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Make your outdoor spaces look as good as new with pressure washers that'll quickly strip layers of grime away.

The post The best electric pressure washers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best electric pressure washers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best overall DEWALT Electric Pressure Washer DeWalt Electric Pressure Washer
SEE IT

Tackle any deep cleaning job with this great all-around electric pressure washer from DeWalt.

Best for cars Westinghouse ePX3500 Electric Pressure Washer Westinghouse ePX3500 Electric Pressure Washer
SEE IT

If you’d like to restore your car to its original luster, this is one to get.

Best budget Greenworks 1600 PSI Electric Pressure Washer Greenworks 1600 PSI Electric Pressure Washer
SEE IT

Get a surprisingly powerful pressure washer for less than $100.

An electric pressure washer provides one of the most effective (and kinda fun) methods of blasting gunk and grime off just about any outdoor surface. Manually maintaining and restoring parts of your house routinely pelted by rain and snow can be time-consuming, if not impossible. A pressure washer can restore these tricky spots to their original luster in an afternoon or two. The best electric pressure washers make quick work of everything from siding slime to driveway sludge and everything in between.

How we chose the best electric pressure washers

Our recommendations for the best electric pressure washers are based on research that covers the widest variety of feature sets, power levels (measured in PSI, or pounds per square inch), and price points. We also considered size, where and how to use a pressure washer, durability, and overall value. Our guide was designed to accommodate anyone looking to begin using an electric pressure washer for home use. Heavy-duty and commercial users would likely have better luck with a gas-powered model from our list of the best pressure washers.

The best electric pressure washers: Reviews & Recommendations

Some caked-on dirt and grime can seem impossible to strip away, but the best electric pressure washer can unseal years of layered filth in seconds flat. All you have to do is simply hook them up to a garden hose and blast away, making one of these electric pressure washers invaluable to keep in the storage shed.

Best overall: DeWalt Electric Pressure Washer

DEWALT

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: ‎23.1 x 11 x 15.5 inches
  • Weight: 24 pounds
  • PSI: 2,100
  • Price: $297.88

Pros

  • Sufficient power to strip paint
  • Telescoping handle and wheels for easy movement
  • Built-in soap tank

Cons

  • Expensive

If you’d like an electric pressure washer that balances power and portability, DeWalt’s checks those boxes with aplomb. The rectangular unit comes in a protective cage, making it easier to grab and transport between uses. Helpful extras like a removable soap tank and a telescoping handle that can raise and lower to your preferred height significantly improve its ergonomics and usability.

This pressure washer comes with a 25-foot hose, which can coil inside the body’s protective frame to keep it from getting nicked or scratched during storage or transport. Its power cord can be similarly stored on the other side. At 2,100 PSI, this is among the most powerful electric pressure washers we recommend, but its smart design helps it stand above the rest. However, you will pay for it as the electric pressure washer is up to three times more expensive than some of our other recommendations. Ultimately, it’s worth paying a little extra up-front to have access to the extra power when you need it down the road.

Best for cars: Westinghouse ePX3500 Electric Pressure Washer

Westinghouse

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 13.5 x 14 x 16.5 inches
  • Weight: 19 pounds
  • PSI: 2,500
  • Price: $179

Pros

  • Powerful for its size
  • Comes in a family of even more powerful pressure washers
  • Sufficient for more than just car washing

Cons

  • Smaller size means as smaller water tank

If you want to make your car look like it just drove off the lot, Westinghouse’s ePX3500 is an excellent choice. Many of the features we liked in our best overall pick are present here, including a built-in soap tank, and convenient areas to keep its power cord and hose from harm’s way. Westinghouse offers five models of electric pressure washers, and while we’re recommending the model in the middle of the range, you can easily jump to a more powerful (and costly) one if you feel like the jobs you’re doing demand it. It’s smaller than our best overall pick but not quite as easy to transport in real-world situations. The wheels make it easy to pull around the driveway, however, since you don’t want the hose dragging across the painted surfaces of your car as you wash it.

Best small: Craftsman Electric Pressure Washer

Craftsman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 17.5 x 9.25 x 10.44 inches
  • Weight: 17.6 pounds
  • PSI: 1,700
  • Price: $109

Pros

  • Easier to carry
  • Comes with multiple nozzles
  • Removable soap bottle

Cons

  • Smaller pressure washers are less powerful

If you need to take a powerful cleaning tool wherever you go, Craftsman’s Electric Pressure Washer is the one we recommend. It has a built-in handle and is designed to be larger horizontally rather than vertically, making it easier to take to and from a car or carry around in general. It’s not quite as powerful as our other recommendations, but that’s the price you pay with a device that’s only about the size of a toaster.

Obviously, a device this small doesn’t offer built-in cord storage, but it does employ a pair of flanges on the handle, so it’s easy to wrap up the 20-foot hose and keep it out of the way during transport. You must store the pressure washer’s 35-foot cord and soap bottle separately. Beyond its smaller size—a feature, not a bug—this grab-and-go electric pressure washer is inviting and can be incredibly helpful depending on your needs.

Best for home use: Sun Joe SPX3000 14.5-Amp Electric High-Pressure Washer

Sun Joe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 19.5 x 15 x 22 Inches
  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • PSI: 2,030
  • Price: $149

Pros

  • Ample storage for hose and cable
  • Automatic shutoff
  • Comes with multiple spray tips

Cons

  • Large

If you don’t mind a slightly bulkier electric pressure washer, there’s much to recommend about Sun Joe’s SPX3000. Sun Joe says its 2,030 PSI power level is sufficient for cleaning homes, buildings, RVs, cars, boats, decks, driveways, and lawn equipment, which covers most projects you’d tackle with a pressure washer. It has a pair of removable soap tanks, so you can keep a lot in reserve during longer cleaning sessions. Dedicated storage compartments hold coiled hoses and cables and five tips so that you can direct water at multiple radii. There’s even an adapter that allows you to use a standard garden hose rather than the built-in one. It’s this immediate flexibility that helps this pressure washer stand out amongst models with similar power levels. Whether you’re trying to strip paint from your house, free moss from between bricks leading up to your home, or get grime from the underside of your car, this electric pressure washer is up to the task.

Best budget: Greenworks 1600 PSI Electric Pressure Washer

Greenworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 18.5 x 10.28 x 8.74
  • Weight: 18.3 pounds
  • PSI: 1,600
  • Price: $90

Pros

  • Designed for use on many materials
  • Portability
  • Price

Cons

  • Not as powerful as many of our other recommendations

If you don’t have much money to spend, Greenworks’ pressure washer is almost as powerful as many of our other recommendations but costs well under $100. While you obviously sacrifice some power, this electric pressure washer is still sufficient for cleaning cars and getting plenty of dirt off outdoor surfaces. It can’t strip paint, but again, that’s a task typically better left to a much bigger model. Its power cord and hose are roughly the same size as the ones that come with our other recommendations, and there’s an area on its back side for storing them. The vertically oriented electric pressure washer has a top handle, so you can grab it and go, but no wheels to roll it around. At under 20 pounds, it should be relatively easy to hold and carry but may cause fatigue over a full day of work. Still, this electric pressure washer’s drawbacks are far outweighed by its price, which is remarkable given its relative feature parity with models that cost twice as much.

What to consider when shopping for the best electric pressure washers

The factors we considered most highly when determining which electric pressure washers to recommend were identical to the ones we determined were important when recommending any type of pressure washer—regardless of fuel source.

Power level

The first tech spec you should look at when comparing electric pressure washers is their power level, which can be broken down three ways: PSI (pounds per square inch), GPM (gallons per minute), and CU (cleaning units), which is PSI multiplied by GPM. Gas pressure washers typically have a higher PSI and GPM than electric models, but they can sometimes be too powerful for some general-purpose tasks like cleaning a car. Generally, you want to ensure you’re buying something powerful enough to do the job, but don’t go overboard. If you don’t take care with a powerful pressure washer, you can get a painful injection wound that’s very hard to heal.

Cold vs. hot water pressure

All of the electric pressure washers we recommend use cold water, best suited for cleaning cars and dirt or mildew from your porch or stoop. Hot water pressure washers are more powerful but significantly more expensive due to the necessary equipment to heat the water.

Size

Portability is critically important when choosing the right electric pressure washer for you because it determines the best-suited type. Smaller models can be carried around, while larger ones come with a set of wheels that make it a little easier to move.

Budget

As always, we wanted to cover the widest budgets possible, so our guide covers entry-level models to more professional ones suited for demanding tasks.

Hose and power cord length

It may sound like a small detail, but hoses and power cords can be a real pain if you don’t get the right specs. Hoses typically run between 20 and 30 feet. Power cords typically fall between 20 and 35 feet. If you don’t want to spend time hunting for an outlet or wrangling an unwieldy extension cord, make sure to check hose length.

FAQs

Q: Will 2,000 PSI clean concrete?

Yes. That level of power is more than sufficient for cleaning concrete. Of course, every case is different, and some grim is harder to obliterate than others. 2,000 PSI will give you a very fighting chance against even the toughest dirt.

Q: Are electric power washers powerful enough?

Electric pressure washers are powerful enough to clean dirt from your car and outdoor areas of your home. Consider a gas-powered model if you’re looking for something to strip paint or blast grime over long sessions.

Q: What psi will remove paint?

A pressure washer with 2,000 PSI or higher can remove paint, although experts recommend getting a model in the 3,000 PSI range. The type of nozzle you use will also affect paint-removing abilities. A more powerful unit will typically clear a larger area in the same amount of time it would take a smaller one.

Q: How much does an electric pressure washer cost?

This will depend on its strength and size. Our recommendations range in price from under $100 to roughly $300.

Final thoughts on the best electric pressure washers

If you’ve been curious about picking up an electric pressure washer, there’s never been a better time to check one out. They’ve gotten less expensive, easier to use, and are powerful enough for any task you throw their way. As we mentioned earlier, this may not be the first tool you pick up, but it’ll become a go-to if you’re beginning to take home maintenance more seriously. You’ll be able to tackle projects that would be impossible otherwise using a tool that can be stored neatly in your garage when it’s not in use. While you’re in the mood to clean up, go check out our list of the best spin scrubbers for attacking other grimy areas around your home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric pressure washers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric scooters for adults in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-scooters-for-adults/ Fri, 22 Dec 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=593478
The best electric scooters for adults
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Ditch the e-bike for a mode of transportation that's even more convenient: an electric scooter for adults.

The post The best electric scooters for adults in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best electric scooters for adults
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall NIU KQi3 Pro NIU KQi3 Pro
SEE IT

An easy setup process and smooth ride make this our top choice.

Best splurge Segway Ninebot SuperScooter Segway Ninebot SuperScooter
SEE IT

If you want the very top of the line scooter for adults in terms of power and range, this is it.

Best budget Caroma Electric Scooter Caroma Electric Scooter
SEE IT

Get around town quickly without a car or bike for under $300.

An electric scooter for adults seems like the natural progression for those who grew up riding on Razer scooters in the early 2000s or anyone who needs an easier way to get around in cities or suburbia. The number of people renting motorized scooters has been steadily increasing in popularity since at least the late 2010s, but they’ve finally become cost-effective for many more people. The best electric scooters for adults will allow you to get around more easily, and offer a legitimate eco-friendly alternative to electric bikes and other means of public transportation.

How we chose the best electric scooters for adults

Our electric scooters for adults recommendations are based on a mix of hands-on testing and research, with specific emphasis on their speed, range, and weight. This is a mode of transportation, not just a fun electric toy, and we wanted to select models that could be reasonably used for running quick errands in a five- to 10-mile radius.

The right electric scooter for you should be easy to move, last long enough to get to and from multiple places, and keep up with other members of a bicycle lane. We highly recommend researching the specific electric scooter laws in your city or state—these are the regulations in New York City as a reference—so you don’t get caught and fined for doing something you didn’t know was wrong.

The best electric scooters for adults: Reviews & Recommendations

Ready to feel rad, or at the very least feel able to keep your car in the garage or driveway a couple of extra times per week? If you’re ready to move beyond the rental scooters found in dense urban areas and incorporate one of these fast scooters into your regular life, check out our picks. These electric scooters may well become your main mode of transportation for short trips to the laundromat or sandwich shop.

Best overall: NIU KQi3 Pro

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Top speed: 20MPH
  • Range: 31 miles
  • Weight: ‎56 Pounds

Pros

  • Responsive brakes
  • Smooth steering
  • Easy-to-use app

Cons

  • Full speed required to move up hills

If you’ve never ridden an electric scooter before, we can’t recommend NIU’s KQi3 Pro highly enough. This beginner-friendly scooter took roughly 10 minutes to set up, a process that included unboxing, attaching the steering column to the main body and handlebar to the steering column, downloading NIU’s app, pairing our smartphone to the KQi3 Pro, and plugging it in to charge. You’ll only need one tool for assembly, which is included in the box. NIU says it takes six hours to charge this electric scooter’s battery fully, and we waited until it was fully topped up to begin our tests.

We opted to pair our scooter with NIU’s app before our first ride because it offers some genuinely helpful information, such as its current battery status, duration of your last ride, and total mileage. You can also lock the scooter to prevent theft, which is the most important feature. Finally, the KQi3 Pro does get occasional firmware updates, and the app can keep your ride up to date. This is a gadget after all, and any improvements to its efficiency and safety are highly recommended.

We’d never ridden an electric scooter for adults before the KQi3 Pro, and we have to admit the experience was seamless immediately. This scooter’s controls are intuitive: Depress an accelerator switch on the left side to increase your speed, and brake by squeezing either of the levers located above the handlebar. These controls will feel familiar if you’re familiar with riding a bicycle—especially an ebike. It took about a half hour to learn how to properly negotiate our turns, which comes down to our inexperience with this form of transportation, but we felt totally in control of the scooter after that.

The main purpose of scooters for adults is purposeful mobility, and the KQi3 Pro is plenty powerful for trips around town. We rode on smooth and rough asphalt, ran over water hoses and similarly-sized obstacles, and even shallow potholes. At peak speed, we zoomed past pedestrians and bikers, mindful of our surroundings, of course (so if you’re wearing headphones, make them bone conduction). We found it struggled a little going uphill, but that comes down to the weight of the rider and incline of the hill.

NIU says this scooter can run up to 31 miles per charge, but that depends on how much you push the scooter. We found that range estimate accurate on flat terrain, but the battery ran down more quickly if we took routes with several hills. Be mindful of this as you pre-plan a longer route. Altogether, we found NIU’s KQi3 Pro to be an exceptional scooter for adults, especially those new to this form of transportation. Everything from its user-friendly setup and app to the smoothness of our rides stood out.

Best splurge: Segway Ninebot SuperScooter GT2P

Segway

SEE IT

Specs

  • Top speed: 43.5MPH
  • Range: 55.9 Miles
  • Weight: ‎116 Pounds

Pros

  • Longest range
  • Fastest top speed
  • Cruise control

Cons

  • Price

In terms of raw power, Segway’s Ninebot SuperScooter GT2P is untouchable. It can run at speeds up to 37.3 miles per hour, run for over 50 miles per charge, and is equipped with car-like features, including cruise control and a detailed display. The scooter’s built-in screen can show its battery status, speed, operating mode, and even rate of acceleration. Having all these metrics at a glance can be extremely helpful in moderating your speed and adjusting your route in real-time based on how much juice is left in the tank. You can optimize the GTP2’s power by switching its sport and race modes into eco mode, reducing its energy consumption.

Every component in the GT2P is luxe, from its double-wishbone suspension to keep you from bouncing when going over large bumps to its hydraulic disc brake that ensures you won’t get jerked around if you have to stop more suddenly. Ambient lights on the back will illuminate to let drivers and bikers know you’re there, which is an important safety feature when operating this scooter at night. These features push Segway’s scooter in front of the competition on both a technical and design front, contributing to its $2,499.99 price tag. Given its cost, we can only recommend this scooter for adults to someone interested in making it their primary form of transportation.

Best eco-friendly: Segway Ninebot KickScooter MAX G2

Segway

SEE IT

Specs

  • Top speed: 22MPH
  • Range: 43 Miles
  • Weight: ‎53.5 Pounds

Pros

  • Long range
  • Wide footboard
  • Find My support

Cons

  • Price

While it’s still steeper in price than most of our recommendations, Segway’s Ninebot KickScooter MAX G2 can run for up to 43 miles in eco mode. This means you’ll have to charge it less often, which is helpful if you’re trying to moderate your monthly utility bill and carbon footprint. While range is this electric scooter’s biggest asset, it’s complemented by useful design features like integrated turn signals located on both sides of its handlebar, a wider footboard to make riding more comfortable, and a high-decibel horn that’s louder than a dinging bell. That horn can also sound in the event of a theft.

In the event that this scooter does get stolen, you can track and potentially retrieve it more easily by enabling Apple’s Find My feature from within Segway’s iOS app. This feature is contingent on you having an iPhone, but it’s helpful nonetheless. The Ninebot KickScooter MAX G2 doesn’t have all the advanced design features as Segway’s higher-end electric scooters, but it does have a bunch of automatic battery settings that impressed us. The scooter can monitor its battery’s status in real-time to prevent damage from overcurrents, overheating, and overcharging, amongst other potential issues. These features can extend the life of an electric scooter as they’ll save you from having to replace or repair components. That in itself makes this electric scooter for adults the best eco-friendly option.

Best durable: NAVEE V50

Specs

  • Top speed: 20MPH
  • Range: 31 Miles
  • Weight: 37 Pounds

Pros

  • Water-resistant and dust-protected design
  • Large tires
  • AirTag holder

Cons

  • Plain design

If you plan on riding your electric scooter over rough terrain, NAVEE’s V50 should be the one you choose. It’s the only electric scooter for adults we’re recommending with an IP55 rating, which means it’s water-resistant and dust-protected. The scooter will get damaged if fully submerged underwater but can be splashed or rained on without consequence. Similarly, riding the scooter through a patch of dirt or sandy asphalt shouldn’t trouble you. NAVEE outfitted its electric scooter with large, 10-inch wheels designed to avoid damage from smaller potholes.

On the technical side, the NAVEE V50 is on par with our top recommendation, offering the same range and top speed and being outfitted with a display that shows similar data points. One optional tech feature is the ability to open up a small compartment in the scooter’s handlebar, which was designed to fit an Apple AirTag. If you plant the tracker in your scooter, you’ll be able to monitor its location in real time using the Find My app available on the iPhone. We don’t have any substantive complaints about this scooter other than the fact that this scooter’s look is a little basic.

Best budget: Caroma E5B Electric Scooter

Caroma Electric

SEE IT

Specs

  • Top speed: 15.5MPH
  • Range: 15.5 Miles
  • Weight: 23.1 Pounds

Pros

  • Built-in display
  • Lightweight
  • Price

Cons

  • Lower power and range

If you only need an electric scooter for very casual rides and short runs to close places, Caroma’s E5B is the best value. It costs under $250, which makes it accessible to far more people than all of our other recommendations. Yes, this means the scooter has a lower top speed and shorter range, but you’ll still be able to make shorter trips in far less time than walking. The E5B has a smaller screen that’ll still show your current speed and battery life, and will allow you to switch between a few operating modes that impact its power draw.

This electric scooter has smaller wheels than some of our other recommendations, so you’ll feel smaller bumps in the road more acutely. None of these limitations are deal breakers, but you should be mindful of them. If you’re curious about getting your first electric scooter for adults, the Caroma E5B’s inviting entry-level price will allow you to kick the tires (literally) before deciding whether you’ll need to upgrade to a more advanced model down the line.

What to consider when buying electric scooters for adults

There are many decisions to make when deciding which electric scooter for adults is right for your needs. Below you’ll find the factors we deemed most important during our research and testing:

Range

Most electric scooters can run for around 30 miles, with less powerful models clocking in closer to 20 miles and premium options running between 40 and 50 miles. We recommend using your maps app of choice to check the distance between your home and the places you’d like to go. This will give you a reasonable baseline for your electric scooter range needs. If possible, get a scooter with a slightly higher maximum range than you’d need just to be safe.

Maximum speed

A majority of the scooters we’re recommending can run at up to 20 miles per hour, with the most premium model running nearly double that speed. Keep in mind your maximum riding speed may be limited by local laws.

Weight

An electric scooter’s weight doesn’t seem important until you carry it up or down stairs or across a street or room. You should be able to lift your electric scooter without overexerting yourself.

FAQs

Q: Can an electric scooter last 10 years?

Yes. With proper maintenance, there’s no reason why your electric scooter should last less than 10 years.

Q: How do I maintain my electric scooter?

Cleaning your electric scooter off after every ride, avoiding potholes and rough terrain, and keeping your battery charged regularly can help ensure your electric scooter remains usable for several years.

Q: How far can electric scooters go?

This will vary from model to model, but a typical electric scooter will run for around 30 miles before recharging.

Q: Do I need a driver’s license for an electric scooter?

No. You do not need a driver’s license to operate an electric scooter, but check the local laws in your area to see whether that changes.

Q: How much does an electric scooter cost?

This depends on their technical specifications, but our recommendations cost between $239.99 and $2,499.99.

Final thoughts on the best electric scooters for adults

Using an electric scooter for adults can be liberating if you feel bad starting your gas car for short trips—those just long enough wherein it’d be uncomfortable to walk. Sure, you could convert a bike to an ebike, but the right cheap scooter lets you fold it up (unlike most bikes) once you reach your destination, be it a store, school, or even an office, and store them easily until you leave. This mode of transportation can help cut down on your carbon footprint and may even begin paying for itself (albeit very, very slowly) by reducing the amount of gas you have to put in your car. If you have no current means of transportation, an electric scooter can be a lifeline that makes certain errands, like transporting multiple bags of groceries, possible.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric scooters for adults in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best budget telescopes for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-budget-telescopes/ Thu, 21 Dec 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=596383
The best budget telescopes arranged in a row on a white background
Stan Horaczek

You don't need to have money like NASA to get a good look at the night sky. These affordable telescopes can help.

The post The best budget telescopes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best budget telescopes arranged in a row on a white background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ budget telescope with accessories on a plain background Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

This feature-laden model offers a great mix of performance and price.

Best for astrophotography Celestron Inspire 100AZ budget telescope on a plain background Celestron Inspire 100AZ
SEE IT

Easily attach any smartphone to the eyepiece to capture impressive shots of the night sky.

Best for deep space Sky-Watcher Classic 200 budget telescope on a plain background Sky-Watcher Classic 200
SEE IT

This model’s chunky design peers further into space than the competition.

Budget telescopes are a great way to dip your toes into cosmic exploration without needing a fortune of galactic proportions. While you may miss out on advanced tech and smart features found in more expensive options, budget-friendly telescopes still allow you to view stars, planets, nebulas, and more. Choosing an affordable telescope can be challenging, though. Read on to discover our favorite picks and what you should look for in the best budget telescopes. 

How we chose the best budget telescopes

While budget telescopes will result in limited selection compared to higher-price items, there are still plenty of options for those on tight budgets. When selecting the telescopes for this guide, we prioritized those from well-established brands to ensure quality, durability, and reliability. You’ll notice that Celestron is well-represented, and for good reason. Celestron is truly the heavy in the consumer telescope world, and it tends to dominate on the more accessible end of the spectrum. We then considered the optical design, mount type, aperture, and focal length, choosing a variety of options suitable for different stargazing needs. Finally, we assessed build quality, optical quality, and included accessories. 

The best budget telescopes: Reviews & Recommendations

Manufacturers of budget telescopes inherently need to make sacrifices to keep prices down, but that doesn’t mean all budget-friendly devices are cheaply made or of poor quality. The options below will offer a balance of quality, features, and price so you can get the most for your money at a lower price point. 

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Newtonian reflector
  • Mount type: Alt-azimuth
  • Aperture: 130mm (5.11 inches)
  • Focal length: 650mm (25.59 inches)
  • Magnification: 26x and 65x
  • Weight: 18 pounds
  • Dimensions: 38.98 x 16.93 x 8.98 inches

Pros

  • Easy to set up and align
  • Sharp, quality optics
  • Bright aperture
  • Excellent value for the price

Cons

  • Manual control only
  • Included eyepieces offer limited magnification

Our top pick offers an impressive amount of quality for its sub-$500 price. This Newtonian reflector telescope features a 5-inch primary mirror with highly reflective coatings to produce sharp, clear images. The 130mm aperture gatherers lots of light, so it’s plenty bright in many conditions. Those light-gathering skills also come in handy when taking photos if you want to practice astrophotography. 

This budget telescope comes with an alt-azimuth mount and a sturdy, full-height tripod. Despite its robust base, it’s still relatively lightweight, so bringing it to a spot with less light pollution won’t be too challenging. It also includes 10mm and 25mm eyepieces, offering 26x and 65x magnification, respectively. That makes seeing star clusters, nebulae, planets, and more possible. 

We especially like that the 130AZ comes with a phone deck. With your phone mounted to the telescope, you can use the StarSense app to identify which objects you want to look at. It will then guide you to where you need to be, which is fun for beginners and more experienced stargazers alike. If you want to use it without your phone, it also has a red dot finderscope to help guide you. 

Best portable: Celestron Astromaster 70AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Optical design: Newtonian reflector
  • Mount type: Alt-azimuth
  • Aperture: 70mm (2.76 inches)
  • Focal length: 900mm (35 inches)
  • Magnification: 45x and 90x
  • Weight: 18 pounds
  • Dimensions: 14.96 x 5.12 x 3.94 inches

Pros

  • Includes everything you need to get started
  • Comes with 10mm and 20mm eyepieces
  • Very simple to set up
  • Lightweight and portable

Cons

  • Manual control only (no motor)
  • Limited magnification

The Celestron Astromaster 70AZ Newtonian reflector is an extremely popular budget telescope thanks to its ideal balance of features, size, and price. It comes with an alt-azimuth mount and two eyepieces—10mm and 20mm—so you won’t need to purchase any extras to get started viewing the stars. It’s also easy to assemble, so you’ll be stargazing just a few minutes after opening the box. 

We like the Astromaster 70AZ partly because it is relatively compact and lightweight at roughly 18 pounds. It’s easier to bring with you on trips to find skies free of light pollution. The lightweight design also makes it a good choice for kids. The two eyepieces allow for 45x and 90x magnification, allowing you to view planets easily. 

Of course, as a budget telescope, there are some downsides. The 70mm aperture won’t allow you to see deep-space objects very well. And the panning handle doesn’t allow for very precise adjustments. It’s best for beginners, as a result. But, it provides quality optics at a very affordable price, making it an attractive option for those on a tight budget.

Best for smartphone astrophotography: Celestron Inspire 100AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

  • Optical design: Refractor
  • Mount type: Alt-azimuth
  • Aperture: 100mm (3.94 inches)
  • Focal length: 660mm (25.98 inches)
  • Magnification: 33x and 66x 
  • Weight: 6.6 pounds
  • Dimensions: 38 x 33 x 52 inches

Pros

  • Quality optics
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Very easy to set up
  • Lens cap serves as a smartphone mount

Cons

  • Some fringing

The Celestron Inspire 100AZ is a great choice for those wanting to explore the possibilities of astrophotography with just a phone. That’s in part thanks to the clever dual-purpose lens cap. When you’re ready to take photos, simply attach the lens cap to the eyepiece, then strap your phone into place, and you’re all set. 

The Inspire 100AZ is an achromatic refractor scope. It offers a 100mm aperture for plenty of light gathering and a 660mm focal length. You’ll be able to view the moon and planets easily and some brighter star clusters. It won’t quite cut it for deep space, however. That’s typical of this type of telescope.

This budget telescope features an alt-azimuth mount and comes with a sturdy tripod. It’s quick and easy to set up and break down. You’ll also get the StarPointer Pro red dot finder to help you find celestial objects and 10mm and 20mm Kellner eyepieces. And it offers a built-in red light to help you find your accessories in the dark without blasting your eyes with light. Unfortunately, there is some fringing, which is unsurprising for a budget refractor model. But for those just getting started, we think it’s still an excellent option.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II

Orion

SEE IT

  • Optical design: Refractor
  • Mount type: Alt-azimuth 
  • Aperture: 60mm (2.4 inches)
  • Focal length: 700mm (27.5 inches)
  • Magnification range: 28x, 70x
  • Weight: 4.3 pounds
  • Dimensions: 29.3 x 10.9 x 7.5 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight and portable
  • Comes with fun and useful books and maps
  • Includes two eyepieces
  • Easy to set up

Cons

  • Not for viewing deep space

If a star projector piqued your child’s interest in the cosmos, a to-scale telescope is a logical next step to keep their interest growing. The Orion Observer II is a great starter kit for kids. It will allow them to check out craters on the moon or even the rings on Saturn, expanding their minds as they view our vast universe.

The anti-reflection-coated 60mm achromatic objective lens gathers enough light for budding astronomers and produces clear views while keeping the cost down. The 700mm focal length paired with the included 10mm and 25mm Kellner eyepieces result in 28x and 70x magnification, respectively. It features an alt-azimuth mount for easy tracking and comes with a tripod that’s easy to set up, even for kids. 

Part of what makes the Orion Observer II stand out for kids is the books and guides that come with it. The Orion MoonMap 260 shares 260 interest features to look for on the moon. The Star Target planisphere helps you figure out what you can see in the night sky for every night of the year. And the Exploring the Cosmos book introduces space and the stars for your budding astronomer. 

Best for deep space: Sky-Watcher Classic 200

Orion

SEE IT

  • Optical design: Dobsonian
  • Mount type: Alt-azimuth
  • Aperture: 8 inches
  • Focal length: 1200mm
  • Magnification range: 48x, 120x
  • Weight: 45 pounds
  • Dimensions: 49 x 27 x 18 inches

Pros

  • 8-inch mirror captures lots of light
  • Sharp, clear optics
  • Comes with 25mm and 10mm eyepieces
  • Sturdy and well-made

Cons

  • Bulky and heavy

For viewing deep into the depths of space, you’ll need a telescope with lots of light-gathering abilities. That means a Dobsonian telescope, a type of telescopes commonly called “light buckets.” The Sky-Watcher Classic 200 is an excellent budget-friendly Dobsonian, offering a lot of quality for the price. 

The large eight-inch aperture will allow you to view even faint nebulas, galaxies, and star clusters. The 1200mm focal length provides lots of reach, resulting in 48x and 120x magnification when using the included 10mm and 25mm Plössl eyepieces. It also comes with a two-inch Crayford focuser, a 1.25-inch eyepiece adapter, and a 9×50 straight-through finder scope. There is a built-in eyepiece tray to keep it all organized as well, which we appreciate.

Sky-Watcher designed this scope with Teflon bearings for smooth azimuth movement and patented tension control handles for accurate adjustments. It is very well made and will last a lifetime. The main downside to this budget telescope is its size. It weighs 45 pounds when fully assembled. It also doesn’t come with a stand, so it must be placed on a sturdy, level surface. This telescope is not one that you will want to travel with or move around much as a result. Instead, it’s best suited for homes where you can set it up and leave it be. 

Things to consider when shopping for the best budget telescopes

There’s lots of technical jargon associated with telescopes, so figuring out what it all means can be overwhelming. We spoke with Dr. Jason Aufdenberg, Associate Professor of Astronomy and Astrophysics at Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University, to get his advice on telescope shopping. He explained that it may be tempting to opt for the largest magnification you can afford and ignore all the other features, but that’s not necessarily the right call. Below are some key things to pay attention to when choosing a budget telescope, or any telescope, for that matter. 

Optical design

There are three primary types of optical designs in telescopes: Refractor, reflector, and catadioptric or compound. 

Reflector telescopes use glass lenses to focus light into an eyepiece. Light needs to travel in a straight path to the eyepiece in reflectors, which results in devices that are longer than they are wide. Reflector telescopes tend to result in chromatic aberration, otherwise known as fringing. To avoid this, Dr. Aufdenberg explained that manufacturers rely on complicated multi-element lens systems, which makes them expensive. But they are sturdy and relatively maintenance-free, making them one of the most common types available. 

Reflector telescopes—which include Dobsonian and Newtonian—use mirrors to reflect the light into focus. These bounce light back and forth in the optical tube, which allows for a shorter design. They also cost less to make, so most cheap telescopes are reflectors. Dr. Aufdenburd suggests a Dobsonian for beginners because it offers the most light collection per dollar. However, this type of telescope will require what’s called collimation, which is an alignment of the mirrors. It usually only takes a few minutes, but it is an additional step. 

Finally, catadioptric telescopes use both lenses and mirrors, resulting in a compact form factor. If you’re looking for a portable option, a catadioptric is your best bet. Schmidt-Cassegrains and Maksutov-Cassegrains are two common varieties of this type of telescope. 

Mount type

Dr. Aufdenberg stressed that the telescope mount is just as important as the other features. That’s because the mount controls how and where the telescope can move, which impacts what you can do with it. There are three primary types of mounts to consider: Alt-azimuth, Dobsonian, and equatorial. 

Alt-azimuth mounts are the simplest and, thus, most affordable mounts available. These allow for altitude (vertical) and azimuth (horizontal) adjustments. Quality alt-az mounts allow for smooth tracking across the sky, which makes them an ideal choice for shorter astrophotography captures. Some are even computerized for automatic tracking.

Dobsonian mounts sit on lazy susan-like platforms that must be placed on sturdy surfaces like tables or mounted to platforms. They are intended to support massive Newtonian telescopes, but many compact telescopes also use this mount type as well. They provide more stability than the other mount types, as long as you have a stable surface to mount it to. 

Equatorial mounts essentially counteract the Earth’s rotation, making them perfect for long observations and serious astrophotography. With an equatorial mount, you can focus on a specific celestial object and guide it across the sky to keep it centered. You can either do this manually or with an electric motor for automatic tracking. 

Lens

Once you decide on your optical design and mount type, you’ll need to select the diameter of the primary lens, also known as aperture. The aperture is measured in millimeters or inches and indicates how much light the telescope lets in. A larger aperture will allow for shorter exposure times for astrophotography and allow you to see dimmer objects—such as nebulae—faster. You should choose the largest lens that you can afford and that is as portable as you need it to be.  

Magnification

Lastly, you’ll want to think about the type of objects you want to view and what magnification is required to view those objects. To see details such as Jupiter’s moons or Saturn’s rings, you’ll want at least 30-40x magnification. 

Magnification is, in part, determined by the focal length of your eyepiece. Many telescopes will come with multiple eyepieces, providing more versatility. To determine the magnification with a specific eyepiece, divide the focal length of the optical tube by the eyepiece. 

FAQs

Q: Are cheap telescopes worth it?

Yes, depending on how cheap you are looking for, cheap telescopes are worth it. But if you go too cheap, it may not be. We’d recommend at least sticking above $100 for a telescope. Any cheaper, you’ll be dealing with poor-quality optics that make it difficult to see details and missing features that prevent you from easily finding and tracking celestial objects. 

Q: Can a cheap telescope see planets?

Yes, you can use a cheap telescope to see planets. Cheap telescopes may not offer smart technology features such as finding and tracking planets automatically. But plenty of budget-friendly telescopes have enough reach and light-gathering abilities to check out planets.  

Q: Which telescope brand is best?

Which telescope brand is best depends on what you are looking for and your budget, but Celestron, Orion, Sky-Watcher, Meade Instruments, Explore Scientific, and Vixen all make excellent, trustworthy telescopes. If you are looking for a smart telescope, Vaonis and Unistellar are two of the top options. 

Q: Are used telescopes worth buying?

Used telescopes are very much worth buying. If in good condition, a used telescope will function just as well as a new one and will save you money. 

Final thoughts on the best budget telescopes

You don’t have to spend a fortune to get a quality, fun-to-use telescope. By prioritizing the features and technology that you will actually use, you’ll be able to save money while getting a device that will last you for years to come. Whether you are a novice to stargazing or someone with more experience, the budget telescopes above will get you searching the cosmos for less. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best budget telescopes for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cordless snow blowers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-cordless-snow-blowers/ Wed, 20 Dec 2023 21:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=593459
The best cordless snow blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Step away from your shovel and make a move toward a more convenient, powerful tool by investing in a cordless snow blower.

The post The best cordless snow blowers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best cordless snow blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Greenworks 80V Brushless Cordless Snow Blower Greenworks 80V Brushless Cordless Snow Blower
SEE IT

This electric cordless snow blower offers the ideal mix of performance and cost.

Best gas-powered PowerSmart Gas Powered Snow Blower PowerSmart Gas-Powered Snow Blower
SEE IT

Get raw power without having to worry about charging a battery.

Best budget Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower
SEE IT

An efficient, well-designed electric model for under $200.

Cordless snow blowers are worthwhile investments that let you finally retire your trusty shovel without hesitation. They don’t need to be tethered to an outlet to run, which gives you complete flexibility in where you work. If you’re clearing snow from a front and backyard, you don’t have to worry about keeping a door or window propped open to run a power cord through. Despite their portability, cordless snow blowers are nearly as powerful as ones that must be plugged in constantly thanks to advances in lithium-ion batteries. You’ll need to monitor its power source (either a battery or gas tank) to ensure you have enough juice, but that’s the only tradeoff. The best cordless snow blowers will allow you to clear the snow outside your home to make it safe for you, your family and friends, and pedestrians alike.

How we chose the best cordless snow blowers

We based our cordless snow blower recommendations on their size, weight, power (as determined by throw distance), and price. Design features that impacted how this tool works were also considered highly. Some cordless snow blowers come with an additional accessory, like a second battery, which also factored into how we made our recommendations.

The best cordless snow blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Ready to ditch your snow shovel once and for all? Tired of dragging extension cords? Our cordless snow blower choices all operate roughly the same, able to dig effectively into snow 6- to 10-inches deep on average, but vary in a few key ways. The best option to clear your pavement will be easy to move, the correct size for your space, and long-lasting. So read up on snow removal safety then read these picks. You’ll find what you need below, whether you want a big, gas-powered cordless snow blower or a petite-but-still-powerful battery-powered model.

Best overall: Greenworks 80V Brushless Cordless Snow Blower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Size: 31 x 21.6 x 37 Inches
  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Throwing distance: 25 feet

Pros

  • Mid-sized
  • Not too heavy
  • Good balance of power and cost

Cons

  • Midrange throw distance

Greenworks’ 80V Brushless Cordless Snow Blower is the Goldilocks in its category, offering a solid mix of power, design, and maneuverability at a solid price. It can throw snow up to 25 feet away, which means it’s not quite as powerful as some other models we’re recommending, but fine for most driveways and stoops. You can rotate its chute up to 180 degrees to ensure all the snow ends up in a neater pile rather than all over the place. At 20 inches wide and 33 pounds, this cordless snow blower is in the middle of the pack size-wise. You’ll still have to put effort in to push and maneuver it, but it’ll be more manageable than larger models, which can weigh over 80 pounds.

Makers of our favorite cordless chainsaw because of its thoughtful touches, Greenworks put the same eye for detail into play here. The company built a pair of lights into the front of its cordless snow blower, which makes it easier to use in the dark. But be mindful that these lights will drain the snow blower’s battery more quickly. Engaging this snow blower requires you to push a button and pull down on a thin bar below its handlebar. This design prevents you from accidentally turning the snow blower on and having it run ahead of you. The snow blower will automatically stop when you loosen your grip on the small bar. If you have a mid-sized driveway, Greenworks’ 80V Brushless Cordless Snow Blower will suit your needs perfectly.

Best splurge: EGO Power+ SNT2102 Cordless Snow Blower

EGO Power+

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Size: 35 x 22 x 45 Inches
  • Weight: 50.71 pounds
  • Throwing distance: 35 feet

Pros

  • Longer throw distance
  • Comes with multiple batteries
  • Can clear snow drifts up to eight inches tall

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

EGO Power+’s cordless snow blower is so powerful it requires two batteries (which are included) to run. It can throw snow at distances up to 35 feet, and its feeder is tall enough to suck up and throw snow piles up to eight inches tall. This cordless snow blower also has many features we highlighted in our best overall pick, including a two-step starting mechanism, headlights, and a flexible chute. All of this power is necessary when cleaning up after a big blizzard, but it comes with a couple of notable downsides.

First, this cordless snow blower weighs over 50 pounds, so you’ll have to exert a lot more energy to move it around. It also adds to the snow blower’s price, which is fair given when you’re getting for your money, but makes it a no-go for those with more modest budgets or needs. If you require an uber-powerful snow blower to clean up the front and back of your house or clean multiple properties for neighbors, it’s well worth the price.

Best compact: Greenworks 40V Cordless Snow Blower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Size: 38.58 x 17.52 x 44.29 Inches
  • Weight: 17.52 Pounds
  • Throwing distance: 20 feet

Pros

  • Narrow size size
  • Very low weight
  • Easy to maneuver

Cons

  • Weak throw distance

If you’re still (literally) holding onto your shovel because of snow blower space concerns, Greenworks’ 40V Cordless Snow Blower will prove you wrong. At just 17.5 inches wide, this snowblower can fit more easily into a corner of your garage or basement. Furthermore, its main handle can be folded over the front of the cordless snowblower to take up less vertical space. Finally, because it’s battery-powered, you won’t have to worry about gas or oil being stored indoors. Despite its size, this small snow blower has built-in lights, a two-step activation mechanism, and flexible chute.

You do miss out on power—this cordless snowblower has the shortest throw distance, for example—but it’s also lighter than our other recommendations, which makes it easier to move (making it the best snow thrower for elderly people). You’ll have to make additional passes to clean up a larger area when compared to a full-sized snowblower, but the difference in size and weight is an appropriate tradeoff. Regardless of size, this cordless snowblower will still be faster and more efficient than a shovel.

Best gas-powered: PowerSmart Gas-Powered Snow Blower

PowerSmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Size: 50 x 21 x 36 Inches
  • Weight: 80 Pounds
  • Throwing distance: 35 Feet

Pros

  • Long throw distance
  • Doesn’t need to charge
  • Fast engine

Cons

  • Heavy

If all you want is raw power, PowerSmart’s Gas-Powered Snow Blower is the best cordless option for you. It has a throw distance of 35 feet, and PowerSmart says it can clear up to 1,680 pounds of snow per minute. If you have a large driveway, this power will come in handy (and power is one of the reasons the company also makes one of our favorite snow blowers for gravel driveways). This is the only gas snow blower we’re recommending, and its fuel source is a big part of why it’s so powerful. PowerSmart didn’t need to limit the strength of its motor for the sake of battery efficiency. You can continuously fuel up this snow blower and have it run at full strength for as long as the job takes.

One of the downsides to having a big, powerful motor is increased weight. This snow blower weighs over four times more than our lightest recommendation and over twice as much as our top pick. You’ll have to exert yourself to get the cordless snowblower moving, but you shouldn’t have to go over any areas multiple times to clean them up. As you’d expect, this cordless snowblower has standard features like a built-in light and movable chute. Better still, its handle can be folded over the snow blower for convenient storage.

Best budget: Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower

Snow Joe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Size: 23.4 x 22 x 26 Inches
  • Weight: 34.8 Pounds
  • Throwing distance: 25 Feet

Pros

  • Wide clearing path
  • 15-amp motor
  • Price

Cons

  • A little heavy

Snow Joe’s budget-priced cordless snowblower has all the features you’ll find in more expensive models—albeit with less power—at a far lower price. Every major design feature, from a rotating chute and two-stage ignition process to headlights and foldability for storage, is present. It’s a little heavier than most of our recommendations and only has a throwing distance of 25 feet, which may not work depending on the size of the space you’re clearing.

It does have a powerful motor and wide clearing path, so you shouldn’t have to go over the same parts of your driveway or porch multiple times to get it cleared. Snow Joe says the rubber-tipped steel blades on its cordless snow blower can move 25 tons of snow per hour. If you need a cordless snow blower to clear a narrower space, or you don’t have more than $150 to spend on this winter cleaning tool, this is your best option by far.

What to consider when shopping for cordless snow blowers

There are many decisions to make when choosing the best cordless snow blower for your needs. Below are the most important factors when determining which to feature in this story:

Power source

Cordless snow blowers can run on a battery or gas, and the one you choose largely depends on preference. Both gas- and battery-powered electric snow blowers can clear an identical amount of space in roughly the same amount of time. The biggest benefit to a gas-powered snow blower is that you can immediately refuel it if necessary. If your battery-powered snow blower conks out, you’ll need to charge it up, which could take hours. The solution is buying an additional battery, which adds to the expense. On the other hand, if you plan on keeping this tool indoors year-round, a battery-powered model may be the way to go because you won’t have a tank full of gas sitting around.

Size

A cordless snow blower’s size will impact how long it’ll take to clean up an area. Wider cordless snow blowers will do the job more quickly but can be more difficult to maneuver. Measure how narrow your driveway, walkway, or porch is before making a decision.

Weight

Using a cordless snow blower is not as taxing on your body as shoveling, but you will still need to push it for an extended period. This can be particularly difficult if you’re clearing a large space. A lighter snow blower will be easier to move around but won’t be as powerful, so make that tradeoff wisely.

Throw distance

This cordless snow blower tech spec shows how far a snow blower can throw snow out through its chute. Throwing snow further means you will likely avoid going over the same area more than once. Our recommendations can throw snow between 20 and 35 feet.

Remember, snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Adults, especially older ones diagnosed with heart or physical health issues, should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations. If that’s not an option, use a compact snow thrower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

FAQs

Q: Is it worth buying an electric snow blower?

Yes. An electric snow blower that runs on battery power can last long enough to clear a mid-sized driveway before recharging.

Q: Do battery snow blowers work?

Yes. Battery-powered snow blowers do work well enough to clean snow from large areas without getting stuck or hitching. The only trouble you may run into is having a battery run out of power in the middle of a job depending on the size of the space you’re clearing.

Q: Are battery snow blowers as good as gas?

Yes. A battery-powered snow blower can be as powerful as a gas-powered model.

Q: How much does a cordless snow blower cost?

This depends on its size and power source. Our recommendations range in price between $239 and $679.

Final thoughts on the best cordless snow blowers

A cordless snow blower will be your most-used winter tool if you live in a cold, wet climate. Shoveling a large area can be dangerous to your health, including increasing your risk of having a heart attack. Using a cordless snow blower will still strain your body, especially if you’re subjecting yourself to walking outdoors in sub-zero temperatures, but not nearly as much as shoveling will. If you’re done with analog snow removal, a cordless snow blower is your best investment.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best cordless snow blowers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best LED grow lights for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-led-grow-lights/ Thu, 14 Oct 2021 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=402107
The Best LED Grow Lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Bring a little bit of sunshine to your indoor plants with these flexible lighting solutions.

The post The best LED grow lights for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best LED Grow Lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Soltech Solutions Grove LED light on a light wood table. Soltech Solutions Grove LED Grow Light
SEE IT

Mount this stylish light almost anywhere.

Best commercial Spider Farmer SF7000 Spider Farmer SF7000
SEE IT

Bigger and brighter for more powerful coverage.

Best budget A Sun YOBA LED grow lamp on a plain background Sun YOBA LED Plant Grow Light
SEE IT

Easy to install and very low power consumption.

Until scientists invent convenient mini Suns that we can contain inside our homes, our plants must rely on artificial daylight like that emitted by LED grow lights. Fortunately, those illumination sources have come a long way in terms of efficiency and efficacy. LED technology has improved everything from TVs to your smartphone, but it can also help your plants. Whether you’re trying to baby your indoor plants, nurture some seedlings that will eventually go out into the garden, or just please an outdoor plant that needs to spend some time inside, these LED arrays can pump out the photons plants crave. But you can’t just go shining an LED flashlight at your precious plants. You must pick the right power, color, and size to make your indoor garden thrive. That can be tricky, but these picks can provide the perfect illumination no matter what your flora looks like. The best LED grow lights will allow you to become an indoor botanist without much effort.

How we chose the best LED grow lights

The PopSci writers and editors truly love plants, but we don’t all live where our favorite flora friends thrive. That means serious indoor growing sessions. I personally keep an extensive outdoor garden in New York’s native climate but annually start vegetable seedlings inside to maximize the growing season.

The best LED grow lights: Reviews & Recommendations

For this guide, we considered a wide swath of different lights that can apply to almost any grower in nearly any space. We considered important variables, including power usage, size, and spectrum. These lights can consume a ton of energy, even with LEDs, so we centered our search around efficient models that cover a lot of uses.

Best overall: Soltech Solutions Grove LED Grow Light

Soltech Solutions

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This light can handle most plant needs and places thanks to its flexibility.

Specs

  • Input power: 11 watts
  • LEDs: N/A
  • Color: 3,000 Kelvin

Pros

  • Stylish
  • Dimmable
  • Touch power

Cons 

  • Slightly expensive

You may not need a huge light array now, but you might want to grow your indoor garden down the road. If that’s the case, you want a system that’s easy to expand while giving you the same color, quality, and amount of light. This is the most beautiful, well-designed grow light you’ll find.

The Soltech Solutions Grove LED grow light clocks in at 11 watts of consumption. It provides an ideal mix of warm and sun-colored light to foster indoor growth across a wide variety of plants. 

This tube-shaped illuminator lasts for 50,000 hours, so it will keep pumping out photons for many seasons. Because the LEDs are high quality, they’ll last longer, but they’re also more efficient, which leads to less overall electricity usage down the road, even if you’re trying to get those tomatoes just right.

Best commercial: Spider Farmer SF7000 LED Grow Light

Spider Farmer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: More than 1,700 lamps pump out ample light for large growing areas, and its fine-grain control makes it friendly to new commercial growers.

Specs

  • Input power: 650 watts
  • LEDs: 1,700
  • Color: Full-spectrum

Pros 

  • Powerful
  • Lots of coverage
  • Daisy-chainable

Cons

  • Consumes lots of power

If you have a big growing area or particularly light-hungry plants, you need a light panel covering a wide area. This one from Spider Farmer provides sun-like light over an area of five by five feet. Moreover, you can daisy-chain up to 60 additional lamps together for full greenhouse coverage.

It has over 1,700 individual LEDs onboard, split between sun-simulating white and infrared. You can control all of the SF7000’s lamps simultaneously, so you can dial in the exact power level you need rather than adjusting certain lights individually. The heat doesn’t negatively impact the light panel because of a six-inch inline fan, which will make some—but not too much—noise. If you use this light panel outside, this won’t be an issue at all.

This ease of use, combined with the SF7000’s power, makes the grow light ideal for those who want to dip their toe into commercial growing while still being suitable for seasoned pros.

Best for vegetables: Monios-L LED Grow Lights

Monios-L

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This adjustable fixture can accommodate a variety of plants and vary its output to meet specific needs.

Specs

  • Input power: 48 watts
  • LEDs: N/A
  • Color: 5,000 Kelvin

Pros

  • No humming
  • Long cords
  • Can connect multiple lights

Cons

  • Isn’t water resistant

Every indoor gardening space looks different. Maybe you have tons of room for serious fixtures and long tables. Or, maybe you’re trying to make your plants work in a closet. Our pick for the best LED grow lights for vegetables from Monios-L, can help make it happen. 

The 5,000 Kelvin lights should last roughly 30,000 hours of operation and can sit anywhere from one to five feet away from your plants. Because vegetables, like tomatoes, require different levels and types of light, the flexibility really makes the difference here, even though it will add some cash to the price. 

Best for succulents: Small White Aspect Luxury LED Grow Light

Aspect

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t want a massive array just to take care of a single plant, so check out one of the best grow lights for succulents. This attractive option is effective without sticking out like a sore thumb. 

Specs 

  • Input power: 40 watts
  • LEDs: N/A
  • Lumens: 3,000 Kelvin

Pros 

  • 90,000-hour life
  • Attractive
  • 15-foot cord
  • Affordable

Cons 

  • Small coverage area

If you’re only keeping a small succulent on your desk, it really doesn’t need much in the way of extra light. That goes for other similarly small but pleasant-to-have-around plants. This LED from Aspect sits at the end of an attractive 15-foot, fabric-wrapped cord. It puts out enough light coverage to nurture one or maybe a few small plants or seedlings without spilling photons everywhere. 

It has a built-in timer, so it can turn on and off even when you’re not paying attention to it. So, if you’re away from the office for a while, your plants can still get a little time in the sun. The aluminum enclosure looks like something out of a design magazine. 

The bulb isn’t very powerful, but it has a suggested lifespan of around 90,000 hours, which means it can last well over a decade with regular use before replacing it. 

Best value: Sun YOBA LED Grow Lights

Sun YOBA

SEE IT

Why we picked it: This cheap lamp is flexible and super-easy to install for gardeners who need just a little bit of light.

Specs

  • Input power: 40 watts
  • LEDs: 40
  • Color: 2,000 Kelvin

Pros

  • Easy to install anywhere
  • Low power consumption
  • Full-spectrum

Cons

  • Low power output
  • Small coverage area

You don’t always need a full-on sun replacement inside your home to help your plants grow. These simple strips from HitLights have 40 LEDs and are easy to install pretty much anywhere. The assembly process requires a table or post to clip it to.

Because of their small size, the lamp consumes an extremely small amount of electricity while still putting out enough shine to sustain small and even medium indoor plants. The dimming function offers nine brightness levels, and the built-in timer can turn the lights on and off on three-, nine-, or 12-hour cycles. That way, you don’t have to remember to turn the lights on and off yourself and risk giving your plants too much or too little illumination. 

Because the lights are compact, they’re not good for covering large areas or sustaining light-hungry plants requiring heavy sun sessions. But, they draw power from USB, so it’s a simple budget solution to keep on a counter for herb gardens and nurture a seedling that might otherwise suffer under the drab fluorescents of an office.

What to consider when buying the best LED grow lights

While just about every plant loves light, they don’t all have the same taste. Here are some things to consider when buying an LED grow light: 

Power consumption

Even though LEDs are much more efficient than their older counterparts, they still require constant energy to run. And leaving them on all the time—especially if you’re running a lot of them—can really start to ramp up the ecological impact and your electric bill. 

Older bulbs used to measure power in watts, but LEDs don’t quite work like that. Input power on an LED suggests how much power it’ll use but not necessarily how bright it will be. High-efficiency LEDs can put out a lot of light with a few lamps, while other arrays use a higher number of smaller lamps. 

Your needs are specific to your plants, but don’t go buying an LED light array just because it has a high wattage rating. Look for an equivalent wattage number or other methods of measurement. 

Spectrum coverage

Full-spectrum lights can mean different things depending on the model. True full-spectrum lights include infrared modules that emit waves you can’t technically see. Different light wavelengths often serve different parts of the growing process, so you’ll want to match up the spectrum performance with the plants you’re trying to grow. If your plants aren’t picky, most “full spectrum” lights should do a fine job. But it’s worth researching your specific plants to make sure the light you’re buying offers what they need. 

Dimmability

Not all grow lights are dimmable. Some have either an on or off setting, and not much else. Other LED grow lights can offer 10 or even more different levels of illumination, so you’re not always blasting them on full power. 

Self-timers

Plants don’t need light 24 hours per day, so you’ll want to turn lights on and off as needed. Some lights have built-in timers that allow you to program in a custom schedule. That absolves you from having to remember to hit the switch, which can have a profound effect on plants, especially if you’re trying to start outdoor plants inside.

FAQs

Q: Can plants get too much artificial light?

Picture plants in nature. They’re not always in the sun. The same goes for artificial lights. Leave lights on too long and it can affect how your plants bloom due to the light’s effect on metabolism. Lights also emit heat (yes, even LEDs), which can dry the plants out or even burn them. 

Q: How much light do I need for a 10×10 grow room?

It can vary depending on what kind of lights you buy and what kinds of plants you’re growing, but the general rule of thumb is that you want 25-50 watts (equivalent) of light per square foot. Again, that’s only a starting point, so you’ll want to get more specific with your research about your plants if you’re trying to get serious about a grow room that big. 

Q: Which is better LED or HPS?

While this article addresses LED solutions, you’ll also find many growers still rely on HPS, or high-pressure sodium, lights. LED is more power-efficient and typically offers better spectral coverage. HPS, however, can be cheaper to get started with and the fixtures are often easier to repair and replace parts in. 

Q: How much does a grow light cost?

This depends on their size and power level. You can spend less than $20 or well over $300 based on your needs. Commerical-friendly models will cost more than those meant for home use.

Final thoughts on the best LED grow lights

If your plants need a little top-up when it comes to sunshine, the best LED grow lights can provide just that in an affordable, efficient way. If you’re getting serious about growing, you’ll want to ensure you get the right kind of light for your plants, but there’s almost certainly an LED option out there that can give you exactly what you need. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best LED grow lights for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Two-dozen great gifts for camping (and glamping) https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-camping-gifts/ Thu, 08 Dec 2022 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=493586
The best camping gifts
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Tell your friends and family to get lost (lovingly), and make sure they have a comfortable time doing it with these gifts for campers.

The post Two-dozen great gifts for camping (and glamping) appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best camping gifts
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best for the 5-star camp cook GOSUN Chillest Electric Cooler GOSUN Chillest Electric Cooler
SEE IT

GOSUN’s Chillest Electric Cooler has a compressor and can chill or freeze foods for many hours on a single charge.

Most Practical VSSL Camp Supplies Kit VSSL Camp Supplies Kit
SEE IT

VSSL’s Camp Supplies Kit has everything a camper needs in a convenient container.

Best drinkware Silipint Silicone Pint Glasses Silipint Silicone Pint Glasses
SEE IT

Silipint’s Silicone Pint Glasses are eye-catching and won’t break in your bag.

Shopping for someone who loves the great outdoors can be tough if you don’t share that interest (aren’t all tents the same, you might find yourself asking). But don’t worry, we’re here for you no matter where they might roam. We’ve found the best accessories to give campers, from the essentials to more obscure outdoor gifts they might not have considered. This means you’ll find something for those in your life who plan on taking their first overnight trip, those who’ve fully embraced Van Life™, and anyone in between. Alongside the serious gifts for campers, we’ve included functional gifts for when the person you’re shopping for is just outdoors in the yard or temporarily “setting up camp” at an event like a tailgate.

Best tent: Kelty Late Start 2P

Kelty

SEE IT

For those wanting a tent that will protect them no matter the conditions, Kelty’s Late Start 2P is our top choice. This two person tent—single and four-person models are also available—is made from lightweight but durable polyester fabrics that provide ample coverage from the rain without inhibiting constant airflow. The tent’s pair of pre-bent stakes make it easy to set up and break down the tent, and every piece folds down enough that it fits in an easy-to-carry pouch that resembled a rolled up sleeping bag. If you’re shopping for a camper but don’t know where to start, a brand new tent is the right place to start.

Best mattress pad: Therm-a-Rest Z Lite Sol Camping and Backpacking Sleeping Pad

Therm-A-Rest

SEE IT

Anyone not used to sleeping on the ground will appreciate a sleeping pad, which acts as a buffer to keep you a little more comfortable. This one from Therm-a-Rest can be folded up for easy storage, was designed to trap and radiate heat to help you stay warm, and weighs less than a pound. Campers can easily keep the mattress pad in a backpack to take it from site to site. The dimensions of Therm-a-Rest’s sleeping pad is 72L x 20W inches wide, so it should accommodate any sleeper. And that’s just one of the brand’s many solutions for insulating campers from aches and elements, whether someone is moving fast and light, taking a more leisurely approach to treks and travel, or just camping out of their car.

Best drinkware: Silipint Silicone Pint Glasses

Silipint

SEE IT

Broken glass is annoying to deal with at best and dangerous at worst, which is why Silipint’s Silicon Pint Glasses are a wonderful gift. The shatterproof “glasses” are 100% food-grade silicone, so completely safe, available in some cool psychedelic colors, and a fun-meets-functional way to cut down on the amount of plastic campers might use on their trip. Plus, pint glasses are the perfect size for beer, water, and everything in between.

Best multitool: Leatherman Signal Camping Multitool

Leatherman

SEE IT

Once Leatherman’s Signal Camping Multitool gets into a camper’s go-bag it’ll never come out. This single tool can replace knives, screwdrivers, scissors, and pliers. Space is tight for campers—having more is gear better, but burdensome—so this pocket-friendly multitool is the perfect solution. It’ll come in handy when setting up a tent, cutting fishing line, and plenty of other potentially streaky situations. Whether looking for an everyday carry or more specialized set of save-the-day tools, Leatherman has numerous options.

Best bug repellent: Murphy’s Naturals Mosquito Repellent

Murphy’s Natural

SEE IT

If you’re buggin’ out because the bugs are out, just smear a stripe of this plant-based, DEET-free, non-greasy balm on the brim of your hat and you’ll see what the fuss is about because you’ll see the insects retreat. Anyone who has ever hiked through the gullies and gulches knows how easy it is to get swarmed by flying irritants. So if you want to concentrate on keeping two feet on the river crossings instead of swiping at the air, let this cocktail of castor, lemongrass, rosemary, cedarwood, and peppermint oils drape a protective veil around your head. It’s the perfect stocking stuffer, whether for someone in the back-country or the backyard. And, once settled at the campsite or on the patio, light up a candle and/or incense to expand the protective shield.

Best single-use tool: Slice Mini Box Cutter

Slice

SEE IT

Slice’s Mini Box Cutter is not only great at its namesake purpose (seriously, this may become the MVP of holiday gift opening), but the retractable mini knife will come in handy when opening food packaging or cutting fishing line. The Mini Box Cutter’s biggest strengths are its incredibly compact size and extremely sharp knife. It’s not as versatile as the Leatherman we recommended earlier, but any camper would be excited to see this in their stocking.

Best gear bag: RUX (70L)

RUX

SEE IT

The Rux is a collapsable, waterproof nylon bag that’ll allow campers to pack and carry their gear more efficiently. The Rux’s cube shape is easier to fit into a car than a duffel, and the included straps allow you to carry it like a backpack. When they’re done camping, the person you gift this to can wash the Rux with a hose, then flatten it for easy storage in a garage, closet, or under their bed.

Best sleeping bag: Kelty Cosmic 20 Degree 550 Down Fill Sleeping Bag

Kelty

SEE IT

If you’re shopping for someone looking to extend the camping season as far as possible, they’ll be thrilled with this sleeping bag from Kelty, which is designed to keep folks toasty in temperatures as low as 20 degrees. The duck down-insulated sleeping bag has a trapezoidal shape that tapers down at the bottom and insulates heat far more effectively than the more familiar rectangular sleeping bag. Kelty offers the Cosmic 20 in three sizes: small, regular, and long, which can accomodate campers up to 5.6 feet, 6 feet, and 6.6 feet respectively. Each sleeping bag has the same features, but make sure to get the one that’s best suited for the camper in your life.

Best mess kit: Hydro Flask Outdoor Kitchen Bowl

HydroFlask

SEE IT

Hydro Flask’s Outdoor Kitchen Bowl is the perfect complement to the Silipint silicone pint glasses we recommended above, as it serves a similar purpose. This kit comes with three stainless steel bowls and lids that are both BPA- and toxin-free. Hydro Flask used the same insulating material found in its water bottles because of its insulating properties, so these bowls will keep your hot foods hot and cool foods cool for several hours. This is helpful for one-day camping trips, though the Outdoor Kitchen Bowl can keep shelf-stable food like granola fresh for several days.

Best cooking utensil kit: Opinel Nomad Camping Kitchen Utensil Kit

Opinel

SEE IT

Founded in 1890 in the French Alps, Opinel makes iconic folding knives and other compact kitchen tools. As much a part of French cultural heritage as a well-stocked camping kit, Opinel tools pair sustainably managed wood handles with anti-corrosive stainless steel blades. The result is purpose-built, made-to-last camping, foraging, boating, backpacking, and kitchen accessories. This set includes a No. 12 serrated folding knife (4.72-inch blade), No. 10 folding corkscrew knife (3.94-inch blade), a No. 6 pocket peeler, beechwood cutting board, and microfiber cleaning cloth/travel pouch. With this selection a camper can make quick work of meal prep, then everything cleans up quick and packs tight, ready as you wander from site to sights. And, once you’re sitting down to eat, Opinel also offers a No. 8 Picnic+ kit with the signature wood handle and interchangeable stainless steel inserts, including fork and spoon.

Best coffee tool: Aeropress Go

Aeropress

SEE IT

Going into the great outdoors shouldn’t mean giving up coffee. The Aeropress Go Brew has the capacity to make three espresso-style coffees, and comes with a scoop, stirrer, paper filter, and even its own cup. All the person you gift this to will need to supply is hot water. Once they’re done drinking, all of the Aeropress Go’s components fit neatly into the included container, so the entire coffee maker can be easily stored in a backpack. If you’re shopping for someone who doesn’t feel like themselves before a cup of coffee in the morning, no gift will make them happier. While we’re currently recommending gifts for campers, this kitchen tool is equally helpful at home or when traveling in general.

Best camping table: GCI Outdoor Compact Camp Table

GCI

SEE IT

Space is a premium commodity for campers, so GCI’s Outdoor Compact Camp Table is a thoughtful gift. The well-constructed table gives the camper a sturdy, 25-inch surface to prepare food—anything from fresh fish to s’more supplies. It’s even large enough to double as a small dining table once dinner is ready. The fact that this table is collapsable means campers can keep it tucked away when they’re not on a trip.

Best for beach campers: Shibumi Shade

Shibumi Shade

SEE IT

There’s nothing quite like camping trips at a beach, but nobody wants to deal with the sun getting in their eyes for half the day. If you know someone who struggles with that problem, gift them the Simbumi Shade, which provides up to 150 square feet of coverage. That’s enough space for roughly four people to be seated below comfortably. The shade itself weighs four pounds and breaks down to the size of a standard beach umbrella, and is made from 40% recycled plastic. The shade relies on the wind to stay up, so it should only be used on a beach with a consistent airflow, or on windier days. Two pegs driven into the sand will keep the front section moored to avoid it getting swept away. If you know a camper who parks themsleves in the beach from noon until night, the Simbumi Shade is the ideal gift.

Best cooler: YETI Tundra 35 Cooler

YETI

SEE IT

YETI’s coolers have earned a stellar reputation due to their extreme “bear-proof” durability and ability to keep food cold for several hours (if not days) thanks to their insulation and heavy-duty rubber locks. We recommend the YETI for keeping your drinks cold during a multi-day camping trip or for preserving perishables during the initiatial period of a camping trip. YETI says this cooler’s 35L capacity can hold 20 cans with a 2:1 ice-to-beverage ratio. Like the RUX, the box-like shape of YETI’s cooler makes it easy to transport, and its side handles make it surprisingly comfortable to carry.

Best insulated bottle: Welly Traveler 28oz

Welly

SEE IT

There are a lot of insulated bottles out there, but we haven’t found one that’s better than Welly’s Traveler. This large-capacity bottle is triple-insulated and made from BPA-free and eco-friendly materials, including natural bamboo. Its stainless-steel construction allows it to trap heat or, alternatively, prevent heat from seeping in to keep beverages cold. Welly offers its bottles in several sizes, but we like the 28oz version because it’s big enough to last campers for a day-long hike.

Best power station: Anker 521 Portable Power Station

Anker

SEE IT

Yes, the point of camping is to unplug from the “real world,” but it’s still important to have a power source just in case. Anker’s 521 is a heavy-duty but highly portable power station with three USB ports, a pair of AC outlets, and a car socket. It can be used to charge phones, laptops, or small appliances, and the light bar makes it easy to use at night. This is one of those better-safe-than-sorry gifts that campers will begrudgingly take on a trip but find useful once they’re there. The 521’s LCD screen is especially helpful as it’ll help them ration how much power they use during multi-day trips. And the longer someone will be off the grid, especially if they’re a van-lifer, the larger a capacity of power station, or even a solar generator, should be considered.

Best fire pit: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Solo Stove

SEE IT

If you’re shopping for someone who’s into glamping and/or extremely concerned about the very real issue of wildfires, Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 is the fire pit we recommend. It was designed to be “smokeless,” meaning a continuous flow of air, and an intelligently placed ash pan, prevent tons of smoke from billowing out of it constantly. There’ll still be some smoke but not enough to make your eyes water, which means campers can sit closer to it (but not too close) to enjoy its warmth. Solo Stove addressed our one complaint with the original Bonfire by making this model’s ash tray easily removable, which makes cleanup a breeze.

Best fire starter: Pull Start Fire Matchfree Pull String Firestarter

Pull Start

SEE IT

Starting a campfire can be difficult, especially if the trip happens right after a rainstorm. Campers who have Pull Start’s Fire Starter will be prepared, though. All you have to do is set the logs up, then pull a single string. Kindling and firewood will ignite within the half hour that the starters stay lit, so the person you gift them to will be all set for dinner, s’mores, or a night around the campfire or fire pit. Pull Start is confident that its starter will even work with wet logs. The company offers fire starters in many multipacks, but this three-log box is the perfect choice for gifting.

Best light: Klymit Everglow LED Light Tube

Klymit

SEE IT

Klymit’s Everglow Light Tube is a flexible, rechargeable light source that’s easy to hang around a tree branch or keep in the inside of a tent thanks to its magnetic attachment. It gives off 270 lumins of light—enough to see where you’re going when headed to the bathroom or searching for supplies in a pack after night, and can be easily carried around in a backpack. Nobody wants to fish around for batteries or carry a bulky lantern, while they’re on a camping trip, which makes the Everglow Light Tube a wonderful gift.

Best for lake campers: Oru Kayak Lake+

Oru Kayak

SEE IT

If you’re shopping for someone who can’t wait to get to the lake once the weather starts getting warmer, splurge an get them the Lake+. This kayak is durable enough to be taken on calm waters, can be assembled with no tools, and is foldable for easy storage. Many folks who would love to have a kayak don’t have enough space to story them, or can’t carry them easily from their home up to a lake house. The Lake+’s design solves that issue. When it’s fully extedned the kayak measures 66-inches long and 24-inches wide; more than enough space to comfortably fit a single passenger regardless of their size. When folded, the kayak’s box measures 42-inches long and 18-inches wide, which is much more reasonable for storage. We can guarantee the person you gift the Lake+ to won’t see the gift coming, and will make the warmer months that much more exciting.

Best car accessory: Rightline Gear Moki Car Door Step

Rightline Gear

SEE IT

File this under “practical gifts campers didn’t know they needed but really do.” This door step can be installed onto any of a car’s door latches, and makes it easy to grab items from bags attached to the top of your car. We were surprised that it could accomidate both of our feet during testing. This will come in handy for when camping or going on ski trips when equipment is typically tucked away in a bag on the roof. This gift will save your friends and family from standing on their tippy toes, or precariously perching themselves on the inside of their car door.

Best water tank: GoSpout 2 Gallon Portable Water Tank

GoSprout

SEE IT

GoSpout 2 Gallon Portable Water Tank is a camper’s dream gift. Pumping the tank’s handle creates pressure, which can be used to wash cars, dirty hands and feet, dishes, a tent, or any other camping essential. The tank is surprisingly small given its capacity, and its sprayer can be switched between different modes with just a twist of its outer rim. You could even use the GoSpout 2 as a shower in a pinch. This is a tool any seasoned camper will find incredibly useful every time they go out.

Best filtered water bottle: LifeStraw Go Water Filter Bottle

LifeStraw

SEE IT

We mentioned the importance of clean drinking water earlier, and LifeStraw has campers covered when they run out. The “straw” is attached to a filter that removes microplastics, chlorine, organic chemical matter, sand, dirt, and up to 99.999% of both bacteria and parasites from drinking water, making it safe to consume. Campers should still do their research to check on the water quality of the streams or rivers they’re drinking from. Still, campers who like to stay well hydrated while hiking will really appreciate having one of these in their pack.

Best flashlights: Hoxida Magnetic Rechargeable Flashlight

Hoxida

SEE IT

Flashlights have been a camping staple for time immemorial, but rechargeable ones are new to the scene. If you know a camper who’s been using the same flashlight for 30 years, do them a favor and make this upgrade for them. Hoxida’s flashlights last up to 20 hours per charge, create 10,000 lumins of light, and have seven modes. The strobe and red light modes are particularly helpful if they’re lost and need assistance. Additionally, these flashlights are IPX6 certified, which means they’re dustproof and can be fully submerged underwater without being damaged. This is an extremely practical gift, but an absolute essential for campers.

Best accessories kit: VSSL Camp Supplies Kit

VSSL

SEE IT

What if all the accessories a camper really needed were collected in a compact, easy-to-pack container? VSSL considered that question and came up with the Camp Supplies kit, a perfect stocking stuffer that contains a 9.3-inch tube that holds 70 pieces of gear. Insider you’ll find matches, hooks, band-aids, clothespins, antiseptic wipes, a raze, wire saw, mini sewing kit, gear twists, a four hour beeswax candle, and much more. All of this gear is kept in small, individually labeled sealed containers. Any camper will be able to appreciate having all of these tools on-hand at a moment’s notice without having to root around a bag to find them.

Best in-case-of-emergencies device: Garmin inReach Messenger Satellite Communicator

Garmin

SEE IT

Give a camper peace of mind in their pocket with the Garmin InReach Messenger, which lets you two-way text without cell coverage. You can use the 4-ounce personal safety device itself, or you can send messages from your phone using the Garmin messenger app. You can even use it as a Wi-Fi hotspot and battery bank to charge your phone. And, with 28 days of battery life, you can travel confident that home is only a phone call away even if hiking far from cell towers. It’s pricier, but making it back safe is priceless.

Best for the 5-star camp cook: GOSUN Chillest Electric Cooler

GoSun

SEE IT

At over $500, GOGSUN’s Chillest Electric Cooler is an extremely generous gift for campers, and the most technically impressive recommendation we’re making. The 45L cooler has a compressor, which allows it to actually refrigerate and freeze foods instead of maintaining their temperature through insulation. Its large capacity and 10-hour battery life make it the ideal cooler for carrying a day’s worth of perishable food (even ice cream!). If you’re shopping for a camper who likes to go off the grid for days at a time, consider pairing this cooler with GoSun’s Power 500, a high-capacity solar generator that will extend its life even further. This is a luxe gift, but the ultimate choice for serious campers.

The post Two-dozen great gifts for camping (and glamping) appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best binoculars in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-binoculars/ Wed, 06 Dec 2023 21:00:37 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586381
A lineup of the best binoculars on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Take a peek at objects far, far away with binoculars that let you see (and go) the distance and beyond.

The post The best binoculars in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best binoculars on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Zeiss Conquest HD 8x42 Binocular Zeiss Conquest HD Binocular
SEE IT

Special coatings provide clear views in inclement weather by preventing water from sticking to the lens, as well as improving the colors and brilliance of images.

Best for birdwatching Maven B1.2 42mm ED Binoculars Maven B1.2 42mm
SEE IT

They’re a small, compact size, with sharp, quick focus can keep up with birds off the beaten path and on the move.

Best night vision JStoon Night Vision Goggles with accessories on a white background JStoon Night Vision Goggles
SEE IT

The lenses project an image onto a 2.31-inch digital screen, where you can easily adjust to one of seven infrared (IR) levels to keep eyes on the object while establishing the best views.

Binoculars bring everything from birds to planets into view, but finding the right pair means looking first at when and how you plan to use them. Deciding on a budget is also a good idea, as these devices can easily cost well over $2,000. However, you don’t need to take out a loan to see the moon, a sporting event, or wildlife with crystal clarity. The binoculars’ magnification, objective lens size, weight, and lens coatings are only a few of the specs that will affect the optic quality. We’ve got the rundown on the important specs and five recommended pairs of the best binoculars that are more than worth their price.

How we chose the best binoculars

We evaluated several key specs when considering the best binoculars. Specifically, we looked at the magnification, objective lens size, field of view, and lens coatings. All of these factors ultimately combine to determine the quality.

The magnification and objective lens need to create a balance between viewing quality and field of view so that it’s fairly easy for users to track their desired object. Lens coatings make a big difference in light transmission. We looked for coatings that enhanced the brightness and clarity at the magnification and objective lens size.

Finally, we consider weight and ease of focus. Heavy binoculars can weigh down the neck or may require a tripod for easier viewing. Pairs that are easy to focus allow easier tracking of fast objects like birds or participants in sporting events. For those who are a little active and adventurous, binoculars for hiking can help you track down avian friends and cool trees as you stop at a mountain vista overlooking a lake.

The best binoculars: Reviews & Recommendations

There are many sights to behold with the right pair of binoculars. One of our recommendations should let you view faraway mountains, animals, or even your neighbor’s dog taking an illegal poop in your backyard.

Best overall: Zeiss Conquest HD 8×42 Binocular

Zeiss

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28 ounces
  • Magnification: 8x
  • Objective lens: 42 mm

Pros

  • View 384 feet at 1,000 yards
  • Lens design and coatings provide bright images
  • Quick focus

Cons

  • Interpupillary distance may be too large for some users

This pick from Zeiss combines everything we love in binoculars into a single pair. They’re relatively lightweight at only 28 ounces, so birders and hunters can wear them around their necks without feeling weighed down. The 8×42 size provides the right balance of magnification to the objective lens for a generous field of view that shows 384 feet at 1,000 yards. The high-quality glass lenses transfer 90 percent of light, working beautifully in low-light conditions.

Zeiss uses a LotuTec coating that provides clear views in inclement weather by preventing water from sticking to the lens. Another coating improves the colors and brilliance of images. Birders, in particular, like the quick focus of the center knob, which is designed to jump right into the action for fast-moving objects.

A con to watch out for is the interpupillary distance (the distance between the eyepieces). You may need an extender piece if you have a narrow pupillary distance (distance between the center of your pupils).

Best for birdwatching: Maven B1.2 42mm ED Binoculars

Maven

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 26.8 ounces
  • Magnification: 10
  • Objective lens: 42

Pros

  • Sharp, quick focus
  • Excellent low-light performance
  • Small, compact, and easy to carry
  • Water and fog-proof

Cons

  • Expensive

The Maven B1.2’s bring quick clarity to the birding world. They’re lightweight at only 26.8 ounces, yet the 10x magnification and 42mm objective lenses provide an excellent field of view. Their field of view is relatively wide for 10×42 binoculars at 388 feet from 1,000 yards.

One of the reasons they’re a great pair of binoculars for bird-watching is the brightness and colors the lenses and coatings create. They reflect as much light as possible so that you see true colors.

The B1.2s also have a sharp, quick focus that can keep up with birds on the move. We also like the small, compact size. You can take them off the beaten trail to catch more unusual birds without feeling weighed down. Finally, they’re water and fog-proof to let you keep gazing even if the weather turns. The downside is that they’re pricey and more of a best splurge type of purchase. If you want to look at your avian friends while on your phone, consider the Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder, which lets you take photos of the winged wonders who feast upon the luscious Michelin five-star seed mix in the feeder.

Best for hunting: Vortex Optics Viper HD Roof Prism Binoculars

Vortex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 43 ounces
  • Magnification: 10x
  • Objective lens: 42mm

Pros

  • Clear views of the high-density glass lenses excellent in low-light
  • Lifetime warranty
  • Durable rubber casing
  • Quick, responsive focus

Cons

  • On the expensive side

The Vortex Optics Viper HD Binoculars bring a lot of great specs together into a highly functional pair of hunting binoculars. They’re not the most powerful, lightest, or high-tech, but they bring those three elements together into a near-perfect balance.

The 8x magnification with the 42mm objective high-density lenses lets in light that keeps images clear, even in low light. The rubber casing gives them added durability for hunters who trudge through rough, steep terrain, too. For those quick glances, the focus snaps into place with single-hand adjustments. That’s all supported by a decent field of view of 319 feet at 1,000 yards. Finally, Vortex offers an impressive lifetime warranty. These are pricey, and that warranty ensures your investment won’t be wasted after a fall or drop out in the field.

Best night vision: JStoon Night Vision Goggles

JStoon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 20.3 ounces
  • Magnification: 3x (optical), 4x (digital)
  • Objective lens: 25mm

Pros

  • 2.31-inch screen
  • Seven infrared adjustment levels
  • Six hours of recording time

Cons

  • Limited distance

The JStoon Night Vision Goggles have a 3x optical zoom and 4x digital zoom. They’re among the best night vision goggles for the money. The lenses project an image onto a 2.31-inch digital screen, where you can adjust to one of seven infrared (IR) levels. Easy IR adjustment lets users keep their eyes on the object while adjusting for the best views.

This model also comes with a memory card and has a built-in camera that can run for six hours. The combination lets you watch animals, the city, or anything else at night and record it for sharing or later viewing. A water-resistant case is nice, though waterproofing would be a little more helpful in inclement weather. Its IP56 water resistance rating means it’s easily—but not fully—protected from dust and can withstand spray from powerful water jets, according to DSM&T.

The downside with this model, and many other night vision binoculars, is that the viewing distance is limited to about 100 feet, depending on the conditions.

Best budget: Vortex Optics Crossfire HD Binoculars

Vortex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.8 ounces
  • Magnification: 8x
  • Objective lens: 42mm

Pros

  • Lightweight at 23.8 ounces
  • Waterproof
  • Rubber armor coating
  • Adjustable eyecups for viewing without eyeglasses

Cons

  • Focus can be finicky

The Vortex Optics Crossfire HD Binoculars are some of the best value binoculars. They offer excellent optics and quality at a price that’s far below similar binoculars. The Crossfire’s multi-coated lenses increase light transmission for truer, brighter colors.

At 23.8 ounces, they’re a light option within this price category. Adjustable eyecups extend for use without eyeglasses or sunglasses. However, they’re just as easily used in their starting position with glasses on.

They have an aluminum shell encased in a rubber armor coating for added grip and waterproofing, and the nitrogen purging and o-rings complete the weather-proof design.

The only downside (and we had to look hard) is that the focus can be finicky for some users.

What to consider before buying the best binoculars

You’ve eyed binoculars for a while, but picking the right ones for you can be overwhelming enough to make you cry. There are a few things you should look for before setting your sights on a particular pair of binoculars:

Magnification and objective lens

The magnification and objective lens size are the two specs used to describe binoculars. The first number is the magnification, and the second is the objective lens size. For example, a pair of 7×42 binoculars have a 7x magnification and 42mm objective lens. While these aren’t the only specs to consider, they are a good starting point, especially if you know how you want to use the binoculars.

Many people jump to the highest magnification with the largest lens, but that’s not always the best choice. You can get excellent views from 7×42 binoculars if you’re looking at birds when compared to a 10×42. The higher magnification of the 10×42 reduces the field of view, making it more difficult to track a tiny bird.

It’s key to match the magnification and objective lens to fit the purpose of the binoculars.

Purpose of the binoculars

How and when you use the binoculars makes a big difference in the right pair for you. If you want a pair for the occasional sporting event or camping trip, you probably don’t need as big of a budget or a pair of binoculars as a devoted birdwatcher.

Birdwatchers need binoculars with a 7x to 10x magnification and 25mm to 42mm objective lens. Those specs typically give the binoculars good magnification and light, so you see the birds in true color. Within those specs, the binoculars won’t be too heavy or narrow the field of view too much either.

Hunters may need higher magnification models to see big game from 500 to 1,000 yards or more. True colors aren’t as important, but 38mm to 42mm objective lenses offer a good balance between weight and light transmission.

However, hunters also need weatherproofing and rubberized casings to resist inclement weather and keep a good grip. Weight can also be a factor. A heavy pair of binoculars can get uncomfortable if you’re hiking through elk country all day.

Stargazers need at least 8x but can go as high as 15x magnification and at least 42mm to 75mm. These binoculars get heavy and may require a tripod to hold them steady when looking at small objects.

Field of view

Field of view describes how many feet you see when looking through the binoculars from a particular distance, which is usually 1,000 feet. The field of view may be 333 feet at 1,000 feet away, which is great for hunting and birdwatching.

You typically need a larger field of view when you’re tracking small objects from a great distance, like stars or tiny birds from over 1,000 feet away. Keeping a sparrow in your sights at 12x is hard because the field of view gets too small.

Stargazing is another time when you need a wider field of view to keep the object in your sights. High magnification may let you see planetary moons other than our own, but keeping them within the field of view will be difficult unless the binoculars also have large objective lenses and a wide field of view.

FAQs

Q: What are the best binoculars?

The best binoculars work for your intended purposes. Hunters need a more rugged pair of binoculars with weather resistance, while birdwatchers may be more concerned with a lightweight pair that let in enough light for vibrant colors. Overall, the Zeiss Conquest HD Binoculars meet a variety of uses and provide spectacular views.

Q: What do the numbers on binoculars mean?

The first number is the magnification, and the second number is the objective lens size. A pair of 10×42 binoculars have a 10x magnification with a 42mm objective lens.

Q: What strength of binoculars is the best?

The strength of binoculars that are best depends on what you’re using the binoculars for. Stargazers need at least 10×50, while bird watchers and hunters will get the visuals they need with 8×42 or 10×42.

Q: What is the best magnification for binoculars?

The best magnification depends on what you’re using the binoculars for. Birdwatchers and hunters typically get the best views through 8x to 10x binoculars. However, some may prefer a little strong at 12x or 15x. However, stronger magnification also means that the binoculars are heavier and may have a narrow field of view.

Stargazers can see the moon fairly well with 10x magnification, but they’ll get more detail and deeper sky views with 12x to 15x. However, they may need a tripod to hold the binoculars steady. Some 20x to 30x magnification models will also require a tripod because they can weigh over ten pounds.

Q: How are binoculars rated?

Binoculars are rated by their magnification and objective lens size. They can also have coatings and other design features that enhance the clarity, brightness, and color of the objects in their view.

Q: What does 30×60 binoculars mean?

A 30×60 pair of binoculars would have a 30x magnification with a 60mm objective lens. That high magnification would work for very small distant objects and 60mm lets in a good amount of light. These binoculars would probably have a relatively small field of view and be heavy.

Q: Which is better, 10×50 or 10×42 binoculars?

Neither one is better because each works well for slightly different purposes. A 10×50 pair of binoculars will let in more light and have a wider field of view, making them more useful for stargazing-type activities where users need more light to see distant objects. The wider field of view also helps users stay focused on small objects. A pair of 10×42 binoculars will weigh less and have a narrower field of view. They’re good for sports watching or big game hunting where you have a larger target. Their lighter weight will also make them easier to carry.

Q: What is better 10×50 or 20×50 binoculars?

Again, here the answer depends on what you do with the binoculars. Birdwatchers would probably be happier with the 10×50 because they have great magnification but also let in a lot of light for bright colors. The 20×50 binoculars have better magnification but the field of view may get challenging with a 50mm objective lens. However, some stargazers may enjoy using them to view the moon.

Q: When were binoculars invented?

The origins of binoculars date back several hundred years to the first use of glass as corrective lenses, which took place in approximately 13th century Italy. It wasn’t until 200 years later that concave lenses were used to correct short-sightedness. In 1608, a Dutch spectacle manufacturer applied for a telescope patent, though he may not have been the first person to use such a device.

Final thoughts on the best binoculars

The Zeiss Conquest HD Binoculars are the top pick for their high-quality optics, lightweight, and bright images. They’re an investment, but they offer superior viewing. Those on a tighter budget will appreciate the Vortex Optics Crossfire HD Binoculars. These binoculars show great views, are lightweight, and waterproof. Their quality and optics outpace their price. We’ve just scratched the surface of magnification here, and if you’re looking to look beyond the Earth’s surface as well, consider exploring the universe with one of the best telescopes.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best binoculars in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes for astrophotography in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-for-astrophotography/ Tue, 05 Dec 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586372
A lineup of the best telescopes for astrophotography on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Capture the cosmos with a telescope for astrophotography.

The post The best telescopes for astrophotography in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best telescopes for astrophotography on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Sky-Watcher Skymax Maksutov-Cassegrain Reflector Telescope for astrophotography Sky-Watcher Skymax Maksutov-Cassegrain Reflector Telescope
SEE IT

Blending aperture and portability.

Best for deep space Explore Scientific ED127 Triplet Refractor Telescope Explore Scientific ED127 Triplet Refractor Telescope
SEE IT

Capture the sky with high-contrast images.

Best portable Sky-Watcher EvoStar 80 APO Doublet Refractor Sky-Watcher EvoStar 80 APO Doublet Refractor
SEE IT

Get sharp sky photos with accurate colors.

Some stargazers are happy to look, while others want to save far-off galaxies for the future with a telescope for astrophotography. Your choice of telescope comes, in part, down to what kind of astrophotography you want to do. A telescope that details the moon’s every last crevice is different from a model that lets you make the Andromeda Galaxy your next piece of wall art. Interplanetary photos are a different ball game, too. It’s also important to start with a budget in mind. You can easily spend well over $1,000 and will probably spend at least that much for a model that results in high-quality images. However, there are a few budget-friendly models worth considering as well. The best telescopes for astrophotography fit different gazing and astrophotography goals, budgets, and portability needs. 

How we chose the best telescopes for astrophotography

We’re camera nerds and into telescopes, so we know a thing or two about the “photography” part of “astrophotography.” We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to ensure we got the “astro” part down.

We picked telescopes based on their build quality, optics, field of view, and focal ratio, with a few specific parameters in mind. We avoided models with plastic pieces and cheap housing, except when looking at budget models, as build quality can affect the ability of the telescope to stay aligned and with viewing quality. Everything from the aperture to the included eyepieces was factored into the optics. Field of view affects the kind of objects you can photograph, and we have those with a narrow field of view for closer objects and wider fields of view for deep-sky objects. Finally, we have models on both ends of the focal ratio spectrum, including middle-of-the-road options for those who want an all-purpose telescope for astrophotography.

The best telescopes for astrophotography: Reviews & Recommendations

Stars can move at 500,000 per hour. Thanks to modern tech, we can take incredibly detailed photos of them in the sky. One of our picks should make you feel like Galileo or Copernicus, minus the death threats from the Catholic Church.

Best overall: Sky-Watcher Skymax Maksutov-Cassegrain Reflector Telescope

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Specs

  • Focal ratio: f/15
  • Weight: 17.1 pounds
  • Optical design: Maksutov-Cassegrain

Pros

  • Bright clear views of in-solar system objects
  • Capable of deep-sky viewing and images
  • Relatively compact for the viewing power
  • Includes 1.25-inch adapter

Cons

  • Doesn’t come with a mount

The Sky-Watcher Skymax Reflector Telescope is a compound telescope that offers a long focal length in a relatively compact design. It weighs 17 pounds, and you get excellent, clear views of the moon, planets, and bright deep-sky objects. 

A 1.25-inch adapter comes with the telescope, so you can directly attach a DSLR camera and get snapping once you’ve located the desired object. The f/15 focal ratio does mean it’s considered a slow telescope, so taking deep-sky shots is a little harder. However, as long as those objects are bright, this telescope can capture the images. 

Keep in mind that this model doesn’t come with a mount. You’ll have to purchase one separately. Depending on the type you choose, they can be pricey.

Best for deep space: Explore Scientific ED127 Triplet Refractor Telescope

Explore Scientific

SEE IT

Specs

  • Focal ratio: f/7.5
  • Weight: 18 pounds (21 pounds with finder)
  • Optical design: Triplet Refractor

Pros

  • Excellent build quality
  • Works with a wide range of accessories
  • Can mount a DSLR camera to the cradle handle with additional accessory
  • Light enough to be portable with handle on the tube rings

Cons

  • Does not include mount
  • Cannot be used with a focal reducer

The Explore Scientific ED127 Triplet Refractor Telescope is a versatile telescope that can take—with the right accessories—photos of galaxies and other deep-sky objects. Even in poor light conditions, the ED127 can capture impressive images. 

It comes with a 1.25-inch eyepiece adapter that fits some astrophotography cameras, but you may need a T-adapter for certain DSLR cameras. This model also gets points for portability thanks to the handle on the tube rings. The handle makes it easy to mount despite its power and weight. 

However, this model doesn’t come with a mount, so you’ll have to purchase one separately, adding several hundred dollars to the already splurge-y cost. Additionally, this model cannot be used with a focal reducer, limiting its use in certain types of astrophotography.

Best portable: Sky-Watcher EvoStar 80 APO Doublet Refractor

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Specs

  • Focal ratio: f/7.5
  • Weight: 7.3 pounds
  • Optical design: Refractor

Pros

  • Impressive optical image quality
  • Lets you delve into professional-quality astrophotography
  • CA stays controlled with the doublet and moderate focal ratio

Cons

  • Not a good choice for beginners
  • Expensive
  • Includes only the tube with a few accessories

The Sky-Watcher EvoStar 80 APO Doublet Refractor offers an impressive array of optics that create vivid detail and image quality. However, attaining that quality may require the purchase of a few extra accessories. Consequently, this isn’t a model for beginners. 

However, for advanced beginners, intermediate, and even some advanced astrophotographers, the EvoStar 80 provides the quality and ability to travel with the telescope. At only 7.3 pounds, you can take it to the local mountaintop for a broader range of spectacular views as you escape light pollution. The optical specs—including a 1.45 Dawes limit, 1.75 Rayleigh limit, and 12 limiting magnitude—squeeze every last ounce of optical quality, especially in a tube this size. 

If you know what you’re doing and you’re serious enough in astrophotography to know the difference between good and great optical quality, this is a portable telescope that will not disappoint.

Best for beginners: Celestron 114LCM Computerized Newtonian Telescope

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Focal ratio: f/9
  • Weight: 13.2 pounds
  • Optical design: Newtonian Reflector

Pros

  • Quick, straightforward assembly
  • Computerized mount makes it easier to identify and target objects
  • Includes Sky Tour button to get familiar with the night sky

Cons

  • Cannot take deep-sky images

The Celestron 114LCM Computerized Newtonian Telescope not only lets beginners start taking photographs right away but also introduces them to the night sky. The included mount even has a Sky Tour button that takes users on a guided journey through the heavens. While it doesn’t have the optics to do deep-sky astrophotography, you can connect a webcam, astrophotography camera, or mobile phone to start taking photos. 

You don’t have to be an expert to assemble the telescope and get started right away, which is key for beginners. This model is also relatively lightweight and portable.

Best budget: Celestron AstroMaster 130EQ-MD Newtonian Telescope

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Focal ratio: f/5
  • Weight: 28 pounds
  • Optical design: Newtonian Reflector

Pros

  • Good views of solar system and moon for the price
  • Red dot finder makes it easier to target
  • Affordable price for a telescope that can be used for basic planetary and moon photography

Cons

  • Mount can be difficult to adjust
  • Parts feel cheap

It’s harder but not impossible to find a telescope under $500 for astrophotography, and the Celestron AstroMaster 130EQ-MD Newtonian Telescope is one of the best below that price point. While the quality of the build and accessories can sometimes reflect the low price, users get excellent views of the moon and planets. That’s also where this telescope shines when it comes to astrophotography: closer objects. A red dot finder, which shines a red dot on the lens, helps users hone in on their target, too. 

You can use this telescope for viewing deep-sky objects, but your chances of getting a good photo at those longer distances aren’t great with this model. However, this value pick is perfect if you’re just getting started.

What to consider when buying the best telescopes for astrophotography

You don’t have to wait for the moon to reach a certain phase to get a good look at the sky. Sometimes, you just want to capture the brief moment where Jupiter was in your view. Here are the features and specs you should look for when searching the galaxies of the internet for a telescope for astrophotography:

Mount type

Before you invest in a telescope, consider what type of mount you already have or the mount that comes with the telescope. The mount is especially important for taking long exposure (slow) images. 

Mount importance comes down to the fact that the Earth is rotating, which alters the object’s location as you take a photo. Without the right mount, you can end up with blurred images or images with a visible trail. 

One of the best options for astrophotography is the equatorial mount. These mounts require only one axis adjustment to follow the object. In comparison, an alt-azimuth mount requires adjusting two axes while you’re trying to track the object. Mounts can be manual or automatic. Automatic equatorial mounts are more expensive, but they leave you free to change eyepieces or take photos. 

Remember that although a telescope may come with one kind of mount, you can buy a different mount separately. 

Focal ratio

The focal ratio is the telescope’s focal length divided by the aperture. The resulting number is the f/number, such as f/4 or f/11. A smaller focal ratio, those below f/5, indicates a faster telescope in that it gathers light at a faster rate than a model with a slower focal rate. These models are fast and have a wider field of view, making them more suited to deep-sky photography. They have shorter focal lengths (the distance between the eyepiece and the lens), which also makes them lighter and easier to carry. 

Slow telescopes have a focal ratio of f/8 or higher. Their longer focal lengths require slower shutter speeds to gather the same amount of light as a slow telescope. They have a narrower field of view but capture greater detail, making them a better choice for images within our solar system, like the moon or planets. 

Optical design

There are many types of telescopes, but those most pertinent to astrophotography include:

Refractor telescopes: Refractor telescopes are one of the most popular astrophotography telescope types. They give you more ability to correct chromatic aberration. Chromatic aberration is when light rays focus at different points, creating different colors around the object’s borders. Refractor telescopes provide more adjustments to fix this problem. They come in APO (apochromatic) and semi-APO design, with APO offering the best chromatic aberration correction. 

Reflecting telescopes: Newtonian and Gregorian telescopes fall into this category. They have mirrors instead of lenses. The Newtonian Dobsonian telescopes are among the most affordable and easiest telescopes to use, making them a good choice for beginners. However, depending on the targeted object, they don’t typically offer the best optical quality as some of the other types of telescopes. 

Schmidt-Cassegrain and Maksutov-Cassegrain: Schmidt-Cassegrain and Maksutov-Cassegrain telescopes are both catadioptric (also called compound telescopes) models. They’re a hybrid between refractor and reflector telescopes, having both lenses and mirrors. These models offer great optical correction features like refractor telescopes and provide long focal lengths in a relatively short tube for greater detail (and photographs) with a smaller telescope. 

FAQS

Q: What is the best telescope for astrophotography?

The Sky-Watcher Skymax provides a balance between size and weight, focal length and ratio, and price. This model’s f/15 focal ratio provides better views of the planets and the moon than deep-space objects. However, the design gives it a wider field of view than similar telescopes, allowing for impressive deep-space images for those with the skill to acquire their target. This telescope is a great option for someone who wants to dabble in both deep space and in-solar system astrophotography

Q: Do you need a special telescope for astrophotography?

You don’t necessarily need a special telescope for astrophotography. Many telescopes that aren’t designed specifically for astrophotography have connectors or accessories that connect the telescope to a DSLR camera or mobile phone for photography purposes. Several of the telescopes on our list fall into this category. However, other models are designed specifically for astrophotography. These models range from those that are basically a camera lens that acts like a telescope to telescopes that connect directly to a DSLR camera. You can go either route. Beginners typically begin with a general telescope that can be used for astrophotography, while astrophotography veterans opt for specialty equipment.

Q: Which telescope is best to see galaxies?

The Explore Scientific ED127 Triplet Refractor Telescope is the best telescope for seeing and photographing galaxies. The f/7.5 focal ratio, however, also makes it a great option if you want to take shots of closer objects too. It’s a large telescope that offers incredible views both near and far, but it’s hard to beat its deep-sky abilities.

Q: What size telescope do I need to photograph galaxies?

The size of the telescope’s field of view, which you’ll find on models with small focal ratios, makes a bigger difference for photographing galaxies than the telescope’s overall size. A wide field of view makes it easier to track and find deep-sky objects like galaxies and nebulas. Having said that, a telescope with an eight-inch or higher aperture will help you see and photograph galaxies better, too.

Q: Can you use a Dobsonian telescope for astrophotography?

You can use a Dobsonian telescope for astrophotography if the object is bright and clear. Dim, faint objects won’t produce very good photos with these telescopes. They’re better suited for photographing the moon on a bright night or for capturing bright planets.

Q: What is a good starter telescope for astrophotography?

Both the Celestron 114LCM Computerized Newtonian Telescope and the Celestron AstroMaster 130EQ-MD Newtonian Telescope are great starter telescopes. Celestron is also well known for its customer service, which can be helpful for beginners. These models will still take some getting used to, but the computerized 114LCM can help newbies find and track objects much faster than a manual mount. The AstroMaster offers good optics for the price, giving beginners a chance to decide if they want to invest in a more expensive telescope later on.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes for astrophotography

Maybe you got your first telescope as a kid and have been fascinated by the skies ever since. Or maybe you got a point-and-shoot camera and have slowly widened your exposure to celestial subjects. However you got here, here you are, scrolling through our top telescopes for astrophotography. The Sky-Watcher Skymax Reflector Telescope offers the best blend of quality with image quality. Its price makes it more feasible for experienced astrophotographers, but you’ll get images with quality that are well above the price. If you’re on a budget, the Celestron 114LCM Computerized Newtonian Telescope or Celestron AstroMaster 130EQ-MD Newtonian Telescope are great options. The 114LCM’s SkyTour and automatic mount make it a great choice for beginners. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes for astrophotography in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Bluetooth speakers, chosen by experts https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-bluetooth-speakers/ Wed, 13 Oct 2021 14:14:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-bluetooth-speakers/
Best Bluetooth speakers sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

A Bluetooth speaker is a great way to stay connected to your favorite audio without being tethered to any one place.

The post The best Bluetooth speakers, chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Bluetooth speakers sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best sounding Sonos Move 2 Sonos Move 2
SEE IT

With both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity, this pick will stay synced to your tunes wherever you go.

Best for outdoors JBL BoomBox 3 Bluetooth speaker in camp product image JBL Boombox 3
SEE IT

Play your favorite tracks all day without losing power—this waterproof pick has 24 hours of charge.

Best for parties Bose S1 Pro Portable Bluetooth Speaker System Bose S1 Pro
SEE IT

For booming audio and built-in sensors for optimal sound, this speaker is perfect for outdoor spaces and your next party.

A Bluetooth speaker is a great way to listen to the tunes you love anytime, anywhere, and without getting tangled up in an endless maze of cords. With easy portability and quick connectivity, good Bluetooth speakers can elevate any activity. Get better sound during an impromptu movie screening, bust out the backing vocals during a campfire sing-along, and put on the proper playlist for a backyard cookout or trip to the beach. All you need is a Bluetooth-compatible device—like a cellphone, computer, or tablet—and you’re in business. However, not all wireless speakers are created equal; you want to find something with great sound and a sleek design that will also last. We’ve narrowed down the competition to the best Bluetooth speakers so you can spend less time shopping and more time with your favorite playlists.

How we chose the best Bluetooth speakers

The PopSci writers and editors are serious music nerds. We scoured dozens of different options across many well-known brands to find models that best fit various needs and lifestyles. All the speakers on this list achieve a baseline level of sound quality that will do justice to any music you pump through them. We primarily focused on attainable models that blend value with performance but made sure to throw in some premium options for on-the-go audiophiles. Every speaker on the list is portable, though some may require more effort to move than others. Whichever model you pick, you can be confident that it can rock any party you show up at.

The best Bluetooth speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

As with any electronics, we recommend picking the most important aspect of the device for you and focusing on it. So, if you want optimal sound, pick something with serious audio chops. If you want something that will be ultra-tough, be willing to make some concessions when it comes to pure audio quality. If you’re realistic about your needs, you’ll have a better chance of getting a device that fits your life. Whether you’re looking for an extremely durable portable speaker or an extremely versatile stereo pair, however, our top picks for the best Bluetooth speakers deliver quality sound no matter your setup or budget.

Best overall: JBL Boombox 3

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Yes, it’s big, but it pumps out enormous sound, and the battery is truly prolific—lasting a full day on a single charge.

Specs

  • Battery life: 24 hours
  • Weight: 13 pounds
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros

  • Loud
  • Great battery life
  • Slick look despite its size
  • Solid connectivity

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

The JBL Boombox 3 has excellent sound quality and boasts 24 hours of battery life. The party quite literally never has to stop; in fact, you might have to stop well before the Boombox 2. It’s a great Bluetooth speaker to power a backyard jam or take a guaranteed party with you. With a convenient handle, an IP67 waterproof rating, and the ability to dual charge other devices, this JBL speaker will keep you going when you want to entertain (or listen to back-to-back podcasts all day). Thanks to the new three-way speaker design and 40 Hz – 20 kHz frequency response, thunderous lows come in seismic waves but with plenty of presence in the mids and highs to maintain sonic composure. Bluetooth 5.3 means the signal stays strong and stable, extending hundreds of feet in open air. With the Boombox 3, you can bring the club home … to your house and, with enough volume, your unsuspecting neighbors, too. Of course, all of that comes at a premium: $449 on average. Crave a similar punch without the same price? The JBL Boombox 2 is still a great buy for at least $50 less on average. And if you want to go to the extreme, the loudest portable Bluetooth speaker currently available is the SOUNDBOKS 4, which is one of our top picks for an outdoor party speaker because it can reach up to 126 decibels.

Best ultra-portable: Marshall Emberton II

Marshall

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 30 hours
  • Weight: 1.5 pounds
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Excellent battery life
  • Durable

Cons

  • Controls take some getting used to

Marshall’s expansion from amps and other hardware used by iconic bands like AC/DC to consumer-level headphones and speakers has been pretty successful. Its speakers have become popular enough for the company to release revised versions of them, including the Emberton II, its latest take on a highly portable mid-tier Bluetooth speaker. The Emberton II retains Marshall’s amps’ iconic gold and black look, with red LEDs showing its power state and battery life.

In our tests, the Emberton II sounds good for its size and price and, thankfully, wasn’t tuned exclusively for listening to rock music. There are limitations to the amount of balance you can get from a backpack-friendly mono speaker, but we were pleased that Marshall managed to fit two 2-inch drivers inside instead of one. If you’re looking for a speaker that can sound pretty good when cranked up loud for a trip to the beach or backyard party, but is small enough to take with you while traveling on a plane, the Emberton II is the ideal choice.

While we don’t have any significant nits to pick with the sound, the Emberton II’s buttons can be a little annoying to navigate. There’s a standalone power button (thank goodness), but all of the speaker’s other controls: Play/pause, next track, previous track, volume up, volume down, require you to use the circular, golden controller on top of the speaker. It’s tough to know at a glance what moving the controller in any of these directions will do—there are small glyphs, but they’re difficult to see and won’t be apparent to someone unfamiliar with the Emberton II.

We hope Marshall addresses that usability with the Emberton III. Still, our complaint wasn’t large enough to keep us from recommending this speaker, which excels at its most important job: playing music.

Want something only a lil less portable but much more rockin’? A retro-chic look with an impressive sound, the Marshall Kilburn II boasts 20 hours of playtime with a quick-charge option, Bluetooth 5.0 with aptX (which delivers higher fidelity with compatible devices), a 30-foot connectivity range, and, best of all, adjustable analog EQ so you can customize your sound. The Marshall Kilburn II performs well across all frequencies with a range of 52 to 20,000 Hz, delivering 36 articulate watts in a classically styled 6.5-pound cabinet (complete with strap and ruggedized touches). Plus, a multi-host feature lets you connect two devices at once so you can take turns soloing. While it’s made for fiery licks, the Kilburn II isn’t built to withstand the elements like its younger, smaller sibling.

And if you want a similarly retromodern aesthetic with smart speaker capabilities added in, the JBL Authentics 300 isn’t an ultra-portable speaker with an updated, upscale ’70s vibe, onboard EQ knobs, but also voice assistant access. If you want to keep to the same size as the Emberton II but add in those WiFi-connected brains, the Sonos Roam is an option.

Best party speaker: Bose S1 Pro Portable Bluetooth Speaker System

Bose

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This Bluetooth party speaker cranks out huge volume while minimizing distortion.

Specs

  • Battery life: 11 hours
  • Weight: 15 pounds
  • Meant for DJs and party pros

Pros

  • Unmatched volume
  • Excellent sound quality
  • Durable

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

If you want the loudest Bluetooth speaker, the Bose S1 Pro will give you concert-level volume without sacrificing quality. This PA-inspired Bluetooth speaker is pretty impressive. There is some extra math to be done regarding maximum decibel output because high-end speakers usually have a range of wattage support that affects the sound output. However, the S1 Pro typically peaks at around 109 decibels. It features a 3-channel mixer, with options for reverb and EQ and a dedicated channel for other music sources. The speaker can last up to 11 hours with a QuickCharge function if you’re in a rush. Though it’s a little bigger (and several hundred more expensive) than other models, this speaker is still quite portable and extremely potent. With unparalleled sound quality, it’s truly perfect for parties and private concerts.

Best waterproof: Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ultimate Ears has an impeccable talent for pumping out small, waterproof speakers that sound great. This little sound sphere is no exception. It’s awesome all around.

Specs

  • Battery life: 13 hours
  • Weight: 1 pound
  • Bluetooth Range: 131 feet 
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros

  • Great sound for its size
  • Light
  • Small
  • Totally waterproof
  • Attractive design

Cons

  • Not as powerful as other models

Since being introduced in 2019, the Ultimate Ears Wonderboom 2 has been a tried-and-true favorite, one of the best Bluetooth speakers under $100 in any situation, thanks to its durability and sound quality. The Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3 ups that ante as one of the best waterproof Bluetooth speakers. If you are looking for a mini Bluetooth speaker that you can easily take with you on the go, look no further than this $99 wonder. The UE WONDERBOOM 3 comes in multiple fun two-tone colors with a flexible handle at the top that can easily be attached to a backpack, bike basket, or even a belt loop. This UE speaker also weighs less than 1 pound so that your speaker won’t drag you down while the sound lifts you up. The battery lasts a full 13 hours and produces amazing 360-degree sound coverage. With an IP67 rating, this Bluetooth speaker is waterproof, it even floats, and Ultimate Ears suggests trying it out in the shower. It’s small but mighty, measuring just four inches tall but packs a punch when it comes to volume, reaching up to 87 dB (almost concert-level loud).

Want something with even more … boom? The Wonderboom 3’s (much) bigger brother, the EPICBOOM is a big, bassy, shockproof, dustproof, waterproof device that can be immersed in up to one meter of water for up to 30 minutes.

Best sounding: Sonos Move 2

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This portable speaker seamlessly ties into the Sonos wireless music system and pumps out excellent audio quality, making it one of the best-sounding Bluetooth speakers.

Specs

  • Battery life: 24 hours
  • Weight: 6.61 pounds
  • Bluetooth Range: 800 feet 
  • IP Rating: IP56

Pros

  • Works with all other Sonos systems
  • Fantastic sounds
  • Automatically adjusts sound to its environment

Cons

  • Expensive

The Sonos Move has a ton of options when it comes to connectivity. Known for its smart speakers, Sonos gear typically operates over WiFi. It can instantly integrate into an existing multiroom Sonos speaker network, connect to Apple AirPlay, and use a built-in Alexa voice assistant that you can enable and disable as you like. But the Move 2 is also capable of connecting to devices via Bluetooth, making it truly portable.

It lasts up to 24 hours per charge, which is a 13-hour improvement over its predecessor, and that’s not the only change Sonos made this time around. The Sonos Move 2 has a completely different audio architecture, with a faster processor, better amp, and improved drivers. The result is an excellent-sounding connected speaker that takes many cues from Sonos’ new Era 100, which we reviewed favorably earlier this year.

If you care deeply about audio quality, baked-in Sonos’ EQ settings do a great job at accentuating different frequency bands without feeling heavy handed. While the Sonos Move 2 isn’t a totally neutral speaker, it made the music we listened to sound lively and fun. A feature called TruePlay uses the speaker’s built-in microphone to make adjustments to its sound based on the room (or even part of the room) it’s in. The result is a speaker that sounds good both in and outdoors.

You can easily control all of the various services and settings like Sonos Radio, Alexa, Spotify, Apple Music, and more using the Sonos S2 singular app, making it easy to change things up at the drop of a hat. That’s a lot of options, though they come at a fair amount of dollars: $400 on average. Looking for a Sonos speaker that’s even more transportable and weather-resistant, while also more affordable? Check out the palm-sized IP67 Sonos Roam, which still sports many features and great fidelity but for less than $200.

Best for Android: Sony SRS-XG300

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: 25 hours
  • Weight: 6.6 pounds
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros

  • Advanced-resolution codec support
  • Portability for its size
  • Loud sound

Cons

  • Price

It should be no surprise that the best Bluetooth speaker we could find for Android has carried over from our best portable Bluetooth speakers. No speaker has come close to the audio quality, codec support, and aesthetics of the SRS-XG300, and we don’t believe in trying to fix what isn’t broken.

Sony has never shied away from making high-end audio hardware, and the SRS-XG300 is its latest premium portable Bluetooth speaker. After years of refining internal components, Sony gave its portable speakers a much-needed top-to-bottom redesign. The SRS-XG300 is a lot sleeker, with a mesh covering pleasing to the eye and a retractable handle that makes the relatively big speaker easier to carry. Indeed, carrying it from room to room or from the car to the beach never felt like a chore. Sony’s focus on building speakers with lights continues here, but they’re no longer a main focal point; LED rings surround the drivers on both sides of this speaker, but they never look garish. Plus, you can turn them off at the push of a button.

The SRS-XG300 is larger than most of our portable Bluetooth speaker recommendations, but the extra space comes with a couple of big benefits. This speaker lasts up to 25 hours per charge while delivering far better sound than smaller speakers. This was the best-sounding portable Bluetooth speaker I tested this year, with refined-sounding lows, mids, and treble without distortion at high volumes. Sibilance and other audio abnormalities were also absent, though this will always come down to how your music was recorded and mastered.

We can recommend the SRS-XG300 to anyone, but especially Android users whose devices support the LDAC codec. Without getting too into the weeds, devices that support this technology can play higher-resolution audio at a bitrate of 990kbps (kilobytes per second), which is approaching full CD quality (1,411kbps). For reference, aptX (a more commonly used audio codec) compresses audio to a rate of 352kbps. This difference doesn’t matter when you’re streaming music from Spotify (which streams at a maximum of 320kpbs), but it does if you’re subscribed to services such as Apple Music, Amazon Music, or TIDAL, which provide higher-resolution tiers that can take advantage of that LDAC bandwidth. These features come with a steep price tag, and the SRS-XG300’s most technically impressive feature is limited to folks with a handful of devices, which is why we couldn’t definitively label this the best-sounding Bluetooth speaker overall. If you care about audio quality, though, there’s no other portable Bluetooth speaker that deserves your consideration.

Best desktop: Edifier S1000W

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: N/A
  • Weight: 36.3 pounds
  • IP Rating: N/A

Pros

  • Classic look
  • Balanced sound
  • Multiple inputs

Cons

  • Not portable
  • Large

Edifier has slowly become one of our go-to audio companies because of its ability to cram a lot of performance into speakers that don’t cost a lot of money. The S1000Ws show off what Edifier is capable of when it’s less budget-constrained, and the result is wonderful. Computer speakers are typically pretty bad—laptops are too thin for premium audio hardware, PC towers have no speakers at all, and all-in-one PCs don’t fare much better. Apple is the exception here, but we wouldn’t recommend setting up a MacBook Pro for your next deep listen of Dark Side of the Moon or Midnights.

On the other hand, the S1000Ws are equipped with everything you could ask for from Bluetooth computer speakers for serious music listening or video watching. Each cabinet features a 5.5-inch woofer and 1-inch tweeter, and EQ knobs on the back allow you to fine-tune their bass and treble to your liking. We didn’t find that necessary in our tests, as music, podcasts, and videos all sounded crystal clear at all volume levels. There was no overblown bass creeping up and muddying the mids, or crunchy treble making us wince every time a cymbal was hit. Instead of reinventing the wheel, Edifier took what it learned from optimizing sound for budget audiences and expanded the speakers performance.

In our experience, setting up the S1000Ws only took about five minutes once we had them out of their box. All we had to do was connect the two speakers together with a thick connector cable, and plug one of the speakers into an outlet. To use Bluetooth, we hit the button on the speakers’ remote with the Bluetooth symbol. The S1000Ws went into pairing mode, and we were connected almost instantaneously. Suppose you want to listen to higher-fidelity music. In that case, you can connect these speakers to your computer using a Y-cable (also included) or wirelessly using AirPlay 2 if you’re using an Apple product. These speakers also feature optical audio and coaxial input if you want to use the S1000Ws as stereo speakers for your TV.

Many popular Bluetooth speakers are portable, but if you need a stereo pair on your desk for listening to music throughout the day, the Edifier’s S1000Ws are our choice. Their audio quality, connectivity options, and eye-catching appearance make them a triple threat in the best way possible.

Best bookshelf: JBL 4305P

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery life: N/A
  • Weight: 35.6 pounds
  • IP Rating: N/A

Pros

  • Plentiful analog and digital inputs
  • Subwoofer output
  • Intuitive user interface

Cons

  • Size
  • Price

If you need a Bluetooth speaker and balk and the idea of a budget, look no further than the JBL 4305P Studio Monitors, whose premium design is evident both inside and out. Inside each of the 4305P’s wooden cabinets are a custom-designed 5.25-inch woofer and 1-inch tweeter powered by a 300-watt Class-D amplifier that splits its power between both speakers. Put plainly, the JBL 4305Ps are the speaker equivalent of a muscle car inside a well-crafted wood veneer cabinet.

Bluetooth 5.1 is provided, but it’s the loophole we’re using to include a pair of speakers that’s dear to our heart and a joy to our ears. What you’ll really want to take advantage of with this $2,200 pair of powered speakers is a veritable cornucopia of upscale connectivity options, which includes a pair of XLR inputs, an AUX input, an optical audio input (which could make them the best for TV if you’re not interested in spatial audio), a USB port, and an Ethernet jack, plus network support for AirPlay 2. JBL also built a Chromecast into these speakers, so you can send audio to them easily using an iOS or Android device. The two speakers can be connected using an Ethernet cable or Wi-Fi, which offers convenience at the cost of audio quality. Both connectivity methods allow you to stream high-resolution music to the 4305Ps, but Wi-Fi connectivity tops out at 24-bit / 96kHZ rather than 24-bit / 192kHZ.

Speakers in this price range can feel stuffy and for “audiophiles only,” but JBL managed to make the 4305Ps feel oddly approachable by fully supporting wireless audio in a classic aesthetic. We also like that the source knob on its primary speaker is clearly labeled, and a series of LEDs and glyphs on top allows you to see which input is selected. Most people aren’t going to need the power of JBL’s 4305Ps. Still, these aspirational home speakers prove that serious audio companies can build Bluetooth into some of their most premium-powered speakers. These speakers bust the myth that you must choose between wireless audio and premium sound.

Best budget: Tribit XSound Go Bluetooth Speaker

Tribit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Our pick for the best small Bluetooth speaker, the Tribit XSound Go brings excellent sound quality and battery life for a very small amount of money.

Specs

  • Battery life: 24 hours
  • Weight: 13 ounces
  • IP Rating: IPX7

Pros

  • Cheap
  • Long battery life
  • Solid sound for the price

Cons

  • Other speakers sound better

Tribit’s XSound speaker is designed to withstand drops, dust, dips, and dents. The overall sound quality isn’t as crisp as a higher-end speaker, but you won’t have to worry about damage during an outdoor trip or toddler encounter. It is IPX7 waterproof in up to 3 feet of water for 30 minutes and has a Bluetooth range of up to 100 feet. The battery lasts up to 24 hours, so it’s perfect for outdoor activities like hiking, fishing, and cycling. It also has an attached strap to take your music on the go. It has improved sound quality and connectivity over the previous model, which was already an excellent value for its price, making it the best cheap Bluetooth speaker.

Things to consider when choosing the best Bluetooth speaker

Sound quality

Larger Bluetooth speakers tend to offer more volume and generally better sound quality. It’s hard to get great sound out of tiny drivers (for more on that, check out our primer on what makes up a speaker). Some smaller speakers, like the Ultimate Ears models, typically punch above their weight when it comes to pure quality, so find a balance between fidelity and utility.

Bluetooth range

Most modern Bluetooth speakers have a connectivity range between 66 and 100 feet, but some can stay connected up to 300 feet. If you plan to cover a big area, it’s worth ensuring you get the maximum range you can find.

Battery life

If you opt for a portable Bluetooth speaker, battery life often coincides with its overall size. Small speakers don’t have much power, but they also don’t have much room inside for battery capacity. Some offer as little as eight hours, while others can promise up to 24 hours on a charge and beyond. Even if you’re not planning to rock out for 24 hours at a time, more battery capacity allows you multiple listening sessions without having to get back on the charger. It’s also worth noting that those estimates are just that. To truly max out battery life, you must keep the volume lower than 50% and other environmental conditions like temperature ideal.

Ruggedness

Some battery-powered Bluetooth speakers are tougher than others. You can determine that durability based on the Ingress Protection (IP) code. If you want a truly tough model, check for an IPX7 rating, which means it can work while fully submerged underwater. IPX6 is still good, but not quite as good. Most portable speakers are fairly rugged, but it’s worth spending a little extra to get something that will last.

FAQs

Q: What’s the best Bluetooth speaker brand?

There are a few top-of-the-line brands that immediately come to mind when we think about the best Bluetooth speakers, including JBL, Ultimate Ears, Sony, and Sonos. All three promise quality sound with great features that won’t disappoint. They have each been champions of audio lovers for years and consistently develop products using the latest technology to elevate the listening experience continuously.

Q: How long should a Bluetooth speaker last?

It all depends on how you use it. The battery will degrade over time. The more you charge and discharge it, the less capacity it will have. Other parts of the speaker will eventually start to break down as well, especially if you’re lugging them around out in the wild. Even if you only occasionally plan to bring your speaker outside, it might be worth looking at something weatherproof for durability.

Q: How much do the best Bluetooth speakers cost?

The price of a Bluetooth speaker will depend on many, many factors. In the budget category, you can find great picks for $50-$100. However, once you start factoring in more durability, bigger batteries, more connectivity, etc., you’ll find that prices can range anywhere from $150 to $450.

Q: Are Bluetooth speakers good for home parties?

Yes, Bluetooth speakers can be great for home parties. While the best option for fidelity and a reliable signal is networked audio (such as the Sonos speakers, including the Move), there are many Bluetooth speakers made specifically for larger parties. Options from JBL, like the Boombox 3, feature something called PartyBoost—a feature shared by all the current-generation speakers from the brand that lets you make stereo pairs or have up to 100 speakers play the same thing. And if you’re interested in visuals as much as speaker arrays, you can check out options that pull more from JBL’s history in concert sound. From the $250 100W JBL PartyBox Encore Essential to the $550 240W JBL PartyBox 310 to the $1,299 1100W JBL PartyBox 1000, the top line of JBL high-power wireless speakers packs in ring lights and strobe effects, plus expanded connectivity, that you can wheel in to form the centerpiece of an expansive, expressive backyard party. 

Final thoughts on the best Bluetooth speakers

The best Bluetooth speaker is well within the realm of possibility if you take into consideration where you want to groove, how long you want to dance the night away without charging, how crisp and clear you need your audio to be, and when you’ll want to take it on the go. We recommend starting with our favorite speakers and best picks to begin building your new, portable sound system. Load up your favorite playlists, gather your friends, and get ready to rock out with one of the best wireless speakers.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Bluetooth speakers, chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable Bluetooth speakers of 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-bluetooth-speaker/ Wed, 13 Apr 2022 20:25:07 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=374930
best portable Bluetooth speakers header image
Stan Horaczek

From the backyard to the backwoods, a portable Bluetooth speakers will keep you connected to the music.

The post The best portable Bluetooth speakers of 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best portable Bluetooth speakers header image
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best small Tribit StormBox Micro 2 is the best budget waterproof speaker. Tribit Stormbox Micro 2
SEE IT

This speaker is small but can produce a big sound from a quick charge, making it perfect for on-the-go adventures.

Best for outdoors black jbl charge 5 bluetooth speaker JBL Charge 5
SEE IT

A sturdy portable speaker with impressive battery life and quality sound.

Best waterproof The Ultimate Ears Wonderboom 3 in Hyper Pink is the best shower speaker with bass UE Wonderboom 3
SEE IT

If you’re lounging poolside, heading toward the beach, or showering off the day’s adventures, this updated fan-favorite speaker is the waterproof floatable you want by your side.

Let’s face it: Your phone’s built-in sound sucks, so you need a portable Bluetooth speaker. Sure, everything is relative, and those phone speakers are amazing compared to what, say, a 2005 flip phone sounded like. But do we really want to justify our tech based on when people published think-pieces on how texting was the new hotness? No, we do not. So while we can admit you can hear musical cues right out of your pocket, if you want to feel the actual emotional resonance that makes the music special, the speakers on even the best smartphone, the best tablet, the best laptop … ultimately suck. But the best portable Bluetooth speakers do not suck, so we’re ready to help you select the right speaker for any situation.

How we chose the best portable Bluetooth speakers

We test a lot of Bluetooth speakers throughout the year, giving us deep insight into what’s on the marketplace and what’s worth your money. Whether you’re looking for something budget or audiophile, chances are we’ve heard at least one model from whatever brand you’re considering. We combine these experiences with other users’ impressions, then top it all off with extensive research on what you should be looking for: IP rating, frequency range, battery life, Bluetooth range … we’re got you! This lets us find the perfect balance of specs and special features from a fairly dense pool of possibilities.

The best portable Bluetooth speakers: Reviews & Recommendations 

From extreme durability to supreme connectivity, we’ve got you covered when it comes to the best portable Bluetooth speakers. Whether you’re always on the go or simply need something to take to the front porch, these speakers will deliver quality sound without any cables or wires weighing you down. 

Best small: Tribit StormBox Micro 2

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Doubling as a portable charger, this compact speaker is a budget-friendly way to listen to your favorite tunes wherever the water takes you. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 12 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 120 feet 
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros 

  • Price
  • Bluetooth 5.3
  • Powerbank
  • Integrated strap

Cons 

  • Some distortion at loud volumes 
  • Limited onboard controls 

The StormBox Micro 2 from Tribit is a super-compact portable Bluetooth speaker that is easily strap-mounted to your backpack, handlebars, and more. At roughly 4 x 4 inches with a rubberized, grippy bottom and durable, textured grill, and weighing just over 1 pound, its small size doesn’t get in the way of solid sound that packs a punch. It’s tiny but surprisingly mighty, with 10 watts of output power, a 48mm NdFeB driver, passive radiators, and XBass technology making for a pretty solid listening experience—up to 90 dB, which is plenty loud for outdoor listening. And it can even be paired with another Micro 2 for stereo sound anytime, anywhere. With an IP67 rating, you won’t need to worry about dust or water damage, and 12 hours of playtime will keep you in business during an out-and-back. And just in case you’re more than a bike frame’s distance from the Micro 2 (or need more juice for another quick adventure), it uses Bluetooth 5.3 to connect to your device with a range of up to 120 feet and charges with an included USB-C cable. 

Best for outdoors: JBL Charge 5

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a lightweight, long-lasting, outdoor speaker with a straightforward setup, enhanced survivability, and a sound as bold as its looks, the JBL Charge 5 won’t disappoint.

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 20 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 120 feet 
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros 

  • Great pump: portability ratio
  • PartyBoost pairing/expandability
  • Powerbank

Cons 

  • More expensive
  • No auxiliary input
  • PartyBoost is not compatible with older JBL models

The JBL Charge 5 is the latest and greatest iteration of a mid-sized Bluetooth speaker from JBL, known for its impressive party speakers. It offers 20 hours of battery life at a reasonably compact size. This burrito-shaped JBL speaker weighs just over 2 pounds and measures 8.7 inches by 3.67 inches, which is small enough to stuff in a backpack. It delivers a rich, uncompromising mix with surprisingly impactful bass lines and clear vocals. Available in six colors, the Charge 5 has an IP67 rating, which means you don’t have to worry about sand or spillage ruining your weekend away. PartyBoost mode allows you to pair with another (compatible) JBL speaker to support stereo sound (or up to 100 speakers in mono), and the built-in Powerbank will let you keep your phone charged, so you never need to stop the music. If you don’t need the extra battery life of the JBL Charge 5 and wouldn’t mind spending a little less, check out the JBL Flip 6, which has many of the same features we love in a more compact, beer can-sized frame (check out our JBL Bluetooth party speakers guide for more recommendable options).  

Best waterproof: UE Wonderboom 3 

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The UE Wonderboom 3 continues to top our charts when it comes to portable, affordable, waterproof sound. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 14 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: 131 feet 
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros 

  • Durability 
  • Volume 
  • Portability 

Cons 

  • Bass is a bit lacking
  • No microphone 

Since being introduced in 2019, the Ultimate Ears Wonderboom 2 has been a tried-and-true favorite, one of the best Bluetooth speakers under $100 in any situation, thanks to its durability and sound quality. And the Wonderboom 3 continues that tuneful tradition, offering you an audio orb you can easily take with you—into the woods or the waves, to the beach or the bathtub. It comes in fun two-tone colors with a flexible handle at the top that can easily be attached to a backpack, belt loop, bike basket, or boat. It weighs less than 1 pound and measures just 4 inches tall, so you won’t be slowed down by bulk. The battery lasts a full 14 hours and produces 360-degree sound coverage that can reach up to 87 dBs—pretty impressive for a speaker this size. With an IP67 rating, the UE Wonderboom 3 is waterproof and dust-resistant (making it one of our favorite shower speakers). It also floats, which is one of our favorite features—you won’t need to get out of the water just to skip a track or pause the music when your portable Bluetooth speaker is bobbing alongside you. Want something with even more … boom? The Wonderboom 3’s (much) bigger brother, the EPICBOOM is a big, bassy, shockproof, dustproof, waterproof device that can be immersed in up to one meter of water for up to 30 minutes.

Best sounding: Sonos Roam

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Sonos Roam easily transfers from WiFi to Bluetooth, it sounds great, and it’s actually easy to carry around.

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 10 hours 
  • Bluetooth & Dual-Band WiFi
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros 

  • Sonos users can “throw” music to their home system with the push of a button
  • Trueplay system analyzes space and sound for optimal performance
  • Small yet loud enough for a 75 x 50-foot backyard
  • Stereo pairing

Cons 

  • Some of the cooler features only matter if you own multiple Sonos speakers 
  • Limited onboard controls 

The Sonos Roam lets you enjoy music at home or on the go. You can easily connect via Bluetooth anywhere outdoors or use your home WiFi network to sync with additional Sonos speakers (like Roam’s big brother the Move 2, another one of the best waterproof speakers we love). Then you can listen to music, check the weather, and send messages via Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, or Siri (it’s even compatible with Apple AirPlay 2, so you can have a more robust connection if you have an iPhone). Once paired, this speaker will automatically connect to your phone and WiFi when in range, so you won’t need to pause your playlist when you get home. It can last for 10 hours on a single charge, which you can replenish wirelessly by dropping it down on any Qi charger. The Roam also has an IP67 rating, so you can take it just about anywhere; it changes audio directionality based on vertical versus horizontal placement, and Trueplay tuning means it automatically adapts its EQ whether you’re in the backroom, backyard, or the backwoods.

Best for Android: Sony SRS-XG300

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sony’s SRS-XG300 builds upon a strong foundation and delivers exceptional sound—especially if your device supports the LDAC codec.

Specs

  • Battery Life: 25 hours
  • Bluetooth Range: N/A
  • IP Rating: IP67

Pros

  • Advanced-resolution codec support
  • Portability for its size
  • Loud sound

Cons

  • Price

Sony has never shied away from making high-end audio hardware, and the SRS-XG300 is its latest premium portable Bluetooth speaker. After years of refining internal components, Sony gave its portable speakers a much-needed top-to-bottom redesign. The SRS-XG300 is a lot sleeker, with a mesh covering that’s pleasing to the eye and a handle that makes the relatively big speaker easier to carry. Indeed, carrying it from room to room, or from the car to the beach never felt like a chore. Sony’s focus on building speakers with lights continues here, but they’re no longer a main focal point; LED strips surround the drivers on both sides of this speaker, but they never look garish, plus you can turn them off at the push of a button.

The SRS-XG300 is larger than most of our Bluetooth speaker recommendations, but the extra space comes with a couple of big benefits. This speaker lasts up to 25 hours per charge while delivering far better sound than smaller speakers. This was the best-sounding portable Bluetooth speaker I tested this year, with refined-sounding lows, mids, and treble without any distortion at high volumes. Sibilance and other audio abnormalities were also absent, though this will always come down to the way your music was recorded and mastered.

We can recommend the SRS-XG300 to anyone, but especially Android users whose devices support the LDAC codec. Without getting too into the weeds, devices that support this technology can play high-resolution audio at a bitrate of 990kbps (kilobytes per second), which is approaching full CD quality, which is 1,411kbps. For reference, aptX (a more commonly used audio codec) compresses audio down to a rate of 352kbps. This difference doesn’t matter when you’re streaming music from Spotify, but it does if you’re using a device that supports LDAC and listening to high-resolution audio files. All of these features come with a steep price tag, and its most technically impressive feature is limited to folks with a handful of devices, which are reasons why we couldn’t definitively label this the best portable Bluetooth speaker overall. If you care about audio quality, though, there’s no other portable Bluetooth speaker that deserves your consideration.

Best for bass: UE Hyperboom

Why it made the cut: Doubling as a portable charger, this compact speaker is a budget-friendly way to listen to your favorite tunes wherever the water takes you. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 24 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 150 feet 
  • IP Rating: IPX4

Pros 

  • That bass
  • That range
  • That battery

Cons 

  • 13 pounds
  • You don’t want it to get too wet

On the opposite end of the spectrum from our previous picks, the Hyperboom from Ultimate Ears does the most when it comes to portable speakers meant for big events. While it may not be the smallest model out there, measuring 7.5 inches by 14.3 inches and weighing 13 pounds, it delivers booming bass and crisp playback at high volumes. It comes with multiple connectivity options, including two Bluetooth channels, each with a 150-foot range, one aux port, and one optical input. A full battery can last up to 24 hours, and you can easily switch between four different devices at one time, which means you can say goodbye to that awkward moment when the music stops as you switch to your friend’s party playlist. The adaptive EQ has a built-in microphone that picks up when the Hyperboom is being moved and adjusts the sound to whatever space it’s occupying. The Hyperboom does indeed bring the hype and the boom. But if less is still more, and our Wonderboom 3 pick is just too small, UE makes a range of recommendable portable Bluetooth speakers. (And if you really want to push the sound pressure, consider the JBL PartyBox 110 or even the JBL PartyBox 1000, which is “portable” in the same way a large rolling suitcase is.)

Best budget: Anker Soundcore 3

Soundcore

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Soundcore 3 is a well-rounded, budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker with an impressive 24 hours of battery life and the option to boost the bass without distortion. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 24 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: Up to 66 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX7
  • Size: 6.9 x 2.4 x 2.2 inches  

Pros: 

  • Excellent Battery Life 
  • Sound Quality 
  • Bass Up technology 
  • Customizable EQ 

Cons: 

  • Simplistic design
  • Voice assistant capability is lacking

The Anker Soundcore 3 comes at a friendly $50 price without sacrificing sound quality. Play up to 480 songs (roughly 24 hours) on one charge supported by dual passive radiators, BassUp technology, and dual drivers with 100-percent titanium diaphragms—delivering extended highs and distortion-free lows, in stereo, no less. Choose from four preset EQ modes and link to other Bluetooth 5.0 Soundcore speakers, using the Soundcore app, for an elevated experience. And, with IPX7 protection, your investment, while not substantial, will survive if you get caught in the rain, etc. Snag it on the Anker website.

Best for control freqs: Marshall Kilburn II

Marshall

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With powerful sound in a well-crafted, roadworthy package, this speaker lives up to the Marshall name. 

Specs 

  • Battery Life: 20 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 30 feet 
  • IP Rating: IPX2

Pros 

  • Kicks out 36 watts of crunchy, punchy sound
  • Physical treble/bass controls
  • Classic, stylish look
  • Auxiliary 3.5mm input
  • Multi-host functionality for device switching

Cons 

  • Transportable, but not the most compact
  • “Multidimensional” sound means a backward-facing port, not wide stereo
  • Definitely shouldn’t be out in the rain

A retro-chic look with an impressive sound, this speaker from one of the premier brands in rock ‘n roll amplification boasts 20 hours of playtime with a quick-charge option, Bluetooth 5.0 with aptX (which delivers higher fidelity with compatible devices), a 30-foot connectivity range, and, best of all, adjustable analog EQ so you can customize your sound. The Marshall Kilburn II performs well across all frequencies with a range of 52 to 20,000 Hz, delivering 36 articulate watts in a classically styled 6.5-pound cabinet (complete with strap and ruggedized touches). Plus, a multi-host feature lets you connect two devices at once so you can take turns soloing. While it’s made for fiery licks, the Kilburn II isn’t built to withstand the elements, however. And if the Kilburn II is a little bit outside of your price range or space constraints, check out the Marshall Emberton II, a smaller, IP67 (so actually waterproof) speaker that forgoes the onboard adjustable settings but delivers 30 hours of battery life powering a naturally balanced sound with just enough bite (and you can stack/sync multiples if you want to amp up the energy). 

Looking for a similarly retromodern aesthetic with smart speaker capabilities added in? The JBL Authentics 300 is a portable speaker with an updated, upscale ’70s vibe, onboard EQ knobs, but also voice assistant access.

Best for party-goers and party-throwers: JBL PartyBox Encore Essential

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a compact kick you can transport quick, the JBL PartyBox line of speakers is a lot of flashy fun you can take on the run.

Specs

  • Battery Life: 6 hours
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 110 feet
  • IP Rating: IPX4
  • Size: 10.87 x 12.87 x 11.54 inches, 13 pounds

Pros 

  • Punchy sound
  • LED light ring
  • Multisource (Bluetooth 5.1, aux cable, mic input)

Cons 

  • Bass can muddy mid-range a bit
  • Not waterproof

While JBL’s Flip and Charge series are perfect for lounging by the pool or enjoying more intimate get-togethers, the PartyBox line offers heftier, but still handy speakers with powerful audio and an entertaining light show for larger gatherings. The newest addition to this trove of celebration-supporting speakers is the PartyBox Encore Essential. Visually an obvious little sibling of the $399 PartyBox 110, this little box with a big personality is the smallest and most affordable option in this bass-reinforced lineup, retailing for $299.95, making it an excellent choice for folks who want low-end they can take on the go. While it’s not the speaker to reach for on a relaxed, jazz-filled evening, the Encore Essential offers a 100W, 100dB, 50Hz-20kHz frequency response—which translates to plenty of bounce to the ounce, making it a crowd favorite during a party. Adding to the fun are a mic input for karaoke (microphone sold separately), as well as six selectable patterns that dictate how the built-in LED light ring and/or strobe move or pulse in time to the music. And if your get-togethers grow, so can your sound—you can pair two Encore Essentials into True Wireless Stereo.

Best for (viewing) parties: EarFun UBOOM L

Carsen Joenk

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A wide, rich sound that’s surprising for a speaker this size delivers a powerful listening experience at a reasonable price. 

Specs

  • Battery Life: 16 hours 
  • Bluetooth Range: up to 50 feet
  • IP Rating: IP67
  • Size: 8.27 x 3.07 x 2.83 inches 

Pros 

  • Video mode 
  • Aux connection available 
  • Stereo Pairing

Cons 

  • Short charging cable 
  • Only available in black

The UBOOM L from EarFun is a budget-friendly Bluetooth speaker that delivers surprisingly impressive sound. While the texturized black grill, rubber trim, and raised buttons resemble its predecessors and contemporaries (like the Treblab HD77 or JBL Flip 5), its price:performance helps this under-$100 speaker stand out in the crowd. 

Out of the box, the UBOOM L feels durable and intuitively designed. A demure EarFun logo is located at the center, flagged by two rubber cylinders housing passive bass radiators measuring slightly over 2 inches. Tucked behind the grille are two front-facing, 14-watt 55mm drivers; at the back, under a thick rubber flap, is a USB-C charging port and an aux input; then, to top it all off, literally, are six rubber buttons—power, Bluetooth pairing, volume down, play/pause, volume up, and Sound Mode. An LED light above the final button lets you know which mode has been activated: Indoor or Outdoor. Next to the Sound Mode button is a tiny hole that houses a built-in microphone for hands-free calling. At the top of the control panel, you’ll see four white LED lights that indicate battery life, a simple yet often overlooked design feature for many Bluetooth speakers. Four lights mean the battery (which is rated at 16 hours) is more than 75% full, three mean between 75% and 50%, two mean between 50% and 25%, one means there is less than 25% left, and a single flashing light means there is less than 10% of battery life left, so it’s time to charge. 

Like most new speakers, the UBOOM L uses a Bluetooth 5.0 connection, which increases stability and range (up to 30m/100 feet). Pairing is easy and instinctual: simply turn the speaker on, press the Bluetooth button once, and select the speaker on your device’s settings. Pressing and holding the Bluetooth button will allow you to pair two UBOOM L speakers in a True Wireless Stereo pair, creating dedicated left/right channels that can expand the soundfield (and volume) and better serve larger parties. You can also hold down the Sound Mode button for two seconds, once the speakers are connected, to restore each UBOOM L as an individual stereo speaker but keep them connected and synchronized to one streaming device in case you want to share all you’re hearing with someone in another room. 

Pressing the Bluetooth button three times will toggle Video Mode on or off. Video mode supports lower-latency playback with lag reduced to 150ms and is an improved solution for sound when watching movies and TV shows from a laptop or smaller device. When Video Mode is on, a white LED indicator will pop on above the Bluetooth button. We should note that when Video mode is on, the Bluetooth connection range does get shorter, and you cannot use Video Mode during True Wireless Stereo connection. Though using the UBOOM L is generally very easy and efficient, it can be tricky to switch quickly between different Bluetooth settings and Sound modes; we found ourselves referring to the user manual more often than we would like.  

Though toggling the various buttons can be a bit of a rigamarole, the sound quality makes up for it. For a Bluetooth speaker under $100, you’ll certainly get bang for your buck. The UBOOM L was tuned by Austrian music producer Olaf “Oluv” Lubanski, who has also created a 45-minute companion video worth checking out. The mids and high-mids are particularly clean—guitar licks from any Devil Make Three song come through beautifully, and the vocals on “Highwomen” by The Highwomen are impressively clear. Snares and cymbals are crisp and sit well in the overall mix; all of the synths on Romare’s “Don’t Stop” are full and rich. 

Some users say they wish for more bass, which has some truth to it. The passive radiators don’t support frequencies lower than 65Hz, but we weren’t disappointed with a speaker this size. This low end on this speaker is undoubtedly present and well-defined, just not overwhelming thanks to the tuning and DSP involved. The only way to get truly vibrant sub-bass is with a larger unit; many small speakers disproportionately boost the lows and highs to pack a punch, which can end up distorting the mix. If anything, we appreciate that the UBOOM L knows its limits. Volume-wise, we heard up to 101 decibels, which is certainly enough to keep folks entertained and wake up your neighbors. While we mostly listened inside using Indoor Mode, triggering Outdoor mode boosts volume and bass to help lift your music above environmental noises. The UBOOM L is also rated IP67, which means if you use Outdoor mode in an appropriate al fresco setting, it is protected from dust, dirt, and liquids—it will even float if dropped in water, though we don’t recommend that if you want to preserve the sound quality.

Things to consider when searching for the best portable Bluetooth speakers

Choosing the best Bluetooth speaker for you can be a bit of a challenge; with all the options out there, it’s easy to spend hours scrolling. So, whether you want to blast a soundtrack for motivation or relaxation, we want to help jumpstart your journey. Before diving headfirst into the ever-expanding speaker market, consider size, durability, connectivity, battery life, volume, and cost. A truly great portable Bluetooth speaker will be able to fit your lifestyle and budget without sacrificing audio quality. 

How much weight do you want to carry around?

While most wireless speakers are designed to be used on the go, that doesn’t mean they’re all ultraportable. There are many shapes, sizes, and weight options to choose from, so take some time to consider where and when you’ll want to jam out the most. If you’re merely traveling to the backyard or nearby park to listen, you can probably stand to stuff a larger speaker in a bag, or sling it over your shoulder. The same goes for road trips, car-camping, full-on van life, or beach vacations. You can get great sound, long-lasting batteries, and thumping bass from a speaker that starts at roughly the same size and weight as a water bottle. 

However, if you need something to help you push through that last mile on a bike path or hiking trail, you’ll want a smaller speaker that can easily attach to handlebars or a backpack. Luckily, several portable speakers weigh under 1 pound, the lightest of which comes in at 0.019 pounds. 

You don’t need to settle for boxy sound when you crave aural ecstasy 

One common criticism of portable Bluetooth speakers is a lack of low-end support and distortion at high volumes (if you want some science as to the why, here are our primers on what makes up a speaker and how soundwaves work). While it’s true that portable systems can have trouble with handling sub-bass and high-decibel demands, there are a few models out there that are a cut above the rest.

If you’re after a party-pleasing sound, the bigger the speaker, the better. Larger units are generally more equipped to maintain consistent audio even as you turn the volume up, plus they have more room for well-designed subwoofers. A speaker with more woofers, as well as “bass radiators,” will do a much better job navigating the bump in the sonic roads. As for volume, check out the speaker’s specs and look for a maximum decibel level, notated as dB. If you are primarily playing music inside, 100 dB is the loudest you’ll want to go, and we’d be surprised if you even enjoyed listening at this level (it’s akin to a jet plane flying directly overhead). On the other hand, if you’re hosting an outdoor party with many people in attendance, you could think about increasing the volume to 115 dB, which is concert-level; music at this volume will cover a large area but you wouldn’t want anyone standing too close. Generally speaking, we are satisfied with Bluetooth speakers that maintain good sound quality at 85 dB for larger gatherings. 

Do you always forget your USB cables? 

Few things are more annoying than getting to your destination, cueing up your favorite playlist, only to see the dreaded low-battery LED flash demandingly. Luckily, the best portable Bluetooth speakers have long-lasting batteries. Speakers that boast batteries that can last between 10 and 20 hours are now more the norm than the exception. If you are going on a remote trip where charging isn’t an option and music is a necessity (I mean, when isn’t it), extended battery life is more important. We’re happy to report that these long-lasting batteries don’t mean large, bulky speakers—you can find reliable units at just about any size.

Safely take your Bluetooth speaker to the beach 

We have all been subjected to the terror that takes over when you accidentally spill your drink on a device, sending you scurrying for a bowl of rice and praying to the tech gods that your electronics survive. Luckily you can avoid all that fear and even embrace a little liquid with the best waterproof speakers. These durable units are particularly great for beach vacations, pool parties, or karaoke in the shower. To make sure your speaker can withstand a little splash, look for an IPX rating in its specs. 

IP stands for “Ingress Protection,” which tells you just how fortified an electronic device is against dirt, dust, and water. The first digit describes particle protection and the second liquid. For example, if a speaker has a rating of IP57, the “5” indicates it can keep out most dust and dirt particles, especially those over 1 millimeter in size, but it might be susceptible to large quantities of dust if exposed at one time. The “7” means you can submerge the device in up to 1 meter of water for 30 minutes before any damage occurs. If you see a rating that looks like IPX7, the “X” means no data is available for that substance. The higher the number, the more protected your speakers will be from whatever it indicates (dust or water), so you can listen to your preferred podcasts in the tub or bring your favorite sea shanties aboard a boat without worry. 

Connectivity options will keep you tuned in at all times 

Alongside portability, we crave easy connectivity when it comes to the best portable Bluetooth speakers. You want to be able to quickly link your device without fretting over interference if you happen to walk a few feet away. Reliable portable speakers are equipped with Bluetooth versions 4.2 to 5.3, designed to bolster the consistent connection between smartphones and computers with fitness trackers, headphones, speakers, and more. They rely on Bluetooth’s efficient power usage and data transmission options for improved battery life and fewer streaming glitches. When selecting a speaker, make sure to pick a model that is Bluetooth compatible with your music-streaming device (for more on the different versions of Bluetooth and how it works, check out our primer). From there, you can think about additional connectivity features that would complete your ideal listening experience. Do you need a speaker that can stay connected to your phone from over 75 feet away? Do you want to be able to pair with another speaker for stereo sound? Are you looking to connect two devices at once so you can easily hand over DJ responsibilities? 

You might also want to consider a speaker that has additional options for creating a connection. Some of us still have a few old-school devices that need an analog aux cord, which some speakers can support, though this feature is starting to fade with the release of newer models. Others might want to pair their portable speakers with a home system, whether for high-fidelity audio or voice-activated commands. If this sounds like you, consider a model that is also equipped with WiFi connectivity.   

How much do you want to spend on the best portable Bluetooth speakers? 

Portable Bluetooth speakers run the gamut when it comes to price. Some of the high-end models top out at close to $300 to $450, though there are plenty of great picks out there in the more reasonable $100 to $200 range. You can even find quality speakers for closer to $50. As you start to go down in price, you might miss out on a few features like extra battery life, clear audio at high volumes, or truly booming bass. However, if you’re looking for a budget-friendly speaker, you shouldn’t have to sacrifice too much to find something that satisfies your needs. Just pay attention to all the information you can find about a particular model, including user reviews and product descriptions. 

FAQs

Q: What is the loudest portable Bluetooth speaker? 

The loudest portable Bluetooth speaker currently available is the SOUNDBOKS 4, which is one of our top picks for an outdoor party speaker because it can reach up to 126 decibels. However, it does weigh 34 pounds, so one could call its portability into question. At $999, this is one of the best portable Bluetooth speakers designed to provide literal concert-quality sound for various venues. 

Q: What is the best portable Bluetooth speaker? 

The best portable Bluetooth speaker is relatively subjective, given each individual’s priorities. Still, we stand by the Tribit StormBox Micro 2, Soundcore 3 by Anker, and UE Wonderboom 3 as three of the best Bluetooth speakers under $100; for more budget-friendly models, take a look at a JBL speaker like the palm-sized JBL Go 3

Q: How many watts is a good speaker? 

While there isn’t a set amount of wattage that determines a good speaker, you can use this measurement to help assess volume output. Wattage typically determines how loud a speaker can get, but not the quality of the sound. Larger speakers with higher wattage can typically generate more volume, but that doesn’t mean you’ll be free of distortion. For more information regarding your speaker’s sound quality, investigate its frequency range and sound pressure levels, notated as SPL.

Final thoughts on finding the best portable Bluetooth speakers

While there may not be one portable Bluetooth speaker to rule them all, there are several excellent options out there, so long as you know where your priorities lie. The key to finding the best portable Bluetooth speakers for you is location, location, location—consider where you want to listen to music the most and you can identify the perfect wireless speaker to soundtrack your favorite activities.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable Bluetooth speakers of 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coolers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-cooler/ Wed, 26 May 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=367187
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

No matter where your adventures take you, cool down with the best coolers.

The post The best coolers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall YETI Tundra 35 Cooler YETI Tundra 35 Cooler
SEE IT

It’s designed with a roto-molded frame that provides greater structural integrity, drop resistance, and insulation than lesser injection-molded coolers.

Best for short adventures blue IceMule Classic cooler bag IceMule Classic Cooler
SEE IT

The fact that it floats means you won’t have to worry about your lunch sinking if you take it out paddleboarding, and the shoulder strap makes it easy to take on one- or two-night backpacking trips.

Best for ice retention Grey Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler Grey Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler
SEE IT

A powerhouse with ice retention that can last for well over a week in moderate conditions and most of a week even in scorching desert settings.

If you’ve ever found yourself stretched out on a seaside dune in the blistering August sun, pining for the cool rejuvenation of a fresh mint tea, you’ve understood the allure of a cooler. Whether your taste is sparkling waters or brewskies, sweltering deserts or music festivals, any prolonged occasion in the out-of-doors benefits from the power of a cold beverage, and with the best coolers, you’ll be sure to keep things ice-cold no matter where the adventure may take you. Available in different sizes and shapes, coolers are ready for extended camping trips, multiple-day fishing trips, and anywhere else you need easy portability. Hard-bodied coolers are usually made out of roto- or injection-molded plastics and feature thick, rigid sides containing layered insulation. Often latching and sometimes on wheels, some can retain ice for over a week. Soft-bodied coolers are designed to be lighter, usually using various polymer-constructed fabrics and often strapping to a user’s back or slinging over a shoulder. With these and other factors in mind, we’ve put together our suggestions for the best coolers for any and every occasion.

How we chose the best coolers

For this article I examined a wide range of coolers, looking for the best coolers from multiple manufacturers. I stacked the specs against one another and accumulated as much info on each model as possible. I also used my experience from multiple cross-country US road trips and camping trips when I lived out of a cooler for weeks. A few factors emerged as the most important in this search.

Ice retention varies dramatically from cooler to cooler. Some coolers will retain ice for an afternoon, and some boast ice retention of over a week. Great ice retention requires expensive components and heavier builds, so ice retention isn’t a be-all and end-all. However, if you’re looking for a cooler that can keep supplies cold in the back of your truck for a week, then it might be. Good ice retention was one of the most important factors I looked at.

Portability is an all-important metric for a good cooler (at least for most people). Even if you’re buying a cooler that will live in the back of your truck, it still needs to be mobile enough and have enough purchases to load it in and out. The most portable coolers are usually soft-bodied ones that will likely sacrifice some ice retention for a lightweight build. This list features a few highly portable coolers and a few that focus elsewhere.

Ruggedness can be an important factor. Loaded coolers can be very heavy. That’s why I looked for models that are rugged enough to survive a drop or two or repeat scraping against the sharp edges of a boat. For hard-bodied coolers, this often means roto-molded plastics rather than injection molds.

Price is always a factor with outdoor gear. Where coolers are concerned, long ice-retention times generally increase your cost dramatically. Thus, this list highlights a few coolers that make a low price the prerogative while simultaneously prioritizing expensive and impressive insulation in others.

The best coolers: Reviews & Recommendations

The best coolers can keep drinks and food cold for hours while you and your pals/loved ones romp around having a blast outdoors, and these are the best ones we found.

Best overall: YETI Tundra 35

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 21.38 x 16.13 x 15.75 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 13.88 x 10.63 x 9.38 inches
  • Materials: Roto-molded polyurethane

Pros

  • Keeps ice for long stretches
  • Gasket seals lid
  • Rugged construction that’s even bear-resistant
  • Comes in multiple sizes

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

YETI is such a well-known name in coolers that I specifically looked for a cooler that could outrank it for the “best overall” category in this article, but with its long ice retention and rugged build, the YETI Tundra 35 is simply the clear choice. YETI hard-body coolers are designed with a roto-molded frame that provides greater structural integrity, drop resistance, and insulation than lesser injection-molded coolers. The lid seals with an industrial gasket, so it’s guaranteed to keep contents at the desired temperature, and opens with easy-to-use rubber latches.

At 20 pounds, the YETI is heavy. However, this is addressed in its design. Rope handles are attached to both sides, making carrying easy. The cooler is also designed to be tied down and is easily secured to your boat or truck with ropes. A removable metal dry basket also ships with the product. Further, the Tundra meets the Interagency Grizzly Bear Committee (IGBC) standards for grizzly bear (or black bear) resistance when locked with standard long-stem master locks (YETI sells these on their site). These are just some of the reasons we love YETI coolers for camping.

When it comes to coolers, YETI is one of the undisputed industry leaders, and the Tundra is no isolated golden child. YETI makes a great cooler called the Tundra Haul, which is equipped with wheels for greater portability. If you’re looking for a soft-body cooler or a hard-bodied water cooler, their offerings are also worth a look. If you like Yeti’s insulated water bottles, you will love the Tundra 35 cooler.

Best portable: Igloo 7-Quart Hardsided Playmate

Igloo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 2.2 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 10.63 x 8.27 x 11.81 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: Top: 9.06 x 6.31 x 8.38 inches
  • Materials: High-density polyethylene

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Keeps your drinks cold or your soup hot
  • Easy to carry

Cons

  • Some users have trouble with the latch breaking
  • Insulation doesn’t achieve long-term ice retention

Igloo’s 7-Quart Hardsided Playmate is one of those staples of job sites all over America. The design has stayed largely the same for over 30 years, and that’s because it does a great job as an affordable lunch-box cooler. Made out of high-density polyethylene, the Playmate features a high, tented design with a handle that swings open for access to the cooler space below. Igloo has capitalized on the Playmate’s fame by offering Playmates sporting splashes of color and featuring characters and logos, everything from the Grateful Dead to Rugrats.

Sadly, modern Playmates do have an issue with build quality. Playmates now latch from the handle, unlike their older counterparts from the ’80s and ’90s. This latch isn’t as strong as old Playmates’. Some products ship with latches that soon break. However, the company does offer a one-year limited warranty, so you can still buy with relative peace of mind—if your latch is faulty, it will most likely show in a year. That said, the Playmate is still a strong product that works well for the majority of users.

Igloo also offers an exciting line of coolers made of recycled plastics. The Ecocool Playmate is a great post-consumer recycled resin alternative to the standard Playmate line. It also notably retains the original side button from the old-school Playmates, which means it shouldn’t suffer from the same latch trouble that mars some contemporary Playmates. This means that not only is the Ecocool version better for environmental sustainability, but it also offers better build quality.

Best ice retention: Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler

Grizzly

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 33.13 x 17.75 x 18 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 27.5 x 12.63 x 13.75 inches
  • Materials: Roto-molded linear low-density polyethylene plastic with Ecomate polyurethane foam insulation

Pros

  • Extreme ice retention can last five days to over a week
  • Sealing gasket
  • IGBC-certified bear-resistant and includes placements for locks

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

For those among us who are looking for a cooler that can go and go, the Grizzly 75 Quart Cooler is about as rugged as its namesake. Manufacturing rugged coolers in Iowa, Grizzly is an American company specializing in reliability. The Grizzly is a powerhouse with ice retention that can last for well over a week in moderate conditions and most of a week even in scorching desert settings. If you’re looking for an ice chest that will work for days angling on the Everglades, weeklong hunts in the mountains of Colorado, or months on the road in your van-life rig, this is the one.

Built of roto-molded plastic injected with a special non-VOC environmentally friendly polyurethane called Ecomate, the Grizzly is more sustainably minded and insulated than most of the competition. IGBC-certified grizzly resistant, the cooler is also remarkably rugged and closes with three latches; it also has padlock holes on each side (for real bear thwarting). A rubber gasket in the lid seals the deal.

Grizzly builds a cooler that really delivers longevity. It comes at an expensive price point, but it’s the best out there for those looking for a truly fortified cooling system that’s ready for weeks in the field.

Best for short adventures: IceMule Classic

IceMule

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.93 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 16.5 x 6 x 7 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 15 liters
  • Materials: Fiberglass

Pros

  • This cooler floats and can even be towed behind a boat
  • Slings over the back easily
  • Easy to stuff with whatever you need
  • Can keep food cold for over 24 hours

Cons

  • Not the best ice retention out there
  • Material isn’t the most rugged and may tear on sharp or rough surfaces like unfinished metal boat parts

At the most portable end of the spectrum, the IceMule Classic is a soft-body roll-closed cooler that looks like a dry bag and slings over your shoulder. It also floats. If water sports and agile adventuring are your prerogatives, the IceMule is ready.

While it doesn’t have the best ice retention of any cooler out there, the IceMule will still retain ice all day and keep your food and drinks cold for over 24 hours. Because of its roll-over design, a poor, not watertight seal is possible, so be mindful when closing it to avoid liquids getting out if the cooler is held upside down. This also means that water can get in if you take it floating in the water. It’s not a common enough issue to get in the way of most users, but it’s something to be aware of.

Another issue with the IceMule is that the fabric isn’t as rugged as it could be. With all-week use, your IceMule may crack or scratch, especially when used around rough or jagged materials, such as sharp metal edges on a boat.

Where the IceMule shines is on adventurous outdoor day trips in and out of water. The fact that it floats means you won’t have to worry about your lunch sinking if you take it out paddleboarding, and the shoulder strap makes it easy to pack fresh food or drinks on one- or two-night backpacking trips.

Best compact cooler with wheels: RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler 

ROVR PRODUCTS EST. 2016

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22.5 x 218.9 x 19.3 inches
  • Weight: 39 pounds with land bin, 34 pounds without
  • Capacity: 60 cans or 10 pounds of ice
  • Materials: Rotomolded High-Density Foam Insulation

Pros

  • Sporty, space-saving design
  • 8-day ice retention
  • All-terrain wheels
  • DeepFreeze dry bin
  • Bearproof design
  • Plenty of color choices

Cons

  • Handle is slightly flimsy when fully extended

The sporty-looking RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler resembles a miniature version of my mid-engine MR2 Spyder—which, admittedly, looks like a miniature version of a full-size vehicle. It also happens to make our list of the best coolers. The 45-quart cooler is the perfect size for my two-seater car and is also ideal when space is either limited or you don’t need a giant cooler. (Note: Rover does make 60-quart and 80-quart wheeled coolers, and in addition to glacier and chili pepper, other color choices include desert, magic hour, midnight, powder, moss, and Gobi.)

The deep freeze-dry bin is deep enough to hold wine bottles upright or can also be used to store clean ice for beverages. The wheeled cooler also offers compartments to store various types of items (meat, veggies, etc.) separately—but also below food-safe temperatures recommended by the FDA. The latches are tight enough that it takes a minute to open them, and the drain plug makes it easy to channel the water out. Also, the custom rubber gasket seals the cold air inside, which allows the cooler to provide up to eight days of ice retention. 

In addition, the telescopic handle lets me find the right height for comfortably wheeling the cooler around. When the handle is fully extended, it feels rather flimsy, but at lower heights, it’s fine. The 9-inch all-terrain wheels are puncture-resistant, making the cooler easy to navigate even over rough terrain, including deep sand.

There are also a lot of cool RovR Roll R 45 accessories that you can purchase separately and attach to the anchor points, like a prep board, double cup holder, umbrella/rod holder, collapsible bin, and bike trailer kit.

More coolers we love …

Best soft: Polar Bear Coolers 24 Pack

Polar Bear Coolers

SEE IT

Sturdiness is one of the greatest issues with soft coolers—but this is not even close to an issue with the Polar Bear Cooler. It features one of the toughest, puncture-resistant liners made of TPU double-coated nylon, which is consumer-safe for perishable storage. Plus, it has beautiful stitching with double hemmed seams, a heavy-duty and weatherproofed zipper, and a side zipper compartment that can be totally customized with your name or logo! 

Best backpack: TOURIT Cooler Backpack

TOURIT

SEE IT

This cooler bag comes in six colors, has a stylish design, and promises comfort on your back and shoulders with its padded and adjustable straps. This backpack keeps food and drinks chilled for up to 16 hours (freeze packs are needed, though). It is durable and leak-resistant, and its ventilated exterior ensures that your clothes won’t get wet by condensation during your adventure. It has multiple compartments perfect for organization: one main storage compartment for all your provisions, two front zipper pockets, two bottle holders, a mesh pocket on the strap, and even a bottle opener. 

Best budget: Coleman Xtreme 5 Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

This Coleman cooler features Xtreme technology, including an insulated lid and extra wall insulation, and holds up to 100 cans. The closed lid features four slots to rest your drinks without spilling and is perfect to squat down on—it holds up to 250 pounds! Its EZ-clean lid and comfortable handles make this a perfect choice for a no-frills ice chest that will get the job done without breaking the bank.

Things to consider before buying the best coolers

When you’re shopping for a new cooler, the following factors are important to keep in mind:

Sustainability

Most coolers are made from plastics, but more environmentally friendly options are out there. Igloo makes a 100 percent biodegradable cooler called the Recool 16-Quart Cooler out of recycled paper and alkyl ketene dimer (a hydrophobic sizing agent). It’s an excellent budget alternative to the Styrofoam coolers of yesterday because it’s biodegradable. Igloo’s post-consumer recycled resin coolers are also worth a look, especially the Parks Project Playmate line, which donates a portion of proceeds to the National Parks Conservation Association.

When buying any product, it’s important to consider its effects. When shopping for coolers, remember that there are more sustainable options out there that might biodegrade or use plastics that won’t leach harmful chemicals.

Portability

Strategizing how you’ll use your cooler before you buy is important. If you need an ultraportable cooler to take in and out of the water, you’ll most likely want a soft-body cooler that can strap to your back. If you fish and like to head out for multiple-day excursions, you may want a cooler that will keep ice frozen (and fish fresh) for up to a week. Usually, the best ice retention requires more weight to achieve. So, ultimate portability and ultimate ice retention are mutually exclusive factors.

Performance

Unless you’re heading into the field for multiple-day camping trips or driving across the country in a modified van, you may not really need multiple days of ice retention. If you’re looking for a solid cooler that will keep your drinks cold all afternoon at the beach, many cheaper options could do the job fairly well.

FAQs

Q: What is the best cooler I can buy?

For most people, the YETI Tundra 35 delivers the best balance between ice retention and ruggedness for the price. It’s an excellent cooler that’s ready for most anything you throw at it. On the other hand, the expensive Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler is the most rugged cooler out there with the best ice retention. 

Q: How do coolers work? 

The best coolers generally use hard or soft plastic exteriors with dense insulators that block heat transfer. Sometimes, including a gasket that further insulates the seal on a lid, coolers are (usually) waterproof boxes that prevent heat transfer.

Q: Which cooler keeps ice the longest?

Most coolers with updated insulation technology can keep ice for up to a few days. Depending on the temperature and if the ice chest is located in direct sunlight or not, the maximum days will vary. That said, however, the Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler can hold ice for 5-7 days.

Q: What cooler is comparable to YETI?

The Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler surpasses the YETI in terms of ice retention and ruggedness. It also offers bear protection, roto-molded plastic, and rugged latches.

Final thoughts on the best coolers

Every family, group of friends, or individual can benefit from a trusty ice cooler to pull out for that next party or outdoor adventure. Especially as the summer months approach, it’s smart to ensure you’re ready for any situation by checking the best cooler off your to-buy list. There are so many options, but you certainly won’t go wrong with any of the best coolers we recommend. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow shovels of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-shovel/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 09:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snow-shovel/
The best snow shovels lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

These trusty accessories help clear you a path to enjoy a snow day, not grumble about an icy pileup.

The post The best snow shovels of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best snow shovels lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house Snow Joe SJ-SHLV01 Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
SEE IT

This pick is designed for comfort, with features like a D-shaped handle and ergonomic steel.

Best electric Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel
SEE IT

Take the hassle out of shoveling with this electric pick.

Best ergonomic This green Suncast snow shovel is the best ergonomic snow shovel Suncast SC3250 18-Inch Snow Shovel/Pusher Combo
SEE IT

This no-frills pick pushes snow out of the way with ease.

Don’t be that cranky neighbor who grumbles at the thought of bringing out their snow shovel. Freshly fallen snow is a beautiful sight, and your snow days should be enjoyed. And a fresh snow shovel is an equally beautiful sight, one that will allow you to get outside and enjoy the wintry landscape—or kick back inside by the fire, your choice—knowing you’ve gotten the job done right. While most of us don’t look forward to clearing out freshly fallen snow, the right shovel can make snow shoveling much easier so you can get back to the winter activities you enjoy. Here, we’ve collected the best tools for shoveling snow, with arms that are long enough to prevent hunching, ergonomic designs to reduce back strain, and durable materials that can cut through any snowbank. An electric shovel can speed up the job, or you can just work with well-designed manual shovels. Either way, we’ve researched some of the best snow shovels currently on the market, so now you won’t dread those impending winter storms.

How we chose the best snow shovels

Shoveling your driveway is just one aspect of winter safety and preparedness. Thorough testing is especially important here—we don’t want to recommend a subpar model that leads to a broken spirit, sore back, and increased potential of senior neighbors getting hurt. To find the best snow shovels, we looked at reviews and recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research to clear out the skimpy, sad scoopers from the heavy-duty haulers.

The best snow shovels: Reviews & Recommendations

Between light dustings to heavy avalanches, these driveway clearing, sidewalk sweeping snow shovels can handle it all (and cost far less than the best snow blowers). Don’t forget to throw on your snow boots, heated clothing, and a winter hat to fight off the icy temperatures as you shovel. Here’s what we found:

Best overall: Snow Joe SJ-SHLV01 Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 50 x 18 x 3.9 inches
  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Weight: 3.7 lbs.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Assist handle
  • Highly rated
  • Different sizes available

Cons

  • Best at clearing fluffy, light snow

Not all shovels are made the same. As expected, most budget ones are usually made with lower-quality materials and use cost-cutting solutions for construction. Depending upon the frequency of use, these less expensive shovels will probably not last as long as a pricier model. However, if you live in an area that only sees occasional snow, a budget snow shovel might just be good enough for you. We found a highly-rated cheap shovel with a new take on shovel design—offering a second lower handle and short arm to act as a fulcrum and offset the energy required to throw the snow off the shovel blade. If stored properly and not used on the heaviest of icy snow, the Snow Joe shovel may work for you quite well.

Best ergonomic: Suncast SC3250 18-Inch Snow Shovel/Pusher Combo

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18 x 51 x 2.42 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Weight: 1 lb.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Won’t damage wooden porches or deck
  • Ergonomic bent arm and handle
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Reviews note handles prone to breaking

A great choice to save space and time, this combination snow shovel is designed with a durable steel handle and a coated plastic resin blade. The shovel blade has an angled ribbed pattern, which helps prevent snow from sticking to the shovel. An ergonomic bent arm and S-shaped handle help ensure proper posture and reduce back strain. If you have a bad back, this shovel is a good choice for you.

Best snow pusher: The Snowplow “the Original Snow Pusher”

Snowplow

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 47 x 6 x 9 inches
  • Material: Polyethylene, fiberglass
  • Weight: 5.84 lbs.
  • Blade size: 36 inches

Pros

  • Large blade size
  • Multiple sizes available
  • Cutting angle for ice

Cons

  • Bolts on shovel prone to coming loose

This snow plow shovel is available in multiple sizes and is constructed with polyethylene, which makes it safe for use on decks, pavers, and roofs. When you flip this shovel over, a cutting angle can be used to chip away at stubborn ice. It’s like having your own acoustic option to plow snow.

Best electric: Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel

Greenworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 63.5 x 14.3 x 10.3 inches
  • Material: Polyethylene, metal, rubber
  • Weight: 14 lbs.
  • Blade size: 12 inches

Pros

  • Large throw distance and clearance rate
  • Adjustable auxiliary handle for comfort
  • Cordless

Cons

  • Only works on snowfall less than 6 inches

The Greenworks electric shovel is a great solution when you need to get rid of snow fast but don’t have a lot of space to store your snow equipment. Our pick for best cordless, this rechargeable electric snow shovel works best to clear lighter snow up to 6 inches in height. Again, ensure the battery is stored somewhere at room temperature for best performance.

Best for seniors: ORIENTOOLS Heavy Duty Rolling Snow Shovel

ORIENTOOLS

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28 x 16.5 x 5.5 inches
  • Material: Steel, plastic
  • Weight: 4.61 lbs.
  • Blade size: 25 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Padded, adjustable handle
  • Scratch and rust-resistant

Cons

  • Requires adequate storage

This reasonably priced, heavy-duty steel snow pusher is scratch- and rust-resistant to last you many winters. The handle has an adjustable height of between 45 and 50 inches, which helps ensure better posture (one of the things that are best for seniors and juniors), and with the ability to clear 5 inches of snow in one pass, it’s a great choice for pushing snow off larger areas like decks and driveways. However, this shovel is larger than some others so that adequate storage would be required. Find more snow shovels for seniors here.

Best for cars: BIRDROCK HOME 34″ Folding Emergency Snow Shovel for Car

BIRDROCK HOME

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 34 x 9 x 2.4 inches
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Weight: 2 lbs.
  • Blade size: 9 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight but heavy-duty
  • Compact
  • Shovel shaft extends for more leverage

Cons

  • Not good for driveways

From umbrellas to bandages, it’s funny how you forget the thing you need in an emergency. Free your car from its snowy shackles while on the road with this compact shovel, which collapses to fit in your car. It’s even a great option when the snow melts and your nephews beg you to bury them in the sand. It might be too small for your driveway, but it is just the right size to escape from the parking space you got trapped in.

Best battery-operated: Earthwise 40-Volt Cordless Electric Snow Shovel

Earthwise

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 41 x 16 x 38 inches
  • Material: Metal, plastic
  • Weight: 19 lbs.
  • Blade size: 16 inches

Pros

  • Clears snow quickly
  • Cordless
  • Ergonomic handle

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

Don’t be tethered to a cord when the snow falls with this battery-operated snow shovel. The cordless snow shovel demolishes through snow 300 lbs of snow per minute. Its 16-inch clearing width gets through more snow with each pass, and it has a quiet brushless motor for earth-friendly power. The ergonomic handle, six-inch rear wheels, and dual-blade auger of our pick for best splurge mean more time spent cozied on the couch and less struggle when clearing the driveway.

Best budget: True Temper Ergonomic Snow Shovel

True Temper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.25 x 17.75 x 52 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Weight: 5 lbs.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Ergonomic
  • Combination pusher and shovel
  • D-grip handle

Cons

  • Slippery steel might make snow fall off shovel

This ergonomic snow shovel is a great choice to help make you more comfortable while shoveling, as the durable steel body and curved neck make it easy to handle. The blade allows it to act as both a pusher or lifter and the extra-large D-Grip handle keeps hands comfortable and secure.

What to consider when buying the best snow shovels

Before deciding on the best snow shovel to buy this winter, consider the best design for you, the quality of materials, and the types of jobs your shovel is built to handle. If you don’t typically get a lot of snow, you may be able to handle the job with a simple combination or ergonomic shovel. For bigger jobs, you may want to purchase an electric shovel or a larger snow pusher with wheels. If conditions are right and you don’t need to opt for a snow blower, keep reading for our selections.

Ergonomics

Nobody could call shoveling easy, because it’s not. One of the precautions you can take to help make the difficult task of snow removal easier is to protect your back. Back strain and pulled muscles are very common due to the heavy, repetitive actions involved in the process.

Because of these common injuries, manufacturers have conducted research and designed ergonomic shovels with your comfort in mind. Shovels are considered ergonomic when they help you stand up straight, have comfortable handles, and are lighter in weight. Features that you will find to facilitate this back comfort are lightweight materials like aluminum and plastic, a longer, slightly bent arm, and larger D-Grip handles. So, while the job still won’t be easy, an ergonomically designed shovel will help protect your back and make the job more comfortable.

Snow pushers vs. shovels

When you live in a climate that sees its fair share of snowstorms, you should consider adding a snow pusher to your snow removal arsenal. Pushers are increasingly popular choices because they are lightweight and help you remove snow without excessive lifting. With the right conditions, you can cover a large amount of ground very quickly with this tool.

The best snow pushers can help prevent back injuries because the act of pushing is inherently easier than lifting. Snow pushers are essentially smaller, hand-powered versions of the industrial plow. They are best used for pushing up to 4 inches of lighter snow off of flat surfaces. This makes them a smart choice for sidewalks and driveways. Materials found in snowplows include steel, aluminum, plastics, and fiberglass, as well as UHMW polyethylene. Plastic blades tend to be a better choice for shoveling more delicate surfaces like pavers. Keep in mind that snow pushers aren’t the best choice for excessive, heavy icy snow.

Go electric

When you’re looking to really speed up the shoveling process but don’t want to invest in an expensive, heavy snow blower, you may want to consider an electric shovel. Compared to snow blowers, electric shovels for snow are typically lightweight, reasonably priced, and relatively small—making them a good choice for navigating smaller spaces like narrow walkways or steps.

Electric snow blower shovels work similarly to traditional snow blowers. They utilize a rotating blade to remove snow from a surface and then propel it through a chute. These portable machines usually have to be manually pushed along your snow-clearing path. Their smaller size makes them easier to store when not in use, which is a bonus if your storage space is limited. Electric power is generated with a cord or they can be cordless powered via a rechargeable battery. While it may vary between models, most batteries will last between 30 to 45 minutes on a single charge. Recharging will take about 30 minutes, so it might be necessary to purchase a backup battery if you’re clearing a larger area. It is also important to consider that most batteries should be stored inside a space that will not go below freezing.

Fatigue-reducing features

No matter how lightweight and brilliantly designed your shovel is, the act of physically lifting scoop after scoop of snow is tiresome. If you’re looking to reduce fatigue and speed up the process without turning to electric or gas-powered snow removal equipment, you may want to consider a snow shovel with wheels.

Pushing a heavy load with wheels offsets the amount of energy required to complete the task immensely. Ever pushed a handcart full of heavy boxes? Incorporating the simple science of the wheel into a shovel works particularly well with a pusher-style shovel. A snow pusher allows for fast removal of larger surfaces (like driveways, for example). When wheels are added, the task becomes much easier, reducing the force of friction. Wheeled shovels are a great choice for people with back issues or older homeowners. As with manual snow-pusher-style shovels, the wheeled snow pusher will work best on lightweight snow, while heavy ice and snow may need to be broken up before this can be used to clear the space.

Do you have limited space for your snow-clearing equipment?

When you need to clear snow, but don’t have a handy storage shed to fit multiple types of shovels, consider a combination shovel. These shovels act as a two-in-one tool, offering the ability to push as well as lift snow. That means you only need one shovel to clear the snowfall from your deck, driveway, and even the top of your car. The best combination shovels will be durable, ergonomically designed, and lightweight enough to be used comfortably.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best snow shovels cost?

Depending on size, material, and battery power, the best snow shovels can cost between $40 and $300.

Q: How long should a snow shovel be?

It depends on what surface you’re shoveling and the width of that surface. For example, if you’re clearing off a large, wide driveway, a wider shovel between 24-30 inches gets the job done efficiently and fast. However, they’re harder to lift. If you’re clearing a sidewalk, a narrower 18-inch shovel is perfect.

Q: How can you shovel snow fast?

To get your shoveling done fast, following a few rules of thumb is important. First, you want to get outside right when the snow stops. If you wait too long, you might encounter issues like heavier snow, melted slush, and refrozen ice. Another trick is to make sure you have the right equipment—sometimes, you might need a few different kinds of shovels to get the full job done faster. For example, when tackling a large space like your driveway, the fastest method is to start down the center using a plow shovel and then work your way toward the outer edges, finally removing the snow with a traditional snow shovel. You can also consider an electric shovel to shorten the overall time to clear your space.

Q: How do you keep snow from sticking to the shovel?

One of the more frustrating issues that many people face when shoveling is having snow stick to the shovel. This creates extra weight and reduces the speed at which you can clear the snow. A trick you can easily do to help solve this problem is to add a lubricant to the shovel, which will cause the snow to roll off easily. You can use a general wax, inexpensive cooking oil, or even a cooking oil spray.

Q: Which snow shovels are better for your back?

A snow shovel with an ergonomic bent arm and S-shaped handle should be the first on your list if you have a bad back (or just don’t want one down the road). A rolling snow plow with an adjustable handle height can also be a comfortable, conscientious pick.

Q: What’s better: a metal or plastic snow shovel?

It depends on what surface you’re trying to clear: a metal snow shovel is perfect for hard snow and ice on driveways and sidewalks. However, snow tends to stick to them; they’re heavier; and you could potentially bend or warp the shovel. A plastic shovel is good for wood surfaces like decks and is lighter. Plus, snow is less likely to stick to a plastic shovel.

Final thoughts on the best snow shovels

The best snow shovel will help make shoveling quicker and less of a physical strain. It’s worth considering ergonomic features, lightweight materials, and the right shape and size blade for the surfaces you will be clearing. They will help you enjoy the winter season and remain confident, knowing you have the tools to handle whatever storms Mother Nature throws your way.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow shovels of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor speakers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-speakers/ Tue, 28 Nov 2023 22:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592540
The best outdoor speakers in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We’ve looked at all sorts of weatherproof speakers to find the ones that hit all the right notes. Here's what's in while you're out.

The post The best outdoor speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor speakers in 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Definitive Technology AW6500 Outdoor Speaker Definitive Technology AW6500 Outdoor Speaker
SEE IT

A balance of sound and style help the AW6500s to stand out.

Best portable outdoor speaker Ultimate Ears EPICBOOM Ultimate Ears EPICBOOM Portable Wireless Bluetooth Speaker
SEE IT

A long-lasting outdoor speaker you can take anywhere, anytime.

Best budget Pyle 3-way Mini Box Speaker System Pyle 3-way Mini Box Speaker System
SEE IT

A pair of powerful, water-resistant speakers that’ll only set you back $30.

Our yards and patios often have just as much decorating TLC as our indoor spaces, so why shouldn’t they have a set of outdoor speakers, too? Outdoor speakers can turn open-air space from just rocks into the rock and roll garden party of your dreams or allow chill tunes to accompany the natural breeze and rustling leaves. But bringing the boom beyond a climate-controlled room can be challenging. We’ve assembled a list of the best outdoor speakers, from pairs that require permanent wiring to portable options that’ll make your neighbors wish they were on your guest list.

How we chose the best outdoor speakers

The only thing predictable about the weather is its unpredictability. But good outdoor speakers should reliably produce a sonic landscape while withstanding the elements. The PopSci team combined our collective experience testing speakers of all sorts with user feedback to create a list anchored in brands with innovative audio engineering and products that fit a range of price points.

The best outdoor speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

We’ve selected speakers for people who want higher sound quality and a more permanent setup in their outdoor oasis. Most will take running speaker wire to an indoor setup, installing mounting brackets, and adjusting the aim until you create a sonic sweet spot. Keep in mind that it takes more speakers outside than it does inside to create the same sound. If installing passive speakers sound like too much work, revisit our best portable party speakers.

All these speakers boast weatherproofing and durable casings. Still, when you dive into user guides, most manufacturers recommend installing them where they have some protection from the elements to prolong how long they will last and make sure the mounting angle doesn’t allow water to pool. Beach and coastal residents may also want to look into how speakers fare in the salt air. Beyond that, just add friends and snacks and the perfect playlist to keep the energy up.

Best overall: Definitive Technology AW6500 Outdoor Speaker

Definitive Technology

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.88 inches by 14.44 inches by 9.25 inches
  • Weight: 9.2 pounds
  • Drivers: 1-inch aluminum dome tweeter, 6.5-inch round BDSS bass mid/woofer, 5.5 by 10-inch pressure-driven bass radiator
  • Power range: 10-200 watts
  • Frequency response: 40Hz to 30kHz

Pros

  • Can be oriented horizontally or vertically
  • Comes in black or white
  • Galvanized steel mounting brackets included
  • Can stick to one or add many to the setup
  • 5-year warranty

Cons

  • Higher end of price scale per speaker
  • Relies on receiver/amp to have Bluetooth/WiFi compatibility

Definitive Technology makes some of our favorite indoor tower speakers, but they’re a luxury for the living room. We recommend the Definitive Technology AW6500 Outdoor Speaker to ensure you have great sound during patio party season. Packed into an installation-friendly form and for about $300 each, this passive speaker rocks a 1-inch aluminum dome tweeter and pairs a  6.5-inch Balance Double Surround Sound System mid-woofer with a 10-inch passive bass radiator, resulting in bumping bass whether you’re aiming to be the center of the block party or keep the next great barbecue at a neighbor-respecting volume.

Designed to withstand rain, snow, and heat, the AW6500 is housed in a PolyStone casing and an aluminum mesh grill that can be mounted horizontally or vertically. The included steel mounts allow for 360-degree rotation, so you can fill the space with sound whether you’re working with one or several to fill a vast backyard. According to DT’s user guide, a pair covers about 200 to 400 square feet.

Best speaker disguised as a rock: Klipsch AWR-650-SM Indoor/Outdoor Speaker

Klipsch

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11 inches by 15 inches by 17 inches
  • Weight: 13 pounds
  • Drivers: Two 3/4 inch polymer dome tweeter, 6.5 inches dual voice coil polymer woofer
  • Power range: up to 50 watts
  • Frequency response: 60Hz to 20kHz

Pros

  • UV-resistant enclosure
  • Can be mono or stereo
  • Available in granite or sandstone
  • Comes with 3-foot pre-attached speaker cable
  • 5-year warranty

Cons

  • You got a rock

Speakers come in three very broad groups: eye-catching statement designs, traditional enclosures that don’t bring attention to themselves, and then some designs meant to blend in completely. The Klipsch AWR-650-SM Indoor/Outdoor Speaker looks like a rock that is somehow eye-catching but also could vanish into a rustic setting. Whether the granite colorway suits your mountain vista or the sandstone better complements your desert panorama, the Klipsch AWR-650-SM is the best design to be put on the ground where conventional loudspeakers can’t go. The fiberglass enclosure houses two 3/4-inch tweeters and 6.5-inch subwoofer that can be configured for use as a single dual-channel speaker or a pair of single-channel speakers when connected to your receiver or amp. Each rock will set you back about $330, though they seem oddly addictive. Many users note they purchased one and then went back for more.

Best landscape speakers: Furrion Aurora 4.1 Veranda Series Outdoor Landscape Speaker System

Furrion

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: Speakers without stake 6 inches by 7.5 inches by 8.9 inches; Subwoofer 16 inches by 26.8 inches
  • Weight: Speakers 2.7 pounds; Subwoofer 31 pounds
  • Drivers: 0.75-inch marine-grade PEI with 10-inch dual voice coil long throw
  • Power range: 50 to 150 watts
  • Frequency response: 80Hz to 20kHz

Pros

  • Weatherproof
  • Can cover 3,500 square feet
  • Multiple mounting options

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Installation will take considerable work

When your outdoor living takes place primarily off the patio, the Furrion Aurora 4.1 Veranda Series Outdoor Landscape Speaker System might be the investment for you. For about $1,800, the system includes a 10-inch DVC subwoofer and is rounded out by four two-way speakers to help cut through ambient noise and create your own immersive soundtrack. The weatherproof fluorocarbon components can be mounted in the ground with stakes, tucked discreetly in plants, or mounted on trees. The 150-degree pivoting arm allows for plenty of flexibility as you aim to eliminate sound dead spots, no matter how irregularly shaped a yard may be. The system is compatible with most two-channel receivers or amplifiers, but expansions require additional Furrion brand speakers and subwoofers. Two sets—that’s two subwoofers and eight speakers—can cover 3,500 square feet.

This kind of installation may require digging or trenching, so the company recommends checking with the dig agency in your area before picking up a shovel.

Best for live performances: SOUNDBOKS4—Bluetooth Performance Speaker

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 20.87 inches by 15.55 inches by 29.17 inches
  • Weight: 34 pounds
  • Connectivity: XLR or Bluetooth

Pros

  • Loud
  • 40 hours of battery life (charges in 3.5 hours)
  • Portable if you’ve got the space
  • Customizable EQ and sound modes

Cons

  • Larger and harder to transport
  • Only battery-powered

The Soundboks 4 performance Bluetooth 5.0 speaker isn’t for your apartment, main casual speaker situation, or even something you want to toss in your car for a quick trip camping. You could absolutely use it for all of these scenarios, but it is likely overkill, and certain design aspects could prevent challenges—not to mention your need to have extremely understanding neighbors. That being said, the speaker is perfect for a smaller patio party or tailgating and allows you to add up to five other Soundbok speakers if you’re throwing a full-on rager in your backyard. Able to reach up to 126dB while maintaining audio clarity—just into the uncomfortable/damaging level—you don’t have to worry about people talking getting in the way of your cha-cha slide number.

If you are going into the wood or a setting requiring a speaker that can stand up to the elements, the Soundboks 4 has you covered with silicone ball corners that prevent the powdered aluminum frame, steel honeycomb grill, and an IP65 waterproof rating. The built-in carrying handles also make the 34-pound speaker fairly easy to pick up and place in your car if you did need to transport it.

The companion smartphone app gives you all the typical controls over a connected speaker including multiple sound mounds, the ability to customize the EQ, and connecting multiple other speakers. While we don’t love that the speaker is ONLY battery-operated, you can buy more batteries for extra battery life. But to be fair, you get up to 40 hours out of each charge, and we can’t imagine most people needing more than that. If you do, you’re probably on a longer trip and have portable power stations or another type of generator to re-up the battery.

One other standout feature is the speaker’s microphone and instrument input. Perfect for streaming your favorite Spotify artists, you’ll also have a chance to plug in an electric guitar, DJ controller, or vocal mic to host a show or perform. All in all, this is a solid multi-purpose speaker that can be used for anything, but its size might get in the way of some use cases.

Best portable outdoor speaker: Ultimate Ears EPICBOOM Portable Wireless Bluetooth Speaker

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.38 inches by 4.7 inches by 9.5 inches
  • Weight: 4.36 pounds
  • Battery life: 17 hours
  • Bluetooth range: 180 feet

Pros

  • Portable
  • Can be wirelessly linked with other UE speakers
  • Waterproof, IP67 rating
  • Onboard controls
  • NFC pairing for Android 8.0 and later

Cons

  • No WiFi
  • No voice assistant
  • No microphone
  • No aux port for other sources

The wired life isn’t for everyone, which is why Bluetooth speakers are so popular. For the very digital, the Ultimate Ears EPICBOOM offers 360 degrees of big, bassy sound in a durable but attractive package for about $300. In either charcoal or cotton white, the EPICBOOM is a shockproof, dustproof, waterproof device that can be immersed in up to one meter of water for up to 30 minutes. Forget poolside; the EPICBOOM can be in the pool. (Its little sibling, the Wonderboom, is also one of our picks for a swim or a soak, as it’s one of the best shower speakers.)

The EPICBOOM needs to be paired with a phone to stream music, but it excels at this. The speaker itself features buttons for fast play, pause, skip, and volume changes, so wet or dirty hands don’t have to handle a comparatively delicate smartphone to change the vibe. The BOOM app adds additional controls, like customizable EQ and connecting several UE BOOM devices together to create a dispersed sound system on the fly.

While some Bluetooth speakers can serve as an access point for voice assistants or pull double-duty as a phone speaker, the EPICBOOM focuses on music and playing music only. However, the EPICBOOM’s battery life is a decent 17 hours, so it will likely last longer than your favorite playlist. Still, anyone aiming to party all night and every day will need to keep a USB-C charger handy (and maybe some comfy patio furniture and some of the best deck lights).

If it’s a smart speaker you’re after, the Sonos Move 2 costs $150 more but adds more connectivity alongside durability (and if you really love the multiroom Sonos ecosystem and are tired of moving things around, the best splurge is to install Sonos by Sonance Architectural speakers, which are $900 a pair).

Best budget: Pyle 3-way Mini Box Speaker System

Pyle

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.75 inches by 5.25 inches by 3 inches
  • Weight: 2.63 pounds
  • Drivers: 1-inch superior dome tweeter, 3.5-inch aluminum injection cone with 1.75-inch-wide dispersion cone midrange with bass reflex vent
  • Power range: up to 200 watts
  • Frequency response: 70Hz to 21kHz

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Quick connect/disconnect terminals
  • Waterproof; IP-44 rating
  • Corrosion and stain-resistant mesh grills

Cons

  • May want to upgrade the included speaker wire
  • Relies on receiver/amp to have Bluetooth/WiFi compatibility

File the Pyle 3-way Mini Box Speaker System under “good things in small packages.” For about $30, this pair of small speakers features are marine-grade, so they can be mounted outdoors on the patio, near a pool, or on a boat without worrying about splishes or splashes. The speaker system is waterproof with stain and corrosion-resistant mesh fronts. These little guys come with removable mounting and can be attached horizontally or vertically. They’ll deliver good sound for the price, but people who want to flood a large yard with tunes may want to look elsewhere. However, this could be a pro depending on whether your neighbors like to lodge complaints. A few users also suggest ditching the included but thin speaker wire for an upgraded one.

Want the best value on something really whimsical? You can hang a 2-pack of the pohopa 20W lantern-shaped waterproof Bluetooth speakers with built-in LED color lights for less than $175.

What to consider when buying outdoor speakers

We love making the great outdoors greater by adding music. As you shop for outdoor speakers, start by thinking about the size and shape of the space you want to fill, what elements the speakers will operate in, and your price point.

Weather resistance

If you’ve ever mistaken water-resistant hiking boots for waterproof ones, you’ll understand the difference between weatherproof and waterproof. Water-resistant boots are good for the occasional puddle or light rain, but crossing a stream will quickly lead to soaked feet. Weatherproof and waterproof speakers are similar. All of the selections in our list have weatherproofing—resistance to elements and more durable, sealed housing—but truly waterproof speakers come with an IP rating. Generally, manufacturers recommend finding spots to mount outdoor speakers that have some protection from the elements, like under an awning or a covered patio. For more extreme climates, like beaches and deserts, look for additional information about how speakers deal with salt air and sand. So, can you leave outdoor speakers in the rain? Many of them, yes. But look at those ratings to be sure.

Installation options

Do outdoor speakers require amplification? It depends. Portable outdoor Bluetooth speakers are best for setting up a sound system without installing amps or anything else. However, more permanent options will require patience and expertise running speaker wires between the outdoor speakers and the indoor A/V components (and sometimes drilling a hole through a wall). The upside is higher sound quality and a wider source selection.

The size and layout of the outdoor space will also dictate some system features. Many systems include wall mounts that allow for adjustable angles, though a space with no walls may need speakers that can go on the ground or on stakes. Little spaces, like a condo patio, don’t need as many watts as trying to turn a large yard into the daytime version of your favorite club.

FAQs

Q: Which speaker is best for the outdoors?

What speaker is best for your space depends on the size of your space and mounting possibilities. A full concert sound in a vast backyard will require a system with more watts and multiple speakers working together. Frequent pool partiers should prioritize waterproof speakers, while someone with an aversion to wiring should stick to Bluetooth speakers.

Q: Can these speakers be connected wirelessly?

It depends on the speaker. While there are some wireless outdoor speakers, most outdoor speaker systems are passive, just pushing out the sounds of an external amplifier. If you want to connect outdoor speakers to a streaming platform, you must ensure the amplifier has that capability or connect a compact streamer to the AVR.

Q: Can I recreate the same great sound I have inside when I’m outside?

Probably not without a lot of effort. Outdoor speakers contend with more ambient noise—traffic, dogs barking, neighbors, possibly airplanes flying over—and then they have to be durable on top of that. While an indoor system prioritizes sound quality, an outdoor speaker makes some sonic tradeoffs to enhance durability and weatherproofing. Plus, there’s just the reality that a closed room allows you to have an optimized environment and seating arrangement in front of your stereo turntable setup, lets you add in components such as subwoofers to compensate for and reinforce specific frequencies, and just isn’t as diffuse as being outdoors, so can produce more clarity at lower decibels. But that doesn’t mean you can’t get good sound for a good time.

Q: How much do outdoor speakers cost?

This depends on their size and components. Our recommendations range in price between $30 and $1,800.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor speakers

Elevate your outdoor experience by turning it into a concert-in-waiting. Investing a little extra effort into installing outdoor speakers on your porch, patio, or garden offers a higher sound quality while setting a vibe. For durable, traditional aesthetics, consider the refined audio performance of the Definitive Technology AW6500 Outdoor Speaker or the budget-friendly Pyle 3-way Mini Box Speaker System. The Klipsch AWR-650-SM adds a touch of whimsy by disguising itself as a rock, seamlessly blending into its natural surroundings. For larger landscapes or irregular spaces, the Furrion Aurora 4.1 Veranda Series delivers harmonious melodies that resonate far and wide. If portability is a priority, the Soundboks 4 cranks up the volume for dynamic live performances, while the Ultimate Ears EPICBOOM Portable Wireless Bluetooth Speaker ensures your outdoor gatherings stay waterproof and musically vibrant. Unleash the potential of your outdoor oasis by dragging out a packed cooler and entertaining surrounded by speakers that make every note count.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor speakers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off https://www.popsci.com/gear/solar-generator-deals-anker-jackery-amazon-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 20 Nov 2023 21:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590790
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Some of the best solar generators on the market are currently at their cheapest prices ever for Black Friday at Amazon.

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A solar generator is a sizable investment, but can really save you in a pinch. These portable power stations store enough juice in their built-in batteries to keep your devices, appliances, and anything else that requires electricity going when the grid isn’t an option. Cyber Monday has brought some of the deepest discounts we’ve ever seen on brands like Bluetti, Jackery, Anker, and Ecoflow, so we’ve collected the best Black Friday deals on solar generators we’ve seen so far.

Anker SOLIX C1000 Portable Power Station, 1800W Solar Generator $649 (was $999)

Anker

SEE IT

This is Anker’s newest portable power station, and it’s cheaper than we’ve ever seen it for Black Friday. The super-fast battery charges to 100 percent from zero in just under an hour so that it can be ready on short notice. It offers six full-sized outlets (with ground), two USB-C ports, and two USB-A ports for powering devices. That’s more than you’ll find on many similar models. Plus, the internal battery has enough juice to charge an iPhone nearly 100 times or keep a camp light going for up to 60 hours.

Jackery solar generator deals

Ecoflow solar generator deals

Bluetti solar generator deals

Ugreen solar generator deals

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers https://www.popsci.com/gear/jbl-sony-bose-bluetooth-speaker-amazon-deal-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592368
The best Bluetooth speaker Cyber Monday deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These deals include speakers of every size and shape to deliver beats at prices you can't beat

The post The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best Bluetooth speaker Cyber Monday deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cyber Monday is officially here, and you can save big on everything from smart home tech and soundbars to sought-after Bluetooth speakers—essential for anyone who wants to listen to music with friends and family this holiday season. Many of the deals we’ve found are discounts on Bluetooth speakers that have found themselves in our buyer’s guides. If your current Bluetooth speaker is on the fritz, or you’d like to treat yourself (or someone you know) to an audio upgrade they can appreciate on the go (or with a wireless turntable), don’t miss these limited-time deals.

Sony SRS-XE200 $97.95 (Was $129.99)

Sony

SEE IT

Sony SRS-XE200 is an excellent mid-sized Bluetooth speaker whose Cyber Monday discount brings it down to its lowest price ever. The speaker has a pair of drivers and passive radiators for well-balanced sound, a battery that lasts up to 16 hours per charge, and an IP67 durability rating, which means it’s dustproof and can be completely submerged under water. The SRS-XE200 can also take advantage of Sony’s Wireless Party Connect feature, allowing you to sync up to 100 speakers. A built-in strap makes the speaker easy to carry or hang outdoors. This Bluetooth speaker even has a microphone, so you can use it as a speakerphone.

Sony Bluetooth speaker deals

Sonos Bluetooth speaker deals

JBL Bluetooth speaker deals

Bose Bluetooth speaker deals

Ultimate Ears Bluetooth speaker deals

Bang & Olufsen Bluetooth speaker deals

Marshall Bluetooth speaker deals

TREBLAB Bluetooth speaker deals

Tribit Bluetooth speaker deals

Soundcore Bluetooth speaker deals

The post The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/govee-smart-lights-amazon-deal-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 11:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592187
Govee smart LED strip lights lit up in different colors with the control app in the foreground
Govee

Govee smart lights add tons of illumination options to the inside and outside of your home. They're all on sale for Cyber Monday at Amazon.

The post Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Govee smart LED strip lights lit up in different colors with the control app in the foreground
Govee

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Holiday lights are fun, but keeping them up all year round can bring about the judgy comments from friends and visitors. Govee smart lights, however, allow you to keep festive illumination around your space all year with no fear of judgment. They make everything from behind-the-TV lights to improve your binge-watching experience to outdoor illumination and simple LED light strips. Right now, Amazon has Govee smart lights up to 44 percent off for Cyber Monday. Fight off those winter blues with some saucy red lights.

Govee Smart Outdoor String Lights $57 (was $99)

Govee

SEE IT

This ample kit gets you 96 total feet of RGB bulbs that you can program to show up to 16 million colors in 47 different program modes. So, decorate the outside space at your home for the holidays with red and green bulbs. Then, once the holidays are over, switch them over to white (or whatever color you want). They’re IP65-rated against the elements, so you can leave them up in the weather without worrying about them. This is a great, easy, and now affordable way to upgrade your outdoor space.

More Govee smart lighting deals

The post Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-solar-generator-amazon-deals-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 10:28:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592145
Jackery 2000 plus solar generator sitting on a paved driveway
Stan Horaczek

Whether you need a small portable power station or a massive solar generator, these Cyber Monday deals on Jackery products will save lots of cash.

The post These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery 2000 plus solar generator sitting on a paved driveway
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We’re huge fans of solar generators around here. Yes, they’re an investment, but they can really come in handy when the power goes out or you head out into the wilderness. Jackery regularly tops our lists of the best solar generators and portable power stations because the company builds sturdy, powerful, reliable products that excel in our hands-on tests. Amazon has a bunch of fantastic Jackery deals for Cyber Monday right now, but they’ll only last as long as they’re in stock, so grab one to ensure your back-up power will last.

Jackery Explorer 1500 Pro Portable Power Station $899 (was $1,699)

Jackery

SEE IT

While Cyber Monday is notorious for fake deals that only offer a discount on jacked-up prices, that’s not the case here. This 1800W charger typically actually sells for more than $1,600, which makes this nearly half-off the regular price. It offers a total of eight outputs, including three typical outlets, two USB-A, two USB-C, and a 12V DC port for RV travelers. With this much power stored up, it can charge an iPhone more than 60 times. Plus, it can run a TV for up to 17 hours, and power all sorts of tools if you’re using it on a work site. It’s super-versatile and weighs less than 40 pounds, which makes it very easy to lug around thanks to the super-sturdy built-in handle.

More Jackery portable power station and solar generator deals

The post These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow pants for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-pants/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 21:05:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snow-pants/
A lineup of the best snow pants on a white background.
Amanda Reed

What’s the best way to combat winter weather? Buy the right gear.

The post The best snow pants for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best snow pants on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiing A person wearing an orange pair of Outdoor Research Men's Snowcrew pants Outdoor Research Men's Snowcrew Pants
SEE IT

These pants are maximally waterproof, so you can spend all day on the mountain without worrying whether or not you’ll stay dry.

Best for women A person wearing Stio women's snow pants in front of a tree with snow on the ground Stio Women's Doublecharge Insulated Pant
SEE IT

This design is both comfortable and stretchy for ample range of motion.

Best budget A person wearing Arctix Mens Snow Sports Cargo Pants on a plain background Arctix Men's Snow Sports Cargo Pants
SEE IT

ThermaTech insulation keeps you warm in temperatures as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit.

Snow pants are the ultimate winter weather accessory: They keep you warm, don’t encumber movement, and fit right on top of the clothes you’re already wearing (meaning, if you live in a snowy area, you’d be remiss not to own a pair). Whether you’re backcountry skiing, flying down the slopes on a snowboard, or walking the kids to school in a blizzard (uphill … both ways), insulated pants are the way to go to prepare for the inevitable frigid days. Owning the right winter gear can make the outdoors bearable in icy temperatures, so you don’t need to sit inside all season long. While you might be imagining the vibrantly colored snow gear popularized in the ’60s and ’70s, there have been some serious strides in snow pants design, with breathability, insulation, and style innovations. But that also means it’s easy to become overwhelmed with choice, and it’s often unclear which pair will be best for you. The best snow pants are designed with waterproofing and warmth and comfortable wandering in mind.

How we chose the best snow pants

The best snow pants should keep you warm with enough space to move around for action-packed activities (or just breaking out a snow blower or snow shovel). With that in mind, we looked at critical reviews, peer recommendations, performed user testing, and conducted heavy research to narrow down our options.

The best snow pants: Reviews & Recommendations

When it comes to finding the best pair of snow pants for you this winter, it’s important to consider a few specific factors: fit, versatility, breathability, and price. With those categories in mind, we’ve pinpointed the best snow pants for skiing, snowboarding, snowshoes, and various other outdoor activities available today.

Best overall: The North Face Freedom Snow Pants

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Breathable and waterproof, these insulated snow pants will keep you warm through snowball fights to shredding gnar.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-2XL
  • Inseam: Short (30″), Regular (32″), Long (34″)
  • Pockets: Hook and loop cargo pocket, zip hand pockets, side-entry zip pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Gaiters keep snow out of boots
  • Lots of storage
  • Breathable, waterproof fabric

Cons

  • The short inseam is long at 30 inches

With waterproof fabric and plenty of storage (and air vents), these North Face insulated snow pants are the perfect fit for any winter activity. Recycled insulated lining keeps you warm even if you fall in wet snow, and gaiters with tough elastic keep snow out of your boots and pant legs.

Best for skiing: Outdoor Research Men’s Snowcrew Pants

Outdoor Research

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Windproofing and seam taping mean you’ll stay warm as you zip down the mountain.

Specs

  • Size range: S-3XL
  • Inseam: 29.5 inches (short); 30 inches (regular); 33.5 inches (tall)
  • Pockets: Zip hand pockets
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Durable
  • Inner thigh vents for temperature control
  • Reinforced scuff guards

Cons

  • Zippers prone to snagging when closing pockets

Whether it’s a sunny winter’s day or the snow is coming down hard, these ski snow pants will get through a full day on the mountain, with no adjustments required. Waterproof fabric, combined with a breathable shell, makes them both reliable and comfortable. Stretch gaiters stop the snow from sneaking in, and reinforced scuff guards provide additional durability. A beacon pocket is designed specifically to include an avalanche beacon for peak safety. These pants prove you don’t have to sacrifice mobility and range of motion for style and durability.

Best for snowboarding: Burton Men’s Insulated Covert Ski/Snowboarding Pant

Burton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A “just right” fit and a jacket-to-pant attachment system keep snow out for more time outdoors.

Specs

  • Size range: 2XS-3XL
  • Inseam: 30.5-34.5 inches
  • Pockets: Zippered hand warmer pockets, zippered thigh pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Tapered seams
  • Not too tight, not too baggy
  • Vents for breathability

Cons

  • Waist runs small
  • Reviews note that the crotch is tight

These men’s snowboarding pants are not kidding around: created for those of us who like to leave it all on the field (or, more accurately, on the slopes), the Burton Men’s Insulated Covert Ski/Snowboarding Pant are meant to maximize performance, no matter the weather. They’re also designed to be more fitted and stylish for men who want to look fly while flying down the slopes. Breathable, mesh-lined fabric cut to provide an excellent fit makes for an unencumbered ride, while fully tapered seams keep the chill out.

Best for women: Stio Women’s Doublecharge Insulated Pant

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fitted, flexible, and GORE-TEX 2L insulation allows these pants to outlast every snow bro on the mountain.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-XL
  • Inseam: 32 inches
  • Pockets: Hand pockets, zippered cargo pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • No-snag inner thigh vents
  • Fitted and flexible
  • Snow-proof gaiters

Cons

  • Limited size range

These women’s snowboarding pants do everything the men’s pants do and then some. Toeing the line between fitted and flexible, they’re also waterproof and boast hidden inner thigh vents, articulated knees, and expandable snow-proof gaiters. Combined with the Smartwool Women’s Classic Thermal Merino Base Layer Bottom, these pants proved up to the task of keeping these legs warm even during a January jaunt in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. However, if you don’t like a low-waisted fit, these might not be the right pants for you.

Best for mountaineering: Arc’Teryx Alpha SV Men’s Bib

Arc’Teryx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You’ll be warm sans puff when you splurge on these sporty snow pants.

Specs

  • Size range: S-XL
  • Inseam: 31.5-33 inches
  • Pockets: Two zippered thigh pockets
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Made for severe weather conditions
  • Easy to move in
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Limited size range
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for something that’s built for hardcore outdoor activities like ice climbing and alpine exploring, there’s no better place to look than Arc’Teryx. The company’s Alpha SV Men’s Bib is made of durable GORE-TEX for extreme waterproofing and windproofing while maintaining breathability. Locking severe weather out without locking sweat in, the bib is built for climbing and alpine-focused systems with a warm base layer, which also means you won’t have to figure out how to get into a harness with your gear on. An articulated fit moves with you as you traverse up the mountain, removable knee pads provide impact protection, and an embedded RECCO reflector could aid in search and rescue if that movement is curtailed (our editor has an Alpha jacket he swears by, and while he really doesn’t want to get caught in an avalanche, he likes feeling prepared). It’s a splurge, but something for this level of technical performance is worth the dough.

Best ski bib: Stio Men’s Environ Bib

Stio

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This ski bib is machine washable and breathable, making your snow days less of a headache.

Specs

  • Size range: S-2XL
  • Inseam: 30-34 inches
  • Pockets: Zippered handwarmer pockets, zippered thigh pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Outseam vents
  • Moisture wicking
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

This high-waisted, suspender-snappin’ Stio bib works for snowboarding and skiing, so if you’re just dipping your toes into the world of bibs, this is a great place to start. Its high-tech fabric actually repels moisture for all-day warmth, and if you work up a sweat, outseam venting allow for extra breathability.

Best for kids: Arctix Kids Insulated Snow Bib Overalls

Arctix

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Reinforcements on ankles, scruff guards, and hems prevent wear and tear for seasons of use.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-XL
  • Inseam: 21-30
  • Pockets: Zippered hand warmer pocket
  • Waterproof: Water-resistant

Pros

  • Husky sizes included
  • Machine washable
  • Lightweight and low-bulk

Cons

  • Not completely waterproof

Kids are notorious for growing quickly and bulldozing through clothes. A range of sizes and inseams means there’s something that will fit your child, and its wallet-friendly price point means it won’t cost a fortune to replace. However, this affordable ski bib is reinforced on the ankles, scruff guards, and hems to prevent tears and rips. An O-ring helps hold important items like gloves and keys, and ThermaTech insulation keeps them warm sans bulk. A variety of colors means your kid can be the most stylish child on the ski lift.

Best budget: Arctix Men’s Snow Sports Cargo Pants

Arctix

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need to break the bank to find a quality pair of warm, durable snow pants.

Specs

  • Size range: S-4XL
  • Inseam: Short (30 inches), regular (32 inches), long (34 inches)
  • Pockets: Cargo pockets, zippered hand warmer pockets
  • Waterproof: Water-resistant

Pros

  • Wide size range
  • Machine washable
  • Adjustable waist

Cons

  • Not completely waterproof

Available in both men’s and women’s styles, these incredibly budget-friendly snow pants keep you warm in temperatures down to -20 degrees Fahrenheit, thanks to 85 grams of ThermaTech insulation. Articulated knees allow for the full range of motion, plus boot zippers and gaiters seal out snow.

What to consider when buying the best snow pants

At this point, you might wonder: Is there a difference between snow pants and ski pants? While both will work on the slopes, there are important differences when it comes to fit—namely, ski pants are more fitted, while snow pants are baggier, and thus allow for more movement. With that in mind, we’ve curated the best snow pants money can buy (and if you’re wondering what else to wear to keep warm, check out our guides to the best heated vests, best heated insoles, and best heated socks). Here’s what else to look for in your search for the best snow pants:

You’ll want a pair fit for backcountry skiing

When you’re shopping for snow pants, it’s important to take note of reputable, trustworthy brands, and that’s because they’ve done the work to establish a legacy of clothing design backed by research and reviews. Case in point: Outdoor Research, founded in 1981 by bonafide outdoorsman Ron Gregg. For this winter sport, you’ll want to prioritize protection, comfort, and durability, so that you can focus on skiing and rely on your snow gear sans stress.

What if you partake in more than one winter sport?

We get it: Not everyone is born on one side of the skiing versus snowboarding debate and, regardless, some people want to dip their toes in both sports (to which we say, the more, the merrier). Obviously, there is ideal winter gear for each sport, but that doesn’t mean that more versatile outdoor apparel doesn’t exist. On the contrary, there are plenty of brands that offer snow pants for the avid generalist—but, sometimes, that means you’ll be shelling out for the perfect pair.

How to measure your body for snow pants

It’s like finding the perfect pair of jeans: the waist and hip measurements are key, and when your performance depends, in part, on the shape and material of your gear, you want it all to fit just right.

When to consider a ski bib instead of snow pants

We know what you’re thinking: Are snow bibs actually better than snow pants? The answer is, of course, that everyone has their preference—and there is no end-all-be-all answer to this conundrum. So, if you’re feeling indecisive about this all-important gear decision, just know that you’re not alone. The basic difference is this: ski bibs are like overalls (they definitely won’t fall down, but they might hamper movement) while snow pants are, well, pants (they totally could fall down if they don’t fit correctly). You’ve likely tried on both types of garments in your lifetime, so use that prior knowledge to decide and leave the tags on until you’re sure. Et voila! Crisis averted.

Budget

You know as well as we do: not everyone wants to spend $500 on a pair of pants, even if they have the means to do so. Of course, like most purchases, you get what you pay for when it comes to winter clothing—and when you want a good deal, you might miss out on things like high-tech performance fabric, or extra features like thigh vents and hidden pockets. Luckily, that won’t really deter you on the slopes—but it could mean that some snow is able to sneak in, and your gear isn’t as waterproof as it could be. That said, it feels really good to save upwards of $300, right?

FAQs

Q: Is there a difference between snow pants and ski pants?

Ski pants are designed to have a snugger fit, though not snow leggings snug, while snow pants are looser and more flexible in sizing—meaning that for the former, you’ll want to find a pair that fits really well. No one wants to go down the mountain in too-tight pants.

Q: How much do snow pants cost?

Like most clothing made from technical fabric(s), snow pants generally cost in the $100-$200 range. There are budget options available for less than 100 bucks, however, that still offer insulation and durability.

Q: What are some other top ski brands to buy snow pants from?

While we listed quite a few brands above, you’ll see plenty more on the slopes. If you don’t find a perfect match from the likes of Patagonia, The North Face, or Arc’teryx, consider Helly Hansen, Flylow, Stio, or Fawk.

Q: Are snow bibs better than snow pants?

As we’ve already said, it all comes down to personal taste: do you prefer the flexibility of pants or the security of overalls? If you’ve got a jacket in mind, too, consider buying a matching set, where the top latches onto the bottoms. Or maybe you want more variety with the bib, which will fit under basically anything you wear up top. It’s up to you!

Q: Can you put snow pants in the washing machine?

Generally, yes. The washing instructions will most likely instruct you to wash them in cold water on the delicate cycle and hang dry. Double-check the laundry tag inside the pants or the manufacturer’s website for complete washing and drying instructions.

Q: What should I layer underneath my snow pants?

We recommend putting something thin and warm under your snow pants. That can be a merino wool base layer or your favorite pair of leggings. We’ve done both, and we prefer the wool base layer thanks to merino wool’s natural temperature-regulating properties.

Q: Should I choose insulated or uninsulated pants?

It depends on the temperature of the mountain. Our ethos is that it’s easier and more comfortable to vent your pants than to try and squeeze into your pants with an extra layer. Go for uninsulated if you’re using the pants for shoveling the driveway; reach for insulated if you’ve already bought your season-long ski pass and are waiting for the first fall of snow.

Q: How important is waterproofing for my snow pants?

How much do you like a soggy bum? In all seriousness, waterproofed pants mean rogue snow won’t get in your boots (thanks to the gaiters) and you’ll stay warm and comfortable as you go up and down the slopes. No one wants to cut their ski day short because they’re a sad, soppy mess from pants that are snowproofed.

Final thoughts on the best snow pants

Snow pants, like the best snow boots, are an essential piece of winter gear if you’re headed to the slopes, and they also come in handy around the neighborhood when a big storm hits (think: you’re sledding down the hill or walking the dog in 2 feet of snow, and you don’t want to get soaked). When you’re shopping for the best snow pants, it’s important to consider your options and figure out what features matter most to you, like fit or material. Find a pair that you love enough, and you might actually be sad to say goodbye to winter. You never know!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow pants for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best RV generators in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-rv-generators/ Fri, 17 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589748
The best RV Generators
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These highly portable, highly reliable generators will keep the juice flowing no matter where you roam.

The post The best RV generators in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best RV Generators
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator
SEE IT

Super portable, quiet, and durable with solid specs for most RVs, this offers pretty much everything you could want while camping.

Best portable Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000 Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000
SEE IT

Big expandable capacity, fast charging, and comparatively silent operation make it ideal for RVs.

Best budget GENMAX Portable Inverter Generator Genmax Portable Inverter Generator
SEE IT

Portable, decently powerful, and easy to use, it delivers a lot at a low cost.

RV generators have become increasingly essential as RVs themselves have become increasingly power-hungry. From larger TVs and refrigerators to more powerful air conditioners to an ever-expanding array of devices, today’s RVs use more electricity than ever, and a generator is the best way to meet that demand whether you’re heading off for a weekend jaunt or hitting the open road for many days or even weeks on end. But there are countless generators on the market, many of which are not well suited for RVs for one reason or another. To help navigate and narrow down the many options, below you’ll find tested recommendations for the best RV generators to suit a variety of situations.  

How we chose the best RV generators

I’ve spent some 40 years camping in just about every manner imaginable, and that has involved using dozens of combinations of RVs, van conversions, and portable power stations across a variety of scenarios. Accordingly, I know all too well which generators will suit which purposes and which aren’t up to the task in the first place. I’ve used this experience in testing home generators, power banks for camping, and other gear for publications like Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. In some cases, I looked to reviews from other experts, as well as real-world buyers on sites like Amazon, to verify that these picks truly are excellent generators for RVs.

The best RV generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Power generators can be essential to charging all the other electricity-hungry items you might take with you and your RV, like laptops, drones, ebikes, etc. The generators below represent a wide range of needs, formates, budgets, and power demands. As you’ll be transporting them, all are at least relatively portable, though some are more portable than others. Each, however, will deliver outstanding performance in a specific realm and certainly rank among the best RV generators in 2023.

Best overall: Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator

Honda

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs

Pros

  • Very portable
  • Very durable
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Very expensive

We named the Honda EU2200i Companion our best portable generator overall, and it tops our list here, too, because it offers pretty much everything you could want from an RV generator, albeit at a high price. Compact and clocking in just over 45 pounds, it’s about as easy to lug along camping as can be. It’s one of the quietest generators on the market, which is an essential consideration while enjoying the great outdoors. And it’s built with Honda’s famed craftsmanship, meaning it will last through many years of overland adventure.

True, its output isn’t the highest on the list. But its 1,800W running wattage is more than enough for most typical RV needs, providing plenty of juice for an AC, lighting, and a smattering of devices and small appliances. And thanks to its 30 amp receptacle, if you need a bit of added oomph, it can be chained to another generator and run in parallel. It’s also highly efficient, with its 1.1-gallon tank lasting between 3.2-8 hours depending on power demands. 

No other generator offers such a perfect balance of portability, performance, and durability. While you’re certainly paying for all this capability, this is the standard bearer for RV generator greatness. 

Best dual-fuel: Wen DF475T Dual-Fuel Generator

Wen

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: Gas – 4,750 peak / 3,800 running; Propane – 4,350 peak / 3,500 running
  • Power source: Gas or propane
  • Weight: 105.8 lbs.

Pros

  • Affordable dual fuel
  • Decent specs
  • Relatively portable

Cons

  • Still somewhat heavy

Dual-fuel generators running on both gas and propane are an excellent option for RVs as they can hook directly to your RV propane tank in a pinch (so don’t use it all for the grill). This is not only highly convenient, but propane runs a bit quieter and produces less emissions than gas, helping to preserve the natural setting. And the Wen DF475T is not only dual-fuel, it’s dual-fuel at a budget price, which is exceedingly hard to find. It also delivers solid specs. Its 3,500W running output is more than enough for just about any RV. 

While it’s just shy of 100-pound weight and isn’t exactly feather-light, it’s still reasonably movable, especially thanks to its sturdy handles and wheels. And for a generator this affordable, it scores surprisingly high in the lifespan category, with many owners reporting that theirs has held up through long and hard use.

Best portable: Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 7,200 peak / 3,600 running 
  • Power source: Solar or wall outlet
  • Weight: 115.7 lbs

Pros

  • Solid electrical performance
  • Lots of ports
  • Expandable capacity

Cons

  • Pricey

These days portable power stations are an increasingly popular alternative to loud, polluting gas generators, and the Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000 is among the most RV-ready around. With its massive 3,993Wh capacity, it will keep a full-sized fridge going for 51 hours, and its 3,600W output is plenty to power pretty much anything you could want to run in an RV, though an air conditioner would drain it fairly fast. However, add on between one and four of Goal Zero’s 4,000W expansion batteries, and its capacity becomes enormous. 

While it’s a bit heavy, it’s surprisingly movable thanks to a retractable handle and wheels that are hidden in the base. All in all, if you’re looking for a big, portable box of power, this is about as big yet portable as they come.

Best solar: Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus Solar Generator+Manual Transfer Switch

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 6,000 peak / 3,000 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall outlet
  • Weight: 140.36 lbs

Pros

  • Solid electrical performance
  • Very portable
  • Expandable

Cons

  • Deploying solar panels takes some trial and error

For a full solar array that delivers plenty of power while somehow still remaining extremely portable, check out the Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus. The full solar generator package includes not only the 2000 Plus power station itself, but also two 200W solar panels and a 2000Wh expansion battery—everything you need to keep your RV charged wherever the sun shines.

Its solid 4,000Wh capacity and 3,000W output are solid numbers for a solid generator, and thanks to its rapid recharge rate, it tops off fast over the course of a moderately to majorly sunny day. And while its weight might seem heavy when read off the page, keep in mind that its weight is distributed across four separate components, each of which is easy to lift. So it offers plenty of power in a plenty portable package.  

Best lightweight: Generac 7128 GP3500iO 3,500W Generator

Generac

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 3,500 peak / 3,000 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 74.3 lbs

Pros

  • Solid performance specs
  • Light for a full-sized generator
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Wheels would be a nice addition

Look far and wide, and you’ll be hard-pressed to find a generator that offers such great wattage output in such a lightweight package. While the Generac 7128 GP3500iO churns out a solid 3,000W—more than enough to power pretty much all and everything in an RV—it also weighs in at just over 74 pounds, which is light enough for a single person to carry. While wheels would boost movability a bit, it’s still very carriable, especially considering its specs.

It’s also considerably quieter than most generators of its wattage, producing roughly the same volume as a vacuum cleaner. And according to reviewers, it holds up strong under long hours and high power loads. In other words, it offers pretty much everything you could want from any generator, yet it’s lighter than the competition to boot.

Best budget: Genmax Portable Inverter Generator

GENMAX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,000 peak / 1,600 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 34 lbs

Pros

  • Good wattage for an RV
  • Very portable
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Limited plugs

It’s pretty difficult to find a well-built generator with the specs to power an RV for less than $400, but the Genmax Portable Inverter Generator delivers. Its 1,600W output is enough to keep all the essentials going in your RV, And if the need for more power does arise, it’s parallel ready for chaining to a second generator. 

At just 34 pounds, it’s also about as light as a generator can be. All told, if you’re searching for decent specs and great portability on a budget, look no further.

What to consider when shopping for the best RV generators

An RV generator is obviously an investment, but also in terms of your comfort and safety when you’re relying on it to keep the lights on. With this in mind, here are a few key considerations when choosing which is right for you.

Power output

If it’s not powerful enough to suit your needs, what’s the point? A generator’s “rated” or “running” wattage indicates how much it is capable of producing under normal conditions, with the “peak” or “surge” wattage indicating the extent to which it can max out in order to provide for the momentary usage spikes that occur when starting an appliance, power tool, or air conditioner. Be sure that these numbers will deliver on your power needs. 

With an RV generator, you generally need something that will produce a minimum of 1,500W to power the air conditioner plus a few other essentials, or the entire RV without the air conditioner. With that as your floor, you typically won’t need more than 3,500-4,000W unless you have a particularly power-thirsty RV.

Fuel type 

All of the generators on this list run on either gas, propane, or solar/electrical power. Gas is dependable and accessible but produces the most noise and emissions. A dual-fuel generator can also operate on propane, which is a bit quieter and produces slightly less emissions. Solar generators and power stations can be charged either by wall socket or solar panel, and while they are the eco-friendly, basically silent option, they can only be recharged if you have access to sun or electricity. 

Starter type

All of the gas generators on this list include both traditional recoil cord starters plus electric starters. The former is reliable under all circumstances but can be very physically demanding, while the latter is effortless but requires that you keep the starter battery charged. The solar and power station options are as easy as can be as they are essentially plug-and-play.

Operating noise

A major consideration when RVing—whether out in nature or in a crowded campground—involves noise. Gas is the loudest with propane running slightly quieter, while solar is the winner in terms of keeping the peace. The smaller the generator the less volume, and some brands have equipped their products with thick shielding to reduce noise, though they tend to cost a bit more. Consider how much noise is tolerable, then make compromises in power and price accordingly.

Plugs

While it’s always nice to have plenty of plug options on your generator, when it comes to RVs in particular, your main priority should be to find one with a 30 amp plug capable of powering your rig. All of the inclusions on this list feature 30A ports except for the Jackery and Genmax, which are, however, compatible with a 20A to 30A adapter.

FAQs

Q: How long can you run an RV generator continuously?

This depends on the fuel capacity and model specifications, but generally you can expect them to run anywhere between 6-16 hours. Be sure to adhere to all manufacturer recommendations, and never refill the fuel tank while the generator is running. 

Q: How often should you start an RV generator while in storage?

A well-maintained generator can be stored without much worry, but to ensure that fuel resting in the components doesn’t muck up the works, it’s a good idea to fire it up at least once a month. 

Q: Can a generator operate in the rain or snow?

Running a wet generator can pose risks to both you and the generator. Keep the generator out of the rain or snow, especially while running. Many brands offer covers to protect their products from the elements. 

Q: Can a generator operate in the rain or snow?

If your generator is getting unusually loud and struggling to keep up with the power demands, it’s likely that it is overloaded. This can cause damage to both the generator itself and the electronics it is powering. To avoid this, stay without your generator’s output capacity by prioritizing essential devices and appliances. 

Final thoughts on the best RV generators

A quality RV generator will be a great companion through many years of camping. Be sure to get one that suits your power needs, maintain it properly, and it can easily last for a decade or more. While there are a lot of great models out there, those we’ve recommended above are picks you can depend on. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best RV generators in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best water bottles for the gym in 2024, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-water-bottles-for-the-gym/ Fri, 17 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589682
A lineup of the best water bottles for the gym
Amanda Reed

Stay hydrated while working on your gains with these fun, colorful water bottles.

The post The best water bottles for the gym in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best water bottles for the gym
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A person holding a green and pink Owala FreeSip water bottle in front of a brick wall. Owala FreeSip Insulated Stainless Steel Water Bottle
SEE IT

Sip two ways with this stylish, colorful bottle.

Best tumbler A person standing against a brick wall holding a green Pelican Porter Pelican Hydration Pelican Porter
SEE IT

Water stays cold all day in this trendy cup.

Best budget A person holding three Nalgene water bottles and standing against a brick wall. Nalgene Sustain Tritan BPA-Free Water Bottle
SEE IT

A cheap classic that gets the job done.

A water bottle is a gym must-have. Cacti can survive on small amounts of water, sure, but you’re no succulent; you are a meaty flesh bag whose body is 60% H2O. If flowers wilt when they’re not watered, you surely will, too. Staying hydrated is incredibly important for all levels of activity, from a leisurely stroll on the treadmill to an intense leg day. Plus, you don’t need to hit up the water fountain for small, unsatisfactory sips (and potentially communal germs) when you have an entire receptacle filled with water from your house. Depending on your gym, the water fountain might have a low flow rate and a thin layer of lime build-up on the spout—both unideal and a little grody. Your best bet is to BYOGWB (Bring Your Own Gym Water Bottle) and hope the gym has a WFwaBF (Water Fountain with a Bottle Filler). The best water bottles for the gym crush thirst, just like how you crush your PRs, you *strong* meaty flesh bag.

How we chose the best water bottles for the gym

It is a joke in my household that Wednesdays are off-limits for social activities, as it’s Barre Wednesday: the one day I week that I travel to my Pure Barre location of choice and take an evening Classic class with my favorite instructor, Amanda. Instructor Amanda kicks my ass in a way that keeps Writer Amanda from biting her handlers in a fit of rage. (They would need a rabies shot series if she gets chomp in.)

I’ve Burpee’d my way through the occasional HIIT class, mastered the Stairmaster, and even tried Bikram yoga. And although the hot yoga was a one-time deal, an insulated water bottle was a constant companion in my journey to sweaty, definitely not-culty enlightenment.

I made a few criteria based on my own gym/workout class experience. Each bottle is at least 32 ounces because 16-24 ounces is simply insufficient water for a 45-minute cardio or strength workout. Each bottle needed to have a handle or carry loop for convenience. A built-in straw and a wide mouth were minor considerations since both are nice to have but not necessities. Many bottles made the brave journey to barre class for on-the-ground testing, but only a few made the final cut.

The best water bottles for the gym: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’re headed to the gym for your hot girl walk, or you lost your last trusty gym water bottle and need to bring in a new recruit, one of our con-sip-erations should make you feel like you’ve found gold at the bottom of the well.

Best overall: Owala FreeSip Insulated Stainless Steel Water Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Hand-wash cup; dishwasher safe-lif
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24 hours cold

Pros

  • Lightweight when filled
  • Spout doesn’t touch sweaty hands
  • Really fun to use

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

Like most products, I first heard of the Owala FreeSip water bottle on TikTok. Account after account raved about the bottle’s FreeSip spout, which lets you sip upright through a built-in straw or tilt it back for a classic swig. After testing it myself, I concluded it’s worth the hype.

The temperature retention is fabulous. Water stays cold all day, and ice cubes aren’t melted away after a few hours. The wide mouth easily accommodates a handful of ice cubes and makes cleaning seem like less of a chore. A push-to-open lid protects the spout from your own germy, sweaty hands, and the carrying loop doubles as a lock, so you don’t have accidental spills if you throw it into your gym bag like I do.

The FreeSip cap is the crown jewel of this canteen. The outer rim doesn’t hit your nose when swigging, and the cap doesn’t get in your face if you decide to take a long chug. I was also expecting a face full of water from the spout design, but the sip portion does not seem to affect the spout. The sip portion is seamless to drink out of—there’s no weird tugging like other sports bottles with straws. Using the bottle is just plain fun. The “click” of the lid opening and the design of the FreeSip spout tickle my brain in a way that makes me drink more water.

Although it’s not completely dishwasher safe—it’s recommended you hand-wash the bottle portion to maintain the finish—its inherent fun and ease of use easily outshines this minor downside.

Best for running: Nathan Quick Squeeze Insulated Water Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Double-wall insulated plastic
  • Dishwasher safe: No
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: Unknown

Pros

  • Ergonomic grip
  • Extra storage
  • No slip grip

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

If you prefer running on the indoor track instead of on a treadmill, a handheld running water bottle helps keep hydration at arm’s length—literally. This one from Nathan is made to fit ergonomically in your hand, and it’s easy to squeeze to get that sweet, sweet water out of the nozzle and into your thirsty gullet. Double-wall insulation keeps your water/electrolyte drink cool, and a zippered front pocket holds your smartphone, cards, keys, and a good-luck trinket. It’s not dishwasher-safe, which is a bummer considering all of the nooks and crannies in the lid.

Best tumbler: Pelican Hydration Pelican Porter

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 Stainless steel; copper lining
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 16 hours cold

Pros

  • Great temperature retention
  • Fits in car cup holders
  • Easy-to-hold handle

Cons

  • Not spill proof

Testing the Pelican Porter made me understand the Stanley Quencher hype. Although the Quencher is a great tumbler, the Pelican Porter edges it out. It will keep drinks cold for 16 hours, compared to the Quencher’s 11-hour chill rate. This longevity is thanks to a copper lining that works with double-wall vacuum insulation to prevent thermal loss. It’s not completely spill-proof—one accidental kick from a passerby will lead to a certain disaster—but a splash-resistant lid prevents any waterworks on the drive to the gym. You can sip from the strong Tritan plastic drinking straw or rotate the lid for some chug action, although I prefer the straw. Something primal and childlike awoke deep in me as soon as I grabbed the Pelican Porter’s handle. I hope it also makes you feel like a big hydrated adult baby.

Best insulated: Hydro Flask Wide Mouth Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24 hours cold

Pros

  • Lightweight when filled up
  • Moveable handle
  • Lid comes apart for easy cleaning

Cons

  • Dents easily

It’s a close race between the Hydro Flask Wide Mouth Bottle with Flex Straw Lid and the Yeti Rambler with Straw Lid for the title of best insulated water bottle for the gym. The Hydro Flask ranks superior thanks to its lid, which comes apart completely—no more moldy, nasty caps—and is dishwasher-safe. It’s also lightweight when filled up, and the moveable handle on the lid makes it better to carry from leg press to rowing machine to exercise bike, etc. It has a wide mouth to make it easy to clean and fill with ice, and the cap is leakproof when closed. A plastic ledge-like protrusion helps you flip the straw up without having to touch the mouthpiece, earning brownie points in the sanitary category. It is the water bottle I personally reach most for when I’m doing barre, since I can flip the straw up and carry it around while going from barre to floor to mat.

Best gallon water bottle: Yeti Gallon Jug

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24+ hours cold

Pros

  • Study handle
  • Clever lid to store spout cap
  • Double-wall vacuum insulation

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy when filled

If you’re a person who drinks a gallon of water a day, the Yeti Gallon Jug is one of the nicest gallon water bottles you can find. It will keep your water cold all day, even if the bottle has sat in your hot car. It’s made of durable stainless steel and features vacuum insulation so that it will keep liquids hot or cold for several hours. It also keeps your bottle from sweating, so gym floors are safe from condensation.

The Gallon Jug’s lid features a sturdy metal handle with soft grip padding. The lid also contains a neat magnetic design, so users can store the cap when the spout is open. You can also screw the entire lid off for easy cleaning and refills, although some reviews note it’s hard to remove because of the lid’s large diameter.

Like all Yeti’s other stainless steel bottles, the Gallon Jug is BPA-free and dishwasher safe. It weighs 4.5 pounds before putting water in it, or over 12 pounds full. This is not the weight you intend to lift while at the gym. Still, it is far and away the nicest water bottle of this size.

Best self-cleaning: LARQ Movement PureVis

LARQ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Bottle is dishwasher safe; cap it not
  • BPA free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: N/A

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Self-cleaning
  • Lightweight compared to other water bottles

Cons

  • Non-insulated
  • No wide mouth
  • Expensive

I tested and reviewed the insulated LARQ PureVis bottle and was impressed at its ability to keep water cold and make a noticeable difference in how it tasted after hitting it with the PureVis UV-C light. If the LARQ insulated PureVis bottle is the nerdy, well-read smartypants of the family, then the uninsulated PureVis Movement bottle is the sporty one who will get a scholarship playing D1 field hockey and eventually join the U.S. Olympic team. It’s called the Movement bottle since it’s uninsulated, making it even lighter than the insulated version. Both bottles use the same technology in the cap. Simply press a button to activate the PureVis tech, which eliminates 99% of bio-contaminants like E.coli. If you’re bad at remembering to drink water, the LARQ, unfortunately, doesn’t have a built-in water tracker or sip reminder. However, it automatically cleans itself every two hours, and one charge powers the bottle for a month, giving you at least two fewer things to think about.

Best budget: Nalgene Sustain Tritan BPA-Free Water Bottle

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Tritan plastic
  • Dishwasher safe: Top rack safe
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: N/A

Pros

  • Completely leakproof
  • No frills
  • Incredibly lightweight

Cons

  • Non-insulated
  • Wide mouth leads to a faceful of water

The Nalgene water bottle is a classic for a reason. Nalgene bottles have carried me from field hockey games to marching band practice when I was in high school, and they still have a place in my cupboard despite the objectively fancier options I have. They’re impact-resistant, leakproof, and are top-rack safe. Plus, Tritan plastic is BPA/BPS free if you’re cutting back on microplastics.

If you choose a wide-mouth Nalgene, I highly recommend getting an Easy Sipper. It’s a circular disk with a small hole that sits right inside the bottle to prevent getting a faceful of water when taking a sip. Although buying an accessory when you could buy a narrow-mouth bottle from the jump seems silly, wide-mouth bottles are easier to fill at bottle-filling stations. Being able to add ice is also a major perk. I’ve even filled mine and frozen them overnight so I’d have icy water after school. If you do that, just make sure to leave some room at the top since ice expands.

What to consider when buying the best water bottles for the gym

You may not need to drink 8 cups of water a day, but staying hydrated is a must while working out. Here is what you should keep in mind before adding to your water bottle collection:

Durability

Water bottles get dropped by sweaty hands, kicked by walkers deep in their favorite podcast and not paying attention, or fall over due to the mysterious forces of gravity.

Stainless steel can get dented and scratched, but it’s pretty resilient. Stainless steel can also handle sudden temperature changes. However, you should not freeze them since low freezer temperatures can damage the surface of the water bottle.

Tritan plastic water bottles are generally more scratch-resistant and won’t ding, but are by no means indestructible. Both materials are generally resistant to the wear and tear of everyday life.

Material

Speaking of material, you’ll want bottles made of stainless steel or Tritan plastic. You’ll want to skip glass entirely since broken shards and people lifting in their socks don’t mix.

Stainless steel water bottles are popular because they’re light and durable. They’re usually made from 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its 18% chromium and 8% nickel elemental composition. Many stainless steel bottles are vacuum-insulated to create a sealed buffer between the liquid in the container and the environment outside the bottle, which reduces conduction and keeps liquids cold for several hours. If you’re looking for even more thermal retention, consider a bottle with copper lining.

Reusable plastic water bottles give you a balance of durability and affordability. High-quality plastic bottles can be more resistant to superficial wear and tear and generally lack insulation.

When buying plastic, make sure to get a plastic water bottle that’s made from BPA-free Tritan plastic, which is light and ultra-durable. Some studies suggest that containers made from plastics with bisphenol A, or BPA, can seep into what’s stored in the container and cause adverse health effects.

FAQs

Q: How much water is healthy to consume per day?

You’ve probably heard “eight cups a day” as the default water consumption recommendation. However, it varies from person to person. Optimal water intake depends on environmental and personal factors like height, weight, activity level, and current temperature. Keep a bottle at your desk or side table and take a sip when you’re thirsty.

Q: What material keeps water cold the longest?

Vacuum-insulated stainless steel keeps water cold the longest. You can keep your cold drinks cold all day, and iced drinks can even stay cool for days.

Q: How often should I clean a water bottle for the gym?

You should clean them often. The frequency ranges from once a day to a few times a week. If your bottle is filled with an electrolyte drink, stick to washing it every day. Bottles filled with plain ole water don’t need as much maintenance. However, since gyms are prone to germs, we recommend more frequent cleaning (at least five times a week).

Final thoughts on the best water bottles for the gym

You can bring any water bottle into the gym, but why not bring one that inspires you and #sparksjoy? Find one in your favorite color with handy features like a carry loop, vacuum insulation, and a touch-free cap for more sanitary sipping. The most important thing is making sure to stay hydrated while pumping iron, putting in rounds with the heavy bag, etc. You should sip some water from your new bottle and get some reps in.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best water bottles for the gym in 2024, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best action cameras in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-action-cameras/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587877
Four of the best action cameras are sliced together.
Abby Ferguson

Whether you’re shooting down the slopes or catching a wave, an action camera can record the most exciting moments.

The post The best action cameras in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best action cameras are sliced together.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The GoPro Hero 12 Black action camera is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. GoPro Hero 12 Black
SEE IT

The Hero 12 offers class-leading stabilization with exceptional video quality and durability.

Best for vlogging The DJI Osmo Action 4 action camera is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. DJI Osmo Action 4
SEE IT

The Osmo Action 4 offers excellent low-light performance and dual touchscreens for easy use.

Best for 360-degree video The camera, selfie stick, lens cover, and memory card from the Insta360 X3 Get-Set Kit are displayed against a white background with a grey gradient. Insta360 X3
SEE IT

The Insta360 X3 provides immersive 360-degree footage of your adventures.

Action cameras are a high-speed ticket to capturing the most immersive and engaging footage possible. They bring viewers as close to your experiences as they can be without actually being there. These video cameras excel in environments where stability and durability are key to attaining the highest caliber of footage, so they are popular amongst surfers, bikers, climbers, and other athletes. Plus, vloggers, video production teams, and hobbyists of all kinds can benefit from the compact and easy-to-handle design. From travel photography to underwater photography, the best action cameras provide a totally unparalleled video production experience to users of every interest and passion.

How we chose the best action cameras

Some writers and editors at Popular Science are also writers and editors at Popular Photography and have decades of experience with just about every camera brand and genre out there, including action cameras. As an adventure-lover and active individual, I have found myself in my fair share of situations ideal for action cameras. We chose the cameras included here through a mix of hands-on experience, user and editorial reviews, and brand knowledge. 

When selecting the best action cameras, we focused on a variety of features and specifications. They should foremost be compact and offer easy mounting solutions, making them easy to use without obstructing the action. Action cameras should also be durable and able to withstand epic adventures, including water trips. Lastly, we looked at video and photo quality, stabilization, and other camera-specific features. 

The best action cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether climbing, mountain biking, surfing, or simply wanting to document your travels, these action cameras will help you capture your best (or sometimes worst) moments. 

Best overall: GoPro Hero 12 Black

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.3K at 60 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 2.7K
  • Photo resolution: 27 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.8 x 2 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 5.4 ounces

Pros

  • Improved photo performance
  • Longer run times with the Enduro battery
  • Award-winning stabilization
  • Vertical video support

Cons

  • Not much of an upgrade over the Hero 11
  • Low-light performance is still mediocre

The GoPro Hero 12 Black is among the most well-known models of action cameras thanks to its durable and full-featured reputation. This latest model features the same sensor as the Hero 11, which is the largest sensor in a GoPro yet. The large sensor makes it possible to crop video to vertical orientation without losing out on most of the scene so that you can share your epic adventures on social media. And it allows you to change digital lenses for different perspectives. 

The camera specs of the Hero 12 remain largely the same as the Hero 11. It’s capable of stunning 5.3K video recording at up to 60 fps, though now you can record HDR video at this highest quality. Or, you can get up to 240 fps at 2.7k if you want dramatic slow-motion. The photo quality remains at 27 megapixels, and you’ll still have access to time-lapse and night modes, including star trails and light painting.

What is new is the Bluetooth audio connectivity options. Now you can connect a wireless mic for better audio quality. Or you can connect wireless headphones to monitor audio levels and help with voice commands in noisy settings. The Hero 12 also offers improved battery life, which was a pain point in past versions. Combined with the Enduro battery, you can get twice the battery life of the Hero 11. That means you can record continuous 5.3K 60p video for up to 70 minutes. And a standard tripod thread on the underside of the camera opens up mounting possibilities even more.

GoPro improved its already impressive stabilization in the Hero 12 with HyperSmooth 6.0. Even videos of the most rugged activities will be smooth. The new AutoBoost option will automatically reduce cropping, keeping your framing as you saw it while shooting. It’s waterproof to 33 feet without a case, and GoPro built it with improved cold weather performance, so you can use it for capturing your winter sports. The Hero 11 is a well-rounded, impressive action camera ready for anything you throw at it. 

Best for vlogging: DJI Osmo Action 4

DJI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 4K at 120 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 1080p
  • Photo resolution: 10 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 59 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.8 x 1.7 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 5.1 ounces

Pros

  • Image quality has been improved
  • Waterproof down to 52 feet
  • Front and rear touchscreen
  • High-capacity battery for long recording sessions

Cons

  • Video quality tops out at 4K
  • Limited photo quality

DJI built plenty of upgrades into the fourth iteration of its action camera, and it is ready for seriously epic adventures. It’s waterproof down to 59 feet without special housing and features a color temperature sensor to automatically adjust the color of your video even if you are deep below the surface while scuba diving. Should you want to go even deeper, with a waterproof case, the camera can go to 210 feet. 

For activities on land, the camera can function as cold as -4 degrees Fahrenheit. You’ll be able to document even your freezing-cold ski trips. It utilizes a unique magnetic quick-release plate that is convenient and easy to use. And you can mount the camera vertically, meaning no cropping is required in order to create social-media-ready video. For vloggers, the live stream support at multiple resolutions is a huge benefit. 

The DJI Osmo Action 4 is capable of image-stabilized 4K video up to 120 fps. DJI claims that there are no recording limits other than the promised 2.6-hour battery life when recording 4K 60p video, so long, single takes are possible. It offers the equivalent of an 11mm full-frame lens, so you can catch all of the action. The RockSteady stabilization does a great job of smoothing out video. And the HorizonSteady mode keeps your shots level and adjusts for any horizontal rotation. Unfortunately, photo resolution is limited to 10 megapixels, but if your focus is vlogging, that likely won’t matter as much anyway.

Best for 360-degree video: Insta360 X3

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.7K 360-degree, 4K single-lens
  • Max framerate: 60 fps at 4K
  • Photo resolution: 72-megapixel 360-degree, 18-megapixel single-lens
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 1.8 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 6.3 ounces

Pros

  • Impressive stabilization
  • 360-degree video is highly immersive
  • Lots of editing options
  • Excellent photo and video quality

Cons

  • App is a little confusing to use

If you want truly immersive videos of your action adventures, you can’t beat the Insta360 X3. This camera can record 360-degree video at up to 5.7K and 30 fps. Then, you can use either the Insta360 mobile or desktop apps to edit your video and reframe your shots how you want to showcase the best parts of each moment or show off the full 360-degree view at once. 

This action camera is highly versatile, thanks to the ability to use a single lens along with the dual lenses used for recording 360-degree video. You can either record selfie content with the rear lens or show off what’s in front of you with the front-facing lens. And it features a handful of shooting modes, such as up to 8K 360-degree timelapse and 4K slow-motion. The 2.29-inch touchscreen makes it easy to adjust settings and see what you are recording. 

The X3 is a durable camera and is waterproof down to 33 feet without a separate housing. It features a 6-axis gyroscope and uses Insta360’s FlowState stabilization for smooth video, even with activities like mountain biking. And the Horizon Lock mode keeps the shot level even as you move and rotate. 

A man sits in a convertible on a track with a blue sky around him.
This is a 360 snapshot that I took from a 360-degree video of an autocross event. Abby Ferguson

Best small: GoPro Hero 11 Black Mini

GoPro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.3K at 60 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 2.7K
  • Photo resolution: 24.7 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.1 x 2 x 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 4.7 ounces

Pros

  • Tiny form factor is less intrusive 
  • Award-winning stabilization
  • Excellent video quality
  • Two mounting points

Cons

  • No display for framing
  • No dedicated photo mode

For those who are extra concerned about wind resistance and drag, the GoPro Hero 11 Black Mini is the way to go. This camera is 13 percent smaller than the Hero 11 Black, making it more suitable for mounting on a motorcycle helmet, surfboard, or airplane. It also features mounting feet on the bottom and back of the camera, opening up more options for how you mount it. 

Despite the smaller size, the Hero 11 Mini gets many of the same features and specs as its big brother. It uses the same larger sensor, allowing for vertical videos, and is still capable of 5.3K 60p video with class-leading stabilization. Unfortunately, there is no photo mode on the Mini version. Instead, you’ll have to rely on grabbing 24-megapixel stills from videos. 

Another difference between the Mini and regular-sized Hero 11 is the lack of a screen on the Mini. That means you’ll need to rely on the Quik app for camera setup and framing help, but it’s one less thing to break on the camera, which is nice. It also features a built-in battery, so you won’t be able to swap batteries out when one dies. But GoPro promises 73 minutes of battery life when recording 5.3K 30p, which is plenty for most situations. 

Best for beginners: Insta360 GO 3

Insta360

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 2.7K at 30 fps
  • Max framerate: 120 fps at 1080p
  • Photo resolution: 6.6 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 16 feet
  • Dimensions: ​​2.1 x 1 x 0.9 inches
  • Weight: 1.3 ounces

Pros

  • Stabilized video
  • Unique magnetic mounting options
  • Versatile modular design with the Action Pod
  • Tiny size is very convenient

Cons

  • Photos are only INSP or DNG
  • Built-in memory is limiting

If the GoPro Hero 11 Mini isn’t small enough for you, the Insta360 GO 3 is the smallest form factor that action cameras come in. It weighs just 1.3 ounces, which is light enough to put on your hat and barely notice. The tiny size makes it feasible to put in locations that you otherwise couldn’t. This modular camera utilizes a unique magnetic mounting system that is fast and simple to use. And it comes with a few different mountain devices right in the box to get you started, including a magnet pendant and Easy Clip for wearing the camera on your person. 

The GO 3 tops out at 2.7K 30p video, which is the main disadvantage of this camera. But if you just want to capture memories or share your action adventures on social media, 2.7K is more than enough. And there are no recording limits at that resolution, so you can record long takes. It also allows for 120fps when backing off the resolution to 1080p, offering up slow-motion footage. And you’ll have access to Insta360’s impressive stabilization for smooth video.

This tiny action camera is waterproof to 16 feet on its own. It comes with the new Action Pod, which, although it adds bulk, extends the battery life from 45 minutes to 170 minutes. It also adds a 2.2-inch flip touchscreen, which is very convenient and adds versatility to the camera. And it’s all very easy to use with simple controls and AI editing tools to take most of the work out of your hands. 

Best budget: AKASO Brave 7 LE

AKASO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 4K at 30 fps
  • Max framerate: 120 fps at 720p
  • Photo resolution: 20 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: IPX7, 131 feet with included case
  • Dimensions: ‎2.44 x 1.61 x 1.26 inches
  • Weight: 4.64 ounces

Pros

  • Comes with waterproof housing
  • Front and rear-facing screen 
  • Stabilization is fairly effective
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Photo and video quality are lacking
  • Image stabilization results in heavy crop

Most action cameras are quite expensive and come with extensive lists of features. Not everyone needs the latest and greatest camera, though. If you just want a durable, basic action camera to document your travels, the AKASO Brave 7 LE is a great choice. This isn’t the latest Akaso model (that would be the Brave 8), but the balance of features and price make it worth the purchase. The camera itself is IPX7 rated, but it comes with a case that makes it waterproof to 131 feet. The case also makes it more rugged and durable, allowing you to worry less about dings and falls. 

The Brave 7 LE is capable of 4K 30p video or 720p at 120 fps for slow motion. It offers 6-axis electronic stabilization, which is pretty good considering the price of the camera. It does result in a significant crop in your footage, though. For still photos, it can take up to 20-megapixel images. 

This budget action cam features a front and rear screen, which makes it easier to frame your shots no matter which way you point the camera.  It comes with two batteries, a remote, waterproof housing, and multifunction mounting kits, so you have everything you need to get recording right away. And it supports a WiFi connection, making transferring your photos and videos easier. 

Things to consider when looking for the best action cameras

The best action camera for your needs will depend on the nature of the filming environment and your ultimate use of the footage. Considering the size, waterproofing, video quality, and budget is essential whether you’re traveling, vlogging, or just starting out on your action camera journey.

Stabilization

One of the most important aspects of any action camera is how effective its image stabilization is. Action sports typically result in jarring movements, making footage unwatchable if it isn’t stabilized effectively. That said, if you’re primarily using an action camera for casual use on your travels, you may be able to get away with less stabilization than others. And you can make some adjustments in editing if you would like. But, if you are a mountain biker, trail runner, or recording any type of activity with lots of movement, you will want to look for a camera with the best possible stabilization. 

Mounting options

An action camera won’t do you much good if you can’t mount it in a way that enables you to actually record your activity without holding it. For example, you may want a way to mount the camera to a helmet or the end of a surfboard, which are two very different mounts. So, before purchasing a camera, be sure that the company makes a mount specifically for the activity you want to record.

Waterproofing and build-quality

Action cameras should be durable since they are meant to be used for, well, action. Most are ruggedly built and able to withstand lots of abuse. That said, depending on what type of sports or activities you plan on using the camera for, you may want to invest in more protection for the lens or camera as a whole. If so, be sure to check what accessories are available prior to purchasing. 

For those who want to take their camera underwater, knowing the waterproofing is key. Most cameras these days are waterproof to fairly deep without any additional case. For example, the GoPro can be submerged down to 33 feet. But if you want to use the camera for scuba diving, you’ll need to invest in a case to take it deeper than that. We always recommend purchasing waterproof housing directly from the company that made the camera to ensure proper fit, as you don’t want to risk the case flooding with water.

Photo and video quality 

What photo and video quality you need from your action camera depends on how you intend to use the footage. If you are just wanting the camera to document your travels and adventures for the sake of memories or maybe to share on social media, you don’t necessarily need 4K video quality. But, if you want to create YouTube videos of your content, or maybe even have grander plans than that, then you will want to go with the highest quality possible. 

Likewise, if you primarily want to record videos, you don’t necessarily need to pay attention to photo specs. But, if you want more flexibility, be sure to check what the camera can produce in terms of still photos as well.

Size

While all action cameras are compact, some are smaller than others. If you partake in sports or activities where drag and wind resistance is critical, such as surfing, motorcycle or automotive sports, or flying an airplane, the smaller the camera, the better. Smaller cameras also allow for more unique mounting opportunities, as they can be placed in locations that larger cameras cannot. Of course, there are usually sacrifices with smaller cameras, including lower video and photo quality and shorter battery life. It’s simply a matter of deciding what is most important to you.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose an action camera?

Most models of action cameras include similar features across different brands, but the key factors to consider are the intended environment of use, the resolution required, and the desired weight and size of the camera. When in doubt, a 4K camera with a highly durable casing should fare well in a large majority of situations.

Q: What is the best alternative to a GoPro?

The DJI Osmo Action 3 is one of the best alternatives to a GoPro, thanks to its durable construction and mounting flexibility. This class of action camera is set apart by being compatible with a large range of proprietary accessories, which enables them to excel in almost any environment.

Q: Can action cameras be used for photography?

Yes. Action cameras are used for photography all the time—the high-megapixel sensors that help an action camera excel at capturing high-resolution video are the same that allow units to take high-quality still photos. Many units include such a photography mode by default, but double-check before buying if it’s a must-have feature on your list.

Final thoughts on the best action cameras

The main traits found in all the best action cameras on the market are high resolution, high-speed video capture, and compact durability. Whether you’re looking for a camera for beginners, a waterproof camera, a vlogging camera, or some combination of all three, consider the main activities and the environment that you plan to film to help you make your final choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best action cameras in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best flashlights in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-flashlights/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587899
Four of the best flashlights on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Don’t get caught out in the dark without a flashlight that illuminates the way.

The post The best flashlights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best flashlights on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Fenix PD36R Tactical Flashlight, box, and batteries Fenix PD36R 1600 Lumen USB Rechargeable LED Tactical Flashlight
SEE IT

Rugged enough for outdoor use but still delivering ample brightness and surprisingly easy to handle, with a compact size of just 5.3 inches long and about an inch in diameter.

Best for worksites A green and black Greenworks 24V Cordless LED Flashlight outside at night on a table Greenworks 24V Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit
SEE IT

Powered by a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that provides up to 23 hours of light on a single charge and ergonomically designed, so it’s comfortable and convenient on a worksite no matter how long the job.

Brightest black Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight
SEE IT

A worthy choice if you’re looking for the brightest flashlights you can buy and are willing to pay for them.

Descending into a dark basement to flip a breaker or finding the keys you dropped in your car is a lot easier with the help of a flashlight. That little light in your smartphone isn’t bright enough, and you can save your phone’s battery for making phone calls, texting friends, and updating your Instagram. Gone are the days of large clunky flashlights with weak incandescent bulbs. Today’s models come with rechargeable batteries and bright LED lights capable of illuminating objects hundreds of feet away. Unlike the flashlights of yesteryear, modern flashlights are small enough to fit in your pocket and weigh next to nothing. The best flashlights will illuminate your search so you can choose the model that will light up the darkness when you need it.

How we chose the best flashlights

As an avid camper and one who lives in a rural area prone to power outages, I find myself traipsing around the dark quite often, so I know a thing or two about flashlights. I considered a few important criteria in researching more than a dozen flashlights for this article. Brightness, of course, is key.

However, I didn’t just consider flashlights with exceptional brightness. While a 1,000-plus lumen output is great when searching for a missing person or pet, it’s too bright for close-quarters use inside a house or tent. With that in mind, I chose models that offered multiple modes that would allow them to be used both indoors and outdoors. 

They should be able to endure a fair amount of abuse, so I chose models with rugged anodized aluminum construction and waterproof ratings. For rechargeable models that come equipped with batteries, I chose those with at least 3,000 mAh (milliamp per hour) batteries that can last for many hours on moderate light settings. While cost was not a major factor, I did include lights for those budget-conscious users, as well as expensive high-end models. 

The best flashlights: Reviews & Recommendations

For many people, your smartphone is the only flashlight you might think you need. But you should probably conserve phone battery if you’re in the kind of situation where you really need to use a flashlight (and you don’t want to drop that expensive phone trying to fish it out of your pocket in the dark, cracking the screen). From late-night dog walks to trips to the basement breaker when the electricity goes out, a flashlight can keep you seeing clearly. One of our choices should rescue you from stumbling over your own feet.

Best overall: Fenix PD36R 1600 Lumen USB Rechargeable LED Tactical Flashlight

Fenix

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 1,600
  • Dimensions: 5.33 inches in diameter and 1.04 inches long
  • Weight: 3 ounces

Pros

  • Ample 1,600 lumens of brightness
  • Rugged IP68 rating
  • Long run time

Cons

  • Expensive
  • May be overkill for some

Sure, the PD36 is one of the pricier flashlights on the market, but if you’re serious about having a good flashlight, it’s worth it. The PD36’s runtime is nothing short of phenomenal. Expect more than four days’ worth of battery life on a single charge at the light’s lowest setting, which is still a very usable 30 lumens. That means you can get hours and hours out of this flashlight before needing to charge it. We also like the fact that the flashlight is rechargeable via USB-C, which can add five hours of battery life to the flashlight with just 10 minutes of charge time.

There’s also a broad range of modes with the flashlight, ranging from its energy-saving 30-lumen mode all the way up to a headlight-like 1,600 lumens, which is bright enough to light up objects more than 900 feet away. While using the PD36R at max brightness will drain the battery fairly quickly, you can still get three hours at that level. 

The flashlight is also rugged enough for outdoor use, thanks to an IP68 rating that allows it to withstand being submerged in up to 6.5 feet of water for 30 minutes without suffering damage. Despite its ample brightness, it is still surprisingly easy to handle, with a compact size of just 5.3 inches long and about an inch in diameter.

Best for worksites: Greenworks 24V Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 200
  • Dimensions: ‎3.21 inches by 2.61 inches by 4.17 inches
  • Weight: 15.6 ounces

Pros

  • Provides up to 23 hours of power
  • Pivoting head adjusts to where you need light
  • Energy efficient
  • Ergonomically designed

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide bright light
  • Not waterproof

Low light is handy when fixing a tire or checking a fusebox—just enough to illuminate what you need across a wide field without being blinding. Greenworks’ Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit provides up to 200 lumens of light when needed. The 24-volt flashlight is powered by a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that provides up to 23 hours of light on a single charge. It’s also ergonomically designed, so it’s comfortable to hold when you’re on a worksite. On your off hours, this flashlight is also great for hiking.

Brightest: Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight

Olight

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 2,100
  • Dimensions: 1.5 inches in diameter by 5.9 inches long
  • Weight: 8.4 ounces

Pros

  • Can project up to 500 meters
  • Compact size and lightweight make it suitable for camping
  • Rugged waterproof construction

Cons

  • Minimum brightness of 300 lumens is high
  • Too bright for everyday use

With its 2,100-lumen output and ability to throw a beam 500 meters away, the Olight is probably overkill for most people not part of a search-and-rescue team. That said, the Warrior is a worthy choice if you’re looking for the brightest flashlights you can buy and are willing to pay for them. 

Despite that extraordinary brightness, the Olight manages to stay surprisingly compact. It measures just 1.5 inches in diameter at the business end and a hair under 6 inches long with a weight of fewer than 9 ounces. That small size, coupled with an IP68 rating, makes the Olight Warrior a worthy companion for hunting trips or backwoods camping adventures. 

Just keep in mind that all that brightness significantly strains the Warrior’s 5,000-mAh rechargeable battery. Don’t expect to get more than a couple of hours at 2,100 lumens. With a minimum brightness of 300 lumens, the Warrior is simply too bright for applications that require dimmer lighting, such as illuminating the inside of a tent or the area under a car hood. Regardless, keep this flashlight topped up with the best power banks.

Best EDC: Wuben Tactical EDC Flashlight

Wuben

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 1,200
  • Dimensions: 1.7 inches in diameter by 6.9 inches long
    Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Compact size suitable for carrying in a pocket
  • Anodized aluminum construction
  • Fast USB-C charging

Cons

  • Uses smaller capacity batteries than other flashlights
  • Easy to misplace

For a flashlight to qualify as an EDC (everyday-carry flashlight), it’s got to be compact enough to fit into a pocket comfortably. Measuring less than 5 inches long and just an inch in diameter, Wuben’s EDC option fits the mold. And for those whose pockets are occupied, it also comes with a lanyard and pocket clip.

Some EDC flashlights are compact but don’t produce enough brightness to make them worth carrying. Wuben has no problems in this department, producing an impressive 1,200 lumens despite its small size. It comes with five light modes, including four light levels, along with a strobe and SOS mode. We also like the USB-C charging port on this flashlight, which allows it to charge from zero to full power in less than an hour. A handy indicator lets you know when the battery drops below 15 percent. 

A flashlight banging around in a pants pocket or backpack all day long every day should be sturdy, and this one is, with its anodized aircraft-grade aluminum body and waterproof construction. 

Best pen: Streamlight Stylus Pro Pen Light

Streamlight

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 100
  • Dimensions: 0.6 inches in diameter by 5.3 inches long
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Compact size suitable for carrying in a pocket
  • Durable aluminum construction
  • Multiple color options

Cons

  • Expensive for a penlight
  • Not super high-power

Pen flashlights are built for convenience with a small profile that makes them easy to slide into a pants pocket or even a breast pocket on a button-down shirt. Though this design makes them convenient to carry, these flashlights usually put out wimpy brightness. That’s not the case with the Streamlight Stylus Pro. Despite having a diameter of about 1/2 inch and a total length of 5.3 inches—about the size of a marker—it produces 100 lumens. 

This small light is also surprisingly tough, thanks to its anodized aluminum housing and unbreakable polycarbonate lens. This construction makes the flashlight water-resistant and capable of absorbing impacts of up to 2 meters without taking damage. It also has a convenient tail cap switch that makes it easy to operate while pointing the flashlight at the subject. The Stylus Pro gets a respectable eight hours of battery life from its 2 AAA batteries and comes in six color options.

Best headlamp: BioLite HeadLamp 325

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: ‎325 Lumen
  • Dimensions: ‎2.05 x 1.97 x 8.27 inches
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Sits flat and is stable on the head
  • Charges via microUSB
  • Material is moisture-wicking

Cons

  • Hard to open the charger

If heavy headlamps make night hikes a headache, consider the BioLite HeadLamp 325, a lightweight light in the dark. It only weighs 1.7 ounces and doesn’t bounce around while running or doing a cartwheel. The headlamp charges via microUSB—an incredibly common charger you likely already have around the house. A rear reflective strip alerts those behind you that you’re there, and an articulating front bezel allows you to angle the light where you need it with just one hand. 

We recently took it on a trip to Arizona and were pleased with how its moisture-wicking fabric kept our forehead comfortable during nighttime jaunts to the bathroom or campfire. Plus, it laid flat to our heads—something we can’t say with other headlamps we’ve tried.

We named its beefier cousin, the BioLite HeadLamp 800 Pro, as the best headlamp for hiking. If you’re more of a casual wanderer or just need something to illuminate the way to take out the trash, the HeadLamp 325 packs a powerful, portable punch.

Best budget: ThruNite Archer LED Flashlight

ThruNite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 500
  • Dimensions: 1.7 inches in diameter by 6.9 inches long
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • More affordable than high-end tactical flashlights
  • Waterproof construction
  • Enough brightness for most needs

Cons

  • Does not use a rechargeable battery
  • Not ideal for professional use

When assessing flashlights, we tend to get hung up on lumens and battery life. The fact is most people don’t need a flashlight that approaches car headlight levels of brightness. The ThruNite Archer’s 500 lumens are enough to cast a beam of light the length of a football field or light up a small room, more than enough for most people’s needs. Three light levels, along with firefly mode and strobe, add versatility. And while you won’t be able to go off-grid for weeks and weeks with this flashlight, its max runtime of 15 days on two AA batteries suits most applications. 

In terms of construction, it’s compact at less than 7 inches long and 1.7 inches in diameter and weighs just 1.7 ounces. It’s also waterproof up to one meter and ruggedly constructed of anodized steel to resist impacts. Most importantly, the Archer is a quarter of the cost of other tactical flashlights, making it a great option for those looking for a more affordable option.

What to consider when buying the best flashlights

Here is what you should know before buying the best flashlights:

Brightness

Lumens measure how bright a flashlight is. The higher the number of lumens, the brighter the flashlight will be, although the shape of the reflector and lens will determine just how far that light will be cast. Flashlight brightness usually ranges from around 100 lumens for small penlights up to 2,000 or more lumens for the brightest flashlights. As few as 200 lumens is plenty of light for illuminating the dark space under a kitchen sink or even a fuse box, but you’ll need a minimum of 1,000 lumens if you want to illuminate large open spaces such as a campsite. 

Battery life

Whether your flashlight is rechargeable or takes disposable batteries, it won’t stay lit forever. At some point, you’ll need to recharge it or load new batteries. Battery capacity is measured in milliamp hours (mAh). A good mAh for batteries is 3,000, which is enough to keep the light running all night long. Some rechargeable batteries offer 5,000 mAh, which is ideal for higher-lumen flashlights that use more power.

Size

Flashlights come in a variety of sizes, but most measure around 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter. Smaller EDC (every day carry) flashlights are smaller, allowing the user to wear them on their person throughout the day. These flashlights are typically more compact than a standard tactical flashlight.

Weather protection

Since flashlights are often used outdoors, they need to have some protection from the elements. Flashlights come with an Ingress Protection (IP) rating, which indicates how impervious they are to dust and water. The IP rating is typically followed by two numbers, one that indicates its ability to resist water and the other its ability to resist dust. An IP rating of 68 indicates the flashlight is impervious to dust and can be submerged in water.

FAQs

Q: What brand of flashlight is best?

With a line of flashlights that are constructed from durable anodized aluminum and high-lumen output, Fenix makes some of the best flashlights you can buy. The company’s products range from basic flashlights to high-performance tactical models.

Q: What is the brightest LED flashlight available?

The brightest flashlight you can buy is the Imalent M18, which produces up to 100,000 lumens, which is enough to illuminate objects up to 1,350 meters away.

Q: What is the highest-rated flashlight?

One of the highest-rated flashlights you can buy is the Fenix PD36R, which produces 1,600 lumens and has a 5000mAh rechargeable battery that will last up to 100 hours.

Q: How bright is a 2,500-lumen flashlight?

A 2,500-lumen flashlight is very bright and capable of casting a beam several hundred meters long depending on the shape of the reflector and lens. This amount of brightness is more than enough to suit any outdoor application.

Q: What flashlights do the military use?

The military uses mainly tactical flashlights that produce a lot of lumens and have anodized aluminum construction that’s waterproof and resistant to impacts. Many military flashlights also have a red-light option, which creates visibility while allowing the operator to maintain their night vision.

Q: How many lumens should a good flashlight have?

The average flashlight puts out about 100 lumens, which is suitable mainly for in-home use. A tactical flashlight designed to improve visibility at night for hiking or search and rescue should produce 1,000 lumens.

Final thoughts on the best flashlights

Given the broad price differences in flashlights, it’s important to consider how you plan to use the light before shopping for one. If you need one to use around the house in the event of a power outage or popped breaker, then an affordable model that produces a few 100 lumens is adequate. Those planning to use a flashlight to illuminate the outdoors at night for camping, hiking, or hunting, should consider investing in a more expensive flashlight with an IP86 weather rating and at least a 1,000-lumen output.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best flashlights in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gifts-for-cyclists/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588094
Three rows of the best gifts for cyclists, with the Wahoo indoor trainer on top, followed by a Garmin bike light, and a Kryptonite bike lock.

Switching gears to holiday shopping and not sure what to get the cyclist in your life? Cruise through our spin on the best bike-centric gifts.

The post The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Three rows of the best gifts for cyclists, with the Wahoo indoor trainer on top, followed by a Garmin bike light, and a Kryptonite bike lock.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best bike computer A black Garmin Edge 1040 Solar GPS Bike Computer displaying the distance, time, route, and more of a bike ride. Garmin Edge 1040 Solar
SEE IT

This computer provides nutrition and hydration alerts, ride-specific maps, turn-by-turn directions,  group ride features, and more.

Best headphones A pair of Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones rest on their case on an end table. Shokz OpenRun Pro
SEE IT

These comfortable, lightweight headphones allow cyclists to stay aware of their surroundings while listening to their favorite tunes.

Best multi-tool A gray metal Multitool 19 device for cyclists. Crankbrothers M19 Multi-Tool
SEE IT

Lightweight and encased in durable aluminum, this gadget features 19 tools that should help cyclists fix all kinds of bike emergencies.

Whether the cyclist in your life commutes to work on a bike or trains for triathlons, having the right gear is important. But it can get expensive. In the United States, households collectively spent about $8 billion a month on bicycles and accessories, according to the U.S. Bureau of Transportation Statistics. In the interest of cutting down on waste and gear that never gets pulled out of the closet, we’ve rounded up the best devices and accessories available to help cyclists ride safely, track performance and health metrics, and still have fun. Here’s some of what your favorite cyclist might be hoping they get to unwrap before their next century.

Best bike computer: Garmin Edge 1040 Solar

Garmin

SEE IT

Even if the cyclist in your life isn’t focused on collecting data from their rides, a bike computer is still an important and worthwhile tool. The Edge 1040 provides nutrition and hydration alerts, a range of ride type-specific maps, turn-by-turn directions, incident detection, bike alarm functionality, and group ride features. It will help keep your rider safe, fueled up, and on course. The Garmin Edge 1040 also accurately tracks distance, provides training tools and recommendations, syncs training plans, and measures cycling dynamics. The large display is easy to see at a glance, and the solar display adds to the already impressive battery life that can last up to 45 hours in demanding use cases. If you like the idea of picking up a bike computer but want a more budget-friendly option, the Edge 530 is also a fantastic device.

Best power meter pedal: Garmin Rally RS100 or Rally RS200

Garmin

SEE IT

Power meters are a must if the cyclist in your life is data-obsessed or serious about their performance. These devices measure the force on the bike pedals using strain gauges and convert that to power, measured in watts. The Garmin Rally series provides extremely accurate data, and lots of it. It can provide insight into power, cadence, left and right balance, pedal smoothness, and time spent standing or sitting. The Rally is very easy to swap between pedal bodies using a conversion kit, making it the best choice for those who may have a bike for mountain biking and one for road rides. It pairs seamlessly with Garmin’s bike computers as well.

You can purchase a single pedal (RS100) to save some money or a dual-sensing version (RS200) for even more precise data. Also, Garmin makes different versions of the Rally that are compatible with different types of cleats. The RK line works with Look Keo cleats, the RS line is for Shimano SPD-SL cleats, and the XC line is made for Shimano SPD cleats. Functionally, they are all the same, but the cleat compatibility differs.

Best heart rate monitor: Polar H10 Heart Rate Monitor

Polar

SEE IT

The Polar H10 Heart Rate Monitor works with many different sports watches and fitness apps, including Garmin, Apple, Strava, and Nike. It can support iOS mobile devices with iOS 13 or later, BS Android mobile devices with Bluetooth 4.0 capability, and Android 7 or later. That versatility makes this chest strap one of the best heart rate monitors for cycling. But it excels as one of the best monitors for Peloton and cycling in general, as its accurate reader and comfortable fit don’t falter at high speeds thanks to silicone dots that help it stay firmly in place. — Andrew Waite

Best indoor trainer: Wahoo KICKR Smart Trainer V6

Wahoo

SEE IT

For most of us, there are, unfortunately, days when getting outside on the bike isn’t feasible. Whether it’s because of a gnarly ice storm or nonstop rain, riding inside can unlock new training opportunities. The Wahoo KICKR Smart Trainer V6 is among the best trainers, thanks to its accurate speed, distance, cadence, and power data. It’s easy to set up and provides a smooth, realistic, yet silent ride, so your cyclist can easily watch a movie during their ride without turning the volume way up. The built-in WiFi also makes this direct drive trainer stand out from the competition, as it allows for faster data transfer and easier firmware updates.

Best indoor bike with classes: Peloton Bike Plus Indoor Stationary Bike

Peloton

SEE IT

If the cyclist in your life is motivated by live instruction and competition, the Peloton Bike provides an unrivaled experience. Purchase of the bike and a $44 monthly membership provides access to thousands of classes, including live sessions, bike boot camps, boxing, and yoga. The 21.5-inch HD touchscreen lets you feel like you’re right in the studio, and the two stereo speakers help complete the immersive experience. With a 4-foot by 2-foot footprint, this bike can fit in a range of spaces. Peloton also tracks your heart rate, output, and cadence in real-time and you can measure your progress against other members.

Best electric bike: Ride1Up Rift

Ride1UP

SEE IT

Think your favorite cyclist would appreciate a new electric bike? Consider the Ride1UP Rift for those leisurely days when they want to stretch their legs, but their calves and quads need a little rest and recovery. Almost ready to go out of the box, it provides a stupendously smooth ride whether they’re upgrading from a different electric bicycle or have always ridden an analog bike. It strikes the right balance between easy assembly, ease of use, comfort, and overall design. Learn more about our picks for the best electric bikes. — Brandt Ranj

Best phone mount: Peak Design Out Front Bike Mount

Peak Design

SEE IT

The Out Front Bike Mount easily installs onto bike handlebars, putting the phone front and center at an optimal viewing angle. Your cyclist will be able to quickly see their maps or keep an eye on the time. The mount also flips up so that they can film their ride. They will need either the Mobile Universal Mount Adapter or a Peak Design phone case, as the bike mount utilizes the company’s magnetic locking system, called SlimLink. This magnetic system is ultra secure, so they won’t need to worry about their phone falling off when they hit some bumps on the road. And it makes their phone compatible with all sorts of other Peak Design accessories like the phone tripod, wallet, and more.

Best bike bag: Rapha Bar Bag

Rapha

SEE IT

Having a space to stow essentials like your phone, keys, and maybe a snack is important on a commute or long ride. Rapha’s sleek bike bag is made of waterproof polyester, so essentials will stay dry during an unexpected downpour. It provides a roomy 2 liters of space and comes with two durable straps cyclists can attach either to their handlebars or the frame. The buckles are quick-release, and once the rider arrives at their destination, this versatile bag easily converts into an over-the-shoulder bag.

Best multi-tool: Crankbrothers M19 Multi-Tool

Crankbrothers

SEE IT

A bike multi-tool is a must for every cyclist, both on rides and in a home tool kit. This Crankbrothers tool includes a range of hex wrenches, spoke wrenches, multiple screwdriver types, a t-25 drive, and a universal chain tool. All in all, there are 19 different tools in this one device. Whether you’re fixing your bike or adjusting your cleats, this multi-tool likely has the right option. Everything is encased in lightweight aluminum and only weighs 6.2 ounces. And the 3.5-inch length means that it will easily fit in a small saddle pack for rides.

Best headphones: Shokz OpenRun Pro

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Bone conduction headphones are great for cyclists because they allow you to hear your music and podcasts while still staying alert to the world around you. The Shokz OpenRun Pro headphones offer a secure, lightweight fit under your helmet that’s comfortable even for long rides. They produce clear, high-quality sound with plenty of volume, even when you’re near traffic. They also feature a mic so that you can call your cyclist when they are out. And the 10 hours of battery life will keep them from needing to charge their headphones constantly.

Best tail light: Garmin Varia RTL515

Garmin

SEE IT

A quality tail light is a crucial safety item for road cyclists, whether riding day or night. It alerts drivers to your presence long before they would otherwise see your bike. The Garmin Vari RTL515 is a bit of a splurge, but it is the best out there, thanks to the built-in radar. This light pairs with your phone, Garmin Edge bike computer, or other Garmin wearables and alerts you with both visual and audio queues that cars are approaching from up to 153 yards away. It’s super bright, providing daylight visibility up to one mile away. There are multiple modes, including a low-intensity light for group rides. And it offers up to 16 hours of battery life in day flash mode to last for your longest rides.

If you want the utmost safety for your rider, you can bundle the front light below with the Varia RTL515. Or, if the Garmin is too much of a splurge, the Bontrager Flare RT is also a great rear light with a budget-friendly price, albeit without the radar.

Best bike light: Garmin Varia UT 800 Smart Headlight

Garmin

SEE IT

When the days are shorter, your favorite cyclist is likely getting some miles in when it’s dark. A reliable bike light is essential for safety. Garmin’s Varia UT 800 Smart Headlight is visible up to a mile away. It provides 800 lumens of light for up to 1.5 hours—about the same amount as a traditional 60-watt incandescent bulb. Cyclists can switch between five light modes: high, medium, low, night flash, and day flash. This bike light can also sync with compatible Garmin Edge computers, which can detect the ambient light to control brightness. And it’s available in versions that attach either to the handlebars or to a helmet.

Best bike lock: Kryptonite Combo Bike U-Lock 

Kryptonite

SEE IT

As much fun as biking can be, theft is unfortunately common. More than 200,000 bikes are stolen in the United States each year, according to the FBI. That’s why a reliable bike lock is important. Kryptonite’s Combo Bike U-Lock is designed with a 12mm steel shackle that protects against wire cutters. The U shape makes it easy to attach the lock to a variety of locations, from bike racks to fences. It features a combination lock that you register with the company website, so you don’t have to worry about lost keys. And weighing in at just a pound, it’s lighter and more affordable than many of the other bike locks on the market.

Best bib shorts: Pearl Izumi Pro Bib Shorts

Pearl Izumi

SEE IT

A quality pair of bibs can make a surprising difference in the comfort of your bike ride. After trying numerous brands, Pearl Izumi’s bibs, including the Pro version, have firmly landed the spot as my favorite thanks to the material the company uses. It is incredibly soft, smooth, and stretchy, unlike anything from other brands. It breathes well and easily wicks away sweat, keeping me comfortable even on the hottest, most humid days. The seamless design means that there’s less chance of chafing even on long rides. And the chamois offers just enough padding in all the right places without being overly thick. They come in both men’s and women’s and are available in a handful of colors and designs.

Best water bottle: Camelbak Podium Chill

Camelbak

SEE IT

Most of us can’t have too many water bottles. They have a tendency to get scuffed and dented, start leaking, get lost, or stay filled up for far too long and start molding, needing replacement. However, weight has to be considered when it comes to a ride. The Camelbak Podium Chill is an insulated bottle that keeps drinks cool even on hot rides. It is designed to fit securely in most bottle cages and is easy to squeeze to get water out efficiently. The cap is self-sealing, so it won’t leak when it inevitably gets thrown in the backseat of the car. And it’s available in a range of colors, so you can pick something up that matches the color scheme of your cyclist’s bike.

The post The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-gravel-driveways/ Fri, 19 Aug 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=463653
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

Cut through the snow, not your driveway.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Honda Power Equipment HSS928AATD is the best overall snow blower for gravel driveways. Honda Power Equipment HSS724AAWD
SEE IT

With an easy electric start and adjustable auger height, this beast of a blower will carve a path through frozen precipitation in no time.

Best Electric EGO SNT2400 is the best electric snow blower for gravel driveways. EGO SNT2400
SEE IT

More eco-friendly, as well as noise pollution negligible, than gas-powered blowers, this electric option is still highly efficient.

Best for Long Driveways Ariens 30-inch snow blower for long driveways Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower
SEE IT

It can cut a 30-inch path through more than 18 inches of snow, which means fewer passes and shorter clearing times.

You might be avoiding snow blowers for gravel driveways because you’ve heard they’ll kick up rocks and damage your property. At the same time, shoveling out your entire driveway probably sounds like a horrid chore. The answer is a two-stage or three-stage snow blower, capable of skimming across the top of your driveway, removing the majority of snow while leaving your driveway intact. If you feel like picking the right machine for the job has you between a bunch of rocks and a hard place, we’ve made it easier with our list of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

How we selected the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Selecting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is a bit different than choosing the best snow blowers to use in a general sense. The main issue is that you cannot safely use a 1-stage snow blower on gravel driveways because they have no way to prevent rocks from making it out through the chute. Wheels and treads are another worthwhile consideration. In any event, we had to go beyond the top-rated snow blowers and look at each machine to make sure it would remove your snow and not the ground, without having to resort to snow shovels. We considered critical reviews and user impressions to help us narrow down our list to the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The best snow blowers for gravel driveways: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers are all adequate choices for gravel driveways. While the typical choice is going to be a gas-powered 2-stage snow blower, we’ve also got some variety for you. Within this list, you’ll be able to find anything you would want from the category, from heavy-duty snow blowers to the best electric snow blower. In the end, all of the following choices will make for a good snow blower for gravel driveway clearing.

Best overall: Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty snow blower by Honda has the power to get big jobs done.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: Fits in 60 x 44 x 30 inches pre-assembly
  • Weight: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Easy electric start
  • Adjustable auger height
  • Clears 24-inches wide
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

The top of our list belongs to Honda Power Equipment for its sheer power. This beast of a machine can handle 1,500 pounds of snow a minute, with a 24-inch wide clearing opening. Keeping on your gravel driveway should be relatively easy with the tank-like treads on the back two wheels. Be sure to install skid shoes on the bottom of the front section to give your snow blower some lift, but also be aware that the height of the Honda Power Equipment’s auger (the part that gets rid of the snow) is adjustable.

You can also take advantage of the offered expert assembly, which will be especially useful since the Honda Power Equipment snow blower weighs over 220 pounds. The weight, alongside the hefty cost, is going to turn some heads, but the overall efficacy of the Honda Power Equipment and advanced height adjustment earns it its slot at the top of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

Best electric: EGO SNT2400

EGO Power+

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The EGO SNT2400 is one of the few fully electric stage-2 snow blowers that can compete with a gas-powered snow blower.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stages
  • Size: 49 x 26 x 45 inches
  • Weight: 154.7 pounds

Pros

  • Much quieter than gas-powered models
  • Headlights
  • Eco friendly
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • No provided batteries/charger

Our best electric snow blower for gravel driveways comes in the form of the EGO SNT2400. This product really outshines its gas-powered competitors in that it isn’t churning out noxious fumes into the air while also staying quiet in the mornings to not wake up the kids and neighbors.

The EGO SNT2400 uses arc lithium batteries to deliver the power of gas without all of the environmental downsides. The batteries also give you the chance for a completely electric but also cordless snow blower-for-gravel-driveways experience.

Unfortunately, the EGO SNT2400 does not come with the batteries and charger. This does, however, give you some choice and flexibility in what you’re getting, as well as save you some money if you’re an electric fan that already has the needed batteries for other EGO Outdoor Power Equipment. For this model, EGO recommends using two of the 56V ARC Lithium batteries, with the 7.5 Ah model being able to clear an 18-car driveway in a single charge.

Best 3-stage: CRAFTSMAN SB650 28-in Three-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The extra turbo mode kicks when when you have to chop through super-heavy snow or ice.

Specs

  • Stages: 3-stage
  • Size: 53 x 28 x 43 inches
  • Weight: 283 pounds

Pros

  • Extra power when you need it
  • Extremely burly wheels
  • Self-propulsion
  • 357cc engine
  • Six forward speeds and two reverse speeds

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When things get rough, such as when you get refrozen snow regularly, it becomes time for a 3-stage snow blower. These hardy snow blowers have an accelerator that pushes through into the heaviest and wettest of snows, giving you the power to get the job done. This 357cc model is one of the most powerful currently available.

It cuts a 28-inch swath through the accumulated snow up to 18-inches hight. That means you can wait until the storm is over (most of the time) and then quickly clear the driveway all in one shot instead of having to do multiple passes. The self-propulsion system offers six forward speeds and two reverse speeds. You’ll need that help from the self-propulsion system since this blower weighs in at a very hefty 283 pounds.

It can throw snow for up to 30 feet and the versatile blade design makes it right at home on paved surfaces or un-paved surfaces. That’s great if you’re clearing a big property with mixed terrain.

If you typically just get fluffy snow that blows around in the wind, then this model might be overkill. But, if you get heavy, icy snow that tends to choke your regular blower, than this is absolutely worth the upgrade.

Best for long driveways: Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Ariens

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You want two things when clearing a long driveway: a wide clearing area and self-propulsion. This has both.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 58 x 32 x 45
  • Weight: 275 pounds

Pros

  • Super-wide 30-inch clearing area
  • Powerful engine
  • Long throw
  • Self-propulsion
  • Push-button electric start

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When you have a long driveway, you want to clear as much snow as possible with each pass. This powerful snow mover cuts a 30-inch wide path through the accumulation. That drastically cuts down on how long it takes to cover a large area. It’s also capable of chewing through up to 18 inches of snow, so no need to go out and do multiple sessions.

This machine offers variable-speed self-propulsion, which is all-but-mandatory since it weighs a very hefty 275 pounds. Still, it’s relatively easy to maneuver thanks to the powerful self-drive mechanism and burly back tires. The auger can throw snow up to 50 feet, so it’s good for wide driveways as well. Plus, the chute rotates up to 200 degrees so you can be surgical when it comes to placing the blown snow. This is a beast of a machine, but if you have a long driveway, it can drastically decrease time spent clearing snow.

Best budget: PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc

PowerSmart

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: PowerSmart has provided us with a fully powered 2-stage snow blower for under $800.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 32.3 x 24.8 x 22 inches
  • Weight: 143 pounds

Pros

  • Great power for the price
  • Relatively lightweight
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Jiggly chute

Finally, we have a 2-stage snow blower from PowerSmart. Despite its relatively affordable price, the PowerSmart is tough enough to get through difficult storms thanks to a clearing height of up to 21 inches at full 2-foot width. It uses a 212cc standard gas engine with a corded electric start.

What the PowerSmart lacks in premium features, such as headlights or heated handles, it makes up for by being a solid unit that won’t break the bank. You’ll also notice that sticking to the essentials gives makes the PowerSmart comparatively lightweight at only 143 pounds. Where most units are considerably heavier than me, there’s a lot of comfort in working with a machine in the slippery snow that is more comparable in weight.

The PowerSmart features a 180-degree rotatable chute. While, in theory, this rotation should be under your control, consumer reports mention that the chute can have a mind of its own from time to time and change its aim. This is particularly noticeable in bumpy terrain. Still, you should be able to get it back under control quickly if you are attentive.

Things to consider before buying snow blowers for gravel driveways

While the number of stages is the most important thing to consider when buying a snow blower for gravel driveways compared to one for other use cases, there are other important things to consider before buying such a large, complicated piece of equipment. Then chuck on your best heated gloves and your best heated jacket and get to work.

Stages

At its most simple, we can describe the stage amount as the number of steps and parts used to chuck snow elsewhere. The most important distinction for users wanting to blow snow off the tops of gravel driveways is separating 1-stage and higher-stage snow blowers.

A 1-stage snow blower, also known as a “snow thrower,” has a more open build and no shielding to protect the ground. The result is snow—and gravel—thrown everywhere. These 1-stage snow blowers are not suitable snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers, meanwhile, are made for gravel driveways. A large part of this is the addition in most models of skid shoes, which force the machine slightly off the ground. The result is a skimming-off-the-top effect, leaving just a thin layer of snow atop your undisturbed gravel. The main bonus of a 3-stage over a 2-stage is the addition of an accelerator that can help with harder, refrozen snow.

Please note that other terminology works for these products, as well. For example, 2-stage, dual-stage, and two-stage all work interchangeably. When looking for the best snow blowers for gravel driveways avoid snow throwers, 1-stage snow blowers, single-stage snow blowers, and one-stage snow blowers.

Expert assembly options

Regardless of how handy you are, a bit of help putting together a several-hundred-pound machine can be quite useful. This assembly can also ensure that the skid shoes—the part of the snow blower that raises the machine up to not eat your gravel—are attached properly. As a bonus, the cost of getting expert assembly is typically quite cheap. For example, the EGO SNT2400 has an expert assembly option that adds less than 5% to the overall cost of the machine. That being said, be sure to discuss the details with the service provider, as there is usually a clause that allows for an updated estimate based on the complexity of the machine.

Size & weight

Picturing your heavy-duty snow blower tossing snow out of your path sounds great as the season approaches, but will you be happy with a large and ultra-heavy machine sitting in your garage all year? Be careful and imagine setting a box with the weight and dimensions of your new product in your shed for a full year. Are you going to be using it enough during the viable season to make it worth having it from spring to fall as well or is it going to be weighing you down more than the full utility that it provides? The heaviest snow blowers can weigh nearly 300 pounds. Once weights get up above 150 pounds or so, you want to make sure to have self-propulsion. Also, heavier models benefit from reverse gears to help you go backwards without doing a World’s Strongest Man event.

FAQs

Q: How much does a snow blower for gravel driveways cost?

A snow blower for gravel driveways can cost anywhere from below $800 to over $3,000. More complex models and, oftentimes, 3-stage snow blowers are likely to cost more than the rest. It is really important to evaluate how often you are really going to be using a snow blower when buying one for gravel driveways due to their high cost. Alternatively, consider budget models like the PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc, which can pay for themselves after just a dozen or so uses.

Q: Can any snow blower be used on gravel driveways?

Any snow blower that doesn’t lift the snow from the surface directly can be used on gravel driveways. One-stage snow blowers take the snow from the surface and, in one step (or “stage”) directly displace it. In the case of gravel driveways, 1-stage snow blowers will also remove gravel on the surface as well. As a result, 1-stage snow blowers should not be used for gravel driveways.

Q: Two-stage vs three-stage snow blowers: what’s better for gravel?

The 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blowers, unlike the 1-stage snow blowers discussed in the question above, are both suitable for gravel. Instead, the debate on getting a 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blower comes down to how much power you need. Typical consumers will be fine with a two-stage snow blower, but some might appreciate the third stage (acceleration) that can be found in 3-stage snow blowers such as the Cub Cadet 3X 28.”

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Getting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is easy once you’ve figured out the need to have a 2-stage or 3-stage snow blower at a minimum. The snow blowers presented on this list should appeal to anyone wishing to get something to make the winter more bearable, with the Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower being a particularly strong choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-blower/ Fri, 25 Feb 2022 15:59:49 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-snow-blower/
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

Snow piling up? Dig in here so you can dig out in a hurry with a snow blower to clear your driveway in no time.

The post The best snow blowers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The PowerSmart Two Stage Snow Blower is the best two-stage PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower
SEE IT

A reliable and heavy-duty pick to handle serious winter conditions.

Best electric Snow Joe SJ623E Electric Single Stage Snow Thrower Snow Joe Electric Blower
SEE IT

Skip the hassle of maintenance and choose sustainably with this electric, yet high-powered option.

Best budget Home photo Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower
SEE IT

Save your money while still clearing snow effectively.

When the weather is nice, a snow blower sounds like a luxury. When there’s a foot of snow covering your driveway and you have to be at work soon, you’ll be truly glad you invested in some mechanical help for clearing all that pesky white stuff. While your small walkway or porch might only need a quick shovel (as long as you do it safely), in some places the task of hauling snow over your shoulder can be nothing short of back-breaking (or heart-killing). With the right snow blower, you can clear your driveway, street, or sidewalk in a matter of minutes without much more effort than pressing a button or pulling a cord. However, picking the right one can feel a little overwhelming. Luckily, we’re here to take the guesswork out of snow removal.

How we chose the best snow blowers

When selecting the best snow blowers to make winter storms a whole lot more bearable, we reviewed each unit’s cost, power source, reviews, and displacement to select only the best products. We considered over 40 products and 10 brands to ultimately narrow it down to this list of the best six. Our final range includes blowers designed for different climates—as those who only need to clear a few inches won’t need the same kind of power as those who get hit with more serious snowfall. Whether you’re on a budget or want a high-end option with plenty of bells and whistles, we’ve included a product pick for you.

The best snow blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Snow blowers aren’t just for locations with frequent blizzards. These machines can assist in clearing everything from a dusting to a blizzard. It all depends on what you need and how much you want to spend.

Best overall: PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower

Why it made the cut: This powerful two-stage pick offers chute control, multiple speed settings, and a four-cycle engine to get through any storm.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 212 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Steel auger cuts through snow
  • 8 total speeds
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

This snow blower is a reliable, durable, and powerful machine equipped to clear most snowfalls. The gas-powered, two-stage blower beats electric and one-stage models when it comes to forcing, and the steel auger slices through even heavy or icy snow buildup to provide a 24-inch wide, 20-inch deep clearing capacity. The PowerSmart has an energetic 212cc engine, 13-inch-height tires to dig deep into terrain, 180 degrees of chute control (with a 40-foot throw), and eight total speeds (six forward, two reverse), giving you a range of options to choose from when clearing your unique driveway, sidewalk, or street.

Best gas-powered: Ariens Deluxe 30-inch Two-Stage Snow Blower

Lowes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This gas-powered pick can cut through even the most abominable snow buildup with snow blows of up to 50 feet.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 306 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 50 feet

Pros

  • Dual belts for more power
  • Auto-turn steering
  • All steel frame for durability

Cons

  • If not maintained well the steel can rust

Save yourself the hassle of making pass after pass after pass with this powerful Ariens snow blower. Capable of clearing a 30-inch-wide path and cutting through 21 inches of piled-up snow, this two-stage snow blower will make quick work of even the most sprawling driveways. Auto-turn steering also means no tricky levers or triggers to manipulate—just press the electric push button and start carving. The dual belt system also allows your engine to output more power where it matters, so clearing even heavy snowfall can be a breeze.

Best full-sized electric: EGO Power+ SNT2112 21-Inch 56-Volt Lithium-Ion Cordless Snow Blower

EGO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Strong steel auger
  • Comes with extra batteries
  • Quieter than many gas-powered models
  • Low vibration
  • Extremely easy to start

Cons

  • Not self-propelled

Electric snow blowers used to be wimpy machines that could barely handle a dusting. That’s no longer true and EGO’s powerful snow moving machine is proof. It comes with a pair of batteries and a dual-outlet charger so you can keep them both ready to go for when the snow falls. It’s electric, so it starts very quickly and easily with no cord to pull. Once it’s running, it’s noticeably quieter than its gas-powered pals.

Up front, a steel auger chops through snow and ice with aplomb. It measures 21 inches wide, which is wide enough to make quick work of a full-sized driveway, but still nimble enough to clear narrow walkways and other paths. Two charged batteries provide enough power to clear a 12-car driveway of eight inches of snow. If you want a simple, effective way to move snow without a ton of maintenance or effort, this is a great option. It’s not self-propelled, so you’ll have to push it, but the auger is so good at its job that it won’t be a heavy lift.

Best compact electric: Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Simply charge up and get snow blowing with this eco-friendly-meets-affordable pick, which clears an impressive amount of snow despite its lightweight and compact design.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Engine displacement: 840 lbs/min
  • Throw distance: 25 feet

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Sustainable
  • Lightweight design

Cons

  • Not suited for large driveways

Powered with a rechargeable 100-volt, 5.0 Ah lithium-ion battery, this electric snow blower can clear a path that’s 22 inches wide and 13 inches high. This model comes with a battery and charger, but you can add an additional battery (sold separately) if thirty minutes of run time isn’t enough. And with dual 5-Watt LED lights, you’ll be able to see where you’re going even when the sun is down. Unlike gas models, the Snow Joe requires no maintenance, so your snow blower won’t malfunction if it goes untouched for months in the garage. Despite its more compact size, this pick can also move 840 pounds of snow per minute, making it a workhorse worthy of a try.

rounded option.

Best compact: Ariens 18S 18-in Single-stage Push with Auger Assistance Gas Snow Blower

Ariens

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: There aren’t many compact gas-powered snow blowers out there, but this is a very solid option.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 99cc
  • Throw distance: 10 feet

Pros

  • One of just a few gas-powered compact models
  • Clever blade design gets all the way to the driveway
  • Easy to start with one or two pulls
  • High-visibility color

Cons

  • Heavier than electric models
  • Max snow clearing height of six inches so not for heavy storms

You won’t find many gas-powered compact snow blowers out there anymore with so many electric models to choose from. But, if you’re keeping a snow clearing machine at a camp or area with inconsistent access to electricity, then a petrol-powered machine may be the way to go. This 18-inch wide machine has a 99cc engine inside and a 12-inch intake height. It’s only meant to clear six inches of a snow at a time, so you’ll have to go out and clear regularly if you get a storm with more accumulation than that. But, this machine starts easily, runs relatively quietly (at least compared to other gas-powered blowers), and maneuvers deftly. Its clever auger blade design allows it to get all the way down to the bare driveway without leaving scrapes or marks or getting damaged if it hits an errant rock.

The chute turns a full 210 degrees, so you can throw snow wherever you want it as you move along. That comes in handy if you have a driveway with a lot of vehicles or picky neighbors who don’t allow your snow to touch their precious lawn.

Best two-stage: Briggs & Stratton Dual-Stage Snow Blower

Briggs & Stratton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-quality option has a powerful motor and two-stage design to tackle the heaviest snowfalls.

Specs:

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 208 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: Up to 40 feet

Pros

  • Easy electric push start
  • Heated hand grips
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

This powerful gas two-stage snow blower can easily tackle snowfalls that are up to 20 inches and move 208 cubic cm of snow, making it one of the best machines to clear areas hit with serious snowfall. While considerably more expensive than the other options in the article, this gas snow blower will cut through just about anything you put in its way and you give total control over where it ends up. The dual-trigger steering also allows you to cut tight turns and clear snow precisely, which ultimately makes for a faster process overall.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Snowblowers tend to be quite the investment, but you don’t have to spend a ton to save time clearing drifts—this Greenworks pick has quite the power, despite its more compact size and affordable pricing.

Specs:

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Clearing depth: 10 inches
  • Throw distance: 20 feet

Pros

  • Affordable pick
  • Lightweight design
  • Easy electric start

Cons

  • Requires extension cord

If you live somewhere that only sees light, sporadic snowfall, there’s absolutely no reason to shell out big money on a snow blower with features you don’t need. This Greenworks electric snow blower will clear a path that’s 20 inches wide and 10 inches deep. Since it’s AC-powered, you’ll never run out of juice as long as you can reach an outlet. Convenient to store and easy to start, this is a great snow thrower if you don’t want to spend too much money. It’s also a great model to buy for any elderly people you may help care for since it’s light enough to handle without too much effort.

What to consider when buying the best snow blowers

They say that every snowflake is unique, and snow blowers are no different. Depending on your individual needs, you may want a fairly no-frills device or the latest technology. Check out these five things to consider before buying the best snow blower, and then let the snowfall where it may. And while you’re outfitting yourself to tackle those drifts, check out our roundups of the best snow bootsheated socks, heated insolesheated vests, and winter hats to help you get the job done more comfortably (and when you get back inside, grab your heated slippers).

For long driveways and big clean-ups, power your snow blower with gas

Generally speaking, gas-powered snow blowers tend to be more powerful than even the best electric models. So, if you have to clean up a long driveway or city block, you’ll probably want your snow blower to run on gas.

Gas models do have their downsides: for example, you’ll need to change the oil from time to time and make sure that you’re using the right type of gasoline. Other upkeep will include changing or cleaning the filters as needed and occasionally replacing a burnt-out spark plug. However, when the inches start piling up, the maintenance a gas-powered snow blower requires will be more than worth it.

For convenience and ease of use, there’s no beating an electric snow blower

In addition to being more environmentally friendly than their gas-powered counterparts, electric snow blowers are easier to use and require less upkeep. Depending on the model, all you’ll need to do is plug them in (or charge the battery) and you’ll be ready to go.

Unfortunately, electric snow blowers tend to be less powerful than gas-powered ones, so if you have a huge amount of snow to clear, you might find yourself making multiple passes or cursing when the battery runs out. “Less powerful” doesn’t mean “not powerful,” though, and a well-made electric model might be exactly what you’re looking for provided the conditions you’ll be using it in aren’t terribly inclement. There are truly burly electric models on the market, but expect to fork over a pretty penny for them. Some cost $2,000 and up.

A two-stage snow blower is the best choice for clearing large areas and really deep snow

If you live in an area that gets pummeled with snow, a one-stage snow blower just isn’t going to cut it. The difference between a one-stage and two-stage snow blower comes down to how much heavy lifting the “auger” (the part that sucks up the snow) is being asked to do—and in a one-stage model, it’s being asked to do everything.

Put simply, in a one-stage model, the auger sucks up the snow and spits it out, while in a two-stage model, the auger only has to suck it up while another part (the “impeller”) is responsible for blowing it somewhere else. If you’re looking to clear more than 8 inches of snow, a two-stage model is the only type that will get the job done. Electric models are all one-stage, so if you live in a place that gets lots of snow, a gas-powered, two-stage model is a must.

The best snow blowers will come with a few bells and whistles

Not all snow blowers are built equally and picking one with some extra features can save you a lot of time and frustration. For example, if you can’t wait for the sun to come out to clear a path to your car, you’ll definitely want to consider a snow blower with a built-in light. Want more control over where the snow you throw lands? Some models come equipped with remote chute control, so you don’t make another mess cleaning up the first one.

FAQs

Q: How long should a snow blower last?

Depending on the brand, style, use time, how they’re stored, and how well you care for the machine, snow blowers can last between 10-30 years. This means that, in order to get more winters out of your snow blower, you will need to give it some love and care in the off-season with some maintenance. This includes draining the gas, replacing sparkplugs, oiling the wheels, and cleaning it. A basic parts inspection every 20 hours of use is a good rule of thumb to follow.

Q: Do you need hearing protection when using a snow blower?

You don’t need to wear hearing protection when using a snow blower, but you should, as they can be loud. For example, gas snow blowers can reach up to 85 decibels. Eight hours of exposure to that decibel level is considered safe. However, at 100 decibels, the safe exposure time drops to 15 minutes. Although snow on the ground isn’t permanent, hearing loss is. If you’re looking for hearing protection that you can use year-round, check out our best earplugs for concerts. You can rock them under your hat when you’re outside using your brand new snow blower, and rock out with them when seeing your favorite band in town.

Q: Do snow blowers work on heavy snow?

It depends on the kind of snow blower you buy. Single-stage and two-stage blowers can handle up to a foot of snow. Three-stage snow blowers can handle 16 inches. Two- and three-stage snow blowers also remove a wider swath of snow in a pass compared to single-stage snow blowers. If you get frequent, heavy snows, a two- or three-stage snow blower is worth the investment since it will be easier—and less time-consuming—to clear your driveway.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers

The best snow blowers vary widely in price, power, and performance. Depending on your needs, features like LED lighting and remote chute control can be extremely helpful or totally superfluous. Bottom line: the best snow blower is the one that’s suited to your area’s weather conditions and the amount of area you’ll need to clear. Think gas-powered and two-stage models for blizzard-prone climates, and smaller electric units for more fair-weather locales.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow shovels for seniors in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-shovels-for-seniors/ Sat, 24 Sep 2022 13:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=472327
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

Nobody wants to shovel snow, but you do want access to your driveway so always be prepared.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover is the best overall snow shovel for seniors. True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover
SEE IT

True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.

Best with wheels Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel on a plain background Snowcaster 36-inch Wheeled Snow Shovel
SEE IT

A wide blade affixed to a pair of sturdy wheels make this handy tool a manual snow plow.

Best ergonomic Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
SEE IT

With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

If you live in a region that gets any amount of snow in the winter, then you need a good snow shovel. While shoveling snow is hard work, particularly for senior citizens and people with chronic joint or muscle pain, it is the best (and most affordable) means of digging out after a snowstorm. Frankly, there are health risks associated with shoveling, and we’d advise older homeowners with underlying health concerns to hand the responsibility to someone else. If you have to, though, the best snow shovels for seniors will minimize the pain as you safely clear your walkways and driveways.

Before you buy: The health risks of shoveling snow

Shoveling snow is strenuous labor. If you aren’t regularly working out or at least working around the house, it should not be the one physically taxing chore you do every year. With poor form, poor fitness, or poor equipment, you can hurt your back and put yourself at an increased risk of a heart attack

In our guide to the best snow blowers for elderly people, we spoke to Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, who warned that clearing snow is always risky for older people with physical limitations, and that same advice applies here.

Colder temperatures and the intense physical exertion of shoveling snow can push your cardiovascular system, specifically your heart, potentially leading to a cardiac event. It is even more dangerous if you have a pre-existing condition like coronary disease, according to the American Heart Association.

The cardiovascular demands of snow shoveling are akin to an intense workout. As you raise and lower your arms, your blood pressure will increase and put more strain on your heart. The cold air you inhale may also contribute to the problem by constricting blood vessels, including your coronary arteries.

We highly recommend that anyone with muscle, joint, or coronary health issues consider hiring professionals to clear the snow from their homes. If that isn’t an option, buy a snow blower and use it as much as possible before picking up a snow shovel. As any homeowner will tell you, though, a snow blower can’t clear every nook and cranny of your outdoor space, so using a shovel may be necessary from time to time. If you have to shovel, take precautions before stepping outside: Stretch before you begin to warm your body up and take frequent breaks.

How we chose the best snow shovel for seniors

I’ve been writing about gear for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best snow blowers to the best energy-efficient air conditioners. To put this guide together, I drew on PopSci’s past research and personal insight for recommending the best snow blowers for elderly people and the best snow shovels in general. I also considered recent reviews from experts and users to ensure our recommendations for what to keep in the storage shed are current as we get closer to the snow season.

The best snow shovels for seniors: Reviews & Recommendations

The snow shovel isn’t a complicated tool, but it’s worth buying the right one. Above all, keep safety in mind, and choose a shovel that will make things easier on your body. The best snow shovels for seniors come in a surprising variety of shapes and sizes, which we hope will help you have an easier winter season.

Best overall: True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, an ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.

Specs

  • Weight: 3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Handle length: 37.4 inches
  • Blade width: 18 inches

Pros

  • Comfortable design
  • Lightweight
  • Strong, wide blade

Cons 

  • We wish a second grip on the handle came standard

The True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover features a durable design, a curved aluminum handle, and an 18-inch-wide plastic blade. It’s light for its size—just 3 pounds—and the wide combo-style blade makes it a versatile option for clearing small patios and long walkways. The oversized grip is big enough to accommodate hands wearing big winter gloves, and it works with a handle attachment, providing users with improved leverage when scooping snow. The blade even features a plastic wear strip, which will extend its lifespan and keep it from gouging your hardwood deck.

Best ergonomic: Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Handle length: 50 inches
  • Blade width: 20 inches

Pros

  • Second handle
  • Combo blade
  • Lightweight and durable

Cons 

  • Metal wear strip isn’t suitable for wood or stone surfaces

The Snow Joe Shovelution is the most novel snow shovel we’ve seen in a long time. It’s a 20-inch combo-style shovel with a secondary “spring-assist” handle for your lead hand. This allows you to lift a shovel full of snow while only barely bending your back. When you pull the snow free, the bendable front handle snaps back to position, flinging the snow forward without any effort. The Shovelution is very lightweight and suited for tackling all kinds of jobs.

It isn’t perfect for every situation: The hard edge will scuff up wood and tile. The snow-flinging action forces you to pile snow in front of you, which may impact how you shovel. Still, the Snow Joe Shovelution is far and away the most interesting snow shovel we’ve looked at.

Best pusher: The Snowplow 36-inch Wide Model

The Snowplow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Snowplow’s 36-inch blade makes it a breeze to uncover wide surfaces.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.84 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, fiberglass
  • Handle length: 47 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Wide blade
  • Works well on various surfaces
  • Great for breaking up ice

Cons 

  • Expensive

The ultrawide Snowplow shovel is ideal for cutting paths in unpacked snowfall on sidewalks and driveways. It features a 36-inch plastic blade, allowing users to create a huge path in a single pass. It also features a sharp edge when flipped over that you can use to scrape and break up clumps of ice. 

It’s worth noting that you will need to assemble the Snowplow before using it, and some reviewers have noted the bolts on the shovel can come loose if not installed correctly. If you don’t mind doing a little prep, though, it can make clearing paths a whole lot easier.

Best with wheels: Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel

Snowcaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The snow pusher’s wide blade and contractor-grade construction make it ideal for clearing light to medium amounts of snow in a hurry.

Specs:

  • Weight: 11.21 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 45 – 50 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Heavy duty design
  • Large tires
  • Adjustable handle

Cons 

  • Expensive

If you’re willing to clear snow more regularly rather than letting it pile up, then a wheeled shovel may be a great option for you. This pusher boasts a blade that’s 36 inches wide. That’s considerably wider than a typical shovel. A pair of sturdy wheels on the back of the blade allow you to simply push it along a hard surface while it scrapes the snow off. The technique is nearly identical to how a snow plow would move. It’s not meant to clear feet of snow at a time, but if you’re clearing a couple of inches, it’s as simple as pushing it back and forth along the driveway. That saves you from having to lift the snow, which is how many injuries happen. The steel handle and thick plastic blade are built for contractor use. That gives it a relatively high price tag, but it also means it will last for years and years, even with heavy use. And even though it has a very wide blade, it’s still relatively light. At just over 11 pounds, it’s a solid pound lighter than most of its competition. That results in easier pushing and less grumbling when it’s time to go clear the driveway.

Best budget: True Temper 16-inch Poly Snow Shovel

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s affordable snow shovel is simple but effective.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.14 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 36 inches
  • Blade width: 16 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Lightweight
  • Good for shoveling and pushing

Cons

  • Straight handle isn’t great for your back

True Temper, the company behind our top pick, also makes a basic but solid combo-style snow shovel. As the name suggests, this model features a 16-inch plastic blade suited for shoveling and pushing snow. The plastic blade won’t scratch your deck or patio, and its steel grip is made for gloved hands. This shovel’s best asset is its weight: At only 2.14 pounds, it’s easy to maneuver. This shovel is smaller than many of our other picks, and it lacks a curved handle, so it isn’t exactly ideal. That said, it’s close enough that we’d recommend it over picking up the first thing you can find at a store.

What to look for when picking the best snow shovels for seniors

A snow shovel should be light, durable, and offer an ergonomic design that puts less strain on your back. Everything from the material to the shape of the handle and the scoop will significantly impact the overall experience. You shouldn’t just grab the first one you can find at the hardware store the day before a blizzard. Take your time, and keep these things in mind while shopping for a new snow shovel.

Blade type

You’ll come across three main types of snow shovels, which are mostly designed by the shape of their blades, or the part you use for scooping, pushing, and lifting the snow. Some shovels are designed to lift snow, others to push it. Some aren’t actually designed for snow removal at all.

A corn scoop shovel, or grain shovel, features a straight handle and a flat blade in the shape of a spade. While they’re often heavy enough to cut through heavy, ice-covered snow, they’re rarely the best choice for shoveling. The flat, narrow blade can’t hold very much snow and isn’t designed for pushing it around.

A snow pusher shovel is, as the name implies, designed to push snow out of the way rather than scooping it up. The wide, curved blade is excellent for moving light, unpacked snow, especially from long walkways and driveways. A pusher blade takes less effort to use, especially in drier snow, but they’re not as easy to maneuver on narrow paths and stairs.

A combo shovel splits the difference between a corn scoop design and a pusher. They generally feature a bent or curved handle and a wide blade with a deep well that can scoop and push dense snow. Thanks to the ergonomic handle, you can scoop more snow without straining your back.

Realistically, we’d recommend anyone who gets snow multiple times a year have a combo shovel and a pusher. The combo shovel is the best universal option—it can handle all kinds of snow well. Depending on the layout of your home, you may be able to use a pusher to clear some pathways without lifting much snow, which is both easier and safer.

Handle design

The handle design of a snow shovel is also essential. Many basic shovels have a traditional, straight handle, which allows you to dig deep into a snowbank. But you don’t want a straight handle: It forces you to bend over more, putting strain on your back and making the act of shoveling harder.

Instead, look for a shovel with a curved handle. An ergonomic curve in the handle positions your leading hand higher, guiding you to better posture and less back pain. They’re just as stable and durable as any other shovel, so there’s no downside here.

Some snow shovels offer a more pronounced bend close to the blade, which does come with a tradeoff. The deep-bend handle makes things even easier on your back, but the more pronounced bend requires more effort for users to lift snow and toss it aside.

Materials

Manufacturers will make shovel blades from all kinds of materials, including plastic, steel, and aluminum. For the average homeowner, a lighter shovel is almost always better, so plastic is the way to go. It’s lightweight yet still offers excellent durability when scooping and pushing. Shovel blades made of steel or aluminum are better for breaking down icy snow, but they’re much heavier, so you’re more likely to hurt yourself. Metal shovels may also scratch or damage delicate surfaces like wood patios or stone tiles.

Extras

Most of us think of the snow shovel as a very simple piece of equipment, but there are some bells and whistles that you may find on a more expensive model. Some shovels feature a wear strip, which is a small plastic or metal strip that protects the end of the blade. If possible, we recommend looking for a plastic wear strip with a rounded edge. 

There are also useful third-party accessories: If you buy a shovel with a straight handle, you can get an attachable front-hand grip for about $10, which can improve your posture just like a curved handle.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow shovels cost?

Snow shovel prices vary depending on the blade type, materials, and additional features. That said, they aren’t especially expensive. Our best overall pick costs just under $30. Some more expensive options, like the Orientools Heavy Duty Rolling Snow Pusher costs as much as $70, while our budget pick costs only $12. Snow shovels are very durable, so all of them should last many years.

Q: Is a plastic or metal snow shovel better?

As we explained, plastic snow shovels are lighter, easier to use, and won’t damage delicate surfaces. That said, metal shovels can help you push deeper into frozen snowbanks, and break up solid ice. We recommend a plastic snow shovel for seniors with back, joint, or heart problems who should minimize their effort as much as possible.

Q: How can you keep snow from sticking to the snow shovel?

According to AccuWeather, coating your shovel blade in a lubricant like vegetable oil or cooking spray can keep snow from sticking to your shovel.

Q: How do you make snow shoveling easier?

Beyond buying the right snow shovel, we recommend making a plan before you start shoveling, so you spend less time working out in the cold. We also recommend stretching before shoveling: It won’t make the work “easier,” but you’re less likely to get hurt or feel aches and pains afterward. Lastly, if you’re using a shovel with a straight handle, consider buying a front handle attachment. Having a better, more ergonomic grip on your shovel will ease the strain on your back.

Q: Should you shovel while it is still snowing?

If you’re expecting a light snowfall, you might want to consider shoveling while it’s still coming down. It may sound counterintuitive, but the snow may freeze if you let it sit, especially if snow falls overnight. That said, shoveling multiple times per day may be too exhausting for some people. Use your best judgment and only shovel if you feel up to the task. In heavy snowstorms, it’s better to wait until the sky clears.

Q: At what age should you stop shoveling snow?

There’s no specific age for when you should stop shoveling snow. If you have chronic health conditions, particularly any issues with your heart, you should not shovel snow. Likewise, if you have muscle or joint pain, you should avoid shoveling snow. If you’re unsure, talk to your doctor before picking up your shovel.

Final thoughts on the best snow shovel for seniors

If you’re unsure if your body can handle the stress and strain of a hard workout, you should think twice about shoveling snow. For seniors with chronic health issues, it can be a serious health risk if you push yourself too hard. If you have the option, consider hiring someone to shovel for you. We know that’s not practical for everyone, though. If you have to do it yourself, buying one of the best snow shovels for seniors will make things at least a little bit easier on you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best ice picks of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-ice-pick/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 19:10:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-ice-pick/
A line-up of ice picks on a white background
Amanda Reed

From ice fishing to bartending, these useful tools are perfect for getting a leg up on blocks of ice and frozen surfaces.

The post The best ice picks of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A line-up of ice picks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Cuda SS Ice Pick Cuda Stainless Steel Ice Pick
SEE IT

This no-frills pick powers through the most stubborn ice.

Best for climbing Petzl Glacier Ice Pick PETZL Glacier Ice Axe
SEE IT

This lightweight and compact pick is perfect for any expedition.

Best budget Norpro Ice Pick Norpro, Brown Wooden Handle Ice Pick
SEE IT

This affordable pick can power through solid ice in no time.

Whether it’s floating in our beverages to keep them cool in summer or providing footing on top of a wintry lake, ice is something that requires a specific kind of tool: a pick. Finding the right pick to work with ice successfully means first considering the size of the job. The most basic form of ice pick is a small tool for single-handed use with one to three sharp prongs at the end. These are best for use in bars and kitchens, but if they’re large enough, they can work to break down chunks of ice in driveways, parking spots, and other low-stakes situations. For heavy-duty uses like fishing, hiking, camping, and climbing that involve extended time outdoors, a larger ice pick with a thick handle and blade should be used for maximum reliability and efficiency. Below, we’ve broken down a few of our favorite tools and key considerations to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for your next task.

How we chose the best ice picks

A dull ice pick makes climbing or cubing ice a hassle—and dangerous. To find the best ice picks, we looked at reviews and recommendations, tested them ourselves in our at-home bar areas and during other everyday tasks (we got a lot of old ice lining the sides of our freezers), and conducted heavy research.

The best ice picks: Reviews & Recommendations

From sharp ice picks that cut through ice cubes like a hot knife through butter to sporty tools that can help you clear the way for your next adventure, here is what we found in our quest for the best ice picks. So slip on some heated clothing and start chippin’ away at whatever’s in your way.

Best overall: Cuda SS Ice Pick

Cuda Sports

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .22 lbs.
  • Blade length: 5-½ inches
  • Handle material: Stainless steel

Pros

  • Tip protector
  • Lanyard hole
  • Easy to hold

Cons

  • Doesn’t float

The SS option from Cuda sports a simple and sturdy construction with a durable stainless steel finish to prevent corrosion during use. It’s one of the best ice picks available for all-around use thanks to its 5-½-inch blade that runs through the length of the handle for superior control and strength. A scale pattern on the handle allows users to maneuver this pick to their liking, making it a flexible choice that excels outdoors. Be careful if using this near water—it will sink.

Best for climbing: Petzl Glacier Ice Pick

Petzl

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .77 lbs.
  • Blade length: 12 inches
  • Handle material: Aluminum

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Great mountaineering axe for price
  • Portable

Cons

  • Extreme climbers might want something heftier

The Glacier is a super lightweight ice pick from Petzl that’s designed for anchoring and cutting steps in hard ice and snow with ease. It weighs under a pound and has a length of just over 1.5 feet, so it’s incredibly portable and durable. The steel head and spike are connected in the center by a rust-resistant anodized aluminum handle. More extreme climbers may want a heftier pick, but for most outdoor winter excursions, the Glacier is equipped to punch way above its weight class.

Best for backpacking trips: Rhino USA Folding Survival Shovel and Pick

Rhino USA

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Coated carbon steel
  • Weight: 2 lbs.
  • Blade length: 6 inches
  • Handle material: Coated carbon steel

Pros

  • Foldable
  • Has multiple uses
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Locking mechanism hard to loosen, per reviews

This multitool from Rhino USA is one of the best for backpacking trips thanks to its portable, lightweight form factor and the inclusion of a shovelhead as well as a cutting edge for dealing with wood and other debris. Because it’s foldable, this unit is perfect for stowing in a bag and pulling out to assist in clearing trails or preparing areas for camp. It’s made of powder-coated carbon steel and extends to around 23 inches long when fully opened.

Best for bartenders: Barfame Wood Ice Pick

Barfame

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .5 lbs.
  • Blade length: Around 3 inches
  • Handle material: Wood

Pros

  • Food-safe
  • Combo pick hammer and spike

Cons

  • Tool not dishwasher safe due to wood handle

This wood-handled option from Barfame is a great choice for bartender and kitchen duties thanks to its simple shape and dual-prong construction. A pick hammer sits at the top of the handle to allow users to break ice with a tapping motion, while the spike at the bottom offers more traditional stabbing functionality. The food-safe steel ensures that the pick is easy to clean and stays free of rust, making this a good ice pick for bartenders facing high-volume tasks.

Best for home: Fortune Candy Ice Chipper

Fortune Candy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: Around one pound
  • Blade length: Around 1 inch
  • Handle material: Stainless steel and silicone

Pros

  • Silicon grip for support and control
  • Made of food-grade materials
  • Sturdy

Cons

  • Heavy compared to other food-grade items on our list

This one from Fortune Candy is constructed from thick stainless steel and features three prongs for ice chipping and a durable food-grade silicone grip for added support and control. Extra weight and hefty construction assist users in maintaining a grip in the hand through even the most demanding motions.

Best budget: Norpro Ice Pick

Norpro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .21 lbs.
  • Blade length: 7 ¼ inches
  • Handle material: Wood

Pros

  • Easy-to-grip handle
  • Included sheath for protection
  • Great value

Cons

  • Only good for light use

This basic ice pick from Norpro is one of the best cheap ice picks available, thanks to its sturdy stainless steel spike and easy-to-grip wooden handle. It measures 7 ¼ inches in length and includes a wooden sheath for easy storage and protection. For light use, this ice pick is an incredibly good value, but you may want to look elsewhere if durability and longevity are your main concerns. Still, the price point is accessible enough to make this a great choice for stocking up on backups.

What to consider when buying the best ice picks

The best ice pick for your needs depends on whether you want to use it in the kitchen or the great outdoors. There are some design overlaps between these varieties, but the most flexible ice picks are the ones that excel primarily as either a bar tool or as a climbing tool. Regardless of how you’ll use your pick, sturdy construction and thoughtful design are the key elements to keep an eye on.

They can be great bar accessories or a useful pieces of backpacking gear … or both

Ice picks are not particularly cost-prohibitive or bulky, but if versatility is your main concern, choose an all-around model that can excel at breaking down the most common ice-related tasks. When selecting the best ice pick overall, choose a model that offers an easy-to-grip handle that can be maneuvered from both the top and the side. This construction will ensure that you can retain control of the pick during even the most forceful motions.

Another key consideration to look for is a cutting element made of a hard, durable material that extends deep into the handle rather than being simply fastened to the end. This design ensures that torque and leverage are maintained while reinforcing the strength of the handle itself.

For outdoor adventures, look for an ice axe and ice spikes

Ice climbing is a popular and fun outdoor activity with many specific considerations and safety requirements to keep in mind. Because of the potentially severe and demanding nature of ice climbing, it’s crucial to select a pick specifically designed to withstand the rigors of the activity.

When selecting the best pick for climbing, look for a design that offers an easy-to-grip handle and a durable head made of steel or other tough materials. Lightweight construction with included carabiner holes or other fastening design elements ensures that the ice pick is within reach at a moment’s notice without adding extra bulk, which is critical for maintaining mobility. If you’re looking to streamline your climbing gear setup even more, look for a pick that includes a spiked end to add stability on flat surfaces.

A compact ice chisel should always be a part of your backpacking gear

The best ice pick for backpacking trips should have a foldable, portable design or be part of a set of foldable tools that are both durable and lightweight. By integrating the design of the pick into a form factor that includes a shovel, spade, axe, or other related backpacking gear, you can cut down on the space used in your bag while maximizing your preparedness for encounters with environmental variables.

Common backpacking circumstances warrant a dedicated pick, including the need to clear and traverse snowy trails in snow shoes, prepare backcountry campsites, and remove ice from hard surfaces, including wood, rock, and asphalt. As with other types of ice picks, it’s important to pick a harder material like steel to ensure effectiveness and prevent breakage. Because sturdier metals are likely to be heavy, a foldable and compact form factor are essential features to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for backpacking trips.

There’s no fancier tool to add to your cocktail kit than a pick for breaking up ice blocks

Any serious bartender knows that the quality of ice used in a cocktail directly affects the overall quality and taste of the drink itself. The best ice pick for bartender use allows professionals and amateurs alike to carve ice chips and shaped chunks from larger ice blocks, a technique that allows the formation of cocktail-friendly cube shapes. By having precise control over the shape and quality of ice, bartenders can use one to form chips for frothy drinks, sculpted cubes for serving liquor straight, and everything in between without having to rely on the cookie-cutter approach of an ice machine or freezer delivering uniform and generic ice cube shapes. Carving custom cubes and ice shapes from a dedicated larger block is a great way to ensure freshness, too, when ice is acquired for a specific event rather than stored over long periods of time. An ice pick is a key bartending accessory in your cocktail kit for its unparalleled flexibility, novelty, and class, and it can even break up cubes that have melted together in a pinch.

They can add a lovely vintage feel to your home bar tools

You don’t have to be a professional bartender to enjoy the benefits of a classy ice pick at home. Some of the best ice picks for home use are designed to add elegance and a unique flair to your personal bar—whether you’re staying in or entertaining guests. In a bar context, ice picks are perfect for shaving off small beverage-sized chunks of ice off of a larger main cube, which adds to the customizability of beverages and the overall freshness of the ice. Since larger blocks of ice take longer to melt, this system can safely be used over long periods during entertaining without added refrigeration. This mechanism applies equally to breaking up a mass of ice in the storage area of a home ice machine, which can melt and refreeze over time, fusing together.

When looking for the best ice pick for home use, you can’t go wrong with a durable and understated model that matches the rest of your bar tools. Steering away from branded accessories and opting for a generic metal or silver pick that features food-grade materials is key to ensuring longevity and sustained enjoyment.

FAQs

Q: How much do ice picks cost?

Ice picks dedicated to safety and stability in outdoor environments typically have a price tag corresponding to their critical application. In kitchen environments, however, you don’t need to spend much on an ice pick to get decent results. If you’re looking for the best cheap pick for low-impact applications, turn to a model under $10 with a spike longer than 5 inches to ensure adequate penetration of the ice block you’re breaking apart. It usually costs a little more to find a sturdy pick in this price category that has silicone grips, but wood is an adequate substitute.

Q: What’s the most durable material for an ice pick?

Steel is by far the most common material used for ice picks due to its sustained durability properties at a wide range of temperatures. In kitchen picks, food-safe stainless steel is the material of choice. Climbers’ picks and ice picks for backpacking often use aluminum in the handles to cut down on total weight and increase handleability.

Q: What other uses are there for ice picks besides chipping ice?

Ice picks have a few key uses besides chipping ice, most of which are within the realm of outdoor recreation. Climbers rely upon them to grant stability while moving across icy slopes, and ice fishers use them to cut holes through ice surfaces.

Q: Should I purchase an ice pick with a retractable blade?

A pick with a retractable blade can prevent accidental scratches and scrapes, but most smaller picks have their sheaths and covers for this purpose. In specific cases where you’re moving a lot or digging through a bag, a retractable pick can be beneficial, but in most kitchen and bar contexts, this isn’t necessary

Final thoughts on the best ice picks

Ice picks are unique tools that offer a variety of ways to harness the unique properties of ice both in the kitchen and out in the field. Fancy, compact picks are great for chipping away at ice blocks in bars and at home, while larger ice picks and foldable multi-tool picks are the way to go for hiking and backpacking. The best ice pick will allow users to gain control over, break apart, and distribute ice in any context, making it a welcome addition to any collection of kitchen or climbing gear.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best ice picks of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best windshield snow covers of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-windshield-snow-cover/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 21:08:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-windshield-snow-cover/
best windshield snow cover on a snowy street with cars
Le Duc via Unsplash

Ice, hail, snow, and other debris don’t belong on your windshield.

The post The best windshield snow covers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best windshield snow cover on a snowy street with cars
Le Duc via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall FrostGuard Premium is the best Windshield Snow Cover overall FrostGuard Plus Winter Windshield Cover
SEE IT

This durable polyester and PVC lined cover can endure even the harshest winter conditions.

Best durable OxGord Windshield Snow Cover is the best durable pick OxGord Windshield Snow Cover
SEE IT

The anti-frost thermal shield design traps heat any time of day.

Best universal EcoNour Car Windshield Snow Cover best universal EcoNour Windshield Cover for Ice and Snow
SEE IT

This flexible design can protect your car from inclement conditions year round—whether it’s frost or extreme heat in the summer.

A windshield snow cover may not be the most exciting car accessory, but it’s one you’ll be happy to have on hand before the next storm. Rather than hurriedly trying to clear your windshield so you can make it to work or school in time, you can opt for a cover that will take the hassle out of winter weather. Get back to enjoying snowfall and be on your merry way (with the heat cranking, of course). In addition to making your windshield easier to clean and maintain, a windshield cover also cuts down on potential damage from falling ice and snow-covered debris, saving you the headache of cracks and chips, and the cost that comes with them. The best windshield snow covers can also prevent your wipers from freezing to your windshield and eliminate the need to raise them in cold weather. Below, we’ve listed some of the different types and styles of the best windshield snow covers available to guide you through your shopping experience.

How we chose the best windshield snow covers

The delight of a fresh blanket of snow in the morning quickly subsides when you realize that your car is effectively buried in a drift—and that you’ll likely spend the next hour using an ice scraper and digging your way out with a snow blower. To maintain your joy, you should find a windshield snow cover with the size, durability, and versatility that fit your vehicle, making these all factors that came into play when we made our choices. Along with this research, we took into consideration critical reviews and user recommendations.

The best windshield snow covers: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a windshield snow cover, the main considerations to keep in mind are the type of fastening used, the thickness required for your specific weather conditions, and the size of the windshield cover itself. Some users may also prefer a model that offers year-round protection. Ensuring that you’ve selected a model with a proper fit for your vehicle is key to enjoying all the benefits that the best windshield snow covers have to offer. (If you do need to scrape ice or remove leaves from your windshield, don’t forget we recommend bundling up in snow boots, heated clothing, snow pants, and a winter hat to fight off the icy temperatures.)

Best overall: FrostGuard Premium Windshield Snow Cover

FrostGuard

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This cover provides comprehensive protection for most vehicles on the market, including UV protection for the warmer months.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester, PVC
  • Dimensions: Comes in XL ‎(68 inches inches L  x 48 inches H) and Standard (59 inches L x 41 inches H) 
  • UV protection? Yes

Pros

  • Fits a wide range of vehicles
  • Industrial strength
  • Covers mirrors as well

Cons

  • Not made from sustainable materials

The FrostGuard is one of the best windshield snow covers thanks to its heavy polyester construction and durable PVC lining. It uses industrial-strength wraps to attach securely to the vehicle’s side windows and includes two security panels to shut in each door. This kit also includes two drawstring mirror covers and a wiper blade cover to keep frost away from other critical areas.

Best durable: OxGord Windshield Snow Cover

OxGord

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty windshield snow cover is made of a thick Oxford cloth with an durable inner lining that provides protection in all weather.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester 
  • Dimensions: 75 inches L x 42.25 inches H 
  • UV protection? Yes

Pros

  • Works for most vehicles
  • Provides protection all year long
  • Comes with anti-theft protection

Cons

  • Not made of sustainable materials
  • Doesn’t cover side mirrors

Users looking for the best durable windshield snow cover for their car will appreciate the OxGord’s tough 600D polyester construction and PVC backing. It attaches via two anti-theft flaps and two mirror elastic bands and is built to be resistant to water, snow, debris, and ultraviolet light. An included bag makes this cover easy to store when you’re driving around and easy to reinstall after you park.

Best universal: EcoNour Car Windshield Cover

EcoNour

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This option comes in two sizes, with an insulated bottom layer and side straps for extra protection.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Dimensions: Comes in XL (‎74 inches L x 43 inches H) and Standard (65 inches L x 43 inches H)
  • UV protection: Yes

Pros

  • Fits windshields in a range of shapes
  • Durable design
  • Comes with anti-theft panels

Cons

  • More expensive than other options
  • Not made from sustainable material

The EcoNour windshield cover is perfect for car owners with odd-sized windshields, multiple vehicles, or as a gift. It comes in two universal sizes that are based on different classes of vehicles and are designed to cover the entire windshield area, including the wipers. Like other models on this list, it attaches using mirror elastics and anti-theft door panels, and it’s constructed out of durable 600D polyester for maximum longevity and protection.

Best budget: Gintenco Magnetic Windshield Snow Cover

Ice Shield

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This affordable pick is designed with magnets for an extra secure fit.

Specs

  • Material: Made of Aluminum foil film, PP cotton, composite cotton and non-woven, thicker and durable fabric
  • Dimensions: Two sizes to pick from: L- 62*50”, S- 58*46′
  • UV protection? No

Pros

  • Edge magnets on the lower half provide extra secure fit
  • Great price
  • Fits range of vehicles

Cons

  • Not the most heavyweight option; frost can sneak under if not pulled tight

Offered in two sizes to fit a wide range of vehicles with a secure fit, the Gintenco is one of the best magnetic windshield snow covers thanks to its system of rare-earth magnets augmented by mirror ties and anti-theft door flaps. This is a great choice for users who park their vehicles in extremely windy areas due to the added strength that the magnets provide. It doesn’t come with a storage bag, which could be an issue in wetter climates, but it’s so secure that it’s still a great value for the price.

Things to consider when buying a windshield snow cover

Freezing temperatures combined with snow and ice can lead to accumulations of frost and hard material on your vehicle’s sensitive glass surfaces. It’s hard to understate the inconvenience caused by having to scrape away at ice on the smooth surface of your windshield in cold weather, especially when you’re short on time. By outfitting your car with a dedicated windshield cover, you can prevent the occurrence of this event altogether and replace the need to shovel and scrape with a simple lifting and removing motion. Not only will this save time in the long run, but it will protect your sensitive windshield from chips and cracks, and ensure that your vision is unobstructed while driving.

Materials

When considering the best windshield snow cover for your vehicle, go with a model that’s constructed out of stick-resistant materials like PVC and polyester to ensure easy removal and durable protection. Choosing a design that fastens to your car using reinforced straps is also a good move if you anticipate using the cover in windy weather, and this will add some extra peace of mind and insurance against snow and ice building up underneath the surface.

Durability

Car owners who park their vehicles in extra icy or snowy locations and are looking for the best protection available can benefit from a thicker-than-average windshield cover made of polyester or other tough materials to offset potential damage from hail, branches, icicles, and other cold-weather debris. Locations with higher occurrences of hail storms and ice storms can be treacherous for even the most durable windshields, so a snow cover that’s up to the task is key to preventing vehicular glass damage.

When shopping for the best durable windshield cover for snow, look for a design with polyester construction that is rated at 600D or better. 600D polyester is a water-resistant material that’s commonly found in luggage, backpacks, and other tough gear. An extra-thick polyester construction comes with the bonus benefit of being perfect for blocking out harmful ultraviolet rays from hitting your windshield and dashboard on sunny days too.

Shape

Windshield snow covers come in many shapes and sizes to match a wide variety of vehicle types, which ensures the snuggest and most accurate fit in critical weather applications. If you own multiple cars and want to use a single windshield cover for swapping between cars, or if you’re looking to buy a windshield snow cover as a gift and don’t know the exact measurements, a universal windshield snow cover may be the best option for you.

The best universal windshield covers for winter should include a fastening system that accounts for variable widths between models of cars. The most common design utilizes the front doors of the vehicle to secure the cover to the windshield. Doing so allows for the cover to be pulled taut against the front of the glass while also adding the benefit of extra-secure fastening that won’t easily come undone in windy weather. The only caveat is that the measurement from the top of the windshield down to the wipers can be less forgiving and potentially result in snow falling below the cover or part of the windshield remaining exposed. For this reason, universal snow cover models usually come in extra-large and standard sizes to accommodate the size gap between sedans and SUVs.

Magnets

Windshield snow covers use a variety of fastening systems to keep them snug against the surface of the windshield, and usually require being tied to the side mirrors or shut in the door to stay secure. Another popular variation uses magnets to fasten to the front of the car, which ensures a gapless connection to the vehicle and offers some extra insurance against high winds and potential ice formation.

When shopping for the best magnetic windshield cover for your vehicle, go with a model that uses some combination of magnetic fastening and tie fastening to make sure you have steadfast coverage throughout a variety of weather conditions. A design that features a combination of mirror, door, and magnetic fastenings covers every base. The best part is that the magnetic feature means you don’t have to rely solely on the door to keep the cover set; that means you won’t have to remove or reset your windshield cover every time you need to open the door.

Price

Windshield covers are simple tools that can get the job done at nearly every price point, but there are some variations to keep an eye on if you’re shopping on a budget. The best cheap windshield snow covers should be constructed from thick polyester to ensure maximum protection and durability, and they should include a number of dedicated fastening systems to keep the cover taut and secure. (You may have to compromise a bit on versatility, as it’s hard to find reversible windshield covers with true reflective backing on the cheap.) Magnets tend to come at a bump in cost, as well. A cheap windshield protector might be all you need if you live in a location with milder winters and light to moderate winds.

Related: The right—and wrong—ways to clear ice and snow from your car

FAQs

Q: How much does a windshield snow cover cost?

Windshield snow covers vary in price, depending on the size and material. But they are generally affordable, and the picks on this list range from about $10 to $35.

Q: How do I choose the right windshield snow cover size?

The most critical measurement when choosing the right windshield cover size is from the top of your windshield to the wipers. Many windshield covers are manufactured in universal sizes (if there’s extra width slack it can be tucked securely under your door). There are generally two classes of windshield cover: one for sedans and hatchbacks, and one for SUVs and trucks.

Q: Do snow covers work in extreme cold?

Windshield snow covers are designed specifically to work in extreme cold and deter the formation of ice and frost on your windshield. They’re made from polyester or PVC, which are naturally water-resistant and extremely durable, and they’re sometimes lined with cotton for extra temperature protection for your car.

Q: What’s the best windshield snow cover for trucks?

When searching for the best windshield snow cover for trucks, go with a universal model that offers enough surface area to clear the entirety of the truck’s windshield on both dimensions. If you can measure the truck’s windshield before making your purchase, you’ll be opened up to selecting a model that’s an even better fit than universal designs, which may render better protection results over the long term.

Final thoughts on the best windshield snow covers

The best windshield snow covers are available in many sizes to fit a variety of vehicle types. Some models offer year-round protection from UV rays and snow alike, and others are designed to be incredibly tough and durable for the most extreme weather conditions. If you’re in doubt about the measurements of your car or want to use a single cover for multiple vehicles, choosing a universal-fit windshield cover is a great way to get protection without breaking a sweat. No matter where you live or what you drive, a windshield snow cover is a useful exterior car accessory that’s easy to use and makes your vehicle easier to maintain.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best windshield snow covers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gifts-for-runners/ Fri, 21 Oct 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=477976
Fitness & Exercise photo

Brave the elements with some help from gear that will keep you warm and dry.

The post The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Fitness & Exercise photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best sneakers The Nike Air Pegasus 37 sneakers are some of the best gifts for runners in cold weather. Nike Air Pegasus Shield 37 Running Shoes
SEE IT

These sneakers are designed specifically for cold weather, with water-repellent features and grooves to keep you from slipping.

Best smartwatch A woman wearing a Garmin Forerunner 965 with a green face on her wrist against the background of a hiking trail. Garmin Forerunner 965
SEE IT

Designed for serious athletes, the Garmin Forerunner 965 tracks advanced performance metrics and provides up to 23 days of battery life in smartwatch mode.

Best hydration vest A red Saloman Adv Skin 12 Running Vest against a plain background. Salomon Adv Skin 12
SEE IT

This well-fitting vest features two soft flasks, and extra bladder for water, and plenty of pockets for snacks and other essentials.

Running seems simple enough: Put one foot in front of the other in a semi-speedy fashion. It’s free, it’s safe, and dare we say, it’s fun. The equipment, too, seems appealingly uncomplicated. All you need are clothes and running shoes, right? While that’s technically true, some specialized running gear can make jogging a whole lot more pleasant. Plus, when you feel good, you run good. It’s simple science. Here’s our list of some of the best gifts for runners:

Best all-weather running gear

Best smartwatch: Garmin Forerunner 965

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

While you don’t need a watch for running, it certainly helps if you are aiming to track your progress and work toward goals. Garmin’s smartwatches are some of the best around for all types of physical activity, but that’s especially true for running. Its Forerunner lineup is the company’s dedicated running line, with the Forerunner 965 sitting at the top. 

The Forerunner 965 features a vibrant AMOLED touchscreen display with up to 31 hours of battery life in GPS mode and up to 23 days in smartwatch mode. As with any Garmin watch, it offers advanced training metrics and tools, including VO2 max, performance condition, training effect, wrist-based running power, load ratio, and more. You can plan your race strategies and receive daily suggested workouts right on your wrist. It also offers built-in mapping, music storage, Garmin Pay, and safety features. It’s a watch built for serious athletes and adventurers, so if you know a newer or more casual runner, the 265 would be a cheaper, smaller, more approachable option.

Best heart rate monitor: Garmin HRM-Pro

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Most running watches provide wrist-based heart rate measurements, but the accuracy of those tools still doesn’t match what you can get with a chest-based monitor. The Garmin HRM-Pro is a premium heart rate monitor with dual ANT and Bluetooth Low Energy technology. It easily pairs with Garmin devices, online training apps like Zwift, or compatible gym equipment. Beyond heart rate, this monitor also gathers running dynamics, including vertical oscillation, ground contact time, stride length, vertical ratio, and more. It can even store data when your watch is out of range, such as during a swim. And it’s comfortable to wear; I barely notice it, even on long runs or bike rides.

Best headphones: Shokz OpenRun Pro

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Most people prefer to run with music or podcasts, but traditional in-ear headphones can pose some safety concerns. Bone conduction headphones are a fantastic option for runners because they allow you to hear your music while still staying alert to the world around you. The Shokz OpenRun Pro headphones offer a secure, lightweight fit that is comfortable even for long runs. They produce clear, high-quality sound with plenty of volume, even when running near traffic. It also features a mic so that you can call your runner when they are out. And the 10 hours of battery life will keep them from needing to charge their headphones constantly.

Best treadmill: NordicTrack T Series

NordicTrack

SEE IT

Whether it’s a blizzard or extreme heat, there are times when it’s not safe to run outside. That’s why it can be helpful to invest in a treadmill. We recommend NordicTrack’s T series. There’s a reason why NordicTrack treadmills are considered some of the best treadmills on the market: they’re reliable, durable, long-lasting, and come with several luxe features to mirror gym-quality workouts. 

This model comes with incline controls up to 15 percent, a 10-inch interactive HD coaching touchscreen, and 30 days free iFit membership, which comes with several on-demand and live workouts with automatic trainer control. also easily folds up and can be stored away for more space-saving. While it’s more expensive than other models, we believe it’s the best if you’re serious about running, want to invest in a higher-end product for the long haul, and are looking for a piece of equipment that mimics what you’d find in a high-end gym.

Best massage gun: Turonic GM5 Massage Gun

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Recovery is key for runners. A massage gun can help relieve those tired leg muscles to promote recovery after runs, preventing injuries and keeping your runner active even during busy training schedules. The Turonic GM5 is a relatively affordable massage gun that still packs a punch. It comes with a range of attachments for different parts of the body and a handy case to keep it all organized even during travel. It offers variable intensity between 1200 and 3200 rpm, so they can fine-tune how intense their massage is. And it’s quiet, so they can even massage their muscles while you watch a movie.

Best cold-weather running gear

Best cold-weather sneakers: Nike Air Pegasus Shield 37 Running Shoes

Nike

SEE IT

Let’s get started with the basics: sneakers. There’s nothing worse than missing a carefully calculated step and landing right into a puddle on a cold and rainy day. To avoid this mishap, Nike took one of its most popular running shoes, the Pegasus, and winterized it with a water-repellent upper material and an outsole with wet weather traction to keep you from slipping on the slick pavement. The outsole’s micro grooves feature multidirectional shapes that displace the water when the shoe makes contact with the pavement, so your feet can leave and arrive home dry and warm.

Best outerwear: Arc’teryx Squamish Hoody

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Layers are essential when it comes to cold-weather running. Arc’teryx’s sleek Squamish hoodie provides plenty of assistance, keeping you warm without slowing you down. The lightweight shell is windproof yet protects you against rain and snow. It’s also made from nylon that is moisture-wicking and allows sweat to escape, helping to keep your body temperature steady during frigid runs. Plus, this minimalist option is a cinch to roll up into a backpack or carry-on. It’s available in men’s and women’s styles.

Best underlayer: Ibex Men’s Woolies Tech Long-Sleeve Shirt

Ibex

SEE IT

Speaking of layering, a merino wool base is the way to go for those frigid days. This long-sleeve base layer has a nylon lining that will help keep you warm and dry all day. The company’s Pro Tech fabric is comfy and lightweight, but still wicks moisture away and keeps odor under control. They’re available in four matte colors (Deepest Red, Deep Ocean, Black, and Ginger Bisquite), you can pair the zippered top with the Woolies Tech Bottoms for full-body coverage.

Best safety gear: Brooks’ Run Visible Collection

Brooks

SEE IT

Some of the best gifts for runners aren’t only about keeping warm—they’re about keeping people safe. When North America is experiencing the shortest days of the year—with the sun rising around 7 a.m. and setting by 5 p.m.— that means if they’re trying to squeeze in a run before or after work, they’re probably going to be doing at least some of those miles in the dark. Brooks Running’s Run Visible collection features clothing—from hats to windbreakers and leggings—that all come equipped with 3M Scotchlite Carbon Black Stretch Reflective material with neon colors. The material and coloring (which covers the most visible part of the light spectrum in low-light conditions) are strategically placed in so-called motion zones. That includes the joints that move the most while you’re jogging, like elbows, wrists, and ankles, so they can run safely no matter when they’re able to get that jog in.

Best running vest: Nike Aeroloft Women’s Running Vest

Nike

SEE IT

In addition to keeping hands and feet from freezing, maintaining a warm core will keep the rest of your body toasty without adding too much bulk that could make you overheat mid-run. When looking for the best gifts for runners (or yourself), Nike’s Aeroloft running vest provides necessary warmth where you need it most. It also has pockets to store your keys, cell phone, or anything else you might need mid-run.

Best running tights: Reebok Women’s Puremove Leggings

Reebok

SEE IT

Many runners have a love-and-hate relationship with running tights. You need a pair that fits in just the right places for them to work well and feel comfortable. To make that happen, Reebok used its Motion Sense Technology (that the company originally designed for sports bras) to fill its tights with a material that stays liquid-like when in stasis and becomes more solid upon impact. This gives you a full range of movement on a run, while adding support precisely

Best gloves: Arc’teryx Venta Gloves

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Running in the cold sometimes feels like a tease. When you first step outside, the frigid temperatures can be startling, making you want to bundle up with extra pant and shirt layers. But as you ease into the miles, you can quickly overheat with all those clothes. Instead, wear lighter layers (unless the conditions are truly frigid) and focus on making sure your core and extremities are well-protected. Arc’teryx’s Venta glove uses Gore-tex’s Infinium material, which protects from water and wind and is extremely thin and light. Plus the mitten design allows your body heat to keep all your fingers tight and warm.

Best socks: Smartwool Run Cold Weather Crew Socks

Smartwool

SEE IT

In addition to keeping their hands warm, snuggly and comfy feet also make for a happy run. Smartwool’s Run Cold Weather Socks are made of sweat-wicking wool that also provides comfort and durability. The mid-crew length hits that perfect sweet spot of not too short to let wind in but not too long to cause overheating. Lastly, the socks have the company’s Light Elite cushioning that provides targeted support in the ball and heel of the foot. Otherwise, too much layering between your feet and shoes can restrict blood flow.

Best hat: TrailHeads Fleece Ponytail Hat

TrailHeads

SEE IT

When cold weather hits, a good hat is essential. But for those with longer hair, stuffing your long locks into a hat can be annoying at a minimum and cause a headache at the worst. Trailheads’ ponytail hat features an opening in the back to fit your hair through so it doesn’t get trapped, tangled, or bungled in your hat as you run. The piece is also made of quick-drying polyester fleece and flaps so your head and ears can stay warm for the duration of your run.

Best face covering: Nike Therma Sphere Hood 3.0

Nike

SEE IT

When the wind is howling and moisture from your eyes is starting to freeze on your face, it’s time to call in the reinforcements. Nike’s Therma Sphere Hood is a balaclava-style head covering that’s made with Therma-Sphere fabric that helps wick moisture away. It’s designed to be comfortable and customizable, with a foldover design you can adjust to cover more or less of your face and neck as the day warms up.

Best compression sleeves: Hyperice Normatec Go

Hyperice

SEE IT

Colder weather can cause arteries to tighten and restrict blood flow. Runners can recover better from workouts with Hyperice’s Normatec Go. These wearables are designed to be strapped to the runner’s calves and provide a symmetrical massage to increase circulation and reduce pain in the lower body. The Bluetooth-enabled controls and associated app allow the runner to choose between seven levels of compression for a better recovery and the battery lasts up to three hours.

Best warm-weather running gear

Best hydration vest: Salomon Adv Skin 12

Salomon

SEE IT

For those who enjoy long runs or running in all sorts of weather, a hydration vest is a critical tool. The Salomon Adv Skin 12 comes with two soft flasks that fit snuggly on the chest straps, providing quick and easy access to hydration without stopping. It can also hold a hydration bladder for hot days that call for extra water. Additionally, the pack offers plenty of pockets to hold a jacket, snacks for fueling your run, and attachment points for stashing poles. It fits snugly and comfortably without jiggling around on runs, and the pockets are easily accessible so as not to slow you down. It will keep the runner in your life prepared when hitting the trails.

Best T-shirt for trail running: Arc’teryx Cormac Crew SS Shirt

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

When the warm weather comes and a runner is out everyday in the sun, it’s great to have a trusted T-shirt to rely upon. Arc’teryx’s Cormac Crew SS Shirt is designed for trail running and hiking. Made with recycled fabric, this T-shirt is designed to wick moisture away and is odor-resistant. Should the gift recipient get caught in a shower, this shirt also repels water. When the sun is out, this T-shirt provides 50+ UPF protection. And it’s available in five colors.

Best running shorts for women: Kari Traa Nora 2.0

Kari Traa

SEE IT

Good running shorts can be hard to find, but the Nora 2.0 shorts from Kari Traa are a fantastic choice and have been my favorite pair since discovering them. They feature a loose fit with no liner to keep airflow going. The material is very lightweight and effectively wicks away sweat. They feel dry even when running in the Florida heat and humidity, which is very impressive. The elastic waistband offers a drawstring, and there’s a small zippered pocket at the back to store keys or a gel. They are definitely the most comfortable running shorts I’ve used in a long time.

Best running skort: Outdoor Voices The Exercise 3″ Skort

Outdoor Voices

SEE IT

Running skorts are a great alternative to shorts in part because they feature built-in compression shorts to help prevent chafing. The skirt design also means that you won’t be constantly adjusting the legs of your shorts while running. Outdoor Voices’ The Exercise is one of the best skorts for running that I’ve tried for many reasons. The compression shorts are made with sticky grippers at the bottom hem to keep them in place, and they are long enough to prevent chafing successfully. The liner also offers pockets to hold a phone, and there’s a zippered side pocket on the skirt for keys or snacks. The material of the skirt is very flexible and sweat-wicking to keep you moving freely and dry on runs.

Best sunglasses: Tifosi Sunglasses

Tifosi

SEE IT

If you haven’t heard, Tifosi Sunglasses makes some of the most brilliantly colored UVA-/UVB-protected sunglasses on the market. With frames that come in enough colorways to match nearly any aesthetic, the Swank and Swick lines (and more), offer bright polarized lenses that will keep your eyes safe even on the snow or sand. These sunglasses are one of the best gifts for runners, as well as people who like extreme sports, desert hikers, and skiers alike.

The post The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best walking shoes for men in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-walking-shoes-for-men/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284453
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We’ve done the legwork and selected the walking shoes that go the distance.

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for flat feet Blue and gray walking shoes for men for flat feet with hook-and-loop straps for laces OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe
SEE IT

Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud with these shoes.

Best for high arches Black Skechers walking shoes for men Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker
SEE IT

These lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays

Best budget Black walking shoes for men with laces Saucony Men's VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe
SEE IT

These shoes do excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners.

Equipping your feet with the best shoes for walking is the first step to enjoyable, pain-free activities. Though it may sound obvious, taking a walk each day is one of the most beneficial things you can do, yet many don’t because of discomfort. When it comes to these aches, everything from knee soreness to back stiffness can often be traced to improper walking shoes. All muscles and nerves point to your feet during a walk and a lack of arch or ankle support will lead to pains. The best walking shoes for men address this by being well-constructed, high-quality footgear designed for their namesake activity. Shopping for them, however, can sometimes be so frustrating you want to sprint away.

In the shoe emporiums of olden days, polite salespeople accurately measured feet and offered sage advice. These days, many shoe stores at the mall lack helpful experts, and customers are left to their own devices to find the right fit. As for online shopping, trying to buy the most comfortable sneakers through the mail can lead to too many returns and much hassle. How can you tell what fits and what shoe will work best for walking? What types of shoes should you avoid for walking? What type of insole do you need? And what do you call those cold, metal measuring devices? (Answer: Those are called Brannock Devices.) All these considerations can seem intimidating, but consider the following tips and carefully curated suggestions when it comes to shopping time and you’ll find the best walking shoes for men. 

The best walking shoes for men: Reviews & Recommendations 

Best for flat feet: OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe

OrthoFeet

SEE IT

The lightweight, comfortable material of the OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe makes it one of the best walking shoes for flat feet. Many stability and orthopedic shoes can feel heavy and clunky, but the Sprint is airy, yet still supportive. It is a great walking shoe for anyone with mild pronation. The included orthotic insole is a real arch-saver and the adjustable heel grip can be loosened and tightened as needed to give you a snug fit. And, as an added bonus, you only need to tie the walking shoe once thanks to a handy slip-on and go laces. Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud.

Best for standing all day: Brooks Addiction Suede Walker

Brooks

SEE IT

Brooks is an industry leader in walking shoes and Brooks walking shoes do for casual outdoor strolls what Nike shoes have done for basketball. Plus, they are the best walking shoes for standing at work all day. The high-quality material laughs in the face of everyday wear and tear. The non-slip tread keeps you upright, even on ice. And the insole offers the arch support that makes these the best comfortable work shoes needed by many hard-working walkers. Waiters, teachers, nurses—you can appreciate the complete and utter joy of finding good walking shoes, and Brooks shoes will become your new favorite coworker.

Best for high arches: Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker

Skechers

SEE IT

The GOwalk Arch Fit evens out the weight placed on your heel and ankle, making it one of the best Skechers shoes, or shoes in general, with arch support. It’s also great for any type of foot. The Skechers shoes’ heel is raised enough to take the force of a step and spread it out to the entire foot. It also has great cushioning across the entire shoe and there is plenty of room for toes to move. The lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays and the mesh knit fabric keeps your foot cool and comfortable through any workout. 

Best for wide feet: New Balance Men’s 847 V4 Walking Shoe

New Balance

SEE IT

Shopping for the best walking shoe is a multistep process. Measuring your foot is the easy part; now you have to actually find a pair of shoes wide enough to match. New Balance has been providing customers with a nice variety of widths to help get the best fit. And the 847 Walking Shoe is a wonderful, versatile walking shoe that can slip on just about any sized foot. New Balance widths are measured in Wide and X-Wide. According to their size chart, Wide is equivalent to a EE, X-Wide is 4E, and XX-Wide is 6E. The 847 is a stylish and comfortable shoe for walking and offers the benefits of durable, comfortable cushioning from toe to heel. 

Best budget: Saucony Men’s VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe

Saucony

SEE IT

A walking shoe is just a running shoe that takes its time. While there are significant differences between most running shoes and walking shoes (namely heel drop, weight, and ankle support), the Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe does excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners. The cloud-like heel is comfortable for high arches and the arch support adds some support for flat-footed walkers. While it won’t help much with overpronation, if you need a simple walking shoe that can handle most terrains and conditions, the Saucony Cohesion is one of the best men’s walking shoes you can find at that price.

What to consider when shopping for the best walking shoes for men

When shopping for the best walking shoes for men, you can get lost in options and materials. Some athletic shoe companies make bold claims about pressure points and their shoes with arch support. Others boast of high-tech gels and space-age toebox construction. But which of these things, you might wonder, actually makes for the most comfortable sneakers for men.

The answer is different for everyone. Some walking shoes are designed for those with high arches. Others are made for walkers with stability concerns. Therefore, the first step to buying any walking shoe is to take a long, hard look at your feet. 

Feet change as you age. What you thought was a narrow foot in your teens may have shifted to a wider foot in your 30s. Examine not only the length and width of your foot but also the arch. Place your wet foot on a paper bag or piece of cardboard and look at the footprint. If you see one long print, you have flat feet and may benefit from a walking shoe with stabilization. If you see only your toes and your heel, you have a high arch and you’ll need more cushion in the heel and toes to absorb impact.

Your arch can show signs of pronation and supination. These terms refer to how your foot “leans” when walking. Those with low arches often have pronation (leaning inwards), meaning the big toe and inside of the foot are doing most of the work when walking. Supination (leaning outwards) usually affects those with high arches and puts extra strain on the little toes and outside of the foot. Depending on the severity of pronation and supination, a specially made orthotic may be needed for walking. 

But there are over-the-counter walking shoes specifically designed to help moderate overpronation and supination. Stability shoes and motion control shoes can help those with overpronation. Walking shoes with greater flexibility can help those suffering from supination. Walk-in a straight line and take notice of how your foot, ankle, and shin line up. An inward bend is an overpronation. An outward bend is pronation. Armed with this knowledge, you can now begin the quest for your best shoes for walking.   

Related: These are athletic shoes that will give the best and the rest a run for their money.

Flat feet need significant arch support in a comfortable walking shoe

If you have flat feet, the shoe for walking is one that offers great arch support to compensate for overpronation. A stability walking shoe is designed to keep your foot facing front and center instead of rolling inwards. This is accomplished thanks to heavy-duty arch support that positions the foot and keeps it from bending off course. 

Stability shoes may be heavier than other walking shoes due to the beefy arch support and lack of flexibility, but there are still lightweight walking shoes that won’t tire you out. When trying on a stability shoe, pay attention to the arch: it should feel solid, not squishy. While extra soft walking shoes may be comfortable at the shoe store, they won’t help your flat feet and legs feel better after long walks. You want the extra rigidity, not a pillow. 

Motion-control shoes offer even more rigid support than stability shoes. These specialized shoes are used for severe overpronation. They will be heavy but greatly improve the quality of walking. Motion-control shoes will be specially made with insoles designed by your podiatrist. 

Keep in mind that mild pronation is common and many neutral walking shoes that don’t advertise explicit overpronation support will still have some level of arch support built-in.

Get great traction with comfortable shoes

Walking shoes, unlike hiking shoes, are made for the road most traveled. The tire-like tread of a great walking shoe prevents slipping on asphalt, concert, and even wet surfaces. And for active workers on their feet all day, a non-slip tread can be a literal lifesaver. 

A great walking shoe is also a great standing shoe. For standing and walking all day long, you want a shoe you won’t even notice. Heel pain, toe cramps, and more can be avoided by ditching flimsy, ultralight running shoes, and wearing a more supportive walking shoe. The bit of added weight from a walking shoe won’t exhaust feet; the right pair will make those feet happier. The best walking shoes for men are more than footwear: they are tools of the trade. 

For those on the clock, or those who need to get in their recommended 10,000 daily steps, a walking shoe must be durable and comfortable. Who cares if they look a little chunky? If they provide solid support and the feeling of walking in bedroom slippers, appearances can take a backseat. Still, you should be able to find great non-slip walking shoes that look better than two black boxes with string. 

Find soft, comfortable shoes for high arches

Many of the walking shoes on the market are aimed at those with flat feet who need a strong, stable shoe with significant arch support. But for those with high arches, the best walking shoes for men should have a few special features to keep you and your feet comfortable. 

High arches mean the weight and force of every step are concentrated at the heel, ankle, and toes. You may not feel pain in the arch of your foot, but after a walk or day of work, your feet and ankles will feel tired and sore all over. 

Because less of your foot is making contact with the ground, the walking shoe for high arches should have a high heel to strategically position your foot and help evenly distribute the weight. On any shoe, the angle of heel to toe is called the drop. Zero-drop walking shoes are flat, and not ideal for high arches. If the walking shoe doesn’t have a high enough heel, a heel insert can help give you the angle you need. 

You also want a roomy, comfortable toe box—the part of the shoe housing your toes, which needs to be spacious enough to let you move and flex. Crowded toes will make a short walk feel like an entity. And to keep your ankle happy, look for soft and strong support in the back of the shoe. Pinch the ankle of the shoe. If it folds easily and feels like a sock puppet, it won’t have the support high-arched walkers need. 

Why it’s so hard to measure the width of men’s walking shoes

The best walking shoe for men must have the best fit. But if you tried to decipher online width charts or read labels on shoe boxes, you know it’s not as easy as it seems to size. Part of the reason is that there’s no official, set-in-stone, absolute way all shoes are measured. Not only do women’s and men’s sizes not line up, but men’s widths can mean different things depending on the country and the shoe company. 

In America, a medium-width shoe will be labeled as D, M, or R…if it’s labeled at all. This is the shoe width you’ll most likely see on the shelves. Narrow shoes are harder to find and may be labeled S, A, B, N, or C.  A shoe with a 3A width will be narrower than a shoe with a 2A width. Confused? Hang in there. Wider shoe widths are easier to identify; they start at E for slightly wider feet: 2E is wider than E, 3E is wider than 2E, and so on. But some companies don’t use Es and will label wide shoes with a W, for wide, or XW, for extra-wide, just to add to the confusion. And this doesn’t include European shoes, which often don’t display width measurements at all. 

You can measure the width of your foot at home, even without a fancy Brannock Device. Simply trace your barefoot on a piece of paper and measure the distance across at the widest point. Then use an online chart to find your size and width encoded in the mysterious shoe size letter system. For best results, consult the specific brand’s website for sizing information. 

Here are the best men’s walking shoes you can get for less than $50

You don’t need to spend a lot to find a comfortable walking shoe. Even the big names in sneakers have affordable options. You can find a good pair of Nike walking shoes for around $60. And Asics sneakers can drop below the $40 mark. There are plenty of affordable options if you’re willing to sacrifice a few features: Namely style. 

Budget-priced walking shoes will look like a basic, plain shoe. There will be no bright flashes or fun accent colors. You may also be giving up some comfort. Lower-priced men’s walking shoes will be heavier and a little clunkier, without high-tech materials and streamlined edges. If they are on your feet all day, you will notice the added ounces of thick walking shoes.

Of course, cost-effective men’s walking shoes can also lean the other way and be as light as a feather. Except that’s not a good thing. These lightweight shoes are made of practically nothing—a few strands of mesh fabric over the thinnest sole imaginable. The ultra-lightweight sneakers are better for runners who aren’t looking for an all-day shoe. The flimsy materials won’t offer enough support and alignment for flat-footed walkers or enough heel cushion for high-arched walkers. 

You never want to go too cheap with your walking shoes. Anything below $40 can be made out of brittle rubber and fake leather that will crack after a few trips around the neighborhood (if the material is real leather, it will be labeled as such). And avoid any and all footwear sold at the grocery store.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a good walking shoe?

Choose good walking shoes by giving them two quick endurance tests: First, try to twist the walking shoe like wringing out a towel. It should be stiff. If it twists easily, it’s too flimsy and not good for walking. Then bend the toe up. If the bend on the bottom occurs where your toes would bend, that’s good. If it bends back in the arch area of the sole, that’s bad. Shoes should bend where toes bend. Try the shoes on at the end of the day because your feet change sizes as you walk. Don’t assume the shoes will “feel good” once you break them in. If they hurt now, they’ll hurt later. While leather shoes stretch a bit, synthetic materials won’t. And remember: Most people have feet that are two different sizes, so always try on both shoes before buying.

Q: What are the best lightweight walking shoes?

The best lightweight walking shoes have enough support to still be effective. Running shoes are much lighter than walking shoes because they lack the ankle support and arch support of walking shoes. It can be tempting to go for the lightest shoe available, but make sure it still keeps your feet in place. Stability shoes that help overpronation will need enough material and rigidity to keep the foot in place, so flimsy running shoes won’t help. If you want something lightweight, that still provides arch and ankle support, many of the best Brooks walking shoes can be running shoes that are strong yet nimble. 

Q: What is the best shoe for walking all day?

For walking all day, you want a walking shoe that’s able to tackle every condition. Sightseers and travelers need a durable walking shoe with a strong sole. It’s a good idea to pay for a higher-end shoe if you plan to use it constantly. The 1400 V1 Walking Shoe from New Balance is a hearty hightop that can take paved surfaces and rocky roads equally.

The final word on choosing the best walking shoes for men

The best walking shoes for men, or any athletic shoe, will be designed for your specific feet. Flat feet need more shoes with arch support than those with high arches. Some with high arches will need soft, impact-absorbent heels. If you don’t know how your foot bends and twists, ask a professional. You may need a specialized orthotic insole or custom-made option to achieve the most comfortable sneakers. Don’t take your feet for granted; they’re the foundation for your entire life. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bone-conduction headphones in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bone-conduction-headphones/ Mon, 23 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=389546
Four of the best bone-conduction headphones are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Bone-conduction headphones let you approach audio and activity with open ears and an open mind.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best bone-conduction headphones are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones are placed against a white background with a gray gradient. Shokz OpenRun Pro
SEE IT

Impressive battery life, water resistance, and reliable connectivity make these the best pair of bone-conduction headphones around.

Best for kids A pair of pink bone conduction headphones with a unicorn pattern on a blue and white background N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones
SEE IT

Give your kids a pair of headphones that will provide safe entertainment while they stay active.

Best waterproof A pair of blue bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background Shokz OpenSwim
SEE IT

A pair of open-ear headphones that’s waterproof, the OpenSwim suit doing laps in the pool swimmingly.

If you’ve got a bone to pick with the way traditional audio devices disconnect you from the world, there is another option: bone-conduction headphones. Headphones, in general, can play many valuable roles. No (or some) bones about it: they let you jam out to music, dive into podcasts, or dial into phone calls while blocking out environmental noise. This can help you concentrate on tasks, but there are some circumstances when being cut off from what’s around you isn’t optimal. The best bone-conduction headphones let you enjoy all your favorite listening experiences with your ear canal exposed so that you can drive, walk, run, bike, swim, etc.—all while remaining completely aware of your surroundings.

How we chose the best bone-conduction headphones

Bone-conduction headphones are still a relatively new product. But—after consulting academic articles, peer recommendations, real-world user impressions, and our own first-hand tests—we have identified certain models that stand out. Following extensive research, we selected pairs that address the specific needs of athletics, work environments, and age. We chose units that were easy to use, incorporated the features we love about traditional headphones, and prioritized sound quality.

The best bone-conduction headphones: Reviews & Recommendations

Sitting right outside the ear on the jaw, bone-conduction headphones are a different physical and acoustic experience than most people are used to. But different can be good. Here are our picks for the best bone-conduction headphones to help keep you in the hear and now.

Best overall: Shokz OpenRun Pro

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Shokz is dedicated to producing top-tier bone-conducting headphones, and the OpenRun Pro is the company’s most advanced model, employing ninth-generation technology to boost sound quality.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Charge time: 1 hour
  • Water resistance: IP55
  • Microphone: Dual noise-canceling

Pros

  • Good sound quality
  • Impressive battery life and quick charging
  • Sweat-resistant for intense exercise

Cons

  • Hard to replace charging cable
  • Audio quality can’t hold up against traditional headphones

Without a doubt, Shokz has cornered the bone-conduction headphone market. The company produces thoughtfully engineered, top-quality products, creating an audio experience to complement the activities you enjoy. The OpenRun Pro is an excellent pair of bone-conduction headphones. They are ideal for just about any situation but are great headphones for running. Available in four colors and two band sizes, the OpenRun Pro fits gently, yet securely, around the back of the head, looping around the ears and resting against the temples.

The headphones employ patented ninth-generation bone-conduction technology. They are equipped with Bluetooth 5.1 (using the SBC codec) and feature PremiumPitch 2.0 signal processing, which prevents bleed, minimizes distortion, and produces a more dynamic bass with minimal vibrations. The battery lasts 10 hours, and you can get a full charge in an hour. Or, with a quick five-minute charge, you’ll get up to 1.5 hours of battery life. Each pair comes with a proprietary magnetic USB charging cable, which easily snaps onto the charging contacts on the headphones.

A dual noise-canceling mic will let you make clear calls. An IP55 rating means this pair can withstand dirt, dust, and sweat. A built-in moisture detector will let you know when it’s getting wet. Keep in mind that while the OpenRun Pro is water-resistant, it’s not designed to be fully submerged in the pool, and you won’t want to run in too heavy of rain with it either. If you would prefer more water resistance, the OpenRun offers many of the same features with an IP67 rating.

Best waterproof: Shokz OpenSwim

SHOKZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The OpenSwim have an IP68 rating, which means they can be fully submerged in water for up to two hours; you can swim with them without making terrible sacrifices regarding audio quality.

Specs:

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz 
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP68
  • Microphone: None

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Ample storage for songs and audiobooks
  • Comfortably fits under swim cap

Cons

  • Single-purpose headphones
  • No Bluetooth connection
  • Limited color options

Shokz designed the OpenSwim specifically to deliver your favorite music, audiobooks, and podcasts while swimming. These headphones feature an IP68 rating, fit comfortably under a swim cap, and you can swim as deep as 2 meters for up to two hours at a time. Unfortunately, they are not Bluetooth compatible. But they can store up to 1,200 songs (4 GB) of various file types, including MP3, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. The OpenSwim headphones feature the same command controls and PremiumPitch 2.0 technology as other Shokz open-ear headphones. So, while you won’t be able to stream, you can listen to your favorites with solid, satisfying sound quality. They even come with a noseclip and earplugs.

Best for calls: Shokz OpenComm2 UC

Shokz

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A DSP noise-canceling microphone means the OpenComm2 headphones are able to isolate your voice while talking, drowning out any surrounding din but keeping you in tune with your environment.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 16 hours of talk time // 8 hours of listening time
  • Charge time: 1 hour
  • Water resistance: IP55
  • Microphone: DSP noise-canceling boom microphone

Pros

  • Comfortable for long wear
  • Extended battery life for long phone calls
  • Boom microphone enhances call quality

Cons

  • Shape is hard to store
  • Some sound bleed might limit private conversations

The OpenComm2 UC headphones prioritize clear communication using an adjustable DSP boom microphone. The boom mic suppresses background noise and highlights your voice when positioned near your mouth. Though the person on the other end of the line won’t pick up on your environment’s sounds, the open-ear headphones will ensure you can hear the person talking on the phone and the one right in front of you. The OpenComm2 are Zoom Certified, offering seamless software integration and Zoom controls on the dedicated headset buttons. They are a great pair of headphones for work, as a result.

The OpenComm2 system lets you bypass your car’s choppy stereo if you have to make a call on the road without cutting yourself off from the sound of traffic. You can also stay on the call when you’re at a job site or keep connected during a busy commute, all without losing situational awareness. You can get up to 16 hours of talk time or eight hours of listening time, and with Quick Charge, you’ll get a replenished two hours of battery life in just five minutes.

Best for multitasking: HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These waterproof, sweatproof headphones will hold up as you pump iron or just rearrange your living room.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 10-minute quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP67
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • IP67 rated
  • High sound quality
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Proprietary charger

Using your sweaty hands to remove your headphones because someone is asking to use the treadmill is common in the gym. So is taking your earbuds out or headphones off repeatedly while roommates/family/friends try to talk to you as you get chores done. Keep your headphones on while keeping your ears open with these sport-friendly HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones. They are IP67 rated, meaning sweat and water won’t get in the way of completing your reps—whether lifting weights or emptying the washer.

An eight-hour battery life gives you all-day tunes power, and 10-minute quick charging gives you two hours of power. The sound quality is superb compared to other bone-conduction headphones, with deep bass and a solid range of highs and lows thanks to a strong Bluetooth 5.2 connection. A noise-canceling microphone means you can take calls without the background bleeding into your conversation. However, a proprietary charger means you’ll be tuneless if you lose power on the go, so prep before you step.

Best for kids: N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones

N/0

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These headphones include a volume limit of 85 decibels, and the open-ear design means your child will always be able to hear the world around them and when you call for them.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 1-hour quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Volume limiter keeps kids’ hearing safe
  • Adjustable band can grow with your child

Cons

  • Soundbeaming technology is difficult to grasp
  • Susceptible to water damage
  • No noise cancellation means they’re not great for travel

These open-ear headphones aren’t exactly the same as bone-conduction headphones, but the form factor and effect are similar. With soundbeaming speakers resting outside the ear on the cheekbones, these headphones ensure your active child can stay alert to their surroundings even when listening to their favorite songs. The adjustable band is suitable for children ages 4 to 15. With a volume limit of 85 decibels, these headphones go above and beyond to address any concerns you might have for their awareness or hearing. N/0 equipped these headphones with Bluetooth 5.0, eight hours of battery, and an automatic sensor to control playback. An IP54 rating means you won’t have to worry about a few spills or drops in the dirt. Whether skateboarding, biking, or just running around the backyard, your kids can enjoy music and mobility safely.

Best budget: Guudsoud Lite Bone Conduction Headphones

Guudsoud

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If bone conduction is new to you, you might not be ready to shell out $100 or more. The Guudsoud headphones produce satisfying sound quality and suitable specs in a great intro pair.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 6-10 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Useful, responsive multifunction button
  • Sound quality is good for the price point

Cons

  • Flimsy build
  • Sound quality could be improved
  • Battery life is just okay

If you want to try out bone conduction but are not ready to invest in a high-end pair, this cheap model from Guudsoud might be right for you. Available for less than $40, they are equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, a built-in microphone, multifunction buttons, and an adjustable band for comfort. The battery can last up to 10 hours, and a 15-minute quick charge provides one hour of playback. Each pair comes with a USB charging cable and a pair of earplugs so you can create custom noise cancellation.

What to consider when buying the best bone-conduction headphones

If your mom always warns you not to listen to your headphones while walking home at night, or you need to hear the traffic behind you as you pedal to work, try out the best bone-conduction headphones. To determine which pair will work best for your needs, you’ll want to consider where and when you’ll be using them the most. You’ll also want to ensure you understand how they work, especially if this is your first pair of bone-conduction headphones.

First of all, what is bone conduction, and how does it work?

Bone-conduction headphones allow you to experience audio sans any direct interaction with your ear canal or eardrum. While this may sound like some new-fangled, tech-heavy sorcery, there is evidence that bone conduction has been around for centuries. It is rumored that Beethoven relied on bone conduction to compose music after losing his hearing by attaching a metal rod to his piano and biting down on it as he played. But how does it work? 

Typically, sound waves travel through the air and are funneled through the ear canal to the eardrums. They are then decoded into vibrations and sent to the inner ear (or cochlea), which is connected to the auditory nerve. When the vibrations hit the inner ear fluid, tiny hair cells start to convulse, creating electrical pulses that travel up the auditory nerve to the brain. This process is called air conduction. Bone conduction completely avoids the eardrum, which is what’s targeted by the miniature speaker in traditional earbuds, and relies on a transducer of another sort to convert sound waves into vibrations and send those through the facial bones to be received by the inner ear. Essentially, the vibrations the cochlea receives are the same no matter how you receive them. They are simply sent via a different pathway. 

This concept has even been used in reverse. The Sony WF-1000XM4 earphones include a bone-conduction sensor that picks up the vibrations from your voice during calls to help enable clearer speech without picking up ambient sound.

Who should use bone-conduction headphones?

Medically, bone-conduction headphones benefit those experiencing conductive hearing loss, a condition that directly affects the transmission of sound through the eardrums. Conductive hearing loss is just one way the auditory system can be disrupted, so bone-conduction headphones won’t work for everyone with hearing difficulties. 

Bone-conduction headphones are also helpful for those who need to maintain situational awareness while they enjoy their music. These headphones provide an additional layer of safety for bikers, hikers, drivers, or anyone who needs to be aware of their surroundings. Active in dense urban environments? Bone conduction makes for great running headphones. Bone-conduction headphones are also particularly great for swimmers. Air conduction is heavily suppressed when we are underwater, but the vibrations created by bone conduction can still be transmitted. That means a pair of bone-conduction headphones with an Ingress Protection rating of IP68 (aka waterproof) can keep you connected to your workout playlist lap after lap. 

Now, bone conduction won’t make your entire face shake, rattle, and roll, so you don’t need to worry about experiencing discomfort while you listen. In fact, many report that these headphones are secure, comfortable, and easy to wear. However, if you are sensitive to pressure, there is a chance that you may experience dizziness or headaches after a long stretch of listening.

How’s the sound quality?

If you’re an audiophile searching for your next pair of headphones, chances are bone conduction isn’t going to be what you’re looking for. That being said, the overall audio quality of these headsets can certainly get you through a tough training session or walk to work. At high volumes, audio can start to distort or get crunchy and an expansive mix isn’t really possible. However, with a quality model, you will still get to experience impactful bass. You’ll feel the vibrations instead of highly pressurized waves from over-ear cans. 

Just remember that even the best bone-conduction headphones aren’t meant to fit or even necessarily sound like traditional headphones or earbuds. If you haven’t used bone-conduction headphones before, you might feel inclined to turn up the volume as loud as it can go in an attempt to recreate that natural, passive noise cancellation that every other type of headphone relies on. Remember that nothing is blocking your ear canal, which means that you will purposefully be able to hear your surroundings clearly. Maxing out the volume won’t affect that, but it could lead to hearing loss down the road.

Can bone-conduction headphones use Bluetooth?

There are wireless bone-conduction headphones that use Bluetooth 4.2 and higher to connect to devices such as cellphones and computers. Set up and pairing is no different with Bluetooth bone-conduction headphones than connecting any other type of Bluetooth headphones. Some may even have onboard controls like play, pause, and skip for your streaming services. Other models are more like a portable MP3 player, with the ability to store hours of songs internally. Remember the iPod shuffle? That’s what you’ll be getting. It’s an excellent option for folks who want to jam out to a curated playlist without their phone.

Can you take phone calls with bone-conduction headphones?

Many companies equip their bone-conduction headphones with a microphone so you can answer calls on the go. While the headphones themselves can’t employ any passive or active noise cancellation to enhance your listening experience, some models can use technology to make calls crisp and clear. The headphones with mic use various means to minimize outside sound—like wind, traffic, etc.—ensuring that the person you’re talking to can hear you without interruption. Just remember that bone-conduction headphones are subject to more sound bleed than traditional units, so you’ll want to be conscientious about volume when it comes to private calls.

FAQs

Q: How much do bone-conduction headphones cost?

Generally, the best bone-conduction headphones cost between $80 and $150. It’s important to go with a quality pair to ensure you’re investing in a safe and well-designed model. Though the history of bone-conduction technology is long, its application to commercial headphones is relatively new, which means you’ll have the most success with an established brand, like Shokz.

Q: Can bone-conduction headphones cause hearing loss?

Any long-term exposure to loud noise can cause damage, potentially leading to hearing loss; this includes listening to music at loud volumes with any headphones. At this time, there is no evidence to support the claim that bone-conduction headphones put you at significantly more risk for hearing loss than any other headphone type, including earbuds and over-the-ear models. It’s important to remember that bone-conduction headphones will not block out surrounding noise, so you should not try to block out additional sound by turning the volume up too loud.

Q: Can you wear glasses with Shokz?

Yes, you can wear your glasses while using Shokz headphones. The company recommends putting the headphones on first and then sliding your glasses into place for a more secure fit. You can also wear them underneath a helmet, and you can wear the waterproof model with a swim cap covering the tips of your ears.

Q: Do bone-conduction headphones sound good?

They say beauty is in the eye of the beholder, and the same goes for bone-conduction headphones. Imagine you’re holding a phone speaker up to your ear—that’s what it’s like to wear a pair of bone-conduction headphones. Will they perform the same as headphones with active noise cancellation? No. If hearing street sounds and skipping fully immersive earbuds is music to your ears, however, you’ll be happy going with bone conduction.

Final thoughts on the best bone-conduction headphones

Chances are you’re either an experienced bone-conduction headphones user or a novice looking to see if these air-conduction alternatives are right for you. Regardless of your familiarity, finding the right pair means homing in on when and where you’ll use them most. Think about your surroundings and consider your priorities regarding sound quality, microphone use, and waterproof rating, then shop accordingly. If you’re accustomed to traditional earphones or over-ear models, get ready to be surprised by the best bone-conduction headphones.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hot tubs of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hot-tubs/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586348
Best hot tubs sliced header
Tony Ware

Soak in our hot tubs guide and relax, knowing you're not getting lukewarm choices. We've done the legwork so you can unwind your body.

The post The best hot tubs of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best hot tubs sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AquaRest AR-150 Select AquaRest AR-150 Select
SEE IT

Moderately priced, this model has all the basic features you want in an entry-level, but highly-rated, spa.

Best inflatable Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus
SEE IT

This is a basic, fairly inexpensive hot tub for when you either don’t want to dedicate the money or space to a permanent spa.

Best for parties Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX hot tub Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX
SEE IT

This seven-person spa is what you picture every time we talk about hot tubs and their legacy in pop culture.

Since the discovery of fire, humans have sought to relax their stressed-out, overworked, and underpaid bodies in a heated bucket of near-boiling water. We have achieved this effect with hot stones, burning charcoal, and straight-up fire. And then came electricity, which meant that we could build actual hot tubs that weren’t just bowls of what was, effectively, human soup. Modern hot tubs (or spas, depending on your preference) have advanced features like powerful jets massaging your back and lower body. They have filters to keep the water clean and devoid of as much human by-product as possible, a necessity since, unlike in the olden days, we often share space in a hot tub. The truth is that you’re tired. We’re all tired. We dream of coming home after a long day of trudging through society, kick off most of our clothes, and find ultimate relaxation in 104-degree water. So, to save your limbs and time, we’ve done the legwork and found you the best hot tubs of 2023.

How we chose the best hot tubs

There are three types of hot tubs: built-in (below ground, often part of a pool), above ground, and time machine. Since built-in hot tubs can be any shape or size, depending on multiple pool-construction-related variables, and hot tub time machines aren’t available to the public, we focused on above-ground hot tubs. There are plenty of retailers specifically selling hot tubs and hot tub supplies. So finding the best hot tubs comes down to sticking with popular, public-facing retailers (Wayfair, Walmart) and looking for the best-reviewed hot tubs that fit within predetermined categories. What we end up with is a list containing a few very popular hot tubs, with one or two unique hot tubs mixed in. 

The best hot tubs: Reviews & Recommendations

Since their inception, modern hot tubs have become iconic pop culture backyard appliances. From entire episodes of TV centered around a hot tub, to the implied cultural connotations of owning one in the 1970s, it’s been difficult to deny that hot tubs are, and always will be, a thing. While they did take a hit for a little while (recessions will do that), they have once again become a very popular lanai accessory, thanks to lower voltage requirements and semi-affordable pricing. 

What are you looking for in a hot tub? Are you looking for an all-around functional general hot tub with dozens of jets? Or perhaps something a bit more romantic. Perhaps it’s all about party time or just having something to inflate and toss on the lawn for impromptu soak sessions. Or maybe you just want to lounge and let the world’s troubles float away. Regardless, this list has the hot tub you’re looking for, with or without Roger and Virginia Klarvin.

Best overall: AquaRest AR-150 Select

AquaRest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 156 gallons
  • Occupancy: 4-person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 12

Pros

  • Waterfall feature
  • Cup holders
  • Underwater LED lights

Cons

  • Can still feel a bit crowded
  • Takes a while to heat up

The AquaRest AR-150 is the spa you purchase when you don’t know anything about hot tubs and don’t want to spend a fortune. It’s moderately priced and has all the basic features you want in an entry-level, but highly-rated, spa. It has 12 jets, some built-in cup holders, LED lighting for setting the mood, and that half-boiling water your muscles need. But you might want to plan ahead for relaxation. As it runs off 120V (rather than 220V), it takes like a day to hit its maximum temp of 104°F. But while it’s heating up, take comfort in a 1.5hp customizable massage delivered through stainless steel jets.

It comes with a nice locking cover to keep out unsupervised toddlers and yard trash, but if you want steps, you’ll have to purchase them separately. It advertises that it can fit four people with little issue, but if y’all aren’t comfortable with innocent shoulder, hip, and toe touching, you might want to limit the capacity to three people. Regardless, with its patented Easy Kleen water filtration system, you don’t have to fret about dirty bits sullying the soup. AquaRest is one of the top online spa brands, and AquaRest AR-150 Select sits at the top of its offerings.

Best budget: Lifesmart Spas LS200

Lifesmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 220 gallon
  • Occupancy: 4 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 13

Pros

  • High water capacity
  • Includes water filter
  • It’s not square

Cons

  • Lacks fancy features
  • No ozone purification

Lifesmart Spas LS200 shaves off the corners of the classic square hot tub to make a space-saving round spa with 13 jets powered by a 1hp pump. Based on price comparisons, it appears that the shape of a spa is directly reflected in the cost. That is, circles cost a bit less than squares, so this spa is the best budget spa. It usually costs less than $3k (especially during near-constant sales events), and while it doesn’t come with stairs, you can just tip your body into the spa without worrying about hitting a squared edge. 

The only real downside to a circle spa, even if it does hold a few more gallons than other spas, is it doesn’t have room for ozone purification plumbing. Though, it should be noted that according to the official product page, the shape is oval. That might not be a circle, but it’s close enough in the world of spas. Actually, the oval shape creates more opportunities to put the spa wherever you want: on the porch, in the yard, in the living room. The Lifesmart Spas LS200 is a great entry-level spa for families looking to step up their water-based massage game.

Best for couples: USA Spas OH-SM

USA Spas

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 190 gallons
  • Occupancy: 2 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 16

Pros

  • Includes ozonator
  • Acrylic instead of plastic
  • Well placed jets

Cons

  • Not good for families
  • Doesn’t come with steps

The USA Spas OH-SM is a spa built for two. There’s gonna be some touching, some twisting of limbs, and probably some other stuff that is best left to the imagination. Basically, leave your swimsuit on the shelf cause things are about to get freaky in this acrylic hot tub with 16 powerful jets placed in just the right places. Like, there are six jets right on your lower back, or if you’re sinking in a bit to get closer to your partner, they’ll hit your shoulders perfectly. If you are alone in the hot tub (which is perfectly acceptable), you have back and foot jets. 

This spa runs on 120V with a single 1.5hp pump. Its nice little oval shape will fit just about anywhere in or around your house. However, if you want a bit of privacy, we suggest purchasing a gazebo and some curtains. Your HOA might not approve of it sitting in your front yard, though. They are the worst. But what’s not the worst is crystal clear water, no matter the amount of flop sweat you are pumping into it. That’s provided by the built-in ozonator, which keeps that water nice and crisp. If it’s just the two of you, then the USA Spas OH-SM spa is perfect for everyday relaxation with your partner.

Best Inflatable: Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus

Intex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 210 gallons
  • Occupancy: 6 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Total jets: 170

Pros

  • Cheap
  • Built-in pump
  • 170 bubble jets

Cons

  • No ozonator
  • No fancy features
  • Questionable durability

How the inflatable Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus fits 170 bubble jets in such a moderately normal-sized spa is beyond us. But you gotta have some catch to market an inflatable hot tub properly. Because it’s an inflatable, it doesn’t have the insulation or structural integrity of a solid hot tub, and it takes a while to fill up with fresh water from the hose every time you want to chill out while heating up. It doesn’t have an ozonator but does have a hard water treatment system to keep the water gentle on your clothes and skin. 

This is a very basic, fairly inexpensive hot tub for when you either don’t want to spend the money on a stationary one or like blowing things up to sit in them. In some ways, it’s a kiddie pool for adults, with a bunch of body massaging jets. But for some of us, it’s the perfect hot tub for quick fun and if we have limited space. The Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus isn’t some luxury hot tub, but it’ll do the job and fit conveniently in the storage shed

Best lounge seat: Luxury Spas WS-595

Luxury Spas

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 365 gallons
  • Occupancy: 3
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 47

Pros

  • 47 adjustable jets
  • Includes steps
  • Bluetooth sound system
  • Lounge seating
  • Cons
  • 3rd person seating is awkward
  • Expensive when not on sale

While the third-person seat is a bit awkward, the Luxury Spas WS-595 spa offers some of the best features in a modern hot tub. And since it’s a lounge-style hot tub, you don’t have to share with your weird neighbors peeking over the fence. Honestly, this is a two-person spa with room for a floating drink cooler. Pull out a fresh La Croix, put on some Sade over the built-in Bluetooth speakers, turn the LED lights to a soft purple, and let the 47 adjustable jets take the pain away. With a friend, partner, or your mom. Who are we to judge who you hot tub with? 

The filter runs continuously, even when not in use, to keep the water clean and sanitary, while the ozonator keeps the water crisp and clear. This is all made capable by the 240V of power running through the spa. And that power is what provides a powerful hydro-massage through, did we mention, 47 freaking jets? While it can get a bit expensive when not on sale, this is one of the most packed-with-features spas on the market. While not intended for families or large groups, you can take turns because the Luxury Spas WS-595 is worth it.

Best for parties: Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX

Lifesmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 285 gallon
  • Occupancy: 7 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 65

Pros

  • Waterfall feature
  • Multi-color LEDs
  • Digital control panel

Cons

  • Lacks additional features
  • Doesn’t include steps

Strangely, there are many multi-thousand-dollar spas that don’t include steps, but you’ll want to get some for the Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX because people will be in and out of it all night. Thankfully, the water will never get gross, no matter how much salsa is in play, thanks to a built-in filter and ozonator. This is the party spa that you picture every time we talk about hot tubs and their legacy in pop culture. It seats seven people fairly comfortably, without too much skin touching or legs crossing over. Unless that’s your intent. Then there’s plenty of room for that. 

The 65 jets include a 14-jet nozzle turbo blaster and four-foot jets. It runs on 220V and is super insulated to keep electricity costs down and the water hot. It does lack some additional features, like speakers, but has a waterfall feature, so that’s something at least. There is also a thermal locking cover so that you can heat up the tub, and it’ll maintain temp while you finish your chores and prepare that tasty seven-layer dip. The real selling point of this hot tub is its actual price point, which is right around $4,000. Within the spa market, this is quite fair for a seven-person hot tub, making the Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX the perfect addition to your party.

What to consider before buying the best hot tubs

If you are about to invest thousands in a hot tub, you will want to do your research. That is, read the product descriptions and customer reviews to suss out any consistent issues. Ignore the ones about delivery; we always have to cross our fingers there. So, when it comes down to purchasing a new hot tub for the patio, you’ll want to consider at least the type, its human capacity, and any additional features.

Type

There are two main types of hot tubs: standard and plug-and-play. Plug-and-play is named as such because you can literally set it up and plug it into a standard 110V outlet. Most come with shielded cables to extend the plug and prevent water and electricity mixing. Most plug-and-play hot tubs are constructed from some type of polyethylene and usually take a little while to heat up. 

Meanwhile, standard hot tubs have stronger jets, are constructed from acrylic, and run off 220V. So, if you don’t have a 220V outlet handy (the one you do have is probably occupied by your clothes dryer), an electrician can install one. It’s worth it because they heat up faster and are a bit more durable in the long run. However, these types of spa are generally more expensive. 

Capacity

How many people do you plan on accommodating with your hot tub? Is it for the family? For parties? For romantic soaks? The trouble is, some hot tubs intended for two can actually comfortably fit four, while some hot tubs intended for seven can only fit five without too much weird shoulder touching. The general rule of thumb is for any hot tub not intended for only two people subtract one from the max capacity. 

Features

From LED lighting to neat little waterfalls to the type of jet output and Bluetooth speakers, there are plenty of variable features to look for in a hot tub. Of course, the more features a hot tub has, the more electricity it uses and the higher the initial price. Also, check if the spa you’re buying has a locking cover (for safety and keeping the heat in) and stairs. You may have to buy stairs separately; it’s the easiest way to get in and out. 

FAQs

Q: What’s an ozonator?

An ozonator produces ozone gas. This water treatment process removes heavy chemicals and kills bacteria, fungus, and protozoa better than any other type of water treatment process. You can’t just spray Windex in your hot tub and expect it to get clean. While not all hot tubs have an ozonator, the ones that do produce crystal-clear water and bacteria-free environments, requiring less annual cleaning.

Q: How hot should my spa be?

Most hot tubs max out at 104°F. The safe range is between 100°F (38°C) and 104°F, but kids should be limited to a lower temp, especially if they are going to be in there for a while. It should be noted that the longer you sit in water hotter than your internal temperature, the more it affects your body. Spas are meant to be used in short bursts, as sitting in hot water for too long can cause light-headedness, overheating, and dehydration. 

Q: Can I move my hot tub once it’s in place?

If it’s inflatable, you can move it whenever you want (when it’s not filled). If it’s not, it’s several hundred pounds empty and will be quite a chore to move. It’s not impossible, just really difficult. Plus it should move to a flat, level foundation. So when you get your spa, be sure to pick just the right spot for it because it’s going to be there for a while. 

Final thoughts on the best hot tubs

Owning a hot tub is an experience. It’s a relaxing way to end any day, soaking in super hot water with jets pummelling your exhausted muscles. But it’s also an investment, one that requires planning and a moderate amount of thought. It also requires maintenance and cleaning. Regardless, there are few activities more entertaining in the home than hopping in the hot tub with some close friends and a case of something cool to drink. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hot tubs of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best rechargeable flashlights of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-rechargeable-flashlights/ Mon, 06 Nov 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586163
Four of the best rechargeable flashlights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Light up your life without using disposable batteries.

The post The best rechargeable flashlights of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best rechargeable flashlights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The black OLIGHT S2R II rechargeable flashlight is placed against a white background. OLIGHT S2R II
SEE IT

The S2R II is a bright light with up to 60 hours of runtime.

Best budget The RECHOO S3000L Flashlight and its box, battery, and charger placed against a white background. RECHOO S3000L Flashlight
SEE IT

This rechargeable flashlight won’t break the bank.

Best watch A tan and soft gold Garmin epix Pro Sapphire is place in front of a white background with a gray gradient. Garmin epix Pro (Gen 2)
SEE IT

This smartwatch offers a 200 lumen dimmable flashlight right on your wrist.

Rechargeable flashlights are extremely useful tools to keep on hand and are a great way to reduce your impact on the environment. Plus, you won’t need to make sure you have the right type of batteries on hand, saving space in your drawers. Many are even more powerful than battery-powered options. Like all flashlights, rechargeable ones come in all shapes and sizes suitable for different situations. If you’re looking to illuminate your life, the best rechargeable flashlights will be there to lend a hand. 

How we chose the best rechargeable flashlights

When selecting the best rechargeable flashlights included in this guide, we evaluated numerous brands and models to choose the best for a variety of situations. Brightness and battery life were two of the most important aspects of the lights we looked at, as a dim flashlight that doesn’t last very long isn’t useful to anyone. We also considered ease of charging, size, waterproofing, and durability. Finally, some flashlights offer extra features that set them apart, such as the ability to charge other devices, magnetic parts, clips, and different lighting modes. We made our decisions based on a mix of hands-on testing, editorial reviews, and user feedback. 

The best rechargeable flashlights of 2023: Reviews & Recommendations

For many people, your smartphone is the only rechargeable flashlight you might think you need. But you should probably conserve phone battery if you’re in the kind of situation where you really need to use a flashlight (and you don’t want to drop that expensive phone trying to fish it out of your pocket in the dark, cracking the screen). So dedicated rechargeable flashlights are ideal for a range of needs, from filling out emergency kits, adding light on camping trips, or illuminating your car while tinkering away. The options below are sure to add light to any situation. 

Best overall: OLIGHT S2R II

OLIGHT

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 1,150 Lumens
  • Charging method: Proprietary magnetic charger
  • Max run time: 60 hours
  • Weight: 3.4 ounces
  • Dimensions: ‎0.91 x 0.91 x 3.94 inches

Pros

  • Features a magnetic base and clip
  • Six lighting modes
  • Provides a max throw of 443 feet
  • IPX8 rated and drop tested to 4.9 feet

Cons

  • Controls aren’t intuitive
  • Pricey

The OLIGHT S2R II earns our top spot thanks to its superb brightness, long battery life, and rugged design. It offers up to 1,150 lumens with 4,600 candelas and a maximum throw of 443 feet. It’s an intensely bright light, and because of that, the brightest setting is best used exclusively outdoors. Luckily, you can select between turbo (the brightest setting), moonlight, and strobe mode for more control over your light. 

One feature that makes the S2R II stand out is the battery indicator. Not many rechargeable flashlights offer that. Green, yellow, and red lights tell you how much charge is left in the battery, so you aren’t guessing before heading out into the night. The light charges with the included MCC 1A charger, a magnetic charging system that snaps onto the end of the flashlight. 

The S2R II offers six different lighting modes, including turbo, moonlight, and strobe. The dimmest setting provides a run time of 60 days, while the brightest will last for just under four hours. It’s made of a textured aluminum alloy so that it won’t slip out of your hand. And if it does happen to fall, it’s drop-tested to 4.9 feet. It also features an IPX8 rating, so it will survive even if it falls in a puddle. 

Best budget: RECHOO S3000L Flashlight

RECHOO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 1,500 Lumens
  • Charging method: USB-C
  • Max run time: 10 hours
  • Weight: 5.6 ounces
  • Dimensions: 5.45 x 1.05 x 5.45 inches

Pros

  • Charges via USB-C
  • IP65 rated
  • 5 lighting modes including a SOS mode
  • Affordable
  • Telescoping head to adjust the beam

Cons

  • Battery life isn’t as good as others

Most rechargeable flashlights are relatively expensive, but the RECHOO S3000L offers a more affordable alternative. Despite its $15 price, it still has plenty to offer, making it a worthy choice for emergency kits or daily use. It provides up to 1,500 lumens, which is plenty of brightness for most situations. Unfortunately, RECHOO doesn’t provide a max throw or candela, but it does feature a telescoping design that allows you to adjust the beam width depending on what you need. 

The S3000L offers five different lighting modes, which include three brightness levels and a one-click emergency mode. It is made of military-grade aluminum alloy and is built to be highly durable, with an IP65 rating. A clip on the side allows you to keep it secure in a pocket, and the textured metal keeps it from slipping from your hand.

One thing we really like about this light, besides its price, is that it charges via USB-C, which is what most devices use these days. That means you’ll likely always have one on hand. Unfortunately, you’ll be charging it more than other options. On the dimmest setting, it only offers around 10 hours of battery life, which is lower than other options on our list. But the price is hard to beat. 

Best compact: Goal Zero Lighthouse Micro Flash

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 120 Lumens in flashlight mode, 150 as a lantern
  • Charging method: USB
  • Max run time: Up to 7 days
  • Weight: 2.4 ounces
  • Dimensions: 3.66 x 1.5 inches

Pros

  • Functions as a flashlight or lantern
  • IPX6 rated
  • Very compact and lightweight
  • Built-in battery indicator 

Cons

  • Not very bright

If weight and size are key considerations for you, perhaps because you’re looking for a rechargeable flashlight for backpacking, the Goal Zero Lighthouse Micro Flash is the best option. It weighs just 2.4 ounces and is only 3.66 inches long, so it won’t take up hardly any space in your pack. It’s also IPX6-rated and built to last. 

One unique feature of this Goal Zero light is that it can work as a lantern or flashlight. A ring at the top allows you to hang it from your tent or backpack when you want broad, filling light. In lantern mode, it offers up to 150 lumens. You’ll get up to 120 lumens when using it as a flashlight. There are plenty of different modes to adjust the brightness as well.

Depending on what brightness setting you use, you’ll get anywhere from 7 to 170 hours of runtime. It charges via USB and can be fully charged within 3.5 hours. Should you need more battery life when in the backcountry, you can pick up the Nomad 5 solar panel, which will provide the same charge time as plugging into the wall if you have enough sun (and Goal Zero makes some of our favorite solar generators, so you can trust it works). Should you want a similar light that can also charge other devices, the Lighthouse Micro Charge offers the same light features but with the additional feature of serving as a battery pack.

Best watch: Garmin epix Pro (Gen 2) Smartwatch

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 200 Lumens
  • Charging method: Proprietary charger
  • Max run time: Up to 16 days
  • Weight: 2.22 ounces (42mm version)
  • Dimensions: 1.65 x 1.65 x 0.56 inches (42mm version)

Pros

  • Available in three sizes and three colors
  • Excellent battery life
  • Bright, colorful display
  • Battery life offers variable intensity, a strobe mode, and red safety light
  • Lots of performance and health tools

Cons

  • Expensive

It may seem odd to include a watch in a list of the best rechargeable flashlights. But this Garmin smartwatch features a built-in LED flashlight that is extremely useful. The light is built into the bezel of the watch on the top end so that it naturally points in a useful direction without needing to contort your wrist awkwardly. A quick double tap of a button turns it on, and you can select between four different intensity levels, a red mode, and a strobe function. 

I find myself using the flashlight on my epix Pro on a nearly daily basis. It’s perfect for early morning walks in the dark with my dog or trying to find things in the back of dark cabinets. At 200 lumens, it is surprisingly bright for how little it is, easily illuminating what I need. 

Beyond the flashlight, the epix Pro is an incredibly capable fitness watch. It features a long list of sensors to track and calculate a variety of health and performance metrics, including heart rate, sleep, VO2 max, and much more. It can even act as an ECG to detect irregular heart rhythms. The built-in adaptive training tools can help you keep your fitness progressing. You’ll have access to detailed maps with topographic information, weather overlays, and plenty of navigation tools. And it’s built to military standards for thermal, shock, and water resistance. If you want a flashlight that is so much more and can keep your hands free, the Garmin epix Pro is hard to ignore. 

Best headlamp: BioLite HeadLamp 325

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: ‎325 Lumen
  • Candela: Not provided
  • Charging method: microUSB
  • Max run time: ‎40 hours
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces
  • Dimensions: ‎2.05 x 1.97 x 8.27 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Sits flat and is stable on the head
  • Charges via microUSB
  • Material is moisture-wicking

Cons

  • Hard to open the charger

If bulky, heavy headlamps make night hikes a headache, consider the BioLite HeadLamp 325, a lightweight light in the dark. It only weighs 1.7 ounces, and it doesn’t bounce around while running or doing a cartwheel. The headlamp charges via microUSB—an incredibly common charger you most likely already have around the house. A rear reflective strip alerts those behind you that you’re there, and an articulating front bezel allows you to angle the light where you need it with just one hand. 

We recently took it on a trip to Arizona and were pleased with how its moisture-wicking fabric kept our forehead comfortable during nighttime jaunts to the bathroom or campfire. Plus, it laid flat to our heads—something we can’t say with other headlamps we’ve tried.

We named its beefier cousin, the BioLite HeadLamp 800 Pro, as the best headlamp for hiking. If you’re more of a casual wanderer or just need something to illuminate the way to take out the trash, the HeadLamp 325 packs a powerful, portable punch.

Things to consider when buying rechargeable flashlights

Rechargeable flashlights aren’t typically fancy pieces of equipment with endless options in regard to features. But different situations may call for a different type of light than others. Below are some of the most important things to look out for when choosing a rechargeable flashlight. 

Lumens & candela

A flashlight doesn’t do much good if it doesn’t illuminate well. But you don’t always need the face of the sun in your hand, either. There are a few different factors that impact how bright a flashlight appears: Lumens and candela. 

Lumens is likely a familiar term to most. The number of lumens a rechargeable flashlight has tells you the amount of light it produces. Broadly speaking, the more lumens, the brighter the light. However, this measurement is taken at the very front of the light source, so it doesn’t give you any indication of how far it shines or how wide of an area it covers. 

That’s where candelas come in. Candela refers to how focused and intense the light from a flashlight is. Candela measurements get a bit complicated, but put simply, a large candela number means the beam will be more focused, which is ideal for when you need to illuminate things in the distance. A low candela number refers to a broad beam of light, which is better for when you need light up close. 

Not many companies list candelas, but they may provide a beam distance measurement instead.

Size & weight

Rechargeable flashlights come in a range of shapes and sizes and thus weights. What you need a flashlight for will determine what size is best. For example, a large, heavy flashlight is fine for in your home in case the power goes out. But you won’t want to take that backpacking with you or hold it while working on your car. Size is more important for certain applications than others, but be sure to check the weight and dimensions prior to hitting that buy button. 

Light modes

Some rechargeable flashlights will offer various light modes and even different intensity levels. Dimming adds to the versatility of a torch since you’ll be able to adjust the brightness depending on the conditions. If you will be using your light when camping, in an emergency kit, or in similar situations, a strobe light or SOS setting may be valuable to have. If that’s the case, look closely at what light modes are available in the models you are considering. 

Battery life & charging

As with any electronic device, rechargeable flashlights will offer various levels of battery life. If you need a flashlight for emergency situations or when roughing it in the outdoors, long battery life is incredibly important. However, if you have access to a charger and know you’ll only need the light for short periods, a short battery life may be okay. 

Also worth considering is how you’ll charge your light. Some feature built-in USB ports that are easy to access. Others use rechargeable batteries that you will have to take out and charge with an adapter. Which is best is largely a matter of preference, though charging via a port is typically more convenient.

Additional features

Beyond the basics listed above, there are a handful of additional things to look out for when choosing a rechargeable flashlight. Waterproofing or IPX ratings may be essential if you need to use the light on a boat or in a hurricane preparedness box. A clip, magnet, or strap could be crucial if you are trying to use it hands-free. Some lights can also act as a battery for other devices, which is ideal for camping or emergency situations. 

FAQs

Q: How many lumens is enough for a flashlight?

Each situation will differ in terms of how many lumens are necessary. A light with 1,500 lumens will be way too much for use in a small interior space, while 100 lumens won’t be nearly enough to illuminate a forest. Broadly speaking, 200 lumens is ideal for small, compact lights. If you need more brightness, look for something with at least 1,000 lumens or more. 

Q: Can you use rechargeable batteries in flashlights?

Yes, you can use rechargeable batteries in flashlights. In fact, that can be a great way to turn the flashlight you likely already have into a rechargeable flashlight without purchasing an entirely new light. 

Q: How much do rechargeable flashlights cost?

The price of rechargeable flashlights depends on the light’s brightness, size, battery life, and any additional features it may offer. You can find lights as cheap as $15 or up to $150, depending on what you need. 

Final thoughts on the best rechargeable flashlights

Rechargeable flashlights are becoming more and more common, with options constantly expanding. What flashlight is best for you depends on how you intend to use it and your specific needs. Paying attention to a light’s brightness, throw distance, durability, battery life, and charging options will help you choose an option that best illuminates your life.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best rechargeable flashlights of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-winter-tool-deal-early-black-friday-2023/ Wed, 01 Nov 2023 17:09:14 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585242
A Greenworks snow thrower in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

If you've moved past your shovel era, consider entering the age of snow shovels and throwers with this Greenworks tool deal at Amazon.

The post Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Greenworks snow thrower in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sure, you’ve amassed a variety of heated clothing to keep you warm while shoveling snow, but your back is silently screaming at you to stop being a cheap masochist and buy yourself something beefier. Thankfully, you can do just that while staying true to your thrifty nature with 15 percent off Greenworks tools for winter and beyond.

Greenworks 80V 20″ Brushless Snow Thrower, 5.0Ah Battery $314 (Was $499.99)

Greenworks

SEE IT

Greenworks makes some of our favorite snow blowers, and this one is no exception. Compared to its wired cousin, the 13 Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Blower, an 80V battery provide more efficiency and better performance. A 12-inch clearing depth and 20-inch clearing width help you clear your driveway or sidewalk in no time; a brushless motor helps you do so without waking up the entire neighborhood. And, a 180-degree rotating chute helps you displace the snow where you want it.

If you really can’t let go of that shovel, consider meeting in the middle with the Greenworks 80V 12″ Brushless Snow Shovel. A 25-foot throwing distance means you won’t have to recover with a heating pad on your shoulders afterward.

Grab these winter tools before the sale ends—and before everyone else gets the good idea to save their back this year.

Here are more Greenworks tool deals if you’re looking for something for right now:

The post Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best ice skates of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-ice-skates/ Thu, 04 Mar 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-ice-skates/
A lineup of the best ice skates on a white background
Amanda Reed

Anyway you slice it, skates make all the difference, so we've carved through the options for you.

The post The best ice skates of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best ice skates on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of white American Athletic Ice Skates on a blue and white gradient background American Athletic Ice Skates
SEE IT

These leather skates are comfortable, provide plenty of ankle support, and are available for men and women.

Best for ice hockey CCM Super Tacks 9360 CCM Super Tacks 9360 Senior Ice Hockey Skates
SEE IT

With an ergonomic fit and stiffness to protect your ankles and feet, these CCM skates are ideal for the next hockey match.

Best for kids Lake Placid Nitro 8.8 Lake Placid Boys Nitro 8.8 Adjustable Ice Skates
SEE IT

These adjustable skates are ideal for young ones new to the ice.

Finding the best ice skates is similar to shopping for any kind of specialized sports equipment. You have to know your intended use: Are you a speed skater, a figure skater, a hockey player, or just a recreational skater? You also have to understand how skates fit. It’s not the same as shopping for a pair of sneakers or work boots, so it’s important to grasp the intricacies of skate design and intention because it could mean the difference between a smooth trip around the rink and a painful round of crippling foot torture. The best ice skates are comfortable, provide great ankle support, and make ice skating as smooth as … ice.

How we chose the best ice skates

Evidence suggests that the notion of ice skates skimming across frozen ponds or lakes first occurred to the people of Finland more than 4,000 years ago. Since then, ice skating has evolved from a practical means of traversing icy terrain to a leisurely pastime to a professional sport (and the foundation of yet another professional sport). As the activity itself has changed and matured, so have the skates themselves. From rickety old strap-on blades to state-of-the-art high-performance skates, the range of options fits, and purposes are pretty vast. No matter what you intend to do once you’re on the ice, there is a skate to suit your needs.

We’ve previously covered the best rollerblades, and they both pack plenty of similarities. In fact, picking up a pair of rollerblades can help you become a better ice skater. There are differences between inline skating vs. ice skating, but they’re subtle. Getting a proper pair of ice skates that fit correctly is important for safety—no one wants a broken ankle on the ice. To find the best ice skates, we looked at peer suggestions, critical reviews, real-world user recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research into everything from minor material details to overall impressions. You only deserve the best when fulfilling your Miracle on Ice or Ice Princess dreams.

The best ice skates: Reviews & Recommendations

The best ice skates have major support and comfort, without needing anything high-end or performance-driven. A simple pair of skates without bells and whistles—so long as they’re well-constructed—will get you out on the ice in no time. Here are the best ice skates we’ve found, whether you’re a newcomer or a seasoned rink rat.

Best overall: American Athletic Ice Skates

American Athletic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A comfortable skate with lots of ankle support and padding for peak performance.

Specs

  • Material: Leather
  • Skill level: Instructional; higher-level recreational
  • Blade: Hollow ground nickel-plated steel blade
  • Lining: Leather

Pros

  • Good for multiple skill levels
  • Professional-style boot
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Runs large

If you’re just getting into skating, or you’re at the frozen pond more than usual, these skates are for you. They have some important features to look for: they’re comfortable, include multi-layered ankle support, and full-quarter padding for comfort. You’ll look like a legit member of the U.S. Skating Team thanks to the professional-style boot. A form-fitting padded tongue prevents injury and makes your feet feel cozy and snug. These skates are also available in men’s sizing.

Best for figure skating: Jackson Ultima Excel Women’s Figure Skate

Jackson Ultima

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Land your toe loops in style with these durable skates that have light support—perfect for figure skating lessons.

Specs

  • Material: Vinyl
  • Skill level: Beginner
  • Blade: Ultima Mark II
  • Lining: Fabric

Pros

  • Flex notch for flexibility
  • Quality blade
  • Vinyl is durable and long-lasting

Cons

  • Runs small

With their foam-reinforced liner and sturdy Ultima Mark II blades, the Jackson Ultima skates deliver comfort and performance. Their “Heat Moldable Fit System” ensures that the skates break in quickly and conform to your feet, while the vinyl-coated boot is designed to be durable and long-lasting. They are just what you’re looking for—great-looking skates with high-performance construction.

Best for ice hockey: CCM Super Tacks 9360

CCM

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The right amount of stiffness combined with mold-to-your-foot comfort equals a pair of durable skates that will take you from practice to scrimmage.

Specs

  • Material: High-level plastic, felt
  • Skill level: Beginner to intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel CCM Speedblade
  • Lining: Brushed microfiber

Pros

  • Durable
  • Long-lasting
  • Perfect amount of stiffness

Cons

  • Size 1.5 sizes lower than regular shoes
  • Blade is non-replaceable

CCM Super Tacks have been a hockey player staple for years, and for good reason. Tough, durable, and designed to mold to your foot, they’re like a good pair of leather boots that only get better over time. Featuring just the right amount of stiffness to provide a solid skating experience, the Tacks also have a strong microfiber liner that can stand up to long-term intense use. An overall great option for hockey players of any level.

Best for kids: Lake Placid Nitro 8.8

Lake Placid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An adjustable skate that grows with your burgeoning NHL star, with closures that are easy enough for them to use.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Skill level: Young beginner
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Adjusts for growing feet
  • Closure is easy for children to use
  • Washable inner liner

Cons

  • Skate guards come loose compared to other children’s skates

The Lake Placid Nitros make for the best ice skates for kids for two key reasons: The adjustable straps make them easy for younger kids to take on and off without having to deal with thick laces, and the molded boots are flexible enough to last for a range of sizes (the Medium, for example, fits shoe sizes 1 to 4). Having a sturdy pair of skates they won’t immediately outgrow is a huge plus (the washable inner liner helps, too).

Best for beginners: Botas Attack 181

Botas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s never too late to start a new hobby—and these beginner-friendly skates make it easy to pick up ice skating.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Skill level: Adult beginner, intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Wide variety of sizes
  • Well-ventilated
  • Durable and reliable

Cons

  • No wide sizes available

As the best ice skates for beginners, the Botas Attack 181 come in a wide variety of sizes, from children to adult, and offer durable, reliable construction for first-timers. A reinforced plastic tip protects toes against impact and the low-profile sole is designed with integrated “Clima Air” ventilation, which makes them breathable and keeps them drier during long-term use. The skates are also lightweight and well-padded for extra comfort.

Best budget: DUWIN Adjustable Ice Skates

DUWIN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to break your budget in order to break some moves on the ice.

Specs

  • Material: PVC leather, nylon
  • Skill level: Beginner to intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Extra ankle padding
  • Adjustable
  • Moisture-resistant lining

Cons

  • Not a wide range of men’s sizing

The DUWIN skates have a reinforced outsole that helps with stability, as well as durable stainless steel blades, extra ankle padding, and firm heel support. Lightweight and featuring a moisture-resistant lining, these are the best ice skates at a price that doesn’t require a huge investment. And, they’re adjustable, meaning they can grow with you.

What to consider when buying the best ice skates

Ice skating is one of those activities that seems pretty straightforward but actually reveals itself to have a lot of layers and specificities the more you dig into it. When shopping for the best ice skates, you need to consider things like purpose (Are you figure skating? Playing ice hockey? Just recreationally spinning around the rink?), experience level, and comfort. Here’s a good place to get started.

Are you looking to take up figure skating?

The most important thing to consider when shopping for figure skates is fit. It will mean the difference between how well you maneuver around the ice, and how comfortable you’ll feel doing it. The general rule of thumb is that you should size down one and a half sizes from your shoe size. But since sizing can vary from brand to brand, it’s probably best to measure your foot.

The easiest way to measure your foot in order to find the right size skate is to use a blank piece of paper, a hard surface, and either a soft bit of measuring tape or a string. Place the paper against the wall. Stand on the paper with your heel against the wall, and then make a mark indicating the longest part of your foot. Measure from the end of the paper (where the wall was) to the mark—and this is your length measurement. Use a piece of string or a soft measuring tape to measure the width of your foot by wrapping it around the widest part (the ball of your foot). This will give you your foot’s circumference. Once you know your numbers, finding the right fit is easy.

Are you looking to play some hockey?

The fastest game on ice has changed over the years, but one thing remains consistent: Skating wins games. Whether it’s the speedy center scoring highlight-reel goals, the steady-on-his-feet defenseman shutting down the other team, or the sure-footed goalie making jaw-dropping saves, you need to be comfortable on blades to survive on the ice.

There are basically two things to consider when shopping for ice hockey skates: fit and purpose. Different manufacturers offer different options—from standard to wide fits—but each brand is unique, so don’t assume that if you wear one size in one brand you’ll automatically wear that size in another. A big part of fit is determined by the lacing system, as you want the boot to be as snug as possible. If your foot slips inside the boot, you won’t have good control of your edges. Many skates feature special materials on the tongue, sometimes called a “bite bar,” to lock the laces in place and keep them from loosening. The placement of padding inside the boot also helps achieve a snug fit without creating discomfort. Beyond that, consider if you’re a once-in-a-while rec player or a serious organized team player. This will determine whether or not you can handle a stiffer boot construction or might be in the market for a lighter (and less exhausting) skate.

Are you trying to get your kids into ice skating?

Ice skating can be a great recreational activity for kids, but getting them used to the ice takes a little more than just finding a pair of proper fitting skates. It takes a lot of (sometimes literal) hand-holding, and it helps if you have some comfort on skates yourself. It’s not unlike learning to ride a bike, and similarly, once they get the hang of it, it’s a skill they’ll have for life.

In addition to a good pair of skates, kids should hit the ice with some kind of head protection (a full hockey helmet isn’t necessary, you can also use a bike helmet) and clothes that offer warmth, extra padding, and resistance to wetness. Consider busting out the snow pants. And don’t think that, as a parent, you can hop out on the ice in sneakers and guide your child around the rink. There’s a reason why some skating comfort is important—sneakers or shoes on the ice will make you more of a liability than a help.

Are you a first-time ice skater yourself?

As we mentioned in reference to kids’ skates, it’s really difficult to teach the little ones if you can’t skate yourself. So if you’re looking to add ice skating to your list of skills, there are easy and comfortable options available. It’s not even all that necessary to specialize when looking for a first pair—you just want to have something that provides adequate support (especially around the ankles) and some durability.

Even if you have no intention of putting a stick in your hands, hockey skates are a good option for newcomers because they tend to be constructed a bit wider than figure skates, which gives you more of a sturdy feel on your feet. The blades are slightly thicker, too, which gives you a bit more surface area and can help with balance. They are also designed to accommodate more of a “side-to-side” skating motion as opposed to the more “straight and narrow” figure skating style, which most people find more natural.

Budget

You don’t have to break the bank to get started ice skating, but you also have to be wary of going too cheap. All plastic-molded skates, for example, may be available at bargain-basement prices, but you’ll soon understand why when you experience their unforgiving rigidity (and the blisters that result). Cold temperatures and constant pressure also make such skate styles susceptible to cracking and splintering—the last thing you want to happen is to lose a blade in mid-turn.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best ice skates cost?

Depending on the kind of skate you buy and your skill level, the best ice skates can start at $60 and reach $200-$300. However, more professional skates tend to be more expensive.

Q: How should ice skates fit?

Skates should be snug but not uncomfortably tight. When standing in your skates with them fully laced, you want your heel snug in the heel pocket so your toes have a bit of space at the end.

Q: How much are a really good pair of hockey skates?

Hockey skates really run the gamut, but high-end pro-level skates can be close to $600.

Q: How should ice skates fit?

There are, of course, pros and cons to each. A figure skate’s leather boot is tight enough to support the ankle, but pliant enough for the skater to achieve the jumps and contortions figure skating demands (but also has more “give” when you’re just skating).

A hockey skate is lighter weight, which allows players to skate fast and change direction. Hockey skate blades have more curve—or rocker—at both ends, making the skates more maneuverable and easier to turn.

Final thoughts on the best ice skates

Ice skating is both a casual recreational activity and the foundation of very specialized activities and sports, so there are a lot of options out there. In general, the best ice skates will provide ample ankle support, have the ability to mold and “give” around your foot through repeated use, and provide a sense of stability. Comfort level and style is a personal preference, but be sure you invest in something that fits your foot well as most of the issues people tend to run into when it comes to learning to skate is foot pain and discomfort—mostly from ill-fitting skates.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best ice skates of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best propane fire pits of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-propane-fire-pits/ Mon, 30 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584472
The best propane fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A propane fire pit provides familiar comforting flames with no mess or struggle with starting.

The post The best propane fire pits of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best propane fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit on a plain background with flames Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit
SEE IT

This sturdy table provides a solid addition to pretty much any an outdoor living space.

Best portable Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire on a plain background with fire Bond Manufacturing Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit
SEE IT

This barebones burner provides ample flame from a surprisingly light and compact body.

Best for camping UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit on a plain backround with no fire UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit
SEE IT

It’s relatively easy to move around, but its durable construction makes it great for adventures.

Nothing fights the short days and cold nights better than a toasty blaze from a propane fire pit. These convenient devices can provide warmth, brighten up the ambiance of a backyard patio, or act as a gathering point for crisp end-of-the-year outdoor get-togethers. Propane fire pits require less labor than traditional fire pits. There’s no wood to gather, no kindling to light, no real need to worry about tending to the fire. Simply hook up a gas tank, ignite the fire while it’s low, and set the intensity to your preferred level. You don’t get that wood smell, which can be lovely, but you also don’t have the level of clean-up required with an ash pan or half-burned wood. Propane is the way to go if you want to turn a fire off and on rather than tend to it. Whatever your needs—ambiance or heat—if you have the desire, let propane light your fire. These are the best propane fire pits of 2023.

How we chose the best propane fire pits

We compared spec, prices, reviews, and customer satisfaction for dozens of models of propane fire pits, weighing different use scenarios against one another. Sizes, shapes, and intended area for installation were weighed against versatility, efficiency, and ease of use. Additional safety features or unique capabilities were considered strong bonuses. Eventually, we correlated all of our favorite models into different categories, with special attention paid to our favorite overall model, as well as those that give a lot of bang for the buck (best value) and the cheapest model we can recommend (best budget).

While some of these propane fire pits are better-loved than others, your aesthetic preferences, the space in which you plan to use the fire pit, and the specific situations in which you want to use your fire pit should help you decide which of our recommendations best fits your needs. If you’re looking for wood-burning fire pits, we also have you covered. We’ve done extensive research on the best smokeless fire pits, the best portable fire pits, and the best outdoor fire pits, which together include wood-burning and gas options.

The best propane fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Before you can warm up your hands over a nice toasty fire, you need to pick the right model for your space an your lifestyle. Be sure to check out all of the options before deciding which one is worth your money. While most of these models are intended to be placed on outdoor patios, some are portable and can be taken beachside or on a camping trip—though not a nature trek. Most of them are designed to be more for ambiance and light than pure heat, but do watch out for the maximum BTUs (British Thermal Units) of each model. BTUs are a measurement of heat, so if you’re looking for a fire pit that will bring the warmth you expect, look for the highest numbers. Just make sure you keep an extra propane canister in the storage shed or outdoor storage box.

Best overall: Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit

Bali Outdoors

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 78.5 pounds
  • Height: 24 inches
  • Material: Alloy Steel, Stainless Steel, Ceramic
  • Structure: Table
  • Maximum BTUs: 60,000

Pros

  • Attractive, understated design
  • Table style adds more useability
  • Multiple shapes and sizes available
  • Good-looking rectangular flame zone
  • Competitive price

Cons

  • Build quality of table frame is not quite as study as more expensive models
  • Ignition isn’t always consistent
  • Takes upwards of an hour or two to assemble

Bali Outdoors offers a wide variety of propane fire pit shapes and sizes, all offering some of the same features: most hide the propane tank within the body of the fire pit, creating a more attractive patio piece. Some feature table tops around the flame source and covers, meaning they are functional pieces even when they are not lit. And the price of these items is extremely competitive, not far above budget and small portable fire pits.

While the whole line of Bali Outdoors fire pits is good, we most strongly recommend the 24”x24”x48” 60,000 BTU fire pit table. The blue glass fire rocks are very attractive, assembly is relatively simple, and the table looks as fashionable as options three times its price. The downside is that the steel of the table itself is a bit lighter and less sturdy than more expensive fire pits. It may be in your best interest to tie the table down to move it to a safe location in the event of a big storm to avoid damage.

However, there aren’t many more attractive, effective, and inexpensive options that will make you happier to sit and bask in the glow of the flames than the Bali Outdoors line. Our recommended table is perfect in front of an outdoor couch or a pair of chairs. Keep in mind that the glass flame guard you may see in some pictures is an optional (but recommended, for aesthetics more than anything) accessory. Scoring high in quality of flame, aesthetics, ease of use, and value, the Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit line, especially the 24” x 24” x 48” table, is our best overall propane fire pit.

Best portable: Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit

Bond Manufacturing

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 18 pounds
  • Height: 14.65 inches
  • Material: Stainless steel / metal
  • Structure: Non-collapsible, locking lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 54,000

Pros

  • Quick, easy set-up
  • Locking lid acts as a carrying handle
  • Very light for a propane fire pit
  • No assembly required
  • Auto-ignition feature works well

Cons

  • Separate propane tank adds weight as space
  • Somewhat awkward shape to fit amongst a lot of luggage
  • Small fire compared to non-portable

For some of us, propane is so wonderful that we want it every which way. Heck, we may even want to grill with it. But we certainly want it on the go if we have a smaller, lighter fire pit that can be considered portable. That’s where the Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit comes in. The gas burns clean, and stones are used for both aesthetics and to help contain the flames. You can get a consistent 50,000 BTUs, with a maximum of 54,000. The set-up is really easy on the Aurora, as the all-in-one-piece pit has a locking lid that makes it easy to carry and keep its lava rocks contained. Your propane tank will likely be the more awkward and heavy item to join you at the beach or campsite.

However, that 20-pound tank is going to more than double your load, making this portable fire pit a bit less portable. Of course, if the portability is just setting up at different spots in and around your yard, it’s not that big a deal. But you certainly can’t go trekking with this fire pit, and if you want to go camping or to the beach, you’d best have a van or flatbed truck to help you haul it.

However, the price and quality of this unit, among those that could be deemed portable, is second to none. In fact, the small size and utilitarian (rather than aesthetic) design are the only things that keep the Aurora from being a contender for best overall. Instead, it’s the best portable propane fire pit of 2023.

Best for camping: UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit

UKIAH

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 22.6 pounds
  • Height: 17.52 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Non-collapsible, magnetic lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 48,000

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Magnetic lid is useful and convenient
  • Flame is easy to control
  • Boxy shape packs extremely well into a car

Cons

  • Low BTU output
  • Industrial aesthetic is not for everyone

Another portable propane fire pit, the UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit is built for camping. The design is the first clue; when the magnetic lid is on, the Tailgator becomes a solid cube that is far, far easier to pack in a trunk, truck flatbed, or behind the back seats of an SUV than any other propane fire pit we found. While your 20-pound propane tank may be a bit more unwieldy, the Tailgator, with its built-in handles and sturdy but not overwhelming 22.6-pound weight, is a breeze to pop into and out of a vehicle. It’s also a very durable design, built to withstand some battering from wind, keep dirt and debris out of the rock area, and its steel alloy frame is easy to clean with a cloth (later, of course, when it’s unplugged from propane and cool).

The trade-off is a weaker flame than other models. The Tailgator only produces 48,000 BTUs, on the lower end of propane fire pits, so you may need to huddle a little closer to it than other, stronger models. This does result in less fuel use over time, however. Another possible drawback is that the boxy metal design is very “built Ford tough,” almost military in its look, which may not fit the cozy and/or natural vibe you’re looking for from a fire. Other more traditional designs may fit your decor better when used on the patio or backyard than the Tailgator.

If you can look past the weaker heat and the industrial design, the Tailgator offers a lot to love, especially if you’re going to be taking it somewhere in the back of your vehicle. It also can take a beating from the elements. For these reasons, it’s the best propane gas pit for camping.

Best modern: COSIEST Outdoor Propane Fire Pit Table 

COSIEST

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 50 pounds
  • Height: 11.8 inches
  • Material: Faux stone
  • Structure: Round base
  • Maximum BTUs: 40,000

Pros

  • Very aesthetically pleasing
  • Other options with similarly eye-catching designs
  • Easy to move (though heavy)
  • Good customer service reputation
  • 5

Cons

  • Propane tank cover table sold separately
  • Low heat output
  • Low profile needs similarly low-set seating

For a lot of people, the look of a fire pit is more important than the heat. It’s supposed to fit the design of an outdoor space, give a certain feeling when viewed, and generally add a touch of class to a poolside area or deck. That’s what COSIEST offers with its line of fire pits, our favorite of which is a sculpture-like, low-set round design. The off-white faux stone is extremely attractive, and the modern styling of the concentric rings of the table gives it a high-class look that would fit in next to the swimming area of a Hollywood Hills mansion. There are other options too: a more contemporary hexagonal design or more classic rectangular ones.

The main drawback of COSIEST’s fire pits is the need for accessories to really make the whole look work as best it can. A propane tank cannot fit inside the fire pit itself, so you may want to get a table tank cover accessory (though the hose will still be exposed). You also might want to purchase the glass guard for the flames to really make the look pop. The glass not only protects hands and objects from coming in contact with flames but creates an extra twinkling light effect that spreads out and improves ambiance. This is also the kind of fire pit that may look better with fire glass as its fill item rather than lava rocks, so you’ll need to source those separately.

The second drawback is the weaker flame and low profile of the table. This isn’t necessarily a big problem with how you want to use your fire pit. If you’re more about light than heat, the 40,000 BTUs are plenty. However, this fire pit will look strange and small next to furniture with higher-set seats. Make sure you have couches or chairs that dip a bit lower or choose a taller design.

The accessories drive the price up, making the COSIEST line a bit more expensive overall. However, if you care about modern styling more than pure heat power, the COSIEST Outdoor Propane Fire Pit Table is the best modern propane fire pit.

Best steel: Cuisinart COH-600 Chimenea Propane Fire Pit

Cuisinart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45.5 pounds
  • Height: 48 inches
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Circular pit with directional hood
  • Maximum BTUs: 40,000

Pros

  • Sturdy and attractive
  • Directional hood allows you to put heat where you want it
  • Easy to assemble
  • Can get 9 hours off a 20-pound propane tank

Cons

  • Low BTU
  • Design may block eye line if placed in the middle of furniture

You may not expect a fire pit from Cuisinart, a brand better known for food processors, but here we are in the modern, diversified business landscape. Not only is there a Cuisinart propane fire pit, but it’s also really good. Solidly and attractively constructed, the Cuisinart Chimenea Propane Fire Pit has a unique design that shields heat except for about 120 degrees of opening, letting you get much more out of the relatively low 40,000 BTUs than you expect (as long as you’re near the opening). While you do have to put it together yourself, the construction is quite easy—as long as you follow the instructions—and you’ll be able to do it quickly. A nice side of the low BTUs is low fuel use compared to stronger fire pits; you can get 9 hours out of a 20-pound tank.

On the negative side, the high height of this pit with the hood (4 feet) means it could easily be in your eye line if you place it amongst furniture. The hood isn’t optional or removable; it’s part of the design, so you have to be sure you want this kind of fire pit before you buy it. If you plan to arrange your patio furniture in a semi-circle around this fire pit, it’s less of an issue.

The Chimenea is not portable. It’s quite heavy and large. Part of that is there’s a compartment to hide your 20-pound propane tank, which increases the overall size but is also a nice feature, so there’s not an unattractive tank lying around. With its few drawbacks and many nice features, the Cuisinart Chimenea Propane Fire Pit is the best steel propane fire pit as long as your space works for its design.

Best value: Camp Chef Ponderosa Fire Pit 

Camp Chef

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 47.5 pounds
  • Height: 15.1 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Circular with lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 64,000

Pros

  • Really strong heat
  • Sturdy construction
  • Technically portable
  • Reliable starter

Cons

  • Heavy for a portable fire pit
  • Profile is quite low for non-camping use

Our best-value propane fire pit dang near took best overall, so its relatively low price makes it a great value. The Camp Chef Ponderosa Fire Pit can pump out a whopping 64,000 BTUs, which means big, heat, great for warming you while camping. The shape and size of the Ponderosa is excellent for portability, even though it’s a bit heavy if you’re going to be taking it to a campsite or the beach regularly. It’s quite a low-rising fire pit, which means on a patio, you’re going to want to pair it with similarly low-rise furniture. The heat, which is wonderful, does tend to burn through fuel quickly.

Perhaps its aesthetic is the Ponderosa’s biggest weakness. It has a very “campfire” vibe to its shape and look, rather than a stylish piece of furniture. If you’re going for a rustic vibe in your backyard, that may be a plus. If you’re looking for something slicker, the value of the Ponderosa might not be worth it, and you may want to go with a table design.

Overall, the Ponderosa is a strong candidate for best overall propane fire pit, but its camping aesthetic and low position makes it a little less—but only a little—ideal than our top model. Its competitive price, however, means it’s the best-value propane fire pit on the market.

Best budget: Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table 

Barton

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 81.57 pounds
  • Height: 25 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Table
  • Maximum BTUs: 46,000

Pros

  • Versatile styling that fits with most patios
  • Houses the propane tank within the table
  • Low price

Cons

  • Weaker heat than other tables
  • No cover for heating area to convert into a full table

If you’re in the market for a table-style propane fire pit and are looking to not spend much money, the Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table might be exactly what you’re looking for. It’s a weaker heater than our top table from Bali Outdoors and doesn’t feature as many options, but it’s a great starter model, considering you can usually get it for under $200.

Like most other table models, the Barton Table hides the 20-pound propane tank inside, meaning there’s no unsightly tank to spoil the vibe. Instead of lava rocks, this table uses fire glass, an aesthetic that many prefer. Of course, if you’re more of a lava rocks person, you can buy those separately and replace the glass with them. A wind/fire guard is available separately, but Barton doesn’t seem to offer a cover for the heating element, meaning, unlike the Bali Outdoors model, you can’t convert this fire pit into a regular table when it’s not in use. The Bali also produces 14,000 more BTUs, meaning the heat travels much further, giving you more arrangement options for furniture, but Barton’s 46,000 BTUs do the job for a standard four-sided arrangement.

While the retail price isn’t particularly “budget” award-worthy, this Barton model is almost always on sale, and as of writing was only $170. At that price, it’s a great starter fire pit for a patio or an additional accent fire pit if you’re looking to expand your seating arrangements. The nice look, standard features, and great price make the Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table the best budget propane fire pit.

What to consider when choosing a propane fire pit

Once you’ve decided that you want to go propane, there are only a few other questions you need to ask yourself before choosing a fire pit. The first is perhaps the most important: Do you want a smaller, portable fire pit, or do you want your fire pit to essentially be a piece of outdoor furniture. If you choose the former, you’ll likely end up with a small, circular, all-flame fire pit. These more resemble camping fire pits aesthetically, even though they are using propane gas instead of wood. If you want a stationary fire pit or fire pit table, you’ll want to consider the aesthetic that your outdoor space features. Rustic? Modern? Casual? There are some fire pits that, for all their benefits, may look out of place with the decor you’ve already chosen. Finally, is your fire pit more for aesthetics, or are you really looking for a strong heat source for warming yourself and your guests up outside? If it’s the latter, really pay attention to the BTU (British Thermal Unit) heat measurement that each fire pit can output. The higher the BTUs, the toastier you’ll feel.

FAQs

Q: How do I make my propane fire pit flame bigger?

It’s going to be all about pressure (which makes the gas shoot out quickly and to higher heights) rather than pure fuel. The hose should be properly placed without any objects on top of it and without loops or sharp turns. I would not recommend trying any aftermarket modifications to your propane fire pit or hose yourself. It’s too easy to create a defect or damage that can result in your fire pit becoming unsafe. If you aren’t getting what you believe to be an adequate flame, contact the manufacturer and see if there’s possibly something wrong with your fire pit or have any modifications installed by a professional. 

Q: How long does a 20-pound propane tank last on a fire pit?

At maximum output, you should get 4 hours of flame from a 20-pound tank. At moderate output, double that. Fire tables are usually designed to run at maximum output.

Q: Should a propane fire pit be high or low pressure?

Propane fire pits should be at a maximum of 11” WC, which means 11 inches of water column. This is the pressure that an 11-inch high column of water would exert. This converts to around 0.5 PSI (pounds per square inch), the method of measuring air pressure in tires. This is a higher pressure than natural gas.

Q: What temperature is a propane fire pit?

The hottest part of the fire can reach 1500 degrees Fahrenheit or around 815 degrees Celsius. The BTUs of a propane fire pit (the heat that the flames radiate) are anywhere from 30,000 to 60,000 depending on the size of the fire pit.

Q: Do propane fire pits use a lot of propane?

Yes. If you don’t keep your flame modest, you can find yourself going through a ton of gas. You may want to keep a spare tank or two on hand at any given time (safely and securely stored, of course).

Q: Are propane fire pits unhealthy?

An outdoor propane fire pit is not inherently unhealthy. Of course, you don’t want to breathe in pure propane gas, that could be fatal. And you never want to use a propane fire pit indoors, as incidental gasses such as carbon monoxide that can do damage or worse could build up without ventilation. But a properly ventilated space (such as an outdoor patio) with a properly-use propane fire pit should pose no health risk.

Q: How much ventilation does a propane fire pit need?

You need at least 20 square inches of ventilation for a propane fire pit. Any commercial propane fire pit will have proper ventilation built-in. Only use your propane fire pit outside.

Q: What size propane tank do I need for a gas fire pit?

The vast majority of propane fire pits are designed to be used with a 20-pound tank.

Q: How many years is a propane tank good for?

An American-made and certified propane tank is considered fine for use up to 12 years after it is made. In Canada, the limit is 10 years. Recertified tanks may be as low as five years. There should be markings on your tank to let you know when it was manufactured or last certified.

Final thoughts on the best propane fire pits

A fire pit can really be the final piece that pulls a backyard together. It gives a patio a focal point, a spot around which family and friends can gather to chat, eat, or relax. And when the sun goes down, the fire produced can give an incredible ambiance that really is unmatched by electrical lighting. Plus, you’ll warm the area in a way that lets you minimize the use of heavier clothing, even on chillier nights. Ghost stories, reminiscing, or telling jokes become enhanced. There’s a certain magic to fire-lit nights and a ton of convenience and control that comes with choosing propane over wood fires. Any of these fire pits can bring that magic home because they are the best propane fire pits available right now.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best propane fire pits of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf mulchers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-mulcher/ Tue, 23 Mar 2021 17:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278407
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We'll help you find the best leaf mulcher to tackle your fall cleanup.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The WORX 12 TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum sitting on top of a pile of leaves WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum
SEE IT

This 3-in-1 model lets you mulch, vacuum, and blow your leaves with one powerful tool.

Best gas landworks gas powered leaf mulcher Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher
SEE IT

If you need to chop wood, this machine can handle branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower
SEE IT

This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher.

Fall is gorgeous, but it’s also a grueling period for yard work, so a good leaf mulcher can come in handy. As stunning foliage falls from the trees, homeowners are faced with the Sisyphean task of clearing their yard of endlessly dropping debris. This step of lawn maintenance, important in preventing disease from hijacking your grass under the cover of wet leaves during the winter months, will be much easier if you have appropriate outdoor power equipment for the job. We’re here to help you identify the best leaf mulchers to clear your lawn and dispose of autumn debris.

How we chose the best leaf mulchers

Depending on your location, leaf disposal can be tricky. Some towns have a service for leaf pickup, but it often comes with a fee attached and the responsibility of tracking down a specific type of leaf bag. Other towns have a set location for residents to drop off their bagged leaves, which can be difficult if you don’t have a pickup truck to transport the hefty bags. 

A better option? Make leaf mulching a part of your yard maintenance. The process simply involves loading the leaves into a leaf shredder that cuts them up into tiny pieces, greatly reducing the heft of the load. Once shredded, leaves can be mulched around your plants and trees to retain moisture, protect from frost, and suppress weeds. 

Once you find the best leaf mulcher for your lawn care, disposing of leaves is a breeze. In compiling our recommendations, we looked at top brands and weighed a range of factors, including versatility, power, mulch ratio, ease of use, and price.

The best leaf mulchers: Reviews & Recommendations

Like any piece of outdoor power equipment, like a cordless leaf blower, an overwhelming number of leaf mulchers with different features are available for purchase. A little bit of research can ensure that your machine is tailored to your specific lawn care needs and worthy of space in your storage shed. We’ve gathered our recommendations and provided some tips below to consider when making your purchase.

Best overall: WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 16:1
  • Weight: 9 lbs.

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Contains mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Some users had problems with attachments

Why invest in three different tools when you can blow your leaves, mulch, and vacuum with one device? WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum is lightweight at 9 pounds, and changes functions with the turn of a dial. The lightweight, handheld tool features a metal impeller with a shredder blade that provides a 16:1 leaves-to-mulch ratio. Once the mulch is collected, the bag is easy to detach for removal. This tool also provides a powerful 600 CFM (cubic feet per minute) for leaf blowing and switches between two speeds. So ditch the rake and dispense with your leaves quickly and easily with this versatile option.

Best electric: WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 18:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Versatile with mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Handheld
  • High mulch ratio
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Some users say suction is weak

This corded electric three-in-one model is lightweight but powerful. A simple switch quickly flips from blower to vacuum to mulching mode, and two speeds are available to accommodate different functions. It boasts an 18:1 mulching ratio, consolidating 18 bags of leaves into just one. As an electric device, this model is muted and environmentally friendly. 

Best gas: Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher

Landworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Gas
  • Voltage: N/A
  • Mulch ratio: 15:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle heavy branches
  • Powerful engine
  • Professional quality

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No other tools
  • Not environmentally friendly

This Landworks machine has a mulching ratio of 15:1, and is able to tackle branches of up to 3 inches in diameter. You can adjust the discharge chute anywhere between 90 to 145 degrees for easy and efficient disposal. The 7HP engine takes 87 octane gas with no ethanol. This mulcher doesn’t have the versatility but can handle harder jobs.

Best standalone: SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher

SuperHandy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 17:1
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle branches, leaves, and grass
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable
  • High mulch ratio

Cons

  • Some users said it gets clogged
  • May not last long

The SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher is a smaller version of the SuperHandy Wood Chipper. While the mulcher can’t handle the sizable branches that the Wood Chipper can, it comes at a fraction of the price and is perfect for yearly leaf maintenance. It has a high 17:1 mulching ratio, and its electric belt-driven motor is quiet and eco-friendly. 

Best heavy-duty: Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder

Patriot Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 110V
  • Mulch ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 95 lbs.

Pros

  • Chops branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Only one function
  • Heavy

This Patriot Products wood chipper/leaf shredder offers versatile performance for various levels of yard maintenance. A larger piece of outdoor power equipment, this electric mulcher remains smooth and quiet as it shreds leaves and chips branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter. Simply slide your debris into the top of the feeder, and the mulch spits out the side.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 10:1
  • Weight: 8.1 pounds

Pros

  • Easy on the wallet
  • Includes mulcher, vacuum, and blower
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Low mulch ratio
  • Some users say it didn’t last long

This blower has options for more attachments, but even the bare-bones model is a blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. The corded electric blower is lightweight and easy to use, and it shreds 10 bags of leaves into one. This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher. 

Things to consider when buying the best leaf mulchers

With so many variations of leaf mulchers available, first narrow your options down by deciding what style mulching machine you’re looking for: handheld or stand-alone. Stand-alone mulchers are stationary machines into which you feed collected leaves for shredding. You can carry a handheld machine around the yard, and vacuum leaves straight into the machine. Handheld mulchers usually function as a leaf blower as well.

Also, think about what power source is best for you. A gas-powered mulcher is an excellent choice if you want more power and want to avoid plugging in the device or charging batteries, but that comes at the cost of a heavier machine. An electric or battery-powered mulcher leaves you at the mercy of your power source (so maybe keep a portable power station handy)—but can be significantly lighter and easier to maneuver. 

Lastly, pay attention to the mulching ratio of your leaf shredder. The mulch ratio basically tells you how much the shredder will cut down your leaves: the highest ratio of 18:1 will reduce 18 bags of leaves to fit into one bag. When choosing the best leaf mulchers for your needs, consider how many bags of leaves you typically have in the fall and what you plan to do with them after they’re shredded—larger shreds are fine for mulching around your trees, while smaller shreds are better for composting.

Electric vs. gas

A handheld mulching machine gives you the benefit of turning the two steps of gathering the leaves and then mulching them into one step. Most models can blow, vacuum, and shred, so one swift trip around the yard completes the entire cleanup. 

Electric leaf mulchers are significantly lighter than their gas-powered counterparts. Collecting leaves is done with relative ease, and while you’ll need a battery or connection to a power source, you can use a long extension cord or keep an extra battery charging.

For extended use without a power cord or having to stop and recharge batteries, gas-powered mulchers keep going for a lot longer than an electric model. Gas-powered models tend to be more expensive than electric, but you get what you pay for with more power and faster cleanup—just remember to keep extra gas in the shed so you can start with a full tank. 

Handheld vs. standalone leaf mulchers

The majority of the best leaf mulchers are handheld and come with blower and vacuum functions, but a standalone leaf mulcher has only one function: shred leaves. This is perfect for handling heavier loads, and if you go for a higher-end model, you’re ultimately purchasing a wood chipper that can even deal with small tree limbs. We found smaller and heavy-duty models for more extreme yard work. 

Versatility

If you’re willing to fork over some more green for a more versatile machine, a heavier-duty leaf shredder can reduce twigs, branches, and acorns. This is optimal for cleaning up debris after storms and heavy winds knock limbs into your yard. These powerful devices can make yard maintenance quick and efficient and leave you with aesthetically pleasing mulch for your landscaping.

Price

If your fall yard maintenance tends to be a small and simple job, the best leaf mulcher for you shouldn’t have to break the bank. While cheap mulchers often coincide with a smaller capacity for collection and a less powerful engine, we’ve found inexpensive models on the market that are still strong and efficient. 

FAQs

Q: What leaves are not good for compost?

The leaves that won’t compost well are higher in lignin, a polymer that makes them feel rigid, almost wooden. High-lignin leaves include those found on beech trees, oaks, and sweet cherry trees. Also, avoid black walnut, eucalyptus, and poison ivy leaves, as they can be toxic. The best leaves for mulching have high levels of calcium and nitrogen and are low in lignin, like poplar, maple, and ash leaves.

Q: What is the best way to shred leaves?

If you don’t have many trees around the yard and your fall blanket is minimal, a lawn mower could work as a leaf shredder in a pinch—simply mow over the leaves and collect them in the mower’s bag attachment. However, with several price-friendly options on the market, it’s better to take the easier route and buy a leaf mulcher. A specialized leaf vacuum and mulcher does a more thorough job picking up the leaves and shreds smaller than a mower can. 

Q: What is the best 3-in-1 blower, vacuum, and mulcher?

DeWalt and Husqvarna are both popular outdoor equipment brands, and each has excellent 3-in-1 leaf machines, but our favorite is the WORX WG518, a 12-amp 2-speed leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher. This is a corded model, so you’ll need a power source, but in return it’s lightweight and easy to carry. Its mulch ratio is on the higher end at 16:1, so if you have a large amount of leaves to consolidate, this machine does the trick. 

Final thoughts on the best leaf mulchers

Finding the best leaf mulcher to clean up your lawn this fall will take a lot of heavy lifting, and raking, off your shoulders. The 3-in-1 models are especially efficient and can operate as a leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. Removing the bed of leaves from your yard is an essential part of your yard maintenance schedule, as it keeps the leaves from molding and suffocating your lawn or becoming a breeding ground for debris. Find yourself the best leaf mulcher for your needs, and in no time, you’ll have your yard cleaned up and ready for next spring.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated blankets of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-blankets/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517407
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

Heated blankets provide comfortable warmth without tons of maintenance.

The post The best heated blankets of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best wearable Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap
SEE IT

Don’t pretend like you don’t want that wrapped around you.

Best battery-powered Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket
SEE IT

A dedicated battery pack provides warmth without the grid.

Best overall Sunbeam best overall heated blanket Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket
SEE IT

It’s comfortable, durable, and easy to use.

On cold nights, there’s nothing more comforting than getting into a pre-warmed bed thanks to a heated blanket. Heated blankets, sometimes called electric blankets, are just like a regular soft blanket but with wires inside that provide heat when supplied with current. You can even get wireless battery-powered options that allow you to stay warm all night long without the hassle of tangling cords. Whether you opt for smaller single sizes, which are often better at dispersing heat, or share the experience with a large blanket made for two, we have sourced the best heated blankets for you.

How we chose the best heated blankets

The writers and editors at Popular Science have decades of combined experience in writing about, reviewing, and recommending products across a wide variety of categories. For this list of the best heated blankets, we relied on spec comparisons, personal experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback. We prioritize reliability here at Popular Science, so we emphasized models that promise to last several years. While we haven’t tested them for years to guarantee durability, we prioritize brands with solid reputations and models built with long-lasting materials.

The best heated blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks for the best heated blankets promise to keep you toasty even when it’s cold outside and drafty in your home. Plus, they’re more convenient than sleeping in even the best, most comfortable heated gloves, socks, insoles, and vests. If you want to snuggle up for sound sleep and feel cozy without touching the thermostat or fiddling with a space heater, you can relax under the warmth of one of our top picks. 

Best overall: Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester microfiber
  • Heat Settings: 12
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Dual controllers
  • Easy to use
  • Soft, cozy fabric

Cons 

  • Thin fabric means you can feel the wires inside

Available in a range of colors—including beige, blue, red, and gray—this blanket scored top marks for comfort and durability. To machine wash, simply unplug the remote and toss the blanket in your washer and dryer. 

The dual controllers and large Queen size make it a good choice for couples sharing a bed. You’ll both be able to adjust the temperature and turn it on or off if your partner falls asleep before you. The control remote is also bright and easy to use, even in the middle of the night. It evenly distributes heat to prevent overheating, and the blanket material, although warm, isn’t too heavy. It comes with a five-year limited warranty for peace of mind. The automatic 12-hour shutoff was the longest shut-off from the blankets tested and means you can fall asleep knowing it will turn off by itself. This is our top choice to help you get a restful (and warm) night’s sleep.

Best battery-powered: The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket

Onnetila

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester & Polyester Blend
  • Heat Settings: 5
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Totally portable  
  • Wireless 
  • Modern design

Cons 

  • Battery life is poor on high setting

Instead of a bulky controller plugged into the wall, this portable heated blanket comes with a rechargeable large-capacity battery, not unlike a power brick you’d use to charge your phone. The blanket heats up in just five seconds, providing warmth when you need it most. It folds down to fit any 10 inches by 8 inches space, perfect for stowing in the car or a backpack on the road. 

Once heated, expect 2-8 hours of use, plenty of time to fall asleep soundly. The material is lightweight, machine-washable, and soft to the touch. Although this blanket would work well in bed, it excels as a portable option to keep you warm at sporting events, when traveling, or especially camping or staying in an RV. In fact, it makes a great present for anyone who loves warm gear gifts. However, the five heat settings don’t offer too much variation, and it’s worth keeping in mind that the highest setting will drain the battery considerably. Lower price options are available if a wireless design is not your priority.

Best for couples: Perfect Fit Ultra Soft Plush Electric Blanket

SoftHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester Blend micro plush
  • Heat Settings: 10
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Very large size  
  • Individual controls 
  • Small wires and even heat distribution

Cons 

  • Expensive

It’s a perfect solution for couples with different sleep styles and preferences. It features separate heating zones and individualized controls, and you can change the temperature silently so as not to wake your sleeping partner. The separate controls mean you can both choose your ideal temperature and sleep soundly. You can also adjust this temperature throughout the night for individualized comfort.

A large, easy-to-grasp dial-style controller and a non-slip bottom make this a very accessible device. If you forget to turn it off, an automatic shut-off at 10 hours will keep you safe. This blanket doesn’t feel overly hot to the touch and doesn’t get hot zones as the heat is evenly distributed. It also features very small wires that cannot be felt through the blanket for ultimate comfort while you both sleep. Choose from three colors—sage green, red, or beige—to complement your bedding.

Best wearable: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. 

Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% Polyester
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable price point 
  • Furry fabric offers extra warmth

Cons 

  • Only one size (oversize throw) available 
  • Controller overheats if covered by the blanket

The heating wires are laid throughout this throw in an “S” pattern, evenly distributing heat. Although only available in one size, the oversized 50 inches by 60 inches, it’s perfect for one person to keep warm. Expect heat ranges of 85 to 105 degrees Fahrenheit, although the long fur provides additional warmth as well. You’ll be limited to just three heat settings, but this heated blanket still offers good value for money at such a reasonable price. 

The two-hour auto shut-off provides peace of mind, although if you like to snuggle up while you watch TV before bed, you might need to reset it to keep you warm as you sleep. Some reviewers complained that the lifespan was short, which you should remember when researching heated to buy. As this blanket is on the smaller side, it could be a great option for keeping warm on the couch instead of at bedtime.

Things to consider before buying the best heated blankets 

While we’re happy to recommend specific models, we also like to provide some insight into what we consider the essential features that come with your new heated blanket. Here are some features and specs to look for while you’re shopping.

Safety

You might prefer the reassuring heavy feel of a weighted blanket instead of a heated blanket; after all, they don’t suit everyone. If you prefer to sleep wrapped up in a ball or your temperature fluctuates dramatically during the night, a heated blanket might not suit your needs. It’s also important to keep a few safety precautions in mind:

Damaged or frayed wires can make heated blankets unsafe. Get into the habit of checking them regularly and rolling rather than folding your blanket for storage. You should also choose a model with an automatic shut-off to prevent overheating. 

Heat settings 

The more heat settings your heated blanket has, the more you can customize it to your unique (and changing) needs. Depending on the weather, your other blankets and bedding, or the season, adjust the heat setting to suit your sleep habits best. You might also prefer to choose a heated throw blanket over one that you sleep with. 

Pets 

It’s not advised to use heated blankets with pets as they can become overheated and may chew or claw through the wires.

FAQs

Q: Is it safe to sleep with a heated blanket?

If used correctly, heated blankets are perfectly safe to use while sleeping. When selecting your blanket, make sure you choose one with an automatic shutoff so that you can rest easy knowing that you won’t overheat during the night. It’s also important to look after your blanket to prevent wires from shorting and to buy a new one when your blanket gets too old. 

Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

Heated blankets are very economical and use very little electricity to run, and certainly much less than a space heater or turning up the thermostat.

Q: Can I wash my heated blanket?

Not all heated blankets can be machine washed, so it’s very important to check the manufacturer details to make sure you’ll be able to clean your blanket properly. 

Final thoughts on the best heated blankets

Heated blankets can be a great way to stay warm on chilly nights, save money on your heating bills, or just make your bed extra snuggly and cozy. If you share a bed with someone else, buying an extra large heated blanket is a good idea and ensures you both have access to the controls to individualize your sleep space to your comfort level. Even if you don’t like to fall asleep with your heated blanket on, you can still opt for a wearable blanket to keep warm around the house or use a heated blanket to warm up your sheets before you slip out of your comfy heated slippers and into bed.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated blankets of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated insoles of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-insoles/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-insoles/
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep your feet nice and toasty with insoles designed to last well beyond the winter.

The post The best heated insoles of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiing A Thermic C-Pack Set of foot warmers on a plain background Thermic C-Pack Set
SEE IT

The perfect boot warmer for skiers and snowboarders alike.

Easiest to trim A pair of Warmfits Rechargeable Heated Insoles on a plain background Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers
SEE IT

Consistent warmth and a custom fit.

Best customizable A pair of Hotronic S4 Universal Foot Warmers on a plain background Hotronic Foot Warmer S4+ Universal
SEE IT

Easily attach to your existing insoles with a long-lasting battery.

There’s nothing worse than heading home early from what should be a great snow day because all the heat has left your toes or having a tough time focusing at work because all you can think about is the cold creeping into your insoles. You might be dreaming of the space heater waiting for you at home, but you need a solution now. Heated insoles can quickly and comfortably take out any unwelcome chills that come your way. These impressively compact creations can be found in various sizes and suited to various activities. Some heated shoe insoles are disposable, some are powered by rechargeable batteries, and some are even water-resistant (we’re looking at you fellow frequent foot-sweaters). Plus, most models are designed to minimize bulk or extra padding, so you won’t have to worry about your toes being squished. The best heated insoles are a great way to stay warm and stay active even when the temperature starts to drop.

How we chose the best heated insoles

We’ve reviewed plenty of heated tech, but we’re practically experts in the realm of electric clothes. We looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research to back our findings. The scientific method! It’s great!

The best heated insoles: Reviews & Recommendations

Heated shoe inserts are safe and easy to use; as long as you follow all included directions, you don’t need to worry about any damage to your skin, socks, or shoes. This makes them the perfect companion for many shoe types, including ski boots, hiking shoes, running sneakers, and more. Any one of our picks will be sure to toast up those tootsies.

Best overall: Thermacell Original Heated Insoles

Thermacell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These bright red insoles have a matching remote so you can control the temperature and turn it on and off without bending over or taking off your shoes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 100°F-111°F

Pros

  • Remote control
  • Shock absorbent
  • Retains it shape well

Cons

  • Can accidentally control a different pair of heated insoles with universal remote

Although Thermacell is known for its mosquito-repelling tech, they aren’t a one-trick pony with these battery-operated inserts. The wireless, remote-controlled insoles can heat between 100°F-111°F—there’s also a No Heat setting in case you end up indoors. Polyurethane foam allows for even heat conduction and shock resistance for comfortable wear all day. No more cold feet this winter—just ensure you stay far enough from someone else wearing these insoles, as you can control their pair thanks to the universal remote.

Best for ski boots: Thermic C-Pack Set

Thermic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These long-lasting heated insoles provide 17 hours of heat for warm feet all day on the slopes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Bluetooth enabled to control from phone
  • Can use with existing insoles
  • Ultra-fine heat elements for comfort

Cons

  • Expensive

This set from Thermic are the best heated insoles for ski boots on the market. The batteries provide up to 17 hours of heat, perfect for overnight trips, and they can fit underneath the strap of your ski boot to increase your mobility and keep you comfortable. There are three heat settings—low, medium, and high—that you can control via Bluetooth from your phone. Plus, the heating element can be used with your existing insoles or arch supports without issue. If this high-end model’s price point isn’t right for you, Thermic has many other options for you to peruse.

Best high-temperature: Riomza Rechargeable Heated Insoles

Riomza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These inserts reach up to 150°F—as Paris Hilton would say, “That’s hot!”

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Carbon fiber
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 104°F-150°F

Pros

  • Trimmable
  • Comes with a wireless remote control with LED display
  • Quickly heats up

Cons

  • Heels thick to fit battery

These heated shoe insoles have three different temperature settings easily controlled with an included remote. The highest setting can reach up to 150 degrees Fahrenheit. They come in three sizes that are easily trimmable to fit your shoe. Perhaps best of all, the battery for these guys sits inside the heel, so you don’t need to worry about strapping it elsewhere on your body—perfect for work or hunting—though this does tend to add a tiny bit of weight.

Best toe warmers: HotHands Heat Max Toe Warmers

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These single-use toe warmers stop stinky feet and are perfect to throw in your car for warm feet at a hands’ reach.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2.2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, activated charcoal, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Thin
  • Odor-absorbing
  • Ingredients don’t hurt the environment

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

These toe warmers from HotHands are our go-to when we need a little bit of extra insulation in our shoes. All you need to do is remove them from the pack and shake them for up to eight hours of heat. They are super thin so that you won’t feel any extra bulk, and they contain odor-absorbing activated charcoal, so if you do start to sweat, you won’t notice any stink.

Easiest to trim: Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers

Thermrup

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get insoles for the whole family—with peace of mind that they’ll fit—with these lightweight, battery-operated inserts.

Specs

  • Weight: .62 lbs.
  • Material: Nylon, EVA foam
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Washable
  • Even heat distribution

Cons

  • Short battery life compared to other insoles on our list

These heated insoles from Warmfits can last for up to four hours. The included cable connects to the battery, which can be charged using rechargeable batteries. Plus, you can cut the soles to fit your shoes and relax, knowing they’re made from comfortable EVA foam.

Best customizable: Hotronic S4+ Universal Foot Warmer

Hotronic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get the perfect fit with these insoles that can last you from 2.5-25 hours.

Specs

  • Weight: 1 lb.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Uknown

Pros

  • Last up to 21 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Switch design prevents accidental turn-off
  • Wiring is thin and not noticeable

Cons

  • Expensive

These heated insoles for shoes from Hotronic are all you need for custom heat. Though it does include insoles, it also has two separate heating elements that can attach to the toe of your own orthotic, with four heat settings. The batteries can last up to 21 hours, depending on the heat output, in cold climates with temperatures that can get as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These feet warmers stick to the bottom of your socked feet and are cheap—and easy—to keep around.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Long-lasting
  • Won’t budge
  • Natural heat

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

HotHands heated insoles are air-activated, safely made, and can last for up to nine hours. They’re great for winter sports and outdoor activities like tailgating, yard work, dog walks, and more.

What to consider when buying the best heated insoles

To find the best heated insoles for you, think about how often you’ll be using them, what kinds of outdoor activities you’ll be doing, and the temperatures you’re expecting. Do you need something that will last for hours, or do you want to prioritize heat settings? Do you already wear shoe supports and need something customizable? Are you looking for something disposable and budget-friendly? We’ve created this guide to help you answer those questions and get one step closer to warm feet.

Need the perfect boot warmer for your ski trip?

Perhaps the most popular reason for purchasing heated insoles is skiing. Using a heated insole can extend your time on the mountain by preventing pain and cramping caused by the cold.

If you’re looking for a warming insole to slip inside your ski boot, ensure you get one that you can customize to fit the room inside the boot, particularly around the toe box. You’ll also want a boot warmer that will last more than a couple of runs; if you’re looking for a full day of skiing, go for a unit that has at least five to six hours of battery life. We also recommend grabbing an insole with a water-resistant battery pack. Even though your feet are likely protected from the snow by your ski pants, there is still a chance moisture will sneak in; waterproof or resistant insoles will prevent damage over time, as well as keep you safe.

If you’re entirely new to rechargeable insoles, you should know that most models come with an external battery that can attach to your shoe or be placed in a pack to wrap around your leg or ankle. They require a set of wires to plug the insole into the battery. If you’re using a heated insole for skiing, make sure you select a pair with super durable wires that won’t stretch or snap if you take a tumble. Of course, when you go inside, you can change into your heated slippers to keep your feet warm and cozy.

Will you be outside in below-freezing temperatures?

Maybe you aren’t a winter sports fanatic, and you need something for everyday use because you live in a freezing locale. If this is the case, the most important thing to consider is the included heat settings.

Many heated insoles will come with a few heat levels; some need to be manually set; others can be controlled via remote. Remember, when you use the highest heat setting on any insole, you will decrease the battery life faster than a cooler heat setting. You’ll still be able to squeeze out a couple of hours with consistent heat, but you might not be able to make it through a winter trek before the battery dies. It’s a good idea to take the insoles out for a little test drive before committing to more prolonged activities like hikes or an errand marathon. That way, you can figure out which setting is right for you, keeping your feet warm, not sweaty. However, it’s recommended you wear socks with your heated insoles to absorb any potential sweat.

Are you constantly scrunching up your toes to get the blood flowing?

While evenly dispersed heat is never a bad thing, some people need to target specific areas in order to get the relief they need. Just like your fingers get chilly before your palms, your toes are usually the first part of your feet to feel the effects of extreme cold. How many times have you found yourself standing outside desperately wiggling your toes, scrunching them up, or jumping up and down just to try and feel them again? If this sounds like you, and you have good circulation elsewhere, maybe all you need is a set of really great toe warmers.

Toe warmers are significantly smaller than insoles, making them a little more susceptible to moving around or getting scrunched up in the shoe; they also have a bit more trouble connecting to a battery via wires (which are connected to the heel in most insoles). This is why we actually recommend sticking to a disposable, adhesive toe warmer. You’ll get the heat you need, for an extended period of time, without breaking the bank or struggling to flatten them out at the end of the day.

What are the best heated insoles that will last for hours on camping our hunting trips?

Some winter activities require you to be outside in the cold for long periods of time. Hunting, camping, and trekking can leave you feeling frozen, especially if you haven’t prepared properly. Similar to prioritizing heat over longevity, if you need the maximum amount of battery life out of your heated insoles, you might need to sacrifice the highest temperatures or a variety of temperature settings. However, not having tons of levels to choose from means more concentrated, evenly dispersed heat that won’t get cooler with each passing hour as the battery’s energy fades.

You can also look for extra features to keep your heated insoles lasting longer. The best heated insoles for long days will include batteries you can charge in the car. This means you can charge on the way to your trip or activity while also keeping the option open for a quick boost.

Do you want to stay warm but keep your current insoles?

Orthotics and insoles are extremely common and used by people of all ages to support their arches, relieve strain, cushion calluses, and minimize symptoms of tendinitis. More serious conditions are often treated with custom-molded insoles prescribed by podiatrists. If you already have insoles you love, but find yourself needing a little bit of extra warmth, there are options out there.

Some heated insoles come in a pack, and some sell their parts separately. This is great for folks who have orthotics but need a heating element. The packs will instruct you where to place the protected element on your insole, typically on the toe area, and how to connect all necessary cables or wires. You generally won’t need to do anything else; any individual heating element will be safe for you to use without adding anything extra. However, do not try to remove the heating element embedded in traditional heated insoles; this could be dangerous and result in injury. If you tend to get cold easily, you should also check a pair of heated hand warmers or heated gloves.

Best budget heated insoles

You don’t need to spend a ton of money on heated insoles, especially if you only need them a few days out of the year. You can easily address frigid feet for well under $45. Disposable foot warmers work great and are a better fit for tighter budgets. Most of them just need a quick shake to combine the chemicals inside before you adhere them to the bottom of your shoe. Disposable insoles have a three- to four-year shelf life, so you don’t have to use them right away. This makes them great for a couple of winter vacations.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated insoles cost?

Whether rechargeable or single-use, the best heated insoles can cost between $20-$200.

Q: Can heated insoles get wet?

As a general rule, you don’t want to submerge any batteries in water. We don’t recommend buying heated insoles if you suspect your feet will be soaked by the end of the day. However, some models are water-resistant and work well to wick away sweat and other droplets. To be safe, never assume something is waterproof unless specifically stated.

Q: Are heated insoles safe for children to use?

Yes, so long as your children can verbally express discomfort. Heated insoles are totally safe, but you want to make sure your child can tell you if they start to feel too hot. Look for an insole that says it’s specifically for kids to ensure the right fit and rest easy with the knowledge that all necessary safety precautions have been taken when it comes to the design.

Q: Are expensive insoles worth it?

If your toes are always cold, it is probably worth it to invest in a reliable model that will last. More expensive models typically have better batteries, consistent heat regulation, a more comfortable design, and longer life overall. If you only use foot warmers every so often, or you’re just looking for something to add a touch of heat, you won’t necessarily need to invest in an insole for the long term.

Q: Can I use heated insoles to treat foot pain?

Applying a warm compress is a great way to treat foot pain, so heated insoles are a sound swap. Consult with your doctor or physical therapist before slipping some heated insoles into your shoes for medical purposes.

Final thoughts on the best heated insoles

The best heated insoles are going to keep your feet warm so you can enjoy your favorite winter activities. From rechargeable to disposable, these foot warmers are a great way to relieve any pain or discomfort you feel during the coldest time of the year. Consider how much time you’ll be spending outside, how much extra heat you need, and what you’ll be doing while wearing your new foot warmers. Once you can answer these questions, you’ll be ready to purchase a great pair of heated insoles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated insoles of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hand warmers of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-hand-warmers/ Wed, 10 Feb 2021 13:59:28 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-hand-warmers-2/
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Whether you’re looking for reusable, rechargeable, or disposable hand warmers, there’s one that’s right for you.

The post The best hand warmers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best budget An orange box of HotHands Warmers on a plain background HotHands Warmers
SEE IT

Just shake-and-go to get warmth on-the-go with this wallet-friendly hand warmers.

Best rechargeable A blue OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer on a plain background OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer
SEE IT

Get up to 15 hours of warmth in just five seconds.

Best for hunting A Hunter Safety System Heated Muff on a plain background Hunter Safety System Heated Muff
SEE IT

This fleeced-line muff that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours.

If you’re someone whose extremities suffer in the cold, think about investing in hand warmers. Have you ever tried tying your shoes, finding your car keys, or getting out your credit card when you can’t feel your fingers? Not fun. Cold weather can lead to poor circulation, which can, in turn, lead to uselessly frigid hands and frozen fingers. Hand warmers are a great way to keep you comfortable for hours at a time so you can get on with your life and stop desperately puffing warm air into cupped palms. They’re discreet, effective, and super portable, making them suitable for use on the go. They’re also great for camping, hiking, ice skating, and hockey, as well as non-sporting events like watching holiday parades, tailgating, waiting in line for the newest iPhone, you name it. You’ve probably used disposable hand warmers if you’ve ever gone skiing, but there are more long-lasting products we think you’ll want to see. The best hand warmers help you say goodbye to tripling up on gloves just to walk to the grocery store.

How we chose the best hand warmers

We didn’t want to leave you with cold feet looking for the best hand warmers, especially if you’re trying to prevent frostbite or pack your emergency car kit. We looked at critical reviews, under recommendations, and conducted heavy research to find the best hand warmers.

The best hand warmers: Reviews & Recommendations

Hand warmers are just one of the many things you can bring with you on an outdoor adventure to keep you warm. From football games to fall hikes, one of our choices should stop frozen fingers before they happen.

Best overall: HotSnapZ Reusable Hand Warmers

HotSnapZ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 30-40 minutes
  • Temperature range: 115-120°F

Pros

  • Reusable
  • Last 200-300 uses
  • Instant heat

Cons

  • Doesn’t last as long as other options on this list

These HotSnapz hand warmers produce instant heat without using electricity or other conducting material. They last for 30 to 40 minutes, so they’re the perfect companion for a brisk morning walk or a quick errand. After your first use, simply boil them for 10 to 15 minutes; (we recommend fixing yourself a cup of tea with some of the water while you wait), let cool, then snap the internal metal disk and soak up the heat.

Best reusable long-lasting warmers: Zippo Hand Warmer

Zippo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 6-12 hours
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Refillable and reusable
  • Long-lasting
  • Flameless warmth

Cons

  • Not TSA-friendly

Zippo hand warmers are the way to go if you think a refillable option is right for you. Zippo makes both a six- and 12-hour model in various colors and styles; each comes with a protective case, lighter fluid funnel, and detailed safety guide. You can also easily purchase additional lighter fuel when you need to refill.

Best rechargeable: OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer

Ocoopa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: Up to 15 hours
  • Temperature range: Up to 131°F

Pros

  • Safe on skin
  • Can be used as a power bank
  • All-day warming

Cons

  • Casing scratches easily

This rechargeable hand warmer helps you stay toasty all day. It lasts between eight to 15 hours with a full battery from just three-and-a-half hours of charging time. Simply plug the device into a USB-C or micro USB-compatible charger. Adjust the heat by selecting one of the three levels based on the outside temperature, calculated for 5, 32, and 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Bonus: This one is safe on the skin.

Best for skiing: Snow Deer Heated Gloves

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 2.5-6 hours depending on settings
  • Temperature range: Up to 150°F

Pros

  • Water-resistant
  • Can use with phone
  • Soft lining inside glove

Cons

  • Palm runs small

These rechargeable heated gloves come in five sizes, from small to XX-Large. They’re perfect for a day on the mountain and stay warm between two-and-a-half to six hours. There are three temperature settings, starting at 100 degrees Fahrenheit and going all the way up to 150 degrees. Durable and water-resistant, these are also equipped with touch sensors so you can still use your phone. For more options, here’s our list of the best heated gloves.

Best for hunting: Hunter Safety System Heated Muff

Hunter Safety System

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: N/A
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Storage pockets
  • Soft lining
  • Ergonomic

Cons

  • Power bank not included

Looking for the best hand warmers for hunting? This muff from Hunter Safety System does, in fact, come heated, though you can also purchase a model sans extra heat. The interior is lined with fleece that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours. You’ll need to charge and connect your own power bank, which can easily slide into the designated built-in pocket. Keep in mind that this model is less water-resistant than others, so if you foresee rain during an all-day hunt, look for something that is guaranteed waterproof.

Best budget: HotHands Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

These disposable hand warmers from HotHands are a staple when it comes to keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes.

Things to consider when looking for the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers are designed to keep you toasty throughout the duration of your outdoor activity. Some are reusable, some are rechargeable, and some are disposable, perfect if you want to toss them in the trash after you hit the slopes or get a drink après ski. We’ve broken down the various types of hand warmers out there and also provided some of our favorite options below.

Let’s start with the basics: chemically activated, reusable hand warmers

Reusable hand warmers are a fantastic way to keep cozy in cold weather. They eliminate the need to run out to store for replacements, plus, they can be easily shared. There are a few popular types of reusable hand warmers, differentiated by heating mechanism.

Some reusable pairs look like ice/heat packs found in first aid kits. These are chemically activated. Inside each pack is a metal disk that needs to be snapped or bent to release a heat-generating compound. Inside, sodium acetate (a food-safe ingredient found in salt), water, and energy mix to form solid crystals. This process produces an exothermic reaction, raising the pack’s temperature to roughly 130 degrees Fahrenheit in under 10 seconds. After a pack’s first use, you’ll need to boil the hand warmers for approximately 10 minutes before using them again, effectively reactivating the chemicals and returning the sodium acetate to its liquid form. These typically last between 30 minutes to an hour, though you can extend the heating time by adding extra packs or keeping them in coat pockets. If you’re an athlete, you can use them for additional relief on sore muscles. They are safe on the skin, but of course, take precautions when handling hot objects.

What are the best hand warmers for longevity?

If you need more than an hour of heat time but like the idea of simple reusable hand warmers without worrying about recharging, lighter-fuel-based models are the best option for you. Yes, we understand that filling something with lighter fluid, activating it, and stuffing it in your pockets seems a little outlandish, but trust us when we say you’ll keep warm all day.

Much like a regular lighter, these hand warmers, once filled with fuel, use a catalytic burner to generate heat. (Unlike a regular burner, you won’t see any external flames.) To ignite, hold a flame to it for roughly 10 seconds. Doing so will create a small internal furnace that can burn anywhere from six to 12 hours, depending on the model. Remember, once the warmer is ignited, you won’t be able to stop the heat until it naturally burns off. You can, however, place the hand warmer on a fireproof surface once you’re done using it and let it naturally smolder out.

Refillable hand warmers are not meant to be applied directly to the skin; most come with a small pouch into which you can place the warmer and then hold or slip into a coat pocket. Due to the delicate nature of the fill material, a.k.a. flammable fluid, we don’t recommend using these for intense sports such as skiing, snowboarding, ice skating, or hockey. We do, however, recommend them for long hikes, camping trips, cold offices, and cross-country car rides. There’s nothing worse than driving through Colorado in the middle of winter when your heat is broken.

Consider rechargeable hand warmers

If you’re ready to get a little more high-tech, plenty of rechargeable hand warmers are out there. These typically use electricity and a lithium-ion battery to generate heat. The models might be slightly thicker than refillable options, but they don’t differ too much in overall size, so they’ll still fit nicely in pockets or gloves.

The pros of rechargeables include long-lasting warmth with the ability to heat between two to eight hours. Plus, if you’re done with your outdoor activity or sufficiently warmed up, you can simply turn off the device. Many have heat-customization settings and the ability to charge other electronic devices simultaneously. You just have to remember to charge them. Simply plug in the hand warmer when not in use, and you’ll never be left out in the cold.

While we love a rechargeable option, there are a few cons you should know about. Rechargeable hand warmers are susceptible to water damage, so it’s probably best to keep them away from snow and sleet. Also, heat consistency can be a bit sporadic depending on the temperature outside. The overall heating time can also be affected by the cold, impacting the battery lifespan. Overall, we consider these to be minor impediments because a rechargeable warmer’s heating time is guaranteed to be longer than a chemically activated option, and the custom control is far greater than a lighter fluid-filled hand warmer.

Do you plan on hitting the slopes?

One of the most common reasons to purchase hand warmers is to keep your fingers from freezing while on the mountains. Though there are some amazing regular ski and winter gloves out there (heated, featured above, and not heated), it doesn’t hurt to have a little extra warmth, especially if you’re outside shredding all day. Hand warmers for skiers or snowboarders usually need to fit inside the glove rather than slide inside a coat pocket; they also need to be relatively flexible or small if you’re skiing with poles.

Though certainly non-traditional, it’s worth looking for glove/hand-warmer hybrids. Heated gloves use the same lithium-ion battery technology as the rechargeable ones listed above, but the active heaters are fit to the glove, so you can maintain grip and flexibility without maneuvering around a large chunk of plastic and metal. Plus, you won’t have to worry about the snow because these gloves are designed with an outer waterproof shell, which protects the batteries from any liquid damage.

Our second favorite option for skiing is the disposable hand warmer from brands like HotHands or Little Hotties. We’ll dive deeper into disposable hand warmers when we talk about our favorite budget pick, but these are a good option to keep in the back of your brain when thinking about ski-appropriate heating options. And when you’re done skiing, you can slip into a pair of heated slippers, or shoes with heated insoles, for warmth and comfort in the lodge.

Do you need something classic for hunting?

While muffs aren’t going to help much if your hands need to be out and at the ready, they’re a traditional way to stay cozy in a blind or tree stand. Muffs are, of course, reusable and can be adjusted to fit your frame. They’re made from many materials, including fur, shearling, or synthetic fabric. The outer layer will often be water-resistant and windproof, so you won’t need to worry about inclement weather. Some muffs even have special internal pockets for extra hand warmers to slide in, and others come with external pockets or shell pockets, so not only will your hands stay warm, but you’ll also get some additional storage space. A muff’s durability and reliability make it a great choice for hunters everywhere. We recommend bringing this and maybe one or two disposable hand warmers along with you, just in case you need even more warmth on those brisk early mornings.

Best budget hand warmers: What you get for under $20

Luckily, hand warmers don’t tend to be prohibitively expensive, unless you’re looking for high-end gloves or a really large rechargeable battery. That being said, reusable options will be more expensive than disposable ones, though disposable ones may be less cost-effective over time, depending on how you use them. If you want a more budget-friendly reusable hand warmer, the first thing to look for is brand reputation and clear safety guidelines; this is especially true if you go for something chemically activated or lighter-fluid-based. Disposable hand warmers are likely to be the cheapest option and work great for almost any outdoor activity; They’re thin and flexible, and they slide easily into gloves or pockets.

FAQs

Q: Can hand warmers expire?

Technically, yes. The expiration for each product is brand-specific. For example, the HotHands warmers we listed above have a shelf life of three to four years. Rechargeable hand warmers usually have a life span that includes a certain amount of charges (typically 300). Low-tech chemically activated chargers also tend to have an expiration date; HotSnapZ usually become defective after 200 to 300 snaps. Check out each product’s specs for more information on lifespan.

Q: How do disposable hand warmers work?

Like reusable hand warmers, disposable hand warmers rely on chemical activation instead of lighter fluid or lithium batteries. Each pouch typically includes salt, iron powder, activated carbon, and a little water. When the pouch is taken out of its airtight seal and exposed to oxygen, the iron powder causes an exothermic reaction, generating heat. The carbon helps evenly disperse the heat, and an absorbent material like wood or a polymer helps retain it throughout the day.

Q: Do I need to order a separate pouch for hand warmers?

Generally speaking, you do not need to purchase a separate hand warmer pouch. Refillable hand warmers will definitely need to be placed in a pouch to avoid burns, but the model you buy should come with one. Of course, if you end up losing it, definitely place an order for another. Other hand warmers, including rechargeable, chemically activated, and disposable styles, are safe on the skin once they reach the appropriate temperature. If you want an extra barrier because it’s just a little too hot in the mitten, you can place them in bags or wrap them in a thin cloth. We recommend using sunglasses bags or thin socks.

Q: Can you take hand warmers on a plane?

Handwarmers using carbon, charcoal, and iron compounds are allowed in carry-on and checked baggage. Handwarmers that use hazardous or flammable liquids are not allowed. Check TSA and FAA guidelines for more details.

Final thoughts on the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers for you fit your lifestyle and needs. If you’re active in short bursts, a reusable, chemically activated option might be right for you. If you’re going on longer camping trips with no electricity in sight, grab a refillable, lighter-fuel-based model. If you’re constantly going numb in the fingertips and need something reliable and reusable, reach for the rechargeable one. And if you just need something to get you out and about or on the slopes with all-day protection from the cold, consider a disposable model. No matter what, stay bundled out there.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hand warmers of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bird feeder cameras in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-bird-feeder-cameras/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580793
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

Bird feeder cameras allow you to see your feathered friends in new ways.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A blue Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder filled with seed against a white background with a gray gradient. Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder
SEE IT

The Bird Buddy offers stylish design, quality images, and a fun app with real-time notifications.

Best for hummingbirds A blue BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera against a white background with a grey gradient. BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera
SEE IT

The nectar attachment of this feeder can be swapped out to hold seed as well.

Best budget A white WYZE Cam v3 against a white background with a gray gradient. WYZE Cam v3
SEE IT

This budget option lets you see the birds without any extras.

Bird feeder cameras make documenting our feathered friends fun and easy, but they aren’t created equally. Some are best for bird-watching in your own backyard, while others are better suited to remote locations. More expensive models have features like solar panels, video options, and smart bird identification, while basic, budget models make feeder photography accessible for just about everyone. No matter what you are looking for, the best bird feeder cameras will allow you to capture quality images of the birds who call your area home. 

How we chose the best bird feeder cameras

There are dozens of bird feeder cameras on the market. Though many of them have the same basic features, they don’t all offer the same level of important features like durability, battery life, and accuracy of species detection. 

To arrive at our top picks, we relied on our own assessment of each device, including hands-on experience with multiple models. Because bird feeder cameras must be durable, weatherproof, and offer long-lasting performance, we also leaned heavily on user experiences and favored well-reviewed products. 

Features like accurate bird identification, solar panel availability, and useful accessories also helped push some models into the limelight. Other options like real-time notification and color night vision were nice to have but not essentials. Still, they didn’t tend to figure into our final decision simply because of their somewhat limited value for bird photography. 

The best bird feeder cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a bird feeder camera can be tough. There are dozens of available models, and the prices can range from less than $50 all the way up to $400 or more. The key to finding the right bird feeder camera is not necessarily shopping by price but knowing which features are must-haves and which are not. Not everyone will benefit from AI, for example. You may even prefer to use your own knowledge to identify the birds in your photographs. Below are our favorite options, suitable for a range of situations and users. 

Best overall: Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 1,000 bird species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 5-megapixel photos, 720p video
  • Battery: 4000 mAh rechargeable lithium-ion battery, optional solar panel

Pros

  • Sharp images with a 120-degree field of view
  • Weatherproof from -5°F to 120°F
  • The smartphone app allows you to see feeders all over the world
  • Compatible with an optional solar panel and lots of accessories
  • Three mounting options

Cons

  • No local storage, so it can’t be used without Wi-Fi
  • Video resolution is lower than some competitors

The Bird Buddy bird feeder camera is relatively new, but it has much to offer, so it earns our top spot. The bird feeder is attractively designed, so it will look nice in your yard or on your deck with some solar lights, which is an important feature for many. It’s available in blue or vibrant yellow, so you can choose an option that fits your style best. I really enjoy the look of the blue Bird Buddy on the side of my porch, which is a big plus. 

The camera module is removable, which is important when it comes time to clean the feeder. It can take five-megapixel photos or offers 720p live-streamed video. The image quality won’t be that of your dedicated mirrorless or DSLR camera, but it is nicely detailed and properly exposed even in backlit situations. And being able to tune in to watch live as a bird chows down is pretty neat. 

The camera’s 120-degree field of view is wide enough to capture birds hanging out on the feeder’s side. You can also buy multiple accessories through Bird Buddy to extend the perch or feed different species. With the solar roof (the model we thoroughly tested and reviewed), you’ll never need to think about charging the camera. Without the solar roof, you’ll need to charge the camera every 5 to 15 days.

The Bird Buddy relies on AI to automatically recognize over 1,000 species of birds. The Bird Buddy app notifies you when you have new visitors to your feeder, which is always exciting. You can even browse other Bird Buddy devices all over the world to see species that you wouldn’t otherwise encounter. Plus, the images from your device contribute to migration information for conservation databases. You’ll be helping science progress while getting fun images of your feathered friends. 

Best trail camera: TECHNAXX Full HD Birdcam TX-165 

TECHNAXX

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 8-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries give it a working time of up to 6 months

Pros

  • Sturdy trail-cam style feeder
  • 6-month battery life
  • Removable water basin means it can be a feeder or a birdbath
  • Captures slow-motion video

Cons

  • No smartphone app or bird identification features
  • Memory card storage is less convenient than Wi-Fi or Bluetooth

This hybrid bird feeder camera is as tough as any trail camera. However, unlike most trail cameras, it can focus as close as 2 to 6 inches and offers a 100-degree field of view. This means you’ll get much better images of visiting birds than you would with a typical trail cam. The TX-165 takes standard AA batteries but has a working time of up to 6 months. You can leave it in a secure, remote location for a long time without worrying about the battery going flat.

The TX-165 also has a few features you won’t find on other bird feeder cameras. You can fill it with birdseed or fill the removable basin with water and turn it into a birdbath camera. It also takes impressive eight-megapixel images and full HD 1080p video. It’s also capable of 25 frames per second for slow-motion videos. 

Best for bird boxes: Hawk Eye HD Nature Cam

Hawk Eye

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 700 tvl (television lines)
  • Battery: None (includes a 75-foot power cable)

Pros

  • Compact, so you can hide it almost anywhere
  • Night vision lets you capture clear images in poor light 
  • Durable and temperature-tolerant to between 35°F and 105°F

Cons

  • Only shoots video 
  • Not waterproof
  • Needs to be plugged into a power supply

Birds do a lot more than just eat birdseed, so at some point, you might want to step up to a birdhouse camera. Because the Hawk Eye Nature Cam isn’t built into a feeder, it’s much more flexible than most bird cams. Its small size means you can put it anywhere—on treetops, fence posts, or even in animal burrows (though please exercise caution when putting it down a snake hole). Or it can be wired discreetly into a bird box for a 24/7 look at growing bird families, from egg to fledgling. 

The Hawk Eye Nature Cam is meant for live-streaming to your television set. The video resolution is clear and sharp, with 700 tvl (television lines) and 10 infrared diodes. This lets you view clear video even in the darkened environment of a typical bird box. Note, however, that you will need an RCA to USB adapter if you have a modern TV. 

The Hawk Eye does have a few drawbacks. It has no battery, so you’ll have to mess with a long extension cord to get it set up. It also isn’t waterproof. If you want to attach it to an unsheltered location, you’ll have to build waterproof housing or limit your use to dry weather. Finally, you can connect the camera to your PC and use additional software to grab photos and video segments from the live stream, but it’s not designed to capture high-resolution stills.

Best for hummingbirds: BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera

BirdDock

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies species and alerts you when birds approach 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 2-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 6400 mAh rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of operating time 

Pros

  • AI can recognize around 5,000 different species, including hummingbirds
  • Rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of use
  • Hummingbird attachment is removable

Con:

  • Still photos are much lower resolution than those shot by similar feeders 
  • The app is clunky and difficult to use

The BirdDock is a flexible bird feeder camera that isn’t limited to just capturing photos of seed-eaters. It also offers a removable hummingbird attachment featuring five flower-shaped feeding ports with 0.16-inch holes to keep bees and other insects out.  When you want to switch to photographing songbirds, you can remove the hummingbird feeder and fill the device with seeds. 

Like other AI feeders, the BirdDock will identify species and alert you when one is approaching the feeder. It has night vision, too, which could help you identify other critters that visit your feeder overnight. This bird feeder camera features a 160-degree field of view and can be used with or without an SD memory card. It provides an impressive battery life of up to 30 days. You can also purchase a separate solar panel to keep the device charged in sunny weather.

The BirdDock has two primary drawbacks: It captures still photos at a relatively low resolution of only two megapixels (though it does also capture full HD 1080p video). It also doesn’t have an especially user-friendly app. Some users complain that the bird identification feature isn’t accurate and that the app frequently disconnects from the camera.

Best for bird identification: Netvue Birdfy Pro

Netvue

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 6,000 different species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: Full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 5000 mAh rechargeable batteries 

Pros

  • Can identify more than 6,000 different species 
  • Long battery life (the manufacturer claims up to six months of use)
  • Extra features like squirrel recognition and color night vision

Cons

  • The bird identification service costs extra
  • Storing photos on the cloud requires a subscription

The Netvue Birdfy rivals the Bird Buddy with features like ease of use, durability, and photo quality. It has an impressive array of extra features like color night vision. The AI can recognize squirrels, and the built-in microphone lets you yell at them when they’re caught robbing the feeder. You can also upgrade your feeder with add-ons like a solar panel, hummingbird feeder, and perch extension.

The Birdfy has the same features as most other feeders, including automatic capture/motion detection and real-time notification. It takes clear video at close range, provides a 135-degree field of view, and even offers 8x magnification if you want to study the fine details.

Birdfy has an impressive database of 6,000 species, though reviewers note that it isn’t always accurate. When it does misidentify a bird, you have the option to submit a report via the app. This is evidence that Netvue is constantly working to improve its software. 

The primary drawback of the Netvue bird feeder camera is you may have to pay for various subscriptions depending on what features you want access to. For example, if you want to take advantage of the bird identification feature, you must pay for a subscription. Likewise, a subscription is required if you want to store photos on the Netvue Cloud for longer than 30 days. 

Best budget: WYZE Cam v3

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: No species identification
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 1080p full HD video
  • Battery: No battery

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Weatherproof 
  • Compact for easy mounting

Cons

  • Minimum focus distance is around 12 inches
  • No battery; needs to be plugged into a power supply

Bird feeder cameras with all the bells and whistles can be expensive. A $200 feeder might be outside your budget, or you may not need all the features that expensive bird feeder cameras offer. The WYZE Cam v3 is essentially an outdoor security camera. You won’t be able to fill it with birdseed or attach a hummingbird accessory. But you can mount this sturdy little camera next to any commercial bird feeder or install it close to a high-traffic part of your backyard. 

The WYZE Cam v3 offers all the basic features you need in a bird cam. It’s weatherproof with an IP65 rating. It takes photos when it senses motion, and it has an app so you can see what’s happening outside in real-time. 

The WYZE Cam does have a few drawbacks. One of these is the focus distance. While most dedicated bird cams can focus on subjects as close as a few inches, the WYZE Cam isn’t designed for closeups. You’ll have to mount it at least a foot away from your feeder, meaning you won’t see a lot of detail in your photos. 

The WYZE Cam is also wired. It comes with a weatherproof six-foot USB cable, so you’ll have to install it close to your home. On the plus side, once installed, you won’t have to worry about changing or recharging the battery or losing your video stream on a cloudy day.

Things to consider before buying a bird feeder camera

If you love bird watching but don’t want to sit waiting with your binoculars, a bird feeder camera will allow you to capture photos and videos of birds even when you aren’t around.

A bird feeder camera is meant for permanent outdoor use. This means it needs features you probably don’t consider when shopping for other photography gear. Here are some of the most important things you’ll want to think about when shopping for a bird feeder camera.

Durability

Bird feeder cameras can be subject to some serious abuse. The sun’s UV rays and hot temperatures can degrade plastic casings over time. These devices must also withstand storms and sprinklers, remaining waterproof from season to season. Of course, they should also be tough enough to handle the beaks and claws of visiting critters—not just the birds they’re intended for but other potential visitors like squirrels and mice.

Image quality

The image quality of bird feeder cameras is dependent on a few things. Resolution is the first thing most think of, and indeed, it is important with these devices. If you want clear, sharp images, look for bird feeder cameras with higher resolution. These compact cameras won’t offer numbers you may be used to in smartphones or mirrorless cameras, though. Five to eight megapixels for stills and 1080p for video tend to be the highest available at the moment.  However, if you aren’t concerned with high levels of detail, you could save some money and opt for a device with a less impressive resolution. 

The second factor of image quality is close focusing distance. The majority of shots taken by a bird feeder camera will be up-close. As a result, look for a device capable of getting clear photos at a very short distance. Even as close as a few inches is ideal.  Finally, birds don’t tend to sit still for long. Because of this, the camera should be able to freeze action, even in low light conditions like early morning or cloudy days. 

WiFi connectivity

WiFi isn’t necessarily a critical feature, but it’s something to consider if you’re going to keep your feeder close to your house. Most people don’t want to trek outside daily to download photos or swap out a memory card. A WiFi connection will let you see what your camera captured at any time of day in any weather. Treating it like a smart-home device will save you from having to venture into the cold, heat, or rain unless you need to change the battery or add birdseed.

Pay attention to the range of the device, too. Shy birds won’t approach your device if it is too close to your home. If it’s too far away, you won’t be able to view your photos without exiting your home.

Mounting options

Each bird feeder camera will have somewhat different requirements for how you install them. Some require a pole, some can be mounted to a fence post, and others can be hung. Depending on where you want the feeder and what tools you have available for installation, some of these options may be better than others for your particular needs.

Battery life

Some bird feeder cameras take basic replaceable AA batteries; others rely on solar panels to power internal rechargeable batteries. Either way, you’ll want to pick a camera that isn’t power-hungry. A good battery will ensure you aren’t constantly changing batteries or missing photos because your camera goes dark on a cloudy day. 

Choosing a camera with motion detection is a good place to start. These cameras only activate when there’s something to take a photo of, which helps the battery last longer.

FAQs

Q: How do bird feeder cameras work?

Most bird feeder cameras are triggered by motion. When a bird visits the feeder, the camera will capture a still photo or record video, depending on its design. Some smart bird feeder cameras can also identify species by comparing photos to thousands of stored images of each individual bird species.

Q: What color bird feeder attracts more birds?

A 2017 study found that green or silver bird feeders tend to attract the most visitors, but color preference also seems to be species-specific. Robins in the study, for example, preferred black feeders, while greenfinches and starlings didn’t seem to care about color at all. 

Q: Where should I put a bird feeder camera?

Bird feeders should be placed in open spaces but not too far from potential cover. The Humane Society recommends placing feeders 12 feet from brush and trees. This prevents predators from hiding near the feeder and gives the birds cover to fly to if they feel threatened.

Q: Do infrared cameras bother birds?

Infrared light is invisible to birds, so a camera inside a bird box will give you clear pictures while the bird remains in darkness. 

Final thoughts on the best bird feeder cameras

Once limited to nature photographers with long telephoto lenses and lots of patience, bird feeder cameras have made bird photography nearly effortless and available to almost anyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean any camera will do, though. Thinking about what you want to get out of your investment is an important first step in choosing a feeder. If you’re hoping to get up-close, detailed shots, pay attention to the example shots provided by the manufacturer and uploaded by users. Consider how important good battery life is to you, and ask yourself if you really need a camera that will identify already familiar local birds.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-under-500/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451591
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

Looking to stargaze on a budget? We’ve got the goods on the best affordable telescopes.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500. Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

A solid build and specs, paired with smartphone-guided sky recognition technology, makes this telescope perfect for starry-eyed explorers.

Best for viewing planets Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets. Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for checking out neighboring orbs.

Best for kids Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids. Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit
SEE IT

The entire package is designed to inspire kids during the window where they stare curiously out of the windows.

Telescopes under $500 can provide a passport to the universe without emptying your wallet. In their basic function, telescopes are our connection to the stars. For millennia, humankind has gazed skyward with wonder into the infinite reaches of outer space. And as humans are a curious bunch, our ancestors devised patterns in the movements of celestial bodies, gave them names, and built stories around them. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, and Greeks indulged in star worship. But you don’t have to follow those lines to geek out over the vastness of the night sky. It’s just so cool. Fortunately, whatever your motivation for getting under the stars, there is an affordable option for you on our list of the best telescopes under $500.

How we chose the best telescopes under $500

The under-$500 telescope market is crowded with worthy brands and models, so we looked at offerings in that price range from several well-known manufacturers in the space. After narrowing our focus based on personal experience, peer suggestions, critical reviews, and user impressions, we considered aperture, focal length, magnification, build quality, and value to select these five models.

The best telescopes under $500: Reviews & Recommendations

To get the best views of the stars, planets, and other phenomena of outer space, not just any old telescope will get the job done. There are levels of quality and a wide range of price points and features to sort through before you can be sure you’re making the right purchase for what you want out of your telescope, whether it’s multi-thousands, one of the best telescopes for under $1,000, or one of our top picks under $500.

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid build and specs, paired with the remarkable StarSense Explorer app, make this telescope a perfect introduction to celestial observation.

Specs

  • Focal length: 650mm
  • Aperture: 130mm, f/5
  • Magnification: 65x, 26x

Pros

  • App aids in finding stars
  • Easy to operate
  • Steady altazimuth mount

Cons

  • Eyepieces are both low power

Newbies to astronomy today can have a decidedly different experience than beginners who started stargazing before smartphones were a thing. Instead of carting out maps of the night sky to find constellations, the StarSense Explorer series from Celestron, including the DX 130AZ refractor, makes ample use of your device to bring you closer to the stars. 

With your smartphone resting in the telescope’s built-in dock, the StarSense Explorer app will find your location using the device’s GPS and serve up a detailed list of celestial objects viewable in real time. Looking for the Pleiades cluster? This app will tell you how far away it is from you and then lead you there with on-screen navigation. The app also includes descriptions of those objects, tips for observing them, and other useful info. 

The StarSense Explorer ships with an altazimuth mount equipped with slow-moving fine-tuning controls for both axes so you can find your target smoothly. And for those times you want to explore the night sky without tethering a smartphone, the scope’s red dot finder will help you zero in on your targets. The two eyepieces, measuring 25mm and 10mm, are powerful enough to snag stellar views of the planets but not quite enough to see the details a high-powered eyepiece would deliver.

Best for viewing planets: Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for viewing planets.

Specs

  • Focal length: 1300mm
  • Aperture: 102mm, f/12.7
  • Magnification: 130x, 52x

Pros

  • Great for viewing planets and galaxies
  • Sharp focus and contrast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Not ideal for deep-space viewing

Let’s be real—most consumers in the market for a moderately priced telescope are in it to gain spectacular views of the planets and galaxies, but probably not much else. And it’s easy to see why. Nothing makes celestial bodies come alive like viewing them in real time, in all their colorful glory.

If that sounds like you, allow us to direct you to the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, a refracting telescope specializing in crisp views of objects like planets and galaxies with ample contrast to make them pop against the dark night sky. The Skymax 102 is based on a Maksutov-Cassegrains design that uses both mirrors and lenses, resulting in a heavy-hitting scope in a very compact and portable unit. A generous 102mm aperture pulls in plenty of light to illuminate the details in objects, and the 1300mm focal length results in intense magnification.

Two included wide-angle eyepieces measuring 25mm and 10mm deliver 130x and 52x magnification, respectively. The package also includes a red-dot finder, V-rail for mounting, 1.25-inch diagonal viewing piece, and a case for transport and storage. Look no further if you’re looking for pure colors across a perfectly flat field in a take-anywhere form factor.

Best for astrophotography: William Optics GuideStar 61 

William Optics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Top-notch specs and an enviable lens setup make this telescope ideal for astrophotography.

Specs

  • Focal length: 360mm
  • Aperture: f/5.9
  • Magnification: 7x (with 2-inch eyepiece)

Pros

  • Well-appointed specs
  • Sturdy, durable construction
  • Carrying case included

Cons

  • Flattener is an extra purchase

Sometimes you want to share more than descriptions of what you see in the night sky, and that’s where this guidescope comes in, helping you to focus on the best full-frame image. You can go as deep into the details (not to mention debt) as your line of credit will allow in your quest to capture the most impressive images of space. Luckily, though, this is a worthy option at a reasonable price. 

The Williams Optics Guide Star 61 telescope is a refracting-type scope with a 360mm focal length, f/5.9 aperture, and 61mm diameter well-suited to capturing sharp images of planets, moon, and bright deep-sky objects. The GS61 shares many specs with the now-discontinued Zenith Star 61, including focal length, aperture, and diameter, as well as the FPL53 ED doublet lens for high-contrast images.

The scope’s optical tube is about 13 inches long and weighs just 3 lbs.—great for traveling with the included carrying case—with a draw-tube (push-pull) focuser for coarse focusing and a rotating lens assembly for fine focus. Attaching a DSLR camera to the Guide Star 61 is a fairly easy job, but note that the flattener for making that connection is a separate purchase.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit

Orion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The entire package is designed to get kids exploring space right out of the box.

Specs

  • Focal length: 700mm
  • Aperture: 60mm, f/11.7
  • Magnification: 70x, 28x

Pros

  • Capable of detailed views of moon and planets
  • Lightweight construction
  • Lots of handy accessories

Cons

  • Not enough optical power to reach deep space

Parents have a limited window of time to recognize and develop their kids’ interests, so kindle a fascination with the stars through a star projector and then fan it with a telescope. That’s what makes the Orion Observer II such a great buy. Seeing the craters on the moon or the rings of Saturn for the first time can affirm your kids’ curiosity about space and expand their concept of the universe—and they can get those goosebumps while learning through this altazimuth refractor telescope.

The Orion Observer II is built to impressive specifications, with a 700mm focal length that provides 71x magnification for viewing the vivid details of planets in our solar system. True glass lenses (not plastic) are a bonus at this price point, and combined with either included Kellner eyepieces (25mm and 10mm), the telescope delivers crisp views of some of space’s most dazzling objects. 

Kids and parents can locate celestial objects with the included red-dot finder. The kit also includes MoonMap 260, a fold-out map that directs viewers to 260 lunar features, such as craters, valleys, ancient lava flows, mountain ranges, and every U.S. and Soviet lunar mission landing site. An included copy of Exploring the Cosmos: An Introduction to the Night Sky gives a solid background before they go stargazing. And with its aluminum tube and tripod, the entire rig is very portable, even for young ones, with a total weight of 4.3 pounds. Find more options for the best telescopes for kids here. (And/or go the opposite direction with a microscope for kids—a love of science begets more science.)

Celestron

SEE IT

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Why it made the cut: With its feature set, portability, and nice price point, this scope is ready for some serious stargazing without a serious investment.

Specs

  • Focal length: 400mm
  • Aperture: 70mm, f/5.7
  • Magnification: 168x

Pros

  • Bluetooth remote shutter release
  • Ships with two eyepieces
  • Pack included

Cons

  • Lacks optical power for deep space

Getting out of town, whether camping in the wilderness or driving in the countryside, is one of the attractions of stargazing. Out in the great wide open, far away from streetlights, the stars explode even to the naked eye. Add a handy telescope like the Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope—our pick for the best portable telescope under $500—and you’ll see much farther into space. The fact that it’s as affordable as it is moveable just adds to the value.

The Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is a well-equipped refractor telescope built for backpacking and adventuring but without skimping on cool gadgets. Whether you’re gazing at celestial or terrestrial objects, the smartphone adapter will aid you in capturing images with your personal device, with an included Bluetooth remote shutter release.

Designed with portability and weight in mind, the entire package fits into an included pack with a total of 3.3 pounds—that includes the telescope, tripod stand, 20mm and 10mm eyepieces, 3x Barlow lens, and more. Download Celestron’s Starry Night software to help you get the most from your astronomy experience. 

Here are some other options from the Celestron and Popular Science collaboration:

What to consider when buying the best telescopes under $500

Optics

There are three types of optics available on consumer telescopes, and they will help you achieve three different goals. Refractor telescopes use a series of glass lenses to bring celestial bodies like the moon and near planets into focus easily. Reflector telescopes—also known as Newtonian scopes for their inventor, Sir Isaac Newton—swap lenses for mirrors and allow stargazers to see deeper into space. Versatile compound telescopes combine these two methods in a smaller, more portable form factor, with results that land right in the middle of the pack. 

Aperture

Photographers will recognize this: The aperture controls the amount of light entering the telescope, like on a manual camera. Aperture is the diameter of the lens or the primary mirror, so a telescope with a large aperture draws more light than a small aperture, resulting in views into deeper space. F-ratio is the spec to watch here. Low f-ratios, such as f/4 or f/5, are usually best for wide-field observation and photography, while high f-ratios like f/15 can make deep-space nebulae and other bodies easier to see and capture. Midpoint f-ratios can get the job done for both.

Mounts

All the lens and mirror power in the world won’t mean much if you attach your telescope to a subpar mount. In general, the more lightweight and portable the tripod mount, the more movement you’ll likely get while gazing or photographing the stars. Investing in a stable mount will improve the viewing experience. The two common mount types are alt-az (altitude-azimuth) and equatorial. Altazimuth mounts operate in the same way as a camera tripod, allowing you to adjust both axes (left-right, up-down), while equatorial mounts also tilt to make it easier to follow celestial objects.

FAQs

Q: What is the most powerful telescope for home use?

The most powerful telescope for home use from this list is the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, which tops out at 130x magnification with its included eyepieces.

Q: Is a 90mm telescope good?

Yes, a 90mm telescope is good for viewing planetary features like the rings of Saturn and the Great Red Spot on Jupiter.

Q: How much does a telescope cost?

The cost of a telescope varies depending on the brand, model, and construction but there are plenty of affordable options—like the ones on this list.

Q: How powerful does a telescope have to be to see planets?

A telescope with a minimum 60mm aperture has enough power to see planets.

Q: What size telescope do I need to see the rings of Saturn?

You can see the rings of Saturn with as low as a 60mm aperture. 

Q: What size telescope do I need? 

The telescope size you need depends on what you want out of it. This list of best telescopes under $500 gives a good rundown on telescope types, sizes, and uses.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes under $500

Although this group of sub-$500 scopes is fairly diverse, the Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ stands out in our best telescopes under $500 as the best place to start your interstellar journey due to its versatility and sky recognition app, which make for a fun evening of guided tours through the star patterns, no experience necessary. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
SEE IT

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
SEE IT

The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
SEE IT

The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone but can be especially helpful for older homeowners struggling with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation to access your car and walkways quickly.

How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

To determine how to select snow blowers for elderly people specifically, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

From there, we drew on our past research when recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and user impressions to ensure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 131 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Wide clearing width
  • Comparable to some two-stage models
  • Personal Pace system

Cons

  • Expensive

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary, but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 30 Pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 20 inches
  • Power source: Corded electric

Pros

  • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
  • Adjustable chute
  • Easy push-button start

Cons

  • Cord could get in the way

Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 84 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 21 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Simple, effective design
  • Push-button start
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Only works well on pavement

Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 191 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • More powerful two-stage design
  • Self-propelled drive
  • Larger tires

Cons

  • Big and heavy

The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 46 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 18 inches
  • Power source: Battery

Pros

  • Cordless operation
  • Folds up for compact storage
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Narrower clearing width

Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 310 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 28 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Anti-clogging system
  • 28-inch clearing width
  • LED headlights

Cons

  • Very expensive

With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

Snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that will help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers; you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to ensure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

Types of snow blowers

Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, making them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly damaging nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s best for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

Size and weight

To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend looking at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

Clearing width and depth

Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. A two-stage snow blower makes sense if you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow. 

Surface type

The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

Extra features

Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

Snow blower prices vary greatly depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Remember that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive but built to last.

Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you must either charge a battery before using them or plug them into an outlet, potentially limiting their range (unless you have a portable power station). They’re also generally less powerful, so you may be unable to move as much snow.

Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tire chains of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

The post The best tire chains of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
SEE IT

Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.

Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.

Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

How we chose the best tire chains

In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

Peerless Auto Trac

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

Specs

  • Material: Manganese alloy chain
  • Shape: Diamond
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
  • Durable steel alloy construction

Cons

  • A little on the heavy side

Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

AutoChoice

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Shape: Squares
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
  • Separate pieces make them easier to install
  • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

Cons

  • Installation is more time-consuming
  • Expensive

One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

Glacier

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

Specs

  • Material: Steel rollers
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
  • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

Security Chain

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel chain
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 15-20 inch

Pros

  • Durable all-chain construction
  • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
  • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

Cons

  • Harder to install than other types
  • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

Security Chain

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel coils
  • Shape: Diagonal
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • No need to manually tighten
  • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

Things to consider before buying tire chains

Traction

Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

Material

Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

Size

Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

Installation

Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

FAQs

Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

Q: Do chains damage tires?

When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best tire chains

Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tire chains of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated slippers in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-slippers/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:40:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-slippers/
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

When the big chill moves in, heated slippers guarantee you’ll be comfy from top to bottom.

The post The best heated slippers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ActionHeat makes some of the best heated slippers. ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers
SEE IT

These comfy wool slippers come with a mobile charger you can take with you.

Best microwaveable Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties
SEE IT

These microwaveable slippers help soothe arthritis pain with heat and aromatics like lavender and peppermint.

Best indoor/outdoor A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Heated Slipper by Volt
SEE IT

These versatile slippers can provide up to 12 hours of warmth on a single charge.

When it’s cold out, slip into a pair of heated slippers to keep your feet as toasty as possible. You’ll get instant relief from cold floors and drafty indoor air. But it’s not just about the heat this footwear provides. Winter weather can leave feet dry, chapped, and constantly in need of an emergency pedicure. The best heated slippers also moisturize your feet while warming them up, so say goodbye to scaly roughness!

How we chose the best heated slippers

Heated slippers come in a variety of forms. Microwaveable slippers can be nuked right up to a comfortable lounging temperature. Some heated slippers warm up in the same way as heated socks, using a battery-operated module. Another type of electric foot warmer uses an internal heating pad that you power up via a USB cable. Once the slippers have reached a full charge, you can unplug them and start walking—or lounging—for hours.

Another option is foot warmers that work like a heating pad. They feel just like house shoes when you slip your feet inside. The only difference is these boots aren’t made for walking. They’re best when you’re parked in one spot, on the couch, or sitting at your desk. Your feet will be cozy and comfortable as long as the heat is on. In making our recommendations, we looked for options from top brands that spanned a variety of power sources and price levels.

The best heated slippers: Reviews & Recommendations

It’s hard to go wrong with a good pair of the best heated slippers, but the style you end up going for should depend on what you do during a typical cold day or night around the house. Or maybe you’ll be wearing them outside, too. In that case, think waterproof and non-slip. If you’ll have them on mostly while you’re working or bundled up on the couch and mobility is less important, a pair of heated slippers that you can wear and charge at the same time will get extra credit for providing warmth 24/7.

Best overall: ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Included rechargeable ActionHeat batteries 
  • Sizes: S/M, L/XL, XXL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Attractive design
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Batteries only available through ActionHeat

These fuzzy wool slippers won’t leave your feet waiting long for heat. The soles are wear-resistant, non-slip, and lightweight. Each one weighs less than half a pound. These slippers bring the heat at three levels, ranging from high (150 degrees F, which lasts more than three-and-a-half hours) to low (115 degrees F, which lasts up to five hours). They also come with a mobile power supply that you can take with you when you venture from an outlet.

Best USB-heated: Wirziis USB Heated Slippers

Wirziis

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: USB connection
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Convenient
  • Affordable
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Have to be attached to power source for them to work
  • Can’t adjust temperature level

Not a fan of slippers with batteries that will eventually run out? Wirziis USB Heated Slippers are designed with a replaceable heating pad that can be powered directly by any device with a USB-C connection, such as a computer, car charger, power bank, or plug. These comfy wool slippers heat up within three minutes and are available in black, gray, and brown. That said, you can’t really adjust the temperature, but you can keep the rest of your body warm with one of the best heated blankets.

Best indoor/outdoor: Heated Slipper by Volt

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three levels of heat (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. You can also pair them with some of the best heated gloves for extra warmth.

Best microwaveable: Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties

Mars

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Microwave or freezer
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: Hot and cold

Pros

  • Provide both heat and cold relief
  • Incorporate aromatherapy
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Some users say they come off easily
  • Not easy to clean

Could your tootsies use a little TLC? These plush booties are ideal for arthritis and other foot ailments or just nice to slip into after a long day on the go. They contain 12 natural aromatic ingredients, including lavender and peppermint, and they can be used to warm up your feet after heating them in the microwave, or you can chill them in the freezer before pulling them on to cool down your feet. And they come in three colors (mauve, gray, and espresso).

Best with memory foam: Kamlif Heating Slipper Shoes

Kamlif

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Rechargeable batteries
  • Sizes: Small and large
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Memory foam remembers feet
  • Three levels of heat
  • Less expensive than other models

Cons

  • Some users say they don’t provide a lot of heat

These heated slipper shoes feature memory foam to remember your foot for maximum comfort. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, they’re equipped with toe warmers and can provide three levels of heat: high, medium, and low. Powered by rechargeable batteries, these slippers can last up to five hours in low mode on a single charge. They also provide infrared-ray warmth of these slippers that can encourage circulation, and help relieve foot fatigue. They also pair well with the best heated vests.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Air-activated heat packs
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Inexpensive
  • Provides up to nine hours of heat

Cons

  • Some users said they don’t provide a lot of warmth
  • Not sustainable

If you’re looking for a quick solution to keep your feet toasty that doesn’t require you to spend a lot of cash, HotHands Insole Foot Warmers may be just the ticket. Open the package, slip these air-activated insoles into your shoes or boots, and these heated insoles can provide warmth for up to nine hours. The peel-and-stick adhesive backing keeps them secure in place inside your shoe. Although you must discard them after each use, 16 pairs ensure that one package will keep your feet warm for a week or two (and you can pick up some similar hand warmers while you’re at it).

Things to consider when shopping for the best heated slippers

Buying a pair of heated slippers is more of an investment than your average pair of bunny slippers. You’ll want to keep in mind where you want to wear them, the level of heat you’re seeking, and whether you want to move around with them. Here’s how to narrow down your options.

Do you want USB charging?

When you spend a lot of time working at your computer or just browsing the Internet, cute and comfy slippers that plug into your laptop with a USB connection are a convenient choice. Although you can wear these heated slippers while puttering around the house for at least several hours at full charge, if you are tied to your computer, you can work and wear them while they’re charging. There’s no need to worry about replacing batteries.

Even if you aren’t the workaholic type and will be spending long days just vegging out on the couch, you can charge these heated slippers anywhere near a power bank. By the time you’re ready to get up and move around, they’ll be fully charged and ready to keep your feet warm for at least a few hours.

Need warm slippers for the outside as well?

If you live in an apartment, you’ll probably be happy with a good pair of heated slippers designed for walking around and relaxing indoors. For those living in houses with backyards who need warm slippers for the outside as well, a pair that travels is in order, especially when the forecast calls for rain or snow.

For those short trips outside, you’ll need slippers that are made of sturdy enough fabric to withstand the elements. The soles should be wear-resistant and non-slip. Rubber ones ensure they provide enough traction for both indoor and outdoor wear. Since your backyard is likely to be wetter than inside, be sure you opt for a fabric that’s waterproof. You don’t want your heated slippers to be soaked and useless just when you need them most.

Heated slippers can help with medical conditions like arthritis

Like heated socks, heated slippers have benefits beyond keeping your feet from freezing. Foot warmers and slippers can help with some medical conditions too! Ones that are heated by the microwave can offer foot relief if you suffer from arthritis or if you have stiff muscles, pain, or circulation issues. Some are infused with cloves, cinnamon, eucalyptus, and other ingredients that create moist heat and soothe achy feet.

Although it sounds like you just put your house shoes in the microwave, the process can be more civilized than that. Wrap them up in a towel before nuking them to avoid leaving your microwave smelling like feet. And if that still sounds too unorthodox, some aromatherapy booties come with a scent pouch that you warm up in the microwave before placing it inside the slippers. It’s like an at-home DIY spa treatment for your feet.

Love the slippers you already have? Try heated insoles

Heated slipper insoles are another surefire way to keep your feet warm in cold weather, and they can fit right inside a pair of slippers you already own. You can get ones that are battery- or microwave-powered, and they’re available in both single-use options and ones that you can wear over and over.

These aren’t technically heated slippers since they are separate items, but they do just as good a job of heating up your feet. Another bonus is that you can wear them with multiple footwear, not just your house shoes. If you’re going to be inserting them into your outdoor boots, make sure they’re waterproof in case you encounter rain, sleet, snow, or pesky puddles.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated slippers cost?

Although they may sound like a pretty big financial investment, you can still enjoy warm and fuzzy slippers on a budget. In fact, you can scoop up a new pair at a wallet-friendly price that’s well below $100. As with all things, the quality will vary, but you don’t have to go high-end to keep your feet well-heated. There are plenty of excellent options for under $50.

Q: How do heated slippers work?

Heated slippers work in a variety of ways. Some are heated by a battery-operated pad, while others are USB-powered. You can also get a pair that will heat right up in the microwave.

Q: How long will the slippers stay warm?

Heated slippers will stay warm for at least a few hours. If you get a pair that works with USB charging, you can wear them while they charge without worrying about them going cold.

Q: Can you wash heated slippers?

You can wash heated slippers; just don’t do it in the washing machine or submerge them in water. Spot drying is generally a safe option, but to keep everything fully functioning, carefully follow the cleaning instructions included with your pair.

Final thoughts on the best heated slippers

Heated slippers do an excellent job of keeping your feet extra warm around the house (and even outside) when the temperature dips, and you don’t have to be a big spender to get a good pair. These warm and comfy slippers come in several styles—including USB- or battery-operated and microwaveable—that cover a number of household activities, from doing chores to working at the computer to just sitting around watching television. And if you intend to wear yours outside to get fresh air in the backyard, non-slip rubber soles will take you there and back safely.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated slippers in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated socks in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-socks/ Tue, 15 Feb 2022 16:30:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-socks/
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

When the weather outside is frightful, these socks will ensure your feet feel delightful.

The post The best heated socks in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiiing SNOW DEER Heated Socks SNOW DEER Heated Socks
SEE IT

The cozy heated socks will keep your feet warm and dry throughout even the chilliest ski day.

Best battery-powered The VELAZZIO Heated Socks are the best battery-powered heated sock VELAZZIO Heated Socks
SEE IT

These high-powered socks heat up in less than 30 seconds—so you don’t need to wait to stop your cold feet.

Best budget Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women Electric Heated Socks Thermal Insulated Socks
SEE IT

Heated socks can be a hefty investment, but with this budget pair you can have toasty toes without breaking the bank.

Whether you’re adventuring in snowy mountains, shoveling the driveway, or snuggling up at a chilly cabin, a quality pair of socks can stop freezing toes in their tracks, and heated socks will warm you from the bottom up. Heated socks provide a toasty barrier between your feet and any cold surface they walk on and make outdoor activities in frigid temperatures feel like a breeze. If the warmth these special winter socks provide isn’t enough to convince you to spring for a pair, consider this: The socks can also improve your circulation, which will help stop your feet from going numb from the cold in the first place. And while everyday winter socks are nice when you’re mostly inside, you’ll want to take things up a notch when you plan to be outdoors for an extended period. Heated socks are suitable for almost every winter situation—and make the most frigid months of the year much more bearable and enjoyable. They may require a bit more TLC than your normal wash-and-tumble-dry pairs, but if your feet are the first thing to go cold in winter, the best heated socks are well worth the investment.

How we chose the best heated socks

Heated socks are an investment in your comfort during colder months—so we wanted to be sure your money was well-spent on quality socks that suit a variety of needs. We compared over 40 heated socks while looking at reviews, battery life, design, thickness, and price. We also have reported on heated insoles and heated slippers to keep you toasty till you get back to your heated blanket, so we used knowledge from those topics and applied it here.

The best heated socks: Reviews & Recommendations

You can wear heated socks while at home, or you can wear them with your shoes to keep cold winter air away from your feet when you go outside. And with slim battery packs designed to look like your average pair of socks, you might even forget you’re wearing super-charged protection against blustery winter weather. All of these picks have the reliability and warmth to help you endure frigid temperatures.

Best overall: VOLT 3V Heated Socks

Volt Resistance Heated Clothing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Moisture-wicking micro polyester and up to 10 hours of warmth keep your feet warm and dry.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3 hours on high; 8 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Long battery length
  • Battery-powered or rechargeable
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

These extra-thin heated socks provide all-day heat on a single charge and fit like a glove thanks to spandex interlocking fabric. The sock’s moisture-wicking micro polyester keeps your feet dry for extra comfort—no swamp foot here. The socks come with two rechargeable 2 oz. lithium batteries, a dual charger, and a wireless remote to cozy up without bending down. The battery tucks into the sock’s small storage pocket. And a hook-and-loop closure ensures it won’t end up in the snow as you traverse the tundra. They may be on the pricier side, but we think the quality—and warming up your feet—is worth the price. If you’d like longer heating time, the company sells a 3.7V/5000 mAh battery that provides more than 8 hours of heat on high and more than 20 hours of heat on low. You can purchase them on Amazon or directly from the company on their website.

Best machine-washable: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: After getting 12 hours of warmth, simply throw these socks in the wash the next time you use them.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is easy to tuck into your boot or shoe.

Best for skiing: SNOW DEER Heated Socks

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Heating elements on both sides of your feet mean you can hit the slopes without getting cold feet.

Specs

  • Material: Cool Max polyester, elastic; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (100°F-131°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 4 hours on high; 10 hours on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Heats top and bottom of foot
  • Secure pocket for batteries
  • Rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Could be longer-lasting

Aside from the battery pocket at the top, these rechargeable, heated socks could pass for any attractive pair of socks. They come in four different sizes, but since the included rechargeable lithium polymer batteries last only up to six and a half hours on a full charge on the lowest setting, if you like to turn the heat up high (four hours of power), you might want to bring along a few extra back-up sets just in case.

Best for lounging around the cabin: Men’s Thick Heat Trapping Insulated Boot Thermal Socks

DG Hill

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Show off your style in the ski lodge with 17 design options to choose from.

Specs

  • Material: Acrylic blend
  • Power level settings: N/A
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Powered by your body heat
  • Insulated
  • Stylish

Cons

  • Not for extremely cold climates

Back at the ski lodge? Slip into these cozy heated socks. They have a winter-wonderland look, and the synthetic-fiber blend provides the ultimate heating benefits. They’re ribbed at the top, so they won’t slip inside your shoes and let in cold air. Feel free to take them outside for a hike, a sleigh ride, or a few trips down the slopes.

Best with the thinnest heating module: ActionHeat 3.7V Rechargeable Battery Heated Socks 2.0

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strategically placed heating panels don’t interfere with walking, running, hiking, or even lounging around.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton blend
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (up to 145°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 7 hours on the lowest setting
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Thin
  • Comfortable to walk in
  • Wide heat settings

Cons

  • Expensive

The batteries for these electric socks are thinner and slightly curved for a more comfortable fit, and the heating panels located at the toes use advanced ultra-fine fibers so they won’t interfere with your walking, hiking, or skiing. The heat can go up to 140°F, while battery power lasts up to seven hours on the lowest setting.

Best battery-powered: VELAZZIO Heated Socks

VELAZZIO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get warm feet in less than 30 seconds thanks to a nanofiber heating wire and two-zone heating.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 4.5 hours on high; 7.5 on low
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Remote controlled
  • Fast heating
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

Made for men and women, these heated socks have a design that’s a bit on the simple side, so you’re going to get function (a lot of it) over fierceness. They come with three different heat settings and warm up in less than 30 seconds. They pull up over the calf, and you can tuck the battery packs into the pocket in the inner top cuff. The best part is that the heat will last. The fully charged batteries can last up to 7.5 hours when worn on the lowest heat setting. And they include a remote that lets you control the heat without hiking up your pant leg.

Best for hiking: Autocastle Unisex Battery Powered Heat Insulated Socks

Autocastle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Cotton allows your foot to breathe, and the 6.5-hour battery life on low keeps your tootsies warm from Raynaud’s to Rainier.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3.5 on high; 6.5 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes, but remove batteries beforehand

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Machine washable
  • Not bulky

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

The knee-high design and cotton makeup of these hiking socks mean they won’t be uncomfortably bulky by the boot opening. There are three different heat settings, which makes them an ideal fit for even your chilliest hikes. You can turn the heat up as you ascend or it gets colder. These have decent battery life, too—up to 3.5 hours on the warmest setting and up to 6.5 on the coolest.

Best budget: Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women

MGOGO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Don’t break the bank to be warm all winter long with these electric socks.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: 95°F-113°F
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove battery packs)

Pros

  • Unisex
  • Cotton for breathability; fleece for warmth
  • Have a supportive arch

Cons

  • Not a wide range of temperature settings

These unisex heated socks come in three different sizes that can fit men with shoe sizes from 6 to 15 and women from 8 to 13. The fleece material provides breathability and sweat absorption as well as warmth even when the heat isn’t on. Each sock requires three AA alkaline or rechargeable batteries, which are not included. While they may not have bells and whistles, they can keep your feet warm for short outdoor activities.

What to consider when buying the best heated socks

Although electric socks will not be the cheapest ones you ever buy, they’ll definitely be the warmest socks you ever own. Plus, you can make the best snow boots even warmer. With so many to choose from, where do you begin making your choice? Fabric is a good place to start. Cotton, merino wool, and synthetics are all warm options. Still, since the first two hold moisture (look out for fungal infections!), we recommend synthetic fibers like nylon and lycra to keep your feet warm, dry, and free of microbial pests. As for other important variables to look for when shopping for the best heated socks, snag your winter hat and read on.

Pick the right pair of socks to match your winter adventure

Although you’re perfectly welcome to wear your heated socks while hibernating at home all winter long, if you’re the adventurous type who lives to hit the slopes, you’re in luck. Depending on what you like to do once you’re up in the snowy mountains, you can choose between heated ski socks and cabin socks.

The latter can be pretty much the same warm socks you wear when you’re lounging at home. But for going down the slopes, you’ll want a pair of heated socks with long-lasting batteries in a fabric that will continue to keep your feet warm even if the batteries run out. These cozy socks should also be thick enough to fill out your boots and, most importantly, comfortable.

Choose heated socks that put comfort first

The heating modules of the best heated socks will add a bit of volume, but they don’t have to be obtrusive. Most of the battery packs are slim enough that you won’t even notice them tucked away in the little pocket that sits right under the cuff. The wires that connect the batteries to the heating panels in the sock may be more noticeable underfoot, but you can get a pair with ultra-thin wires that you’ll hardly feel.

Size matters; the more sizes the socks come in, the merrier your feet will be. The one-size-fits-all design of some of the cheaper brands might leave you with too much wiggle room for your feet or not enough. If you don’t want to reach down to change the heat setting constantly, some heated socks come with a remote control for temperature adjustment, and others can be controlled with your smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. If one foot tends to get colder than the other, look for one with an app control that allows you to adjust the heat of each sock individually.

Decide how much battery life you need your heated socks to have per wear

Time matters when it comes to heated socks, and if you are going to be doing activities where recharging batteries isn’t an easy option, you should look for a pair with batteries that last longer on a full charge. Unfortunately, that often means the battery pack will be bulkier and less comfortable—and you may have to dish out more money, too. The key is finding the right balance to suit your needs and always having a good backup plan (extra batteries). That said, if your socks are thick and warm on their own, you’ll still have ample foot protection if your batteries die on you while you’re gliding down the slopes.

Pack your warmest heated socks for a winter hike

If your snow boots are made for hiking, the best heated socks can be, too. Since hiking can be rough on your feet, you’ll need heated socks that are as durable as they are warm. The best winter hiking socks should also be high enough to provide a complete barrier between your feet/lower legs and your shoes. Other things to consider are cushioning, fit, and fabric. Wool, polyester, nylon, silk, and spandex are the most popular materials for hiking socks. There are pros and cons with each one, so to get the optimal benefits, it’s best to go with a blend that will offer comfort, warmth, and durability.

Don’t feel like you have to blow your budget on heated socks

The best socks are going to cost you more than a bargain-rack three-pack, but they don’t have to leave you broke. That said, you’ll have to pay a bit more for some of the features that will make them more comfortable and functional (like long battery life and Bluetooth connectivity). The ones you can get for $40 or so will do what they are supposed to do, but they may have extra bulk or come in only one size. If you want a pair of socks with all the trappings, be prepared to pay up to a few hundred bucks for them. They might end up costing more than your snow boots, but if you get the right pair, they can last just as long. Still, you can find cheap heated socks that will do the trick and keep your toes warm and toasty.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated socks cost?

The best heated socks cost between $20-$200 based on materials and battery life.

Q: How do heated socks work?

Heated socks work by a heating panel hidden in the soles, heels, or toes that connects via wiring to a battery pack that acts as a miniature thermostat. The wires are separated by a waterproof membrane to make them safe when the socks become damp. If you don’t want to bend to adjust the heat, some allow you to do it with a remote control or a smartphone app with a Bluetooth connection to your socks.

Q: How long do heated socks last?

All good things must come to an end, but if you buy heated socks made of sturdy fabric and take care of them by following the washing instructions to the letter, heated socks last a couple of years—and even as long as your favorite snow boots.

Q: How do you wash heated socks?

Since stinky, fungus-infected feet are just as bad as cold ones, it’s important to know how to wash heated socks. After detaching the battery pack, a thorough hand-cleaning followed by air-drying in a well-ventilated area will do the trick. Never wring them (which can damage the wiring) or throw them into the washing machine or dryer.

Final thoughts on the best heated socks

The best heated socks will cost you a bit more than the cheap socks you wear during summer, but the warmth they provide—and the improved circulation as well as relief from arthritis and joint pain—make them worth the investment. If you get a pair with ultra-fine wires and a slim battery compartment that rests above the top of your boots, the only difference you might notice from regular socks will be the increased comfort and warmth that’ll make them much more comfortable as you enjoy the great wintry outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated socks in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best projectors under $200 in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-projectors-under-200/ Thu, 14 Apr 2022 19:00:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=433292
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

Turn any wall into a window to other worlds with a portable projector.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best overall WiFi Bluetooth Projector, DBPOWER is the best overall projector under 200. DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector
SEE IT

Excellent all-around performance with HD video and a good warranty.

Best bright image Projector, GooDee 2022 is the best projector under 200. GooDee 2023 Projector
SEE IT

With an extra bright image, this is a solid outdoor movie night option.

Best portable Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector is the best portable projector under 200. Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector
SEE IT

Palm-sized but still potent, this tiny pocket projector offers big entertainment.

Projectors do wonders at making any room—even minuscule city apartments—feel like a home theater. And not all projectors require a big investment to open up a huge new window of immersive entertainment. If you’re ready to expand your laptop binges and smartphone scrolling to the size of your wall, you can explore the world of streaming content at a surprisingly affordable price. You shouldn’t expect top-tier performance at this price point, but the best projectors under $200 can still provide a satisfying experience if you choose the right model and do a little prep work. 

How we chose the best projectors under $200

Having spent countless nights watching YouTube with my girlfriend’s cat at the foot of the bed purring and curled up around the projector’s exhaust fan, I know the joys of a simple-to-use home projector. For this best-of list, I evaluated leading projectors from numerous manufacturers, looking for the magic combination of a few factors that add up to make some truly great picks. We narrowed down this list from dozens based on intensive research, editorial reviews, and spec comparisons. 

The best projectors under $200: Reviews & Recommendations

These projectors offer surprisingly capable combinations of tech features that capitalize on crisp definition, Apollonian illumination, dynamic sound, and the connectivity you need for nightly use. Most hook into your laptop using an HDMI cable, while some pair wirelessly through a WiFi network. For audio, many pair with powered speakers (or an AV receiver) via aux connections and sometimes support Bluetooth. At the $200 price point, few projectors may be completely cord-free or the perfect pairing for your premium sound systems, but they could be a great partner to that new portable party speaker. Still, today’s budget projectors offer versatility and delivery that would have been unthinkable at this price a decade ago.

Best overall: DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector

DBPOWER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native HD, 9,000 lumens, and WiFi connectivity, this is a versatile and powerful projector, but it’s the customer support that makes it the best overall.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,000 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, WiFi, Bluetooth (sound), TV stick, USB, AV port, 3.5mm audio

Pros

  • Really nice picture with good definition and bright luminance
  • Solid connectivity options
  • Allows viewers to screencast from their phones

Cons

  • Bluetooth connection is only sound, advertising is misleading
  • Some high-end sound systems won’t connect

This projector hits all the basics with aplomb: It offers 1080p definition without much warping along the edges, delivers 9,000 lumens to be visible in half-light conditions, and features impressive connectivity options. That connectivity lets you pair your devices to the projector via WiFi to screencast from a phone, or connect a sound system via Bluetooth. However, it will not deliver video via Bluetooth. That’s typical, but the product listings make it slightly confusing. 

The projector also delivers a few special features, such as a zoom function that allows you to shrink the image to 75% via the remote. Built-in speakers create a modicum of surround sound illusion. However, we think you’ll be best served by connecting to a separate Bluetooth speaker device.  

Best bright image: GooDee 2022 Projector

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With 1080p native resolution, 9,500 lumens, and two speakers to create a modicum of surround sound, this projector is more than capable of achieving most of what most users want.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: 2 HDMI, VGA, 2 USB, AV, TF card

Pros

  • Two speakers for true stereo sound
  • Extra bright LED luminance
  • Decent connections

Cons

  • Build quality is a bit cheap
  • Edges get somewhat fuzzy

At the sub-$200 price point, it can be hard to find a projector with really excellent brightness. The GooDee 2022 distinguishes itself here. Offering 9,500 lumens with a 3,000:1 contrast ratio and a max screen size of 230 inches, this budget projector emphasizes going big. A pretty perfect option for backyard movie nights, this might be the best outdoor projector under $200, hitting a nice sweet spot of big image and lightweight build. 

The GooDee does have a little trouble with warping and fuzziness around the image corners. However, that’s nothing rare at this price point. The device also suffers from a somewhat cheap-feeling build. It doesn’t feel super solid and primed for longevity. Still, the brightness and resolution may compensate for this for most users.

All in all, GooDee delivers a projector that yields a pretty bright, crisp image, with good contrast and resolution. It’s especially suited for backyard movie parties.

Best portable: Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With support for 1080p signal and a two-hour battery charge, this super-petite projector fits in a pocket and makes for a perfect companion for campers with kids or travel.

Specs

  • Luminance: 25 ANSI lumen
  • Definition: 640 x 320 (capable of displaying images meant for 1080p)
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, MicroSD

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Makes a great camping projector

Cons

  • Battery often dies in under two hours

Ready to bring your projector camping? The Kodak Ultra Mini projector does some amazing things, considering its size. At about 3 inches square and only 150 grams, the Kodak lives up to its title as a true “ultra-mini” projector housed in that tiny body is a decent projector that hooks up to most smartphones and portable devices.

With such a tiny size and low price, the Ultra-Mini will require you to make some sacrifices. While it can receive a 1080p signal, it only outputs at 640 x 320, meaning the 1080p video entering the projector will be downscaled to a much lower native resolution. It’s quite a drop from HD, so don’t expect crisp, beautiful video that perfectly represents contemporary cinema. Additionally, the brightness isn’t anything to write home about. Still, it’s nothing to sneer at on a dark tent wall. One other issue with the device is its short battery life. It generally won’t make it past two hours, so don’t expect any Lord Of The Rings marathon binges here.

If a miniature portable projector is something you’re after and you decide you can afford the bells and whistles, Kodak’s more expensive Luma 350 could be worth exploring. For its small price and equally tiny size, however, the Kodak Ultra Mini is the best mini projector under $200. It’s worth a look, even if it could be a good idea to get your expectations in order before you spring for it.

Best for home theater: Wsky HD Projector (Refurbished)

Wsky

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a native 1080p HD resolution and a significantly higher-than-average 5,000:1 contrast, this projector puts its double-dense LED tech to work.

Specs

  • Luminance: 7,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, audio port, USB, MHL

Pros

  • 84 LEDs double the standard LED count in a projector and achieve greater detail, contrast, and less fuzziness on the exterior of the image
  • Value priced

Cons

  • Sound quality isn’t great

For a sub-$200 cinephiles projector, look no further than the Wsky HD Projector. This projector puts the work in on image quality using a higher-than-average LED count. The 5,000:1 contrast is noticeably better than much of the competition, and the 1080p HD coverage looks great, even with new movies. With better-than-average corner coverage achieved via the keystone wheel, Wsky also doesn’t suffer from as much of the edge blurriness that might make subtitles illegible on some projectors.

The Wsky’s sound won’t rack up any bonus points, however. While it advertises Dolby sound, the two speakers aren’t powerful enough. However, plugging speakers into the audio jack can mitigate this sound deficiency. Sadly, no Bluetooth audio connection is available. However, those who stump for Bluetooth speakers may be able to pair them to a device that’s sourcing video (such as your laptop, though there might be sync issues). 

With its impressive video capabilities, the Wsky HD Projector is worth consideration for anyone who wants a projector that yields a great picture.

Best with DVD player: BIGASUO Upgrade HD Bluetooth Projector

BIGASUO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For folks with a legacy DVD collection who might want to skip all the wires, this projector has a built-in DVD player and does a decent job at all the rest.

Specs

  • Luminance: 5,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, AV, USB, Bluetooth (sound), TF SD card

Pros

  • DVD player built in
  • Decent connectivity, including Bluetooth for sound

Cons

  • Resolution and brightness are both somewhat low
  • Sound is nothing to write home about

Are you itching to tuck into the entire Lassie television series on DVD box set? The BIGASUO Upgrade HD projector with a built-in DVD player might be your best bet. The BIGASUO projector is remarkable for its connections and legacy media opportunities. 

The Bluetooth connection for sound is particularly useful in concert with the built-in DVD player. Often with contemporary laptops, Bluetooth sound on a projector is redundant since most laptops can pair to a Bluetooth speaker while casting video through HDMI. However, since this device acts as its own DVD player, the Bluetooth connection can be important for those skipping the laptop entirely. This means you can natively watch DVDs from the device while simultaneously paired with a Bluetooth speaker for sound.

Outside of its DVD player, this is an unremarkable projector. It downscales HD video to its native 720p definition, which falls short of similarly priced native HD projectors. Its brightness similarly lags the competition somewhat.

If you’re looking for a capable all-in-one DVD player/projector hybrid, the BIGASUO Upgrade HD is a good pick. Otherwise, you may want to move on.

Best with screen: YABER WiFi 9000L

Yaber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yaber boasts an impressive 10,000:1 contrast, supplemented by an included SCT screen that improves the image.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, VGA, AV, audio, TF card

Pros

  • Includes projection screen, which is primed for contrast
  • Decently bright
  • Lightweight and portable at just over two pounds

Cons

  • Resolution could be better

Pay for a projector, get the whole shebang? You’ll get just that with the YABER WiFi 9000L, which features a projection screen included in the box. While lots of folks use their projectors on a blank wall, you can demonstrably get a better image with a specially designed projection screen.

The rest of the YABER’s specs are average. It features a 1080p native resolution, and its brightness is better than average but not outstanding. It uses two speakers for decent sound. The WiFi connectivity is a nice touch that may sway some buyers. That, coupled with the 10,000:1 high definition, makes for a good all-around projector that’s a perfect addition to some households.

Best for gaming: WiMiUS S26 Projector

WiMiUs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This HD projector isn’t actually true 4K, but it does deliver 1080p video at gaming speeds, extra bright 480 ANSI lumens, 20,000:1 contrast ratio, and extra nice keystone correction. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 480 ANSI lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, AV, 1 audio output

Pros

  • Great video quality with very bright and detailed image
  • Relatively low lag makes it worthy of games
  • With a wider-than-average keystone correction capability, you’ll get a more balanced picture

Cons

  • “4K” claim refers to 4K video input, which is standard and downgraded to HD
  • Edges of the picture remain fuzzy

Available for a solid sale price more often than not, the WiMiUS S26 fits within the $200 mark for our purposes. While the false 4K advertising is certainly a turn-off, the projector is still a good enough deal to highlight on this list. 

This projector has a classic HD 1920×1080 resolution, make no mistake. The 4K claim simply refers to the projector’s ability to accept 4K video and downscale it to HD, which is common. Still, this projector throws a nice-looking image: It has the highest contrast ratio of any projector on this list, with about 1,152 LED lumens (480 ANSI lumens) that should appeal to gamers. That said, the image has some issues; its edges tend to blur, with the middle properly focusing and the corners getting fuzzy.

In the end, this is a pretty capable extra bright projector. But don’t be fooled by the advertising … this isn’t a magical unicorn 4K projector for under $200.

Best budget: Vamvo Mini Movie Projector

Vavmo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its two built-in speakers, 720p resolution, and under 1-pound weight, Vamvo dishes up a budget projector that does a really decent job. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 3,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, SD/TF, AV, USB and RC

Pros

  • Better sound delivery than most at this price
  • Lightweight build makes it a great choice for a portable option
  • Decently bright

Cons

  • Non-HD picture is a bit blurry

For a truly low price for its capabilities, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector is the value pick for budget projectors. This 720p projector still delivers a decent enough high-contrast picture that’s adequately bright in dark rooms at 3,500 lumens, so that it’s effective in moderately dark to very dark spaces. While it advertises its support for 1080p HD, the 720p resolution will mean that high-end pictures do downgrade and lose detail. If you’re just watching the occasional movie in a dark backyard on a DIY screen or sheet, that may not matter very much.

The projector’s speakers certainly fall short of outstanding. Still, you can’t knock the performance here for the price point. It does a better job than most at this level. Overall, Vamvo is a true budget projector. While none of its components outpace the best equipped of the competition, if a low price is your most important metric, then it’s worth real consideration for its decent treatment of all the basics. At about just under a pound, this Vamvo is portable, reliable, and very cheap.

Things to consider when shopping for the best projectors under $200

You won’t get a chance to try out these projectors before you take the leap and buy one, but you can get a good idea of what you’re getting by comparing the specs. Here are some essential features to look for when trying to pick the best model for you. 

Do you need 4K?

4K is all the rage (until 8K finally establishes itself), and while I type this article on a laptop with a 4K screen, the resolution difference between 1080p and 4K at that scale is subtle. However, a top-tier projector is arguably one of the best applications of 4K resolution. Since projectors often cast their image onto large surfaces, the more pixels the projector displays, the better it looks at visual detail. That said, true 4K resolution is currently prohibitively expensive for an “under $200” list.

The difference between 1080p and a resolution like 720p is quite drastic. With a difference of 1080 lines of pixel dots versus 720 lines of pixel dots, you will notice the difference, especially if you’re projecting large. Generally, a substantive price difference separates the standard resolution brackets. So unless you are dedicated to getting the most portable projector out there, the choice should generally come down to budget vs. resolution. Go for the 1080p model unless image quality really isn’t important to you.

Read the fine print

Yeah, you want to believe that companies are being transparent about their products, but there’s a lot of bluster in the budget projector market. Often companies will claim their product supports HD in a header, then reveal that it has a native resolution of 720p, accepting HD video and downscaling it. It’s important to fully examine the specs of the projector you’re considering purchasing to ensure that it’s really the right one for you.

Keystone effect

Keystone correction refers to the illusion that’s created when your projector casts a square image onto a wall at an angle, creating a trapezoid. The shape created looks like the crowning keystone a mason would use to construct an arch. 

Today’s projectors compensate for the keystone effect by including a control that skews the image. This control usually takes the shape of a ring or nob by the focus control. Keystone correction can also be added digitally. 

Some projectors are better at keystone correction than others. But all projectors can benefit from supplementing keystone compensation with proper alignment of the projector against the wall. For permanent installation, getting the projector alignment right the first time is usually a good idea. Whether your projector will be installed permanently, or be moved around the house (or beyond), it’s worth understanding Keystone controls before you make a final decision.

Screen or wall?

Screens can make a huge difference in the image quality you get from your projector. Painted walls often contain more bumps and crevasses than you would expect. Not only do projector screens deliver a flat uniform surface, but they also often come primed with materials that help your projector do its work. Some projectors ship with a screen in the package. Many others would benefit from one. It’s worth considering whether you want to invest in a projector screen.

Luminance

Most of the time, projectors with the highest luminance are better than others for most users. Since projectors work by casting light onto a wall, higher luminance equals a brighter, more visible image, that will show up in half-light settings and on surfaces that aren’t primed for contrast. Usually, companies describe luminance in terms of lumens, which is the International System of Units standard for measuring total light emission over a unit of time. Sometimes, projectors advertise their brightness using the term “ANSI lumens,” a (generally) more accurate metric created by the American National Standards Institute for measuring total light emitted from a projector. While ANSI lumens aren’t directly convertible to lumens without accounting for a few additional factors (such as room temperature and surface color), 400 ANSI lumens roughly translates to a little under 1000 lumens. For this article, we prioritized higher luminance in most cases.

Picture quality and definition 

We’re in the era of 4K, and while a 4K resolution projector is rarely achievable for less than $200 (though we’ve got some great choices starting at $500), HD has become the bottom line in most cases. Many projectors still offer less than 1080p resolutions, and some are still worth considering, especially if you’re stumping for ultra-portability (or ultra-cheap prices). Still, most of the time, 1080p HD is the baseline we look for in a model designed for watching content. It creates a detailed image that does justice to your Criterion Collection binges. Definition isn’t the whole story, though: some projectors warp or blur image edges, skewing the picture. Other factors like contrast and color reproduction can also affect quality. This list prioritizes projectors that achieve image quality that displays the worlds you escape in how the director (or game designer) envisioned them.

Connectivity

At the sub-$200 price point, most projectors use HDMI cables for video connection. A few offer WiFi connections to supplement this. A few even offer Bluetooth connectivity. I factored in a projector’s connection offerings when I evaluated it and highlighted any that stand out from the crowd.

FAQs

Q: Which brand is best for projectors?

At the sub-$200 price point, DBPOWER is the most all-around capable projector. You also get solid support along with your purchase. 

Q: What should I look for in a good projector?

Great projectors under $200 offer solid brightness, which usually delivers 5,000 lumens and up, HD video, good connectivity, and reliable customer service. 

Q: How many lumens do I need for outdoor projector?

No projector can keep up with the luminance of the sun. Projectors that deliver the maximum possible lumens do the best outdoors; in the under $200 category, look for projectors that deliver 7,000 lumens and up, and 9,000-9,500 would be best.

Q: How many lumens is a good projector?

Certain mini portable projectors that emphasize small size can justify low brightness and still qualify as good quality. However, generally, 5,000 lumens and up makes a good projector brightness.

Q: What are the best projectors under $100?

The Vamvo Mini Movie Projector dishes up lean, mean video for under $100. With HD video, 3,5005-lumen brightness, and good connectivity, it’s a steal.

Q: What projectors under $200 work well with PS5?

The WiMiUS S26 Projector is a powerful gamer-ready projector. Its impressive video does justice to the PlayStation 5’s graphics. At just under $200, it’s a great choice. If you’re moving up to the PS5, though, you might want to consider larger, albeit more expensive projectors, or you’re just wasting all that next-gen game engine.

Q: How long does a projector last?

While so many components factor into the lifespan of your tech. Companies often advertise the lifespan of the LEDs or other light sources that power their projectors. Some are primed to last for 10 years, while others may only deliver about a year.

Final thoughts on the best projectors under $200

The best projectors under $200 offer tuned combinations of value and performance. You’ll find HD video, bright high-lumen LEDs, and solid connectivity at the price point. You can also find ultra-mini projectors capable of projecting from a phone or tablet and easily fit into a shirt pocket. For one of the best value projectors around, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector delivers good video and brightness at a super-budget price. The Wsky HD Projector, with its impressive LED tech, is our favorite for home theater, though you might want to pair it with external speakers. DBPOWER, on the other hand, was the clear choice for the overall best projector under $200 for its HD video, good brightness, connectivity, and a customer service plan and warranty that goes far beyond most on this list. Whatever you pick, enjoy the new dimensions of video and picture quality that your projector will bring to your home media. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best trekking poles of 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-trekking-poles/ Tue, 13 Sep 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=469199
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

The best tools for keeping you upright on all manner of hikes, treks, and scrambles.

The post The best trekking poles of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole. Black Diamond Alpine FLZ
SEE IT

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole.

Best carbon fiber These MSR poles feature a “Dynalock” mechanism that shores up their durability.
MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon
SEE IT

The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles.

Best aluminum Leki Makalu Lite Leki Makalu Lite
SEE IT

The Leki Makalu Lite will hold up through months-long treks over all sorts of terrain.

Many dedicated backpackers consider a quality pair of trekking poles essential gear for hiking. They help you hike and keep your balance over steep hills, rocky paths, and slippery snow-covered trails. Like their predecessor, the humble walking stick, a quality pair of hiking poles are sturdy enough to put your entire weight on them, yet light enough that they do not feel like a burden after a long day on the trail. They ease the strain on your knees and back, especially if you’re carrying a heavy pack. There are a dizzying number of poles to choose from. They’re made from different materials, feature different designs, and, of course, some are more expensive than others. We’ve tried a whole bunch of popular options, taking them on runs, hikes, climbs, and scrambles to find the best trekking poles for all your outdoor adventures.

How we picked the best trekking poles 

I’ve been writing about outdoor gear and my often dubious adventure travel for decades at publications like Hearst, HuffPost, BBC Travel, Fodor’s, Adventure Cycling, Input, and many others. My criteria for experiencing new places usually include how many people visit (the fewer the better), and if it has a reputation as a “challenging” journey. Over the years, I’ve traveled across all kinds of terrain and environments, many of which required a good set of trekking poles to navigate.

I’ve spent a good deal of time testing trekking poles—walking, running, climbing, scrambling, and sometimes falling—all over the world. Over the years, I’ve found a few favorites. I’ve also compared notes and talked for hours with trekkers, hikers, and adventurers about gear around countless campfires and well-worn tables in questionable bars.

The best trekking poles: Reviews & Recommendations

Like most outdoor gear, trekking pole preference can vary from person to person. Given that, our recommendations span a variety of options made from different materials and covering a wide range of prices. All of them, however, have a clear edge over similar poles in important qualities like durability and weight.

Best overall: Black Diamond Alpine FLZ

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a highly versatile pole that packs down small, making it a prime choice for all kinds of activities.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 43, 49, or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14, 15, or 16 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trail baskets, snow baskets, rubber tips (sold separately)

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Comfortable handles
  • Packable

Cons

  • Heavy

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is an incredibly versatile trekking pole. The small packable size and durable aluminum construction make it an optimal pole for most everything including rugged trekking, multi-day backpacking, steep hiking, and even backcountry skiing. The cork handles become increasingly more comfortable over time as well as a secondary foam grip.

While a telescoping pole is inherently stronger than a foldable one, I’ve found the Alpine FLZ holds up extremely well in a variety of precarious situations including nefarious water crossings and muddy sheer drop-offs. They feature Black Diamond’s patented Flicklock pro locking mechanism, which uses a lever to secure the pole length with an inner adjustable tension dial that requires a small Allen key to adjust.

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is far from the fanciest pair of trekking poles out there but has proven that it can get the job done in difficult situations, and feels comfortable on easy trail hikes.

Best carbon fiber: MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon

MSR

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles that work for a wide variety of adventures.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 47 inches or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14.25 inches or 17.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Winter and summer baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable grip
  • Versatile
  • Small pack size

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy for a carbon pole

My friend Ben has been almost everywhere on the globe and he always travels with his MSR Dynalock Ascent carbon poles, which he considers an extension of himself and one of the best gear spurges he’s ever made (it may also be the only one).

The Dynalock Ascent poles have comfortable, contoured foam grip handles and padded straps. Each one folds down to a very packable 14.25-17 inches, depending on which size you get. Unlike most other poles where most of the tips are sold separately, these come with both winter and summer basket tips. 

They also feature MSR’s signature Dynalock mechanism, which consists of a thick aluminum lever and an inner metal dial that allows you to tighten or loosen with ease as well as providing exceptional sturdiness. It also locks each section into place with metal buttons on the sides. As someone who often has “Final Destination”-type scenarios running through my brain, I appreciate both of these components. 

REI

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Leki Makalu Lite is one of the most durable poles I’ve tried.

Specs

  • Weight: 17.3 ounces
  • Maximum length: 54 inches
  • Collapsed length: 26 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, summer basket

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Extremely durable
  • Moderate price

Cons

  • Large packed size

If you’re planning to use your trekking poles on a weeks-long adventure, Leki’s Makalu Lite poles are among the most durable we’ve found. Despite the name, they’re slightly thicker than most other poles, making them tremendously strong, as well as fairly heavy.

The Makalu Lite features Leki’s very comfortable “Aergon Air” grip—a cork design with a hollow core and wide support at a lightly tilted ergonomic angle. Like all Leki poles, these use the company’s durable “Speed Lock” system, which combines a lever lock with a small dial to tighten spring tension by hand.

A pair of Makalu Lites is overkill for your average day hike, but their durability is worth the extra weight on a long trip where you’ll traverse mountains or glacial ice for weeks or months.

Best for hiking: Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork is an incredibly sturdy carbon pole with a very comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 24 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips and trail baskets included; snow baskets sold separately

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Excellent locking mechanism
  • Durable

Cons

  • Not as packable as other options
  • Expensive

I prefer cork handles over rubber and foam because they mold to your hands over time so, eventually, feel like a seamless extension of your body. The cork handles on Black Diamond’s Alpine carbon poles are quite comfortable right out of the box and improve exponentially over time. Like most trekking poles, they have a secondary foam grip beneath the handles, which gives you a comfortable place to grab when you need to lower your grip, as well as wide wrist straps.

They are amazingly durable and sturdy for a carbon pole, thanks to their thicker shafts and Black Diamond’s patented “Flicklock” mechanism, which flips into place with a robust snap. The “Flicklock” system has its disadvantages: The locking mechanism requires a tiny Allen key to adjust, which isn’t ideal since it’s easily misplaced. Not being the most graceful person, (especially when hiking) I routinely get my poles stuck between boulders requiring intense back-and-forth movement to dislodge. Despite this, I have yet to break them.

The collapsed length of these poles means they’re not well-suited to be stowed in a backpack during a technical climb but for most activities, including trekking over rock and snow in remote regions of the world, these poles are a solid choice that will last for years.

Best for backpacking: Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork is a solid, affordable option that’s durable enough to handle most backpacking trips.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 27 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trekking baskets, and snow baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Versatile
  • Reasonable mid-range price

Cons

  • Doesn’t pack down as small as other options

Black Diamond’s Trail Ergo Cork trekking poles are a great pick for new hikers. They’re sturdy, comfortable, and reliable—a great fit for most backpacking and thru-hiking. Plus, at less than $150, they don’t cost a fortune.

 The cork handles are tilted forward slightly for a more natural, ergonomic wrist alignment. They also have padded straps and a foam secondary grip, making them easy to hold. Like the other Black Diamond hiking poles on our list, these feature the company’s patented “Flicklock” system, ensuring they don’t come loose while you’re walking.

Collapsing to a fairly large 27 inches, they are longer than the majority of other poles when packed away. Unless you’re taking them on a plane, though, that probably shouldn’t be too much of an issue.

Best ultralight: Gossamer Gear LT5 Three Piece Carbon

gossamer gear

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Gossamer Gear LT5 is one of the lightest trekking poles available.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.6 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 23.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Ultralight
  • Extremely durable for their weight

Cons

  • Expensive

For situations where every ounce (or even gram) counts, the ultralight Gossamer Gear LT5 carbon trekking poles streamline your experience better than any other poles. Despite weighing less than 11 ounces, they’re incredibly durable. I used them on a multi-week thru-hike over mixed terrain through a good portion of northern Spain one summer where I was intent on carrying as little weight as possible, both emotionally and physically, and they didn’t let me down.

The twist-lock mechanism is easy to set; you simply rotate the sections for a secure lock. The wrist straps sport comfortable padding and the EVA foam handles have proven to be comfortable enough (though I am partial to cork handles).

The LT5s also serve as great support for ultralight tents that use trekking poles as part of the structure, thus providing a super lightweight sleep system.

Best budget: Trekology Trek-Z

TREKOLOGY

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Trekology Trek-Z is an incredibly inexpensive pole that doesn’t sacrifice comfort or durability.

Specs

  • Weight: 26 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 15 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide, rubber, snow baskets, mud stops, rubber feet

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Durable
  • Folds down small

Cons

  • Heavy

Made from aerospace-grade 7075 aluminum alloy, the Trekology Trek-Z is an inexpensive pair of poles that come complete with carbide tips, rubber tips, snow baskets, mud stops, and rubber feet, making them highly adaptable and a huge bargain. They feature a metal flip-lock mechanism that’s easy to operate, though you may not use it often since they offer a very limited 7-inch range. They do collapse into a very compact 15-inch package, though.

For less than $50, the Trek-Z is one of the most affordable poles we’ve seen. Unsurprisingly, they’re also among the heaviest. We wouldn’t recommend them for alpine climbing, mountain running, or speed hiking, where you want to be quick and nimble. For those sticking to the trail and not too concerned about their performance, they’re an excellent option for not a lot of money.

One thing to keep in mind: Trekology makes a new “Trek-Z 2.0” with EVA foam grips instead of cork. In general, I prefer cork grips because of the material’s moldable properties, so we’re sticking with the original. Just keep in mind that it may become harder to find in the coming months.

What to consider when buying trekking poles

Finding the perfect trekking pole can be a daunting task. As with all outdoor gear, there are a variety of options to consider. More often than not, finding the “best” choice requires you to balance different strengths and weaknesses based on your personal needs and taste. The lightest trekking poles will rarely be the absolute sturdiest. The strongest poles will likely not be the most packable. To help you figure out what you need, let’s talk about the most important elements of any trekking pole set.

Sizing up your poles

Trekking poles come in different lengths so that any person can find a pair that feels right. At standing position, the grip of the pole should line up with your elbow or, more precisely, with your hands when your elbows are bent at a 90-degree angle. If you’re shopping at home, look for poles that are adjustable to within 20-24 inches shorter than you. For example, I’m 5 feet 6 inches, or 66 inches, so I want poles that you can set to a height between 42-46 inches.

Most modern trekking poles are adjustable to some degree, so there’s a lot of wiggle room if you aren’t sure about what will feel right. Some companies also make fixed-height poles, as they are technically stronger. All of our recommendations are adjustable, though, as we find them to be much more versatile than fixed-length poles. In general, I usually shorten my poles when ascending a steep incline and lengthen them when descending. Collapsible and foldable trekking poles allow the user to change the overall length of the pole as the terrain and situation merit.

Collapsible poles feature a telescoping design, where increasingly narrow sections slide and fit inside each other. Foldable poles have a reinforced cord running through them that holds the sections together when pulled apart while allowing them to fold—like the pole technology used in most lightweight tents. 

Telescoping poles will be stronger than their foldable counterparts because, in most cases, the pole overlaps and slides into itself at a greater distance than foldable ones. A fixed-length pole will be the most durable option, though, as there are no weak points or breaks in the shaft. Many poles now feature one telescoping section coupled with two folding sections to offer more precise adjustment options.

Pole material

Most trekking poles are made from either high-grade aluminum or carbon fiber. Carbon fiber produces a lighter pole, while sacrificing a bit of durability. Under intense stress, a carbon fiber pole will likely snap. Aluminum poles, by contrast, will usually bend before they break, giving you a bit of a warning that you should navigate out of that particular situation right away if at all possible. 

If you’re looking for speed and/or the ability to go long distances, a carbon pole is probably your best choice. If you’re okay with a slightly heavier pole (and we’re usually talking ounces here, not pounds), an aluminum pole may be a better fit for difficult terrain and will last a bit longer.

Check the grip

You’re going to spend a long time holding your trekking poles’ grips, so you want to make sure that they’re comfortable. You should take a look at the grip and, ideally, give it a squeeze to see how it feels in your hand.

Most pole grips are made from cork, foam, or rubber. I prefer cork because the material molds to the shape of your hand over time. Grips made with EVA foam are also often quite comfortable and weigh a bit less than cork. Rubber grips absorb shock exceptionally well, but can get sticky and cause blisters when it’s hot and humid out.

Tips

Trekking poles come with different kinds of tips on the end, which can help you move across different kinds of terrain. Many poles, including our recommendations, either come with multiple sets of pole tips or give you the opportunity to buy alternate tips or replacements when you need them. (You should replace your tips every 1,500-2,000 miles.) Most pole tips have a screw-on mechanism, so it’s easy to change them on the fly, so it’s nice to have multiple options on your trip. Here are some of the most common choices:

Rubber tips provide extra grip on wet surfaces, as well as shock absorption on paved surfaces. Since they’re softer and less pointy, rubber tips don’t tear up trails as much as carbide tips, but also don’t provide as much traction.

Carbide tips are extremely durable. They don’t wear down as quickly as rubber versions. With a sharper point, they grip well on rock, dirt, and ice, allowing you to really dig into surfaces. They’ll also rip up soft dirt, so they may damage hiking trails.

Rubber feet have a shape that resembles a small foot. With a wider footprint, they allow you to move faster without losing your balance.

Mud baskets attach a few inches above the tip of your poles and prevent your poles from sinking down too far into soft, muddy earth. They can also prevent some of the mud from splattering onto your calves. Like carbide tips, though, they can damage plant life on trails, so you should reserve them for appropriate terrain.

Snow baskets are a wider version of mud baskets made for snow. They function like snowshoes, keeping your poles near the surface of deep snow.

Locking mechanism

If you follow my lead and go with adjustable poles, you should take a closer look at how it opens and closes. Most adjustable trekking poles feature a locking mechanism with a lever that opens or closes to slide the pole length up or down, coupled with a push button lock or spring-loaded twist lock. Many also include an inner dial in the lever to increase or decrease tension. When considering a pole, check to make sure it’s easy to adjust the poles and operate the lock with or without gloves. If you buy poles that require special tools to change spring tension, make sure those are included. You want a pole that you can easily adjust when out on the trail but also locks securely.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best trekking poles cost?

Most trekking poles cost $50-$250, depending on what they’re made from, versatility, comfort, durability, and weight. Generally speaking, the lighter the pole, the higher the price tag. When choosing hiking poles, remember that they need to be light enough to lift and carry all day without tiring you out on a hike, but strong enough to support your body weight.

Q: Where do I recycle my trekking poles?

If they are in good working condition without structural damage, you can often recycle a pair of trekking poles through a gear trade-in program like the one offered by REI. If they aren’t reusable, you can put aluminum poles out with your household metal recycling.

Carbon fiber trekking poles aren’t recyclable. There are companies who are developing ways to recycle it, but it’s not a process that is easy or currently available to the general public.

Q: Are trekking poles bad for trails?

Trekking poles can be bad for trails as they have the potential to tear up soft soil and damage plants growing along the trailside. Pay close attention to where you place your poles, and stick to hiking best practices, including the following:

Don’t use your poles when you don’t need them. Use rubber tips as much as possible. In an area with tense vegetation, avoid using baskets that will rip up plant life. And finally, make sure to leave no trace.

Q: Do carbon fiber trekking poles break?

Carbon trekking poles can break, though it’s usually a result of extreme pressure. It doesn’t happen often enough for them to be considered unsafe. 

Originally developed for the aerospace industry, carbon fiber is lightweight, strong, and stiff made from woven fibers held together with resin. It is stronger than even steel of the same thickness while also being much lighter which is why it’s used to make things like trekking poles and bicycles.

Final thoughts on the best trekking poles

Outdoor gear companies are always finding ways to build sturdier, lighter trekking poles, but I find that you don’t need to get too worried about the particulars. As long as you get a pair that’s sturdy, comfortable to hold, and light enough to use all day, you shouldn’t worry too much about optimizing for the “best” experience. More than anything, you want something reliable. All of the poles included here are durable and comfortable with the potential to be that favorite piece of gear you don’t leave for an adventure without.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best trekking poles of 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>